11 
 
 
 rf California! 
 Regional 
 Facility
 
 (Tfcr 
 
 *>^^ 
 
 
 ZJ£> 
 
 
 zny 
 
 (Or* 
 
 hey 
 
 
 ^LOS 
 
 1 
 
 55 
 
 
 £5 \ A"** i ° -! 
 
 Hi! 11 
 
 *3 
 
 ' — 
 
 
 
 
 iSli il 
 
 \k M 
 
 
 (7fc! 
 
 
 ^LOSANGEU 
 
 0A.ILI BR. 
 
 U b
 
 ^J^sps 
 
 fr/i/vu/u-r our'. 
 
 
 7 Taykrjcujp. 
 
 T7r?.IiJ>T.
 
 ANEW 
 
 DIRECTORY 
 
 FOR THE 
 
 EAST-INDIES: 
 
 CONTAINING, 
 
 I. The firir. Difcoveries made in the 
 Eaft-Indies by European Voyagers 
 and Travellers. 
 
 II." The Origin, Conftru&ion, and 
 Application of Nautical and Hydro- 
 graphical Charts. 
 
 III. The natural Caufes, and ob- 
 ferved Phenomena, of the con- 
 front and variable Winds, Trade- 
 Winds, Monfoons, and Currents, 
 throughout the Eaft-India Oceans 
 and Seas. 
 
 | IV. A Defcription of the Sea Coafts, 
 
 Iflands, Rocks, Harbours, Shoals, 
 Sands, Sea-marks, Soundings, &c. 
 in the Oriental Navigation. 
 
 V. Directions for navigating in the 
 Eaft-India Seas, to the beft Ad- 
 vantage, at different Times of the 
 Year. 
 
 VI. Directions for failing to and 
 from the Eaft-Indies, as recom- 
 mended and pradtiied by expe- 
 rienced Navigators and Mariners. 
 
 THE WHOLE BEING 
 
 A Work originally begun upon the Plan of the ORIENTAL NEPfUNE, 
 
 AUGMENTED and IMPROVED 
 
 By Mr. WILL. BERBER?, Mr. WILL. NICHELSON, and Others ; 
 
 AND NOW 
 
 METHODISED, CORRECTED, and further ENLARGED, 
 
 B Y 
 
 SAMUEL DUN N, 
 
 Teacher of the Mathematical Sciences, London. 
 
 SIXTH EDITION. 
 
 To which is added an APPENDIX. 
 
 — — .i.jm imnm... ■ _ 
 
 LONDON: 
 Printed for Meffrs. Gilbert and Wright, N? 148, LeadcnhaB Street. 
 
 M DC CX C I.
 
 -< 
 
 in 
 
 o 
 
 CD 
 
 I CO) 
 
 I 
 
 Q 
 
 (-/ nv 
 
 T O 
 
 THE HONOURABLE 
 
 THE 
 
 COURT of DIRECTORS 
 
 O F T H E 
 
 United Company of Merchants of England, 
 
 Trading to the E^ST-INDIES, 
 
 THIS WORK 
 
 IS MOSTHUMBLY INSCRIBED, 
 
 BY THE EDITOR, 
 
 SAMUEL D U N N. 

 
 R E F A C I 
 
 d\.S Geography is a defcription of the Earth, fo Hydrography is a defcriptioti 
 of the Oceans and Seas, with all the things appertaining to them ; fuch as 
 the coafts, rocks, fhoals, fands, foundings, currents, winds, calms ; and 
 whatever elfe is incident to that great afTemblage of waters, which is bounded 
 by the fea-fhores, throughout the world. 
 
 In the fcience of Hydrography, the principal places near the fea coafts arc 
 laid down in maps and charts, from accurate aftronomical pbfervations ; 
 and the interjacent places are delineated by furveys and draughts taken on the 
 fpot ; the foundings or uneven depths of the fea s, are meafured ; the currc 
 are obferved ; the conftant and variable winds, at different times and places, 
 are noted ; and finally, the knowledge of thele, and whatever elfe is incident 
 to the track or path in which a fhip is to be conducted, being attained, it is 
 applied for facilitating voyages, from the fhorter ones to thole of the moll 
 diftant places. 
 
 In the prefent Treat ife, the fcience of Hydrography is treated in the following 
 order, namely : 
 
 i ft. An historical account is given of the voyages that were made by 
 Europeans, in order to dilcover the Eaft-Indies ; who the p'erfons were, and 
 the fteps, from time to time, by which the difcoveries were made. 
 
 2d. The reafons for forming hydrographical charts, the principles on which 
 they are constructed, their life, and the improvements that have been made in 
 them by the hydrographers of different European Countries. 
 
 3d. The caufe of the winds that are either conftant or variable ; the 
 trade-winds and monfoons ; with a large account of them as they are found 
 at fea, over all the oceans that are palled, in voyages to, from, and throughout, 
 the Eaft-Indies. 
 
 4th. An ample defcription of the currents, as they are found in thofe 
 oceans and leas; with the caufe of their formation, changes, and alteration. 
 
 5th. A defcription of the coafts throughout the Eaft-Indies, and other 
 places touched at by the Eaft-India ftiips ; together with an account of 
 the hills, fea-marks, rocks, Ihoals, fands, foundings, tides, 6zc. that are 
 ntctflary to be known, ill order either to prevent ftiips from being loft in 
 thole kas, or from prolonging their voyages. 
 
 b 6th.
 
 il PREFACE.- 
 
 6th. A particular account of the advantages and difadvantages to be expected 
 from the winds, weather, and other caufes, at different places of tho e oceans,. 
 and at different fealbns of the year. 
 
 7th. A large collection of general and particular directions, for failing to, 
 in, throughout, and from, the Indian Seas, to the greateft advantage, as 
 found by the experience of the be ft navigators. 
 
 As this work hath already gone through feveral imprefiions, and the prefent 
 edition contains whatever was of confequence in the former, it may be 
 neceftary to give fbme account of it here. 
 
 The fourth edition, printed in 1775., contains whatever was in any of 
 the former editions ; and confifts of thefe parts. 
 
 1 ft. A new Directory for the Eaft-Indies, with general and particular 
 directions, for the navigation of thofe feas ; wherein the French Neptune 
 Oriental has been chiefly confidcred and examined : with additions, corrections, 
 and explanatory notes, by William Herbert, Hydrographer. The fourth 
 edition with additions, 1775. 
 
 2. Sundry remarks and obfervations made in a voyage to the Eaft-Indies, 
 
 on board his Majefty's fhip Elizabeth, from the beginning of the year 1758, 
 
 to the latter end of the year 1764 : with the necefiary directions for failing 
 
 to and from India, and in the feveral ports and harbours thereof. Being a 
 
 J ment to the New Directory for the Eaft-Indies. By William 
 
 lckeLson, Mafter of the faid fhip. The fecond edition, with additions, 
 
 3rd. An account of the conftant and periodical trade- winds, or monfoons, 
 the land and fea breezes, and the variable winds : together with an account 
 of the fetting of the currents, and the ftrength of them, as they moll 
 commonly happen in the different parts of the Eaft-Indies. The whole 
 illuftrated by examples taken from the journals of feveral European and Country 
 ftiips ; {hewing the reafon why fome have made their paflages, whilft others 
 in the fame feafon (or perhaps at the fame time) have loft, or at leaft prolonged 
 theirs. Bv Philo-Nauticus. The fecond edition, 1774. 
 
 4th. ' An account of the Swift Grab's track, from Bencoolen toward the 
 Seychelles Mantis ; in which fhe fell in with the fhoals, and Iflands of Chagos ; 
 determining the fituation of tho r e dangers more exactly than heretofore known. 
 By Captain Thomas Neale, Commander of the faid Grab. In a letter to 
 
 r. William Herbert, late Editor of the New Directory for the Eaft-Indies, 
 
 *77S- 
 
 As
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 1.1 
 
 As the work was thus compofed, not only at different tin";. . by 
 
 different perfons, writing on different parts of this fubject, each foll< ■ . i'ng 
 one another, and endeavouring to fupply the defects of the former, it -awv/ 
 be fuppo ed that the reading in the former editions was difcontinued through 
 the feveral parts of the whole ; and that an arrangement of the, (eve lI 
 fubjecls, in a methodical and natural order, would make it more til 
 and perfect. 
 
 The Proprietor of this Treatife, having committed to my care this alteration 
 with other improvements, I have ufed my utmoil diligence and attention herein; 
 and hope a companion with the former editions, will give the Readei i 
 fatisfketion in every thing that relates to me as the Editor. 
 
 From the improvements mentioned in my Treatife of Magnetic Variations', 
 it was the more eafy for me to judge what expreilions, or numbers, for the 
 variation of the compais in this Treatife, were proper to be retained ; and wl 
 alterations were necefiary, where the variation has altered conliderably, fince 
 thefe works were firft. publiihed. Without this, a retention of the former 
 number for the variations, would have made this work very imperfect. 
 
 In fettling the longitudes of places mentioned in this Treatife, I have confulted 
 the befr authorities, and raoft authentic aftronomical obfervations ; and fuppofed 
 the prime or firft meridian, to be that palling through St. Paul's, London, 
 (from which it has been long a cudom on board Engiiih fhips to reckon the 
 longitude at lea, and probably will continue lb) : but, feeing that the tables i:i 
 the Nautical Ephemeris are adapted to the meridian of Greenwich, and 
 Greenwich is nearly 6 minutes of a degree of longitude eaff of London, it will 
 be necefiary to make that allowance, in reducing the longitude from the meri- 
 dian of one of thofe places to that of the other. 
 
 The Charts which are appendant to this work, are publiffied under the 
 following title ; namely, A New Directory for the Eaff-Indks, containiuo- 
 general and particular chart*:, of the oceans, feas, ffraits, coafrs, iflands, cape?, 
 gulfs, bays, harbours, rocks, lands, foundings, <?cc. necefiary to be known in 
 failing to, from, and throughout, the Eall-lndies. The whole (originally begun 
 and carried on from the mod: approved charts and plans, by Mr. W. Herbert, 
 Mr. W. NrcHEiSON, and Others) much improved and augmented by Samuel 
 Dunn, Teacher of the Mathematical Sciences, London. 
 
 The prefent Edition, being the Sixth, is printed for William Gilbert, fuc- 
 cefior to Mr. Henry Gregory, who has fpared no Expcnce in. correcting the 
 former Charts, and alio added feveral new ones. Thofe of Mr. Robe ttbn's 
 
 b 2 deferred
 
 IV 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 defcribed in the Appendix to this Work, may alfo be had together or 
 feparate. 
 
 By examining the former impreffions, both of the letter-prefs and copper- 
 plates, belonging to this work, it appears that Mr. Herbert had been ftrictly 
 attentive to the belt, publications that had been made, both in our own country 
 and abroad, before he began this work ; in particular, that the works of that 
 truly ingenious author, M. D'Apres.de Maunevillette, had been clofely 
 confulted by him ; and that he was (from his own obfervations and experien e) 
 able to make additions thereto : and that the errors of other hydographers, of 
 an earlier date, were too erroneous to be trufted to and followed by him. 
 
 Mr. Nichelibn's remarks and obfervations in his voyages to the Eaft-Indies, 
 contained a great quantity of fea knowledge, and delerved much attention. 
 The communications by Philo-Nauticus were of great fervice for fettling the 
 "be ft times for navigating in the Indian Seas. Laftly, the journal of Capt. Neale 
 determined the lituation of the Mahe or Seychelle Iflands, the Baffos de Chagos-, 
 and feveral other places, whole fituations before were imperfectly known, but 
 now are laid down corre&ly enough for the ufe of navigators. 
 
 It being defigned to prefervc every thing of confequence in this, that hath 
 been in the former Editions, and two of thole four authors having delivered a 
 preface to their parts reflectively, it may not be improper to give account of 
 them here. 
 
 iff. The whole of Mr. Herbert's preface is incorporated into the beginning 
 of this Treat ife. 
 
 2d. Mr. Nichelibn in his preface mentions, that, beiides his having ufed the 
 fea in many other different parts of the world, he was leven years in the Indian 
 leas, and applied himlelf ftrictly to the making of obfervations, charts, draughts, 
 and improvements ; that, from thefe applications, he had been able to give fuch 
 defcriptions of Bombay, Trinkamalay Bay, St. A ugui tine's Bay, Table Bay, 
 Manilla, and other places, as had never appeared before in any of the Eaft-India 
 Directories. 
 
 In treating of the Ihip's reckoningby the courfe and diftance failed, he confiders 
 it of confequence to have the log-line and half-minute glals duly proportioned to 
 each other ; that, if the glals runs 30 feconds, the divrahce between knot and 
 knot Ihould be 50 feet ; that, if it runs 28 feconds, the diftance Ihould be 46^- 
 feet ; and that there mould be due care in heaving the log, or errors may ariie 
 thej * -ay confiderably afFecl the reckoning. 
 
 In
 
 PREFACE. v 
 
 la treating of the variation, he fays, that the variation in an extenfive navigation 
 is as certain a guide as the fun and moon ; and that many fatal conlequences have 
 befallen ftnps in the India trade, in'' not paying due attention to it. He doth 
 not mean the method of taking the longitude at fc.\, by the help of the fun and 
 moon ; becaufe that method hath been much improved fince his writing. 
 
 His preface concludes, with taking notice of an abfurd practice at fea, of 
 navigators keeping their fliips (when in the wide ocean) as cloie to the 
 wind as they can, with their fails as fharp trimmed as they can make 
 them, whereby they will not go above 3 or 4 knots ; whereas, by keeping 
 the (hip a point further from vhe wind, fhe would make Ids Ice-way, and almoft 
 double her diftance. 
 
 3d. Philo-Nauticus hath prefixed no preface to his part of this work. 
 4th. The whole of .Captain Neale's Journal is here given, except the hourly 
 courles and distances failed by the compafs and log. 
 
 As this work now (lands, it may oe conlidered as conliiting of two principal 
 parts : die firft containing the Hydographical Inftitutes, relative to the Eaft- 
 India navigation ; and the fecond, general and particular diredions for failing to, 
 throughout, and from, the Eaft-Indie<s, by help of thofe Inftitutes, fo as to avoid 
 dangers, and perform voyages in the (horteft time with fafety. 
 
 Theft are divided into other lefs general heads, or chapters, which are net 
 numbered, but entitled only ; and, together with the right-hand title of each 
 page, are for mewing what the fubjedt is, at every part throughout the work. 
 
 Thefe general heads, or chapters, are fubdivided into lections, which are 
 numbered in a fuccellive order, and entitled according to the fubjed or matter 
 treated of in them. 
 
 The navigator or mariner, who would make the be ft ufe of this Treatife, 
 either at fea, remote from land, or near the coafts, mould be ready at the pradice 
 of navigation, and attentively ftudy fuch parts of it as relate to the places where 
 he happens to be. 
 
 By that art, under the lateft improvements, he may determine (to a tolerable 
 degree of exadt net's) the fituation or place of the (hip, and therefrom be able to 
 ju.l ye of the accidents peculiar to the climate, at different feafons of the year. 
 
 By the fame art, he may approach the coaft with lefs hazard than he would 
 otherwife be fubjed to ; and avoid the dangers in his way, at places where there 
 are no pilots, or where they cannot be had to affift him. 
 
 To
 
 VI 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 To this Edition great care has been taken in correcting all Typographical 
 Errors of the former Editions, to which is annexed an Appendix, c< ntaining, 
 
 Firft, A Short Account of a Paffage frpm China late in the Sea on, down the 
 China Seas, through the Southern Natuna Iflands, along the Weft Coaft of 
 Borneo, through the Straits of L'illiton, or Clements Straits, to the Straits of 
 of Sunda, and an Account of the Straits of Allafs, by Mr. Ceo. Robertfon. 
 
 Secondly, An Extract from Lieut. M c Cluer's Survey (by Order of the Eaft 
 India Compauy in 1787 and 1788) of and about Bombay Harbour. 
 
 Thirdly, An Account of the Gulf of Cambay, by William Auguilus Skynner. 
 
 Fourthly, Capt. Taylor's Remarks in the Ship Ceres. 
 
 Fifthly, A New and mo ft Correct Alphabetical Table of Latitudes and 
 Longitudes of Places, chiefly taken from thofe in the la ft publication f Mr. 
 George Robertfon, entitled, Memoir of a Chart of the China Sea, &c. and the 
 corrected Edition of the Requilite Tables, published by the Board of Longitude, 
 to which is added the Latitudes and Longitude, with the Variations of the 
 Compafs, obferved on a Paffage from Bombay to England in 1784, alio in a 
 Voj^age in 1788, to the Coaft of Guinea, in his Majefty's Ship Adventure, 
 likewile in his Majefty's- Ship Marlborough, from Nov. 17-90 to Feb. 1791, i:\ 
 a Voyage to Barbadoes, and other Obfervations made in different Parts of the 
 Enpliih and Irifh Channels, in the Years 1790 and 1791, by Mr. Charles 
 Roberts, of the Royal Navy. 
 
 CONTENTS.
 
 CONTENT 
 
 S. 
 
 Section I. Paire i. 
 
 OF the firft \ from Europe to- 
 
 ward the Eall-Indies. 
 
 Sect. II. Page 4. 
 
 Of the firft Difcoveries on the Weft 
 Coaft of Africa. 
 
 Sect. III. Page 5. 
 
 Of the firft Difcovt ries near C'pe Good 
 Hope, and the South Coatt or ..-itrica. 
 
 Si.ct. IV. Page 7. 
 
 Of the firft Difcoveries on the Eaft 
 Cbaft of Africa. 
 
 Sect. V. Page 10. 
 
 Of the firft Difcoveries oji the Malabar 
 
 Cua.l. 
 
 Sect. VI. Page 13. 
 Of the Confi.rucr.ion of Sea-Charts. 
 
 Sect. VII. Page 15. 
 
 Of the firft Meridians of Places, from 
 which Longitude begins to be reckoned. 
 
 Sect VIII. Page 17. 
 
 Of the Bearings of Places in the Eaft- 
 Indies. 
 
 Sect. IX. Page 23. 
 
 The ConftruclLn and Caufe of the 
 Winds, as they depend immediately on 
 the Action of the S..n. 
 
 Sect. X. Page 23. 
 
 Of the apparent diurnal Motion of 
 the Sun. 
 
 Sect. XI. Page 24. 
 
 Of the perpetual Trade- Winds, that 
 blow from Eaft to Weft, .n the Ton id 
 Zone. 
 
 Sect. XII. Page 25. 
 
 Why the Winds blow north-weftwardly 
 or fouth-weftwardly ; alfo, the Caufe of 
 Calms at particular Places in the Oceans. 
 
 Sect. XIII. Page 26. 
 
 Of Winds from 30 to 50 Degrees of 
 North or South Latitude. 
 
 Sect. XIV. Page 26. 
 
 Of the Line in which the Winds (Tuft 
 theml elves, without the Torrid Zone. 
 
 Sect. XV. Page 27. 
 
 A general Account of the Trade-Winds, 
 and their fhifting ; by Dr. Halley., 
 
 Sect. XVI. Page 29. 
 
 Of the Shifting Trade-Winds, and their 
 Dependence on the Sun's Declination ; 
 and how they are in the Arabian Sea. 
 
 Sect. XVII. Page 30. 
 
 How the South and North-weftern 
 Monfoons are relpecftivcly regulated in 
 the Arabian Sea. 
 
 Sect. XVIII. Page 34. 
 
 How the Shifting Winds, or Monfoons, 
 are propagated in the Bay of Bengal and 
 the China Seas. 
 
 Sec r.
 
 Vlll 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Sect. XIX. Page 35. 
 
 Of the Winds which are contrary to 
 the Trade-Winds and Monfbons ; or 
 which are adverfe to the general Eafterly 
 Winds, and are perpetual. 
 
 Of the confiant Trade-Winds, Monfbons, 
 periodical 'Trade-Winds, Land and Sea 
 Breezes, and variable Winds, that com- 
 monly blow in the Eaft-Indies. 
 
 Sect. XX. Page 37. 
 
 Of the conftant South-Eaft Trade- 
 Wind in the India Seas. 
 
 Sect. XXI. Page 38. 
 
 Of the periodical Trade- Winds, or 
 Monfbons, in the India Seas. 
 
 Sect. XXII. Page 38. 
 
 Of the fair and rainy Seafons in the 
 Ipdia Seas. 
 
 Sect. XXIII. Page 38. 
 
 Of the Changing of the Monfbons in 
 the India Seas. 
 
 Sect. XXIV. Page 39. 
 
 Of the Land and Sea Breezes in the 
 India Seas. 
 
 Sr.cT. XXV. Page 39. 
 
 Of the variable Winds in the India 
 Seas, Mdacca Straits, 'the Perfian Gulf, 
 and Red Sea. 
 
 Sect. XXVI. Page 39. 
 
 Of the South-Weft Monfoon in the 
 India Seas. 
 
 Sect. XXVII. Page 40. 
 
 Of the North- Eaft Monfbons in the In- 
 dia S--i. 
 
 Sect XXVIII. Page 40. 
 
 Of the Monfoons in the Strait of Ma- 
 lacca. 
 
 Sect. XXIX. Page 40. 
 
 Of the South- Fait and North-Weft 
 Monfoohs in die India Seas. 
 
 Sect, XXX. Pace 
 
 40. 
 
 Of Land and Sea Breezes in the Ma- 
 lacca Straits. 
 
 Sect. XXXI. Page 41. 
 
 Of Land and S.a Ereezes on the Ma- 
 labar, Guzurat, and Guadel Coafts. 
 
 Sect. XXXII. Page 42. 
 
 Of the North- Weft Winds on the 
 Coaft of Malacca. 
 
 Sect. XXXIII. Pa^e 42. 
 
 Of Land and Sea Breezes in the Bay 
 of Bengal. 
 
 Sect. XXXIV. Page 42. 
 
 Of the Land Squalls from Bengal to 
 Zeloan. 
 
 Sect. XXXV. Page 42. 
 Of Land Squalls, caftward to China. 
 
 Sect. XXXVI. Pa 2 e 
 
 43- 
 
 Of the variable Winds in the India 
 Seas, at different Times of the Year. 
 
 Sect. XXXVII. Page 44. 
 Of the Winds in the China Seas. 
 
 Sect. XXXVIII. Page 44. 
 
 Of the Winds in the Red Sea, and 
 Perfian Gulf, at different Times of the 
 
 Year. 
 
 Sect.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Vi 
 
 Sect. XXXIX. Page 44. 
 
 Of Storms and great Calms in the In- °f Monfoons andCap-ents, near th 
 dia Seas. 
 
 Sect. XL. Page 45. 
 
 Of Storms and great Calms in the 
 North Part of the Bay of Bengal. 
 
 Sect. XLI. Page 46. 
 
 Of Storms and great Calms in the 
 South Part of the Bay of Bengal. 
 
 Sect. XLII. Page 46. 
 
 Of Storms and great Calms in the 
 China Seas. 
 
 Sect. XLIII. Page 47. 
 
 Of Calms near the Equinoctial Line 
 in the India Seas. 
 
 Of the Monfoons near the Coqft of Malabar. 
 
 Sect. XLIV. Page 47. 
 
 Of the Setting-in of the North-Eaft 
 Monfoon, near the Coaft of Malabar. 
 
 Sect. XLV. Page 4 8. 
 
 Of Land and Sea Breezes near the 
 Coaft of Malabar. 
 
 Sect. XLVI. Page 48. 
 Of Currents near the Malabar Coaft. 
 
 Sect. XLVII. Page 49. 
 
 Of Sailing up the Coaft of Malabar- 
 to Advantage. 
 
 Sect. XLVill. Page 50. 
 Of Stretching off the Coaft of Malabar. 
 
 Sect. XL1X. Page 50.' 
 
 Of the Setting-in of the South-Weft 
 Monfoons, near the Coaft of Malabar. 
 
 
 Sect. L. 
 
 ..... 
 
 ' 
 
 5- 
 
 Of the Nbrth-Eafl I bon, near ^:e 
 Coafts of Malabar and Coromandel. 
 
 Sect. LI. Page 53. 
 
 Of the North-Eaft -Monfoon, near the 
 Coaft of Zeloan. 
 
 Sect. LII. Page $■$. 
 
 Of the North-Eaft Monfoon, in the 
 Gulf of Manara. 
 
 Sect. LIII. Page 53. 
 
 Of making a PafTage to Bengal or 
 Coromandel. 
 
 Sect. LIV. Page 54. 
 
 Of a Pafiage near the South Coaft of 
 Zelcan, from March to Odober. 
 
 Sect. LV 
 
 Page S5- 
 
 Of a Pafiage near the North-Eaft Coaft 
 of Zeloan, in May, June, July, Auguil, 
 September, and October. 
 
 Of the Monfoons and Currents near the Coaft 
 of Coromandel. 
 
 Sect. LVI. 
 
 Page $6. 
 
 Of the South-Weft Monfoon, near the 
 Coalt of Coromandel. 
 
 Sect. LV1I. Page 57. 
 
 Of the Setting-in of the North-Eaft 
 Monfoon, near the Coaft of Coromandel. 
 
 Sect, LVIII. Page 58. 
 
 ^ Of the North-Eaft Monfoon, near the 
 Coaft ot Coromandel. . 
 
 A general
 
 X 
 
 C O N T E N T S. 
 
 vara! Account of tie Monfoons near the 
 Coaji of Coromandel, aha other Places 
 in the Bay of Bengal. 
 
 Sect. LIX. Page 62. 
 
 Of the Weftern Monfoon, near the 
 Coaft of Coromandel. 
 
 Sect. LX. Page 64. 
 
 Of the Eaftern Monfoon, near the 
 Coaft of Coromandel. 
 
 Sect. LXI. Page 66. 
 
 Of Monfoons in the China Seas, and 
 Dear the Philippine lflands. 
 
 Of Currents in the Eaft-India Seas. 
 
 Sect. LXII. Page 67. 
 
 Of Currents in general, in the India 
 Seas. 
 
 Sect. LXIII. Page 68. 
 
 Of Currents near the Coafts of Africa, 
 Arabia, the Red Sea, Perfian Gulf, and 
 Guadel Coaft. 
 
 Sect. LXIV. Page 6 S. 
 
 Of Currents near the Coaft of Guzurat, 
 round to Bombay. 
 
 Sect. LXV. Page 68. 
 Of Currents near the Malabar Coaft. 
 
 Sect. LXVL Page 68. 
 Of Currents in Tuttacareen Bay. 
 
 Sect. LXVII. Page 68. 
 Of Currents near the Ifland Zeloan. 
 
 Sect. LXV1II. Page 69. 
 
 Of Currents near the Coafts of Coro- 
 mandel, Golconda, and Orixa. 
 
 Sect. LXIX. Page 69. 
 
 Of Currents near the Coaft of Bengal, 
 from Balafore to Chittigong. 
 
 Sect. LXX. Page 69. 
 Of Currents near the Coaft < racan. 
 
 Sect. LXXI. Page 69. 
 Of Currents near the Coaft of Pegu. 
 
 Sect. LXXII. Page 69. 
 Of Currents near the Coaft of TanaiTai; 
 
 Sect. LXXIII. Page 70. 
 
 Of Currents in the Bay of Bengal, 
 from September to Chriftmas. , 
 
 Sect. LXX1V. Page 70. 
 Of Currents in the Straits of Malacca. 
 
 Sect. LXXV. Page 70. 
 
 Of Currents near the Weft Coaft of 
 Sumatra and Java. 
 
 Sect. LXXVI. Page 70. 
 
 Of Currents in the Straits of Sunda. 
 
 Sect. LXXVI!. Page 70. 
 
 Of Currents in the Straits of Banca, 
 Bay of Siam, the Coaft of China, Cam- 
 bodia, Sec. 
 
 Sect. LXXVIII. Page 70. 
 Of Currents in the China Seas. 
 
 Sect. LXXIX. Page 71. 
 
 Of the Quantity of Currents in the 
 
 India Seas. 
 
 Sect. LXXX. Pagje 71. 
 
 Of Currents in the Straits of Malacca, 
 Banca, and Sunda. 
 
 Sect. LXXXI. Page 71. 
 
 Of Currents near the Weft Coaft or 
 Sumatra and Java. 
 
 Sect. LXXXil. Page 71. 
 
 Of Currents in the Bay of bengal, 
 from April 1 ■ ber. 
 
 cT.LXXXin, Page 72. 
 Of Currents near Zeloan. 
 
 r. LXXXIV. Page 72. 
 
 Cf Currents between the Coa Ls of 
 Africa and Ma!: 
 
 Sect.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 ■ 
 
 • Sect. LXXXV. Page y 3 . 
 Of Currents in the Perfian Gulf. 
 
 Sect. LXXXVI. Page 73. 
 Qi" Currents ini the Red Sea. 
 
 A Defmptioh of the Eaft Coaft of Africa, 
 fr. E : iioclial. to the Strain of 
 
 Babd-Mandel. 
 
 Sect. LXXXVII. Page y 3 . 
 Of the River dos Fugos. 
 
 Sect. LXXXIX. Page 74. 
 Of Cape Baffes. 
 
 Sect. XC. Page 74. 
 Of Cape del Gada, or de la Goada. 
 
 Sect. XCI. Page 74. 
 Of Cape Dorfni. 
 
 Sect. XCIf. Page y$. 
 Of Cane Guardafui. 
 
 Sect. XCIII. Page y 5 . 
 Of Cape Mount Felix. 
 
 Sect. XCIV. Page y 5 . 
 Of Cape St. Peter. 
 
 Sect. XCV. Page y6. 
 Of the Ifland Mette. 
 
 Sect. XCV/I. Page 76. 
 
 Of Burnt or White Ifland. 
 
 Sect. XCVII. Page' "6. 
 
 Of Cane Aden. 
 
 Sect. XCVIII. Page 77. 
 Of Cape St. Anthony. 
 
 Sect. XCIX. Page yy. 
 Of Cape Babel-Mandel. 
 
 Sect. C. Page yy.- 
 Of Babcf-Mandel Strait. 
 
 Sect. CI. Page 78. 
 Of Mocha Road. 
 
 Of the Coafts of Arabia and Perfia. 
 
 Sect. CII. Page 78. 
 
 Of the Winds and Currents near the 
 Coafts of Arabia and Perfia. 
 
 Sect. CIII. Page 79. 
 Of Maculla Bay. 
 
 Sect. CIV. Page 79. 
 Of Shahar Point. 
 
 fua. 
 
 Sect. CV. Page 80. 
 Of Cape Boccouas-Hova, or Bbgath- 
 
 Sect. CVI. Pa-e 80. 
 
 Of KiiTen or Kaifun Point, and Cape 
 Fortuack. 
 
 Sect. CVil. Page 80. 
 Of Capes Doffar and Moribat. 
 
 Sect. CVIII. Page 81. 
 
 Of the Ifland Soccatra. 
 
 Of the Coaft of Arabia from Curia Muria 
 to Cape Rofalgat. 
 
 Sect. CIX. Pa ? e 82. 
 
 Of the Coaft of Arabia. 
 
 Sect. CX. Page 82. 
 Of Cape Rofalgat. 
 
 S^ct. CXI. PageS-. 
 Of Cape Muikatta or fVlufljat. 
 
 Of the Coaft of Perfia, 
 
 Sect. CXII. Page 82. 
 
 Of Cape Jafques or James. 
 
 Sect.'CXIII. Page 83. 
 Of Cape Guadel or Goadel. 
 
 c 2 
 
 Sect.
 
 Xn 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Sect. CXIV. Page 84. 
 Of Sandy River. 
 
 Sect. CXV. Page 84. 
 Of the Coaft of Guzurat. 
 
 Sect. CXVI. Page 84. 
 Of Diu, and Point Courba. 
 
 Sect. CXVII. Page 85. 
 Of Peratn Ifle, and Gogo. 
 
 Of the Coaft from Point de Gall, or Gaula, 
 on the Ifland Zeloan, to Surat. 
 
 Sect. CXVIII. Page 85. 
 Of Poin: de Gall, or Gaula. 
 
 Sect. CXIX. Page 86. 
 Of Winds and Currents near Point de 
 Gall. 
 
 Sect. CXX. Page 86. 
 OfCapeComorin,and PointCadiapatam 
 
 Sect. CXXI. Page 87. 
 Of the Ifland Enciam, the River 
 Tangaypatnam, and Point Veniam. 
 
 Sect. CXXII. Page 88. 
 Of Winds on the Coafls of Malabar, 
 Canara, &c. 
 
 Sect. CXXII1. Page 88. 
 
 Of Anjanga, Coiflan, and Coehien. 
 
 Sect. CXXIV. Page 90. 
 Of Cranganor, Peniana, and Callicut. 
 
 Sect. C XXV. Page 91. 
 Of Mahe, Moelan, and Tiilichery. 
 
 Sect. CXXVI. Page 92. 
 
 Of Cananor, Mount Dilla, and Mani- 
 
 :■ . r. 
 
 Of the Coaji of Canara. 
 
 Sect. CXXVII. Page 92. 
 OfSt.1 I Hand, and Pigeon Ifland. 
 
 ; C V I ■■ Page 93. 
 OfCartfar,an l the [flaodsoi , dive. 
 
 Of the Coaft of Decani 
 
 Sect. CXXIX. Page 94. 
 
 Of Cape Ramas, Serpent Iflands, and 
 Goada, or Alguada Fort. 
 
 Sect. CXXX. Page 94. 
 Of Goa, and the Burnt Iflands. 
 
 Of the Coaft of Concnn. 
 
 Sect. CXXXI. Page 95. 
 Of the Points Vigiador and Ixdruc 
 
 Sect. CXXXII. Page 95. 
 Of the Angrian Corfairs. 
 
 Sect. CXXX1II. Page 95. 
 Of Geitapour, or Rajapour. 
 Sect. CXXXIV. Page 96. 
 
 Of the Bar ef Choul, and Coulaha 
 
 Ifland. 
 
 Sect. CXXXV. Page 97. 
 
 Of Bombay, Bacaim, or Bafleen, and 
 abas. 
 
 Sect. CXXXVI. Page 9 S. 
 
 Of Cape St. John, the Road of Surat, 
 and Surat. 
 
 Of the Laccadive Iflands. 
 
 Sect. CXXXVII. Page 99. 
 Of the Laccadive Iflands. 
 
 Sect. CXXXVIII. Page 90. 
 Of the Ifland Seuhelipar, and Calpenia. 
 
 Sect. CXXXIX. Page ico. 
 
 Of Malique Ifland. 
 
 Sect. CXL. Page 103. 
 
 Of the Banks of Chcrbaniang, and 
 Padua. 
 
 Of the Laccadive Iflands, aiid the Chan- 
 nels bei weett tht ■ 
 
 Sect. CXLI. Page 104. 
 
 Of the Iflands Seuheiipir, I' 
 and the Tei . e Chauj 
 
 E ECT»
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 xm 
 
 Sect. CXLII. Page 105. 
 
 Of the Iflands Calpenny, Kelay, and 
 Nine-degree Channel ; and Soundings 
 near Malabaa Coaft. 
 
 Of the Coaft of the lfland Zeloan, or 
 Ceylon. 
 
 Sect. CXLIII. Page 106. 
 
 Of Manara, Aripa, and the lfland 
 Caridien. 
 
 Sect. CXLIV. Page io3. 
 
 Of Point Calapeten, the River Chilo, 
 and Morabcl. 
 
 Sect. CXLV. Page 109. 
 
 Of the River Cayanel, Negombo, Co- 
 lombo, Galketrn, Panture, and Calitura. 
 
 Sect. CXLVI. Page no. 
 
 Of Barbertn lfland", Point Cocachiere, 
 and Ragamma. 
 
 Ssct. CXLVII. Page m. 
 
 Of Point de Gall, Gala, or Gaula and 
 Red Bay, in the lfland Zeloan. 
 
 Sect. CXLV1II. Page 112. 
 
 Of Matura River Dondre-Head, Gae- 
 lics Bay, and Dickwell. 
 
 Sect. CXLIX. Page 113. 
 Of the Bays of Nielwell and Coenacker, 
 Tangal Point, Waelue River, Mago 
 Point, and Elephant Hill. 
 
 Sect. CL. Page 114. 
 Of the Great BaiTes and Little Baffes. 
 
 Sect. CLI. Pa^e 116. 
 
 Of Julius Nave, the Point of Low 
 Bank, Aganis, Aregain, Poawegam, and 
 alo. 
 
 Sec r. CLII. Page 1 17. 
 
 Of the unequal Depths Eaftofthe lfland 
 Z .10:1/1 and \ ei deloos Bay. 
 
 s<. -r. Ci .111, i v ■ 117. 
 
 Of ' [Jbi is Point, 
 
 Tiincjuc to-Bay-, and Pig m lilaad. 
 
 Sect. CLIV. Page 11 3. 
 
 Of Rio-Cany, Molewall, Point Pedra, 
 and Karycal River. 
 
 Of the Coaft from Point Pcdra, the North 
 Point of Zeloan, to the Entrance of tbt 
 Ganges. 
 
 Sect. CLV. Page 1 19. 
 
 Of Canrmere Pagoda, Negapatnain, 
 and Karey-Kal River. 
 
 , Sect. CLV1. Page 121. 
 
 Of Trankabar, Cabripatnam, Trimi- 
 niv'as River, Coloran River, Porto Novo, 
 and Fort St. David. 
 
 Sect. CLVII. Page 123. 
 
 Of Pondicherry. 
 
 Sect. CLV1II. Pare 126. 
 
 ' r Conjimere, Alemparva, Sadras, the 
 Seven Pagodas, Couvelan, and Melia- 
 
 I ar - 
 
 Sect. CLIX. Page 127. 
 
 Of Madias or Fort St. George, the 
 Reef of Trifcu, the Bank and River of 
 Pullicut. 
 
 Sect. CLX. Page 129. 
 
 OfCircara-Hoeria, Armegon, Caletoer, 
 Divelan, Cerara, Gondegam, Montopoly, 
 and Petapoly. 
 
 Sect. CLXi. Page 131. 
 
 Of Point Divy, Malfulipatan, and 
 Narfapour. 
 
 Sect. CLXII. Page 132. 
 
 Of Point Godvarin, Narlipelle, Vatare, 
 Bimelipatnam, Ticacoel, Calreigapatnam, 
 and Alefare. 
 
 Sect. CLXIII, Page 134. 
 
 Of Pondy, Barva, Sommaveron, Kara- 
 par, ana Manikpatnatn. 
 
 Sect. CLXIV. Page 135. 
 
 Of jagranet Pagoda, the Black Pagoda, 
 Falie Point, and Point Pahniras. 
 
 Sect.
 
 
 CONTENTS- 
 
 Sect. CLXVv Page 138. 
 
 Of Ballafore Road, the Nelaxinse 
 Mountains, and Piply Road. 
 
 .' r -. Nichelfon's Defm) f the Co, \fts of 
 
 Malabar, Canara, Decun, and Concan. 
 
 Sect. CLXVI. Page 140. 
 Of Cape Comorin. 
 
 Sect. CLXVII. Page 141. 
 
 Of Point Cadinpatam, Two fmall 
 jflands, and a Rock. 
 
 Sect. CLXVIII. Page 141. 
 
 Of Coleche Bay, Ruttera Point, An- 
 janga, Quiloan, Porca,Cochin, and Panian. 
 
 Sect. CLXIX. Page 144. 
 
 Of Callicut, Tillechcny, Malie, Mount 
 Dilla, and Cananore. 
 
 Sect. CI, XX. Page 146. 
 
 Of Mangalore, Annanore, Baffalore, 
 the Permira, and St. Mary's Rocks. 
 
 Sect. CLXXI. Page 148. 
 
 Of Pigeon IOand, Hog I Hand, Anna- 
 1 Road, Anjedive [fie, Cape Raymas, 
 and St. George's Ifland. 
 
 Sect. CLXXII. Page 150. 
 
 Of Goa Road or Bav, Alguarda Fort, 
 the Anchorage, Tides, and Soundings. 
 
 Sect. CL:. . Page 152. 
 
 Of the la Rocks, Gariah, Raja- 
 
 Eons Debs and Z. 
 
 S- . -4. 
 
 C 1 . -Ra- 
 
 ands, 
 
 XXV. Page 157. 
 
 Of Point de Gall, and the Mountains 
 of Zeloan. 
 
 ct. CLXXVI. Page 1 . 
 Of W 1 -, iy I; 1 ; |, Red and Matura 
 
 Sect. CIXXVII. Page 159. 
 Of the Soundings between the Cuaft of 
 a and Great Bafles. 
 
 Sect. CLXXVIII. Page 161. 
 
 Of the Great Bailcs, the Elephant, Lit- 
 tle Balles, Chimney and Pagoda Hills. 
 
 Sect. CLXXIX. Page 163. 
 
 Of Julius Nave, the Frier's Hood, 
 Aguin Peak, and Batacalo River. 
 
 Sect. CLXXX._ Page 164. 
 
 Of Vendelos Bay, the Sugar-Loaf, 
 Provedien Me, Foul Point, Trinkama- 
 lay Bay, Pigeon Iiland, and Mole Wall. 
 
 Sect. CLXXXI. Page 166. 
 Of Point Pedra, and Negapamam. ' 
 
 Sect. CLXXXII. Page. 16S. 
 
 Of Calderocn, -Karycal, Trankabar, „ 
 and Porta Nova. 
 
 Sect. CLXXXIII. Page 171. 
 Of Fort St. David's, and Cuddalore. 
 
 Sect. CLXXXIV. Page 171. 
 
 Of Pondicherry, S.ulras, Alernpai va, 
 the Seven Pagodas, and St. Thomas. 
 
 Sect. CLXXXV. Page 174. 
 
 Of Madras or Fort St. George, and 
 Puilicat. 
 
 Of the ■ Arraken and Ava. (| ) 
 
 Sect, CLXXXVI. 1 6*. 
 
 Of the Eaflern Coaft of the Gulf or 
 Bay of 3-ngal, Arrakan River, and the 
 Le or Negrais [lies. 
 
 Sect. CLXXXVII. Page 14! . 
 
 Of the Coaft from the Negraille or 
 Negrais lfles, to Siriam River. 
 
 Sect. CLXXXVI II. Page 148 *. 
 
 Of the Andaman ides, and others, in 
 the Gulf of Bengal. 
 
 Sect. 
 
 ' ' ' I • I ked in * thus, p. 1 46 * 10 p. 1 7 5 
 ■ • error in the ] ing.
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 xv 
 
 Sect. CLXXXIX. Page 151 *. 
 Of the Nicobar Iflands. 
 
 S ct. CXC. Page 152*. 
 Of the N6rth Part of the Bay of Bengal. 
 
 OftheWeji Co ift fS imatra,£yCtf/>/.Manley 
 
 Sect. CXCI. Page 155 *. 
 
 Of Bencoolcn, Sillabar, Buffalo, and 
 Manna Points. 
 
 Of the Coaft, in Sailing from Bencoolen 
 toward Mocha-Mocha. 
 
 Sect. CXCII. Page ,157*. 
 
 Of Single Demoon Point, Catown, 
 and Siblat, Ippce, Bantall, 1 rederickett, 
 and Mocha- Mocha. 
 
 Of Iflands in the Indian Ocean, 
 
 Sect. CXIII. Page j S 9 *• 
 Of the Comero Iflands. 
 
 Sect. CXCiV. Page 161*. 
 
 Of the Baff'as de Palram, and Baffas de 
 Amber. 
 
 Sect. CXCV. Page 161 *. 
 Directions for Ships bound to Bombay. 
 
 Sect. CXCVT. Page 162* 
 
 Cautions to be obferved in Sailing 
 towad Bo. 1, bay. 
 
 Of th Sedfons, Winds, and U \iher\ He. 
 St. Aiiguftine's Bay; or 
 Madagafcar and the Continent.', in all 
 
 the .'■■ out s f the Tear. 
 
 S~ct. v XC VU. Page 1 6a*. 
 
 C I tiu V. mds a 1 Weither ; o the 
 Soui •- u-Eail Mohfooas-. 
 
 S.-cr.CX. MIL Page 164*. 
 
 01 '. 
 
 . CXCIX, : ' - :o 5 * 
 
 O . 
 
 CC. Page 167*. 
 
 c 
 
 Sect. CGI. Page 167 ' . 
 
 Capt. T tomas Meal's Account of 
 Pafiage, in the Swift Grab, from Ben- 
 coolen toward the Dalies de Chagos, and 
 the Seychelle Iflands. 
 
 Sect. CCII. Page 170. 
 
 An Abflract of the Swift Grab's Joura 1! . 
 from Bencoolen toward the Seycl 
 Iflands. 
 
 The be ft Methods and times for m 
 
 Ships from Port to Port in India, in 
 Confequence of the I Finds and Curie. 1 . 
 
 Sect. CCIII. Page 176. 
 
 From Bombay to the Red Sea, in 
 November and December. 
 
 Sect. CCIV. Page 176. 
 From Aden to Mocha. 
 
 Sect, CCV. Page 176. 
 
 From Bombay to the P.ed Sea, hi 
 January, February, March, arid April. 
 
 Sect. CC VI. Page 177. 
 From Mocha to Judda. 
 
 Sect. CC VII. Face 178. 
 From the Malabar Coaft to the Red 
 
 5ea. 
 
 Sect. CCVIII. Page 178. 
 From Surat and Bombay to Periia. 
 
 Sect. CCVIX. Page 179. 
 From the Malabar Cqaft to Peifia. 
 
 Sect.CCX. Page 18'b. 
 
 Of Working along Shore, near the 
 Coafts ot Malabar and Periia. 
 
 Sect. CCXI. Page 1 Si. 
 
 In the Gulf of Periia, from October to 
 March. 
 
 Sect. CCXII. Page 182. 
 
 The Cafe of the Graadifon, Ca^t. 
 FentOD, and others,
 
 XV 1 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Sect. CCXIil. Page 183. 
 From Bengal to the Coaft of^Coromafi- 
 del, &c. inAugufi September, October, 
 November, December, January, February, 
 March, and April. 
 
 "Sect.CCXIV. Page 189. 
 From Bengal to Surat and Bombay, in 
 Auguft, October, December, January, 
 and March. 
 
 Sect. CCXV. Page 198. 
 From the Coromandel Coaft to Ben- 
 gal, in January, February, March, April, 
 May, June, July, Auguft, September, 
 and October. 
 
 Sect. CCXVI. Page 207. 
 Of Voyages from the China Seas, and 
 other Eaftern Parts, to Bengal. 
 
 Mr. Nich el ftm's Account of a PaJa%efrom 
 Madrafs to and from the lftand "Diego 
 Rayes, or Rodrigues, in the South-Weft 
 
 ..." / Oil.' 
 
 Sect. CCXVII. Page 210. 
 Of the Paffage from Madrafs to the 
 Illand Rodrigues. 
 
 Sect. CCXVIII. Page 211. 
 A Defcription of the Ifland Rodrigues. 
 
 Sect. CCX1X. Page 215. 
 Return from Rodrigues to Madras. 
 
 Sect CCXX. Page 215. 
 Of a paffage from Madras to Trinka- 
 malay in the Ifland Ceylon, in order to 
 fhun the petty Monfoon. 
 
 Sect. CCXXI. Page 217. 
 The Method of making a Paffage from 
 Trinkamalay to Madras or any other part 
 of the Coaft of Coromandel, in the North- 
 1 ..ft Monfoon. 
 
 Sect. CCXXII. Page 217. 
 
 A Defcription of Trinkamalay Bay, 
 the Haibour of Back Bay, &c. 
 
 Sect. CCXXHI. Page 219. 
 -Directions for a Ship coming from the 
 fouthward., bound into Trinquemalay or 
 
 Trinkamalay Harbour. 
 
 Sect. CCXXIV. Page 220. 
 
 Directions for (hips coming from the 
 northward, and bound into 1 rinkamalay 
 Harbour. 
 
 Sect. CCXXV. Page 221. 
 
 ? larks for turning into Trinkamalay 
 Harbour. 
 
 Mr. Nichelfon's Directions for making a 
 
 Paffage from the Coaft r/Corom:m:'cl to 
 Bombay, in the South-Weft Monfoon. 
 
 Sect. CCXXVI. Page 224. 
 
 Of fhips ftretching off the Coaft nea 1 ' 
 Madras. 
 
 Sect. CCXXVII. Page 227. 
 
 Directions for Ships bound to the Ma- 
 labar Coaft from Acheen-Head. 
 
 Sect. CCXXVUI. Page 227. 
 
 Mr. Nichelfon's Defcription of the 
 Road and Harbour of Bombay. 
 
 Sect. CCXXIX. Page 223. 
 
 Inftruclions for knowing the Land 
 about Bombay Harbour. 
 
 Sect. CCXXX. Page 229. 
 
 Of the Dangers going into and out 
 of Bombay Harbour. 
 
 Sect. CCXXXI. Page 231. 
 
 Directions for a large Ship to round 
 the Roi of Old Woman's Ifland, into 
 Bombay Road and Harbour. 
 
 Sect. CCXXXII. Page 232. 
 
 Directions for turning into Bombay 
 Harbour. 
 
 Sect. CCXXXIII. Page 233. 
 
 Directions for {landing in toward the 
 Eaftern ihorc of Bombay Harbour. 
 
 Setc.
 
 C O N T E N 
 
 'V 
 
 X. II 
 
 Sect. CCXXXIV. Page 234. 
 
 Marks (or anchoring in Bombaj Har- 
 bour. 
 
 Sect. CCXXXV. Page 235. 
 Directions for Sailing out of Bombay 
 
 Harbour. 
 
 Sect, CCXXXVI. Page 236. 
 Marks for coming into Bombay Har- 
 bour in hazy Weather. 
 
 Sect. CCXXXVII. Page 237? 
 
 The fetting of the Tides, in and out of 
 Bombay Harbour. 
 
 Sect. CCXXXVIII. Page 237. 
 Of Wooding and Watering at Bomba} ■ 
 
 Sect. CCXXXIX. Page 238. 
 Of Provifions and Refreshments at Bom- 
 
 S ect.CC XL. Page 23 S. 
 Other Directions for knowing theLand, 
 going into Bombay Harbour. 
 
 Sect. CCXLI. Page 240. 
 
 Directions for (hips that are obliged to 
 fail from Bombay in the Time of the 
 South-Weft Monfoori, and bound to the 
 Souhvaard. 
 
 Sect. CCXLII. Page 243. 
 Directions for Vifiagapatam Road. 
 
 Sect. CCXLIII. Page 243. 
 
 Directions for rounding the Reef off 
 Point Pal miras, andfo into Ball afore Road, 
 by Night or Day by Captain Jonathan 
 Ranfon. . 
 
 Sect. CCXLIV. Page 246. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from Point de 
 Gail to Cape Gomorin, or from Cane Go- 
 morin, to Point deGall in either Morifoo.n. 
 Mr. Nichelfon. 
 
 Sect. CCXLV. Page 217. 
 
 Directions for Coafting along Zeloan, 
 fro:. I . 11 to Caltura, and crofting 
 
 froratb C pe'Comorin.jintheNorth- 
 
 EaftMonfoon. 
 
 d 
 
 Sect. CCXLi I. ' 
 ftions for fbips boui 
 bfCo 1 . 
 
 and the Co 
 
 Sect. CCXLV II. Page 2 . 
 
 Directions for Sailing row ' • 
 
 Indian Ocean, from the Nicobur If! 
 
 Sect. GCXLVHI. Page 250. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from the Coaft of 
 Coromandel to the Coaft of Malabar, Ma- 
 lacca, Batavia, and other Places. 
 
 Sect. CCXL1X. Page 251. 
 
 Dire6tions for Sailing from tire Coro- 
 mandel Coaft to Acheen. 
 
 Sect. CCL. Page 256. 
 
 Directions for Sailing to different Places 
 near the Gulf of Bengal, at different Sea- 
 fons of the Year. 
 
 Sect. CCLT. Page 259. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from the Coro- 
 mandel Coaft to Mergui, from the Be- 
 ginning of Auguft to the Middle of Sep- 
 tember. 
 
 Sect. CCLIL Page 263. 
 
 Directions tor Sailing into, and cominsr 
 out of, the Bay of King's Ifknd. 
 
 Sect. CCLIII. Paa-e 264. 
 
 Directions for Sailing to and horn 
 Mergui. 
 
 Sect. CCLIV. Page 2 '6. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from the Coro- 
 mandel Coaft to Mergui and Junk-Se'ilon, 
 
 in the North-Er.il M nl on. 
 
 Sect. CCLV. P:> 
 
 Directions for : idras to 
 
 Pegu, in the ind Great Moi-foons. 
 
 Sect. CCLV I. Page 272. 
 The Situation of Ouras. 
 
 General and Particular- DireB'wtsfi) S 
 to, in, and from, the Eafl- Indies. 
 Sect. CCLV II: Page 273. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from die Lizard 
 
 to
 
 XVJU 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 to the Ifland Madeira, the Canary Iflands, 
 Cape de Verde Iflands, and the Equi- 
 noctial Line. 
 
 Sect. CCLVT1L Page 273*. 
 Directions for Sailing into Porta-Praya 
 Road, in the Ifland St. Jago. 
 
 Sect. CCLIX. Page 274. 
 Directions for Sailing round the Cape 
 of Good Hope. 
 
 Sect. CCLX. Page 278. 
 Directions for going into Table Bay, 
 at the Cape of Good Hope. 
 
 Sect. CCLXI. Page 281. 
 Directions for Sailing into Simon's 
 Bay, on the Weftern Coaft of Falie Bay. 
 
 Sect. CCLX1I. Page 283. 
 Directions concerning the Cape of 
 Good Hope and the Southemmoft Part 
 of Africa. 
 
 Sect. CCLXIII. Page 2S3. 
 Directions for Sailing from off the 
 Cape of Good Hope, toward the Inner 
 Paflaee for India. 
 
 Sect. CCLXIV. Page 284. 
 Directions for proceeding toward the 
 Inner Paflage, or between Madagafcar 
 Africa. 
 
 Sect. CCLXV. Page 286. 
 Directions for avoiding the BalTas de 
 
 India, 
 
 Sect. CCLXVT. Page 288. 
 Directions for making the Land of 
 Madagafcar and St Auguftine's Bay. 
 
 Sect. CCLXVII. Page 289. 
 Directions for Sailing into St. Auguf- 
 's Bay. 
 Sect. CCLXVIII. Page 292. 
 
 Direalons for Ships that go the out- 
 India ; or for thofe that 
 d to China, through the Straits 
 
 ofLombock, Bally, or Sunda : as com- 
 municated to Mr. Nichclfon, by an expe- 
 rienced Eaft-India Commander. 
 
 Sect. CCLXIX. Page 294. 
 
 Directions for the Straits of Lombock ; 
 by the fame. 
 
 Sect. CCLXX. Page 295. 
 
 Directions for going through the Straits 
 of Bally ; by the fame. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXI. Page 297. 
 Directions for the Back of Banca. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXII. Page 297. 
 Directions for the Straits of Sunda. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXlIl. Page 298. 
 
 Directions for Ships bound to India, 
 or China, early in the Seafon. 
 
 Sect. CCLXX1V. Page 299. 
 
 Directions for Ships bound to India, 
 palling the Cape of Good Hope, late in 
 the Seafon. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXV. Page 300. 
 
 Directions for Sailing toward China, 
 through the Straits of Sunda, Banca, -&c. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXVI. Page 314. 
 
 Directions concerning a Sand to the 
 Weftward of the Two Brothers, on which 
 the Sandwich was a-ground in 1749-50. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXVII. Page 3 1 5. 
 Directions for the Straits of Banca. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXVIII. Page 320. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from the Straits 
 of Banca to Pulo Timoan. 
 
 Scct. CCLXXIX. Page 322. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from Pulo Con- 
 dcre toward China, to the Eaftw aid of the 
 Paracels. 
 
 S^ct. CCLXXX. rage 329. 
 Captain D'Auvergne's Account of the 
 Ship Scarborough linking on the 
 
 South
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 six 
 
 South Maroona, off the Coaft of Luconia, 
 September 12, 1748. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXXI. Page 331. 
 
 Directions for Sailing through the 
 Straits of Sunda, to Bantam, or Batavia, 
 in the Weftern Monfoon. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXXII. Page 333. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from Batavia to 
 the Straits of Banca. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXXIH. Page 333. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from Pulo Sapata 
 toward Canton in China, in the South- 
 Weft Monfoon, and back again in the 
 
 North-Eaft Monfoon. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXXIV. Page 334. 
 
 Prognoftic of a Tuffoon on the Coaft 
 of China. By Antonia Pafcal de Rofa, 
 a Portuguefe Pilot of Macao. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXXV. Page 335. 
 
 Directions for Sailing to Malacca from 
 the weftward, in the wefterly Monfoons. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXXVI. Page 342. 
 
 Directions for Voyages to Malacca, in 
 the Eafterly Monfoon. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXXVII. Page 345. 
 
 Directions for returning from Malacca 
 to the Coaft of Coromandcl, Bengal, and 
 other weftern Parts, at different Seafons 
 of the Year. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXXVIII. Page 346. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from Malacca 
 to Pulo Timoan, through Governor's 
 Straits, commonly called the Straits of 
 Sihcapour. 
 
 Sect. CCLXXXIX. Page 356. 
 
 Captain John Hallet's Directions for 
 Sailing through the Straits of Dryon. 
 
 Sect. CCXC. Page 353. 
 Directions for Sailing from Pulo Ti- 
 moan to Siam, in the Weftern Monfoons. 
 
 Sect. CCXCI. Page 3 6r. 
 Directions for returning fn n to 
 
 Pulo Timoan, in the Eafterri Mont- 
 
 Sect. CCXCII. Page 362. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from Pulo Ti- 
 moan to Pulo Condore, in the Weftern 
 Monfoons. 
 
 Sect. CCXCIII. Page 363. 
 Directions concerning Pulo Condore. 
 
 Sect. CCXCIV. Page 367. 
 
 Directions for Sailing in the Wefterly 
 Monfoons, from Siam to the River of 
 Cambodia, Tonquin, and China, to the 
 Weftward of the Paracels, along the 
 Coaft of Cambodia, Tiiompa, and 
 Cochinchina. 
 
 Sect. CCXCV. Page 379. 
 
 Directions concerning the Iflands lying 
 off* the Coaft of Tiiompa. 
 
 Sect. CCXCVI. Page 381. 
 
 Directions concerning the Coafts of 
 Tfiompa and Cochinchina. 
 
 Sect. CCXCVII. Page 386. 
 
 Directions for the Paflage to China, 
 between the Bland Hai-Nan and the 
 Paracels. 
 
 Sect CCXCVIII. Page 389. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from the Bland 
 Sanciam, or St. John's, to Amoy ; with 
 the Defcription of the Coaft of China, 
 from one to the other. 
 
 Page 302. 
 
 Sect. CCXCIX. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from Madras to 
 Manilla, through the Straits of Malacca, 
 in the South-Welt Monfoon. By Mr. 
 Nichelfon. 
 
 Sect. CCC. Pa«e 413. 
 
 Directions for Ships boafod to Manilla, 
 crofting the China Seas. 
 
 Sect.
 
 XX 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Sect. CCCI. Page 419. 
 
 Direct i.. g from Manilla to 
 
 the Sti Sinca] ir and Malacca, in 
 
 the North-Eaft Monlbon. - 
 
 Sect. CCCII. Page 430. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from China to 
 
 India, or Europe, through the Straits or 
 Sunda. 
 
 Sect. CCCHI. Page 438. 
 
 Directions for Sailing from Bombay, 
 or Surat, for China, through the Straits 
 of Malacca. 
 
 Sect. CCCIV. Page 439. 
 
 Remarks made in Sailing from Bom- 
 bay to the Cape of Good Hope through 
 the Inner Paffage, or between Madagaf- 
 car and the Coaft of Africa, By Mr. 
 jn. 
 
 Sect. CCCV. Page 446. 
 
 Directions for Siding from the Cape of 
 Good Hope to the Iflands St. Helena, 
 Afcenfio'n, and from thence toward the 
 Brhiih Channel. By the fame. 
 
 Sect. CCCVI. Page 451. 
 Directions to be obferved coming into 
 the Englifh Channel. By the fame. 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 A'fhort A count of a Paffage fron 
 China, &c. Page 455. 
 
 Remarks for Gafpar Paffage, by Mr. 
 Robertfon. Page .160. 
 
 Remarks after pafling the SE Point of 
 Banka, &c Page 462. 
 
 Strait of Alias. Page 465. 
 
 Account' of Bombay Ifland and Har- 
 bour, by Mr. M Cluer. Page 467. 
 
 Directions for navigating the Gulph 
 of Cambay, by W. Auguftus Skynner. 
 Page 472. 
 
 Capt. Taylor's Remarks in the Ship 
 Ceres. Page 476. 
 
 Remarks on the Monfoon in the Bay 
 of Bengal. Page 482. 
 
 A New correct. Table of Latitudes and 
 Longitudes. Page 484. , 
 
 A Table of Latitudes and Lcn. 
 with the Variations of the Compais, &c. 
 Page 493. 
 
 Obfervations of the Varitions of the 
 Ccmpafs near Land, &c. Page 495.
 
 A NEW 
 
 DIRECTORY 
 
 FOR THE 
 
 EAST INDIES, 
 
 &c. 
 
 I. Of the frjl Voyages from Europe toward the East Indies. 
 
 -DEFORE the time the Portuguefe had doubled the Cape of Good-Hope, 
 the advantage which a trade with the Eaftern nations in India would bring to 
 Europe was little known ; and till that time they had only ventured along the 
 coafts : the great difficulty which they imagined might happen in traverfingthe 
 vaft Eaftern Ocean, made them abandon the projects which they had formed of 
 vifiting thefe foreign places. 
 
 Thofe nations who had their own intereft moft in view, were contented with 
 drawing to themfelves the profit of the trade carried on with Afia, by means 
 of the Red Sea, and the Perfiaa Gulf. Alexandria by this means was a very 
 flourilhing place; out of the ruins of which, Venice has fmce been raifed from 
 a fmall hamlet to one of the moft opulent ftates in Europe : there went yearly 
 large fleets from thence to the coafts of Afia Minor and Egypt, where the Eaftern 
 traders began to enjoy the great gains which they found arife from the exchange 
 
 B 
 
 given
 
 2 A AVw Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 given for their goods by the weftern people. That wife republic, being convinced 
 that fhe owed all her wealth to the fituation of the place, and fleets which were 
 yearly fent out, took all the pahis poffible to improve it, and in time eftablifhed 
 it fo well, as to oppofe the force of feveral powers joined together, at different 
 times, with a defign to deftroy it. 
 
 As the riches of India fpread themfelves over Europe, Europeans became 
 defirous of having lettlements in a country, wherein Nature feemed prodigal in 
 all things that might fatisfy mankind. 
 
 The compafs being now in ufe, emboldened the mariner to leave the coafr; 
 and being certain to return back to the fame place, he foon got the better of the 
 obftacles which (according to the general opinion) ferved as hindrances to the 
 ancients. 
 
 Some Normans and Bifcayans having ventured to the Canary IfTands, about 
 the end of the 14th century, and given an account of the beauty and fertility of 
 them, a defire for new difcoveries became general. Excited by this motive, 
 John de Bethencourt, accompanied by feveral other Normans, in the year 1401, 
 ranged the coaft of Africa, as far as beyond Cape Non, made a defcent on the 
 ifland Lacerotta, conquered and fortified it, but rinding himfelf too weak to 
 fubdue the reft, returned to France to afk for affiftance. At that time, (about 
 the end of the reign of Charles VI. and during that of Charles VII.) the troubles 
 ■which were in the kingdom filled their minds, and they could not undertake a 
 foreign expedition. Seeing then his endeavours were in vain, he addrefled 
 himfelf to Henry III. of Caftile, who fupplied him with fufficient force to carry 
 on his project, to get the fovereignty of thefe iflands, and the title of king, upon 
 condition that he and his fucceflbrs fhould do homage to the crown of Caftile. 
 
 While the chief maritime powers of Europe were lofing, by their divifions 
 and wars, the advantages which might have been got by new fettlements abroad ;■ 
 Portugal, one of the moft inconfiderable among them, put herfelf in a good 
 condition to profit by it. Thev, as well as Spain, were long a prey to the 
 incurfions of the Moors. This power was delivered firft from them, carrying 
 their victorious arms even into thofe barbarous nations. 
 
 The infant Don Henry III. fon of John I. king of Portugal, taking 
 advantage of thefe favourable circumflances, laid the foundation of the glory 
 which in after-ages his nation fo defervedly gained. This prince was not 
 only dii'tinguiihcd from other men by his fuperior genius, but alfo by his 
 virtue and bravery : his love for the fciences evidently appeared, by his 
 encouraging men of learning with his favour and libcrallity. He founded 
 
 feveral
 
 Of the fir jl Voyages from Europe toward the East-Indies. 3 
 
 feveral Academies for the inftru&iori of youth, and gave part of his revenue 
 for their fupport : in fhort, never did prince mew himfelf more attached to 
 the love of arts and fciences than he did. Far from employing the leiiure 
 hours which the tranquility of his kingdom afforded him, in pleufure and 
 diverfions, he betook himfelf to ftudies of different kinds, of which mathe- 
 matics was the chief. He quitted the court that he might give himfelf up 
 entirely to fcience, retired to one of his country leats, near the little town of 
 Sagres, by Cape St. Vincent, and being accompanied by learned men, he 
 executed all the projects which he had before begun, endeavouring chiefly to 
 perfect himfelf in navigation. The notions which he had of geography, 
 together with the converfation of fome Moors, who had penetrated very far 
 into Africa, gave him a very favourable opinion of the fettlements that might be 
 made on thefe coafls. Full of thefe hopes, the prince thought he could do no 
 better for his kingdom, which was confined within very narrow limits, than to 
 increafe his power and wealth by new difcoveries, and foreign fettlements. 
 Thefe advantages, however great they might appear, were not the only ones 
 which determined him : animated with a zeal for his religion, he was glad of 
 an opportunity to propagate it, by converting many millions from Idolatry and 
 Mahometanifm. 
 
 The great ignorance of navigators at that time was the leaft obftacle which 
 that prince got the better of. In order to difpofe their minds for enterprifes cf 
 this kind, he was under the neceffity of deftroying their notions of the globe 
 being divided into five zones, which do&rine the ancient geographers had 
 eftablifhed. Between thefe zones, they reckoned only two temperate or habi- 
 table ; they thought thofe near the poles were inacceffible, by reafon of the great 
 cold at all times ; and the torrid zone as a region of fire, where all was burnt up 
 by the heat of the fun. This opinion, however ridiculous it now appears, 
 was then the eftablifhed doctrine : from thence proceeded the fears, and chime- 
 rical notions, which prevented them from making new difcoveries. Notwith- 
 ftanding the pains he took to get good feamen and the beft of pilots, yet moft of 
 them, intimidated by the leaft appearance of danger, returned home ; others 
 contented themfelves with landing on the coaft of AfricJ, on this fide Cape Non, 
 where they ended their voyage: fo that he faw himfelf fruftrated, for feveral 
 years, in the hopes he had entertained of the fuccefs of his enterprife. But 
 this did not make him quit his defign, nor difcontinue mildnefs towards his 
 captaixis; concealing his difcontent, he encouraged them by his promifes. 
 
 B 2 II. Of
 
 4 <d New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 II. Of the firfi Difcoveries on the West Coast of Africa. 
 
 In the year 141 8, chance, more than {kill or the courage of the feamen, made 
 a difcovery of the ifland Porto Sanclo. John Gonzales Zarco, and Triftan Vaz, 
 gentlemen of the infant's houfehold, fet fail for doubling Cape Eajador ; but a 
 temped drove them off the coaft, and threw them upon this ifland, to which 
 they gave the name of Porto Sandto after they landed, by reafon of its affording 
 them fhelter when they thought themfelves near loft. The news of this difco- 
 very foon reached Portugal, and gave great joy. During their flay at Porto 
 Sanifto they difcovered Madeira, which lies near it ; and they were fent to take 
 pofleflion of it. The largenefs and the fertility of the latter made them give it 
 the preference: they fent people to inhabit it; alio beafts, fugar-canes, and 
 Malmfey vines. The care which was taken for the eftablifhrnent of thefc 
 iflands, was the caufe of the delay of thofe on the coaft of Africa, beyond Cape 
 Bajador, which Gilles Anes doubled in the year 1433. Seven years after that, 
 Anthony Gonzales, and Nugno Triftan, landed at Cape Blanco. Thofe that 
 afterwards went beyor.d this, by their difcoveries overcame the prepofleflions 
 ' of the 'people about the impoflibility of penetrating into the torrid zone. The 
 great gain they had made with the people of thefe countries, appeafed the mur- 
 murs of feveral of the members of the government, who were already refolved 
 to abandon thefe enterprifes, becaufe, without any profit to the government, it 
 had coft immenfe fums. 
 
 In all times fuch perfons have been found enemies to new fchemes, whatever 
 profit might be expected from them : thofe who fix their minds on the imme- 
 diate fuccefs of their enterprifes, count as nothing the diftant fruits which 
 may be reaped from them. Many ftates have been reduced by a miftaken 
 policy, and brought to the neceflity of carrying, even to their enemies, part 
 of thofe riches, which they might have kept, if they had had courage and 
 conftancy. Don Henry, without minding the reafons which they employed to 
 turn him from his defign, continued very attentive to it ; but he had the 
 misfortune of all eminent men, whom death feizes in the middle of their 
 projects. He died in the year 1463, and 6~th year of his age ; and Portugal 
 was deprived of a prince whole ftudy was the good anil intereft of his 
 kingdom. 
 
 III. Of
 
 ( 5 ) 
 
 III. Of the firfl Difcoveries near Cape Good Hope and the South Coast 
 
 of Africa. 
 
 John II. nephew to Don Henry III. being at length king of "Portugal, 
 Cpnfideririg the advantages of the trade with Africa, entered into all the 
 defigns of his uncle, being very affiduous in making new difcoveries. It 
 had been pufhed as far as Cape St. Katharine, fituate in 2? lbuth latitude, 
 during his father Don Alphonfo's life ; and as far as the river Zaire, in the 
 firft of his reign ; but his chief defign was the difcovery of the Eaft Indies. 
 The geographers, which he had about his court, allured him it might be 
 eafily done, by failing round the coaft of Africa. They fupported their 
 opinion by a chart which the Moors had given to Don Henry : this was 
 fufficient to confirm the king in his refolutions. 
 
 Another motive was, the idea all Europe was filled with of a mighty 
 Chriftian monarch, better known by the name of Prefter John, than by the 
 lituation of his dominions. Don John was refolved to fpare no pains to 
 difcover who this prince was : he fent for this purpofe Peter Covillan, and 
 Alphonfo de Parva, who took their journey by Alexandria, and through 
 Arabia, as far as Aden ; from whence the firft palled on to the Indies, the 
 other to Ethiopia : but Covillan returned without having difcovered any thing, 
 and Parva died on the road. Don John difpatched others by fea ; thefe were 
 Bat. Diaz and John Infant : each had the command of a fhip, as well as a ftore- 
 fhip, to prevent the pretence of returning for provifions, &c. Their orders 
 were, to fail round the coaft of Africa from the river Zaire, and make difco- 
 veries ; to enquire very particularly the way they mould go to the kingdom of 
 Prefter John ; and to let up flags every where, as a mark of pofleffion. An 
 obfracle, which fhould have been prevented, hindered thefe navigators from 
 difcharging their commifiion. The negroes, who ferved them for interpreters, 
 did not rightly underfrand trie language of the new countries on which they 
 landed ; nevertheless Diaz coafted along, and came as far as a cape which 
 appeared to him to {ft bounds to the coaft of Africa : he gave it the name of 
 Cape Tormentos, by reafon of the tempefts and large feas he found near it. 
 His zeal would have carried him ftill farther ; but his crew mutinying, obliged 
 him to return to Portugal, where he arrived in December, in 1487, fixteen 
 months and leventeen days from the time he firft fet out. He was very well 
 received by the king, and the name of Cape Tormentos changed into that of 
 Good Hope, intimating the great hopes they had from this difcovery. Ten 
 
 years
 
 6 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 years paffed away without any notice being taken of it ; and the prince died at 
 the time when the preparations were making for the improving their difcovery. 
 Emanuel duke of Beja iucceeded him, and under his reign thefe difcoveries were 
 brought to perfection. When he came to the crown, the good of his nation 
 became his chief ftudy ; and he was refolved to eftablifh a new dominion, 
 rejecting the advice* of ibme of his courtiers, who were averfe to all fchemes of 
 this kind. 
 
 Beja fitted out three fhips, of a much ftronger make than ordinary ; with a 
 pink, which was to ferve as a ftore-fhip. The late king had appointed Vafco de 
 Gama to command this expedition. Don Emanuel, perfuaded that the fuccefs 
 of his entcrprife depended on a proper chief, approved of Gama, he being a man 
 of fortune, merit and capacity, great courage and daring intrepidity. There went 
 in company with him his brother Paul de Gama and Nic. Coello. 
 
 The kino-, on their letting out, told them he hoped their conduct, would 
 confirm his good opinion, animating them with the promife of great rewards: 
 he then gave Vafco his inftructions. They embarked amidft a numerous con- 
 co.urfe of people, who were all in tears, being perfuaded they were fo many 
 victims going to certain death, according to the terrible account Diaz and his 
 companions had given of the Cape of Good-Hope. They failed from Lifbon 
 in July, 1497. Vafco directed his courfe towards the Canaries, then towards 
 the Cape de Verd : he landed and refrefhed his men at St. Jago ; from whence 
 he fteered fouth, to crofs the equinoctial line, and fell in with the coaft of 
 Africa; but not knowing how to make a proper ufe of the winds which blew 
 in that hemilphere, he fpent four months before he arrived in the bay of St. 
 Helena, where they took in frefh water, and then fet fail for the Cape of 
 Good-Hope. 
 
 The feafon of the year not being favourable, they met with contrary winds 
 and currents, which had very nearly obliged them to return back. The 
 mutinying of the crew would have been fufficient to have overturned all their 
 meafures; but Vafco, indefatigable amidft the greateft dangers, furmounted the 
 firft of thefe by his knowledge in navigation ; the other, by punifhments which 
 he inflicted on the chief of the mutineers. He doubled, without any accident, 
 that famous Cape, November 25, 1497 » fr° m whence he went into the bay of 
 St. Blaze, which is about 60 leagues beyond the cape. He had a defign to ftay 
 a while at this place, but found iome difficulty in getting refrefhments : he 
 therefore went to a neighbouring harbour, and ftayed there till the 1 8th of 
 December. A few days after he left this place, he met with a \iolent ftonn, 
 
 which
 
 Of the firf Difcoveries near Cape Good Hope. 7 
 
 which he had the good fortune to get the better of; and on Chriftmas-day 
 following he made the coaft again, which he called Nativity, as was the cuftora 
 when lands were discovered on any particular day. For the fame reafon, he 
 o-ave the name of King's river to a large one, which he entered on the Epiphany 
 of the following year. Other travellers gave names to thofe places they landed 
 at, according to the nature of the inhabitants. * 
 
 IV. Of the firjl Difcoveries on the East Coast ©/"Africa. 
 
 Beyond the bay of St. Blaze, the land forms a promontory which is the 
 fouth extreme of Safala. Vafco had great difficulty to double it, on account 
 of currents which fet in upon the fhore. He was therefore, for fear of 
 being lhipwrecked, obliged to ftand off the coaft of Safala, and did not make 
 the land again till he was near the mouth of a river which he named Bons 
 Signaux, becaufe of the good intelligence he received there. The people ot 
 that country were more civil than any others he had met with : they made 
 him underfland (by fome Arabian words) if he kept towards the north, he 
 would meet with white men, and fhips fuch as his own. This animated 
 them with new hopes, being now tired with only meeting forlorn creatures, 
 whom they could not underfland, neither procure from them more than 
 would jufl keep them alive. A difeafe to which they had been entire 
 ftrangers, began now to range amongft them, namely, the fcurvy, of which 
 fome died, but mo ft recovered. 
 
 After having refrefhed and refitted the 'fhip, they went to Mofambique, 
 where they arrived in a few days. This little ifland, fituate near the con- 
 tinent, and which the Portuguefe now make one of their chief fettlements, 
 was almoft entirely inhabited by Moors, who had made ufe of it in their 
 trade to Safala. Ibrahim, king of Quiola, kept a governor there, in order to 
 command and preferve the trade. When this governor faw the fhips of 
 Gama, he fent an officer to enquire what they were, and finding them to be 
 Portuguefe, formed a defign to deftroy them ; and in order to fucceed, he 
 thought it beft to ufe diffimulation : he kindly received thofe who were lent 
 afhore, promifiing them all in his power, with two pilots to conduct them 
 in, or where they had a mind to go. Thefe meafures were fcarcely con- 
 certed, when they began to fee into their bad defigns. The complaints 
 which Gama had made to the governor, of fome outrages that had been com- 
 mitted
 
 $ A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 mitted on fome of his people, being rejected by infults, and followed by a 
 mower of arrows, made the General fire feveral mot at the village. The 
 governor bv this means became more civil, granting to Vafco every thing 
 he demanded, and alfo a pilot to conduct him : after which he fet fail. 
 They fufpected their guide might be treacherous, and therefore refolved either 
 to intimidate him by threats, or bring him over by promifes ; but they foon 
 difcovered his defign, by his running the fhips between the iflands and the rocks, 
 on which they would infallibly have been loft, if they had not been on their 
 guard. The admiral, being convinced of the perfidy of the pilot, whipped him 
 feverely with cords : this made him repent of his breach of truft, and promife to 
 conduct the {hip to Quiola, a confiderable city, where he allured them they would 
 had all forts of neceflaries. The pilot made no doubt but they would very 
 foon know there what had palled at Mofambique, and would undoubtedly 
 revenge it ; but the wind not favouring them, he thought it beft to go to Mom- 
 bafle, where he made them hope for the fame fupply as at Quiola. 
 
 Mombaife, at that time, was fubject to the Moors, who had their king inde- 
 pendent of that at Quiola : it was very populous and flourifhing, fituate in a 
 deep bay, forming a very good port, on each fide of which was a well-built fort: 
 the houfes being built with ftone, in a pretty tafte, afforded an agreeable p;ofpec"t. 
 To avoid giving furprife, Vafques did not think fit to enter immediately into 
 the port : he anchored in the road, that he might obferve what pafled in the 
 town, and fo be able to take his meafures. The king fent an officer to compli- 
 ment the admiral on his arrival, with a tender of his fervice. After the firft 
 compliments, the meffenger told him the great inconveniency which would 
 attend his mips in an open road, fuch as where he lay, faying it would be much 
 more convenient, as well as fafer, to go into the port. Gama, to prevent fufpi- 
 cion, promifed it ; but deferred the execution under fpecious pretences. Not- 
 withftandins; the care which the Portueuefe took to hinder the pilot from having 
 any conference with thofe of Mombafle, he found means to inform them of 
 what pafled at Mofambique, fo as to infpire them with notions of revenge and 
 hatred. Then they meditated to take the fhips; but, as it was difficult for them 
 to bring it about, if they did not come into the harbour, they therefore redoubled 
 their arguments to perfuade them to this. 
 
 The admiral, fuificientlv informed of the ftate of the harbour, and ftrength 
 of the Moors, at length determined to go in. On the day appointed for this 
 purpofe, great numbers of country boats, finely adorned, with inftruments of 
 muiic and armed men, came before the fhips, as if to pay their refpect. Several 
 
 of
 
 Of the firjl Difcoverics on the East Coast o/Africa. 9 
 
 of the Moors came on board, notwithstanding the care that was taken to hinder 
 them, feeming very well pleated with the preparations far weighing the anchor, 
 and believing themfelves already matters o'f their prey ; when an odd accide: t, 
 all on a fudden, deftroyed their hopes, and turned them into fear. The admiral's 
 (hip, being under weigh, did not anfwer her helm : by this flic fheered fo near 
 fome rocks, that he was obliged to come to an anchor, and furl his fads. The 
 Moors, feeing them in a great hurry, fufpeflcd they were difcovered; and fear 
 feizing them, they immediately jumped overboard to get to their boats. Vafques, 
 by this, difcovered his narrow efc.ipe ; and, as the Mofambique pilot had got 
 away from the (hip, he concluded it to be through his means that the Moors had 
 taken thefe refolutions. He thanked God for his deliverance, and then fet fail 
 to feek protection in fome other port. Some days after his departure he took 
 two boats going to Mombafle, which ferved his purpofe. At his approach, mod 
 of the Moors in the boats jumped into the fea ; but fome remained, and gave 
 him neceflary inflruclions: they told him he was not far from a city called 
 Melinda, the king of which received courteoufly all Arrangers; that he might 
 get provifions there, and pilots to conduct them to the Indies. In this he pe, 
 guided by their prifoners, they fleered their courfe for the place they told them 
 of. He found Melinda to be a neat city, fituated in a plain, furrounded with 
 
 oardens. 
 
 o 
 
 As foon as the admiral was come to an anchor, he fent a meflenger to compli- 
 ment the king, and inform him of the reafon of his voyage. This prince was 
 a venerable old man, of a mild and aff ible carriage, and lingular probity. He 
 feemed pleafed with the arrival of the Portuguefe, efpecially when they told him 
 that an European monarch was feeking his protection and friendflnp. 1 he 
 regard due to fovereigns, demanded that Gama himfelf -mould vilit the king ; 
 but as he had already proved, that the feeming friendfliip of the Eaft is not 
 much to be depended on, he delayed going aihore. The king himfelf by his 
 great age and infirmity, being, confined to his bed, the prince his fon came half 
 way to the (hip, to confer with the admiral ; and both exchanged the greatefl: 
 marks of friendfliip, the fincerity of which the event furflciently fhewed. 
 
 There were then in the harbour of Melinda, four India fliips, in which there 
 were fome Chriftians of St. Thomas, and a Moor of Gu/Airat, very fkilful in 
 navigation. Vafques, in the conference he had with thern, learned feveral 
 important things to his expedition. He (hewed them his Aftrolabe, or Crofs 
 Staff, by which he obferved the latitude ; the ufe of which was begun under the 
 reign of John II. They did not feem furprifed at it, but (hewed him fomething 
 
 C more
 
 io A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 more curious of the fume kind, which was common among the Arabians, who 
 failed in the Red-fea. The Portusruefe have omitted oivins; any account of this 
 method. Some pretend that Vafques learned from them the life of the Load- 
 ftone. This opinion is ill-founded. Whatever other difcoveries we may owe 
 to the Portuguefe, it is certain the virtue of the Loadftone was well known in 
 Europe two centuries before. 
 
 V. Of the fir Jl Difcoveries en the Malabar Coast. 
 
 During the ftay Vafques made at Melinda, they received from the inhabitants 
 all manner of refreihments : thefe contributed greatly to reftore them after their 
 fatigue. The prince, to give them fome mark of his friendihip, procured a pilot 
 to conduit them fafe to India. 
 
 Every thing being ready for his departure, Vafques with the two other (hips 
 failed ; and in 19 days, having favourable winds, he defcried the mountains of 
 Calicut, and anchored in the road the day following, being the 1 8th of May, 
 1498, ten months and a half after his departure from Lifbon, to the great joy 
 of all : for this they returned God thanks. 
 
 Calicut was at that time a very confiderable city, the metropolis of a powerful 
 empire, which has now loll: all its ancient fplendar. The Samorin, to whom it 
 (till belongs, formerly was one of the chief princes of Indoflan. The kingdom 
 is lituate along the fea-coaft of Malabar : the people had a very great trade ;, 
 this brought immenfe riches to Calicut, and they lived in all the pleafures of 
 luxury. 
 
 (Tama, on his arrival, went to pay his refpeds to the emperor, and acquaint 
 him with the caufe of his voyage. The intereft and felf-conceit of that prince 
 was too much flattered not to return a favourable anfwer. He gave orders for 
 receiving the admiral, and ihewed him all marks of honour, ufual to embafla- 
 dors from the moll powerful kings. The day appointed for receiving him being 
 come, he was conducted with great pomp to the palace, and from thence to the 
 hall of audience, where the emperor waited for him. After the fiiil compli- 
 ments were paft, he defired him to deliver his credentials to any of his rriinifters 
 that bethought fit. Cama, thinking the honour of his tnafter was here con- 
 cerned, refilled to comply with it ; reprefenting, that kings ought to com- 
 mune direclly with kings, without the incerpofitioh.of minifters of flate. II 
 Samorin, being informed i I . 5 delicacy, retired with fome of his officers 1 . 
 
 pri. '
 
 Of the fir ft Difcoveries on the Malabar Coast. ii 
 
 private apartment, and fent for the admiral. They read the letter from the king 
 of Portugal; and the prince, to whom it was explained, anfwered it in moft 
 obliging terms. But there was one eflential thing wanting, namely the prefents, 
 which were always fent by ambaffadors to Eaftern Princes, before whom it is 
 not the cuftom to appear empty-handed. 
 
 Vafques excufed himfelf by the uncertainty of his arrival in India, adding that 
 it was near ioo years fince they had been finding out a pillage, and had been 
 always before this time forced to put back; that, if the king of Portugal had 
 known his fleet would have fucceeded this time, he would not have failed to 
 have fent very confiderable prefents. This excufe feemed to iatisfy the emperor; 
 and he ordered the embaflador to be treated with particular marks of diftinclion, 
 for facilitating of commerce, and what elfe he might want. 
 
 The Moors were difplcafed with the arrival of the Portuguefe in that coun- 
 try; for it was through them Europe received the greateft part of the riches 
 from this country : they did all in their power to prevent this commerce, and 
 gained over to their interefts, by bribery, the chief minifters of the Samorin ; fo 
 that the court all on a fudden changed their behaviour towards the Portuguefe, 
 and confidcred them as no better than pirates, and made ufe of their indigence as 
 a proof. 
 
 Vafques was informed of the defign which the Moors w r ere carrying on againft 
 him, by one of their party on whom he could much rely, named Monzaed, a 
 native of Tunis, who acted as broker at Calicut, and was attached to their 
 intereft from their firft arrival. He fpoke the Caitilian language perfectly well, 
 and ferved as an interpreter. lie was very zealous in all their affairs ; and his 
 fdclitv was very confpicuous, in letting the Portuguefe know T the deiigiis the 
 Moors had formed againft them. Hereupon Vafques determined to depart; but, 
 as an affair of this nature requires much dehcacv, he at length obtained permif- 
 iion, upon leaving a pledge for his return. He likewife got a letter from the 
 Samorin to the king of Portugal. He firft went to the iflands of Anchediva, or 
 India Diva, to careen, and take in water ; and then fleered for the coaft of 
 Africa : but he made not fo quick a paflage back as he had done coming, being 
 delayed by calms, fo that he reached Magadoxa with great difficulty : failing 
 along the coaft, he put in at Melinda, where the prince again received him with 
 great marks of efteem, and fent an embaflador to the king his mafter. From 
 Melinda the fleet came back the fame wa}\ In pa/Ting Mozambique, one of the 
 fhips, called the St. Raphael, ftruck on a fand-bank near the iflaud of St. George, 
 and was loft: the crew was faved, and put on board the two other (hips, which 
 
 C 2 fleered
 
 12 A Kew Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 fleered for the Cape of Good Hope. They doubled it in March, 1499, the 
 fealon being; then more favourable than before. 
 
 Having got the better of this terrible paflage, they were now expecting to tafte 
 the fruits of their native countrv. They fteered for the equator, fell in with 
 the iflands of Azores, and refreshed at that of Tercera. Vaiques had the grief 
 to fee his brother die at this place, whole good qualities made him univerfally 
 regretted. They at length arrived at Lifbon in the month of September, after 
 having been out 26 months. The fcurvy and other diforders had fo weakened 
 his crew, that out of 1 70 men who fer out, only 55 returned to Portugal. Nic. 
 Coello, who arrived before him, had already informed the king of the fuccefs of 
 the voyage. That prince fent down all the nobles of his court to meet Vaiques, 
 and ordered his return to be celebrated by public rejoicings. He made him 
 count of Vediguiera, and admiral of India ; and added a penfion of 1000 crowns. 
 Thofe who accompanied him were alfo greatly rewarded ; and, to perpetuate the 
 memory of this difcovery, he built a ftately church, and dedicated it to the 
 Virgin Alary. They now found it pofiible to fail from Europe to the Eaft- 
 Indies ; and, by the accounts of the beauty and riches of that country, were 
 confirmed that a profitable trade might be carried on. They then fitted out a 
 large fleet, and embarked a fufficient number of able men to refift thofe who 
 fhould oppofe their fettling. They added to thefe wife meafures all that could 
 bring navigation to perfection ; for on that depended all the advantages of this- 
 difcovery. By thefe precautions they faved the lives of many. Thus far the 
 different expeditions made towards this difcovery have been confidered ; it 
 remains to give an account of the progrefs made in navigation, and at the fame 
 time let you know what new methods have been taken in this work for its ufe 
 and advantage. 
 
 The knowledge of the load-ftone, and ufe of the mariner's compafs applied to 
 navigation, it is true, has been of great ufe to bring it to perfection ; but this 
 Mas- not fufficient to overcome the difficulties to be met with in long voyages.. 
 By the compafs the pilot fhaped his courfe ; but the diftance remained uncer- 
 tain, being only calculated by eftimation. It was only after the ufe of the 
 Aftrolabe, or Crofs-P.aff, for obferving the latitude, that there was a poflibility 
 of correcting the errors of navigation in long voyages : and there was yet another 
 thing wanting, equally necefiary for inftruction and fafety, a representation of 
 the fea-coafts and iflands, that the pilot might continually fee before his eyes his 
 true courie, and fo be able to fhun the danger. 
 
 Thefe
 
 Of the firjl Difcoveries on the Malabar Coast. 13 
 
 Thefe reafons gave rife to hydrographical charts, of which the Infant Don 
 Heiny was the firft inventor; The geographical maps, known long lince, 
 helped them in this ; but then it was with difficulty they could make ufe of 
 them, becaufe their conftruction was not well adapted for the ulc of navigators. 
 
 The fi rit fea-charts were thofe which have fince been called plain charts, to 
 diftinsuilh them from thofe now made ufe of; and becaufe in their conftruction 
 they have no regard to the convexity of the globe, but the portion which they 
 comprehend is reduced to a plain furface ; the meridians being reprefented as 
 ftraight lines parallel to each other, and the degrees of longitude equal to the 
 degrees of latitude upon every parallel. 
 
 Every mariner took care to infert in this chart all new difcoveries, the latitude 
 he had obferved them in, with all the bearings of the coafts, together with the; 
 fand-banks or rocks which he met with. 
 
 VI. Of the Construction of Sea Charts. 
 
 Navigation beitis; now of fuch extent, the fize of the former charts were 
 not fufficient to contain all the feas which they had to run over : to remedy 
 this, they were obliged to make the icale leis ; but fuch a reduction made the 
 objects confufed, or at leaft too fmall to be of ufe : this determined them to 
 make charts of particular parts on a larger fcale. Thefe lafr. were not only 
 ufefi.il, but abfolutely necefiary for perfons who fail along coafts, or through 
 ftraits which require more ample defcription. By thefe means, although 
 navigation became more eafy, yet there were great faults : one was, that the 
 principle on which the charts were made, was erroneous ; and the difference 
 of longitude of the chief ports was not exactly (hewn. To prove the former, 
 take notice, that the meridians of the globe are circles, interfering each other 
 at the poles, and making the degrees ot longitude fmaller, in proportion as 
 they are diftant from the equator ; whereas in the plain charts (as hath been 
 already obferved) the meridians are fuppofed to be {trait lines, and the degrees 
 of latitude equal to thofe of the equator. 
 
 This error indeed is not fo confiderable in the torrid zone, especially when 
 the charts do not comprehend any great fpace ; but otherwife it is necefiary 
 to take notice of it : for which reafon the navigator, that he may not be 
 deceived in hisxreckoning, muft reduce the leagues of departure into the degrees, 
 of the parallel on which he fails ; and, if the courfe be oblique, of the middle 
 latitude, between the place of his departure and that bound to. 
 
 Among
 
 J + A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Among the various methods made ufe of to correal thefe charts, that now 
 in practice is the belt, and has with juftice been preferred to all others. It 
 confifls in augmenting the degrees of the meridian in the fame proportion as 
 thofe of the parallels diminifh. Every degree of latitude thus augmented, 
 becomes the jufr. meafure for reducing the degrees of the equator, anfwerable 
 to thofe of its correfponding parallel. An explanation of this method at large 
 may be feen in the Phiiofophical Tranfadtions, No. 219, which, though generally 
 called Mercator's projection, is juftly attributed to Mr. Edward Wright. 
 
 ^ou muff not confound, with the plain charts, thofe which determine the 
 diftance, upon any parallel, by one common meafure ; becaufe a certain 
 number of leagues taken on the equator are always equal to the fame quantity 
 taken on any parallel whatever. In the ufe of thefe lair, they do not account 
 by degrees of longitude, but make ufe of them only as a fcale of leagues, to 
 meafure the diftances on the parallels of latitude. 
 
 It is not fo ealy to remedy the fecond fault of the charts, the confequences 
 of which are more to be dreaded: for, befides that the firft was known, the 
 mariner had rules to correct it by ; but in the other" he was uncertain of the 
 true longitude of the places bound to : the methods of obferviug it were not 
 common, and for the moft part above the capacity of the navigators of that age. 
 The hydrographers were obliged to deduce the longitude from the courfe and 
 diftance, which they obtained from mips journals ; but this being uncertain, 
 became more Co, as the length of their voyages encreafed ; and though in time 
 their charts were more correct., yet the aftronomical obfervations made in 
 different places, proye that the charts of places but little frequented, may have 
 errors, and want new coneclions. 
 
 A iter the Dutch had taken moll of the Portuguefe fettlements, their chief 
 care was to procure their charts, and to make new ones of all thole ports whete 
 they had any trade. That republic, ever mindful of its own intereft, knew 
 full well that on the improvement of this article depended the fuccefs of all 
 thtir voyages ; but ftill, whatever care they took to make thefe correct, they 
 remain very imperfect; and one cannot but admire how a nation, whole 
 navigation is lo coniiderable throughout the world, mould to this day truft their 
 lives and fortunes on performances fo imperfecta • Of thoie that are published, 
 the '.rcncral chart by Peter Goos is efteemed the beft : this molt of their navigators 
 make ufe of. As for their particular charts, they are mollly manulcripts. 
 The Portuguefe and Dutch are not the only charts we have of the Eaftern 
 ocean. The collection, by Thornton, commonly called the Englifh Pilot, 
 
 although
 
 Of the Construction of Sea Charts. 15 
 
 although deficient in many places, is much efteemed by navigators, as it contains 
 feveral charts of the coaft on a large fcale ; neverthelefs, the latitude and bearings 
 of many confiderable places being very faulty, it requires to be corrected. 
 
 In the making of new charts, three methods have been ufed to determine 
 the iituation of places. The firfl is altronomy, founded on the belt obfervations. 
 The next may be called geography, which conftfts in fixing by triangles thole 
 places which have been obferved, with thofe whofe Iituation is certain : this 
 method has been made uie of along the coafta, by obferving the angles which 
 the feveral capes and noted points make with each other, or with the meridian 
 line ; and gives the Iituation fuffieiently exact. The third method is more 
 uncertain, but is had recourle to for want of either of the former : it is that 
 deduced from the tracks of ihips. 
 
 VII. Of the frfi Meridians of Places, from which Longitude begins 
 
 to be reckoned. 
 
 The ffrft meridian of the Englifh charts, has been fixed at London, for the 
 ufe of the Engliih navigator ; and at Greenwich, to be compared with the 
 obfervations made there and at different places on land and at fea. Alio at 
 the Obfervatory at Paris, by the French. Thofe who would have a meridian 
 elfewhere, may, by adding or fubftracting accordingly. 
 
 The unanimous approbation of geographers, as to the determination of the 
 longitude of Goa, * makes it the ftandard in the conftrudion of the chart of 
 that coalt. That city lies 71? 25' E. from the Obfervatory at Paris. Agreeably 
 thereto, the other places on the coait of Indoftan are fixed according to their 
 bearings and diftances. The longitude of Surat, and Cochien, which refult 
 from this method, agree with the determination of MelT. de Lifle and Harris. 
 Peter Goos, in his Chart of the Eaftern feas, places Goa in 96? 55' E. longitude 
 from Teneriff, which anfwers to 78? 55' from Paris, being 7? 30' more 
 Eafterly than it really is. This error, although confiderable, is not fo much 
 
 to 
 
 »% — — — _ — . — — ■ — — — — — . — — — — — — — ■ 
 
 * The latitudes nni longitudes are continued the fame here as in the lalt edition of this work, 
 correcVd by Mr. S. Dunn ; but from the accuracy in which nautical inuruments are lince that ii:v;e 
 made and divided, and the improvements made in Chronometers, the latitudes ;.nd longitudes of \..r: o .; 
 p'aces have been afcertaincd with greater precifion ; on which account we have, at the end of this 
 book, inerted a general table, alphabetically arranged, of luch placei as may be depended upon to be the 
 mot! correft, being ti.kcn from the lalt publication of Mr. George Robertfon, Alexander D-lryinple. I ,fqj. 
 and the Retiuiiite Tables,
 
 i6 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 to be wondered at, when you reflect on the diftance between the places, and 
 the method made ufe of for the determination. The other parts of that chart 
 are not more correel : the fhort diftances and bearings of coafts the mofl 
 frequented, although eafily known, are yet incorrect. : For example, that 
 author makes the meridian diitance between Goa and Cochien only i? 30' inftead 
 of 2? 20', which the bearings of the coaft. and the difference of latitude naturally 
 produce : hence mofl navigators reckon themfelves almoft a-ihore, by that 
 chart, when they are not really in fight of land. The aftronomical obfervations 
 made at the Cape of Good Hope in 1685, by the Miffionaries who determined 
 the difference of meridians between it and Paris, 17? 41' 15", is not fuf- 
 ficiently certain to be depended on. Dr. Halley, far from believing it exact, 
 thought it mould be but 55' of time at mofl: ; fo that, agreeable to the 
 opinion of this judicious aftronomer, the Cape fhould have been 3? 56' 15" 
 more Wefterly than by the obfervation. But fince, according to feveral 
 aftronomical obfervations, in 1718, he thought proper to-*fix its longitude 
 ih. = 15? E. of London, which will be 50' 20 v = 12? 35' or thereabouts, 
 Eaft of the meridian of Paris ; and the difference is coniiderable enough to 
 require new obfervations. Although reaibnably prejudiced againlt the 
 exactnefs of the fhips tracks, yet, as feveral who have failed from the Cape to 
 St. Helena very nearly agreed with one another, it was not unfeientifkk to 
 admit a medium. In fact, we find by thefe, the difference of longitude 
 between thefe two places from 23? 1 5' to 23? 45'. Now the above Dr. Halley 
 having by feveral obfervations compared together, determined the fituation 
 of St. Helena 8? 30' W. of Paris ; if from 23? 30' the middle difference, 
 you fubtracl this la ft-, becaufe it lies Weft, there remains 15? for the longi- 
 tude of the Cape of Good Hope, Eaft of the Obfervatory ; which makes 
 17? 25'' from London, allowing the difference of meridians of 40" ==. 2? 25' 
 as above. But fince that time, the Abbe de la Caille, who refided at the 
 Cape, from May, 1751, to Jan. 1753, in order to make correel aftronomical 
 obfervations, by command of the French king, has concluded the longitude 
 thereof to be 16? io' E. from Paris; fo that, according to the fame author, 
 who oblerved the difference of longitude between Greenwich and Paris, to 
 be only 2? io', the true longitude of the Cape of Good Hope will be 
 i&? 25' E. from London. 
 
 VIII. Of
 
 ( '7 ) 
 
 VIII. Of the Bearings of Places in the East-Indies. 
 
 In like manner, juft to hint at the errors of the common Englifh charts, 
 as to the longitude of the fame places ; they muft be wrong, feeing they are 
 plain, determining the meridian by the bearings ; but the little ufe of them is 
 manifeft. In thefe lafl, the bearing of the coaft from Cochien to the entrance 
 of Goa, is NNW. fo that there are 2? 20' difference of longitude, and 5? 33' 
 difference of latitude: whereas in the Enriiih Pilot it is N 18? W. which 
 gives 37' l e f s meridian diftance between them, making thereby Cochien 37' 
 more to the Weft ward than it really is. 
 
 It is not only in the bearings of places that they have erred ; the latitude, 
 on which the navigator mod depends, is alio erroneous. Goa is placed in 
 15? 13', whereas the aftronomical oblervations make it in 15? 31' N. The 
 latitude of Surat, inftead of 20? 56', ought to be in 21? io' N. and its 
 longitude 22 more Eafterly, with refpecl to Goa. 
 
 All the ancient charts reprefent the Laccadives and Maldives as a confufed 
 heap of iflands, very different both in number and fhape from what they 
 really are. - Since numbers of fhips pafs through the channels of the former, 
 they are better known, and an exa<5t draught has been made of them. 
 
 By the latitude and diftance of the iflands, which bound the paffage of 
 Marnale to the Northward, they are nearly correct; except that of Malique, 
 the fituation of which is ftill uncertain. The opinions of fome mariners have 
 placed it as in thefe chaits ; but a navigator whofe authority may be relied on, 
 has aflured, that after he had run over that parallel of latitude, he did not fee 
 any appearance of it ; whence it may be more to the fouthward, and con- 
 fequently nearer the Ifland Kelay. 
 
 The voyages made every year to the Maldives, by feveral fhips, Englifh, 
 French, and Moors, to trade for cowries, (a fhell which paffeth for money) 
 afford iufficient materials for making a particular chart of thefe innumerable 
 iflands, the Eaftern part whereof being moft frequented, they are the better 
 known. 
 
 The fituation of Pondicherry in 11? 56' N. and 77? 32' E. of the Obfer- 
 vatory at Paris, is the refult of feveral aftronomical oblervations, which have 
 been made by F. Rigand, Tachard, and friar MorifFet, Jefuits. This town, 
 thus adjufted, ferves to determine the other places on the Eaft coaft of In- 
 doftan, as far as the mouth of the Ganges, as alio a part of the Ifland Zcloan. 
 
 It were to be wifhed there were fome aftronomical oblervations on the coafts 
 of Arabia and Perfia, to adjuft their exact fituation. For want t>f thefe, there 
 
 D has
 
 1 8 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 has been a neceflity to have recourfe to the working of fhips tracks : but 
 to fupply the defecl of this method, the lhorteft voyages have been- ufed, as 
 they are lefs liable to errors ; likewife, thofe journals whofe obferved latitudes, 
 and latitudes by account, agreed bed with each other ; alio, thofe made at 
 the be°;innin«; and toward the end of the monfoon. 
 
 Out of a great number of journals, (having made choice of thofe which 
 were found moil: correct, and reducing their tracks as above mentioned, the 
 following diftances have been found. 
 
 From Cochien to Cape Guardafoy the courfe is W 4? 2>°' N. 466 leagues, 
 which gives 23? 40' difference of longitude. Now the longitude of the former 
 being 73? 40', that of Cape Guardafoy muff, therefore be about 50?' By 
 another operation the Eafl-moff. point of the Ifland Soccatra bore from Cochien 
 W 1 6? N. 408 \ leagues, which makes the difference of longitude 20? 40',. 
 by which that point mult lie in 55? And as the difference between that point 
 and Cape Guardafoy is 3? there remains 50? for the longitude of the latter ; 
 as in the prefent charts. 
 
 From Bombay to Cape Guardafoy, two fhips made their courfe S 68? 30' W. 
 and S 69? 30' W. the medium being S 69? W. cuts the parallel of 11? 45', 
 which is the latitude of the Cape, in 50? of longitude as before. In like 
 manner Cape Aden bears from Cochien W 4? N. 584I leagues. From Mount 
 Dilla, on the Malabar coafr, in latitude I2?3'N. and 72? 39' longitude, to 
 the above-mentioned cape, it is W 1? N. 558 \ leagues. From Cape St. John 
 to the Burnt Ifland or Garbora, S 68? 30' W. 482 leagues. By the two 
 former, Cape Aden lies in longitude 43? 58', or 6? %' W. from Cape Guardafoy %, 
 and by the latter, 46? &' is the longitude of Burnt Ifland. 
 
 In this place it may not be improper to take notice of two errors in the 
 ancient charts of this part of the entrance of the Red-fea. The nrfl of theie 
 is in the diftance between Cape Guardafoy and Cape Aden ; Peter Goos and 
 the Englifh Pilot making it from 85 to 86 leagues, whereas it is 120. The 
 other, is in the latitude of the Arabian coait, near Maculla ; the fituation 
 whereof is 47' more Southerly than thofe authors have placed it, 
 
 Peter Goos makes the difference of longitude between Goa and Cape 
 Guardafoy 22? 37', inflead of 21? 25'. If you confult the tables of latitude 
 and longitude at the end of the Englifh Pilot, you will find the difference 
 between Goa and Cape Guardafoy is 12? 40'.. This mult be a miftake, as 
 there the longitude of Goa is 79? 50', and that of Cape Guardafoy 58? \d 
 Ea Award from the Lizard ; fo that the difference between them is 21? 40'. 
 The error appears 10 have rifen from counterchanging the figures of the 
 
 degrees.
 
 Of the Bparings of Places in the East-Indies. iq 
 
 degrees. By this, Cape Guardafoy will lie in 40? 45' Eaft Longitude from the 
 Obfervatory at Paris. Edward Wright places this cape in 52? 25' from the 
 meridian of London, which agrees exactly with the belt charts. 
 
 After giving Cape Aden a proper fituation from Cape Guardafoy, the 
 different parts of the Arabian coaft are placed according to their respective 
 bearings and diftances ; and fo by continuing that method, Cape Rozal^at 
 is found in longitude 37? 30' E. of Paris, which confirms the reckonings of 
 the lhips from Goa, Bombay and Cape St. John, to this cape. 
 
 The chart of the Gulph of Perfia, in this collection, is looked upon by 
 the mod experienced navigators to be the raoft correct and exact of airy yet 
 publifhed. 
 
 That part of the general chart, which contains the coaft of Perfia, from 
 Cape Jafques to the Gulf of Guzurar, inclufive, is from the Englifh charts, 
 their trade from the river Sinde making them better acquainted with thefe 
 parts than any other nation. 
 
 The condruction of the other general chart is founded upon better prin- 
 ciples, becaufe, in fixing the chief places, agronomical obfervations made 
 at Pondicherry, Malacca, Siam, Pulo Condore, and Canton, have been 
 applied for regulating the fituation of places near them. 
 
 Having regulated the coaft of Coromandel, Golconda, Sec. agreeable to 
 the longitude of Pondicherry, the Kail coaft of the Gulf of Bengal becomes 
 regulated alfo. 
 
 The coaft of Malayo, Queda, Tenaflerim, and Pegu, are drawn from 
 feveral correct plans of thofe parts. There is nothing now remains, with 
 regard to the Gulf of Bengal, but the determination of the NW. part of the 
 Ifland Sumatra, on which depend thofe of the Nicobars, and other adjacent 
 iflands. This is of lb much the more importance, as thefe places are generally 
 made by fhips paffing and rcpaffing the Straits of Malacca. 
 
 It is by the calculation of a. feries of triangles made by the bearings and 
 differences of latitude of feveral remarkable objects, lying between Malacca 
 and Acheen, that the longitude of the latter is 95? 34' E. from London, and 
 its latitude, according to the obfervations made there, 5? 24' N. The cor- 
 rectnefs of this pofition may be depended on, if it be confidered that the 
 feveral objects above mentioned are ib fituated as to be feen at the fame time, 
 or to have them bearing in one. 
 
 Though the feveral bearings may be hereby pretty exactly determined, 
 efpeciallv with a Knight's comoafs, yet for want of the true diftances, in a 
 feries of triangles, the error in both latitude and longitude will be considerable, 
 
 D z in
 
 20 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 in proportion to their number ; as is evidently the cafe here, with regard to 
 the latitude of the iflands encompafling Acheen. 
 
 The error of Peter Goos, in his pofition of Goa, muft neceffarily extend 
 to all parts of India, fuppofing their refpedtive diftances were exact. We will 
 now examine the different fituation of fome particulars. 
 
 The longitude, 28' E. of Pondicherry, is 78? E. from Paris, and that part 
 of the coaft, he makes 102? io'E. from Teneriff, equal to 84? io' from 
 Paris, differing only 6? 10' inftead of 7? 30', from Goa, whereby the dif- 
 ference of the meridians of thefe two cities, whereon the breadth of Indoflan 
 depends, is 1? 20' lefs than it mould be. Malacca is placed in the fame chart 
 in longitude 122? 30' from Teneriff: the difference is 4? 45' inftead of 6? io', 
 which it would have been, if the difference of meridians between Pondicherry 
 and Malacca had been conformable to the difference by the obfervations. 
 Therefore P. Goos has made the meridian diftance between thefe two places 
 31] leagues, or 1? 35' lefs than it mould be. This error affedts particularly 
 the breadth of the Gulf of Bengal, between Acheen and Pondicherry, which 
 the fame author has made 13? 5 3' inftead of 15? 14', as it is made by 
 working the bearings and diftances of Acheen from Malacca. The plain 
 chart in the Endilh Pilot is ftili lefs exact. 
 
 The Dutch having fettlements on the Weft coaft of Sumatra, have cau fed 
 to be made new charts thereof; from them thefe are conftrucfed. But here 
 is an entire new one for Java Bland from the Dutch, rectifying the latitude 
 and bearings of feveral places on the South coaft, according to the obfervations 
 of feveral able navigators ; only the exact, longitude of fome place is neceffary, 
 whereby to regulate that of others refpeclively. An obfervation at Batavia 
 has been applied, and of great fervice. This remote city is the moft con- 
 fiderable of the European fettlements in that part of the Southern hemisphere. 
 Its longitude has of late been exa&ly found : that of 98? 30', inferted in the 
 Ephemerides of M. Defplaces, cannot be right, nor is it adopted by any 
 modern geographer. To confirm its fituation then, it will be neceflaiy to 
 have recourfe to experiments made ufe of for the pofition of Acheen, making 
 Malacca the ftandard. 
 
 In order to render this pofition the more exatt, it is neceffary to have re- 
 courfe to the former method, for determining the longitude of Acheen. 
 Thefe gave the true fituation of the intervening places, the errors thereof in 
 former charts, and the means of correcting them. For this purpofe, the 
 ieveral charts of the Eaftern part of the Straits of Malacca have been com- 
 plied with the memoirs, instructions, and journals relating thereto. 
 
 The
 
 Of the Bkaiungs o/Places in the East-Indies. zi 
 
 The infhuclions in the Englifh Pilot feem tolerably good in fome places ; 
 but their incorrectnefs upon the whole will foon be difcovcrcd, on examining 
 whether the places fituatcd between them (Malacca and Batavia) are placed 
 according to their true bearings and diftance, and whether the account con- 
 tained therein be natural. That chart is yet more erroneous in refpeft to the 
 iflands lying to the Northward of the Straits of Banca : moil of the journals 
 of voyages to China take notice thereof, and experience hath made it clear ; 
 fo that fuch a chart is not at all preferable to a number of other manufcripts, 
 which raife one's indignation, on account of the carelefihefs and ignorance 
 of copyifts. 
 
 Batavia ferves to fix the longitude of all the. iflands Eaftward of Java, as 
 far as New-Holland : the Iflands of Borneo, Celebes, and the Moluccas, 
 are alfo adjufted by it. With regard to their pofition otherways, the Dutch 
 charts have been confulted. 
 
 The fituation of Juthia, capital of the kingdom of Siam, in latitude 
 14? 1 8' N. and 98? 30' E. longitude from Paris, having been regulated by fo 
 many correfponding obfervations, there remains no doubt of its exactnefs. By 
 it the Gulph of Siam, and the Iflands Timoan and Condore, at the extremes 
 of the mouth thereof, are adjufted. The firfr. is placed, according to its 
 latitude and bearings with Point Romanic, at the Eaft end of the Straits of 
 Malacca ; the fecond, by the aftronomical obfervations of P. Gaubil, in 
 latitude 8? 40' N. and longitude 105? E. from Paris. 
 
 The places thus fixed, the Weftern coaft of the Gulph is adjufted by Pulo 
 Timoan and Juthia ; as the Eaftern is by Juthia and Pulo Condore. 
 
 The Gulph of Tonquin is fo little frequented by Europeans, that but 
 little could be met with better on the lubjccl than the ancient charts, and 
 fome remarks made whilft that navigation fubfifted. 
 
 As to the Ifland Hai-nan, and the coaft of China, to the Macao Iflands, 
 included, M. D'Anville, according to the defcription of the Jefuits, have 
 been followed, being of opinion that thefe fathers, who were employed by 
 the Emperor of China to make maps of the different provinces, muft be 
 fuppofed thereby to have had a better opportunity of defcribing the coaft than 
 navigators. 
 
 The fituation of Canton is as well confirmed as that of Juthia, by 
 aftronomical obfervations ; fo that Macao and the adjacent iflands are well 
 regulated thereby. 
 
 Peter Goos placing Siam or Juthia in longitude 104? 5c/, differs 6? 20' 
 fiom the obfervations, which ib 1° 35' more than the difference of Malacca. 
 
 Ic
 
 2t A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 It is lefs with regard to Pulo Condore, the fame author making its longitude 
 but 4? 55' more than it is. In placing Canton in 134? 43', or 116? 4', from 
 Paris, it differs juft 6? from its true pofition. Hence it follows, from the 
 two hit. companions, that the Dutch charts have placed Canton 1? %' further 
 to the Eaftward of Pulo Condore than it really is. It is to this, and not to 
 the currents, that navigators ought to attribute the difference they have 
 experienced in their departure from Pulo Condore to Macao ; for, although 
 moil make ufe of manufcript charts, (very neceflary for navigating in thefe 
 feas) they moitly have this error ; and although there have been the helps of 
 agronomical obfervations for fome time, yet the authors of them had rather 
 copy the defect than correct it. 
 
 The En glim Pilot puts Canton 7? 30' Eaft of Pulo Condore ; this is 1? 37' 
 too much. This is fufficient to prove the new charts better adapted to the 
 ufe of navigation. The coafr. of China, from Macao to Amoy, including 
 Formofa, is taken from a manufcript chart, agreeing with the courfes and 
 remarks of thofe who have frequented this coafl. 
 
 The Phillippine Hands are more particular than any of the former ones, 
 being drawn from a furvey of thefe lflands, made by the command of the 
 viceroy of Manilla, and engraved here in the year 1734. As to the lituation 
 of that citv, in latitude 14? 3c/ North, and longitude 118? it agrees with 
 that inferted in the Connoifiance des Temps. The reciprocal fituation of the 
 SW. point Of the Ifland Pa'ragoa, and that of the North point of Borneo, 
 cannot be right in the other charts, unlets you allow the former a greater 
 length and different bearings; but there niult be new furvey s made before 
 that can be corrected. Moil navigators perfuade themfelves that the charts 
 on a large fcale are preferable to others, efpecially for coaiting ; and make 
 no fcruple to enlarge the very fmall ones ; becaufe places would be con fu fed 
 or imperceptible, if thev were omitted in the fmall ones. By fuch omiffions 
 ihips are expofed to dangers, lo much the more to be feared as they are 
 unknown. In other words thus : clangers being omitted in charts on a large 
 fcale, caufeth the navigator to conclude there are none, and thereby puts him 
 off his guard. Thefe forts of charts are fo multiplied, that it requires a 
 particular ftudy to diffinguiih the copies from the originals. 
 
 IX. The
 
 ( *3 ) 
 
 IX. 1'he Construction ami Cause of the Winds, as they depend 
 immediately on the Aclion of the Sun. 
 
 Since the heat of the fun raifcth and fupporteth the air, ami the air being 
 intermixed with aqueous exhalations and vapours, and put in motion in al- 
 moft an horizontal direction, forms the wind blowing, as it is ufually termed, 
 in that direction ; it follows, that the fun, by continually throwing his rays 
 on the air and circumambient vapours of the earth and fea, muft have fome 
 power for forming the winds, and giving them particular directions at dif- 
 ferent times and places. 
 
 There have been different fuppofitions made by philofophcrs concerning 
 the exact manner how the minuter particulars of the air and atmofphere 
 are effected in the production of thefe phenomena, and fome difputes have 
 arifen concerning them ; but the beft reafoners on this iubject, amongft 
 whom is M. Leibnetz, a famous foreigner, have given their opinions nearly as 
 follows. 
 
 Since air is an elaftic fluid, and its particles do freely intermix with watry 
 particles and vapours, and thefe are copioufly contained in the lower parts of 
 the region of the air, near the furface of the earth and fea ; and farther, fince 
 it is the natural confequence of air and vapours to expand by heat ; it there- 
 fore follows, that the particles of the atmofphere, from the higheft to the 
 lowed part thereof, do endeavour to expand and enlarge themfelves, by the 
 elaftic power contained in them, when they are expofed to the presence and 
 heat of the fun. 
 
 It is farther obfervable, that in fuch a conjeries of globular vapours, each 
 of them may have its internal or central part replete with matter fpecirically 
 lighter than the external cruft or fhell ; on which account the globular vapour 
 may be fpecifically lighter than a globular vapour of the fame dimenfions that 
 is formed of true permanent air itfelf ; and therefore it may become fit for the 
 formation of wind ; or, what amounts to the fame thing, it may be eafily 
 obftru&ed or put in motion horizontally by any fmall external power acting 
 upon it. 
 
 X. Of the apparent diurnal Motion of the Sun. 
 
 It is manifeft from obfervations, that the fan appears fir ft in the morn- 
 ing of every day toward the eaft, and difappears in the evening toward the 
 
 weft,
 
 24- A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 weft, as viewed from all places on land or at Tea. This is called the appa- 
 rent motion of the fun from eaft to weft, performing one whole revolution 
 of 360 degrees, to appearance, in the fpace of 24 hours. Near the 20th of 
 of March, and 20th of September, this motion is nearly in the arch of the 
 great circle which is equidiftant from the earth's northern and fouthern poles ; 
 and therefore the fun is then faid to move in the equator, or over the earth's 
 equinoctial line. 
 
 But the laws of the folar fyftem being fuch, that near the 20th of June, 
 the fun is apparently 23 degrees and a half north of the equator, and near the 
 20th of December 23 degrees and a half fouth of the equator, a viciflitude or 
 change of the feafons, from fpring to fummer, autumn, and winter, is afforded 
 for both the northern and fouthern inhabitants of the earth. 
 
 Thefe two apparent motions, the diurnal from eaft to weft, and the annual 
 from north to fouth, and from fouth to north, have no hiconiiderable fhare 
 in producing that variety in (ome cafes, and conftancy in others, which are 
 obferved in the winds of the Torrid Zone. 
 
 XI. Of the perpetual Trade-Winds, that blow from East to West, 
 
 in the Torrid Zone. 
 
 In the Torrid Zone, where the fun's apparent motion over the inhabitants 
 is almoft in a vertical manner, riling nearly eaft, and fetting nearly weft, and 
 his rays at noon fall nearly perpendicularly in a compact m inner, and the 
 fun-burnt earth neither overloads them with moifture, nor v ..v ualiry of 
 
 the lea makes reliftance to their operation, the wind muft tx nd 
 
 univerfal, tending diurnally to the weft, and annually towards the n rth and 
 fouth ; and its motion muft be purfuant thereto, as long as the obviating 
 coafts and mores will permit the air to move the fame way, without any 
 deflection, or impediment of fome other kind. 
 
 Dr. Halley demonftrates, that it neceilarily depends on the diurnal courfe 
 of the fun: thai the air, winch is lefs rarefied by his heat, and more pon- 
 derous, muft have motion towards thofe parts which are more rarefied and 
 [( ponderous, to bring it to an equilibrium. 
 
 Again, the prefence of the fun continually miffing to the weftward, that 
 part to which the air tends, by reafon of the rarefaction made by his greateft 
 meridian heat, is carried weftward, and consequently the tendency of the 
 w i.ole body of the lower air is that way. 
 
 Hence
 
 Of the perpetual Trade-Winds. 2 j 
 
 Hence is formed a general wind, blowing weftwardly, which being imprcflcd 
 upon all the air of a vaft ocean, the parts impel one the other, and fo keep 
 moving till the next return of the fun, whereby fo much of the motion as 
 was loft, is again reftored ; and thus the wind is made perpetual. 
 
 XII. Why the Winds blow North-wejlwardly or South-wefwardly ; alfo, the 
 Cause of Calms at particular Places in the Oceans. 
 
 From the fame principles, Dr. Halley tells us, it follows, that this wind 
 mould, on the north fide of the equator, blow from the northward of the eaft, 
 and, in fouth latitude, from the fouthward thereof, while the fun is upon or 
 near the line ; the air being there more rarefied, and his motion fwifter, than 
 at any diftance from it. Thefe motions, by his account, being fuperadded 
 to the former wind, anfwer all the phenomena of the general trade-winds. 
 
 Such is the tendency of the general trade-winds, near the line, while the 
 {m\ is near the equator, as Dr. Halley has clearly demonftrated. Hence it is, 
 that when the fun is near his greateft declination north, the winds to the 
 northward of the line afford ftronger and freftier gales, by the fun's prefence 
 there, and his quick apparent diurnal motion to the weft ward ; the air being 
 there more rarefied, and his motion fwifter than at greater diftances north 
 and fouth of the equinoctial. But wherever the fun is vertical, it generally 
 produces fqualls and rain, more or lefs, according to the fituation of the 
 place. 
 
 Again, when the fun is in the northern hemifphere, the winds to the 
 fouthward of the line are drawn even acrofs the line into north latitude. 
 This effect has the fun over the winds between the Coaft of Guinea and the 
 Weft-India Iflands. 
 
 When the fun is in the fouthern hemifphere, and near the fouthern tropic, 
 then are the winds to the fouthward of the equator ftronger by the fun's 
 prefence there ; and the winds to the northward of the line are drawn even 
 acrofs the line, into fouth latitude. This effett has the fun over the winds 
 between the Coaft of Brafil and the Coaft of Angola. Hence it is that twelve 
 degrees, viz. fix on each fide of the line, are commonly afligned for the fpace 
 of tranquillity or calms, occafionally produced by the fun's declination, fome- 
 times to the northward and at others to the fouthward of the line ; and the 
 calms upon the line are moft likely to happen when the fun is upon the line, 
 or within a few degrees on either fide of it. 
 
 E Although
 
 26 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Although geographers commonly allow twelve degrees for tranquillity, the 
 fun's tropical declination being extended more than twenty-three degrees, this- 
 more than doubly fufficeth to draw the faid vacuity from one fide of the line to 
 the other, with an half-yearly viciilkude, as is rnanifeft from obfervations. 
 
 XIII. Of Winds from 30 to 50 Degrees o/*North or South Latitude. 
 
 The wind, by adhering to the fun's diurnal courfe, upon its advance to- 
 twenty-eight or thirty degrees of either latitude, blows to the wefhvard per- 
 petually, efpecially at fea, where no land impediments fall in its way, either 
 to obftruct or divert it. 
 
 Yet, from twenty-eight to thirty degrees of either latitude, there being a 
 fpace of two degrees tranquillity intermediating between the faid north and 
 fouth-eafterly winds, it muft need ftagnate into a calm of fo confiderable a 
 breadth ; and this may juftly be termed the Shifting line of the Winds from 
 eaft to weft. This vacuity of two degrees may be faid to hinder the faid op- 
 pofite fluxes of air from approaching each other : hence it is, that the fame 
 wind was firft carried wefterly by the diurnal courfe of the fun, and fecondly 
 declined, by his annual motion, more north and fouth, thirdly, is often 
 deflected more obliquely by the inclinations of the fhores, and fourthly,, 
 is returned back again, periodically or perpetually, from near the oppoiite 
 points by the fea's iituation, which is finally (by the concurrence of its flux 
 underneath) carried perpetually quite contrary to the diurnal courfe of the 
 fun. 
 
 XIV. Of the Line in which the Winds_/t ft themfeives without the To rrid 
 
 Zone. 
 
 From thirty to fifty degrees of either latitude, there is a periodical or per- 
 petual wefterly wind blowing from the fouth-weft to north-weft, according" 
 to the different fcafons of the year, it being always influenced by the fun. 
 
 In the northern hemifphere, when the funs pre fence is there, the winds 
 are generally from weft to fouth-weft ; but, when the fun is abfent from 
 that hemifphere, the winds are generally from weft to north-weft, accom- 
 panied wjth frequent ftorms, the influence of the fun drawing the winds from 
 the northern to the fouthern hemifphere. Such are the winds in the Weftern, 
 Ocean between North America and Europe. 
 
 Li
 
 Of the Line in which the Winds/'//? without the Torrid Zone. 27 
 
 la the fouthcm hemifphere, when the fun's prcfence is there, 'the winds 
 are generally from weft to north-weft ; but when the fun is abfent from that 
 hemifphere, the winds are generally from weft to fouth weft, accompani ed 
 with ftorms and bad weather ; the influence of the fun drawing the wind from 
 the fouthern to the northern hemifphere. Such are the winds in the Ethiopic 
 Ocean, between the Coaft of Brand and Cape of Good Hope, to the Coaft of 
 New Holland. 
 
 In the aforefaid fpace, from thirty to fifty degrees of either latitude, the 
 wefterly winds are either periodical or perpetual, according to the fea's fituation. 
 
 XV. A general Account of the Trade-Winds, and their Jbifting, by 
 
 Dr. Halley. 
 
 " In the Indian Ocean the winds are partly general, as in the Ethiopic 
 Ocean partly periodical ; that is, half the year they blow one way, and the 
 other half near upon the oppofite points ; and thefe points and times of fhiftin°- 
 are different in different parts of the ocean : the limits of each track of fea, 
 fubjeft to the fame change or motion, are certainly very hard to determine ; 
 but the diligence (fays he) I have ufed to be rightly informed, and the care 
 I have taken therein, have in a great meafure furmounted that difficulty ; and 
 I am perfuaded that the following particulars may be relied on. 
 
 " 1 ft, That between the latitudes of ten degrees and thirty fouth, between 
 Madagafcar and New Holland, the general trade-wind, about fouth-eaft by 
 eaft, or eaft fouth-eaft, is found to blow all the year long, to all intents and 
 purpoies, after the fame manner as in the fame latitudes in the Ethiopic Sea. 
 
 " 2dly, That the aforefaid fouth-eaft winds extend to within two deo-rees 
 
 o 
 
 of the equator, during the months of May, June, July, &c. to November ; 
 at which time, between the fouth latitudes of three and ten decrees, beine 
 near the meridian of the north end of Madagafcar, and between two and 
 twelve, fouth latitude, being near Sumatra and Java, the contrary winds 
 from the north-weft, or between the north and weft, fet in and blow ftronsr, 
 accompanied with dark rainy weather, for half a year, viz. from the beginning 
 of November to April ; and this monfoon is obferved as far as the Molucca 
 Iflfes'j 
 
 " 3dly, That to the northward of two degrees, fouth latitude, over the 
 whole Arabian or Indian Sea, and the Gulf of Bengal, from Sumatra to the 
 Coaft of Africa, there is another monfoon, blowing from October to April, 
 
 E 2 upon
 
 A Nezv Directohy yor the East-Indies. 
 
 u r ja the north-eaft points; but, iii the I other half year, from April to 
 October, upon the oppoiite points of the fouth-weft and weft fouth-weft, 
 and that with rather more force than the other, accompanied with dark rainy 
 weather ; whereas the north-eaft blows clear. It is likewife to be noted, 
 that the winds are not fo conftant, either in ftrength or point, in the Gulf 
 of Bengal, as they are in the Indian Sea, where a certain and fteady gale 
 fcarce ever fails : it is alio remarkable, that the fouth-weft winds in thofe 
 feas are generally more foutherly on the African fide, and more wefterly on 
 the Indian. 
 
 " 4thly, That, as an appendix to the laft-defcribed monfoon, there is a 
 track of fea to the fouthward of the equator, fubjecl: to the fame changes of 
 the winds, viz. near the African Coaft, between it and the Ifland of Madagafcar,. 
 or St. Laurence, and from thence northward as far as the line ; wherein,, 
 from April to October, there is found a conftant frefh fouth,- and fouth fouth- 
 weft wind, .which, as you go more northerly, becomes ftill more and more 
 wefterly, fo as to fall in with the weft fouth-weft 'winds mentioned before, 
 in thofe months of the year, to be certain, to the northward of the equator." 
 Thus far Dr. Halley. 
 
 In the other months of the year, that is, from November to April, in the 
 beforemcntioned track of fea, to the fouthward of the equator, and between 
 Madagafcar and the Continent, there are found two very different and oppofite 
 winds, viz. from the equator to the north end of Madagafcar, the north-eaft 
 monfoon blows frefh and fteady gales ; between Madagafcar and Mofambique, 
 and as far to the fouthward as St. Auguftine's Bay, or the fouthern tropic, 
 the winds are from north-weft to north and north-eaft, with frequent ftorms 
 and dark rainy weather. 
 
 Thefe winds reach as far as the fouthern tropic, where they are met by the 
 foutherly or fouth-eaft winds, which blow at the fouth end of Madagafcar at 
 all times of the year : and they blow very ftrong at this feafon of the year. 
 Thefe foutherly or fouth-eaft winds, forcing themfclves to the northward 
 between Madagafcar and the Continent, and meeting the ftrong north-eaft, 
 north, or north-weft winds, repel each other with great fury : this occalions 
 terrible ftorms and tempefts. 
 
 The fouth-eaft or foutherly winds generally carry it againft the northerly 
 winds, efpccially to the fouthward of the fouthern tropic, where the fouth- 
 eaft, fouth, or fouth-weft winds blow all the year. 
 
 From October to April, the fouth and fouth-eaft winds moftly prevail 
 from the fouth end of Madagafcar, all along the coaft of Africa, quite to the 
 
 Cape
 
 A general Account of the Trade-Winds. 29 
 
 Cape of Good Hope, where the fouth-eaft winds blow very ftrong, and are 
 conftant at this feafon of the year. From the faid Cape to St. Helena the 
 iouth-eaft winds blow a freih and fteady gale, and thence to the equator. 
 
 XVI. Of the Shifting Trade-Winds, and their Dependence en the Sun's 
 Declination, and how they are in the Arabian Sea. 
 
 So ftrictly does the mutual concourfe of the north and fouth-eafterly trade- 
 winds obierve the equator, while the fun's diurnal motion is near the line ; 
 but, when his annual declination withdraws his vertical rays, and the air grows 
 cooler in his abfence, the direction of the faid winds, following clofe to his 
 greateft meridional heat, muft allb decline with him into the lame latitude, 
 whether it be to the north or fouth ; and thofe winds muft make their half-yearly 
 returns of fummer and winter alternately on each fide of the equator. 
 
 Befides, the faid fpace of rarefied air, ftill attending the fun's declination 
 fucceffively towards each of the tropics, and ftill intermediating between the 
 faid north and fouth-eafterly winds, muft needs ftagnate into a calm of fo 
 confiderable a breadth, on each fide of that fhifting line defcribed by the fun's 
 declination, as to hinder the faid oppofite flux of air from approaching each 
 other at their congrefs, this geographers commonly affign for a track of ten 
 degrees of tranquillity. The fun's tropical declination being extended to 
 twenty-three degrees and 4, it more than doubly fufficeth to draw the faid 
 vacuity from one fide of the line to the other, with an half-yearly viciffitude. 
 
 The Arabian Gulf, or that part of the Indian Sea which the faid fhifting 
 north and fouth-eafterly winds chiefly effect, being near the equinoctial, it 
 concurs very opportunely with the motion of the fun, either to remove them 
 all alternately out of that compafs, as not exceeding ten degrees on the fouth 
 of the equator, and twelve degrees to the northward of that line ; or, at leaft, 
 to abate their force in fuch meafure, that they cannot refift the fouth and 
 north-wefterly monfoons, which of courfe fucceed them from the oppofite 
 points every half-year, at their refpective feafons, in order to fupply the vacui- 
 ties left behind them. 
 
 Hence it comes to pafs, that the north and fouth-eaft trade-winds never 
 blow both at once within the compafs of the gulf or fiea aforefaid ; the one 
 being no fooner drawn off by the fun's declination, than the other is brought 
 on again by its own weight, to fill up the vacuity left on the other fide of the 
 equator. So it happens in April, when the fun, having pafie'd the line into 
 
 the
 
 30 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 the northern figns, at once carries off the north-eaft trade-wind or monfoon 
 from it, and draws thither the fouth-eaft wind after it ; which, from the 
 fituation of the aforefaid lea or gulf, turns it to the fouth and fouth-weft, and, 
 having repalTed it again to the fouthward, brings thofe winds back again, and 
 lb carries them backward and forward ; the one towards the line, and the 
 other forwards it, by an half year viciilitude. 
 
 It is father obfervable, that thofe eafterly trade-winds, and wefterly mOn- 
 foons, which happen at the fame time, blow jointly either towards the north 
 or fouth ; fo from April to October, they both blow to the northward, pur- 
 fuant to the fun's declination. On the contrary, they jointly, from October 
 to April, attend his prefence in the fouth. Therefore the wefterly monibons, 
 inafmuch as they blow north and fouth, are as effectually influenced by the 
 annual courfe of the fun, as the eafterly trade- winds are to blow hither or 
 thither at the fame feafon. 
 
 Hence it comes again topafs, that the laid fouth-eafterly winds, as Dr. Halley 
 obferves, extend from the aforefaid ten degrees fouth latitude, near the equator, 
 during the months of May, June, &c. to October, while the fun remains to 
 the northward of the line, to draw them thitherwards. On the contrary, 
 that there is blowing a north-eaft wind for the other half-year, from November 
 to April, the fun being on that fide of the line to attract it. Now why, or 
 how, thofe two eafterly trade-winds, fo intermixing, mould each be fupplied 
 for its refpective half-year by a wefterly monfoon from the oppolite point, and 
 to afllgn a caufe able to produce fo conftant an effect, leaves a phenomena of 
 the fhiftinsr trade-winds unaccounted for. 
 
 o 
 
 XVII. How the South and North -Western Monsoons are refpeC.:.dy 
 / regulated in the Arabian Sea. 
 
 Having fhewn in the former, that the fouth-eafteilv wind, which blows 
 perpetually from thirty to ten degrees of the fame latitude, is drawn eight 
 degrees nearer the line, on the caft tide of the Arabian Bay, from Apnl to 
 October, by the fun's declination northward; and that the fouth-weft monfoon, 
 Iv virtue of his laid declination, blows to the northward at the lame time ; 
 let us fee how it acquires a wefterly turn, by the faid bay's fituation on that 
 fide. 1 [ere it is obferveable, 
 
 Firft, that the African fhores, which coaft the ocean towards the weft, 
 cl eaft-northcrly from the Cape of Good Hope to Cape Corientes ; and 
 
 from
 
 Of the Monsoons in the Arabian Sea. jt 
 
 from thence it tends north-eafterly from Cape Corientes all along the equator, 
 and beyond it to the bottom of the faid bay, the land being high for the mod 
 part ; and the fea-winds being a heavy meteor, muft confequcntly, as ftrictly 
 obferve their direction, as rivers do the banks which bound them. 
 
 The winds mufl follow as far as they reach, efpecially at that feafon ; 
 becaufe a ponderous load of winterly air, and foul weather, drives them thither- 
 ward with more vehemency (as Dr. Halley takes notice) than any other winds 
 that trade in thofe leas. Moreover, it is evident from experience, that in the 
 winter feafon, whether ftormy or otherwile, the winds generally follow the 
 direction of the coaft or fhores. From the Cape of Good Hope to Cape Corientes 
 jt is moftly from weft to fouth-weft ; and from Cape Corientes to the equator, 
 it is moftly fouth fouth-weft, as the coaft or fhore lies. 
 
 Befides, the faid fouth ocean (whofe fuperficies fuftains that fouth-weft 
 wind all the while) fending its tide directly northward to the faid bay, and its 
 being contracted on that fide by the inclining fhore, the flux of its coafting 
 current muft be proportion ably haftened, and confequcntly communicate to 
 the fuperincumbent fouth- wefterly monfoon a more fixed and fteady deter- 
 mination : this drives its flux as deep into the bay as it went before. 
 
 In confequence whereof it is obferved, that a conftant current of the fea, 
 for all that track from Madagascar to the equator, entering the fouth-weft 
 corner of the Indian Ocean, (where the monfoon s firft begin to fhiftj carries 
 the fuperincumbent air along with it down into the Arabian Gulf; and, as 
 Dr. Halley affirms, a conftant frefh fouth-wefterly wind, blowing along that 
 coaft on both fides the line, which, the further you go northerly, ftill blowing 
 more wefterly, falls in (fays he) with the fouth-wefterly monfoon, or rather 
 gives it a beginning, by falling in with it in April, and ending with it in 
 October. This plainly demonftrates, that they compofe, and become, as it 
 were, the fame undifcontinued flood of water and wind conjoined, without 
 any diftinction, while the fun's north declination encourages the fouth-weft 
 wind to blow, and withdraws that north-eafterly wind, which otherwile 
 would oppofe it. 
 
 This monfoon blows more foutherly on the African fhore, and more weft- 
 erly on the Indian ; and further to the northward it blows more wefterly. 
 
 Hence it comes to pafs, that the fouth-weft monfoon being derived from 
 the joint current of wind and water aforefaid, and following the fouth-weft- 
 erly direction of the African Shore, which contracts and enforces it both by 
 land and fea, having palled the equator, its proper limit is the bottom of the 
 
 Arabian
 
 32 A New Directory for the East-Indies 
 
 Arabian Bay ; whereas the fouth-eaft trade-wind, which blows at the lame 
 time on the fouth fide of the line, never reacheth it, for want of the like 
 afliftance from any more, or current to help it forward ; but on the contrary 
 falls (hort of its natural courfe at leaft two or three degrees, being repulfed 
 by the contrary motion of the wind and fea. 
 
 To derive the north-weft monfoon regularly from the fame fource, or 
 current of water refluxed, which brought the other monfoon directly from 
 the fouth- weft ; it is to be noted, that the bay wherein they are both propa- 
 gated is of a triangular figure, the fubtenfe of whofe north angle, pointing 
 dire&ly eaft and weft, feparates the faid bay, on the fouth, from the wide 
 ocean, with a barrier compofed of ifles and mallows ; whereon the faid fouth- 
 wefterly current falling obliquely, and entering into the gulf at its fouth - 
 weft angle, it is reflected from near the corner thereof, toward the other end 
 of the faid barrier, where the ftream refunds it again, by an eafterly outward- 
 bound paifage, into the ocean whence it came ; drawing the incumbent 
 north-weft monfoon after it from October to April, its proper feafon. 
 
 Conformable to the fcheme of the fouth-wefterly flux, and north-wefterly 
 reflux, of the faid current, Dr. Halley affures us, that a frefh wefterly wind 
 attends it down the bay, in which, the further you go northerly it ftill blows 
 more wefterly, till they both approach near the eaftern fhore, where the 
 current (being now on its return towards the ocean) veers about to the 
 northward, and thence wefterly, till it falls in with the oppofite eaftern coaft, 
 following its direction as far as the Maldivia Iflands, which tending lineally 
 to the fame point, it fteers on its courfe forward ten degrees further, till it 
 reaches the equator. 
 
 Whilft the faid current, defcending into the bay, goes on difperfmg its 
 ftream into almoft calm water, the oppofite eaftern fhore re-collecT:s it again, 
 and revives its motion by the like degrees, till it has palled the faid Iflands 
 up to the line, where it falls in exactly with the north-weft monfoons ; and 
 thereby ftirs up a motion in the incumbent air of that tendency, the oppofite 
 iouth-eaft trade-wind being already withdrawn by the fun's declination. 
 
 Therefore it muft carry that monfoon, io raifed, along with it, and in the 
 fame direel ion ten degrees further, to its proper limit, till it meets with the 
 faid wind to flop it ; and then the ftream underneath, having pafled over the 
 aforefaid barrier of ifles and lhoals, is refunded into the ocean whence it came. 
 
 Thus both of the wefterly monfoons are equally beholden to the fame 
 current; that, from the fouthward, as being carried down the Arabian Bay 
 
 towards
 
 Of Monsoons in the Bay a/" Bengal and China Si^as. %■$ 
 
 towards the north-cair, by its direct courfe ; and this, from the northward, as 
 returned back again by its reflux into the fouth-caft, in compliance with the 
 ftreams underneath ; yet with this difference, that, becaufe the water meets 
 no oppoiite ftream to difpute its paflage, it is perpetual. 
 
 On the contrary, the concomitant fluxes of the wefterly monfoons upon 
 the oppofmg trade-winds, alternately deiift, and become periodical ; thofe eag- 
 erly winds within their compafs overpowering all oppofition, lb as either to 
 reftxain the contrary monfoons, or fet them at liberty, while the fun's fouth 
 or north declination, by half-yearly returns, alternately fets on^ the cafterly 
 winds, or takes them off again. 
 
 Hence it is, that the fouth-wefl monfoon begins to blow in April, whea 
 the fun's entrance in the north figns withdraws the oppoiite north-eaft trade- 
 wind, which difcontinues till October. 
 
 But when the fun, by repafling the line into the fouth latitude, brings it 
 on again, the north-weft; monfoon blows, and continues the other half-j'-ear, 
 from Oclober to April ; from the equator to ten degrees fouth latitude, and 
 then delifts, with regard to the fouth-eaft trade-wind, which raifeth to coun- 
 termand it. 
 
 Thus land breezes, which follow the ftreams of frefh rivers, are naturally 
 perpetual ; neverthelefs they are driven back periodically, by the fait floods, 
 till their ebbs gives them leave to return again, and blow feaward as they did 
 before. 
 
 Again ; from Oclober to April, notwithftanding the north-eaft trade-wind 
 has driven back the oppofite louth-weft monfoon from its adhefion to the 
 direct courfe of the fouth-wefl: current which produceth it, its ftream being 
 refluxed, and retaining in former force, muft gradually decline the motion of 
 the incumbent air from the eaftward to the weftward of the north, till it has 
 repafled the line to the fouthward, and effectually raifed the north-wefterly 
 monfoon. Otherwife there might be produced a calm. 
 
 Hence it is that thofe north and fouth-eafterly -winds, which follow the 
 diurnal courfe of the fun, never blow on both fides of the equator at once; 
 and that that current of the fea, to which are afenbed the contrary fouth and 
 north-wefterly monfoons, ferves only, when and where thofe eafterly winds 
 intermit, to determine the motion of the air that way, and to fupply their 
 refpeftive vacuities till their return. 
 
 Farther, that thofe two fhifting winds, which blow at once, tend jointly 
 either to north or fouth, and ftill towards the fun ; that the inequality of 
 their fummer's levity, and winter's gravity, may give force and celerity to the 
 
 F " motion,
 
 34 -A Nine Directory fr the East-Indies. 
 
 motion, fo a? to be the fame north and fouth winds, but differently directed 
 on each fide of the equator ; eafterly by the fun's diurnal tendency, and weft- 
 erly by the current aforefaid. 
 
 XYI1L ILzv the Shifting Winds or Monsoons, are propiigiitcd in the 
 Bay of Bengal and the China Seas. 
 
 Forafmuch as the Bay of Bengal and Sea of China, are alike affected 
 by the weftern monfoon, and at the fame time ; and all three lie collaterally 
 to each other, and lineally to the fame ocean which produced the aforefaid 
 current ; the tidal tumour thereof (to render the caufe co-extenfive with 
 it? effect) mil ft fpread it fell" comprehensively over them all at once, to 
 produce a general and uniform commotion in the air. 
 
 Farther, if that monfoon be not (o conftant in ftrength in the Bay of 
 Bengal as it is in the Arabian Bay, it is becaufe the ocean, being contracted 
 all along the African Shore, more immediately affects it, and fo muft 
 needs give the wind a more fixed and ftead) determination there, than 
 after it is dilated by a greater expanfion. 
 
 Befide, the Bay of Bengal being of a triangular figure, as well as the 
 Arabian Bay, and they lying reflectively in the fame horizontal pofition, 
 the tidal motion of the lea, which, with the aforefaid current, fills into 
 them both with the lame obliquity, muft equally effect them directly \\ ith 
 a fouth- w efterly monfoon, and reflexcdly with a north-eafterly one. 
 
 But it is farther to be obferved, that both of thefe bays are conjoined and 
 open towards the fouth, and are alike fubtended by the barrier aforefaid ; 
 therefore on that fide, the, north-weft monfoon, as being jointly directed 
 by them both, m ich co-extenfivelv along with it, from the eaftward 
 
 of the north end ot Mad ar to Sumatra, and from the equator to ten 
 
 d rees louth latitude, as is found by obfervation. A 
 
 But as to the Chinefe Sea, although it lies on the - fame fide of the line, 
 and according to the f.une fouth- weft direction, with open mouth towards 
 the Indian' Ocean, and partakes of the laid fouth-weft monfoon, yet its chan- 
 nel more refpecfuig the north and fouth points than the bays aforelaid do, 
 it- flux of air, as well as of water, muft needs deflect the fame way. Farther, 
 it being an oblong track of water, and not triangular, beliJe being a 
 thoroughfare paflage out of one lea into another, it can by no means : 
 its ftre^m, either ( i water, back towards the fouth- eaft in favour of a 
 
 north-weft monfi ... 
 
 From
 
 Of Monsoons m the Bay of Bengal and China Seas. 35 
 
 From what hath been faid on this fubjecl, it appears plainly, that a place 
 fo affected with the monfoons muft lie upon or near the equator, to fhift them 
 with the fun's declination, both northward and fouthward, according to the 
 different feafons of the year ; therefore all Teas of any other polition, are 
 incapable of the like alteration. 
 
 Beiides, the figure of that part of the Indian Ocean which is fo affected, 
 muft be triangular, with an inlet at its fouthweft angle, to receive the dream 
 of water which conducls the fouth-weft; monfoon into the bay. It muft 
 likewife have an outlet at its fouth-eaft corner, to fet the north-weft monfoon 
 off again by the oppofite point ; as this appears by the fpecial fervice of every 
 part of the faid bay. 
 
 Further, it was requifite that a barrier, confifting of iflcs and fhoals, fhould 
 pafs between the fouth-weft and fouth-eaft pafikges, to ftrengthen the afore - 
 faid current into a ftream, becaufe it almoft ftagnates in the middle of the 
 gulf, in order to ftir up the incumbent air into a north- weft monfoon. 
 Withal, it was to be of a proportionable breadth, to continue its flux over 
 that rampire for fix degrees together into the foutberly ocean, to meet the 
 fouth-eaft trade-wind, which was to flop it before it ceafed. 
 
 This barrier was to be but of a mean ftature ; neither fo hi eh as to hinder 
 the tide or current from pafling over it, that it might be favourable to both 
 the fouth and north-weft monfoons, by letting the one enter the bay as freely 
 at the weft end, as the other to go off at the e.ift ; nor yet .0 low, as to admit 
 its flood in fo full a manner, as to controul or obftruct their fhifting motion. 
 
 Moreover, the fouth-weftern current of the wind, which coafteth the 
 African Shore, from near the Iflc of Madagafcar to the equator (to which 
 Dr. Halley allows a periodical flux from April to October, yet terms it only, 
 an appendix of the fouth-weft monfoon till it hath pafled the line) till it hath 
 pafled the equator, it remains out of the fun's power to give it check, and 
 return it whence it came by his Southerly declination. 
 
 XIX. Of the Winds which are contrary to the Trade-Winds and 
 Monsoons ; or which are acherfe to the general Eafterty JFiuds and are 
 perpetual. 
 
 Firft, Northward of the line, between four and text degrees of latitude, 
 and between the meridians of Cape Verde, and the other eafternmoft iflands 
 that bear that name ; Dr. Halley tells us, there is a track of lea, wherein it 
 
 were improper to fay there is any trade-wind, or yet variable. The little 
 
 F i winds
 
 3& A New Directory for the East-Indies.- 
 
 winds there, are only fome fudden or uncertain gufts of very little continu- 
 ance, and a fmall extent, which he affigns to the track between two contrary 
 winds ; one on the north fide, blowing eafterly from the faid Cape toward 
 Guiana in America ; and the other on the fouth, from Brafil toward Guinea 
 in Africa. Probably this might turn the interjacent air into a whirlwind, 
 did not that part of the ocean, where the Atlantic and Ethiopic floods meet, 
 concur to keep it fixed, thefe being neither to flux nor reflux, that might 
 difturb its quiet. 
 
 Secondly, In that track of fea, which on the fouth lies next adjoining to 
 this, the foutherly and fouth-weft winds are perpetual, viz. all along the Coaft 
 or Guinea, for above five hundred leagues together, from Sierra Leona to the 
 Ifle of St. Thomas. Thus the fouth-eaft trade-wind, upon its entrance into 
 the Straits (in compliance with the fouth- wefterly tendency of the fea 
 current along the Brafilian Shore) becomes fouth, fouth-eaft, and by degrees 
 full fouth ; but, in being carried down with the ft ream toward the Guinea 
 Shore, veers about to fouth-fouth-weft, and by degrees to fouth-weft and 
 weft-ibuth weft : at laft, the current of water is repulfed by the eaftern 
 fhore of Guinea, returns toward the fouth (whence it came) to make 
 reftitution ; and, being ingulfed by the tides detumefcency, is carried off by 
 libration thither, and deflects the fuperincumbent current of air into the fouth' 
 after all, to complete its circulation. 
 
 To thefe reafons, afiigned by Dr. Halley, may be added the following- 
 inftances of the fame truth. 
 
 Firft, All along the weftern coaft of Peru, for above five hundred leagues 
 together, from near the Magellanic Straits as far as the Gulf of Panama, an. 
 uninterrupted and almoft perpetual flux of air attends the current of water which 
 fupports it, blowing from fouth. to north, or within a point or two to the 
 weftward, according to the different inclination o[ the fhore. The exhalations 
 which compote this wind fall down from the Andes out of the eaft, and the 
 u cftern Pacific Ocean lies wide open to receive them, yet without giving 
 a beginning to an eaflerly trade- wind, for all that length of fhore, till fifty 
 leagues off at fea. 
 
 Secondly, A perpetual flux of air or wind adheres to the coafting current 
 
 of the African Shore on the Ethiopic fide, from the Cape of Good Hope to 
 
 near the moil foutherly part of Guinea. This conftantly blows foutherly, by 
 
 the draught of the ftream underneath ; the wind keeps that flux of water on 
 
 foot, by its conftant defcent from the adjacent lhcre, and both tend thitherward 
 
 by the mutual afiiftancc of each other. 
 
 Such
 
 A general Account of the Trade-Winds. 37 
 
 Such is the adhefion of the incumbent air to the water, when they are got 
 into motion, and have free liberty to follow the fame direction. Otherwife each 
 may be flopped, or both be deflected feveral ways at once, as the fouth-weft 
 monfoon before mentioned. It may be there obferved, that whilft the fouth-eaft 
 wind was withdrawn, and the wind was pafling along the Coaft of Africa 
 down into the Arabian Gulf, jointly with the ftream that conducted it, and 
 after the current had ftagnated in the middle of the bay ; as foon as it revived 
 its motion toward the fouth-eaft, it began to purfue its reflected direction : 
 but, when the fouth-eafterly wind put a flop to its career, and the current 
 reflected towards the north-weft began to revive and gather ftrength, the 
 north-weft monfoons did {o too, and fell in with it, attending it through the 
 fouth-eafterly paflage into the wide ocean, where both ceafed together. 
 
 By this means fea-faring winds disorder thofe of the eaft, which are conflant 
 by the influence of the fori. In fome feas they are promoted too foon, and 
 accelerated, as near Cape Verde. In fome other feas they are retarded. In others, 
 they are extended and enlarged far beyond it, as all along the Guainean Coaft. 
 In others, thwarting by their tranfverfe courfe from fouth fo north ; as on the 
 weftern fhores of Angola and Peru, for a thoufand leagues together. In others, 
 blowing directly from the oppofite point ; as along the louthernmoft part of 
 Guinea, from Sierra Leona to the bottom of the bay. All this perpetually. 
 
 Yet, in the Indian Ocean, thefe fea bred gales are fo complying as to yield 
 readily to the periodical forces of eafterly trade-winds, and reflectively to 
 fupply all the vacancies left behind them in their abfence. 
 
 From the fame principles it may be inferred,, that on the Coaft of India, 
 when the calms are more frequent than ordinary, tempefts and hurricanes happen, 
 as on the Coaft of Coromandel and Sea of China. Thefe conftantly arife at the 
 end of the wefterly monfoons, and therefore are commonly called the breaking-up 
 of the monfoons ; and every where a calm attends them. 
 
 Of the Conflant Trade -Winds, Monfoons, periodical Trade-Winds, 
 Land and Sea Breezes, and variable Winds that conw/onlj bk%o 
 in the Eaft-Indies. 
 
 XX. Of the conjlant South-East Trade- Wind. 
 
 In the Eaft-Indies, there is only one trade-wind that blows conftantly from 
 the SE. quarter, between the latitude of 12? to 28? or 30? S. and from 
 New Holland quite to Madagafcar, and the eaft Coaft of Africa. This trade, 
 
 from
 
 38 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 from the middle of" May to the middle of September, extends more northerly, 
 viz. to the latitude of 8? 6? 2? S. and fometimes to the equator, efpecially in 
 the eaftern parts of India. Though this is faid to blow conflantly, yet it 
 doth not, properly fipeaking ; but fomtimes varies quite round : this however 
 is feldom. When it happens near the equinoxes, mips between Mauritius 
 and the Cape have very ftormy weather. 
 
 XXI. Of the Periodical Trade-Winds, or Monsoons. 
 
 The periodical trade-winds, or monfoons, are ufually faid to blow fix months 
 from one quarter, and fix months from the oppofite quarter ; of which there 
 are four in India, viz. the SW. and NE. the SE. and NW. monfoons. 
 
 The SW. monfoon blows from about the middle of April to the middle 
 of October ; and from the latitude of 2? S. as far northward as Japan, except 
 in tli a Perfian Gulf and the Red Sea. The NE monfoon blows through the 
 fame track, from the middle of October to the middle of April. 
 
 The NW. monfoon and its oppofite are confined to a more narrow fpace, 
 viz. between the latitudes of 2? and 1 2? S. and from New Holland to the 
 north end of Madagafcar. The NW. prevails in this track, all the time the 
 NW. monfoon blows to the northward of the equator ; and the SE. monfoon, 
 during the other half of the year ; which is all the time that the SW. monfoon 
 blows in north latitude. 
 
 XXII. Of the fair and rainy Seasons. 
 
 All over the Eaft-Indies, the wefterly monfoon, as well NW. as SW. brings 
 the rainy feafon, with frequent fqualls and dirty weather ; and the Eaflerly 
 monfoon brings fair weather, except on the Coaft of Coromandel, and the 
 north part of Zeloan, where the rainy feafon is from October to January. 
 
 XXIII. Of the changing of the Monsoons. 
 
 The changing of the monfoons is commonly gradual, and fome years 
 happens near a month fooner than in others. The change of the NE. and 
 SW. monfoons is often attended with violent fiorms, which to the eaflward 
 of Malacca are called TufFoons, and to the weftward the Breaking-up of the 
 Monfoons, They ilem much the fame as Weft-India hurricanes ; but never 
 happen at the change of the N W. and SE. monfoons, though in thofc tracks, 
 at that feafon, there is often very bad weather. 
 
 XXIV.
 
 Of Corf ant Trade-Winds and Monsoons In the East Indies. 30 
 
 XXIV. Of the Land and Sea Breezes. 
 The land and fca breezes prevail, more or lets, near almoft all the coafts 
 in India, during the NE. monfoon: they alfo blow fomctimes during SW. 
 monfoon, but not fo general. 
 
 XXV. Of the variable Winds. 
 
 The variable winds prevail chiefly in the Straits of Malacca, Perfian Gulf, 
 and Red Sea : likewiie all over the Indian Seas northward of 1 2? South latitude, 
 near the changing; of the monfoons. 
 
 XXVI. Of the South -We st Monsoon.. 
 
 The SW. monfoon begins to blow, near the Coaft of Africa, foon in March ; 
 and towards the end of that month, along the fhores of Arabia Felix (within 
 the Red Sea) to Cape Rofulgat. Early in April, it prevails along the coafts 
 of Guadel, Seindy, Guzurat ; and quite to Surat, by the middle of that 
 month. But, from Bombay, along the Coaft of Malabar, as far as Cochin, 
 this monfoon is not well fet in till between the latter end of May, and the 
 middle of June, by which time it is general. • 
 
 From Cochin fouthward to C. Comorin, the monfoon begins half a month 
 fooner than at Bombay ; and at Tuttacareen Bay, and along the fouth fide 
 ■ofZeloan, about a month fooner than at Bombay, viz. between the end of 
 April and the middle of May. 
 
 At Bengal, and along the Coaft of Orixa, this monfoon begins early in March ; 
 but more to the fouthward, fo far as Due Point, it begins fifteen or twenty 
 days later ; and on the Coaft of Coromandel, it is between the latter end of 
 April, and the middle of May, before it is well fet in; but, along the NE. fide 
 ofZeloan, from Crankanella to Point Pedro, it begins earlier by half a month, 
 viz. between the middle and ejid of April. 
 
 Along the eaftern fhores of the Bay of Bengal, it is between the middle 
 and latter end of May before the SW. monfoon prevails, by which tune 
 it is general. 
 
 In the Bay of Siam, 'and along the Coaft of Cambodia, Cochin-china, 
 Tonquin, and China, the SW. monfoon begins, as on the Coaft of Golconda, 
 between the beginning and end of April : this is along the fhores ; but at a 
 diftance from the land, it is near a month later. For this reafon, along the 
 north end of Borneo, Luconia, &c. it does not blow till between the firft 
 and la ft of May. 
 
 XXVII.
 
 40 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 XXVII. Of the North-East Monsoon. 
 
 As the SW. monfoon continues only fix months, and begins foonefr. near 
 the fliores, it therefore ceafes there firft ; and the oppofite one (NE.) begins 
 nrft near the fliores, (except clofe to the Malabar and Guadel Coafts, where 
 it never blows fteady) and then fpreads like the other, till it becomes general 
 through all thofe feas, as above mentioned, where the periodical wind blows. 
 ■ To know therefore when a particular monfoon begins at any given place, 
 it ought only to be confidered at what time the oppofite monfoon begins, 
 and in what track ; and about fix months afterwards the other monfoon may 
 be expected. 
 
 XXVIII. Of Monsoons in the Strait of Malacca. 
 
 The Strait of Malacca has not yet been mentioned, though it lies in the 
 track of the S\V. and NE. monfoons, becaufe the influence of thofe monfoons, 
 that blow only the breadth of Sumatra from it, and of the land and lea winds 
 upon the adjacent fhore, is fo great, that it may rather be called a track of 
 variable winds ; for no monfoon prevails long here. 
 
 During- thofe feafons that the S\V. or NE. winds blow ltroncreir. without 
 the Strait, it commonly blows gentle gales moft part of the day, from the 
 fame quarter within ; that is, from the eafhvard in December and January, 
 and from the weftward in June and July. 
 
 XXIX. Of the South-East and North-West Monsoons. 
 
 The SE. and N\V. monfoons differ in nothing from the SW. and NE. 
 monfoons, but in the track and quarters they blow from, as both already 
 mentioned. The SE. winds fet in from ten to twenty days fooner to the 
 eafhvard of the meridian of Bengal, than to the weftward of it. 
 
 XXX. Of Land and Sea Breezes in Malacca Straits. 
 
 Through all India the NE. and NW. monfoons, when near done, blow 
 faint ; and then the land and fea breezes begin near the fliores, and continue to 
 blow, more or lefs, (except on the Malabar coaft) until the oppofite monioon 
 commences, and gathers fufficicnt ftrength to blow fteady : confequently 
 there are land and fea breezes in February aiid early in March, along the 
 north coaft of Africa, the Coaft of Arabia Felix, and eafhvard near Guzurat, 
 which yield to the SW. monfoons that prevail in March and April. The 
 fame is to be underftood of land and fea breezes along the fliores of China, 
 
 Cambodia,
 
 Of Land and Sea Breezes in the Malacca Straits. 41 
 
 Cambodia, Siam, the weft coaft of Sumatra, Java, Straits of Banca, and 
 the Eaftern Iflands ; alfo over all the Bay of Bengal. 
 
 la the fame manner the SW. and SE. winds, having continued for five or 
 fix months, grow weak : and fooner or later in October, according as the 
 place lies, the land and fea breezes begin to blow, from four to fix, along the 
 laft mentioned fhores of Africa, Arabia, Zeloan, Bengal, China, Sumatra, 
 Java, &c. but not fo frequent nor ftrong, as in oppofite feafons ; except on 
 the Malabar Coaft, where they begin to blow from Surat fouthward to Cape 
 Com or in. 
 
 XXXI. Of the Land and Sea Breezes on the Malabar, Guzurat, 
 
 and Guadel Coasts. 
 
 Though the NE. monfoon is in general faid to blow in its feafon, where- 
 ever the oppofite SW. wind blows ; yet this is not (ftrictly ipeaking) true ; 
 the Malabar, Guzurat and Guadel Coafts being an exception to it ; for, 
 though the NE. wind blows (in the proper feafon) through the fea weftward, 
 from the coafts to Africa, yet near the above fhores it never blows fteady 
 for any time. 
 
 On the contrary, between the latter end of October and middle of No- 
 vember, the land and fea breezes begin along thefe coafts, and continue for 
 four 'months and iometimes longer. 
 
 Thefe are fucceeded by almoft conftant winds from NNW. to WNW. 
 winch continue till the SW. winds prevail, in May and June. Therefore 
 there are little and no land or fea breezes on thefe coafts, between the decay 
 of the NE. and beginning of the SW monfoons ; but from the failing of 
 the SW. monfoon (October or November) till the ftrength of the oppofite 
 wind is almoft (pent (February or March) there are almoft conftant land and 
 fea breezes ; which is three times longer than any other open coaft in India 
 has the advantage of. 
 
 A fhip bound to the weftward, between the middle of November and 
 the middle of January, will foon crofs the track of the land and fea 
 winds on thefe coafts, and get into the fteady NE. winds ; but later, fhe 
 muft be a great way off fhore, before fhe reaches the NW. monfoon ; 
 not that the land and fea breezes ever reach far off fhore, but the winds 
 from NNW. to WNW. do ; and, if fo late as the middle of April, 
 me will fcarce have any NE. winds at all ; but will be obliged to work 
 with the winds from between the north and weft until the SW. monfoon 
 commences. 
 
 G XXXII.
 
 42 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 XXXII. Of the North-West Winds on the Coafl of Malacca. 
 
 Thefe NW. winds in February, March, and April, blow fometimes fb 
 frefh, and caufe fuch a fea, for fourteen or fifteen days, that even a good fhip 
 cannot work to the northward ; but they feldorn or ever blow with fuch 
 violence forty, fometimes thirty leagues off more. 
 
 If a land wind blows from thefe coafls, either in the night or morning; 
 a fhip, working along, may depend on a fea breeze, or at leafl a wind along 
 the coafl: from the north-wefhvard, to cany her in more again : and neither 
 is the land or fea breeze ever attended with fqualls of thunder or rain, as the 
 land winds frequently are on every other coafl in India. 
 
 XXXIII. Of Land and Sea Breezes in the Bay of Bengal. 
 
 When the land and fea breezes fail on the Malabar Coafl, they begin 
 (about the middle of February, or beginning of March) at the north end of 
 Zeloan, the Coafls of Coromandel, Golconda, Orixa, Bengal, Aracan, Pegu, 
 and Tanaffary. They are ufually moderate, as thofe on the Malabar Coafl: ; 
 but near the end of March (and fometimes fooner) the land winds begin at 
 Bengal to come off from the NW. quarter, with a furious fquall, much 
 thunder, lightening, and rain ; though fometimes without rain. 
 
 XXXIV. Of Land Squalls from Bengal to Zeloan. 
 
 Soon after what hath been before mentioned, the land fqualls begin to 
 come off at Bala fore, the Coafl of Orixa, Golconda, and fo proceed fouth- 
 ward to Zeloan, where they begin to blow late in April, and continue to 
 come off, at times, during the whole SW. monfoons, quite from Zeloan to 
 Bengal. They blow oftener, and ufually (but not always) more violent, in 
 April, May, June, and July, than in Augufl or September, efpecially between 
 Vizagapatam and Point Palmiras. 
 
 XXXV. Of Land Squalls Eastward to China. 
 
 The land fqualls prevail in the fore-mentioned months along the Coafls of 
 Aracan and Tanaflary, Cambodia, and China ; but not fo frequent, and feldom 
 io violent, as on the Coafl of Orixa. 
 
 The coafl of Pegu, frum the Negrais to the Syrian, is feldom or never 
 troubled with them ; but on the weft Coafl of Sumatra, and both fides of 
 Java, in March and April, the land winds come off, almofl every evening, 
 in a fquall ; fometimes very hard, with thunder, lightening, and rain ; which 
 
 bcins
 
 O/'Land Squalls Eastward to China. 43 
 
 being foon over, is fucceeded by a fair, moderate laud breeze, that continues 
 uiually until the Tea winds begin. 
 
 The fea winds on this coaft, in April and May, fet in fometimes with a 
 violent, though fliort fquall ; which feldom or never happens on any other 
 ihore. 
 
 Along the Coafts of China, Tonquin, Cambodia, the weft Coafl of 
 Sumatra, and Java, a land breeze is certainly fucceeded by either a fea breeze, 
 or a wind along fhore, diffident to bring any (hip, that ran off with the 
 land breeze, in with the land again, in the fame manner as is mentioned on 
 the Malabar Coafl. 
 
 It is quite otherways on the NE. fide of Zeloan, the Coafts of Coromandel, 
 Bengal, Tanaflary, and the weft fide of the Bay of Siam ; for there the land 
 wind, or rather the prevailing wind, will blow fteadily for three, four, to 
 twelve days, and at Bengal, and Coafl: of Tanaflary, often longer. 
 
 This happens on the Coaft of Coromandel, and on the weft fide of Siam 
 Bay, during the ftrength of the SW. monfoon, in May, June, and July ; as 
 thole along the Coaft of Tanaflary and Bengal happen at the oppofite months 
 of November, December, and January. 
 
 In the fame manner, the SW. monfoons conftitute a frefh, fometimes a 
 violent fea wind on the coaft of Tanaflary, Pegu, Aracan, Bengal, Malabar, 
 and Cambodia, that blows with little variation during the months of May, 
 June and July ; as the NE monfoons do on the oppofite lhores of Siam Bay, 
 the Coafts of Coromandel, Zeloan, and north Coaft. of Africa. 
 
 XXXVI. Of the Variable Winds in the Indian Seas. 
 
 At a dhtance from the lhores, the winds become variable, through all 
 the Indian feas, northward of 12? S. latitude, in March, April, October, 
 and November; that is, near the changing of the monfoons. 
 
 In the fea between Africa and the Malabar Coaft, the NE. winds growing 
 weak in March, are frequently interrupted ; fometimes with the wind from 
 the SE. or SW.- but uiually from the NW. quarter. Therefore the winds 
 may be faid to vary only between the NNE. and WNW. for in the middle 
 of this fea, late in April, the wind has been known to blow a gentle gale for 
 eight days, at NWbW. and NW. and, when the SW. monfoon grows weak, 
 late in September, the fame (WNW. to NNE.) winds commonly prevail 
 till the NE. monfoon commences. 
 
 In much the fame manner and time (March and October) the variable 
 winds prevail in the Bay of Bengal ; but as it commonly blows from the NW. 
 
 G 2 quarter,
 
 4+ A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 quarter, between Africa and the Malabar Coaft, fo in this bay they commonly 
 prevail more from the NE. than any other quarter : thefe laft are however ha 
 the other leas. 
 
 XXXVII. Of the Winds in the China Seas. 
 
 Throughout the China feas, the variable winds perfectly refemble thole in 
 the Bay of Bengal. 
 
 In the ibuthern track of fea, between 2° and 1 z? South latitude, the winds 
 about the changing of the monibon, are more perfectly variable rhan any 
 where in India ; however, if they prevail more from any one point than 
 another, it is from the weftern quarter, or NW. to WSW. 
 
 XXXVIII. Of the Winds in the Red Sea, and Persian Gulf. 
 
 The Red Sea, and Gulf of Perfia, though only feparated by Arabia, have 
 different winds. The winds blow almoft nine months in the year up the Red 
 Sea, from the fouthward, viz. from the end of Auguft to the middle or 
 latter end of May, when the wind veers to the N. and NNW. and commonly 
 blows fo till late in Auguft. 
 
 In the Perfian Gulf, the winds blow almoft nine months down the gulf, 
 from the NW. quarter, and about three months up. Thefe winds are not 
 {o regular, nor of fuch duration, as thofe in the Red fea ; for they frequently 
 interrupt each other, and are frequently interrupted by hard gales from the 
 SW. chiefly off Cape MufTe Idem, and fometimes by land breezes, which lafl 
 prevail fometimes in the Red Sea. 
 
 In the Perfian Gulf, the NW. and WNW. winds prevail almoft all the 
 time the Ibutherly winds blow in the Red Sea, viz. from the end of Sep- 
 tember to July ; from which time, till near October, the SE. winds are moft 
 frequent. 
 
 XXXIX. Of Storms and great Calms in India. 
 
 Squalls and very bad weather fometimes happen in moft parts of Indi;?, 
 cfpecially during the wefterly monfoons ; but devouring florms, and tedious 
 calms (almoft as bad in their coniequences as florms) generally happen near 
 the Ihirting of the monfoons ; that is, the florms, from the middle of April 
 to the middle of June, and from the end of September to the end of 
 November ; the calms, in March, April, and May. 
 
 Between
 
 Of Stoums and great Calms in India. 45 
 
 Between the Malabar Coafit and Africa, when thefe ftorms happen (which 
 is not every year) they nfually blow harder, and happen oftener, between the 
 middle of May and middle of June, than in October and November. They 
 firft begin with hard fqualls and rain, and blow chiefly from the WSW. and 
 are preceeded by a very great fquall from that quarter, one, two, or three 
 days. Thofe that happen in November commonly begin in the eaftern quarter, 
 and veer round to WSW. and SW r . The calms in this fea are feldom of long 
 continuance; but are moft troublefome to fhips bound weftward, in March 
 and April, from Cochin, &c. through the Lacadive 1 (lands ; where fome- 
 times very little progrefs will be made in five or fix days. 
 
 XL. Cf Stokms and great Calms in the North Part of the Bay ^Bengal. 
 
 In the Bay of Bengal, there fometimes happen as fevere ftorms as any in 
 the world : thefe are, however, more violent at Bengal, and along the Coafts 
 of Orixa, Golconda, and Coromandel, than any of the ihorcs eaftwatd of 
 Cape Negrais. They happen alfo oftener ; and are generally, though not 
 always, more violent in October and November, than in the oppofite fieafous 
 of April, May, or June. 
 
 At Bengal, and all northward of Cape Negrais, the ftorms that happen in 
 'October and November (for they feldom or never come earlier or later) begin 
 with a drizzling rain, and the wind about ESE. the wind then increafes, and 
 veers to E. ENE. NE. and N. and ends there ; except it is extremely furious, 
 in which cafe it fometimes veers to NNW. and NW. where it ends, blowing 
 hardeft from the NNE. to NNW. or NW. quarter, with heavy rain the whole 
 time. At this feafon a ftorm will fometimes blow for a day or two, from E. 
 ENE. to N. and then all calm for a few minutes ; and then begin to blow 
 feverely at SSW. for half an hour, and quickly end with fair weather. This 
 is not near fo hard as the laft-mentioned ftorms ; but is like them, attended 
 with much rain, and continues much longer, for the fevere ftorms laft not 
 above fix or eight hours. 
 
 At Bengal, the ftorms that happen at the beginning of the SW. monfoon, 
 are early in June : the moft fevere begin at WSW. with rain, and veer to W. 
 WNW. and NW. where they blow ten or twelve hours with great fury, and end. 
 
 A ftorm at this feafon, to the fouthward of Point Palmiras, will fometimes 
 begin as above ; and then veer from NW. to N. NNE. and NE. after which, 
 falling calm for a quarter of an hour, it will begin again, and blow hard at 
 SW. for an hour or two longer, and then end ; or it will begin at ESE.. veer 
 
 to
 
 46 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 to E. ENE. and NE. then fall calm, and begin again at SW. &c. as above. 
 Thefe lbrras are not neat io hard as the laft-mentioned, that end in the NW. 
 quarter; all of them are attended with rain. 
 
 XLI. 0/"Storms #//</great Calms in the South Part of the Bay o/"B£Ngal. 
 
 On the Coromandel Coaft, and all over the Bay weftward of the Andaman 
 Iflands, and fouthvvard of Cape Negrais, the ftorms that happen in October 
 and November blow with great fury from the WSW. to WNW. and NW. 
 Sometimes they begin in the SE. but oftener in the NE. quarter. The ftorms 
 at the other feafon happen ufually between the middle of April and middle of 
 May ; they always begin at NNE. veer to the NE. and E. or EbS. where it 
 ends. It blows hardeft from NE. to E. is attended with much rain and a very 
 great lea. The large furf on fhore, with thick weather, and perhaps drizzling 
 rain, mews its approach, twelve hours at lead, before it comes. Sometimes, 
 at this feafon, it will begin, as above, at NNE. veer to NE. E. S. SE. and 
 then to SW. where it will end, with great fury : this, however, is feldom ; 
 but when it happens, is remarkably fevere. 
 
 Upon this coaft there happen fometimes hard gales from the NE. about 
 January ; but thefe are by no means fo hard as the April ftorms. It is alfo 
 remarkable, that both the April and January ftorms blow much harder to the 
 fouthward than northward, that is, between Pondicherry and Negapatam, 
 than Madrafs and the north end of Armagon. 
 
 If any damage arifes from thefe ftorms to (hipping, it is' caufed by the 
 great fea, and cf-> too near the fhore ; fo that, if the cable parts, they have 
 not room to veer; for it feldom or never blows lo hard but a fhip may 
 carry her courfes, and clear the land, Handing to the. ibuth-eaftward. 
 
 Calms are feldom of long continuance here : they happen chiefly in February, 
 March, and April, in the middle of the Bay, and near the eaftern lhores ; alio 
 along the NE. Coaft of Sumatra, quite up to the Straits of Malacca. 
 
 v. 
 
 XL1I. Of Storms and great Calms in the China Seas. 
 
 The China feas and adjacent illands are liable to fevere ftorms and fhort 
 calms, at the lame feafons, and from the lame quarter, as thole in the Bav 
 of Bengal, northward of the Negrais ; fo that what is already faid of them, 
 is, in all rclpccts, true here: only let it be added, that ftorms happen fometimes 
 
 {boner
 
 Of Storms and great Calms in the China Seas 47 
 
 fooner here than in Bengal ; for they have been met with in Anguft and 
 September, as well as October and November : thofe in September and 
 October are moft frequent and violent. 
 
 XLIII. Of Calms near the Equinoctial Line. 
 
 Between the latitudes of 12? and 2? S. it is already faid, violent ftorms 
 feldom or never happen : however, there are calms that laft four, five, and 
 fix weeks. Thefe calms happen always, more or lefs, in March and April ; 
 and between 2? or 3? north, and 2? or 3? fouth latitude ; and between the 
 meridian of Bengal, and that of the Maldivia Ides. They are not of long 
 continance every year, though femetimes they extend beyond the above- 
 mentioned limits. 
 
 Of the Monsoons on the Coast of Malabar. 
 
 XLIV. Of the Setting-in of the North-East Monsoon. 
 
 After the full or change of the moon, near the latter end of October, or early 
 in November, the fair weather fets in, and puts an end to the SW. monfoon, 
 which is the bad weather and rainy feafon. This monfoon generally breaks 
 up with thunder and lightning ; and a ftorm of wind comes on in the SE. 
 quarter, which blows violently for feveral hours, with abundance of rain ; 
 then veers round the compafs, and moderates. So ends the SW. monfoon. 
 If the SW. monfoon breaks up without a ftorm, there generally happens a 
 ftorm in December, as was the cafe in 1 76 j. 
 
 After the NE. or fair-weather monfoon is let in, as above, you may fail up 
 or down this coaft with great- iafety, the winds then blowing from the NW. 
 N. to NE. not only without ftorms, but without fqualls, or any kind of 
 uncertain weather ; ib that you may carry all your fails, night and day, 
 without any fear of fqualls, ftorms, &c. The weather then is fo ferene, clear, 
 fair, and pleafant, that no weather in any part of the world, can be compared 
 to this on the Coaft of Malabar. This weather continues during the months 
 of November, December, January, and February : therefore thefe are the 
 beft months for the navigation up and down this coaft. 
 
 XLV.
 
 48 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 XLV. Of the Land and Sea Breezes. 
 
 Every day, about eleven or twelve o'clock, the wind comes from the 
 fea, and is called the fea breeze ; this generallv comes on at WSW. or W. a 
 fair pleafant gale, and veers round gradually to the northward. Towards fix, 
 eight, or ten o'clock in the evening, fooner or later, as it happens, the wind 
 comes off the land ; fometimes after a fhort interval of calm between the 
 breezes, and fometimes none. 
 
 The land-winds, which blow between the NE. and ESE. are fometimes 
 but faint when they firft come on, but foon increafe into a fine frefh gale, 
 which continues till nine or ten o'clock the next day, and then turns to light 
 airs, or calm, till the fea-breeze comes in, as abovementioned. This regula- 
 rity of the land and fea breezes greatly facilitates the navigation of mips failing 
 up and down this coafr. 
 
 During the time of the land winds, you ought to take care to get a good 
 offing in thirty fathom water or thereabouts, in order to make advantage of 
 the lea-breeze. In that depth of water you will be five or fix leagues off 
 fhore, in fome places more or lefs. Alfo take care to be within two or three 
 miles of the ihore by feven or eight o'clock in the evening, before the wind 
 blows from thence. 
 
 You may, in moil: places along this coaft, ftand in fhore to twelve, ten, 
 or eight fathom; and, if you find yourfelf near the land before the wind 
 blows from thence, you may either 4-^> or make a fmall trip of it, as there 
 is no current at this feafon. 
 
 XLVL Of Currents near the Malabar Coast. 
 
 A great regard mud: be had to the currents, which, during the calm that 
 intervenes the change of the breezes, may in a little time make you lofe the 
 advantage you have gained. If you find the current fets ftrong againfr. you, it 
 is beft to c}-} with your coafting-cf-}, and wait for the breeze, either from the 
 land or fea. In the months of November, December, January, and February, 
 by experience there are found little or no currents. From Cape Comoiin to 
 Bombay, in that feafon, a ihip hath palled in twenty days without letting go 
 an 4A. 
 
 In the months of March and April, the fca-breezes are ftronger than in the 
 f ur laft months : the land winds are very faint, and fcldom come off till the 
 morning; the fea-wind, or rather the N\V. or north-wefterly winds conti- 
 nuing
 
 Of Winds near the Coast of Malabar-. 40. 
 
 nuing till then ; and when the land-wind comes off, it is very leant (about 
 NNE. or NE. by N.) fo faint, and its continuance fo mort, that you reap but 
 little advantage from it, being obliged to run right off more with it to get au 
 offing, in order to make the raoft of the fea-winds. The fea-wind generally 
 comes on to the northward of weft, and foon veers round to the northward ; 
 and frequently with little winds and calms. 
 
 It often happens that the fea-wind (with which you fometimes lie a tolerable 
 flant along more) will induce you to {rand on longer than you intended ; by 
 which means you get clofe in more, in hopes to get a fpirt of land-wind, to 
 run you off again ; but perhaps find yourfelf deceived. 
 
 In this cafe you may be obliged to ftand off, with the wind at NNW. or 
 NW. very much to your difadvantage. During the months of March and 
 April, there are little or no land-winds ; therefore you mufl have no depen- 
 dence on them. 
 
 The winds blow almoft for a conftancy from N. by E. and NNE. to 
 NNW. and NW. and fometimes WN W. but moftly in the N W. quarter : and 
 at the full and change of the moon it blows very ftrong at NW. with a large 
 lea, and a ftrong foutherly current, which makes the navigation up the Coaft 
 of Malabar at this time of the year, very tedious; but on the contrary, very 
 favourable for failing down it. There 'are fometimes fpirts of wind foutherly, 
 which continue for three, four, five, or fix hours, moie or lefs ; fometimes 
 a frefh breeze, at other times very faint ; fometimes you will have fmart 
 fqualls off the land, but they are very foon over. 
 
 XLVII. 'To fail up the Coast of Malabar to advantage . 
 
 Thofe who are determined to fail up along the coaft, in thefe months, 
 ought to keep a very good offing, as the general method will not now do ; 
 and when they ftand in more in the evening, with the fea-breeze fas the 
 wind generally northerns in the evening) inftead of <=f-^» to wait for the 
 land breeze, ought to ftand off again, with the northerly wind, into 30, 
 35, or 40 fathom water, and there <f-}, in order to be ready for the next 
 day's fea breeze. The wind generally abates about midnight, and continues 
 fainting away till ten, eleven, or twelve o'clock the next day, when the fea- 
 breeze comes on again. 
 
 Be fure always to <f} as often as it falls little wind or calm, on account 
 of the foutherly current, and generally a fwell from the NW. This is the 
 only method to get ground, and to keep what you have got. 
 
 H XLVIII.
 
 50 A New Directors for the East-Indies. 
 
 XLVIIT. Of Stretching off the Coajl of Malabar. 
 
 Commanders of mips, who have formerly experienced the trouble, fatigue 
 and tedioufnefs, of a paffage up along the coaft, in the month of May, or 
 near that time of the year, have ftretched out to the wefhvard, and made 4, 
 5, or 6 degrees wefting, where they have met with conftant wefterly winds, 
 and made their pafiage to Bombay or Surat, in half the time that mips have 
 done, by keeping along the coaft : therefore this muft certainly be the beft 
 way at that time of the year. 
 
 In this month (May) the weather is very uncertain, the winds variable, the 
 fky frequently very cloudy, feemingly threatening much wind, fqualls, and 
 rain ; though in general nothing comes of it ; but paffes off in a flight fhower 
 of rain, with much lightening, to the fouth-eaftward. In this month the 
 wind blows frequently from S. and SW. and fometimes very ftrong, efpecially 
 down the coaft, to the fouthward of Tillicherry, where the monfoon always 
 fets in before it does further to the northward. Alfo it iets in to the north- 
 ward (at Surat and that way) fooner than at Bombay. 
 
 Notwithftanding the uncertainty of the weather in this month, the wind 
 is moftly in the NW. quarter, and frequently blows pretty frefli from thence j 
 and then the weather is generally clear and fair : but when the wind is SE. 
 fouth, or fouth-wefterly, which often happens, the Iky is always over-caft, 
 &:c. as if a ftorm was coming on. 
 
 XL1X. Of the Setting-in of the South-West Monsoons. 
 
 Towards the latter end of May, if it happens to be the full or change of 
 the moon, or early in June, it is fure to bring in the SW. monfoon and rainy 
 weather. This generally comes on with the iky loaded with heavy clouds, 
 threatning a violent ftorm. The monfoon begins in a violent ftorm, from tne 
 SE. with much thunder, lightening, and a deluge of rain, continuing for 
 feveral days, with a prodigious great fea conftantly rolling in upon the 
 fhore. During the month of May the weather is fultry hot, and almofl 
 infupportable ; but more fo fome years than others. 
 
 As the SW. monfoon fets in with ftrong gales from the SE. the wind' veers 
 round to the fouth and fouth-weftward ; and indeed the wind, during this 
 monfoon, blows moftly between the SW. and W. During the months of 
 June and July the weather is fo bad upon this coaft, that the navigation 
 thereof may juftly be faid to be impracticable, it being almoft one continued 
 ftorm and tempeft of wind and rain, with a great fea from the SW. though 
 
 there
 
 ■ 
 
 Of the Settlng-hi of the Sooth-West Monsoons. 51 
 
 there are fome intervals when it ceafes raining, the winds moderate a little, 
 and the fun now and then makes its appearance : thcfe intervals are generally 
 but of (hort duration, and frequently do not happen for days together. 
 
 In Auguft, the monfoon being more fettled, and the winds more moderate, 
 with longer intervals of fair weather, the (hips that have wintered at Bombay 
 depart thence for the Coaft. of Coromandel, and other parts to the eaftward. 
 In this month there is much rain, with frequent hard fqualls ; ftorms are 
 much to be feared, and too frequently happen. The winds are moftly from 
 SW. to W. but fome times extend to W. by N. and WNW. 
 
 In September the weather is fairer than in Auguft. Indeed there is more 
 fair weather than foul ; often fair for feveral days together, with a good deal 
 offun-fhine: but yet you are not free from the apprehenfion of florins, the 
 iky being often over-caft, and the horizon oblcured with a thick haze. Some- 
 times you meet with heavy fqualls, and much rain, with a large f\\ eH from 
 the SW. rolling in upon the fhore ; and in 9 or 10 fathom water, this fvsell 
 looks as if it was going to break. Some years there are dorms and tempefts 
 in this month. The winds are much the fame as in Auguft, from SW. to 
 W. and WNW. Ships frequently fail near this coaft, from Bombay, in this 
 month. 
 
 In October the weather is much the fame as in September, until the full 
 and change of the moon ; and then the weather is very precarious, the monfoon 
 generally changing at the latter end of this month, or early in November, 
 according as the full or change happens. It always breaks up in a violent 
 tempeft of wind in the SE. quarter, with a deluge of rain, and much thun- 
 der and lightenino". 
 
 . It is not to be underftood here, that the monfoon changes exactly at the full 
 or change of the moon, but perhaps two, three, four, or five days before or 
 after. 
 
 In the year 1760, the SW. monfoon broke up on the 2d of November, 
 though the moon did not change till the 7th ; and that with a violent tempeft, 
 in which his Majefty's fhip Cumberland foundered, at her anchors, near Goa. 
 In 1762 it broke up on the 6th of November, in the fame manner; it was 
 full moon on the ift : in this the Winchelfea Indiaman, having juft failed from 
 Bombay, fuffered very much ; was obliged to cut away feveral of her mafls, 
 and throw moft of her guns over-board. Great damage was done by this 
 ilorm, to feveral other mips that were on this coaft. The Guardian, one of 
 the company's cruifers, at the fame time being on a cruife in the offino-, 
 
 H 2 loft
 
 52 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 loft all her mafts, and was in great diftrefs. After the monfoon is changed 
 there is the fineft weather in the world, gentle gales, a fmootli lea, and as 
 fine a temperature of! air as can be wilhed for. 
 
 Of the Monfoons and Currents ■ near the IJland Zeloan or Ceylon. 
 L. Of the North-East Monsoon near the Coafls of Malabar and 
 
 COROMANDEL. 
 
 The new or full moon, at the latter end of October, generally brings about 
 the change of the monfoon from the SW. to the NE. both on the Coaft o£ 
 Malabar and Coromandel ; but this change of the monfoon has very different, 
 effects on the two different coafts-. On the Coaft of Malabar the NE. mon- 
 foon brings on the fair weather. On the Coaft of Coromandel, the NE. mon- 
 foon brings on violent tempefts and ftorms, with, almoft a conftant heavy rain, 
 thunder and lightening; or, during the intermiffions thereof, dark, cloudy, 
 hazy weather, and a great fea perpetually rolling hv upon the fhore. 
 
 LI. Of the North-East Monsoon- on the Coafl o/"Ceylon. 
 
 As the Ifland Zeloan, from its fituation, is equally contiguous to both the 
 above-mentioned coafts, of confequence thofe parts oppofite to the Coaft of 
 Malabar, from Point de Gall, along by Columbo, and the weftern coaft of 
 Zeloan, to -the northward of Jafanapatam, partake of the fair and foul weather 
 as it happens on that coaft. Thofe that partake of the weather as it happens 
 on the Coaft of Coromandel, are from Dunder-Head along the eaftern Coaft, 
 of Zeloan to Point Pedro, or thereabout. 
 
 Along the fouthern Coaft of Zeloan, it may with truth be faid, that the 
 wefterly winds prevail all the year round, in a greater or lefs degree ; for in the 
 height of the NE. monfoon, there are regular land and fea breezes (in the 
 evening the wind comes off the. land at E. or NE. and about noon the 
 feabreeze fets in from the W. and SW.) all the. way between Point de Gall' 
 and Dunder-Head. 
 
 There you meet the NE. winds, blowing generally very ftrong; and they 
 continue thus all along the eaftern Coaft of Zeloan, with a continual ftrong 
 fouth-wefterly current. This current lets off the land from Dunder-Head 
 toward the Maldivia Iflands; and thereby many mips have been driven from 
 Zeloan to thefe iflancl?, in little winds or calms, by not taking proper care to- 
 keep the Coaft of Zeloan clofe on, board; for, by keening the coaft on board, 
 
 from
 
 Of the .North-East Monsoon on the Ccajl 9/" Ceylon. kt, 
 
 from Duncler-Head till you are pad Gall, you keep out of the current ; and, 
 by keeping in loundings, you may anchor upon occafiom 
 
 LII. Of the Noktii-East MonfooN in the Gulf s/Manara. 
 
 In the Gulf of Manara, which lies between Cape Comorin and Zeloan, 
 durino- the NE. monfoon, the winds blow conftantly in the NE. quarter, and 
 frequently very ftrong ; but off Point de Gall it decreafes, and dies away. 
 
 Mod of our Directories make mention of the currents fetting in and out 
 of this °-ulf, at the different feafons of the year ; and that a fhip bound to the 
 Malabar Coaft, in the NE. monfoon, in order to fall well in with Cape 
 Comorin, ought to codft it along Zeloan, as far as Cslliture, before me erodes 
 the °ulf ; and that a (hip from Cape Comorin, bound to Zeloan, fhould take 
 care to fall in to the northward of Point de Gall, on account of the current 
 fetting out from the Gulf of Manara. But fome experienced navigators declare 
 they have never found much out-fet in the NE. monfoon, nor in-draught in 
 the SW. monfoon, the many times they have crolTed this gulf; but always 
 found the reckoning very exact, both from Cape Comorin to Point de Gall, 
 and from Point de Gall to Cape Comorin : however, the caution is proper 
 eaough, as you cannot err in 10 doing. 
 
 LIII. Of making a Passage to Bengal, or Coromandel. 
 
 Ships bound to Bengal, or the Coromandel Coaft, in the NE. monfoon, 
 coaft it along Zeloan, as far as Dunder- Plead ; the ftrong NE. winds and SVV. 
 current preventing their coafting it further along this iiland. From this 
 place, or hereabouts,, they generally put off the coaft, and Itrctch over to the 
 eaftward, and make Acheen-Head, or the Nicobar Iflands ; from whence the 
 Bengal lhips generally keep along the eaft coaft, all the way ; but thole 
 bound to the Coaft of Coromandel ftretch over again, from thence or thereabouts, 
 acrofs the bay, for the Coaft, taking care to fall in to the northward of their 
 port, on account of the current which always runs ftrong to the fouthward, 
 m the NE. monfoon. 
 
 Sometimes fhips, by doing as above mentioned, make very fpeedy paflages, 
 and fometimes the reverfe. 
 
 Many inftances have been known, of both kinds ; among which are the 
 following.. 
 
 In December, 1760, admiral Cornifh failed from Tillichery, with a fquadron 
 of his Majefty's (hips, bound to Madrafs. They took their departure from 
 
 the
 
 54 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 the SE. part of Zeloan, flood over to eaftward, and made, by their reckoning, 
 between 13 and 14 degrees eafting ; having been out of fight of land twenty- 
 three or twenty-four days, and expefting to make the Nicobar Iflands ; but, 
 to their great furprife, they made the I (land Zeloan again. 
 
 I» December, 1758, his Majefty's lhip Queenborough failed from Bombay 
 for Madrafs, with five fail of Indiamen under her convoy. They took their 
 departure from Dunder-Head, or thereabouts, and ftretched off to the eaftward. 
 The Shaftefbury, one of the Indiamen, being a very heavy failer, the reft 
 parted company with her, and left her to fhift for herfelf. 
 
 They continued ftanding to the eaftward, and made a tolerable paffage to 
 Madrafs in forty-one days ; and then, to their great furprife, found the 
 Shaftefbury at Madrafs, and that me arrived ten or twelve cays before them. 
 The Shaftefbury coafted it near Zeloan, and kept in fhore all the way to 
 Madrafs, and arrived about the beginning of February ; therefore it may be, 
 that all pafiages made from Zeloan to Bengal, or the Coaft of Coromandel, 
 in the NE. monfoon, are entirely the effect of chance, and merely accidental, 
 whether good or bad. 
 
 L1V. Of a Passage near the South Coast of Zeloan, from 
 
 March to October. 
 
 At the latter end of March, or beginning of April the wefterly winds 
 begin to fet in ftrong at Point de Gall, and thereabout. They blow conftantly 
 till October ; but do not reach fo far as Trincomalay, or Point Pedro, till the 
 latter end of April, or begin nig of May. 
 
 In the month of April, about Batacalao, Trincomalay, and Point Pedro, 
 and all that part of Zeloan, you have the winds variable and moderate ; the 
 fea-winds in the day-time are from E. to SE. and generally veer round to the 
 ibuthward towards evening. Early in the night the wind comes off the land 
 from SW. to W. During this month (April) you have a very ftrong northerly 
 current about this part of Zeloan, (from the Friar's Hood to Point Pedro) 
 running in common 1 \ knot, and many times 2 knots, from NNW. toNNE. 
 fo that fhips at fea, bound to Trincomalay, at this time of the year, mould 
 take care to fall in 10 or 12 leagues to the louthward, on account of the 
 current fctting fo ftrong to the northward. The nearer the land, the ftronger 
 the current ; but 20 or 22 leagues from the land you have none of this current. 
 
 The fquadron found the bad effects of not keeping to the fouthward in 
 April, 1762, hi a paflage from Madrafs to Trincomalay : then the fquadron 
 
 fell
 
 Of a Passage near the South Coast of Zeloan. $5 
 
 frll in a little to the northward of Trincomalay, were in fight of the flag-ffalF 
 point, yet were driven by the current half way to Point Pedro ; and fome whips 
 did not get in for feven or eight days after they made the land. If they had 
 kept to the fouthward of Trincomalay, as above mentioned, they might have 
 got in the fame day they made the land. It was advifed to keep to the fouth- 
 ward of Trincomalay, and to make the land in eight degrees latitude ; but 
 that advice being rejected, the confequence was as before mentioned, and the 
 fquadron was feven days longer at fea before they got into Trincomalay Harbour. 
 
 LV. Of a Pajfage near the North-East Coast of Zeloan, in May, 
 June, July, August, September, and October. 
 
 About the eighth, tenth or twelfth day of May, the weflerly winds fet in 
 ftrong about Battacalao, Trincomalay, and Point Pedro ; and blow lb, without 
 intermifiion, all May, June, July, and AugufL When thefe wefterly winds 
 come in, the current letting ftrongly to the northward ceafes : fo that from 
 Eatacalao to Trincomalay, Point Pedro, and to Negapatam, there is not found 
 any current in thefe months, nor till the middle of September. Then the 
 winds begin to vary, and the current always goes with the wind. 
 
 From Batacaloa to Trincomalay and Point Pedro, in Auguft, the wefterly 
 wind fometimes ceafes about noon, and is fucceeded by a fea-breeze at E. or SE. 
 till towards evening, when the wefterly wind comes ftrong off the land again. 
 Thefe kinds of winds will frequently happen in Auguft, with fome rain. 
 
 In September and Oclober, the winds and weather are much the fame as on 
 the Coafl of Coromandel ; and about the new or full moon, the latter end 
 of October, the current runs as faft. to the fouthward, as it did in April to the 
 northward. Off Point Pedro, about that time of the year, in fight of land, 
 and in foundings, the current feveral times in the day hath been found to fet 
 different ways ; yet by the next day at noon it hath fet forty-eight or fifty miles 
 to the fouthward, more than the run would give it in twenty-four hours ; fo 
 that in forty-eight hours a fhip has been fet from Point Pedro to Friar's Hood, 
 with little wind, and the weather hazy, with rain. When it has cleared up, 
 looking out for Trincomalay, the fhip has been found a-breair. off the Friar's 
 Hood, and been obliged to coaft it back again to Trincomalay, clofe in fhore. 
 The current in thofe forty-eight hours had let the fhip ninty-four miles more 
 to the fouthward than the run would give ; and not only to the fouthward, 
 but the eafhvard. 
 
 Therefore
 
 56 A New Directory for the East-Indies 
 
 Therefore fhips from the Coaft of Coromandel, bound to Trincomalay, at 
 this time of the year, mould be fure to make the land about Point Pedro, 
 and keep Zeloan clofe on board, to prevent being fet paft their port by the 
 current, which runs 2 or 3 ' knots to the fouthvvard and fouth-eaftward, 
 at this time of the year. 
 
 By all means let them be adviled to keep in foundings, and in calms and 
 light winds to 4-^ if they find they deepen their water ; for the current 
 will fet them out of foundings, in a calm. 
 
 At other times of the year there has not been found any current between 
 Batacalao and Negapatam ; for when the wefterly winds fet in flrong, the 
 current ceafes hereabout, within five or fix leagues from the coaft. 
 
 Of the Monfoons and Currents near the Co a ft of Coromandel. 
 
 LVI. Of the South-West Monsoon. 
 
 The months of June and July differ but little one from the other, the SW. 
 monfoon being then in its height ; and the land-winds blow constantly, for 
 feveral days together, very flrong at WSW. and ■ W. When they are 
 moderate, you commonly have a fea-breeze from S. SSE. or SE. this brings 
 about a very agreeable change of air that is very refrefhing ; for the wefterly 
 winds, during thefe two months, are fultry, hot, and almoft infupportable ; 
 they are very unhealthy, but more fo fome years than others. 
 
 Thefe land-winds fometimes blow with fuch violence, that they darken 
 the air with the duft and fand they raife from the fhore ; they reach a good 
 way oft at fea : but this happens only in dry feafons ; for when the fqualls 
 are more frequent, the rains prevent this effect, of the winds. Commonly 
 about the end of June, and in July, rather in Auguft, the fqualls and rain 
 are more frequent. When the wefterly winds blow the hardeft, it hath 
 been remarked, there is frequently the greateft furf on the fhore, particularly 
 at Madrafs, where many of the bar-boats have been overfet at thefe times. 
 Thele months the currents fets ftrong to the northward. In the offing the 
 winds are con flan t from SW. to W. 
 
 Early in the month of Auguft the land-winds begin to be not fo lafting ; 
 but you have more regular fea and land breezes from the SE. veering toward 
 evening to S. and fo to SW. neverthelefs you have frequently hard fqualls off 
 land, w itb much rain, and fometimes thunder and lightening. 
 
 Towards
 
 Of the South-Wkst Monsoon*. 57 
 
 Towards the end of Auguft, thefe hard fqualls frequently come from the 
 WNW. and fometimes NW. they come on in the NE. quarter, and blow 
 very fmart for an hour or two, with much rain ; then varying round to ESE. 
 and S. blowing very ftrong all the while ; then fometimes back round to the 
 eaftward again, in a hard (quail, with rain. When it veers round to the SW. 
 you have moderate and fair weather. The current continues ftrong to the 
 northward all this month. 
 
 In the month of September the weather is uncertain, and the winds vari- 
 able with fqualls and rain ; but though the winds and weather are inconftant, 
 the wefterly winds prevail more than any other, often varying from SW. 
 to W. and fo round to NE. The day-breezes blow fometimes from 
 NE. but oftener from SE and SSE. In general from whatlbever quarter 
 the wind blows, it is very moderate ; except a few fqualls, which are 
 violent when they blow from the land, but of fhort duration. The currents, 
 which all this monfoon fet with the wind (trans: to the N. and NNE. 
 flacken in September ; fo that about the time of the equinox they make 
 to the fouthward, and run ftrong by the end of the month. 
 
 October is the moft inconftant month of the year on this coaft; the 
 winds are then exceeding changeable, with frequent fqualls, calms, rain, 
 and fair weather. The NE. monfoon is not perceivable till the middle, 
 or towards the latter end of this month ; nor is it certain then. The 
 currents during; this month fet (Iron 2; to the fouthward. 
 
 LVII. Of the fetting-in of the North-East Monsoon near the Coafl of 
 
 CoROMANDEL. 
 
 At the fetting-in of the NE. from the SW. monfoon, when the winds 
 vary toward the SE. they are pretty frefh, but when to the NW. little 
 winds and frequent calms. Sometimes in the forenoons it will blow frefh 
 from the eafterh board, and fometimes for two, three, or four days, from 
 NNW. very frefh, with hard fqualls and rain ; and in the afternoons, from 
 NE. or ENE. with thick rainy weather, and a prodigious great fwell 
 continually rolling in upon the fhore, which makes the lauding, or coming 
 off fhore, almoft impracticable. 
 
 This variety of fqualls, rain, and dark, cloudy, hazey weather, obfeures 
 the horizon, feems to threaten violent ftorms and tempefts, which, however, 
 feldom happen ; but when they do, they generally prove fatal to (hips which 
 remain upon the coaft at fuch times ; therefore all (hips mould depart this 
 coaft by the icth, 15th, or 20th of this month, at fartheft. 
 
 1 A melancholy
 
 58 . A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 A melancholy inftahce of this happened at Madrafs on the 21ft and 2 2d of 
 October, 1763. It was full moon the 21. This day the florin came on in 
 the fame manner as at Pondicherry, with the wind at NNW. and N. his 
 Majefiy's fhios Norfolk, America, and Weymouth, alfo a great number of 
 merchant-fhips, being in the road. The men of war, forefeeing the ftorm 
 coming on, prudently flipped, and went to fea before the wind came to the 
 eafhvard ; the merchant-fhips, by not following their example while the 
 wind was to the northward, but lying in the road till the wind came to the 
 e.iftward, found it out of their power to go to fea. Many of them foundered 
 at their <+-} ; others were driven a-ihore, and entirely loft. This lofs was 
 computed at twelve lack of rupees, befides the lofs of many lives: but, although 
 the men of war got out, and had lea- room enough, they loft all their mafls, 
 and were in great diflrefs ; ib that it was with great difficulty they could keep 
 above water, the fea running verv high, and ib confufed, that it ran in heaps, 
 and flove in their ftern- windows, and wafhed every thing overboard out of 
 their great cabin and ward-room. 
 
 This great and confufed fea was occafioned by the wind blowing fo hard at 
 north for feveral hours, and then flying about ib fuddenly to the eaftward, 
 where it blew hardeft of all. This gale lafled atmofl two davs. Thefe 
 florins are confined fometimes within very narrow bounds ; they are very 
 violent at fome places, and hardly felt at others. 
 
 The ftorm at Pondicherry, 1761, was but little felt at Madrafs, and much 
 lcis at Tricaba and Negapatam : iome of the men of war coming from Trin- 
 comalay, were at fea in the offing of thefe two places, and felt little of it ; 
 but had a great and confufed fea : nor was this ftorm felt fo far to the fouth- 
 ward as the lair-mentioned places, although lo violent at Madrafs. 
 
 The florms that happen in the NE. monfoon very feldam reach fo far to 
 the fouth ward as Trankabaf or Negapatam ; and the florms that happen in 
 the petty monfoon, on the full or change of the moon in the latter end of 
 April', or the beginning of May, feldom reach ib far to the northward as 
 Madrafs, but mollly happen on the fouth part of the coail. In this monfoon 
 it is alio very dangerous, as happened in 1749, when his Majefty's .fhips- 
 Namur and Pembroke were loll, with all their crews, off Porta Nova ; as 
 were feveral other fhips; and all the fquadrbn fullered very much. 
 
 1AIII. Of the North-East Monsoon near the Coafl of Coromandel. 
 
 How far foever the NE. monfoon may be advanced in this month, voir 
 have, during its continuance, variety of winds, moil ly from NNE. and NE. 
 
 They
 
 Of the North-East Monsoon. 59 
 
 They commonly blow in the morning from NW. and NNW. and in the 
 afternoon from NNE. to NE. and fometimes from SE. to SW. for a day or 
 two ; but this does not frequently happen. The former part of this month Is 
 fubjecl to calms for feveral days together: thefe are commonly followed by 
 ilorms, with abundance of rain, which happen more at this than any other 
 time of the year. They are often fo violent, that no fhip can poflibly ride 
 at <f-^ ; generally beginning at NW. and from thence chopping iuccefhvely 
 to NNE. ENE. and E. and the fea rifes fo prodigioufly as to foam a league 
 off the fhore. 
 
 If thefe tempeftuous winds drift from eaft to fouth, they moderate, and the 
 iky grows clear : but if, after having blown violently from the NE. a calm 
 eniues, prefently it blows hard from SE. S. or SW, with rain and a great 
 fea. Some years thefe hurricanes have not happened, or they have not blown 
 fo violent ; {o that (hips might ride fafe in the roads ; but as this is precarious, 
 it is better not to abide on this coaft. Strong foutherly currents all this 
 month. Out in the bay the winds blow from NNE. to ENE. with frequent 
 ftorms and much rain. 
 
 The monlbon is more resrular in December, the winds are more conftant, 
 and there is lefs rain. On the coaft they generally blow in the morning from 
 NW- and NNW. and at noon from NNE. to ENE. It commonly rains, 
 if the wind varies but from NNW. to N. as it does fometimes. When it 
 blows very hard for two or three days together, this occaliors a very great fea, 
 fo that no boats can pats to or from the more. Notwithstanding this bad 
 weather, and the fhips in the road fuffer, they may ride it out if they have 
 good cables and 4-^. Some years the winds are nearly alike, at the full and 
 change, in December and January ; the feme for the middle of February, 
 when the January moon is late ; but in general they are not fo ftrong in 
 January and February as in December. The currents fet frrong to the 
 fouth ward. In the bay the winds are between the NNE. to ENE. 
 
 Daring January, February, and March the weather is generally very fair, 
 mild and pleafant ; the ikv ferene ; the fea to extremely fmooth, that often a 
 fliip's boat may land on the beach at Madrafs. There is generally a greater 
 furf there than at any other part of the coaft; and without ftorms; or, if 
 they happen, they are but of ihort duration : io that thefe are the tineit. months 
 in the year on this coaft. 
 
 The winds, in thefe months, are moftly from ENE. and NE. in the day, 
 and varying to NNW. or NW. in the night ; or, more particularly, about 
 
 I 2 the
 
 6o A Ntw Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 the full and change of the moon. After midnight the winds blow from N. 
 to NW. a little frefh, fometimes to the SW. and ibmetimes it is a calm ; but 
 when there is a bride gale, it lafts uninterrupted till nine or ten in the 
 morning, and from that time frequently calm : fometimts it varies round to 
 the W. and SW. with light airs, till about noon ; when a little looner or 
 later, the fea-breeze fets in from the SE. varying to ENE. and NE. in the 
 afternoon. But, whatever way the winds blow, the weather is always mild 
 and moderate. In February the NE. monfoon grows weak, the foutherly 
 winds oppofing it, efpecially towards the latter end of the month. 
 
 Some years thefe winds fet in fooner on the coaft than others. Ships that 
 fail at this time for Europe have often met thofe foutherly winds, and been 
 obftrudled by the currents which fet with the winds ; but they are eaiily 
 relieved by the firft northerly or eafterly winds, efpecially if they are far off 
 ihore, where the monfoon always lafts longer. 
 
 The northerly winds continue fome years till the end of March, but feldom 
 without a revolution from the fouthward. In the offing, and the bay, the 
 winds are moftly in the NE. quarter ; but fometimes vary from NE. to SE. 
 and fometimes, but very feldom, to SW. The current generally changes 
 with the winds, moftly to the fouthward, and fometimes very ftrong. 
 
 Notwkhftanding January, February and March, are the three fineft months 
 in the year, on the coaft of Coromandel, yet January is not free from ftorms, 
 efpecially if the moon is near the full or change, in the beginning of this 
 month. A moft melancholy inftance of this happened on the ift day of 
 January, 1761, though the moon did not change till the 6th of this month. 
 Pondichcrry was at that time beficged by the Englifh, and all our fquadron 
 before that place. The gale came on in the morning, blowing ftrong at 
 NNW. and kept increafing till evening; then it blew exceflive hard, with 
 a prodigious fwcll from the eaftward : the fea looked quite white, from the 
 motion it was in, railing the mud from the bottom ; the fky was entirely 
 ovcrcaft with a moft wild and difmal appearance : fome of the fhips in the 
 evening parted their cables and went to fea. The admiral made the fignal to 
 cut or flip, and put to fea ; and foon after, the wind flew about to the NE. 
 and blew a violent ftorm, with a deluge of rain : this continued fome time, 
 and then abated, or rather lulled ; but at the fame time the iky looked very 
 terrible in the SE. and the wind veered round that way. Soon after came on 
 a moft violent hurricane of wind and rain, harder than it had been at any 
 time before: it continued lb for fevcral hours; then veered round to fouthward, 
 and moderated. 
 
 Our
 
 Of the North -East Monsoon. 6i 
 
 Our fquadron fuftered much in this ftorm : his Majefly's fhips Sunderland, 
 Duke of Aquitain, and the Duke ftore-lhip, foundered, and their crews 
 perifhed ; the Newcaftle, Queenborough, and Protector fire-fhip, were driven 
 on fhore, but their crews laved ; and molt of the fquadron loft their mafts, 
 and fuffered much in other refpccls. 
 
 April is a very precarious month ; the weather being very uncertain, and 
 the winds variable, with fome rain. In the beginning of this month the 
 monfoon dies away, and you have the winds from the fea at ESE. or SE. 
 Sometimes you have frefh gales, varying toward the evening round to SVV. 
 frequently little wind ; but feldom calm on fhore, or coaflways ; except 
 before fome gale of wind, or the return of the NE. monfoon. 
 
 This return of the NE. monfoon makes the April moon dangerous on the 
 Coromandel Coaft ; but it does not always bring ftorms, though the weather 
 looks very threatening. You may have frefh gales, with fqualls and much 
 rain, that hold for two or three days, with a great fwell from the eaftward ; 
 therefore you had better, at this time, take a proper birth from the fhore, in 
 i 6 or i 8 fathom water : the fea at thefe times is ready to break in 8 fathom, 
 io that the fwell alone is fufficient to make a fhip part her cables. 
 
 The Englifh fquadron was fo circumftanced, in 1760, off Cuddalore, riding 
 in 7 or 8 fathom water : had the gale then fet in as it threatened, it mud 
 have proved fatal to them. This is called the petty monfoon. In the April 
 full moon there have been fometimes violent ftorms and hurricanes, by which 
 many fhips and lives have been loft, and great damage done. In fome years, 
 about the end of April, the wefterly winds blow for two or three days together. 
 Out in the bay there are little winds, variable, with calms ; the wind moftly 
 from NE. E. and SE. yet fometimes it blows a fine frelh gale at NE. for 
 two or three days together. 
 
 In the month of May the winds blow moftly from SE. and SSE. and from 
 this quarter the ftrongeft, and continue for feveral days together without 
 intermiflion. When thefe winds are moderate, they commonly begin about 
 nine or ten o'clock in the morning, and continue till nine or ten at night ; then 
 they fhift to the SSW. and SW. till about the ufual time of nine or ten o'clock 
 in the morning, when they fhift again, frelhen, and blow ftrong from SSE. 
 and SE. Some years, in this month, you have fqualls of wind from the NW. 
 that lafl an hour or two, with rain and thunder. 
 
 The fky is generally clear, except fometimes in 'die evening it is cloudy in 
 the weftern board, accompanied with lightening. When it blows frelh in 
 the day-time, the weather is hazy, and the horizon fomewhat obfeured. 
 
 Between
 
 6 2 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Between the fea and land breeze it is ibmetimes calm, though very Ieldom. 
 The breeze is ftrongeft when there is no calm ; and the SW. wind (hifts to 
 S. SSE. and SE. During this month the currents run very ftrong to the N. 
 and NNE. alone; the Coaft of Coromandel. 
 
 A General Account of the Monfoons near the Coaft of Coromandel, 
 and other Places in the Bay oj Bengal. 
 
 LIX. Of the Western Monsoon. 
 
 During the month of March, near the Coaft of Coromandel, the weather 
 is generally very mild, the iky ferene, and without ftorms ; or, if they happen, 
 they are of Ihort duration. 
 
 After midnight the wind blows from NW. a little freih, varying to the SW. 
 and fometimes calm ; but when it is a briflc gale, it lafts uninterruptedly till 
 nine or ten in the morning. After twelve at noon, and ieldom before, begins 
 the breeze from SE. varying to ENE. fometimes as far as NE. Thefe little 
 ihiftings happen particularly when the February moon continues long in March. 
 
 Oif in the bay the winds vary from SW. to S. and from E. to ENE. The 
 currents change in the fame manner ; but they are more fubjecl to fet 
 northward, becaufe the foutherly winds are moft frequent. It is nearly the 
 fame alona; the coaft. 
 
 In the months of April and May the currents are ftrongeft ; then they let 
 N. and NE. In thefe months alio the breezes are freiheft, and from the SSE. 
 It is Ieldom calm in April, but when the March moon is late, and before lb me 
 gale of wind, or the return of the northern monfoon. 
 
 Near the Coaft of Coromandel, the return of the monfoon makes the April 
 Moon dangerous ; but it does not always bring fettled ftorms, only fome 
 iqualls and rain, that hold on or off two or three days. In this uncertaintv, 
 you had better (during this moon) lail two or three leagues oif ihore, in 
 15 or 16 fathom, to avoid all danger. This admonition relates only to this 
 coaft ; for, in the bottom of the bay, the gales of winds and ftorms arc 
 much more frequent. 
 
 The regular breezes above mentioned, that blow from the SSE. com- 
 monly begin at nine or ten o'clock in tire morning, and continue till nine 
 Or ten at night, and fometimes all night. In the morning, before the 
 SSE. breezes begin, the winds blow from the SSW. and SW. When they 
 are frelh, the SSE. breeze is ftrong. 
 
 Iu
 
 Of the Western Monsoon. 63 
 
 In fome years, about the end of April, the weflerly winds blow for 
 two or three days. 
 
 The iky is generally clear; except fometimes in the evening it is cloudy 
 in the weftern board, and accompanied with lightening. When it blows frefh 
 in the day time, the horizon is fomewhat obfeured to the eaflward. 
 
 In the month of May the weather is more fettled. In the morning the 
 land breezes from SVV. to W. are generally pretty frefh. When they are 
 very flrong, they la(t much longer than in April : this is the reafon why 
 the fea-breezes from the SSE. to S. do not begin till the afternoon, and 
 end at nine or ten at night, as obferved before ; and conlequently are of 
 fhorter duration. This happens moftly towards the end of this month, when 
 it fometimes blows from W. to SW. for three days together, very flrong 
 about the middle of the day, but moderate in the morning and evening. 
 
 Between the regular land and fea-breezes it is generally calm ; when there 
 is none, the breeze is flrong, and the SW. winds fhift to the South, 
 SSE. and SE. 
 
 Some years there are in this month fqualls of wind that lafl an hour 
 or two. Thefe come moflly from the NW. and feldom from the eaflward. 
 When they are attended with rain and thunder, it blows the lefs. 
 
 In the bottom of the Bay of Bengal, the Months of April and May 
 are dangerous ; for befides the hurricanes which blow violently fome years, 
 you generally meet with heavy fqualls from the northward, which lafl 
 five or fix hours, fometimes longer; and moflly they happen every two or 
 three days. 
 
 During the r e two months, the winds that blow in the offing, are from 
 the SSW. to SW. and in May WSW. 
 
 The months of June, July and Augufl differ but little one from the 
 other : the weftern monfoon is then in its height. In the offins;, the winds 
 are conflant from SW. to W. efpecially in June and July ; but, at the end 
 of Augufl, they frequently blow from WNW. and fometimes NW. Near 
 the Coaft of Coromandel, the land-winds are not conflant ; but you com- 
 monly have the fea-breeze from S. to SE. 
 
 The W. and SW. winds, during thefe three months, are fultrv, hot and 
 infupportable ; but more fo fome years than others. They iumetimes blow 
 with fuch violence, that they darken the air with the dull and land they raife 
 from the fhore ; and thefe clouds of dufl reach a great way off at fea : this. 
 happens moflly in dry feafons. But when the fqualls are more frequent, the 
 rains prevent this effect of the wind : this is commonly experienced about the 
 
 end;
 
 64 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 end of June, and in July, rather than in Auguft ; then the fqualls and rains 
 are more frequent. 
 
 When the wefterly winds blow hardeft, the fea is fmooth along fhore, 
 efpecially at Pondicherry. Then the country veffels pafs the bar eafdy, which 
 at all other times breaks very much, and fometimes is not paflable. 
 
 Although it is pretty fine weather, at this time of the year, on the coaft of 
 Coromandel, it rains abundantly in the bottom of the bay, at Ballafore, 
 Chatigan, Arrakan, and on the Coaft. of Pegu, Siam, and other places in the 
 eaft. 
 
 The SW. winds blow very ftrong, at this feafon, in the Ballafore road ; fo 
 that the pilots for the Ganges cannot get aboard the fhips. Here efpecially 
 you ought to be well provided with good 4-} and cables. 
 
 The month of September, though inconftant, is more fubject. to wefterly 
 winds than to any other. They vary from SW. to North. The day breezes 
 blow fometimes from NE. but oftener from SE. and SSE. In general, from 
 whatever quarter it blows, it is very moderate, except a few fqualls. 
 
 In the bottom of the bay, you have little wind from the middle of Auguft 
 to September ; but abundance of rain. 
 
 The currents, which all this monfoon fet with the winds to the NE. 
 flacken in September ; and on the Coaft of Gergelin, about eight days before 
 the equinox, they make to the fouthward ; and are rapid at the end of the 
 month. This is a great help to fuch fhips as fail, at this time, from Bengal 
 for the Coaft of Coromandel, or other parts. 
 
 Almoft every vear, foon after the equinox in September, you have ftrong 
 eafterly winds in the bottom of this bay, on the Coaft of Orixa, and at 
 Ballafore ; whereas in the middle of the gulf, the winds commonly blow 
 from the NW. 
 
 LX. Of the Eastern Monsoon. 
 
 On the Coaft of Coromandel, the month of October is the mod inconftant 
 in the year. The winds there are then changeable, frequent calms, rains, and 
 fair weather. The NE. Monfoon is not perceivable till the end of this month; 
 nor is it certain then. At the change of the SW. monfoon the winds vary; 
 towards the SE. they are pretty frefli ; but, when towards thcNW. they are 
 weak, and frequent calms. Sometimes in the morning it will blow frefh from 
 the eaftern board ; and fometimes, for three or four days, the winds in the 
 morning blow from NNW. and in the afternoon, from NE. 
 
 A variety
 
 Of the Eastern Monsoon. 65 
 
 A variety of fqualls, rain, and dark clouds, that obfcurc the horizon, feem 
 to prefage violent ftorms ; thefe, however, feldom happen. It is on this 
 account, that all the (hips leave this coaft about the 20th of this month, either 
 to winter on the eaftern coaft of the bay, or for any other deflination. 
 
 At Bengal, the rains are commonly over by the 13th or 20th; but the 
 Ganges continues to overflow till the end of this month, which is more fubject 
 to ftorms and tempefts than on the Coaft of Coromandel ; though there it 
 often blows very frelh from NE. to E. Therefore the fliips that depart late 
 (at the end of September, for inftance) from the Coaft of Coromandel for 
 Bengal, fhould keep out at fea, or they will run great rilque of being loft 
 on the Coaft of Orixa. 
 
 How far foever the month of November maybe advanced, in the NE. 
 monfoon, you have, during its continuance, variety of winds ; moftly from 
 NNE. or in the morning from NW. and NNW. and in the afternoon from 
 NNE, and NE. but fometimes from the SE. and SW. for three or four days. 
 The former part of this .month is fubject to calms for feveral days, and 
 commonly followed with ftorms, which happen more at this than any other 
 time of the year. They are fo violent, that no fhip can poflibly ride at 4-^. 
 They generally begin from the NW. and chop fucceflively from N. to NE. 
 ENE. and Eaft. The fea then rifes fo prodigioufly, that you fee it foam a 
 league off. When thefe tempeftuous winds fhift from eaft to fouth, they 
 moderate, and the Iky grows clear ; but if, after having blown violently from 
 NE. a calm enfues, prefently it blows hard from SW. 
 
 Some years thefe hurricanes have not happened, or they have not been fo 
 violent, fo that a fhip might ride fafe in the roads ; but, as this is fo precarious, 
 it is better not to tarry on the coaft. 
 
 Out in the bay the winds blow, in November, from NNE. to ENE. 
 
 In December and January the monfoon is regular from NE. to ENE. 
 On the coaft the winds in the morning generally blow from NW. and NNW. 
 and about noon it begins to blow from NNE. to ENE. It commonly rains 
 if the winds vary from NNW. to N. and it does fometimes when from the 
 NE ; but then it blows very hard, for two or three days, and the fea runs 
 fo high, that no veflel can go over the bar. Notwithftanding this bad weather, 
 whereby the ihips in the road fuflcr, they may ride it out, if they have good 
 cables and of-}. Some years the winds are nearly alike, at the full and change, 
 in December and January, and the fame in the middle of February, when the 
 January moon is late ; but in general they are not fo ftrong in January and 
 
 K ■ February
 
 66 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 February as in December ; and it has been remarked, that there have been 
 more years wherein thefe months, are fine than the contrary. 
 
 In January and. February the weather is moftly fair and moderate, efpecially 
 when it has been bad weather in November, or the beginning: of December. 
 As for the currents, they follow the direction and force of the winds. 
 
 The month of February is a continuation of the NE. monfoon ; then it 
 grows weak, the foutherly winds oppofing it, efpecially after the 1 5th. Some 
 years thefe winds let in fooner on the coaft than others. 
 
 The mips that fail for Europe at this time, have often met thefe foutherly 
 winds, and have been obftructed by the current, which fet with the winds ; 
 but they are eafily relieved by the firft northerly or eafterly winds, efpecially 
 if they are far offfhore, where the monfoon always lafts longer. 
 
 The northerly winds continue fome years till March, but feldom without 
 a revolution from the fouthward. On the coaft the NW. winds blow in the 
 morning, and now and then the SE. breezes ; in the afternoon, the weather 
 is always mild and moderate, whatever wind blows. 
 
 LXI. Of Monsoons In the China Seas, and near the Philippine Islands. 
 
 From the Straits of Sincapore, throughout the China Seas to the Philippine 
 Iflands, the monfoons are nearly the fame as on the Coaft of Coromaudel, 
 and parts adjacent. 
 
 In the China Seas the S\V. monfoon fets in about April, and continues- 
 to the beginning of October. 
 
 In June, July, and Auguft, they have much rain, and fometimes freuH 
 gales of wind in thefe feas. 
 
 In September the winds are favourable, and fometimes from NE. to E. 
 and SE. blowing frefii with rain ; but in general they are from the SW. 
 quarter, and continue thus to the new or full moon, at the beginning of 
 October : then they generally break up in a violent fiorm from the SW. 
 Sometimes the florin comes on at W. or NW. with abundance of rain. 
 When the florm ceafeth, the wind fhifts gradually round to the N. NE. or 
 ENE. in which quarter it continues all the NE. monfoon. 
 
 The whole month of October is rather dangerous. In this month they 
 have generally fome rain ; but after that the weather becomes fair and fettled, 
 and the navigation of thefe feas is reckoned very fafe. 
 
 About 25 or 30 leagues to the eaftward of the Nicobar Iflands, in the 
 Indian Sea, you lole the SW monfoon, and have the winds favourable from 
 
 W. to
 
 Of Monsoons in the China Seas. 67 
 
 W. to N. fometimes SE. S. or SW. but moll from the NW. quarter, with 
 fome hard fqualls, and rain, which come always from the NW. quarter, and 
 are of great fervice to mips bound to the fouth-eafl: through the Straits of 
 Malacca. In thefe fqualls you ought to carry fail, becaule thereby you will 
 greatly facilitate your pafljge.' 
 
 At other times you will meet with little winds that are variable, alfo 
 calms, quite through thole ltraits. But as loon as you get clear without 
 Pedro Blanco, and the iflands off point Romania, you then get hold of the 
 SW. monfoon again, which blows frelh quite through the China Seas to 
 the Philippine Iflands. 
 
 The NE. monfoon blows from October to April ; but in January it is 
 reckoned to blow hardefl. Frequently you have much rain, and a pretty 
 large fea, with intervals of fair weather, throughout the China Seas ; but you 
 will be moft likely to have this weather near Pulo Sapata and off Pub 
 Auore. 
 
 As foon as you enter the Straits of Sincapore, you lofe all that rough 
 weather ; and all the way through the Straits of Malacca to Acheen-head, 
 you will have moderate and fair weather, little winds, variable winds and 
 frequent calms. 
 
 Sometimes, in Malacca Road, you will have frequent land-winds from NE. 
 to E. but you do not find thefe winds in any other part of the flraits, 
 till you get' to Acheen-head ; there you meet with the NE. monfoon. 
 
 Of Currents in the Eafl India Seas. 
 
 LXII. 0/"Currents hi general hi the India Seas. 
 
 The currents in the EalT-India Seas, like thofe in the other feas, are io 
 various and uncertain, that it feems impoflible to give any general account of 
 them for all times and places, otherwile than as they have been found by 
 experienced navigators. The win^s are found chiefly to caufe currents, but 
 more efpecially lb in Ihoal water ; therefore currents are commonly near the 
 fhores : but, though the winds principally occafion currents near the Ihores, yet 
 great llreams from adjacent rivers, co-operating with the winds, often increafe 
 thefe currents. On the other hand, the direction of thefe flreams often retards 
 and fometimes caufes a current to run asrainfl the winds. The fituation 
 of the place, as an illand, ftrait, bay, &c. binds, breaks, and otherways 
 influences the general currents ; fo do the moon, and florins of winds, fome- 
 times : but fuch are of friort continuance. 
 
 K 2 LXIII.
 
 68 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 LXIII. 0/Xurrents near the Coaft s of Africa, Arabia, the Red Sea, 
 Persian Gulf, and Guadel Coasts. 
 
 Along the NE. Coaft of Africa, from Cape Baffes to Guardefoy, and from 
 thence along the Coaft of Arabia to Cape Rofalgat, and on the Guadel Coaft, 
 the current begins to fet, from the SW. quarter, in March and April, and 
 continues till September ; after that, it lets from the NE. during the othe? 
 fix months. 
 
 From May to September the ftream commonly runs out of the Red Sea ; 
 and from October till May, runs into it from the ocean. 
 
 In the Perfian Gulf the current generally runs out, all the time it is run- 
 ning into the Red Sea, from the ocean ; and it runs in from May to Septem* 
 ber, vvhillt the ftream is running out of the Red Sea. 
 
 LXIV. Of Currents near the Coast of Guzurat ««W /o Bombay, 
 
 From Bombay to Diu Head, there is feldom any remarkable current ; 
 that track having commonly regular and ftrong tides, except in September, 
 then the ftrong fre flies out of the Rivers. Cambay, &c. caufe a ftrong current 
 to the fouthward. 
 
 LXV. Of Currents near the Malabar Coast. 
 
 From Bombay fouthward to Cape Comorin, there is almoft a conitant 
 current. Sometimes it is very fmall, from NNW. and NW. except from 
 October to January ; then there will fometimes be a brifk current from the 
 SE. running chiefly between Cape Comorin and Cochin ; but feldom reaching 
 more northerly, or lafling long. 
 
 LXV1. Of Currents in Tuttacareen Bay. 
 
 In Tuttacareen Bay, there is commonly a fmall current to the northward-, 
 from May to September; and the other half year, from the northward to the 
 fouthward. 
 
 LXV II. Of Currents near Zeloan. 
 
 From Barbarian Ifland, along the fouth fide of Zeloan, there begins to rutt 
 a ftron^ current to the eaftvvard, early in May ; and it ufually continues till 
 September. In thole months there is little or no current near the eaft fide 
 
 of
 
 Of Currents in the East-India Seas. 69 
 
 of Zeloan, viz. from about Anquin to Crankanclla ; but from that bay the 
 current again begins to run along the more to the northward, and continues 
 acrofs the gut to the Coaft of Coromandel. 
 
 From the latter end of September, (fometimes fooneO to February, the 
 current runs from Point Pedro, along more, to the SE. SSE. S. SW. and W. 
 quite round to Point de Gall, where it ceafes ; and the current out of Tutta- 
 careen is met. 
 
 LXVIII. Of Currents near the Coasts of Coromandel, Golconda and 
 
 Orixa. 
 
 Very near the mores of Coromandel, Golconda, and Orixa, about the latter 
 end of January or early in February, the current begins to run to the north- 
 ward, and continues, with little intermiffion, till about the latter end ot 
 Auguft ; then it changes, and runs (near the ihores) to the fouthward, until 
 January. 
 
 LX1X. Of Currents near the Coast of Bengal. 
 
 From Balafore eaftward, along the bottom of the bay, to Chittigong, tides 
 out and into the rivers, prevail moft part of the year, except in September, 
 October and November ; then there is ufually a current to the WSW. 
 
 LXX. Of Currents near the Coast of Aracan. 
 
 Between Xittigam or Chittigosg, and Cape Negrais, there is feldom any 
 ftrong current, and oftentimes none. From the middle of December to Mav, 
 there often runs a fmall current to the foiithward ; and from June to Sep- 
 tember, to the northward. 
 
 LXXI. 0/*Currents near the Coast of Pegu. 
 
 Along the Pegu mores, the currents are much the fame as from Balafore 
 to Xittigam or Chittia;on2;. 
 
 LXXII. 0/"Currents near the Coast c/"Tanassary. 
 
 The coaft, from Junkcelone-Head northward to near Martavan, is more 
 fubjecr. to tides than currents ; however, when anv happen, it is commonly 
 from the NE. quarter, in September and October ; or from the SW. quaiter, 
 in November to March. 
 
 LXXHL
 
 jo * A New Directory for the East-Indies 
 
 LXXIII. Q/*Currents in the Bay o/Bengal. 
 
 From the end of September to near Chriftmas, through the whole Bay of 
 Bengal, there generally prevails a current, more or lefs, weftward of S. or 
 wefhvard of N. for it runs both ways at times, though the firfl is much 
 more prevalent than the laft. 
 
 LXXIV. Of Currents in the Straits c/Malacca. 
 
 Various tides fome very ftrong ones, prevail through the {traits of Malacca ; 
 but they are not lb regular as at Bombay, and fome other places. They are 
 confiderably influenced by currents from the adjacent feas. Thefe currents are 
 of fhort continuance ; and commonly from the eafhvard in November, 
 December and January ; but from the weftward in May, June and July. 
 
 LXXV. Of Currents near the West Coast of Sumatra and Java. 
 
 Along the weft Coaft of Sumatra, and S. of Java, the current commonly 
 runs as the monfoons blow, viz. from the NW. between October and May, 
 and from the SE. from May to October. 
 
 LXXVI. Of Currents in the Straits o/"Sunda. 
 
 In the ftraits of Sunda fometimes the currents are very ftong, efpecially in 
 the narroweft part ; but they are not very fteady. From January to April, 
 the current generally runs from the weftward into the (traits ; and all the other 
 part of the year, it commonly runs out of the ftraits from the eaftward. 
 
 LXXVII. Q/~Currents in the Sraits o/~Banca, Bay o/"Siam, the Coast 
 
 of China, Cambodia, £fr. 
 
 In April the currents begin to run more or lefs, to the northward, through 
 the Straits of Banca, and paft the Straits of Malacca, and along the W. fide 
 of Siam Bay. But along the NE. fide of the Bay, the currents run pretty 
 flrong to the ESE. until eaftward of point Uby ; then they bend to the 
 NE. quarter, and run along the Coafts of Cambodia, Cochin-china, and 
 China, till September, when the oppollte monfoon and currents begin to 
 prevail from the NE quarter, and continue to March or April. 
 
 LXXVIII. Of Currents /'// the China Seas. 
 
 Through the China Seas, at a diftance from the mores, the current generally 
 runs, more or lefs, to the NE. quarter, from the middle of. May to the mid- 
 dle
 
 Of Currents in the East-India Seas. 71 
 
 die of Auguft ; and the fame way from the middle of October to March or 
 April. 
 
 LXXIX. Of the Quantify ^Currents in the India Seas. 
 
 Through the China Seas, and along the adjacent mores, the currents from 
 the NE. quarter are commonly much ftronger in October, November, and 
 December, than the oppolite currents are in May, June and July. They run 
 particularly firong within the iilands and lhoals, that lie near the ihores : this 
 many mips bound to Canton, and which have been driven among the iilands 
 to the weftward, have experienced ; for they have been obliged to warp up 
 quite to Mocoa. 
 
 The ftrongeft currents, in thefe feas, are along the Coafts of Cambodia, 
 the latter end of November. From Cape Avarillo, till beyond Pulo Caceir 
 de Terra, it certainly runs from fifty to feventy miles to the fouthward, 
 every twenty-four hours. Some part of the ftream running into the Straits of 
 Malacca, cauics the tides to run nine hours one way, and only three hours 
 the other. The fame happens fometimes in May and June, from the current 
 caufed by the SE. and SW. monfoons. 
 
 LXXX. Of Currents in the Straits o/"Malacca, Banca, and Sunda, 
 
 Through the Straits of Banca, during the neap tides, the current will run 
 two or three days one way. Though the flreams in the Straits of Malacca, 
 Banca and Sunda, partake in a great meaiure'of the nature of tides, they never 
 run io ftrong in the two ftrft as in the la ft. From Bantam Point to Angar 
 Point, the currents will fometimes run from the eaftward, two or three mil 
 an hour, for two or three days together : this happens chiefly in June, July 
 and Auguft. The ftrongeft flreams in the Straits of Banca, run to the fouth- 
 ward, from the middle of November to the middle or end of January. 
 
 LXXXI. Of Currents near the West Coast of Sumatra and Java. 
 
 Along the SW. Coaft of Java and Sumatra there is not ufually any ftrong 
 current, thole caufed by the monfoons feldom running above half or three 
 quarters of a mile an hour ; except off Flat Point, where the ftream runs 
 fometimes ftrong to the northward for feveral days : but this is properly the 
 Strait of Sunda. 
 
 LXXXII.
 
 yz A New Directory for the East-Indies 
 
 LXXXII. Of Currents in the Bay ©/"Bengal. 
 
 The current from the NE. quarter, in the Bay of Bengal, like that in the 
 China Seas, runs generally much ftronger than the oppofite currents, efpecially 
 off Jagrenat Pagoda ; there it is thought to run nrongeft. 
 
 It will run for many days from two to four miles an hour, late in October 
 and November ; but the current from S\V. feldom runs above half lb fcrong. 
 
 Hard gales of wind, that happen fometimes at the begining or during the 
 S\V. monfoons, have been known to caufe a ftrong current to the fouthvvard, 
 alon° the weftern ihores of the bay, for two or three days, even in the 
 months of April, May, June, July, and Auguft ; but there feldom or never 
 is any check to the current near the mores, from the NE. quarter, in October 
 and November. 
 
 Eafhvard of the Syrian river is the Coaft of Martavan, where the tides are 
 fo ftrong that no 4-} or cables can hold a (hip. The floods come in with a 
 boar, or furf, from ten to fourteen feet perpendicular height; therefore all 
 mips ihould carefully avoid this track. 
 
 LXXXI1I. Of Currents near Zeloan. 
 
 The currents round Zeloan are liable to fudden and unaccountable altera- 
 tions. A fhip has been forced to °f-> in a calm, near Barbarian ULnd, by a 
 current, or a tide letting at the rate of three miles an hour, right upon the 
 more ; but dreams are not frequent, nor of long duration. 
 
 The ufual general current along the fouth fide of the ifland, runs in June and 
 November, from 2 to 37 miles an hour. The current on the NE. fide of the 
 ifland is feldom or never fo ftrong. In Tuttacareen Bay, in June and Novem- 
 ber, the current feldom exceeds eight miles a day, off fhore. Near Zeloan 
 it fometimes runs filler ; but near the main there is ieldom any current. 
 
 LXXXIV. 0/*Currents between the Coasts of Africa and Malabar. 
 
 In the large track of fea that lies between this Coaft and Africa, there is 
 feldom any great current ; but in Auguft and September the frefhes from the 
 Cambay rivers ulually caufe a current to the louthward, of from eight to 
 thirty miles a day. This is chiefly found to the northward of 17?; near the 
 land it gradually diminishes till December, during which month, and the two 
 following, there is little, and often no current. In March the almoft nor- 
 
 erly winds caufe a lmall ftream to the Southward, of from eight to thirt. 
 
 mile
 
 Of Currents near Zeloaw. -j$ 
 
 miles a day ; but this is not conftant. Ships going weftward find a constant 
 current to SE. and SSE. during the months of February, March, and April, 
 of from twelve to thirty miles a day : they meet with it from 23 to 40 leagues 
 off the more ; and before they have pafled it, they muft be from 100 to 
 140 leagues weft-ward of Cochin. 
 
 The rivers of Sindy, &c. co-operating with the NE monfoon, caufe a 
 current to the WSW. and SW. along the Coafts of Guadel, Arabia and 
 Africa, to Cape Bafles ; from September to February, of from eight to thirty 
 miles a day. In March the oppofite current begins, and runs with much the 
 fame force ; but neither is conftant, for a current has been found off Cape 
 Rofalgat, early in January, of thirty miles to the northward in a day, though 
 the wind at the fame time blowed very hard at NW. 
 
 LXXXV. Of the Currents in the Persian Gulf. 
 
 The current that happens in the outward Gulf of Perfia, between Cape 
 Rofalgat and Cape Jafques, is fluctuating, and not frequent ; and along the 
 mores, in the inner gulf, there are pretty regular tides. A current runs often 
 in the middle of the gulf, and fometimes, though rarely, along the more. 
 That in the middle is generally down, as thole near the mores run ufually 
 up the gulf. Neither are very ftrong (from 8 to 20 miles in a day) nor 
 of long continuance ; and the times they prevail are uncertain. 
 
 LXXXVI. Of Currents in the Red Sea. 
 
 The fhores of the Red Sea have fome tides ; but they are not half (o 
 ftrong, conftant, nor regular, as thofe in the Perfian Gulf. The currents 
 are ufually near the middle of the fea, and run from ten to twenty miles a 
 day ; this is chiefly true below Mocha ; for between Mocha and Judda the 
 current often runs to the northward in June, when the northerly winds blow 
 itrongeft ; and there is a ftrong current, at the fame time, running fouthward, 
 off Babel-Mandel. 
 
 A Defcription of the Eaft Coaft of Africa, from the Equinoctial 
 to the Straits of Babel-Mandel. 
 
 LXXXVII. Of the River Dos Fugos. 
 
 From the river Dos Fugos, fituate under the equinoctial line, to Cape 
 Balles, the coaft inclines to NEbE. The iflands of Brava, fituated under J? 
 
 L of
 
 74 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 of north latitude, to the NE. of a cape that projects a little from the land. 
 The northern moft of thefe iflands has, at the NE. point, a fandy bay. The 
 SW. point is higher than the reft of the ifland, which may be of about 1 1 
 league extent, NE. and SW. The foil of thefe iflands is dry and barren, as 
 is the whole coaft : there is no other particular mark for this coaft, which may 
 be feen eight or nine leagues at fea. It is unknown what foundings are off it ; 
 the Memoirs we have of this part making no mention of any. 
 
 LXXXIX. Of Cape Basses. 
 
 The latitude of Cape Baffes is 4? 45' north. It is lb called from a reef that 
 furrounds it, and projeds about \ a league. This cape is only known by the 
 different form of the coaft, which from NEbE. ftretches to the NNE. as far 
 as 9? 50' N. as appears by the journals of the fhips le Royal Philippe, 
 FUnion, and le Mer). This coaft is of a middling height, and may be iecn 
 nine or ten leagues off. Its foil is fandy, dry and barren. There is nothing 
 farther remarkable. In coafting this part are Ceen feveral bights, or bays, 
 concerning which we have no account. There are foundings in 20 or 30 
 fathoms, 3 or 4 leagues off more. It is beft to fail along this coaft in the 
 day time, it being unfafc to approach it at night ; on the contrary, it is 
 neceflary to fteer a quarter of a point wide of it. 
 
 XC. Of Cape dal Gada, or de la Goada. 
 
 Cape dal Gada, or Cape de la Goada, is in latitude 10? 7' N. by Hadley's 
 quadrant ; 4 leagues to the fouthward of which is another point ; and the 
 land which lies between thefe two, may be perceived 12 leagues. It is very 
 even at top, fteep, and has white fpots along the fea fide. The chief mark to 
 diftinguifli the cape, in coming from the fouthward, is, that the coaft feems 
 to difappear, and forms a large bight, or bay, to enter which care muft be 
 ufed, not only becaufe it is unknown, but on account of the S. eafterly 
 winds, which render it very difficult to fail out again. The bottom of the 
 bay cannot be feen in palling by. 
 
 XCI. Of Cape Dorfui. 
 
 Being off Cape d.d Gada 3 or 4 leagues, Cape Dorfui may be feen, bearing- 
 NEbE. This is the moft eaftwardly land of all Africa. Coming from the 
 fouthward, it appears like an ifland, Hoped to feaward. To the weftw ! 
 of this is a mountain, like a barn, which is joined thereto : by low ground, 
 
 this
 
 Of the Coasts of Africa and Arabia. 75 
 
 this is the reafon that at a diftance they appear feparated. The land to the 
 northward of Cape Dorfui cannot be perceived, till the Cape hears NNW. 
 The cape is very high and ftccp ; its latitude is 10? 20' N. 
 
 XCII. Of Cape Guardafui. 
 
 From Cape Dorfui to that of Guardafui, the courfe is N. wefterly 21?, 
 and diftance 30 leagues. Between the two, and cloie within cape Dorfui, is a 
 great bight : thence the coaft runs NNE. as far as Cape Guardafui. Thefe 
 lands are very high, and the beach very fteep, whitifh, and rugged at the top : 
 they appear Co to within a league to the fouthward of Cape Guardafui; 
 whence this extremity, as it defcends, ieems to form feveral ftcps. The cape 
 itfelf is low land, yet almoft fteep to. Its latitude, on comparing many 
 obfervations, is found to be about 1 1? 45'N. This coaft is very bold, having 
 foundings a mile from the ftiore. 
 
 XCIII. Of Cape or Mount Felix. 
 
 From Cape Guardafui to Cape Felix, or Mount Felix, the courfe is WbN. 
 northerly, diftance 14 or 15 leagues. The coaft continues high and fteep for 
 8 or 9 leagues ; the reft as far as'Mount Felix, is a barren plain, and uneven 
 alone the lea fide ; but within land are hi°;h mountains. This coaft is without 
 danger: neverthelefs, if it benight, fteer a little wide of the two capes, on 
 account of a point of land that jets out between them. The variation here 
 was 10' degrees wefterly in 1746. 
 
 Mount Felix is a high and fteep cliff upon the low land, which occafions 
 it to be taken for an ifland, in coming from the eaftward. In fine weather it 
 may be feeh 15 or 16 leagues. By feveral accurate obfervations, the latitude 
 of Mount Felix is 1 1? 53'N. 
 
 XCIV. Of Cape St. Peter. 
 Having pafled Mount Felix, you may fee the low land continue along the 
 fea fide, for about 5 leagues, and incline to the S. weilward ; thence the land 
 is very high for 5 or 6 leagues, and terminates in a plain of a middling height, 
 which lies WbS. about 2 leagues. From the. weft end of this plain to 
 Cape St. Peter, is reckoned 6 leagues. This laft coaft is high, and bordered 
 with rugged mountains. The extremity of this chain of mountains is what 
 is called Cape St. Peter. About two leagues from this cape, is Teen by the 
 fea fide a white fipot, looking like a imall fandy bay. Mount Felix and Cape 
 St. Peter lie ENE. and WSW. diftance 1 6 or 17 leagues. 
 
 L 2 XCY.
 
 j6 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 XCV. Of the Island Mette. 
 
 From St. Peter's Cape to the ifland Mette, the courfe is WbS. about ar 
 leagues : the Coaft between them forms a bight, where the more is of a mid- 
 dling height, and very uneven, but within land are high mountains. 
 
 About 3 leagues to the eaftward of the ifland Mette, is a penifula of middling 
 height, covered with hillocks, which appear feparate. Between the penifula 
 and the ifland there is a bight, the fea coafl of which is not high ; but 
 within land is a chain of lofty mountains. The Ifland Mette, next this 
 penifula, is of a middling height, and is covered with hillocks, the higheft 
 of which, in the middle of the ifland, refembles at the top the form of a hat, 
 or rather a Dutchman's cap. The inland part of this ifland, and of the whole 
 coafl, is extremely dry and barren. 
 
 XCVL 0/~Burnt or White Island. 
 
 From the ifland Mette to White Ifland, the courfe is nearly weft rS or 
 19 leagues. The main land between the two, is moderately high. This 
 ifland is no more than a high rock, which mav be feen 10 leagues. The 
 dung of the birds which cover it, makes if look white. Some navigators call' 
 it Burnt Ifland ; but it is called by the Englifh, Bird Ifland. It is about 3 
 leagues from the Continent, in lat. 1 1? 22N. When it bears SW. it appears 
 very round, and encompafled with other little rocks ; but when it bears fouth, 
 it feems to extend 4 of a league E. and W. 
 
 From Burnt Ifland the coaft continues to the weftward, and is very 
 mountainous within land. But, as this coaft is feldom frequented, no better 
 account can be given of it ; for the fhips generally leave the Ethiopian Coaft, 
 when they are got as far as Burnt Ifland, and ftretch over to that of Arabia. 
 
 XCVII. O/Cafe Aden. 
 
 Cape Aden, in coming from the weftward, looks like a high ifland, fcragged 
 at the top; and, upon a nearer approach, refembles two iflands. The low 
 land of the bay, which lies to the northward, and can only be feen upon a 
 near view, occafions this appearance. When this Cape bears NE. it appears 
 like a rugged mountain, its fouthern extremity is lower than the northern. 
 Its latitude is 1 2? 40' N. 
 
 To the NW of this Cape there is a mountain about the fame height, equally 
 ru^ed, hish on the SE. fide, and low on the NW. and between the two 
 
 CO 7 O 
 
 are little hills refembling rocks, which being on low land, imperceptible at 
 
 the diftance of eight or nine leagues, appear feparate. 
 
 XCVIIL
 
 Of the Coasts of Africa and Arabia. 77 
 
 XCVIII. Of Cape St. Anthony. 
 
 From Cape Aden to the low point of Cape St. Anthony, the courfe is WbS. 
 19 leagues ; the land between the two is low to feaward, with here and there 
 fome downs of fand, till within about 6 leagues of this point, where it rifes ; 
 being formed by a high mountain, which winds a little to the weftward, and 
 then ftretches away in-land. This ridge (before you raife the low land) 
 makes the cape appear high, coming from the fouthward. 
 
 If, by contrary winds, you are obliged to turn along this coaft, come no 
 nearer than 13, nor fail above 30 fathoms from it, on account of fand and 
 coral rocks, that you may 4-^ in cafe of a calm : otherwife you may be 
 expofed to the violence of the tide, which fometimes runs very ftrong, and 
 be thereby driven upon the Abyffine Coaft, towards the Gulf of Zela, where 
 you will be in danger of being loft. 
 
 There is a fmall fhoal off the low point of Cape St. Anthony, but it doth 
 not run far out ; fo, by keeping in the above depth, there is nothing to fear. 
 
 XCIX. Of Cape Babel-Mandel. 
 
 From the low point of Cape St. Anthony to Cape Babel-Mandel, the 
 courfe is WbN. northerly 15 or 16 leagues. Between them the land is low 
 along more, forming a deep bay. This makes the cape appear feparate ; and 
 the ridge of mountains above mentioned extends to the NW. till about 
 5 or 6 leagues from Cape Babel-Mandel, where they terminate of a moderate 
 height, like a gunner's quoin, rifing gradually from north to fouth > the peaked 
 part to the northward, and blunted a little more northerly. 
 
 In foggy weather, or otherwife, care muff, be taken to avoid entering this 
 bay, as feveral mips have been loft there, thinking to fail into the Straits, 
 and miftaking (for want of experience) Cape Babel-Mandel for the ifland of 
 the fame name. Neverthelefs it is eafy to avoid this miftake ; the cape 
 making as above defcribed, and the ifland being low and fmooth : the two 
 extremities of it defcend alike from the middle, like Penguin Ifle near 
 Cape Good Hope. 
 
 C. Of Babel-Mandel Strait. 
 
 Between the ifland and the cape is the Little Strait, fo called to diiliuguifh 
 it from that to the fouthward. This ftrait is four miles broad. There is no 
 danger, obferving to keep rather nearer the ifland than the cape ; in irregular 
 
 fbundings,
 
 j8 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 foundings, from 20 to 10, 14 and 9 fathoms, coarie fand, and now and then 
 7 fathoms, upon a fmall bank, hut no danger. 
 
 Having pafled this ftrait, if there is not time enough to get to Mocha by- 
 day -light, it is better to +->, than run the hazard of overfhooting it. In 
 this cafe you muft fhut up the ftrait, and °}-} a little to the northward of 
 Cape Babel-Mandel, where the water is always very fmooth. If you 4-^ with 
 the mouth of the ftrait open, you ftand a chance of lofing your cables and 
 °f-}» as many mips have done. 
 
 Either entering or coming out of the Red Sea, it is better to pafs through 
 this ftrait than that to the fouthward of Babel-Mandel Hland ; becaufe in a 
 calm you are there expofed to the currents ; and there is no <)-$ ground 
 but near the riland. 
 
 CI. Of Mocha Road. 
 
 From the entrance of the Straits of Babel-Mandel, to Mocha road, the 
 courfe is NNW. 13 or 14 leagues. The land is low along the fea-fide, but 
 within land are high mountains. Keep about. 17 or 2 leagues off fhore, in 
 9, 10 or 12 fathoms water. On the beach you may perceive a little fandhill ; 
 it is fomewhat nearer to Mocha than Cape Babel-Mandel. 
 
 The approach to the town is known by the date-trees, which extend about 
 2 leagues to the fouthward, along the fea-fide. Thefe are the only trees to 
 be fecn along this coaft, which is very barren. . When you are hereabout come 
 no nearer than 13 fathoms, in order to avoid a bank, that encomp.afles the 
 road on the fouth fide, on which there are but 2 fathoms. This bank is lb 
 much the more dangerous, as it is fleep to; for, from 10 fathoms, you 
 iuddenly have 3 or 2. Then keep in this depth till you bring the fpire of the 
 givat mofque to bear SSE. when you may haul in for the road, and cf^ in 
 wHat depth you think proper. You have a good birth with the following 
 bearings; namely, The north fort SEbE. The fouth fort SbE. The great 
 mofque ESE. off fhore three or four miles. 
 
 Of the Coajis of Arabia and Feriia. 
 
 CI I. Of 1 he Winds ,'.WCuree;;ts n<\v the Coasts 0/" Arabia and Persia. 
 
 - It is neceflary to inform navigators, that from the beginning of April ro 
 the end of Auguft, the winds blow upon this coaft from SW. to SSW. varying 
 to the ucil, in hard lljualk, and ibmctirn.es accompanied with rain. Therefore, 
 
 during
 
 Of the Coasts of Arabia and Persia. 79 
 
 (luring this part of the year, working to windward along this coaft is 
 impracticable : for there is no port to fhelter you from the ltorms ; and, in 
 many places, no foundings further than 2 leagues off fhore. But, though it 
 may be impracticable to gain a paffagc, after the SW. winds are fet in, by 
 keeping on the Arabian coaft, (or even out in the middle of the ftraits, where 
 the currents then fet ftrong to the eaftward) yet it may be obtained by keeping 
 the African fhore on board, as much as poflible, till paft ihe meridian of Aden, 
 and then ftretching over for the Coaft of Arabia. In September the winds 
 blow a little frefh from the eait, with ftrong currents to the weftward, and 
 continue fo to the end' of March, with frequent land and fea breezes, which 
 blow very faint from the weftward, but very frefh fiom the eaftward. 
 
 Hence it is that the mips that fail from Mocha toward the end of Augufr. 
 or later, bound to the eaftward, fliould avoid this coaft, and keep more 
 foutherly, in order to take the advantage of the WSW. winds, that blow there 
 till the middle of September. Many fihips have loft their paffagc for want of 
 attention to this obfervation. 
 
 CIII. 6/Maculla Bay. 
 
 The Bay of Maculla is about 3 leagues deep and 6 wide. The land fs very 
 high. On the NE. point is one mountain, fomewhat higher than the reff , 
 under which is the road, which' ferves for flicker from the winds blowing; 
 from ENE. to NW. Here is fafe anchorage, a cable's length from a little 
 rocky point, where all the danger is in fight. NW. three cables length from 
 this point, there lies a reef of rocks under water, upon which the fea fometimes 
 breaks. The marks for °j-> here are the eaftern point of the bay SE. one 
 league, and the wefternmolf. point SW. in 3' fathoms. 
 
 For the reft of the bay, you may 4-) in 1 5 or 16 fathoms, at 1 league off 
 more. In the bottom of this bay is the little town of Foa ; and on the point, 
 fome fifhermen's huts. Fifh here are plenty and good; but water and other 
 proviiions are fcarce, and very dear. 
 
 CIV. Of Shahar Point. 
 
 From Maculla bay to the point of Shahar the courfe is ENE. 12 or ■ } 
 leagues. There are many villages fcen along; this coaft. whole inhabitants 
 are not very fociable. From the eaftern point of Maculla, you may coaft it 
 in 9 fathom, or nearer on occaiion. 
 
 Shahar appears a fine town, fituate by the fea fide, and may be feen 5 or & 
 leagues at fea, refembling feveral white cliffs : it is known by two hills, one 
 
 ttf
 
 8d A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 to the northward, and the other to the fouthward. The inhabitants are 
 civilized ; that is to fay, they can behave well for their own intereft, and with 
 good looking after. They have a king, who gives a kind reception to 
 ftrangers. The marks for 4-} aic > the northernmoft hill NEbN. and the 
 wefteramoft hill, weft by the compafs ; in 9 fathoms, fand and ouze, The 
 variation, according to the Englifh Pilot, was 14 or 15 degrees in the year 
 1709, and in 1746 about 11 degrees. 
 
 CV r . Of Cave Boccouas-Hova or Bogathsua. 
 
 From Shahar to Cape Boccouas-Hova, or Bogathfua, the courfe is eair, 1 5 
 or 16 leagues, a clear bottom, without any danger. The coaft is pretty high. 
 There are from ^o to 60 fathoms, 2 leagues off fhore. One league from the 
 cape there are but twelve fathoms ; and, as you approach, it fhoals gradually. 
 
 CVI. OyKissEK or Kaisun Point and Cape Fortuack. 
 
 From Cape Boccouas-Hova to KifTen Point, the courfe is ENE^N. 31 or 
 - 22 leagues. The inland part between them is high, and may be feen at leaft 
 10 leagues ; but the coaft is low. Here are feen many villages. All this 
 coaft is very fafe, having from 30 to 40 fathom, 1 \ or 2 leagues off fhore. 
 Kiflen Point is high land, which may be feen 10 leagues at fea, and i> remark- 
 able by two peaks, that make like afles ears, when they bear EbN. and 
 ENE. and when they bear NbW. you may fee the two little towns of Kiflen 
 and Durja. Their roads are to N\V. in what depth you think proper. 
 
 From Kiflen Point to Cape Fortuack, the courfe is NEbE. E. 21 or 22 
 leagues. The coaft between them is low to feaward, and high within land : 
 there are feen fome villages. The foundings here run farther out; for 2 leagues 
 off vou find ^ fathoms, which fhoals gradually failing nearer fhore. But at 
 Cape Fortuack, there are 40 or 50 fathoms within half a league. 
 
 This cape is very high, and may be feen 20 leagues at lea. To the north- 
 ward of it, the coaft forms a large bay, which hath good foundings, and 
 holding ground. There is no great depth to be found but about the cape. 
 You may 4-), in this bay, in what depth you will; but when you have 
 pafled it, you meet (as in many other parts of the Coaft of Arabia, where 
 the fhore is high and fteep) with no convenient depth for <}-}. * 
 
 CYII. Of Capes Doffar and Morir \t. 
 
 From Cape Fortuack to Doffar, the courfe is NEbE'E. Opinions differ 
 about the diiknee : the Englifh Pilot makes it but 48 leagues, others 54. 
 
 Thole
 
 Of the Coasts of Aparia and Persia. Si 
 
 Thofe who make this track ought to take notice of the difference. Three 
 or 4 leagues before you come to it, you perceive high champain land. Doffar 
 is a little town furrounded with trees ; its road is quite flrait. They °|-^ a 
 mile oft more, in 5 or 6 fathoms, the highefl houfe in the town ENE. 
 Here is the befl ground in the road. 
 
 It is reckoned 8 leagues from Doffar to Moribat, where moff. mips abide, 
 that lofe their paflage. It is faid, that this road is exceeding good, during the 
 eafrerly monfoons : however, this may be uncertain. 
 
 The tides are very irregular along this coaft ; they rile at certain times 7 or 
 8 feet. The currents commonly fet with the wind, except at the new and 
 full moons : then they run for 3 or 4 days very ftrong to the windward. 
 This change "is of great fervice to thofe who lofe their paflage. 
 
 Many navigators, who are not acquainted with this accidental difference of 
 the winds and currents,' are fearful of failing near the fhore. This muft 
 and may be done without danger ; for the winds feldom blow ftrong on the 
 fhore, during the eafrerly monfoons. 
 
 There are many places upon this coaft where the inhabitants are not to be 
 trufted, as at Shahar, Kiflen, and above all at Dollar, where the Chriftians 
 are not all beloved ; and confequently are not real friends, whatever they 
 may pretend. 
 
 CVIII. Of the Island Soccatra. 
 
 The body of die ifland Soccatra is in latitude 12? 45' N. The eafternmoft 
 point is 5 leagues diftance'from Cape Gardafui. It is about 25 or 26 leagues 
 from eaft to weft, and 10 from north to fouth ; the land is mountainous. 
 When the eafternmoft point of high land bears either N. or Sj it makes not 
 unlike a dolphin's nofe ; and from thence the land trenches away to the 
 eafhvard, for about three miles, till it terminates in a low point, from which 
 a led ore of rocks, even with 'the water, runs out to the S, eaftward, about a 
 league. There are two 4-} places : that for the eafterly monfoon is at the 
 WSW. part of the ifland, oppoiitc one of its coafts, which extends about 1 o 
 leagues SE.. and N.W. 
 
 To fail- to this cf}, if you are to the eaftward of the ifland, waft along 
 more in 20 fathoms, as fir as the WSW. point ot the ifland, which is high 
 and bluff. By keeping that depth, the bottom is fandy, but in 1 5 fathoms 
 there are rocks ; fo that there is no 4-} there, in cafe of a calm, without the 
 hazard of lofmg your °H>. Having palled this high point, keep in from 15 
 
 M to
 
 8z A New Directory for the "Ems T-Xm hits. 
 
 to 25 fathoms ; and when you are oppofite a high round hill, in the middfc 
 of this part of the coaft, near which there is another fmaller, fpUt 1 the 
 middle; and when this laft bears north, you may 4-} in 18 fathom's, landy 
 ground. 
 
 Here refremments may be had, but the water is a little unpalatable. There- 
 is better to be had in iome places thereabout, but with great difficuly. 
 
 The Bay of Tamrida, on the north fide, where the viceroy refides, is the 
 moft convenient place in the ifland for refreshment and plenty of provifions ; 
 but the <f-> there is not good, being too near fhore. That place is known 
 by a point of fand, which makes the eaftern fide of the bay. After you have 
 doubled it, you may perceive the town, oppolite to which you may 4-} half 
 a league from the fhore, in 10 fathoms, fand and coral. The water is very 
 good, and provifions cheap. 
 
 On the north coaft, coming from the eaftvvard, as you fail, towards Tamrida 
 bay, you may obferve two white fand-hills, the wefternmoft of which is 
 much the largeft : the town lies about four miles to the weftward thereof, 
 under the higheft and fcraggieft part of the land. You may <f-} about two 
 miles off more, in 9 or ten 10 fathoms, the town bearing S. or Sb\V. 
 
 Of the Coaft of Arabia from Curia Muria to Cape Rofalgat. 
 
 CIX. Of the Coast of Arabia. 
 
 The bearing of the Coaft of Arabia, from the Bay of Curia Muria to Cape 
 Rofalgat, ii NEbN. diftance 115 leagues. It is full of rocks and dangers,. 
 which are but'iittle known. Betides, it is not fafe to approach it, becaufe of 
 the currents arV along, which may fet you on it, fhould you be taken in a 
 calm. The fhips bound for Perfia, which commonly make Cape Rofilgat, 
 fhould not keep more than ijf or 16 leagues to the fouth ward of this cape. 
 Along this coaft ehere are foundings about 3 leagues off fhore. 
 
 CX. Of Cape Rosai.cat. 
 
 Cape Rofalgat is the eaflernmoft point of the Coaft of Arabia : it3 latitude, 
 according to feveral obfervations made at lea, is 22? 12' N. longitude 59? 55' E. 
 of London. Its extremity is low, but within land arc exceeding high moun- 
 tt;:ns, icv.11 20 leagues off at fea. 
 
 CXI.
 
 Of the Coast of Arabta. 83 
 
 CXI. Of Cape Maskatta or Muskat. 
 
 From Cape Rofalgat to Mafcatta or Mufkat, the coaft ftretches to the 
 NW. 26 or 27 leagues. Between the two are iccn fome laridy bays ; but fo 
 fhoal, that there is no 4-^> except at Teyvvce or Tagwell, and Curiat ; and 
 there it is within piftol-fhot of the Ihore. You muft keep this fhore on board, 
 in the months of April, May and June, if you would arrive at Mufkat, or 
 enter the Perfian gulf. Mufkat is in the latitude of 23? 25' N. The town is 
 encompafied with a good wall, and the port big enough to contain fifty or 
 iixty fail of mips. There are no foundings a mile off more. 
 
 The reft of the coaft from Mufkat to Cape Mozandon or Mofenden, is 
 bordered with iflands and leveral dangers. 
 
 Of the Coaft of Perfia. 
 
 CXII. Of Cape Jasqhes or James. 
 
 The courfe, from Mufkat to Cape Jafques or James, is NNW. dlftanc 
 about 54 leagues. The eafternmoft point of this cape forms the eritrai :e 
 of the Perfian gulf, and is, according to the generality of navigators, iri 
 latitude 25? 50' north. This point is very low, and upon it there is a white 
 fquare cliff, like a monument, ftanding in the fea ; but it cannot be feen, 
 when you are in the road. In Ja^m^s Road, the bottom is fand ; except very- 
 near the fhore, or at the eaftern point. To the northward of this point there 
 is a little river, where veflels of about 10 feet draught may ride very fecure. 
 Within this river you have 44 fathoms at low water, when on the bar there 
 are but five feet, which encreafes with the flood to (even or eight feet. 
 
 CX1II. Of Cape Guapel or Goadel. 
 
 Cape Guadel is of a moderate height, lying in the latitude of 25? 25'N. and 
 bearing from Cape Jafques EbS. The Englifh Pilot makes the latitude of 
 Cape Jafques 25? 30'N. and that of Cape Guadel io' more northerly; but 
 this will not agree with the bearings, which he makes, with the variation 
 allowed, WbN. and EbS. The latitude of Cape Jafques is exadlly 25? 5o'N 
 and Cape Guadel 25 more fouthcrly ; but the navigators fhauld be upon their 
 guard. The diftance per medium of various accounts, is fixed in the new 
 charts at oo leagues. 
 
 M 2 As
 
 84 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 As to a particular description of the coaft, none of the journals or dl ftonea 
 make anv farther mention than to avoid coming; too near it in the ni: bt : 
 becaufe the land near the fhore is very low and not to be ieen far off, though 
 it is high land up the country. There are no foundings, but very near the 
 fhore. 
 
 CXIV. 0/ Sandy River. 
 
 The land to the fouthward of the mouth of this river* is called by the 
 natives Divelle, or leven months : it fhews very low, and three or four miles 
 off the fhore there is not above 4 or 5 fathoms water, hard ground, being a 
 fort of coral. The river Sindy, (Sinda or Cinda) hath a bar at the entrance, 
 of about 13 or 14 feet at high water. The mark for coming in is a white monu- 
 ment, which will fhew itielf about four miles off. The river Sindy would 
 be very hard to be found, were it not for this monument, which is always 
 kept white, to ferve as a marki Bring this monument to bear NE. from you, 
 and fleer directly with it, till you come to the foot of the bar, where, on 
 occalion, you may cf-^ in 3 or 3 ' fathoms ; and then the aforefaid monument 
 being brought NE'E, you may go over the beft of the bar, fleering NEbE- 
 The bar going into the river is narrow, and has not above 2 \ fathom at 
 fpring tides. But as there can be no dependence on inflrucliois for palling 
 the bars of great rivers, becaufe the banks generally fhift their places every 
 year or two, therefore I would adviie the rjjycuring a pilot of the place. 
 
 The firft place of any note, after palling the bar, is Laribunda, about 5 or 
 6 leagues from the fea ; but the principal place of trade is Tatta, about 4a 
 miles difhnce from Laribunda. 
 
 CXV. Of the Coast of Guzu rat. 
 
 The Coaft. of Guzurat, from Giant's Point to that of the weft end of Diu, 
 lie, SE. and NW. 45 leagues. The fhore is of a modciate height, but it is 
 very mountainous up in the country. There are foundings of 36 fathoms, land 
 and fftells, about 7 or 8 leagues off fhore. 
 
 CXY1. Of Diu and Point Courba. 
 
 Diu lies in 20? 45'N. The harbour between the iftand and the continent 
 is Very farhmbdious, but the entrance is nan mv and difficult. This city his 
 been of great note, and the capital of Guzurat ; but now it is, in a mariner, 
 only a heap of ruins. 
 
 From
 
 Of the Coast of Plrs:a. 85 
 
 From the eaft point of Diu to Point Courba, the courfe flretches NEbE; 
 diftance 19 leagues. It is very mountainous, inland; and the coaft of a 
 moderate height. From this point there runs out a reef of rocks, both above 
 and under water, jutting out above 2 leagues, which mult be carefully 
 avoided. 
 
 When you have doubled the reef off Point Courba, your courfe to the ifland 
 Peram is NbE. 11 or 12 leagues. Come no nearer this coaft than 11 or 12 
 fathoms (this you have about 3 leagues off more) on account of the (helves 
 which encompafs it. 
 
 CXVII. Of Peram Isle and Goco. 
 
 Peram ifland is furrounded with rocks. If you are bound to Gogo, which 
 lies NNVV. of this ifland, you muft bring it to bear weft, about 1 league ; 
 and from thence fleer NW. into the road which is deep enough for large 
 fhips, it having 4 fathoms a league offfhore. It is very fecure at all times ; 
 for the ifland, and the fhoals which appear at low water, break the wave?, and 
 keep them off. The tides here are very ftrong, efpecially the fprings, when 
 it is high water at four o'clock. 
 
 Gogo lies in 21? 45' N. it is the only place for trade on this coaft : notwith- 
 ftanding what is here faid of it, thole who would go there, or to any other 
 part of the gulf, fliould take a pilot, becaufe this navgation is both difficult and 
 dangerous. 
 
 Of the Coaft from Point de Gall, or Gaula. on the Ifland 
 
 Z'jloarij to Surat. 
 
 CXVIII. Of Point de Gall, or Gaula. 
 
 Point Gaula is placed, in, the new charts, in 6? N T . according to feveral 
 oblervations agreeing with each other, with as much exadtnefs as can be 
 wifhed. The longitude is 80? ij'E. of London, as adjufted by that of Cape 
 Comorin, and that of Pondicherry. 
 
 In comparing the reckonings of fhips, whether failing from Cape Comorin 
 to Point Gaula, or returning from Point Gaula to this cape, their bearings are 
 found to be SEiE. and NW4W, diftance 68 leagues. Mr. Nichelfon makes 
 W 33? N. 65 or 66 leagues from Point Gaula to Cape Comorin. 
 
 CXIX.
 
 86 A Kcw Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 CXIX. Of Winds and Currents near Point de Gall. 
 
 If you fhould he becalmed in coafting along Zeloan, <f-> in 30 fathoms, 
 left you be carried off the coaft by the currents. In eroding from one to the 
 other, obferve, that (during the eaflerly monfoons) the currents about Point 
 Gaula fet WSW. and athwart the Gulf of Manara, to the S\V. fo that feveral 
 fhips have been driven unexpectedly upon the Maldivia iflands. To avoid this, 
 be careful to coaft the Ifland Zeloan, nearly as far as Colombo ; from whence 
 you may fafely crofs to Cape Comorin ; but if you fhould make the land to the 
 eaft ward of the cape avoid coming near the coaft ; for it is encompafled with 
 dangers. 
 
 In the wefterly monfoons, you muft (contrary to what has been faid) take 
 care of the currents, which fet with great rapidity into the Gulf of Manara, 
 whereby many fhips have been horfed to the northward of Negumbo, and with 
 great difficulty got out of the gulf again. For want of this precaution a fhip 
 may be afliore in the night-time, when you reckon her 15 or perhaps 20 
 leagues diftant. The ikilful navigator, either way, will be upon his guard. 
 
 CXX. Of Cape Comorin and Point Cadiapatam. 
 
 Cape Comorin lies in between 7? 56' N. and 77? 37' Eaft longitude, from 
 London. The latter was determined by the bearings of the Coaft of Malabar, 
 from Cochien to this cape. Its extremity is low, and, covered with trees. 
 To the northward rifes a little hill, which appears like an ifland, when it bears 
 eaft. The chart reprefents two different views of this cape ; one as it appears 
 from the weft, the other from the eaft. Some Directories take notice of two 
 rocks, 2 leagues SW of Cape Comorin. There was alfo a rock, even with the 
 water's edge, feen by Mr. Nichelfon, (on board his Majefty's fhip Elizabeth, 
 in the year 1759 :) it lies in about the latitude of 7? 43' NT. and bears nearly 
 SW. from the little hill, to the northward of Cape Comorin, diftance about 
 7 leagues : there are two to the SE. but they are not above a league off fh ore. 
 From Cape Comorin to the Point of Cadiapatam, the courle is WN-W. 
 vvefterlv, 6 leagues. This remark is taken from a draught and directions made 
 upon the fpot, which were communicated by the governor of Pondicherrv, 
 and commander in chief of the French fettlements in the Eaft Indies. Between 
 the two, but nearer to the cape, is the river Manacoudv, whole entrance is 
 encompafled with rocks. Point Cadiapatam forms the eaftern extremity of 
 Colecha biv or road, which lies between two leagues to the NW. Several 
 great trees are feen on the extremity of it. 
 
 About
 
 Of the Coast from Point de Gall to Surat. Sj 
 
 About | of a league to the SSW. of this point there arc two little iflands, 
 furrounded with rocks ; to the SW. of which, about half a league, according 
 to fome, and i{ leagues according to others, there is a rock almofr. even with 
 the water, the top of which appears like a buoy. 
 
 Thofe who fail near the coaft ought to be the more careful to avoid it, as 
 it feldom breaks. The °h^ge of Colccha is in 14 fathoms, about half a league 
 to the we ft ward of the wefternmoft of the above-nientioned iflands. 
 
 CXXI. Of the Island Enciam, the River Tengayapatnam and 
 
 Point Veniam. 
 
 It is reckoned 8 leagues WNW. from Point Cadiapatam to Point Veniam. 
 Half way between the two lies a little ifland called Enciam, quite clofe to the 
 Continent, upon which a church is built. To the eafhvard of this ifland there 
 are feveral rocks, above and under water ; and to the northward of thefe 
 rocks is the river Tengayapatnam, or Tegapatam, which runs a great way 
 in the land. In the rainy feafons long-boats may enter ; but in dry weather 
 there is a bar at its mouth, which fhuts up the entrance of it to all but fmall 
 craft ; though within the bar this river is very navigable. 
 
 At z\ or 3 leagues from the river Tengayapatnam, is feen a large wood; 
 at the weft end of which begins high red land, intermixed with white, and 
 very fteep to the feaward. Thefe high lands continue a league beyond Point 
 Veniam, which forms a bluff of the fame lands. This point is known by the 
 eoaft ftretehing from thence to the NNW. The village of Veniam, and the 
 river of the fame name, are 1 league NbW. off this Point. Here the red 
 land ends. 
 
 From Cape Comorin are feen a number of churches along the fea fide. 
 The coaft is of an height to be feen 8 or 9 leagues at fea ; beiides a chain of 
 high mountains, that are feen inland, and extend above 150 leagues northward. 
 Thefe are called by Geographers the Mountains of Gatta. It is not like the 
 fame coaft from the river Veniam to Anjangay it being low to feaward, and 
 only difcovered by trees upon it. 
 
 A rock is fuppofed to be 14 leagues to the W. by N. of Point Veniam. 
 The Englifh Pilot lays it down in latitude 8?io'N. whereas, in our new 
 charts, it is placed in 8? 17'N. The meridian diftance in both, about 6 or 7 
 minutes E. of Ccchien. 
 
 CXXIL
 
 88 A Neiv Directory for the East-Indie". 
 
 CXXII. Of Winds on the Coasts of Malabar, Canara, &c. 
 
 It is proper to obferve, that from the month of April to October, the winds 
 blow there from NW. to SW. with florins, tempefts and much rain : therefore 
 there is no navigating without much trouble near this coaft, during this 
 monfoon, particularly in June and July. 
 
 The feafon growing a little finer in Auguft, the mips that have wintered 
 there depart thence for the Coaft of Coromandel, and other parts eaftward. 
 After the full moon in October you may fail in this part very fafely ; the 
 winds then blowing; out at fea, from NNE. without florins ; and along; the 
 coaft, fo favourably, that every day, about eleven or twelve o'clock, they come 
 from the fea, and at midnight from the land. This regularity facilitates the 
 navigation of thofe (hips who would fail up or down the coaft ; which you 
 muft always do pretty near, in order to take the advantage of one breeze 
 or the other. 
 
 If you find yourfelf near land, before the wind blows from thence, come 
 to in the mean time with a fmall +^, fo as not to fleer a difadvantageous 
 courfe. If you are fufficiently diftant from it, you mould cf->, and wait for a 
 breeze, in order to recover the coaft. Above all, great regard mud be had to 
 the tides, which, during the calm that intervenes the change of wind, may 
 (in a little time) make you lofe the advantage you have gained. Often with 
 a little wind you think you get, when in fact you lofe : this may be perceived, 
 being; near fhore. 
 
 In the day-time you mav make fome obfervation by the land ; but in the 
 ni CT ht, it is neceflary to have recourfe to the lead to know by ; or, let the 
 lono--boat 4-> near you : this may ferve for a companion, whereby you will 
 know whether the current is favourable, or contrary. If the latter, it is belt 
 to cf-^ and flay till it is diminifhed or changed. This inftruction may be 
 ufeful to thofe navigators who are not experienced, as it may ferve to make 
 them avoid the errors that generally prolong their voyages. 
 
 CXXIII. Of Anjanga, Coislan and Coc'Bien. 
 
 From Veniam Point to Anjanga, the courfe is NbW 6; leagues. The 
 coaft is low and woody; and you have foundings in 23 or 24 fathoms, it 
 league off fhore. Anjanga is an Englifh town ; the fort is fquare, defended by 
 baflion , and there arc feveral houfes that make it a very pretty place. There 
 is a riser about 100 paces from the fort; but it is not very considerable. 
 
 The
 
 Of the Coast from Point de Gall to Suk at. S9 
 
 The latitude of Anjanga has been obferved 8? 30' N. The anchorage is to 
 the SW. of the fort, in 12 fathoms, at two milts off fhore. 
 
 From Anjanga to Coiflan or Quilone, which is a Dutch factory, the coaft 
 lies NNWtW. 6l leagues. The land is low to fea-ward, except 2 leagues 
 to the north ward of Anjanga, where there is a red beach, fteep at the fea fide ; 
 then the coaft continues low as far as Coiflan. Two leagues SSE. of this laft 
 place, is a little river. You have foundings, 1 \ league off fhore, from 1 5 to 
 24 fathoms, muddy fand. 
 
 Coiflan is known by its flag, and the feveral tall trees that appear above 
 the fort, which is encompafled with high white walls. The road is oppofite 
 the fort. Before the fort is a reef of rocks, that may be avoided, by coming 
 no nearer the fhore than 12 fathoms. 
 
 From Coiflan to Calicoulan, or Carnople, another Dutch factory, in 
 latitude 9? N. it is 5I leagues. On this coaft you fteer NWbN. and NNW. 
 coming no nearer it than the depth above mentioned. 
 
 It is reckoned 21 leagues NNWfW. from Calicoulan to Cochien. The 
 land between them is low, and woody along fhore. You may coaft it in 7 
 fathoms, fand and mud. If you turn it, ftand off no further than 24 fathoms, 
 nor nearer than the depth above mentioned. 
 
 Coming from the fouthward, the town of Cochien can fcarcely be feen ; 
 the trees almoft hiding it. You only perceive fome houfes and the flao-, which 
 is hoifted upon a tower. This town is the chief fettlement belon«inp- to the 
 Dutch, upon the Coaft of Malabar. It is encompafled with a good brick wall 
 fortified with baftions. The river, at the mouth of which it is fituate, is very- 
 deep within the bar. They build fhips there from 200 to 300 tons. This river 
 may be confidered as an arm of the fea, forming many little iflands alono- the 
 coaft. This entrance is between two reefs, that extend themfelves alon^r 
 the coaft north and fouth, and project ~ of a league into the fea. 
 
 If you would go to the town, in a boat or canoe; to know the right channel, 
 fteer towards the ftarboard point going in ; and when you are near the fhoals 
 turn fhort to the larboard, and go between the two reefs. When you are near 
 fhore, and have doubled the ftarboard point, fteer by one of the ^ates of the 
 town, where there is a pier to land on. .The beft anchoraee in the road in 
 the eafterly monfoons, is in 5 or 6 fathoms, with the flag-ftaff ENE. 
 
 There is a little bank before the entrance of the river, on which is j fathom 
 hard ground ; but you run no hazard by 4-}mg in the depth already flievvn, 
 where the bottom is ouze, and very good holding. The town of Cochien is 
 plainly feen, coming from the northward ; it appears on that fide very diftincl. 
 Its latitude is 9? 5#'N T . and its longitude 76? 8' Eaft from London. 
 
 N exxrv.
 
 00 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 CXXIV. Of Cranganor, Peniana, and Callicut. 
 
 Fom Cochicn to Cranganor, (another of the Dutch fettlements) the coaft 
 lies NbW. 8^ leagues. The land is low and fwampy along fhore, and only 
 perceivable by the trees ; but inland exceeding high mountains, making pare 
 of thofe which, as was before obferved, extend from Cape Comorin. To the 
 eafhvard of Cranganor are feen two peaks, on the tops of theie hills ; which 
 make like the ears of a hare, when you are right off them. 
 
 Seven leagues N^W. from Cranganor is Peniana, which is a Dutch fettle-- 
 ment. To the northward of this place there is a little river, by which the 
 pepper is brought ; but there is no paffage into it for any but the very fmali 
 country veflels. 
 
 From Peniana to Callicut, the coair. extends NNW. 14 leagues. About 
 half-way from one to the other you fee Tannore ; and 3^ leagues from thij 
 laft is the entrance of the river Beypour, which is alfo 3 leagues SSE. of Cal- 
 licut. The fmall country veflels go in there. The coaft between Peniana' 
 and Callicut is all the way woody : when you approach this laft, you perceive 
 fbme little hills, near the fea-iide, and at a diftance the chain of Gatta 
 mountains. There are alfo, in feveral places, little pagados near the fhore, 
 which appear white. You may fail along this coafl without fear, in 8 fathoms,, 
 muddy ground, if you come from the fouthward, although you are neas 
 lhore. 
 
 The town of Callicut is not quite feen, becaufe it is in a little bay. You 
 fee only to the northward three white pyramids, which are called the Tombs : 
 by thefe it is known. Another mark, equally ufeful,' is a little hill upon 
 the land, detached from the re it, which appears like two breads, and which, 
 though more foutherly than Callicut, appears to the northward of it, coming 
 from the fouthward. 
 
 This town is the capital of the Samorin, and the place of his refidence. 
 A considerable trade is carried on here in pepper and cardamums. The Eng- 
 lifh have here a factor, and the French another ; each of them hoifling their 
 flag upon their factory. The latitude of this town is 11? i8'N. In the road 
 of Callicut, well: of the En gliih factory, lies a rocky bank, upon which you 
 muft avoid 4-}, left you lofe your <f-> there. At a little diftance from it 
 there is no danger. Small veflels may «f-} between the fhore and the bank; 
 
 1 ut for large flaps the beft <fA is to bring the French flag to the fouthward 
 ofeafl, whilft that of- the fh bears EbN. in 5! fathoms, muddy ground, 
 two miles off fhore. Mr. Nichelfon fays, when the Englifh flag-ftaff bears 
 
 NEbE,
 
 Of the Malabar Coast. 91 
 
 NEbE. about two miles, there is a fhoal with -J lefs 3 fathom, hard rocky 
 ground, which extends NNW. and SSE. about a large J| of a mile, and its 
 breadth little more than two mips length ; and has 5 fathom juft without 
 it. 
 
 It is reckoned about 10 leagues NWbN. from Callicut road to that of Mahe. 
 The Sacrifice Rock lies about 4 leagues SbE. or rather SbW. according to 
 fome, from the latter and about 6? leagues NWbW. from the former. This 
 ifland or rock, is all white, covered with the dung of birds, high and very 
 fteep on all fides, and about 2 leagues from the Continent. The pafiage 
 between them is very good, having no lefs than 8 fathoms in the middle 
 channel. About one-eighth of a league without this rock you have 15 or 16 
 fathoms, and to the ENE. is the river Cotta, in which the pepper trade is 
 carried on. The coail between Callicut and Mahe is low and very woody, 
 with feveral little rivers, and Indian villages, the principal of which is called 
 Chambaye, about a league SSE. from Mahe ; it belongs to the prince of Bay- 
 anor. Near this river are feen feveral rocks along more. 
 
 CXXV. O/Mahe, Moelaw and Tilltcherry. 
 
 Mahe is the chief fettlement belonging to the French, on the Coaft of 
 Malabar, of which they have been in pofieffion ever lince 1725. This place, 
 with all its dependencies on the Malabar coaft, was furrendered to the Eng- 
 lish on the 10th of February 1761. They have built there a town, and feveral 
 forts, which really make a very ftrong place. The principal fort is iituate on 
 a bluff point, at the mouth of a little river, that takes its rife a great way 
 within land. , It is navigable, for the little veflels of the place, a great way 
 up ; by means whereof they eafdy convey the pepper and cardimums, in 
 which is carried on at this place a very confiderable trade ; but there is a 
 bank of fand or bar that (huts up the entrance, at high water ; and there is 
 but (even or eight feet depth : this prevents middling mips from entering. 
 On the other fide of this river, on a hill, is built another fort, called Great 
 Calais. The town is on the fhrboard-fide going in, beyond the firft fort, 
 They 4-}, in the fine feafons, in 5 { fathoms, the flag of the fort EbN. about 
 t of a lea sue off the more. If any accident mould oblige you to 4-} there 
 before the full moon in October, you mult come no nearer than 12 
 fathom. 
 
 About 1 league NNW. from Mahe, upon a little hill, is the fort of Moelan, 
 belonging to the Endifh; and a league more northerly, the town and forts 
 
 -N '2 of
 
 92 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 of Tillicherry, which belong to them alfo. Here is a fmall bay, into which 
 runs the river Dermapatam : in palling it you fee feveral great rocks, quite 
 in Ihore. Tillicherry belonged formerly to the French, who forfook it, and 
 broke up the factory, May the 3d, -1682. Off Tillicherry is an ifland covered 
 with wood. 
 
 CXXVI. Of Cananor, Mount Dilla, and Mangalor. 
 
 To the northward of this ifland, about 3 V leagues you fee the Dutch fort at 
 Cananor. It is built on a low ground, covered with trees. The town of the 
 fame name is near it, and a little river pafles at the foot of it. 
 
 Mount Dilla, in latitude 12? ^N. bears NW. about 10 leagues from Mahe 
 road. This mount extends E. and W. and forms a point that projects into 
 the lea. As you come from the northward or fouthward, this mount appears 
 feparate from the coaft. The neighbouring land being very low, and only 
 diitinguilhable by the trees, renders this hill and point very remarkable to 
 navigators. 
 
 From Mount Dilla to Mangalor, the courfe is NbW^W. diltance 16 leagues. 
 Seven miles north of Mount Dilla runs the little river Canople, to the 
 northward of which is Mount Formofa, fo called by the Portuguefe, from 
 its beautiful appearance. This mountain is reckoned to Hand 4 leagues inland. 
 The coaft hereabout is low, and covered with wood. Somewhat to the 
 northward of Mount Formofa you fee a little hill called Mount Beam or 
 Barn-hill. 
 
 Of the Coaft of Canara, 
 
 CXXVII. Of St. Mark's Islands, and Pigeon Island. 
 
 Mangalor is at the mouth of a great river, wherein the country veffels fail, 
 which do not draw much water, and can go over the bar, which almolt Ihuts 
 up the entrance. Here is a great trade in rice. On the fouth fide is a fortrefs 
 of the king of Canara, to whom the town and country belong. The Portu- 
 guefe have a fictory here. The «f-> is off the river's mouth, in 6 or 8 
 fathoms, muddy ground. 
 
 About 10 or 11 leagues NWbN. from the entrance of the river Mangalor, 
 lies the fouthcrnmoft of the St. Mary's iflands. Thefe are feveral little iilands 
 that lie along; the coaft north and fouth, as far off as the river Bacanor or 
 Caleanpour, being about 6 leagues. There is a paflage between them and the 
 
 Continent ;
 
 C)f the Malabar Coast. 93 
 
 Continent ; but yon muft be experienced, in a fmall veflel, to attempt this 
 paflage, on account of clivers rocks that lie under water in many places about 
 them. There are alio the Permera rocks above water, lying in the latitude of 
 13? Come no nearer them in the night than 16 fathoms. In latitude 13? 
 50' north, NbWiW. 5 leagues from Bacanor, runs the river Barfalor, to the 
 northward of which are two little iflands, in Ihore ; and to the fouthward, a 
 chain of rocks that extend alono; the coaft. 
 
 Nine leagues NW. of the mouth of the river Barfalor, in 14? 8' north lati- 
 tude, is Pigeon Ifland : though it is fmall, it may be {cen 8 or 9 leagues at 
 fea. It lies WSW. of the river Batecala, and 2 \ or 3 leagues off more, 
 where are feen again feveral little iflands. Pigeon Ifland has a rock, or little 
 ifland, off it to the SE. and another to the Eaft. Some make thefe, one S\V. 
 the other W. 
 
 CXXVIII. Of Carwar, and the Islands of Angedive. 
 
 Fourteen leagues NbW. off pigeon Ifland, is Carwar, which belongs to the 
 Englifh. Juft by, are the Angedive Iflands, on the largeft of which the Eng- 
 lifh had a fort. 
 
 You may 4-} at Carwar, with the Duckey or Oyfter rocks, which lie at 
 the entrance, NNW{N. and a fmall rock in the road, open with the ifland of 
 Angedive, to the NbW[W. diftant 2 leagues. 
 
 Or you may <\^ oppofite the ifland of Angedive, the body of the ifland 
 NEbE. i of a league, and the fouth point of Carwar NbE. in 10; fathoms. 
 
 The paflage into Carwar Bay, is between the Oyfter rocks and the little 
 ifland, near the fouth point. In this bay, near the faid point, is a fmall cove, 
 the entrance into which is SE- E. Small lhips may <f-^ here in fafety, being 
 flickered from all winds. At the entrance into this cove you have 4 fathom. 
 A fhip may ride here during the weftern monfoons, without much 
 hazard. 
 
 There is alfo a paflage on either fide the Oyfter rocks, in 7 or eight fathoms, 
 ouzy ground. 
 
 of
 
 ,M -4 New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Of the Coaft of Decan. 
 
 CXXIX. QTCapeRamas, Serpent Islands, an J Go ad a, or Alguada 
 
 Fort. 
 
 About 4; leagues to the northward of the Oyfler rocks, hes Cape Ramas ; 
 diihnt j.f leagues SbE. from the bar of the river Goa. The Cape is high 
 land, and in coming from the fouthward it appears very bluff. If you would 
 go to Goa, and fail along more, you mufl fleer NNW. 2 leagues to the 
 wefhvard of the Ovfler rocks, in order to give a good birth to the Serpent 
 iflands, fituate 2 leagues WSW. off Mormagan point, which makes the 
 fouth fide of Goa river. Thev fay there is a paffage between thefe two Iflands, 
 and that there are no lefs than 4 fathoms water in the channel, by keep- 
 ing fbmewhat nearer to the wefternmoft ; neverthelefs it is more advifeable 
 to fail without all. Thofe who are benighted ought to be upon their guard, 
 becaufe of the currents, which the ebbing and flowing of the river occalion, 
 and which may alter the direction. 
 
 Having doubled the outer Serpent Ifland, you freer for Goada, or Alguada 
 Fort. This is built on the north fide of the entrance of Goa River. You 
 cf-^ in 8 or 9 fathoms, muddy ground, the mouth of the river Ea(l, and 
 Goada Fort NbE. off Mormagon point. Beware of certain rocks, that are 
 only feen at low water. If you would go farther up, you mufl take a pilot of 
 the place. 
 
 CXXX. Of Goa and the Burnt Islands. 
 
 Goa is the chief fettlement belonging to the Portuguefe in the Eafl-Indies, 
 
 and the refidence of the viceroy. This place is too well known to need a 
 
 more particular defcription here. Its longitude has been obferved 73? 50' E 
 
 from London, and latitude 15? 31' North. 
 
 Ten or 11 leagues NWbN. from the road of Goada, are the fouthernmoft 
 
 and weflernmofl of the Burnt Iflands, called by the Englifh the Vingorla 
 
 rocks, in number 1 1. The northernmoft and largeft lies in 16? north latitude, 
 
 and 1 1 league WbS. from the river Vingorla. Though the paffage appears 
 
 clear between thefe iflands, and the Continent, it is bell to fail wide of 
 
 them. 
 
 of
 
 ( 95 ) 
 Of the Coaft of Concan. 
 
 CXXXI. Of the Points of Vigiador, and Ixdruc. 
 
 Nine leagues NNW. oil" the targeft of the Burnt Iflands, in latitude 
 1 6? 25' N. lies point Vigiador: this makes the fouth point of Ixdruc, 
 Angria's principal port. This is a bluff" point, whereon is a fort well lined 
 with guns, and at the foot of it a reef of rocks, even with the water. This 
 port is about 17 league in depth, to the SSE. and 4 of a league wide. The 
 north point is alfo furrounded with a reef Within this harbour you have 
 12 or 13 feet at low water, and 4 or 5 fathoms depth between the two 
 points that form the entrance. 
 
 This account is taken from a particular draught, font to the French com- 
 pany by a mate belonging to the fnip Jupiter, which was taken by theie 
 pirates. This place is alio called Vizendruke, but is better known by the 
 name of Geriah or Gyria : it was taken from Angria, by Admiral Watfon and 
 Colonel (afterward, Lord Clive) on the 13th February 1756. 
 
 CXXXII. Of the Angrian Corsairs. 
 
 The fhips that fail along the Coaft of Canara and Decan, whether bound 
 to Goa, Bombay, or Surat, mould be on their guard. The Angrians, San- 
 garians, and Savejees, are corfairs, and watch continually to furprife mips 
 navigating near this coafr. They know how to take advantage of the calms, 
 and to attack with the greateft furety. It is -very ieldom one alone ventures, 
 without being accompanied with feveral others. They have generally . chafe- 
 cannon of twelve or eighteen pounders, and fome of Iefs diameter. Molt of 
 their ports are fituate between Goa and Bombay. Of late years, the Engliih 
 ihips, as well as others, are obliged to keep grabs to defend themlelves. 
 
 CXXXIII. Of Geitapour, or Rajapour. 
 
 Three and a half or 4 leagues to the northward of Ixdruc, is Geitapour, or 
 Rajapour. In 1682 and 83, the French had a fettlement there. 
 
 Here follow the in ft ructions given by thoie navigators who have frequented 
 this place. 
 
 Coming from the fouthward, the port of Geitapour is known by a fort, 
 which is 4 leagues diftant from it to. the SE. which may be plainly- feen 
 2 leagues off. To the N\V. lies Cape Geitapour ; a fteep eminence, upon 
 which are feen feveial clufters of trees, which may be taken at firft fight for 
 
 windmills.
 
 $6 A New Directory for the East-Indies 
 
 windmills. A little farther in-land, above this eminence, there is a little round 
 hill, at which you might fee, at that time, three great trees appearing all 
 together like a little fort. It was here the French factors formerly hoifted 
 their flag. A little to the northward of the entrance of Geitapour, is feen a 
 fteep platform, refembling an ifland, the foil of which is like iron-mine. 
 Farther northward is a fandy bay, with another platform of the fame kind, 
 but lower and quite black. In the middle of the fandy bay you fee a reef, 
 very near fhore. The coafr. to the northward is higher than in this place. 
 There is no other platform, nor black ground befide what is here mentioned. 
 
 NW. from Cape Geitapour there is a reef, of which take the following 
 remark. 
 
 The end of this reef is NW. of the north point of the bay. Half a league 
 without this fhoal you have 7 fathoms water, rocky ground. Within it, 
 
 about a mufket-fhot, there is a fithom and a half of water, the fame bottom ; 
 and elfewhere about it S fathoms, muddy ground. When you enter the bay 
 of Geitapour, you muft in coming from the northward, keep in 1 o fathoms, 
 On account of this rock, until you fee the bay open ; then keep on the fouth 
 fide, and look for the great tree on Mount Gnafil, at the NE. end of the bay, 
 in which you may 4-} in 5 fathoms muddy ground. 
 
 CXXXiV. Of the Bar of Choul, and Coulaba Island. 
 
 From Geitapour, or Rajapour, to Choul bar, the direction of the coafr. 
 is NNW. dillant 44 leagues. Here you meet with many ports, and the 
 mouths of feveral rivers. Some of thefe ports belong to the Anglian, fome to 
 the Savejee, and others to the Seedee. The Seedee is the vice-admiral of the 
 Mogul's fleet. Thefe ports are none of them of any importance to trade. 
 
 When you turn it along this coaft, in {landing on, come no nearer than 
 9 or 10 fathoms; becaufe, under that depth, you may find danger in feveral 
 places. 
 
 Choul lies in 18? 35' N. Latitude. They anchor right off it, in 8 or 9 fathom 
 water. 
 
 Three leagues and a half SE from Choul, is a great river, at the entrance 
 of which there is a reef that breaks very much. In the midlt is a rock, which 
 appears above water. The Englifh charts call this river or port, Dunda- 
 Rajapour. From thence to Choul, the coaft is lined with rocks. The fort 
 of Choul is placed on a little eminence, which may be (i • n 4 leagues at fea; 
 at the foot of which the town is built. Sailing along the Costft you fee feveral 
 
 buildings, and within land rmnv rugged mountains. 
 
 Mr.
 
 ' Of the Coast of Cuncan. 97 
 
 Mr. Nichelfon has the entrance of this river 7 leagues NNVV^W. The 
 coaft between Goa and Choul is moft confufedly reprefented by different 
 authors; owing chiefly to iniftaking the names of places one for another. 
 This coaft is moftly inhabited by the Angrians, and other piratical princes. 
 Navigators, in common, have feldom chofe to come near enough to make 
 diftinct remarks of it. 
 
 Off Choul is a flat ifland, named Coulaba, on which the Angrians have a 
 fort. From hence to the oppofite fhore there are flakes, on which the fifher- 
 men hang their nets. In feveral places thefe (takes reach two leagues off 
 more. You muft take care, and not pafs between them without great 
 necefiity. 
 
 When you anchor before Choul bar, you may plainly fee the Ifland Hunary 
 and Cunary, which lie 3 or 4 leagues to the fouthward of Bombay. The 
 coaft between thefe two is fdled with aldees, or villages of the Indians. 
 
 CXXXV. Of Bombay, Bacaim, or Basseen, atid Barsabas. 
 
 Bombay lies in latitude 19? 8 r N. and 73? 6 / E. longitude from London. It 
 is the fin eft port in this coaft, and the beft belonging to the Englifli in the 
 Eaft Indies. Here it is that fhips winter and are refitted. The entrance 
 of it is very difficult, on "account of the many fhoals found there. You muft 
 be well experienced to enter it. 
 
 From Bombay to Bacaim is 10 or n leagues NbW. The fhore between 
 the two is low and even, except fome hillocks. Within land it lhews itlelf 
 alfo in hillocks, but higher. You may fail along this coaft in 10 or 11 fa- 
 thoms, free from danger, except the fiftiing ftakes that are found very far out, 
 and within which the paflage is not fafe. Here is good cf-> ground, if 
 becalmed, or the tides are againft you. Between Bombay and Becaim the tides 
 let NbE. and SbW. 3 or 4 leagues off. The floods then fet to the NWbN. 
 and the ebb SEbS. as far as Cape St. John. The frefhes out of the country 
 make the water very thick. 
 
 Before you come to Bacaim, you meet with a river, and a little port called 
 Barfabas ; it bears EbS. when the fouthernmoft part of the hill, iituate to the 
 fouthward of Bacaim, bears EbN. 
 
 There ic a point that projects a little into the fea, from which extends a 
 reef of rocks above water. The town is within this point, in which is built 
 a little tower, encompaffed with cocoa trees ; it is on this tower the Portu- 
 guefe hoift their flag, and have a battery of guns that front the road. The 
 
 O coaft
 
 98 A New Directory for the East-Jndies. 
 
 coaft to the northward of Barfabas is Candy ; and in fome places are rocks? 
 which do not extend, at fartheft, above a quarter of a league off fhore. 
 
 About Bacaim the coaft is even ; and at the end is a valley, wherein the 
 town is fituated. To the fouthward of the town is a high round hill, on 
 which the Savejee has a fort. 
 
 When this fort bears eaft, you then have open the entrance of the port of 
 Bacaim. The opening is between two little iflands or rocks, between which 
 you muft pafs, one on the north fide, the other on the fouth. This port has- 
 but little water, and is only fit for very fmall veffels. 
 
 Some years ago a considerable army of the Marattoes, after a- fiege of 1 8 or 
 20 months, took the city and fort of Bacaim from the Portuguefe. 
 
 To the NNW. of Bacaim is an ifland covered with trees, and detached from 
 the coaft. 
 
 It is reckoned 12 leagues NNW. from Bacaim to Cape St. John. In this- 
 part keep off fhore at leaft 3 \ leagues, on account of the rocky banks which 
 advance into the fea at 2 or 3 leagues. From latitude 19? 40 'N. at this 
 diflance, the depth is 1 7 or 1 8 fathoms. 
 
 Ifneceffity obliges you to turn it,, you muft come no nearer than 16 fa- 
 thoms, for fear of falling fuddenly on fome places of 7 or 8 fathoms, foul 
 ground. The tides, which generally fet NNE. and SSW. fometimes incline, 
 toward fhore. You muft obferve this, and not °h}> unlefs you find it im- 
 poiTible to ft em the current. 
 
 CXXXVI. Of Cave St. John, Road of Surat, *W Surat-. 
 
 Cape St. John lies in 20? 2 or 3'N. Three or four leagues inland-, to the- 
 fouthward of this cape, are two high hills or peaks, one called) the Peak 
 Anoul, inform of a pyramid, the other like a caftle. All the coaft is high 
 from thence to the cape, the extremity of which is higheft. Along fhore the 
 land is low, and covered with trees. 
 
 When you have doubled this cape, and are bound for Surat road, keep the 
 mid-channel, where you have 16 or 17 fathoms, mud. Above all, take care 
 of failing too far to the weftward, and of nearing the outer banks farther than 
 20 or 22 fathoms, mud. If you find, upon founding, either fafid, gravel or 
 rock, you will be near thefe fhoals, over which you cannot pais, even at 
 high water : then you muft immediately ftand to the ealtwaid, to regain the 
 channel. On the eaft fide you muft not come under 10 fathoms ; but if your; 
 foundings are gravel or rocky, ycu muft ftand right off to the weftward. 
 
 1 00
 
 Of the Coast of Cokcan. 9) 
 
 Too near the had is dangerous, the currents horfmg you thereon in a calm ; 
 and a good way out lie feveral rocks under water. Take particular notice of 
 this till you are got to the northward of Demawn ; then you may near the 
 coaft at pleafure, for the bottom all along is foft mud as far as Surat road. 
 
 The coaft between Cape St. John and Surat river is low and even. About 
 3 or 4 leagues to the Southward of the entrance there are three little hills. 
 They <f-} in Surat road in 10 fathoms mud, 2 leagues off more, and the 
 mouth of the river NbE. The fea rifes and falls about 3 fathoms. 
 
 Three leagues northward of Surat river, lies the port of Swaley : to fail 
 thither you muft get an able pilot, on account of the many ihoals which you 
 meet with in the paffage. 
 
 Surat is 5 leagues from the rivers mouth, in 21? io'N. latitude, and 72? 
 17'E. longitude from London. This city is a place of the greateft trade 
 in the Eaft Indies. The Englifh, French and Dutch, have each a ficwry 
 there. 
 
 Of the Laccadive Iflands. 
 
 CXXXVII. The Laccadive Islands. 
 
 To the weflward of the Malabar coaft is the Archipelago of the Laccadives. 
 This is the general appellation for the iflands to the northward of the Mal- 
 dives, or Maldivia Iflands. They extend from 8? \o' to 12? 50'N. latitude. 
 There are nineteen principal ones, moft of them furrounded with fhoals and 
 fteep rocks ; fo that navigators are at a lofs to know when they are near them. 
 This makes their approach very dangerous. 
 
 CXXXVIII. Of the Islands Seuhelipar and Calpenia. 
 
 Between thefc iflands are 'many paiTages, through which the mips bound 
 from the Earl-Indies, toward the Red Sea, or the Perfian Gulf, commonly 
 proceed. The moft known, especially by European mips, is that of Marnala. 
 commonly called the 9!? channel. It is bounded on the north by the iflands 
 Seuhelipar and Calpenia, and on the fouth by the ifland Malika. Iri captain 
 Cornwall's chart, made from a defcription given of thefe iflands by a pilot 
 born on the Ifland Qualpena, it is Soolepaul. The iflands are varioufly 
 named and placed, as well in latitude as longitude, by different authors. 
 The lirft of thefe iflands lies in about 10? N. latitude. Mr. Nichellbn, in his 
 
 O 2 Mijcfty's
 
 ioo A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Majefty's fhip Elizabeth, 1764, was in latitude, by obfervation, 9? 49' N". 
 and longitude, made from Calicut, 3? b' W. when he faw the Ifland Seuhe- 
 lipar from the mad-head, bearing NbE. diftance 6 or 7 leagues ; lb that its 
 latitude mult be 10? io'N. He obferved the variation in the morning, before 
 they faw the ifland, ]? 5' W. This ifland has a reef off the fouth point, 
 which reaches near 2 leagues. The ifland Seuhelipar, like all the reft in this 
 clufter, is exceeding low, and is only perceived by -the trees that cover it ; fo 
 that it cannot be feen at more than 6 or 7 leagues off, in fine weather, accord- 
 ing to M. du Fai, captain of the fhip Amphitrite who made it in 1736. The 
 next day he had alfo fight of Calpenia ifland, equally low and woody. By 
 others its latitude has been obferved 10? N. and appearing encompafled with 
 rocks. Captain Cornwall fays it has a river, where veflels of two hundred 
 tons may float and clean. Its diftance from the Coaft of Malabar and the 
 other iflands, as exhibited in the new charts, is founded on obfervations, and 
 the remarks of navigators who have pafled between them. 
 
 CXXXIX. O/Maliojje Island, 
 
 The fituation of the ifland Malique is very uncertain. Several make a doubt 
 even of its exiftence ; but others are of a different opinion. It is in 9? 1 5'. N~ 
 latitude, according to the opinion of navigators. 
 
 The extent of the fecond paffage is known with more certainty than the 
 channel of Mamala ; it extends between the ifland of Kelay or Sindal, and the 
 northernmoft of the Maldives. M. Houflaye, an experienced captain of the 
 1 nru:h India company's fhips, faw them both, and obferved their latitudes. 
 Many navigators think themfelves expofed to an evident danger, in paffmg this 
 channel, on account of its having been hitherto but imperfectly known. 
 
 The following is an extract from the Journal of the Sieur Houflaye, fecond 
 captain of the Ihip Le Prefident. 
 
 " The 1 ft of July, 1685, at five in the morning, we had fight of four of the 
 northernmoft Maldive iflands, bearing SWbW. about 3 or 4 leagues. The 
 largeft of them feemed to us about a league in length. They are ail very low ; 
 it is the trees on them only that make them viiible : thefe in fine weather mav 
 be feen 5 leagues off. The northernmoft I take to be in 7? 15'N. latitude. At 
 8 A. M. being 2 leagues from thefe iflands, we founded with 120 fathoms of 
 line, but no ground. Coafting the laid iflands about ten o'clock, we made 
 {even others, of an equal height ; that is to lay, all very low. There appealed 
 fome ro.ks apart, but very near the land. Of the third ifland to the Southward, 
 wc law breakers a great way off, and all Itemed very dangerous." 
 
 From
 
 Of the Laccadive Islands. ioi 
 
 From this journal, and the report of feveral navigators, it is certain that the 
 Jiorthernmoft. of the Maldives doth not exceed 7? 30'N. latitude, and that the 
 fouthernmoft doth not extend beyond the equinoctial line. 
 
 Another Extract from a Journal of the fame Author, in the fame fhip, in 
 
 1687. 
 
 " From Tuefday noon, the 29th of July, to Wednefday the 30th, at half an 
 hour after one in the morning, by light of the moon, we law the ifland Sindal, 
 or Canala or Kcla. I reckoned that I was then in 8? 20'N. latitude, and about 
 95? 55'E. longitude, from the meridian of Teneriff, being at that time about half 
 a league from the laid ifland, which is low like the illands of Glenan, on the 
 coaft of Bretagne. We faw breakers abrealt of us ; and hearing the noife of 
 the furf very plain, we put about and founded : no ground with fixty fathoms 
 of the line ; the body of the ifland bore SbE. the wind being then at SW. We 
 found ourfelves too near land, fo ftood off a little ; and at day-break we faw this 
 illand : it is very low, efpecially on the well: fide ; there it is alrnofr. even with 
 the water ; and there is a long point, whereon the fea breaks very high. It is 
 higher at the eaft end, and may be about 4 leagues long. In failing to the 
 northward of it, it appeared to us round, having large rocks about it, efpecially 
 at the NE. end : we faw thefe run out a great way. This ifland may be feert 
 at 4 or 5 leagues off. It is- very dangerous, and I do not think the 8? channel fo 
 good as that of 9?'. I find, however, that one may pafs clear of the Maldives, 
 between 7? 55 and 7? xo'H. latitude ; but rather prefer the paflage of 9? I, as 
 above mentioned." 
 
 This determines the latitude of the northernmoft part of the ifland, 8? 1 8'N. 
 In May, 1 75 1 , captain Nicholas Webb, in the Warwick, faw this ifland, (which 
 he calls Canala, after the Englifh Pilot) at 1 1 A. M. bearing NEbE^E. 5 or 6 
 leagues. Then they fteered EbN'N. 4 miles, and at noon had a very good 
 obfervation, by Hadley's quadrant, in latitude 8? 4'N. whereby it appears, that the 
 body of it lies in about 8? io' or 1 i'N. He made above 29? meridian diftance 
 from Grand Comero ; but fuppofes he had met with ftrong wefterly currents ; 
 and therefore thofe bound to Zeloan, &c. fhould always make this ifland, as the 
 departure cannot be depended on. He made from hence about 7? eafting to 
 Zeloan, and defcribes it as very low and woody, about three leagues long ; lying 
 neareft ESE. and WNW : that off the WNW. cud there is another imall ifland, 
 with a few trees on it ; and a reef breaks from one to the other. As it is fo veiy 
 low, he would advife lying-to in the night, when near it, and keeping a good 
 look-out in time. Next year aifo, in the Edgecote, Captain Pearce made this 
 
 ifland,
 
 io2 A New. Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 iiland, calling it Mincoy, after Captain Cornwall ; and made its latitude 8? I 7'N. 
 They allow it to anfwer the defcription given of it by M. Houflaye, and add 
 further, that on the wefternmoll end there is a clutter of trees ; that in fome 
 places it is bare ; and that there are four remarkable trees, paired, about 2 leagues 
 from the E. end, or perhaps 2 miles ; elfe it had been more expreflive to have 
 faid about the middle of the ifland, as they allow the whole length but 4 leagues, 
 and Captain Webb but 3, Probably the two iflands he mentions join together 
 at low water, as no notice is taken thereof by others ; and then he may agree in 
 the length with them. 
 
 Probably a paflage may be found between the ifland Malique, (whofe filia- 
 tion is undetermined) and that of Kelay.' Thofe navigators, who come from 
 Monfambique channel, called the Inner Paflage to India, from the iflands Mau- 
 ritius and Bourbon, or from any other place fituate in the weflern part of the 
 Indies, and are bound for the Coafl: of Coromandel, Bengal, or other places 
 eafhvard, may lately pals between the two channels above defcribed, provided 
 they take care to keep within the latitudes prelcribed. 
 
 By this means they will Ihorten their voyages, and not expofe themfelves, 
 on the Coafl: of Malabar, to the wefterly winds, that blow there with great 
 violence, during the height of that monfoon. This may be a caution to thofe 
 that fail to the northward of the Laccadives. It is not always fufficient, in 
 order to avoid this danger, that you keep that coafl: at a great diftance ; the 
 precaution may fometimes be rendered ulelels by the fudden violence of winds 
 and currents. 
 
 Some navigators prefer the north paflage to the channel in 9?', on account 
 of the heavy fqualls and rains that happen between thefe iflands, as well as on 
 the Coaft of Malabar, during the months of June, July and AuguiT: ; {o that 
 fhips bound to the Indies Ihould run near Ihore, for want of being able to 
 obierve the latitude. The currents met with near theie iflands, make one more 
 liable to miflake hereabout. By the journals of thole fhips that have failed 
 among thele iflands, it appears that the oblcrvations for the latitudes have not 
 been fo few as hath been fuppofed ; and that many of thefe have contributed 
 towards afcertaining their fituation. 
 
 On approaching thefe iflands the currents fet to the foutfcward. as they do 
 alio through the channels. The greatefl: error caufed by the currents, in this 
 latitude, doth not exceed twenty miles in twenty-four hours ; generally it is 
 about twelve miles. If the darknefs of the weather, or any other inconve- 
 niency, prevents an observation for the latitude, you may by proportion com- 
 pute
 
 Of the Laccadive Islands. 1C3 
 
 putc the error or difference, and direct your courfe accordingly for a fight of, 
 or foundings off, the Coaft of Malabar, which place you fhould make before you 
 attempt the ifland Zeloan. 
 
 M. de la Garde, commanding a (hip of the company, in paffing this channel, 
 found the fea changed, as if it had been in thirty fathoms. Me at that time 
 reckoned himfelf afhore, to account for this appearance ; but this was not 
 fufficient. He founded feveral times, but finding no ground in 100 fathoms, 
 continued his courfe eaftward, and would not fail fouthward till he had feeir 
 the Coaft of Malabar. Without this his fhip had inevitably run afhore on the 
 Maldivia ifles. 
 
 Several navigators have neglected this precaution ; but fuch fhould not be 
 followed, becaufe, after a long voyage, there may be a confiderabie error in 
 your reckoning, and when you think you have palled the Laccadives, and bear 
 away to the fouthward, you are in danger of running on the Maldives, or fome 
 other ifland in the channel. The change of colour in the fea, which generally 
 evinces foundings, is not in this part a certain fign ; efpecially if you have 
 not feen any of the iflands. You fhould absolutely afiure yourfelf by 
 foundings. 
 
 CXL. The Banks o/'Cherbaniang and Padua 
 
 To the northward of the Laccadives, you find the banks of Cherbaniang and 
 Padua, extending to I3?N. latitude. Thefe rocks are fo much the more 
 dangerous, as they do not break, and are not perceived till you are upon them. 
 You find again fome banks more notherly, whereon many mips have founded, 
 and which, according to their report, are not dangerous. But, that you may 
 not be deceived by the conformity of depth on thofe banks, with that of the- 
 Coaft of Malabar, take the following directions. The navigators that fail to- 
 northward of the Laccadives, viz. thofe from the Arabian or Perfian Gulf, 
 generally content themfclves . (efpecially in bad weather, or the wefterly 
 monfoons) with getting foundings on the Coaft of Malabar ; then they fteer 
 SSE. and SbE. in order to keep mid-channel between the iflands and the coaft. 
 But fuppofmg a founding had been made on one of the banks abovementioned,. 
 it is evident (from their fituation, in refpect of the iflands) that a fhip by this 
 courfe would hazard the running afhore on one of them. 
 
 The beft way to avoid this danger, when the weather will not permit you to 
 fee the coaft, is not to depend upon your firft founding, but to keep your courfe 
 fome time ; then, if you lofe foundings, it is a true fign you founded on one o{ 
 
 the
 
 id4 -A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 the banks ; but if they continue, you may be fare you are near the coaft. 
 This obfervation deferves the attention of thofe who have the care of (hip; 
 committed to their charge. It is beft to make the Coaft of Malabar in 1 4? 
 from 1 o' to 20', and to get in good time into this latitude. If you are coming 
 from the fouthward, and bound to Goa, this method is very well ; but if you 
 are bound to Zeloan, there is no bufinefs for a (hip coming from the fouthward, 
 to the northward of the 9? J. channel. If bound to Bombay, in the wefterly 
 monfoon, it is beft to make the land in the latitude of Hunary and Kanary, and 
 not before. By this you have nothing to fear from the Banks of Cherbaniang ; 
 which fhoal is placed 80 leagues from the coaft by fome, and 100 leagues 
 bv others. 
 
 Forty-five leagues weft of Goa, fbme pretend to find a bank, extending from 
 north to fouth, upon which are found 30, 40 and 50 fathoms. Some perfons 
 have affured, that the Agrian corfairs uled to go thither to $-$ in fine weather, 
 to wait for fhips to plunder. 
 
 Of the Laccadive Iflands and the Channels between them. 
 
 CXLI. Of the Islands Seuhelipar, Malique, and the Ten-Degree 
 
 Channel. 
 
 The Laccadive iflands are all low and fandy, covered with cocoa-nut-trees ; 
 and are not to be feen above 5 or 6 leagues from the mail-head, in clear 
 weather. Some of thefe iflands are inhabited, and others not, being (o very low, 
 that the fea fometimes overflows them ; and they are furrounded with breakers, 
 ibme diftancc from them. 
 
 The ifland Seuhelipar is diftant thirteen or fourteen miles from the ' maft- 
 head, bearing N. by E. 6 leagues ; (its latitude 10? 2'N.) and when in latitude 
 9? 49'N. the variation has been taken 1? 8" and 1? 5'W. The longitude from 
 Calicut to the Ifland Seuhelipar, 3? 6'W. by this the longitude or" thefe iflands 
 is determined with great certainty. The Ifland Seuhelipar is in latitude io° 2*N. 
 and longitude from London 72? 24' E. from Cocheen 3? 3i'W. and 
 from Anianga 4? i'W. The variation in fight of this ifland has been taken 
 1? 5'W. 
 
 The Ifland Malique bears from the Seuhelipar SSEf E. diftancc from more to 
 fhore, 16 or 17 leagues. Malique's latitude 9? 12'N. longitude from London 
 72? 5: E ; from Cocheen 3? 4'W. and from Anjanga 3?34'\V. 
 
 Between
 
 Of the Laccadive Islands. 105 
 
 Between the iflands Seuhelipar and Malique is reckoned the bed pafl>ge to 
 the Malabar coaft. This is called the Ten-degree Channel. The belt latitude 
 to keep in, to go through this channel, is 9? 36' or 9? 4o'N. By keeping in 
 this latitude you will fail through this channel with fafcty to the Malabar 
 coaft ; but if you want to make either of the iflands, you muft keep in a latitude 
 accordingly. You will fee Seuhelipar in latitude 9? 49'N. and Malique in 
 latitude 9? 25'N. 
 
 Be careful to keep your parallel of latitude in failing through thefe iflands ; 
 for, though the current in general fets to the fouthward, or fouth-weftvvard, 
 it fometimes fets to the northward. It fets feven, eight, or ten miles to the 
 northward, in twenty-four hours ; but in general it fets to the fouthward and 
 fbuth- weft ward, as before mentioned. 
 
 Suppole a fhip in the Indian Sea, between Cape Baffes and the Laccadive 
 Iflands, fleering to the eaftward, in the SW. monfoon, in ordej to go through 
 the Ten-degree Channel, in the parallel of 9? 36', or 9? 40' N. and has 
 reduced the variation to 2? 30' W. fhe is then about 3? of longitude to the 
 weftward of the Ifland Seuhelipar. When the variation is 1? 30' or 1? 27" W. 
 fhe is about 1? 40' or 2? to the weftward of Seuhelipar ; and when the variation 
 is reduced to 1? or 1? 5' W. fhe is as far to the eaftward as the abovementioned 
 ifland, and may depend upon it, is not far from it, if in the latitud 36'' 
 or 9? 40' N. Therefore fleer to the eaftward in this parallel of latitude, and 
 you will fafely go though this channel. 
 
 If you fee either of the iflands, you may take a frefh departure, and direu. 
 your courfc for Cape Comorin ; but if you pafs through this channel with- 
 out feeing any of the iflands (which is often the cafe, as the weather in the 
 SW. monfoon is generally very cloudy and hazy) you muft continue to fteer 
 to the eaftward, in the above-mentioned parallel of latitude, till you ftrike 
 foundings on the coaft of Malabar. 
 
 CXLII. Of the Islands Calpenny, Kelay, ^//^Nine-Decree Channel; 
 mid Soundings near Malabar Coast. 
 
 The Ifland Calpenny lies nearly due eaft of Seuhelipar about 27 leauges, 
 and from Cocheen 2? 1 1 / W. its latitude 10? 4' N. 
 
 The Ifland Kelay bears from Malique SbEfE. diitance 17 or 18 leagues. 
 Kelay's latitude 8? if N. and longitude from London ?£ 9' E ; from Cocheen 
 2? 46' W. and from Anjanga 3 16' W. 
 
 Between the Ifland Malique and the Ifland Kelay is alfo a very good paffage 
 to the Malabar Coaft: this is called the Nine-degree Channel. The belt 
 
 P latitude
 
 106 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 latitude to keep in, to go through this channel, is 8? 45' or 8? 50' N. Be 
 lure to keep your parallel of latitude, and you will go through this channel 
 with fafety ; and run to the eaftward till you get foundings on the Coaft of 
 Malabar, &c, 
 
 In latitude 9? 40' N. which is a little to the fouthward of Cocheen, you 
 will ftrike foundings at 60, 50, or 40 fathom, 15, 13, or 11 leagues off the 
 coaft ; and the water will fhoalen gradually as you run for the coaft. 
 
 In the above latitude, and in clear weather, you can but juft fee the land 
 from the deck, in 23 fathom water, diftance off fhore 6 or 7 leagues. Cocheen 
 Flag-ftaffE. by N. 3 leagues, you will have 13 fathom water, ouzey ground. 
 You will find a foutherly current, which will fet you twenty-four miles to 
 the fouthwat^ in twenty-four hours. If you go into 28, 30, or 32 fathom 
 water, that will be as near ihore as you need go ; you will in the above 
 depths, be 8, 9, or 10 leagues off fhore. You may then fleer a SSE. courfe, 
 which will lead you along fhore ; or you may here take a frelh departure, 
 and direct your courfe for Zeloan or Ceylon. As you run to the fouthward, 
 you will deepen your water. In latitude o^^N. and 28 and 30 fathom 
 water, you will not be more than 5 or 6 leagues off the land. If you go by 
 your foundings, keep in 40 fathom. OffAnjanga, in latitude 8? 40' N. you 
 have 24 fathom, within five or fix miles of the fhore. Off Ruttera Point 
 you will have 25 or 26 fathoms within three miles of the fhore. Keep out 
 in 40 or 50 fathom, and you will go without the rock discovered by his 
 Majefty's ihip Elizabeth in 1759: this lies in 35 fathom water. If you 
 have 40 or 4 \- fathom water off Cape Comorin, you will be diftant from the 
 Gape 8 or 9 leagues, and may then take your departure from it, and make 
 Point de G 
 
 Of the Coaft: of the Iiland Zeloan cr Ceylon. 
 
 CXLIII. Of Manara, Aripa, and the Island Caridien. 
 
 Manara, or Manaar, whole fouthernmoil: part lies in S? 57' north latitude, 
 difcovei itfelf by the clufters of cocoa-trees, to the weftward of the river, < r 
 pa'flSge' between^ the iflands Manara and Zeloan ; at the entrance of w Inch is 
 15 or 14 feet water. A fhip of any tolerable iizc fhould not 4^, but at a 
 croud league off, to the weftward of this channel. Aloiv;- the call end of 
 
 Manara
 
 0/ the Coast of Zeloan or Ceylon. 107 
 
 Manara ifland j within gun-fhot of the more, you have 20 or 21 feet water. 
 In the fair way there is a reef, which lies NW. and SE. off Aripa, the 
 fouth end of which bears from the paflage of Manara SWbS. about 4 leagues, 
 and the north end, WSW. 44 leagues. This reef is compofed of craggy 
 rocks; over which there are feveral different paflages. Thefe arc qnly navi- 
 gable for the country veflels, and in calm weather ; for when the winds blow 
 a little frefh from the fouthward, it breaks over all : you fhould therefore 
 ftand to the north- weftward, 'till about a league off its north point ; and then 
 you may (in fmall craft) fhape a courfe without fear toward the paflage of 
 Manara, or any other place you think proper. Within this reef, toward the 
 ftraits, or paflage of Manara, the depth decreafes gradually to thirteen or 
 fourteen feet water. 
 
 From Manara to Aripa, the courfe is SWbS. 14 miles. The coaft forms a 
 fort of bay between the two. Aripa is known by a fmall village, and a little 
 church; off which, NWbW. two miles or thereabout, you meet with a rock, 
 which hath 8, 9, or 10 feet water; i'o that the country veflels Can pais over 
 it. In the right channel you find 14, 15, or 16 feet water. It is convenient 
 then, in failing between Manara and Aripa, to keep this depth, and come no 
 nearer, nor ftand farther off more. 
 
 The barks or fmall veflels, bound from the fouthward to Manara, mould 
 obferve, when they are to the northward of the weft point Cardiva, or 
 Gardive, to keep about 3 leagues off fhore, in 18 or 20 fathoms, pebbles; 
 then to fteer NNE. and NEbN. till they bring the church of Aripa to bear eaft. 
 Keeping this courfe, when in 4 or 5 fathoms, they w ill fee the reef break, 
 and the rocks from the fhore to the reef : then they fhape their courfe by 
 keeping in the above depth of 1 4 or 15 feet rocky ground. 
 
 If you are bound from the fouthward to Manara, in larger mips, when you 
 are 3 leagues to the weftward of Cardiva Point, in the above-mentioned 
 depth, be lure to fleer north till you fee the reef break, and then ftand off to 
 weftward about a league, till you are round it. From thence you may fee 
 the Ifland of Manara to the NE. You may then bawl in again, and approach 
 it juft as is convenient for your fhip, conftantly founding and keeping a good 
 look-out. It fometimes happens in this track, that from the depth of 20 to 25 
 fathoms, it diminifhes 2 or 2 fathoms all at once. This ludden change ■ 
 happens either near the land or reef: but you need not be at all concerned, - 
 if it is off the ifland ; for, having once got into 7 or 8 fathoms, you have 
 regular foundings, decreafing gradually toward Ihore to 5 fathoms, fmdy ' 
 
 P 2 ground.
 
 108 A New Directors far the East-Indies. 
 
 ground. If, when you are near the reef, you have 8 fathoms, j and 
 
 gravel ; it is to be avoided. 
 
 From Aripa to the ifland Caridien, it is 7 or 8 leagues SWbW. 1 is 
 ifland is about 2 leagues in length, and is of an irregular form, of ieveral 
 points. The fbuthernmofl: lies in 8? 26' : it is a reddiih hill, fteep and almofl: 
 in the fliape of a cone. You have 8 or 9 fathoms, 4 leagues off, rocky ground. 
 In clear weather, coming from the weftward, 4 or 5 leagues off, you may 
 fee the bottom in 15 or 20 fathoms. In approaching it, the depths are un- 
 equal, and require to keep the lead going. Be not furprifed if, after having 
 but a few fathoms, you on a mdden find 8 or 9 ; becauie from 3' leagues off 
 more, as you ftand toward it, the depths are very uneven, between 8 and 9 
 fathoms, to about a league off the ifland, where there is a bank of but 3. 
 fathoms, the bottom of flint. When you have paffed this bank, the bottom, 
 •is fandy, in 5 fathoms. To the fouth eafhvard of this ifland, there is a_ bay 
 about two leagues from Calapeten or Calpentin. 
 
 CXL1V. Of Point Calapeten, the River Chiloa and Morabelv 
 
 From the fouth point of the ifland Caridien to the wefternmofr. point of 
 the ifland Calapeten, the coaft is SW. 4 1 leagues. Uneven foundings are in 
 this part, nearly as above. The inner edge of a bank of 3 fathoms, is fltuate 
 within a muflcet fliot of the fhore, and extends beyond Calapeten : about two 
 miles from thence lies a ledge of rocks, on which the fea breaks. This 
 point is eafily known bv a tuft of trees, exceeding thick : there is nothing- 
 like it, except on the main to the eafhvard, on the ifland Zeloan, where you 
 perceive about too cocoa-trees. Between theft trees and this thicket, at the 
 bottom of a little valley, is a bight which is called Navcrary, or Nevccary 
 bav, which affords no flicker from the wefterly winds. The bottom and 
 the adjacent parts are fo foul and dangerous, that there is no <f} in any part 
 thereof, without rifquing the lofs of your 4->, even within the bank of 3 
 fathoms; except very near Caridien or Calapeten, in 4 or 5 fathoms. 
 
 From the point of Calapeten to Chiloa, it is reckoned 8 leagues. The courfe, 
 to fail clear of all, is SSW. To the ibuthward of the bay Naverary begins 
 a ledge of rocks and coral, which extend along the coafl to within a league 
 northward of Lhiloa, where, as it widens about a league, it may be proper 
 to keep the lead going : farther ofFfhore the bottom is fandy. 
 
 The liver Chiloa diicovers itfclf by a fandy mountain, on which may be 
 fcen Ibme bufhes, and a little round hill inland. If you come from the fouth* 
 
 ward,
 
 Of the Coast of Zeloan or Ceylon. 109 
 
 ward, you may fail near the coaft, till oppofite this river ; but, to the north- 
 ward of it, you mud keep, for two miles, wide of this ledge of rocks and 
 coral, before you {land in for the fhore. The bottom between Calapeten and 
 Chiloa is of fine fand, fometimes a little coral : but, the nearer you approach 
 Calapeten, the ground is ftill worfe for °f-}' 
 
 From the river of Chiloa to Morabel, the couife is SbW. Wefterly it is 
 deeper between thefe two places than any above mentioned. You may 
 approach the coaft, by the help of the lead. Morabel is known by two or three 
 gardens of cocoa-trees, which trench a little inland, and (^coming from the 
 northward) refemble thofe of Naverary or Calapeten. 
 
 CXLV. Of the River Cayanel, Negombo, Colombo, Galketin, 
 
 Panture and Calitura. 
 
 From Morabel to Cayanel the coaft lies SbW. 4 leagues. Cayanel is a river 
 that makes a fort of point, in failing from the northward ; on it are a number 
 of cocoa-trees. The bottom is good between thefe two places, especially near 
 fhore. 
 
 From Cayanel to Negombo, the courfe is SbW. 2 leagues. From the 
 northward, the land feems to form a bight. If you are to pafs by Cayanel, 
 you muft edge a little from it, on account of a ledge of rocks, which are 
 found between this place and Negombo ; and keep 2 leagues off fhore, in 7 or 
 8 fathoms till you bring Negombo to bear SEbS. By this means you avoid a 
 rock, which lies NNW. off the flag-ftaff, or the north point of the fort ; 
 at the foot whereof you have 6 fathoms, and upon it 10 feet. When bound 
 to Negombo from the fouthward, bring the fort to bear SE. and keep that 
 courfe till you +-}, without borrowing any more to the northward. Negombo 
 is known by a point the moit projecting upon the whole coaft, on which is 
 a thick wood of cocoa-trees. Off this point lies a ledge of rocks, of fmall 
 extent. 
 
 It is computed 6 or 7 leagues SbE. from the outer point of Negombo to 
 Colombo. You find a good bottom all the wa\ r , except it be over-agaiuft a 
 little river, where a rocky point projects about two miles. Keep in 10 or 12 
 fathoms. You may <4-^ before Colombo in from 6 to 7 \ fathoms, the flag-ftaff 
 bearing fouth ; but come no nearer the river, becaufe of the rocks lying at 
 its mouth, and round the fouth point. 
 
 From Colombo to Galketin the courfe is fouth, 3 leagues. It is a little 
 round bay, open and without fhelter. Ships generally coaft it about 4 miles 
 off, in ! 3 fathoms, fandy ground. 
 
 Fron
 
 no A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 From Galketih to Panture it is $\ leagues, foufh. To faU from one to the 
 other, keep in 18 fathoms, becaufe under ten fathoms is rocky ground. 
 Panture is a river, known by two rocks above water ; they are on the north 
 iide of the entrance, at the diflance of two gun- mots. The 4-^age is to the 
 fouthward of thefe rocks, in 10 or 12 fathoms, two miles off fhore. 
 
 From Panture to Calitura is SbE. diflance about 3^ leagues. To the 
 northward of Calitura lies a rocky bank ; on the fouth fide of the river is the 
 fort, built on a little eminence. If you purpofe to 4-} at this place, take for 
 your guide two other little hills (befide that the fort is built on) near each 
 other, and not far from the more. The northernmoft is the loweft. As foon 
 as you fee the fort between thefe two, fleer right for them, into 4 or 5 
 fathoms ; but come nothing to the fouthward of thefe hills, for fear of danger. 
 Obferve that, (landing toward the fort, the bottom is very foul in 15 or 16 
 fathoms, but tolerably good from 6 to 4 fathoms. 
 
 CXLVI. Of Barberin Island, Point Cocacheire and Ragamma. 
 
 It is reckoned about 2 leagues from Calitura to Barberin ifland, you fail 
 along fhore in 7 or 8 fathoms. To the fouthward of Calitura is a rock 12 or 
 13 feet under water ; it bears SW^S off the fort, and SWbWjAV. off the 
 little hill of Makvenien or Makvene. The paffage is good, in 4 fithoms, 
 between the fhore and this rock, which is about 2 miles wide; but it is 
 better to go without, coming no nearer than 6 fathoms. Between Makvenien 
 and Barberin, the bottom is foul in 15 fathoms, and tolerable from 15 to 20; 
 but above 20 it is very bad, rock and coral, fo that, in founding, fcaree a 
 grain of fand will come up with the lead. 
 
 Barberin is an ifland, known by its fmall diflance from the main land of 
 Zeloan. You may <+-> to the northward of it in 6 or 7 fathoms ; there is alio 
 a little bay for barks, or long-boats. Care mult be taken in rounding the 
 weflern point, where there are feveral rocks. The °|->age of this bay is in 2 or 3 
 fathoms, fandy ground, a fmall mufket-fhot off fhore. 
 
 From Barberin Ifland to Point Cocacheire, the courfe is SSE. 4 leagues. 
 Between the two, about two miles from Barberin ifland, runs the river Alican, 
 or Beiieto ; to the fouthward of which is a little fort, upon an eminence. 
 The'oj-^ao-e is good, in 12 or 13 fathoms; black fand. To the north- 
 v. aid of this river are two rocks, plainly to be feen. At 4 leagues oil", 
 between Barberin and Point Cocacheire, you have from 28 1030 fathoms, hard 
 ground. From ttiis Lit place, you may coaft it very near, in 7 or 8 fathoms ; 
 
 but
 
 Of the Coast of Zelo ax or Ceyi.on. 
 
 i 1 1 
 
 but, at 4 leagues diftance, ioo fathoms are not enough (fometimes) to reach the 
 
 bottom. 
 
 From Point Cocacheire to Ragamma, the courfe is SE. and the diftance 5 
 leagues. Between the two is a little m er or '-.rook, in which boats can fcarcely 
 enter ; to the fouthward thereof is a little red hill, fteep to feaward. About a 
 muiket-fhot to the northward, is a garden of cocoa-trees, called Amlamgoda : 
 from thence to Ragamma, it is reckoned 3 leagues. Four miles to the fouthward 
 of Amlamgoda, a reef runs out about two miles, upon which the lea continually 
 breaks. You mult come no nearer, in this part, than 20 fathoms. ' At 15, the 
 foundings are irregular, and very foul to 9, 8, and 7. It is in fome places landy, 
 but not very clean. Prudence requires thofe who fail along this coaft, not to 
 come under 20 fathoms. Ragamma advances like a point into the fca : there 
 are upon it fome clutters of cocoa-trees ; and, on the edge of the more, fome 
 large high rocks, by which it may eaiily be known. 
 
 CXLVII. O/ToiNT de Gala or Gaula, WRed Bay. 
 
 From Ragamma to Point de Gala or Gaula, the diflance is 4 leagues SEbE. 
 In coafting it, you mufl not come under 25 fathoms. A good league to the 
 fouthward of Ragamma lies a rock, having only ii or 14 feet water, and 15 or 
 16 fathoms all round it. Look out for a little reddifh hill, on the edge of the 
 coaft ; the. rock of Gendore being over-againft it. 
 
 To the fouthward of Gendore or Grandere, are alio two rocks under water : 
 about a cable's length without thefe, you have 15 or 16 fathoms. 1 hefe 
 rocks may be eaiily known ; they are but 5 or 6 feet under water, and the 
 fea breaks over them continually. Boats or fmall veflels may pals between 
 thefe rocks and the fhore, in 9 or 10 fathoms ; but it is better to go near the 
 rocks than the more, becaufe the foundings are irregular, and increafes or 
 diminiih z or 3 fithoms at a call ; yet you, never have lefs than 4 or 5 
 fathoms. 
 
 Within Point de Gala or Gaula, is a bay. The Dutch have there a confider- 
 able fettlement, well fortified, with a good garriibn. They do not fuffer any 
 ftrange fhip to enter, without fending them one of their pilots, in order to 
 preferve the knowledge of the pilotage thereof to themfelvcs.- There is 
 nothing to be remarked, concerning this place, unlefs to come no nearer it 
 than 16 or 18 fithoms, the flag-ftaff bearing NNE. if you would <+-> 
 in good ground. 
 
 Before
 
 M2 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Before the Bay lie two rocks under water, one whereof is covered with 1 5 
 feet, the other with 17 feet; they have round them 1 o or n fathoms. If you 
 come no nearer than 15 fathoms, you run no danger of foul ground. On the 
 eaft fide of the bay is feen a rock, on which the fea breaks. 
 
 Point Gaula is in 6? 6' north latitude, and 80? 10' eaft longitude from 
 London. 
 
 From Point Gaula to Red Bay is 5^ leagues, the coaft trenching EbS. 
 
 About a league to the weftward, or WbN of this bay, is feen a little ifland, 
 planted with cocoa-trees, and called Woody-Ifland. In failing from the weft- 
 ward, to enter Red Bay, you muft coaft it 12 or 14 fathoms, till you have 
 doubled a red fteep point, which makes the entrance of this bay. Then you 
 difcover a reef very near fhore, by which you muft fail, (in the depth above- 
 mentioned) till you perceive, on the weft iide of the bay, a little ifland near 
 fhore, and a rock within the reef. You muft keep on to the eaftward, till you 
 bring the rock and the ifland in one. When they bear N. and NbW. you muft 
 near the rock, to within a ftone's throw ; and having pafled it a cable's length, 
 4-^ in 4 J- or five fathoms ; but two cables length from it, you Hand a chance of 
 running into very foul ground. 
 
 Eefore you fteer with the rock and ifland in one, bring them to bear NNW. 
 to round the reef, becaufe at the point of the reef lies a rock under water, which 
 hath but eleven or twelve feet. This caution is absolutely necelTary, to prevent 
 beino; loft here. 
 
 To the eaftward of this bay are high lands, and a little village called Maitre ; 
 but it is impofiible to come near this coaft, on account of a ledge of rocks, which 
 furround almoft three parts of the bay. 
 
 To go out of the bay, you muft fteer contrary to the inftructions given you 
 to enter it ; and when you have got again into 1 4 fathoms, you may proceed as 
 you pleafe, keeping the lead going, and a good look-out. 
 
 CXLVIII. Of Matura Riveh, Dondrehead, Gael'es Bay, ana 
 
 DlCKWELL. 
 
 From Red Point to Matura, the diftance is about 3 leagues EbS,o I latura 
 is a river, at the mouth of which arc two or three rocks : about a gun -(hot to 
 the eaftward, you fee a little ifland near the main, like Woody Ifland 
 above mentioned. Athwart this bay or river there is a reef or ledge of rocks, 
 ftretching out from the weftern fhore, about two miles. To cf-^ before 
 the river Matura, you muft come no nearer than 12 fathoms, till the 
 
 ifland
 
 Of the Coast of &ELOAN i>r Ceylon. 113 
 
 ifland bears NbE. and NNE. then you may {land toward this ifland (in 
 a fmall fhip) as near as you pleafe. Or you may <f-> within the ledge of 
 rocks oppoiite to the river, in 4^ fathoms ; but you muft firft round the reef, 
 as aforefaid. 
 
 From Mat ura river to Dondrehead is reckoned 4 miles SZ. There is a 
 ledge of rocks running out about a mile SW'. from the well part of Dondre- 
 head, upon which there are but 9, 10, and 12 feet water. On the outer tide 
 are 6 or 8 fathoms, and within, toward the more, 3 or 4 fathoms ; therefore 
 great care muft: be taken in approacbing them. Being off Matura, in 1 2 fathoms, 
 if you fleer EbS^S. you pafs Dondrehead, at 2 miles diftancc in 15, 1 6, and 18 
 fathoms. This point is low, and on it is a pretty large clufter of cocoa-trees, 
 which makes it eafily known. « 
 
 From Dondrehead to Gaelics the courfe is E3?S. 1 league. The point of 
 Gaelies is high and fteep. To °|-^ within it, you muft round it, within bah a 
 muiket-fhot of the fhore ; otherwife it is exceeding difficult to enter, and to 
 come to without danger of loiing your oj-^ ; therefore you will do well to keip 
 as clofe to it as you can. The danger, however great, is vifible. 
 
 Gaelies is a little round bay, to the Weftward. Ships may lately <^> here in 
 4 or 5 fathoms, mud. They are here fheltered from the wefterly, northeily, 
 and foutherly winds ; but the eafterly winds raife a fmall l'well. 
 
 From Gaelies, to Dickwell the coaft lies ENE. 2 ' leagues. Bamberand is 
 between the two ; and between this laft and Dickwell lies a ledge of rocks, 
 near two miles from the fhore, on which the fea oftens breaks. You muft 
 come no nearer than 1 5 fathoms. 
 
 Dickwell is known by an orchard of cocoa-trees, which feems to be two 
 miles in length. There is alfo, between the ledge of rocks above mentioned 
 and the fhore, a reef about a muiket fhot off fhore. 
 
 From Dickwell to Nielwell is reckoned 2 leagues ENE. You mav coaft it 
 in 12 or 14 fathoms, within a cannon fhot of the fhore. 
 
 CXL1X. Of the Bays of Nielwell, Coenacker, Tangal Poixt, 
 Waelue River, Mago Point, and Elephant Hill. 
 
 Nielwell is a 'bay, the weft part of which affords fhelter from the SSW. 
 and weft winds. On its weftern point is a little hill, 'which in failing along 
 that coaft (coming from the weftward) looks very much like a little ifland, 
 covered with cocoa-trees. You muft pafs as near it as that of Gaelies, in 1 2 
 or 14 fathoms. Oft the eaft point lies a rock above water. In the bay you 
 
 Q_ need
 
 ii4 -A Ktiv Directory - for the East-Indie?. 
 
 need fear no danger, except three flat rocks near the fhore, and over which 
 (it is laid) the largeft fhips may pafs. It may not be unnecefiary to enquire 
 into this by founding. 
 
 From Niehvell to Coenackcr, or the bay of Kerketoes, is reckoned two 
 miles ENElE. It is a large bay. You muft keep near fhore, as above 
 mentioned, in 12 or 14 fathoms. Exaelly in the middle of the bay you per- 
 ceive a large rock, and to the weftward a fmall fteep point, like that of 
 Gaelies, near which you muft fail to get into the bay. 
 
 From Coenacker to Tangal are 2 leagues ENE^E. It is a point, under 
 which is a little bay. You may keep along this coaft in 12 or 14 fathoms. 
 
 From Tangal to Waelue is reckoned 4 leagues ENEiE. The land between, 
 the two is low and fandy on the coaft, but high and fteep in land. You may 
 coaft it 4 miles off fhore in 20 or 22 fathoms. The bottom is find, mixed 
 with coral. 
 
 Waelue is a large river, which hath to the northward a little mountain. 
 Oppofite the river's mouth, about four miles off" fhore, there lies a rock, on 
 which the fea generally breaks. You may pafs within it, in 7 or 8 fathoms, 
 fandy ground. 
 
 From Waelue to Mago, the courfe is ENE. northerly.. 
 
 Mago is a point furrounded with rocks. Half-way between them, the 
 bottom grows foul ; therefore you fhould keep in 22 or 24 fathoms. You 
 may fee, between Waelue and Mago, the fait houfes of Mazen. This is a 
 little bay, wherein nothing but boats can enter. It is laid there is a rock 
 within this bay. 
 
 The Englilh Pilot fays, that to the eaftward of Mago, about 8 miles off 
 fhore, lies a rock above water. Pollibly thefe may be fome rocks of the Great 
 Banes, nearer fhore than others. Many perfons who have pallid near this 
 ceef, have allured that this is the only foundation for this account. Thole who 
 make this coaft fhould be upon their guard. 
 
 From Mago to a little remarkable hill, called the Elephant, fituatcd near 
 tjie fhore, it is reckoned 6 leagues. The bearings NE. and SW. To the 
 S'E. of the Elephant, you find the Gieat Baftes ; a ledge of rocks, on which,. 
 ac:cor,djiig to the natives of the country, there was formerly a pagado of brafs. 
 The inhabit ints to this day call it Crow ncotte in their language. 
 
 CL. Of the Great Basses and Little Basses. 
 
 The Great BafTes extends about a cmnon-fhot in length, and the fame in 
 breadth. The fea breaks here very high, and fome of thefc rocks fhew them- 
 
 felves
 
 Of the Coast of Zeloan or Ckyi.on. i 15 
 
 felves above water. You mud: give them a good birth, and come no nearer 
 than 30 fathoms. It lies 3 leagues off fhore, and you may fail within it, by- 
 keeping a little nearer the land than 8, 9, 10 and 12 fathoms. You mud 
 come no nearer the fhore than 8 fathoms, nor the Great Bafies than 12. This 
 is to be obferved till the Elephant bears NNW. when, if you are mid-channel, 
 fleer ENE. or if you are nearer land, EbN. till you get into 30 fathoms ; 
 then fleer NE. to fail without the Little Bafies. 
 
 The Englifh Pilot fays, that to fail from Dondrehead, to get clear of the 
 Great Banes, it is neceflary to fleer ESE. According to this courfe you 
 would fail very wide of it ; and probably there would be great danger of being 
 drove off the coaft, with much difficulty to regain Zeloan ; becaufe, during 
 the wefterly monfoons, the currents fet flrong to the call ward in this part. 
 It is true, that in lhaping your courfe by night, you mufl beware of the cur- 
 rents : they fet in fhore as well as to the eaflward. It feems fufficient, being 
 2 leagues fouth of Dondrehead, to fleer eaflward. Mr. Nichelfon is of opinion, 
 that a fhip, being 2 or 3 leagues off Dondrehead, may lately fleer EbN. 
 which will carry her 4 or 5 leagues without the Great bafies ; the currents 
 being very changeable. Quere, whether they are not regular tides ? Or if cur- 
 rents, a competent knowledge of their fhifting may be in time procured : this 
 will be the navigator's furefl guide in the night. In the day, obfervation m 
 be made by the land, and the courfe fleered accordingly. This courie will 
 carry you 8 leagues fouth of the Great Bafies ; which I take to be fufficient 
 for the fet of the currents to the northward : however, you fhould take care 
 to found from time to time. 
 
 You mufl flill obferve, that, though it is 20 leagues from Dondrehead to 
 the Great Bafies, yet, when you reckon you have failed 1 5 leagues, you will 
 be oppoiite to it ; feveral {hips have even thought they had got no far- 
 ther than 12 leagues. This obfervation is worth attending to, as well for 
 lhaping your courie as for the diflance. 
 
 The courfe from the Great to the little Bafies is NE. and the diflance 7 
 leagues. The Englifh Pilot makes it NEbN. but in fleering NE. you fail no 
 farther from one than the other. When this reef does not break, the b-fl 
 mark to know whether you are near the Little Bafies,- is a little hill on the 
 fhore, on which is a rock, refembling a chimney.- Thi^ hill lies direflly N\V. 
 of the Little Bafies. A little to the northward you fee another hill not fo 
 high, with a i'mall rock on the top of it, like a p.agpda, from whence it' 
 derives its name. It is farther in-land than that of the chimney, and is not 
 to be diflinguifhed from the other little hills but by this mark. 
 
 Q 2 CLI.
 
 ri6 Jl New Directory for the East-Indies.. 
 
 CLI. Of Julius Nave, the Point of Low Bakk, Aganis, Aeecam, 
 
 Poawegam and Eatacola. 
 
 Between the two Bafles, about equal difrance from one to the other, there 
 is a fmall bank, on which is found out 8 fathoms ; but thole who fail here 
 need not fear to approach it. 
 
 From the Elephant to the high fandy point, called Julius Nave, is about 
 5 leagues NEbE. between them are tv.-o reef?, one near more, and the other 
 2 miles off fhore, upon which are i or 8 feet water. Within this fandy 
 point is good <f-^ ground. 
 
 The Point of Julius Nave lies NNW. of the Little Bafles. You may fail' 
 between them in 5 fathoms. You have 6 or 7 fathoms nearer fhore, and 
 5 \ fathoms mid-channel. 
 
 From the point of Julius Nave to that of Low Bank, or Sandy Point, the 
 courfe is NEbN. northerly, 16 miles. From this point a fandy bank extends 
 four miles into the fea ; lo that you mull take care to keep wide of it, whether 
 in failing from the Bafles or the northward. Between the two fandy points, 
 that is to fay, between Julius Nave and this point, the *^age is good in 12 
 or 13 fathoms. 
 
 From the Low-bank to Aganis the courfe is NNE. difrance 16 miles. 
 Aganis is known by a little peak that is near it, like a tower : northward of 
 this peak there arc two little hills near each other, and clofe to the fhore a 
 duller of cocoa-trees, by which Aganis is know n. In coming from Lev- bank. 
 Point you coaft it, at five or fix miles difrance, in 25 fathoms, find mixed 
 with coral. You have 15 fathoms within a gun-fhot of the fhore, which is. 
 bold. 
 
 From Aganis to Aregam, Arregame (or Arrewecgamme) the coaft inclines 
 NbE. 4 leagues. This place is diftinguifhed by two little hills in-land, at a 
 fmall diflance from one another, and alio hath a clufler of cocoa-trees, but 
 not quite lo large as that of Aganis. They coafl it in 22 or 24. fathoms. 
 
 From Aregam to Poawegam (Poawegammc or Tricule) is reckoned 4*. 
 leagutes NbE. It is known by a grove of cocoa-trees, which indole a pagoda. 
 The land to feaward is low ; in-land it is high and mountainous. There is 
 a reef about a mile off fhore. You mult in this part keep in 22 fathoms, 
 though it is not very good for cf-^, on account of rocks fcattered in fevcral 
 places. 
 
 The direction of the coaft between Poawegam and' Batacalb is NbVV. 
 diflance 3 leagues. To feaward between the two, the land is low ; and up 
 
 in
 
 Of the Coast of Xeloau or Ceylon. 117 
 
 in die country are fome very high mountains, one of which is called by 
 navigators the Capuchin, on account of its refembling at its extremity a 
 friar's hood : but it makes only in this form while it bears from the weft to 
 the fouth. When it bears NW. or NNW. its peak is like the top of a great 
 pyramid. 
 
 Two leagues off Batacalo there is a reef of rocks, on which there arc 
 uneven foundings. A frnall ihip may fail between the land and the reel ; but 
 it is better to keep without. When the Capuchin bears SW. you may edge 
 in towards more, and cf-^> over-againft the river, a mile off fhore, in 7 or 8 
 fathoms. Several cocoa-trees difperfed along more facilitate the knowledge of 
 this part : befide that, the land trenches from thence NWbN. 
 
 CLII. Of the un-equal Depths East of the Islan d Zelo an and VendeloosBav. 
 
 It is neceffary to obferve, that no regard mould be paid to the irregular 
 foundings in the part eaft of the Ifland of Zeloan. There are holes in feveral 
 places. From 20 fathoms fometimes the foundings will iuddenly come to 
 400 fathoms. It will happen fometimes, that being near ihore, in 7 or 8 
 fathoms, you fhall prefently find yourlelves in 40 fathoms. Thofe who coaft 
 this ifland ought to obferve this ; alfo the currents, for they fometimes fet 
 in more. 
 
 From Batacalo to Vendeloos the courfe is NWbN. Vendeloos is a bay, 
 on the north fide of a point ; it may be known by a fmall hillock, a little 
 way in-land, called the Sugar Loaf, to the fouthward of which, at lomc 
 diftance, are two or three other little hillocks. At a gun-mot from the coaft 
 the depth is 8 or 9 fathoms, but very foul ground in feveral places ; fo that 
 you muft °}-^ further off. The fhips that have buiinefs at Point Pedra mould 
 from Batacalo keep near fhore ; otherwife they rilque their being able to 
 fetch in. 
 
 » 
 
 CLIII. Of Provedien Island, Cotiaris Point, Trinqltemale Bay,, 
 
 and Pigeon Island. 
 
 From Vendeloos to the Ifland Provedien is about 3 leagues NWbN. between: 
 thefe two the coaft forms a bisrht. Here is exceeding; foul around. You muft 
 keep ah offing of %\ leagues, in 16 or 18 fathoms. 
 
 The Ifland Providien is a white rock, like the fail of one of the country 
 veffels. The ground continues foul for 5 leagues more to the northward. 
 
 From the Ifland Providien to the point of Cotiaris, or Coetier, the courfe 
 is NWbN. diftance leagues. 
 
 Cotiaris
 
 1 1 8 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Cotiaris Point is low and even. About 2 or 3 leagues to the fouthward of 
 it the °|->age becomes better; but this not above two miles oft" fhore, in 10 
 or 12 fathoms. Fiom this point to about the middle of the bay, you find 
 °-ood 4-}a°-e from 20 to 24 fathoms, but more towards Trinquemale : it is 
 too deep to <f-> in. 
 
 From Cotiaris to Trinquemale Eay, (or Trinkamalay or Crankanella Bay) 
 is about 3 leagues NW. This bay is large and deep, extending about 2 
 leagues. It has on the north fide high land, and fome good harbours, fheltered 
 from all winds. The entrance of the bay is very clear, and without danger, 
 though very deep. On the north fide are two rivers and three toward the 
 fouth. Trinquemale fort is in latitude 8? 35' N. 
 
 From the entrance of Trinquemale Bay to Pigeon Ifland, the courfe is 
 NW. 4 leagues. There is no «f}age between the two, on account of the 
 great depth. From Pigeon Ifland to Crofs River is 4 miles. 
 
 CLIV. Of Rio-Carty, Molewall, Point Pedra, and Kareycall 
 
 River. 
 
 From Crofs River to Rio-Carty, (or Rio Sorto) the courfe is NW. diftance 
 about 4 leagues. The coaft is low and even. You may °K> four miles off 
 fhore, in 16, 18, or 20 fathoms. 
 
 From Rio-Carty to Molewall (or Paffake) the diftance is 5 1 leagues NW. 
 You may <f-} between the two, there being very good ground. 
 
 From Molewall there is a bank runs out three leagues ; come no nearer it 
 than 9 or 10 fathoms. It is very fhoal ; to avoid it, you had better keep 4 
 leagues off fhore ; there you have 9 or 10 fathoms coral. When you are 
 almoft pail this reef, the foundings are land and (hells, mixed with gravel 
 and coral ; and 5 leagues off more, land with a few (hells. This bank being 
 doubled, you muft go to Pedra Point, and hawl in for the coaft, where there 
 is nothing to fear. Whilft you continue in 6 fathoms, fandy ground, you 
 are itill on the edge of the bank : if the bottom is ouze, you may keep 
 within gun-fhot of the more, in 7 or S fathoms, the fame ground ; but you 
 muff keep a little off when near Pedra Point, becaufe of the dangers that 
 fur round it. 
 
 From Molewall to Pedra Point, is reckoned 14 leagues NW. and NWbX. 
 the latitude of Point Pedra is 9? 42' N. You may coaft it, without fail 
 farther off it, in order to fhun a rock under water, which hath but 9 feet. 
 
 'id a bank which lies off the coaft, on which are very unequal foundings. 
 
 'J he rock bears from Point Pedra EbN. 2f or 3 leagues. 
 
 In
 
 Of the Coast of Zeloan or Ceylon. 119 
 
 In Hiiling from the fouthward, if you meet with contrary wind;, fa that 
 vou cannot coaft it at the above diftance, you had better fail without the 
 bank and rock. Keep 4 leagues offing, in 9 or 10 fithoms, till Point Pedra 
 bears WSW. then Hand to the weftward, but nothing to the fouthward, till 
 this point bears SW. othcrwife you have unequal foundings, which decreafe 
 fometimes 2 fathom at a caft ; inftead of which you will find no lefs than 4I- 
 or 5, by conforming to this direction. If by neglecl you find yourfelr in 4 
 fathoms, land and rocks, you mull then bawl off, till the foundings arc fand, 
 mixed with corals and fhells, in 5 ! or 6 fathoms. 
 
 When Pedra Point bears SbE. 4' leagues off Ihore, you may 4-} there in 
 4'- fathoms fine land. If you would approach the coaft and are obliged to 
 turn it, in {landing off, take care not to bring the point to the weftward of 
 SW. nor {landing on, more foutherly than SSW. By this means you efcape 
 the danger. 
 
 The north part of Pedra Point is known by a church, and fome houfes 
 built upon it ; the land trenching to the weftward. 
 
 Many obiervations, made at lea with great exadtnefs, determine the latitude 
 of Pedra Point, the extremity of the Ifland Zeloan, in 9? 42' N. Mr. Nichelfon 
 makes its latitude 9? 48' N. 
 
 It is reckoned 8 leagues WbS. and WSW. from Pedra Point to the point 
 NW. of the Arnedien or Cardies, called the Fort of Hammon-Hiel. About 6 
 leagues from Pedra Point, you may fee the NE. point of Arnedien. It is 
 proper to keep 3!- leagues off it, on account of a flat bank, which runs a 
 good way off, on which there is but 3 fathoms : keep this offing till Hammon- 
 Hiel bears SEbE. and Cow Ifland (or Ilho de Sorto) SbW. and SSW. You 
 muft then fteer by Cow Ifland till you get in 4;- fithoms good ground, and 
 bring the fort of Hammon-Hiel to bear EbS. 
 
 In the months of May, June, and July, though the wind blows violently 
 from the SSW. here are ftrong tides both of flood and ebb ; fo that even then 
 you may turn it up. 
 
 Of the Coaft from Point Pedra, the North Point of Zeloan or 
 Ceylon, to the Entrance of the Ganges. 
 
 CLV. Of Canimere Pagoda, Negapatnam, and Kerry-Kai. River. 
 
 From Pedra Point to the Pagoda of Canimere, the fir ft point on the Coro- 
 mandel Coaft, the Coaft is N\V,[N. diftance J 3 or 14 leagues; the depth in 
 
 tli is-
 
 i-2o A New Directory j^/- the East-Indies. 
 
 this track 9 or 10 fathoms. On approching this point, it decreafeth to 5 
 fathoms. Come no nearer, becauie a bank projects about 2 leagues from 
 Point Canimere. 
 
 The mips, that after coairing the Iflaud Zeloan, by way of Molewall, crofs 
 from Pedro Point to the Coaft of Coromandel, almoft always make the land 
 fooner than they reckon, becauie the currents fet to the SSW. very flrong and 
 carry them into the bay N W. of Zeloan ; lb that many navigators, who, to 
 get light of the coaif, have directed their courfe to the northward of Trank- 
 abar, have made the land to the fouthward of Negapatnam. Several have run 
 afhore on this coaft in the night-time, for want of having the prudence to 
 found : but navigators fhould not neglect fuch falutary council. The contrary 
 hath happened to fome ; for they have been fet to the eastward. The firif. of 
 thele examples is common, the iecond rarely happens. 
 
 The Pagoda of Canimere may be ieen 5 or 6 leagues in clear weather. 
 About 4 of a mile to the northward is a little river, and on its bank a large 
 ■\ illage, encompafl'ed with trees, where a trade is carried on in tobacco and rice : 
 the mouth of this river doth not appear at a dillance. Its bar hath but 3 feet 
 water ; fo that only very lmall vefiels can go into it. They cf-^ about a 
 league from its entrance, with the Pagoda of Canimere, SWbW. The ground 
 to the northward is very foft and muddy, and confequently not lit to ^ in. 
 
 From Canimere to Negapatnam, the courle is north, dillance f% leagues. 
 Between the two is feen a thick wood, having little bullies without number. 
 There is nothing elfe remarkable but a church, about a league to the fouth- 
 ward of Negapatnam. It is built befide a little river, which is not {cen in 
 coaftine: and as there are not above four feet on the bar at hicrh water, no 
 farther notice is here taken of it. 
 
 Negapatnam is one of the mod considerable places belonging to the Dutch 
 on the Coaft of Coromandel, and its fortifications are good. The town lies 
 northward of the fort ; to the fouthward is the entrance of a commodious 
 river, capable of receiving middling velTels. To the northward of tbe town 
 is a great pagoda, called the Chinefe Pagoda, on which is erected a maft or 
 flao--ftaff. You <+-} before Negapatnam in 5 or 6 fathoms. The bottom 
 athwart it is very level : at four leagues diftanee you find but 6 or 7 
 fathoms. 
 
 From Negapatnarq to the river Karcy-Cal, are about 4.; leagues, the courle 
 N5?W. In coafling you keep in 6 or 7 fathoms. Between the two runs 
 ■' river Naour, wherein a trade is carried on in chintz and rice. The 
 
 mofque,
 
 Of the COROMANDEL CoAST. I2t 
 
 mofque, with four white pyramids, which may be feen a great diftance at 
 fea, renders this place remarkable. 
 
 Karey-Kal is a new fettlement of the French. This, with the places 
 depending on it (the mod coniiderable of which is Teru-malcy-'/ayen, four 
 miles to the fouthward) was granted to the French, by the king of Tanjour, 
 in 1739. Its latitude is 10? 45'N. It is considerable for its great number of 
 Aldees, who are dependents, and alfo for the linen trade. Two rivers 
 bend their courfe through this grant : they take their rife among the Gatta 
 Mountains, on the Coaft of Malabar, and thereby facilitate the carriage of the 
 merchandife, rendering the country fertile, which abounds in rice and other 
 necefTaries. 
 
 The fort of Karey-Kal is built on the north fide of the river : its mouth is 
 formed by a narrow point of fand, which extends along the coaft ; its entrance 
 being parallel with the more, cannot be diftinguifhed far off. The other river, 
 named Tiroumala, or Tiru-malay, is a quarter of a league to the fouthward 
 and opens likewiie towards the north ; as do almoft all the rivers on this 
 coaft. 
 
 The bar which fliuts up thefe two rivers, hinders middling fhips from 
 entering, fo that only boats can pafs it; and then it muft be at high water. 
 They °f-> before Karey-Kal in 5 or 6 fathoms. The marks for cf-} depend 
 upon the monfoon in which you are there, viz. In the foutherly monfoon, 
 bring the flag-ftaffto bear WSW. and in the northerly, weft. By this means 
 you facilitate the paflage of boats paffmg and repaffmg. 
 
 CLVI. 0/~Trankabar, Cabripatnam, Triminivas River, Coloran 
 River, Porto Novo, and Fort St. David. 
 
 From Karey-Kal to Trankabar, the diftance is 1 J - league N4?W. You 
 keep along Ihore, in 6 or 7 fathoms ; but in approaching the fort of Tranka- 
 bar you muft fteep off a littl.e, on account of a bank near the river. This 
 bank doth not project much ; and, provided you keep in the above depth, you 
 have nothing- to fear. 
 
 Trankabar is the chief fettlement belonging; to the Danes in India : the 
 town is very neat, and the fort remarkable by its exceeding whitcnefs, which 
 they take care to keep fo. The Indians call this place Tirangampadou, whence 
 is corruptly derived the name of Trankabar. 
 
 Two leagues and a half to the northward of Trankabar is Cabripatnam or 
 Kaweripatnam, appearing like a fort of fort, without baftions : juft by are 
 
 R two
 
 i22. A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 two fmall pagodas, very near each other, in-land. There was formerly;, 
 about half a league from this place, a fmall French factory. 
 
 The little river of Triminivas, on which (lands the tower of Tiru-mala- 
 wauel, is 2 leagues north of Cabripatnam; It takes it name from a pagoda that 
 is fern in-land, Off its mouth there is a bank about a mile diftant ; but it is 
 not dangerous, as the depth decreafes gradually in approaching it. The 
 land to the northward of the fiver is fomewhat higher than the reft of the 
 coaft, which from the pagoda of Canimere is not feen, but the trees and 
 buildings near it. In coafting about a league offfhore you have 9 or 10 fathoms 
 water. 
 
 About 3 leagues north from the river Triminivas is that of Coloran. Mr. 
 Nichelfon calls this river, Davecotta. This laft difcovers itfelf by thick buihy 
 wood near the fhore, through which one of the mouths of theie rivers feems 
 to make a paflage : from thence extends a bank, the point of which reaches 
 i| league from the fhore. It is fteep to, and dangerous. From 12 fathoms 
 vou fall in fome places fuddenly into 3 or 4 fathoms. At the mouth of this 
 river ftands the town ofTirukotty, where the Englifh have a fort encompafied 
 by the river. A large fliip that fails along this coaft ought to come no nearer 
 than 14 or 15 fathoms. In this track are to be fcen, up in the country, four 
 remarkable edifices. Thefe are the four porticos of a famous pagoda, called' 
 Chalembarang or Shidam-barang, but Chalanbron, according to D'Anville : 
 Mr. Nichelfon has it Chillambrum. It bears due weft of the opening in the- 
 a\ ood above mentioned, and is e'afily found thereby. 
 
 The fiouth fide of the entrance of Coloran or Colderoon river, feems to form' 
 a point, efpccially when you come from the fouthward, and iail near it, 
 becaufe the coaft, whofe direction was hitherto north, forms an elbow, and 
 extends 3 ' leagues to the NNW. as far as Porto Novo. The land is low and 
 even, and nothing elfe is remarkable but the buildings above mentioned. 
 
 Porto Novo is an Indian town of great trade. Here the French and Dutch 
 have factories or houles for trade, on which ihey hoift their flags. 
 
 As you pafs the fhoal off Coloran, to go to Porto Novo, you mull bring 
 the French and Dutch flatrs at Porto Novo to bear NWbW. before vou ftccr 
 by this point of the compafs ; that you may be fure you have doubled the 
 north point of this bank. 
 
 In July, (boner or later, from Triminivas to Porto-Novo, the waters are 
 thick and muddy, as an inundation : this is the more furpriiing, as it feldom 
 rains on the Coaft of Coromandel at this time of the year. This foul water 
 
 proceeds
 
 Of the CoROMANDEL Co^ST. I 23 
 
 proceeds from Coloran River, which takes its rife among the mountains of 
 Gatte on the Coaft of Malabar, where the frequent rain:; oceafion this inun- 
 dation, efpecially at Coloran, at which place is the greateft outlet of this river. 
 Its other principal outlets are at Ncgapatnam, Karey-Kal, Trankabar and Tri- 
 minivas. 
 
 From Porto Novo to Fort St. David, belonging to the Englifli, the courfb 
 is NbE. diftance 6v leagues. In failing along the coaft you mult keep a league 
 off more, in 8 or 9 fathoms. Half a league to the northward of Porto Novo 
 bee;in the fand-downs, which extend along the coaft. At a diftance, 
 this part of the coaft refembles feveral iflands : and this proceeds from 
 thefe land-downs appearing higher than the land behind, which is exceeding 
 low. 
 
 Fort St. David is fituate on the edge of the coaft, and L of a league to the 
 fouthward, you fee the town of Goudelours or Koodeleur. There is a fmall 
 bank about ~ of a league off Fort St. David. They 4-^ in 7 or 8 fathoms. 
 
 CLVII. Of PONDICHERRY. 
 
 From Fort St. David to Pondicherry, the courfe is NNE. eafterly diftance 
 ' 14 miles. At a league off fhore, you have 8 or 9 fathoms. There is nothing 
 remarkable between them. The land is fandy to lea-ward, and woody in-land. 
 In failing from the fouthward you fee the town and fort of Pondicherry, at 
 the foot of black land, a little higher than the reft of the coaft. This black 
 land, about 3 leagues in length, is NW. of the town, the fort, is built on 
 low land by the fea-fide. 
 
 Pondicherry hath been the chief of the French fettlements in the Eaft- 
 Indies, and the refidence of the governor general and head council. It is in 
 11? 56 / north latitude, and 77? 34/ eaft longitude from the obfervatory at Paris, 
 and 79? ^/E. from London. The king of Vafapour granted it to the French, 
 in 1672, in conlideration of fervices done him by M. Martin, who 2 years 
 afterwards was appointed governor thereof. The prudent conducl of this officer 
 preferved it for his king, in fpite of the revolutions that happened in 1677, 
 and fome time after in Carnatte or Karnateka, by the invafion of prince Sivagy 
 who confirmed the grant in 1680. 
 
 O 
 
 As foon as the declaration of war between France and Holland was known 
 in India, the Dutch (jealous of this fettlement, where the trade daily increafed) 
 became refolved to make themfelves matters of it, and tried all manner of ways 
 to fupply the weaknefs of their own inability. 
 
 R 2 Thcv
 
 124- -d New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Thev engaged the Great Mo°;ul to affiit them in the attack ; and fearing! 
 this ally would .not prove fufficient, they fent to Ali-Raja, governoi oi the 
 province, with many prefents to win him to their interefts, promifing him a 
 confiderable fum for the fubiifhnce of an army which they required of him*, 
 The negotiation had, at that time, no other effect than to induce M. Martin 
 to take proper meaiures to defend the place ; and he doubled his care in 1690 
 and 91, till the Englifh joined the Dutch, and threatened to befiege and raze 
 it to the ground. The Dutch not difcouraged by the bad fuccefs of their 
 fir ft attempt, continued their foliciiations, and in 1692 obtained a caoul, or 
 recommendatory letter fas appears by the original treaty) frcrn Raja-Ram 
 Sacrapatti, king of Gingy, who permitted them to attack the French in Pon- 
 dicherry with their utmoft ftrength, as well by land as lea, in order to reduce 
 the place ; with a promife, on his part, to affift them (at the Dutch com- 
 pany's expence) with a iurficient force of infantry and cavalry for the entei- 
 prife. 
 
 This prince on his part contracted (after the conqueft) to yield them up the 
 fort of Pondicherry, with the lands therto belonging, to enjoy and poffefs them 
 in the fame manner as the French had done ; belides all the effects, gold, 
 fdver, and other merchandizes they fhould find there, with the remittance of 
 all the rights that Raja- Ram could claim therein. 
 
 He farther engaged, for himfelf and his fuccefiors, to eftabliih and maintain 
 them in their pofleiiion, and to fuccour them with all his forces againft any 
 who fhould hereafter attempt to moleft or difturb them in it. 
 
 The Dutch on their part obliged thcmfclves to pay this prince the fum cf 
 ?, 1. ,000 pagodas (178,500 livres, or 7437 pounds fterling) half to be advanced; 
 and the other half on the reduction of the place. 
 
 This caoul was confirmed by another king of Gingy, called Pialada Niragi, 
 of the Bramin's calf. All thefe negotiations colt the Dutch above 50,000 
 pagoda.s. 
 
 With this pcrmiffion they armed for the execution of their delign. In 1693 
 they prefented thcmfclves before Pondicherry, with a force capable of attack- 
 ing the ftrongeft place in the Indies. Their fquadron was compofed of 19 men 
 of war, fcveral (loops, boats and country veilcls, having on board obove 1500 
 regular troops, bolides feamen, boughies, macaflars and chingalas, to the 
 amount of above 2000 ; 15 or 20 pieces of brafs cannon, 18-pounders, 24 
 field-pieces, 6 mortars, and warlike ftores in abundance. This army was 
 increaied by another from the king of Gingy. This great preparation was 
 attended w itfa a favourable fuccefs. The defence of Pondicherry at that time 
 
 coiililted
 
 Of the COROMAKDEL CoAST. 125 
 
 confifted in a brick wall, .of an irregular form, 238 fathoms in circumfcrrencc, 
 which inclofed the magazines and apartments of the principal factors ; 4 fmall 
 baftions, able to mount only 6 guns, flanked the curtains. This place was 
 attacked and defended with vigour ; but after about a month's fieo'e AT. Martin 
 was obliged to furrender it to the befiegers. It was afterwards rcuorcd to the 
 French by the treaty of Ryfwick ; and this fame governor again took poflcflion 
 of it, in 1699, in the name of the French company, who immediately gave 
 him orders to fee it fortified. They fent him M. de Noon, in quality of chief 
 engineer, and from his plans and defigns they began in 1 701 to build the 
 citadel. It is a regular pentagon of 90 fathoms round the exterior polygon, 
 ftrongly built with brick, with a ditch full of water, 10 fathoms wide, and 
 well covered. The baftions are built with orillons, and port-holes in them, and 
 with barbets on the flanked angles. The royal gate fronts the fea ; it is orna- 
 mented with a beautiful piece of architecture. This fort may be confidered 
 as the bed: of its kind in the Eaft Indies. It ftands in the middle of the town, 
 by the fea-iide, and the hou r es extend north and fouth. 
 
 In 1724, M. de Beauvoillier, who was governor of it, began to inclofe 
 the town. Father Lewis, a capuchin, had the management thereof. It 
 confifts in a brick wall, flanked with baftions, in the modern way. In 1 740 
 and 41, under the government of M. Dumas, thefe fortifications were 
 augmented, by the care of M. de Coifigny, an engineer of reputation and 
 merit, on account of the Marattas, who threatened to deftrov the town. 
 Their army, affifted by that of feveral other Gentoo princes, amounted to 
 above 150,000 men. After having conquered the Moors or Moguls, and 
 ravaged all the province of Carnatte, they purpofed to treat the Europeans 
 fettlements in the fame manner, efpecially Pondicherry, the governor of 
 which had afforded a retreat to the Mogul's viceroy, with his family, and 
 the remains of the army after their defeat. The care that this prudent 
 commander took in putting th'e place in a condition of defence, the relblute 
 courage wherewith he anfwered the Mahratta generals, and the foiid arguments 
 he made ufe of to reprefent to them the injuftice of their pretentions, made 
 the officers and foldiers not only to change their purpole ; but their chiefs 
 fent the governor a firaph, or ferapah, a pre.ent that confifts of a complete 
 drefs of filk and gold in the country fafhion, being a mark of efteem and 
 fiicndfhip to thofe on whom it is beftowed. This news reftored tranquillity 
 in Pondicherry. 
 
 This town is now one of the ftrongeft places in the Eaft Indies. It is 
 3000 toifes, or 1 1 league in circumference. It was belieged by Admiral 
 
 ' • Bofcawen
 
 iib A New Directory for the Ea«t-Indies. 
 
 Bofcawen in 1749; but he was obliged to raife the fiege on account of the 
 monfoons. It 1 760 it was blockaded at fea, by the Admirals Cornifh and 
 Stephens, and Colonel Coote by land, and obliged to furrender at diicretion ; 
 the garrifon being fhort of provifions., This place was afterwards totally 
 demolifhed, as the French had done by fort St. David's ; but was reftored to 
 them again by the peace of Paris in 1 763. It has been lately taken by the 
 Englifh. This laft acquiiition has been made chiefly through the intrepidity 
 and bravery of the officers and fervants of the Englifh Ea.<Mndia company. 
 Here is a mint, where they coin rupees and pagodas, which are fuperior in 
 finenefs to many others, and are current all over India. This privilege was 
 granted to M. Dumas, in 1736, by a phirmaund or letters patent from 
 Mahomet Scha, emperor of the Moguls. This prince, a few years afterwards, 
 honoured him, and his fucceflbrs in the government of Pondicherry, with 
 the dignity of Nabob or Viceroy, and committed to him the command of a 
 manieb or battalion of 4500 horfe, in acknowledgement of the refuge he 
 afforded his fubje&s in Pondicherry during the incurfions of the Mahrattas 
 in Indoftan above mentioned. 
 
 They 4-} in Pondicherry road, in 7 or 8 fathoms water, 2 or 3 miles off 
 fhore. 
 
 CLVIII. Of Conjimere, Alemparva, Sadras, the Seven Pagodas, 
 
 Cocjvelan, and Meliapour. 
 
 From Pondicherry to Conjimere, or Kottemerye, the coaft runs NNElE 
 4 ' leagues. Between them are fand-downs, along the coaft. ; behind. The 
 black land before mentioned, gradually decreafes and terminates about a mile 
 to the fouthward of Conjimere, which is only remarkable by the ruins of a 
 factory, abandoned by the Dutch, after 3 or 4 years reiidence. You fiiid 
 alio the remains of an old Englifh inclolure abandoned alio. 
 
 The 4~^ a g e i s very good oppofite this place, in 6, 7, or 8 fathom water, 
 about two miles off fhore. 
 
 From Conjimere to Alemparva the couile is NEbN. diflance 5 leagues. 
 About a league beyond Conjimere you percieve a thick wood and a village : 
 then the coaft appears lower, and feems to bend in a little, 'till you come 
 near Alemparva, where the iouth fide of the river ri es in land-downs, and 
 projects a little; othenvife, this point is not dangerous, and in paffing it 
 the depth diminilhes but a fathom. The N. fide of the river is covered with 
 trees. 
 
 Alemparva
 
 Of the Coromandel Coast. 127 
 
 Alemparva is diftinguiihed by a beautiful fort, flanked by many turrets,, 
 belonging to the Mogul; its whitenefs renders it conipicuous at a great 
 difbnee. There are alio feveral hillocks on the land. 
 
 From Alemparva to Sadras (a Dutch fettlement) is NEbN. diftance 
 7 leagues. The country between is partly flat, landy, and but few trees, 'till 
 within 3 leagues of Sadras, where begins a thick wood of palm-trees, 
 extending about a league northward. At its northern extremity is a fmall 
 pagoda and an Englifh Factory, oppofire to which is a little fpit of land,, 
 which runs out ' of a league to feaward. Two leagues further to the 
 northward you find Sadras ; and at the entrance of a thick wood^ the Dutch 
 factory. There are two pagodas, but not very difcernable, one to the fouth- 
 ward, and the other to the northward. Two or three leagues up in the 
 country you fee feveral little hills, called by navigators the Mountains of 
 Sadras. When the higheft of thefe bears NW.. Sadras bears well. About 
 4 miles off fhore are 9. or 10 fathoms water. 
 
 About 2 leagues NEbN. from Sadras are the Seven Pagodas, which are 
 only to be feen near the fhore. There are five upon high and fteep rocks- 
 within land, the tops of which can only be feen, by realba of a thick wood- 
 that hides them : another is fo near the fhore that the fea wafhes the foot of 
 it : the feventh hath been deftroyed by the fea ; it ftood on a rock an eighth; 
 of a league from the fhore. 
 
 From the Seven Pagodas to Couvelan or Covolam, is 16 miles NbElE. In 
 this palfage are fome rocks which bear ESE. off the little hill of Tripoulouiv 
 remarkable by being much nearer the ihoie than any of the others. Thefe 
 rocks project about a mile into the fea. You may coaft it in 9, 10, or 11 
 fathoms, about 4 or 5 miles off fhore. 
 
 From Couvelan. to Meliapour or St. Thomas, is reckoned <j lea<mes, NbE* 
 The town is by the fea-lide, and nothing but a heap of ruins. There are 
 fome churches, elpecially a cathedral, the fee of the biihop, fuffragan to Goa» 
 All the Portuo;uere churches on the coaft of Coromandel are in his diocefe. 
 
 Mount St. Thomas lies half a leacrue to the wefhvard : it is diflinoriifhed. 
 from many others round it, by a church built on the top of it, which is 
 eafily feen in failing along fhore. 
 
 CL1X. Of Madras or Fort St. George, the Reef of Trifou, the 
 
 Bank, and River of Pulltcatt. 
 
 From St. Thomas to Madras is a league NbE. This town is the chief En°-- 
 liili fettlement on the Coaft of Coromandel,. and the feat of a fuperior governor 
 
 and
 
 128 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 and council. It is encompafled with a wall of brick, flanked with bafiions 
 and fupplied with cannon. Several alterations have been made here, fince it 
 was taken by the French, and was reilored by the peace of Aix-la-Chapelle. 
 A little river, whofe mouth is to the louthward of the town, and which 
 forms an elbow in running to the northward, furrounds mod part of it. 
 
 Madrafs is divided into the white and black town. The firfr. is very fmall, 
 but well built ; the latter lies to the northward of it, and is the abode of the 
 Gentoo "merchants, Moors, Armenians, Jews, &c. and fome Europeans, 
 who cannot dwell in the white town. The black town is not quite encom- 
 pafled w ith walls like the fort. 
 
 A number of ihips are always feen in the road. The oh^age is about 2 
 miles off more, in 10 or 11 fathoms water. There are in-land fome high 
 mountains. The latitude is 13? 13' N. and longitude 80? 32' E. from London. 
 
 From Madras to the reef of Trirbu or Natoer, the courfe is NNE. 3 
 leagues. You may know when you are near it by a fmall duller of trees ot 
 equal height, and whofe top refembles a kind of table. When this wood 
 and two palm or cocoa-trees are in one, you are athwart this reef, which 
 projects a good league into the fea. Having opened the two trees, with the 
 little wood a fail's breadth, you muft fleer NE. to keep clear of the bank 
 which lies off Paliacata, or Pallicatt, the fouthernmofl part of which bears 
 NEbE. 2 miles from the pitch of the reef. 
 
 Keep the lead conilantly going, becaufe, as you come near the bank of 
 Trifou, the depth diminiihes a fathom at each caft, as fall: as you can heave 
 the lead : fo that by day or night, as foon as you perceive this decreafe, you 
 'fhould immediately fland off, as above, to give the bank of Paliacata a good 
 birth, and not near it in lefs than 10 fathoms. Without this attention vou 
 will find unequal foundings, from 6 fathoms to 3 at one call of the lead, 
 which will" be exceeding dangerous for a large (hip ; but a fmall one may fid 
 throughout without fear, becaufe there are at lead 12 feet water over the 
 lhoaleil part of this bank. It lies 2 or 3 miles offfhore. 
 
 The bank of Paliacata extends NEbN. and SWbS. Thofe fhips that fail 
 3 leagues diftance from the coaft need not fear thefe two banks. 
 
 To 4-} before Paliacata, you mufl not fland in for the land, till the flag- 
 ftaffof this factory bears WbS. So may you fafely approach it; and will 
 find 6, 7, or 8 fathoms water. This ihould be underdood in cafe of a 
 . utherly wind. If it fhould be northerly, you mull bring the flag-flaff to 
 bear SW. efpecially in a fhip that draws 16 feet water; for in a fmall veflel, 
 or 9 or 10 feet draught, there is nothing to fear from this outer bank. It is 
 
 neceffary
 
 Of the CoROMAKDEL CoAST. J20 
 
 neceflary that thofe who are not fuffickntly acquainted v/ith this coaft, fhould 
 be upon their guard, in both thefe refpects. 
 
 The north end of the bank lies SEbS. from the river Paliacata. Two 
 miles to the fouthward of this river is Gueldrc Fort, belonging to the Dutch. 
 The common <4-}ag ; e is EbS from the flag-ftaft", in 5, 6, or 7 fathoms water. 
 
 The courfe from Trifou to Paliacata is NNE. diftancc c' leagues. The 
 
 ■J - O 
 
 coaft between them is low to fea-ward : the in-land part is high land, 
 called by navigators the Mountains of Paliacata. This place lies in latitude 
 
 CLX. 0/*Circara-Hoeria, Armegon, Caleto^.r, Divelan, Cerara, 
 Gondegam, Montepoly, and Petapoly. 
 
 From Paliacata to Cicara-Hoeria, or Sikari-hori, the coaft runs NbW. 
 8 leagues. Near this place is a reef like that of Trifou, Which runs as far 
 as that into the fea, but farther along the coaft. At the NE. point of this 
 reef there is another, at two or three leagues diftance from the coaft. Ic is 
 about 10 leagues long, north and fouth, and the Foundings on it are very 
 unequal. To go to Armegon you may go between thefe t,vo fhoals ; but you 
 muft be experienced herein, or e!fe it is better not to venture. You find 
 between the coaft and this bank a large and exceeding fine channel, which 
 extends NbE. and SbW. 
 
 To fail with a fair wind from Paliacata without this reef, you muft keep 
 off the coaft, fleering NNE. along the reef, and c< me not under S or 9 
 fathoms water. If you get into 12 fathoms, you muft edge in again to 9 
 fathoms. This is abfolutely neceflary for thole who go to Maful m, 
 
 becau'e, in June, July and Auguft, the currents i'et NE. and even fometimes 
 moie eafterly. If you keep too far oft", you would run the rifk of lofing 
 your paflage, as has happened to feveral (hips, that have not been able to 
 fetch nearer than Narfapour, and from thence have turned it, but With great 
 difficulty, to reach Mafulipatnarh. 
 
 It is reckoned ^6 miles from Cicara-Hoeria to Armegon. The trenching 
 of the coaft is fomething more wefterly than in the preceding paragraph. 
 Within land may be {tew Mount Armegon : when it bears weft you may 
 perceive a little to the fouthward, near the fhore, the ruins of an oid Englifh 
 factory, and to the SSW. the mountains of Paliacata. 
 
 From Armegon to Caletoer the coaft runs north, fomewhat eafterly, 6'- 
 lcagues ; but the courfe to pafs without the bank of Armegon is NNVV. in 
 10. 11, or 12 fathoms water. 
 
 S From
 
 ijo A Neiv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 From Caletoer to Divelan the coaft is north, and dtftance 10 leagues, that u 
 to fay, 7 leagues from Caletoer to Point Peny, and j leagues from Point Peny 
 to Divelan. From Caletoer you muff, fail in 16 or 17 fathoms, and come no 
 nearer, on account of a dangerous bank, which lies 4 leagues north of Caletoer^ 
 and projects 4 miles out. This bank is very fhoal, and confequently tl e ir.ore 
 dangerous. 
 
 The Sieur de la Touche, in his memoirs, relates an event which happen J 
 to him oft this bank, and which is not improper to be inferted here. Being at 
 4-^ oft it in 25 famoms, he prepared in the night-time, with a favourable wind, 
 to make atrip NW. and regain the depth of 13 or 14 fathoms. Though the 
 wind was moderate, and he 1 ad got but a little way, in lefs than a quarter 
 of an hour he fell from 15 to 5 fathoms: this obliged him to hawl off* 
 immediately. On heaving the lead, and finding the fecond time 1 5 fathoms, 
 he imagined he might be deceived in the founding. He hath fmce learned 
 that this bank fhoals from 15 to 5 fathoms. You mould in common prudence 
 keep upon your guard in this part : obferving to keep in 17 fathoms, you have 
 nothing to fear. 
 
 fix leagues NbW. from Divelan is Cerara or Carera : you may coafl it in 
 8, 9, or o fathoms. To the northward of Cerara are two very thick woods ; 
 and in the town a white pagoda. Within land are fome high mountains, 
 which (hew themielves 10 or 12 leagues at (cj, in clear weather. 
 
 From Cerara to Gonde^am the coaft trenches NEbN. ~ N. 6 leagues. Along: 
 this coaft runs a hank, projecting a little into the fea, and without it another ; 
 but lmail veflels may pafs within it : neither of them is dangerous for large 
 (hips, that keep in 9, 10, or 1 1 fathoms. In approaching the river you 
 perceive a village with a pagoda on the fea-fide. 
 
 From Gondegam to Montepoly, the courfe is NE. ciftance alrut 4 leagues. 
 You may co aft it at a league diilance in 9 or <o fathoms, ouze. Eaft of 
 Montepoly is a grove of palm-trees, and a little farther anotner lefs, confifting 
 only of 20 or 50 trees : this Lift feems higher than the other. When you 
 fail along the coaft, in the depth above mentioned, you go within the bank of 
 find, which lies 5 leagues SEbE. from Montepoly : it is 8 or 9 leagues long, 
 NE and SW. On the SW. part of it (which is the (hoalcft) there are no lefs 
 than 3 fathoms. The approaches to this bank are known by a fandy bottom ; 
 inftead of which, in the channel, between that and the land, the bottom is 
 ouze. 
 
 >m
 
 Of the CoROMANDEL CoAST. 131 
 
 From Montepoly to Petapoly the courfe is ENE. 6[ leagues. About a 
 league weftward of the town runs a Utile river, and oppoiite the town is a 
 gi eve of palm-trees, remarkable for its being flat and even, for which reafon 
 it is called the Table of Petapoly'. 
 
 CLXI. Of Point Divy, Massui.ipatan, and Narsapour. 
 
 From Petapoly to Point Divy the coaft runs eaft, about 14 or 15 leagues. 
 You mull: keep in 6 or 7 fathoms, 2 or 3 leagues off fhore. About 4 leagues 
 eaft of Petapoly there are the entrances of feveral rivers, that run along the 
 low land, and form iflands of it ; but are not perceptible to thole who fail 
 along fhore. Thefe rivers ebb and flow. A navigator hath obferved the 
 water here to rife and fall 4 feet, being at an +■} m 5 fathoms puze. 
 
 On the weft coaft of Point Divy, at 4 or 5 leagues diftance, you perceive 
 the entrance of 3 rivers. 
 
 In lading from athwart Divelan (the mountain of Cerara NWbN.) to go 
 clear of the bank of Montepoly, you muft fleer NE. Take care to keep in 
 10 or 12 fathoms, ftirF ground, and there is nothing to fear; but if the depth 
 increases, and the bottom becomes fofter, edge in, and fhape a courfe to the 
 eaftward of Petapoly, in order to get into 9 or io fathoms ouzy ground. 
 
 To go to MafTulipatan (or Maiulipatnam) when you are oft Point Divy, at 
 l\ leagues diftance, you muft keep in 8 or 9 fathoms, to avoid the bank of 
 Divy When Point Divy bears weft, you muft round it in 7 or 8 L.ujoms, 
 and fteer NNW. borrowing more or lefs from the weftward, according as yo\j 
 find yourfelf nearer or farther from the fhoal ; then edge away by little and 
 little, in 5 fathoms ouze, always avoiding the hard ground. V- hen the depth 
 exceeds 6 f. thorns, you muft borrow more from the weft, and (leer thus as 
 tar as the road of MafTulipatan, before which you <j-$ in 4 or 5 fafhoms ouze, 
 
 at 1 ' league off fhore. 
 
 The coaft to the northward of Point Divy is low land, lcvel^ and without 
 trees. Along this coaft may be feen the mouths of two livers. Near Maf- 
 f ulipatan you l'ee a tuft of palm-trees, about a league to the SW. Thefe palm- 
 trees in coming from the SE. feem to form only one great tree ; but may 
 be feen feparate as you approach. 
 
 Without this mark, MafTulipatan is eafily diftinguifhed by the houfes and 
 flag-ftaffs of three nations, Englifh, French, and Dutch. To the north- 
 ward of this town there is a wood cut even, the trees v. hereof arc of an equal 
 height. All the bottom of MafTulipatan bay is ouze, except near fhore. The 
 depth doth not decreafe above half a fathom for a quarter of a league. 
 
 S 2 It
 
 i^2 A New D/kegtort for the East-Indies. 
 
 It hath been obfervcd above, that if you are bound to !\ ' itati in r 
 
 wefterly monfoon, it is neceflary to keep foundings near thee aft, whether;. 
 failin» within or without the banks of Armegon and Montepoly. This holds 
 good from the month of May to October ; but in, February, March and April, 
 as the winds in general blow between the eaft. and Couth, you mud fleer for 
 Narfapour, or more to windward if pollible, in order to give the bay of 
 Petapoly a good birth, whence you cannot but with great difficulty get out 
 without "the help of wefterly winds, which you muft wait for. 
 
 In May you may fhape a courfe between Maflulipatan and Narfapour, becaufe 
 the winds vary then from SSE. to SW. and fometimes as far as WSYV. 
 
 In October, November and December, here is but little navigating, nor 
 indeed all along this cuaft. In the months of December and January, if 
 you are at the bottom of the coafl of Coromandel, you cannot return, becaufe 
 the NE. winds and currents, that run to the fouthward, are then in their 
 greateft force. 
 
 From Maflulipatan to Narfapour the courfe is EbN-jN. diftance from the 
 town 13J league, and from the road 12 leagues. " The coaft between the two 
 is encompafled with a bank, that projects half a league. Oppofite the river 
 of Narfapour is another bank, about a league from fhore. There are on tlie 
 bar of this river 8 or 9 feet water. 
 
 Some charts place a bank 3 leagues fouth of Narfapour : this fome defcribe 
 rocky, and others foft ; and upon it not lefs than 3' fathoms water. All the 
 ftavigators, who have failed to Mafiulipat3n, mention nothing of this danger 
 in their journals, though the major part, by track, have run over it. If its- 
 exiftence is real, you may prevent the dangerous effects of it, by keeping 
 your lead going ; which you mull always obferve in thefe parts, 
 
 CLXII. Of Point Godvarin, Narsttellk, Vatare, Bimelipatnam, 
 Ticacoel, Calreigapat-nam, and Alesare. 
 
 From Narfapour to Point Godvarin or Gordware, the coaft runs eaft 
 (or rather EbN.) 13 or 14 leagues. About 8 leagues to the eaftward of 
 Na; lapour you Ice 2 white. pagodas, which you fhould take care not to confound 
 
 • 1 thole which are a league weft of Godvarin Point. To the eaftward of 
 tfhefe pagodas is ? e river Vifleron. Several navigators miftake herein, for 
 want of observing that thefe lafi arc 3 in number. In lailing from the weftward, 
 you fhould approaoh the bank of Godvarin but in 12 or 16 fathoms ; I 
 
 it is ftvcp, and has unequal foundings on that fide. Tho e who come from 
 the eaftward, and go to Yanaon, may pais it eaiily in 6 or 7 fathoms, fandy 
 
 jriound ; but come no nearer. 
 
 * The
 
 Of t h COROMANDEL CoAST. 1^3 
 
 The " ij that »our generally keen 3 or 4 leagues from the 
 
 1 1 , in 16 fathoms, to avoid, this bank. This precaution appeared to 1 ; 
 vei 7 prudent. 
 
 From Point Godvafin to Narfipelle or Narfpyle, the courfe is NWbN|N, 
 8 leagues. This place is upon an ifland, between the entrances of two rivers. 
 The directions in the Eivhih Pilot tell us there is on each fide a reef, that 
 projects at lead 4 miles ; and that you may borrow on it to 0, 5, or 
 4 fathoms, but no nearer. 
 
 Eetween Narfipelle and the Point Godvaiin, 1 \ league from the latter, is 
 the mouth of the Yanaon river, on which the French have a factory for the 
 Callico trade ; and 10 miles to the N. eaftward is a pagoda of Corango. 
 
 The mouths of feveral rivers meeting in this bay form leveral iflands, with 
 {pits of fand, which run 4 miles out. There is no danger if you round them 
 in 5 fathoms. 
 
 Point Godvarln and Vatare (Watare or Watfare) bear off each other north 
 and fouth 10 leagues. The mountains on the Coaft of Gergelim and Oiixa 
 begin in this part. Vatare is known by a mofque built on the top of a hill. 
 
 Having doubled Godvaiin Point, you may perceive Vifigapatnam (or 
 Vifiagapatarn) one of the chief European fettlements. This place belongs to 
 the Englifh. It bears from the former NE.^N. diftance 24 or 25 leagues. 
 Eetween them lie Panary and Pandy ; the former ENE. 20 miles from Watfare, 
 and is known by a fmall hummock on the ftrand, to the weftward of which 
 is a fmall bay, and a creek for boats. The latter is about 2 leagues farther, 
 and is known by Come great rocks above water, about a mulket-fhot from fhore. 
 You may keep about 2 miles effing, in jo or 1 r fathoms. 
 
 Vifigapatnam diftinguifhes itfelf by a great fteep hill, at the foot of which 
 the fea tree ks : to the northward thereof is a little bay, where you may <j-j>, 
 but neareft the north more. On the fouth fide of the great hill is the entrance 
 of a river, and another to thtf northward of a little hill, on which is ieen a 
 fmall white pagoda, which is not difcovered in failing from the weftward, till 
 you have palled the great hill. 
 
 From Vifigapatnam to Bimelipatnam (or Bimilipatam) the coaft runs NE, 
 4J leagues; It is known by a long mountain, which runs in-land. from the 
 lea fide. You perceive alio upon the fhore a little hill, about 2 leagues to the 
 weftward of Bimelipatnam, like a fu gar-loaf : when you have palled it, you 
 may fee the Dutch factory on the weft fide of the river. You may anc' 
 there in 6, 7, or S fathoms, fioft ground, the factory bearing WbS. To lie 
 on. the other fide of the river it muft bear SW, 
 
 From
 
 13+ A New Directory for the East-Ind:es. 
 
 From Bimelipatnam to the river of Conar or Canary, the courfe is NEbE. 
 diftance 8 miles. In coafting you keep in 6 or 8 fathoms, and 9 fathoms at 
 fartheft : this carries you clear of the rocks. 
 
 From Conar river to the point of the fame name, the coaft runs NNE. 
 4 miles. To the eaft ward of Conar you fee a thicket of palm-trees, SEbE. 
 2 leagues from which, are the rocks of Conar or Santipelly. If you would 
 fail between' the main and thefe rocks, the beft channel is to keep in 7 or 
 8 fathoms; but at fartheft, no more to feaward than 9 or 10 fathoms, nor 
 nearer the fhore than <; or 6 fathoms. 
 
 If you intend to fail without this danger, you fhould not come nearer than 
 16 or 17 fathoms. In this cafe the fureft way will be to keep in 20 fathoms, 
 which will carry you 2 leagues wide of thefe rocks ; near which the currents 
 fet ftrongly on them. 
 
 From the point of Conar to Ticacoel or Chicacol, the coaft trenches NE^E. 
 diftance 34 miles ; the land between them forming fo me what of a bight. 
 Chicacol is by a fiver, near which are 3 or 4 great trees, and fome palm-trees, 
 You may keep il league offing, in 13 fathoms, fandy ground. 
 
 From Chicacol to Calreigapatnam or Calingepatam, the bearing is NE. 
 diftance 13 miles. This place is known by 3 or 4 great trees to the northward. 
 You have 13 or 14 fathoms a league from the fhore. 
 
 From Calreigapatnam to Caletaer (Alelareor Aleture) the bearing is NElE. 
 diftance 19 miles. The depth is the lame as above mentioned, at an equal 
 diftance from the coaft. You fee betweem them 2 thickets, each confuting 
 of about 10 or 12 palm-trees. 
 
 CLXI1I. O/PoNDY, BARVA, SOMMAVERON, K.ARAPAR, tffl«/MANIKPATNAM. 
 
 From Caletaer to Pondy, the coaft trenches NE. eafterly, diftance 5* leagues. 
 The depths are 12, 15, and 17 fathoms, at 1 \ league from the fhore, land 
 mixed with large gravel. Clofe in fhore, before the river of Pondy are 10 or 
 ) 2 rocks, and within land fome high rugged mountains, which thwart the- 
 river ; thofe along the coaft are of a middling height, but equally rugged. 
 
 From Pondy to Barva or Barrar, the bearing is the fame as above mentioned, 
 and the diftance 5 leagues. To fail from one to the other, keep. about 4 miles 
 offing, in 15 or 16 fathoms, fandy ground. The mountain of Barva ia high, 
 and round it are lome hillocks; the moft remarkable is to the fouthward of 
 the river. To the northward of the mountain are feveral others like it ; 
 but ibmewhat higher. 
 
 From
 
 Of the CoRoMANDEL CoAST. I35 
 
 From Barva to Sommaveron or Ganjami the coafl inclines to i 
 difhnce 8 leagues. You mult keep an offing of 2 ' league-", in 20 or 25 fathom ; 
 nearer, the foundings fhoal \ery fall. To the fouthward of Ganjam riv , 
 id a thicket of palm-trees, that feems to be of the extent of a cannon-mot. 
 Oil approaching it, you di cover another, even at the top, like the table of 
 PetapoJy ; and to the northward, 5 tops of hills, making 5 iaddlcs. Near this 
 river is a little fort. 
 
 From Sommaveron to Karapar (or Kampare) it is reckoned 6 ' leagues 
 NfvjE. There is nothing remarkable between them but the 5 tops of hills 
 above noticed, and the pagoda of Montercotta, which Hands by itfelf, upon 
 a moderate low land, woody and pretty even. A fort called Monterkotta is 
 laid to be upon a fmall round hummock, on the fouth fide of the river 
 (Campare) which is the utmofr. hounds of Golconda. Three leagues NE. 
 of this pagoda appears the mountain of Karapar ; when it bears NNE. it may 
 be known by its fhape, being like a long tomb, a little fleep on the fide next 
 the fhore, towards which it declines. The more in-land hills run off in the 
 direction of the coaft. This different direction makes the mountain Karapar 
 form an angle with the others, towards the NW. between which, to the 
 fouthward, a plain extends as far as the 5 tops of hills above mentioned. 
 
 From Karapar to Manikpatnam or Manicapatam, the bearing is NEbE|E. 
 diftance 9 leagues. The coaft makes a bay between them ; in which there 
 is no good of-} ground, but about 3 leagues to the fouthward of Manikpatnam. 
 This bay ought to be avoided, efpecially with a SE. wind. 
 
 From Karapar, the mountains that go no further to the northward, leave 
 between them and the fhore, a plain of reddifh foil, efpecially near the lea-fide. 
 Off Manikpatnam a bank of land projects 2 miles : it fhoals from 10 fathoms 
 fuddenly to 4 fathoms, lo that you muft come no nearer than 1 2 fathoms. 
 The Soundings, a league from the lhore, are landv ; and muddy at 2 leagues. 
 Manikpatnam may be leen when the Mountain of Karapar bears WSW. 7 or 
 8 leagues. It is known by a little pagoda, encompafled with houfes and 
 other buildings, with iome large trees. 
 
 CLX1V. Of Jagrenat Pagoda, the Black Pagoda, False Point, 
 
 and Point Palmiras. 
 
 From Manikpatnam to Jagrenat or Jakaranat, the courfe is ENE'E. 
 diftance c leagues. There is no danger alotv>- this coair ; therefore you may 
 keep at what diilance you think proper. The depth is the fame as above 
 
 mentioned,
 
 136 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 mentioned, and the land of the fame colour. Jagrenat is one of the moft 
 celebrated pagodas of India. Here is a large town about two leagues from the 
 lea- fide ; the height of its building (hews it far off. As foon as you are off 
 Manikpatnam, you may perceive the pagoda from the mafthead : at this 
 diftance it appears like a large fhip under fail ; but on approaching it, it looks 
 like three pagodas, near each other. The SW. one is exceeding high and 
 round, fmiihed aloft with a large ball on the top of a ipike. The fecond, which 
 almoft joins to the firft, appears lefs round at the top. It has alio a fpike and 
 a bill, as has likewife the third, which is the lead, and round like the firft. 
 Thefe three pagodas form a high and large building. P. Noel, by aftronomical 
 oblervation, made its latitude 19? 50' N. 
 
 Four leagues EbN. of Jagrenat pagoda, is the Black pagoda, which at a 
 diftance (like the former) reiembles a large fhip under i.ft ; but on a nearer 
 view it lofes fomewhat of its magnitude. When you bring; it to bear NNE. 
 it looks hke two buildings joined at the bottom, and leparate aloft, which finifh 
 in a peak. About a leage WbS. there is another little pagoda, fituate like this 
 on an even ground, reddiih and without trees. This circumflance io Efficient 
 to diftinguifh the Black Pagoda from that of Jagrenat. About a league WS W. 
 of the little pagoda, you difeover, between jagrenat and the Black Pagoda, 
 a riling ground, with fome trees thinly planted : and though there is another 
 nearly hke this, at a league beyond Manikpatnam, you cannot miftake them, 
 if you obferve never Co little the diftance of the one from the Black Pagoda, 
 and its different appearance from that of Jagrenat. 
 
 From the Black Pag;oda to the Falie Point is reckoned about 18 leagues," 
 the firft 5 leagues EbN. the next 3 ENE. and the laft 10 leagues NE. r l 
 coaft between thefe two places is encompaffed with a bank, which nrcjccls 
 half a league into the lc,\, and in fome places a liidc ieis. Off falie point it 
 extends 1 \ league. The 4 firft leagues the land is pretty even, and without 
 any thing remarkable : the 4 following leagues it apj ear. in downs or hillocks 
 offend; at the end of thefe 4 laft leagues runs the river Marfepour, near 
 which is feen a fmall thicket. Three leagues to the northward there is another 
 little river. The coaft concaves a little between the two ; it is very low, for 
 3! more northerly. Afterward it appears higher, by rc'afbn of a thick 
 
 that mikes it appear more To than any fctn from I. n. 
 
 Up; n aproaching Falie Point or Karreagazan, you would take it (although 
 it is tl : land) for a little ifland, by rea'on of a default of wood, or the 
 
 trance of a river. This part, which appears L arated, is the FaL.c Point. 
 
 From
 
 Of the COROMANDEL COAST. I37 
 
 From this place the coaft (whole direction was NE.) ftretches to die north- 
 ward, and more wefterly, forming a great bight. Many navigators, deceived 
 by this appearance, have taken Falfe Point for the Point of Palm-trees, or 
 Point Palmiras ; and this miftake hath occafioned the lofs of fevcral ihips. 
 The knowledge of the depth alone, is not fuflicient to prevent this error. 
 Upon the eafterly border of the bank of Falfc Point, you find, for 2 or 3 cafts 
 of the lead, the fame as at Point Palmiras ; and the bottom, of a muddy fand, 
 gravel and lmall flat ftones, black, and without fhapc, like bruifed pepper; 
 but with this difference, that at the Falfc Point you are but 2 leagues from 
 the land, in 15 or 16 fathoms, and may difcern the coaft plainly, appearing 
 like a regular hillock. At Point Palmiras, you find this depth only to the eaft 
 of its ifle, and at 4 leagues from the coaft, which being much lower is hardly 
 feen ; 3 downs of land, a little to the fouthward, are the only elevations it 
 hath. ' 
 
 When you come from fea-ward to make Falfe Point directly, you do not 
 fee the marks before mentioned, except a thick and even wood, which has 
 nothing of the kind near it, and which is the principal mark. Having failed 
 about 4 leagues from Falfe point ; when it bears SW. there is to the NE. an 
 opening, like the entrance of a middling river. 
 
 Off Falfe Point, in 14 or 15 fathoms, the courfe to attain the fame depth 
 (to the eaft ward of Point Palmiras) is NE. 18 leagues; but you muft allow 
 for the ebbing and flowing of the tides : they are SE. and N W. The beft 
 depth is to keep in 1*4 or 16 fathoms, foft ground. If in this track you fhould 
 find a different bottom, you need not be furprifed. About 5 leagues NEbE. 
 from Falfe Point, fleering NE. foundings have been had of red fand, for 
 above 3 leagues, and from thence ou/v, as far as Point Palmiras. The change 
 of the fand mews you ore near the bank, which is fine and hard fand. Eaft 
 and weft of this bank, the foundings are fand, gravel, broken lhells, and 
 ftones without form, like bruifed pepper. You often find, in 17 or 18 fathoms 
 foundings of black and red ouze, with broken (hells. Near the land, in 1 1 or 
 1 2 fathoms, it is fand and red gravel. When in the night time you find thefe 
 laft foundings, you may round the bank, fteering N. and NbW. When in 
 this courfe you rind foft ground, you may eaiily knew whether the bank is 
 doubled, becaufe in fuch cafe the depth decreafes but a fathom and a quarter 
 for the fpace of a league. On the contrary, it decreafes very quick when it 
 is not doubled. If the winds blow from the weftward, you may lie clofe to 
 the bank, in loor n fathoms, without fear. You have then foundings of 
 
 T fine
 
 138 A New Directory for the East-I.;dies. 
 
 fine fand, frequently mixed with fine gravel : fometimes they are unequal, 
 as from ic, to 7I fathoms. You mini: beware of coming into 5 fathoms ; for 
 then you approach very near the border of the bank, and the rocks appear 
 difunclly upon the fhoaleft part. 
 
 Be careful not to keep too fir oft* the bank, during the weftern monfoon, 
 becau'e you run the rifqe of lofing foundings, by the winds winch then blow 
 from that part, and by the currents then fetting to the eaftward. If this 
 happens, you muft lofe your pafiage, and will be obliged to go to winter at 
 Chittigong, whence you cannot get out till November or December. 
 
 When the winds blow from S. to Si. (as it often happens in April, May 
 and June) you may keep in 16 or 17 fathoms, till you have doubled the 
 outermoft part of the bank. 
 
 The Ifland of Point Palmiras is very difcernable in coming from the fouth- 
 ward, appearing very far apart ; though not above half a league at mofr. If 
 you are got down within the bight, between Falfe Point and this ifland, fo 
 that it bears to the eaftward of north, you muft bawl directly off, to keep 
 clear of an elbow of the bank, which tuns out 2 leagues to the SEbE. of this 
 ifland. You may approach it in 1 2 fathoms ; but come nothing under. 
 
 In cafe of a foutherly wind this inftruction is more ufeful than before 
 becaufe then you will have the greateft difficulty to clear it. The Sieur de la 
 Touch e, in his Memoirs, fpeaks of a bank, bearing EbS. 9 leagues from. 
 Point Palmiras, on which he was told a fhip had been loft. A Danifh 
 captain aiYured him he had feen this bank when dry,, and that, having been 
 carried off the coaft by a gale of wind, the depth increafed upon him to 60 
 fathoms and afterwards diminifhed by little and little to the fight of it. This 
 bank hath been fearched for accordingly, but could not be found ; therefore it 
 cannot be amifs to keep the lead going. 
 
 CLXV. Of Bali.asore Road, the Nelgringe Mountains end Piply 
 
 Road. 
 
 Having doubled the bank of Point Palmiras, when the ifland bears WbS. 
 a little foutherly. the belt courfe to go to °j-} in Ballafore road, in 5 fathoms 
 at low water, is NNW. about 9 leagues. The navigator fhould be careful to 
 obferva which way the wind blows, in order to be fure of his courfe, becaufe 
 in the wefterry winds you muft keep your luff to avoid falling to the leeward 
 6f Ballafore' Road. You muft therefore keep the coaft on board, 1117 or S 
 fathoms ; but you may approach Ballafore Road in 6 fathoms. You meet no 
 
 danger
 
 Of the CoROMANOEL CoAST. 139 
 
 danger in this bay, but the bank of Canaca, which breaks at low water, and 
 on its ed°;e has c fathoms, hard fand. The weft coaft is planted with trees, 
 all alon"-; except for the fpace of a fmall league to the weftward of the river. 
 This part, void of trees, ferves to (hew the entrance of it, which has on the 
 weft fide a little white houfe (the Englhh banklhail or ftorehdufe). On the 
 eaft fide are forae find-downs, behind which you fee plainly a little wood, 
 when you go too far to the eaftwavd of the entrance. 
 
 The marks for good 4-}age, when the Nelgringe or Nellgare mountains 
 are to be ken. ift. The end of the long mountain to the fouih weftward of 
 the others W^S. 2. The middle one, which appears the higheft, and is 
 feparate from the reft, WNWlW. 3d. The little one on the ME. fide 
 NWbN. The entrance of the river north, and NbW. 
 
 It flows in Ballafore road, at full and change SSE. and NNW. The fea 
 rifes here 10 feet in the fpring, and 7 in the neap tides. The (hips that intend 
 to 4-} in 5 fathoms, at low water, ought to pay great regard to this. 
 
 If in cloudy weather (when the Mountains of Nelgringe cannot be (ten, 
 and the entrance of the river is hardly to be diftinguilhed) you feek the 5 
 fathoms (becaufe in this depth you are at leaft 4 leagues off fhore) you muft 
 have recourfe to the marks already mentioned, namely, the void of trees to 
 the weftward, and the downs which lie along the eaftern bank. 
 
 It is reckoned about 9 leagues EbN. and ENE. from Ballafore Road to 
 Piply Road. In this track you keep in 6 fathoms, at low water. Piply is 
 known by a pagoda to the weftward of the river, and a thicket of trees very 
 near it, which are fufficient to dillinguifh it. If you can fee the pagoda, you 
 muft bring them to bear NWbN. to get into good <+->age. If in a imall (hip 
 you coaft it in a lefs depth, you muft take care of a bank oppolite the river, 
 which projects 4 miles off the coaft. It is computed about 4 leagues from 
 the +^agc of Pipley to the firft brace or channel to enter the Ganges. 
 
 The (hips bound up the Ganges are not always obliged to 4-} in Ballafore 
 Road for pilots, becaufe you frequently meet their boats as foon as you have 
 doubled Point Palmiras. Each nation have their peculiar ones, nor is it 
 proper to ufe them promifcuoufly ; nor is it proper to ufe thole of another 
 nation when as good of your own may be had. Sad accidents have happened 
 by trufting to unikilful pilots ; the heft (hould always be preferred. 
 
 Mr,
 
 140 A Neiv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Mr. Nichelfon's Defer iption of the Goads of Malabar, Canara,- 
 
 Decan and Concan. 
 
 CLXVI. 0/ Cape Comorin. 
 
 Cape Comorin is in latitude 7? 56' N. and longitude 77? 25' E. from London* 
 The variation, 1763, was 41' W. The extremity of this cape is level, low 
 land covered with trees, and cannot be feen from a (hip's deck, more than 
 4 or 5 leagues ; fo that few mips coming this way fee the cape, but a little 
 hill to the northward thereof, which appears like an ifland, when it bears from 
 NEbN. to ESE. This is what people in general take for the cape, and fet it 
 as fuch. A little to the northward of this hill, begins the chain of very high- 
 mountains, which ftretch a great way in-land to the northward, and are 
 called the Mountains of Gatta ; which may be feen 8, 9, or 10 leagues at 
 lea. 
 
 There are good foundings all about Cape Comorin. To the eaftward, the 
 cape bearing NW. you have from 35, 30, 25 to 22 fathoms, coarfe brown 
 fand, about 5 leagues off: the cape bearing NbE. 4 leagues, you have 20 
 fathoms; ditto NEiN. 4 or 5 leagues, 24 fathoms ; ditto NEbE. 3 leagues 
 off more, 24 fathoms, coarfe land; ditto E^S. and the extremes of land to the 
 northward, NbW'W off fhore 4 leagues, 30 fathoms. The cape, from 
 NNE. to NEbN. 7 or 8 leagues, 38 fathoms, muddy ground ; ditto NEbN. 
 6 or 7 leagues, 35 fathoms, ouze, with iome find ; when the extremes of the 
 land to the northward will bear NbW. The cape ENE. and the extremes, 
 of the land to the northward, NbW'W. off more about 4 leagues, you have 
 24 fathoms, fandy ground. 
 
 On Nov. 13, 1759, being at noon, b\ r a good obfervation, in latitude 
 7? 46' N. the little hill that appears like an ifland to the northward of the 
 true Cape Comorin bearing NE'N. and the extremes of land to the northward 
 . off fhore 6 or 7 leagues, had 35 fathoms. From noon to 2 P. M. 
 the courfe fleered was NbE. 2': miles, when we faw breakers on a funken 
 rock, which mull: be very near the furface of the water, by the lea breaking 
 on it, whilft elfewhere it was fo very, f moot ii. We law the breakers very 
 plain lor 15 or 20 minutes, and palled within a mile of them. When they 
 bore SE 1*1. about 1 '. mile, we founded and had 35 fathoms; the extreme part 
 le hill, which we fet for Cape Comorin, bearing NE. a little northerly; 
 and i.hcrnmoft land in fr'ht NbW. Our diftance from what we took 
 
 for
 
 Mr. Nichelson's Dcfcrijtion of the Malabar Coast. 14 r 
 
 for the cape, as near as we could judge, was 6 of 7 leagues. • This i> at 
 dangerous rock, but It is very imall. 
 
 CLXVII. Of Point Cadiapatam, fwajmall Islands, and a Rock. 
 
 From Cape Comorin, to Point Cadiapa:am, the courfe is AVNW'iW. 
 diftance 6 leagues. This point of Cadiapatam forms the eaft fide of Colcche 
 Bay, and is very remarkable ; being a very red fteep land, clofe to the fea, 
 with a grove of tall trees on the extremity of it. From this point inlandward 
 the land rifes to a tolerable height, at the top whereof is another grove of 
 tall trees, which feem very regular : this is the highefc land in light near 
 the fea. 
 
 SSW. from Cadiapatam Point, diftance 3 or 4 miles, there are two little 
 fflands furrounded with rocks and foul ground; and S|E. from the northern-- 
 moft of thefe there is a rock even with the water, except only about the 
 bi'mefs of a calk of it above water. This is the fame with that mentioned in 
 the New Directorv, as appearing like a buoy. It lies about 6 or 7 miles off 
 fiv.H-e, and has 13 fathoms within a boat's length of it ; 17 fathoms about 7 of a 
 mile without it ; 197 and 20 fathoms about 7 a mile without it ; 22 fathoms 
 about a mile without it ; and only 23 fathoms 1 r or 2 miles without it, 
 fandy ground. I have founded all about this rock, and took the following 
 bearings upon it, viz. the northernmoft of the lfnall iflands N4\V. the 
 outermofh high land of Cape Comorin EbN^N. the outermoft low land, 
 which is the very pitch of the cape E. diftance about 5 leagues ; Point 
 Cadiapatam NNEiE. and the extremes of the land to the northward NW-'-N. 
 otflhore, 6 or 7 miles. I would not advife you to go under 28 or 30 fathoms 
 hereabout in the night-time, or hazey weather ; for the coaft hereabout is 
 very foul and dangerous, having many ftraggling rocks lying a great way off 
 fhore. 
 
 CLXVIII. Of Coleche Bay, Ruttera Point, Anjanga, Quilon, 
 
 Pokca, Cochin, and Panian. 
 
 From Point Cadiapatam, 4 or 5 miles to the weftward, is Coleche Bay. On 
 the fhore hereabout are fevcral buildings like pagodas, On the weft lide of 
 Coleche Bay, begins a pretty high red land, _ intermixed with white, near the 
 fea, and very fteep to lea-ward. This land continues about 2 or 3 leagues to 
 the weftward of Coleche Bay, and there ends. 
 
 From Coleche Bay, as tar as Ruttera Point, you fee high mountains in 1. 
 and fome fmall diftance from the fea, vou fee tolerable hi-h land, which 
 
 ftretches
 
 142 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 ftretches to the north waid as far as Ruttcra Point, and there it end* Ruttera 
 Point is clofe to the Tea, and f'eems to ftretch from the bit-mentioned hig& 
 land. It is a low, level land, terminating in a bluff to feaward, and is higher 
 than any land hereabout near the Tea. There is a church a little to the 
 Southward of this point, by which it may be known ; and feveral other 
 buildings are along more. 
 
 From Point Cadiapatam to Ruttera Point the courfe is NW'W. 1 1 or 12 
 leagues. You have foundings between them from 24 fathoms 3 leagues off 
 Cadiapatam, to 50 fathoms 4 or 5 leagues ; to ■$$ or 40 fathoms 6 or 7 leagues 
 off fhore. When you are to the northward of Coleche Bay, you may go 
 into 20 fathoms 2 miles off fhore; to 30 or 34 fathoms 4 or 5 leagues off 
 more. Off Ruttera Point the water deepens, there' being 24 and 27 fathoms 
 
 3 or 4 miles from it ; 23 fathoms 4 leagues off; and 35, 40, or 45 fathoms 
 from 4 to 6 leagues off, fandy ground. 
 
 Here it may not be amifs to oblerve, that the Coaft of Malabar lies NNW. 
 and SSE. fo that, being 5 leagues off Ruttera Point, a NNW. courfe will 
 carry you along fhore to the Ifland Kanary, (a little to the fouthward of Bombay) 
 and as far without it as you were from Ruttera Point ; and a SSE. courfe from 
 Kanary will carry you the lame diftance off Ruttera Point, as I have feveral 
 times experienced. There are good and regular foundings all along this coaft, 
 only in lome places deeper, and others fhoaler water. 
 
 From Ruttera Point to Anjanga, the courfe is NbW~W. diftance 7 leagues; 
 the coaft between them is low to feaward, but covered with irees, which 
 makes it feen at a pretty good diftance. There are high mountains in-land, 
 at a o-reat diftance; and along fhore there are feveral buildings: the coaft 
 is bold and clear, having 1 1 or 12 fathoms within 1 * mile of the fhore; 24 or 
 25 fathoms z\ or 3 leagues off ihore: and 30, 35, to 40 or 45 fathoms, from 
 
 4 to 6 leagues off fhore. 
 
 Anjanga lies in latitude 8? 42' N. and longitude 76? 25'E. from London. 
 The variation here, 1763, was 28' W. You may of-}, in Anjanga Road, 
 in 11, 12, or 13 fathom water, the Red Cliffs bearing NNW! W. the flag-ftaff 
 ENE;E. the extremes of the land to the fouthward SE^S. off fhore \\ or 
 2 miles. About 4 or 5 miles to the northward of Anjanga there are fome 
 pretty high and fteep red cliffs, clofe to the fca, where may be had frefh 
 water; but there being always a great furf on the fhore makes it very tedious 
 watering. The water at Anjanga is both bad and fcaice. 
 
 About 5 leagues to the northward of Anjanga, is the Dutch fettlcment of 
 Quilon, a very inconfiderable place. From the Red Cliffs, which are 4 miles 
 
 to
 
 Mr. Nicheison's Defcripiion Iff the M.m.abau Co/.sr. 143 
 
 to the northward of Cochin, the Coaft is very low, and only to be difcernep 
 by the trees upon it. The foundings are gradual to the fhore ; you have 
 10 or 11 fathoms 2 miles off more ; 22 or 23 fathoms 3 leagues off fhore ; 
 ami 28 fathoms 5 or 6 leagues off fhore ; which is as far as you can fee the 
 land oft deck. 
 
 From Anjanga to Cochin the coaft lies NNW,' ( W. diftance 28 leagues. 
 You may coaft it along fhore in from 10 to 20 fathoms ; and after you arc to 
 the northward of Quilon, you may coaft it to Cochin, from 7 to 16 fathoms; 
 in which depths you will be from 4 miles to 4 leagues off fhore. 
 
 From Porca, or Porcat, a Dutch fettlement, to Cochin, and as far to the 
 northward as Banian, another Dutch fettlement, is the fhoaleft part of all 
 the Malabar Coaft, but no danger, there being gradual foundings to the fhore. 
 You have 6 or 7 fathoms ij or 2 miles off fhore ; 12 or 14 fathoms 3 or 3^ 
 leagues off; and 22 or 23 fathoms at 6 leagues diftance, when you can but 
 juft fee the land off deck. The bottom hereabout muddy and ouzy. 
 
 As you fail along the coaft you cannot fee the town of Cochin, on account 
 of the many trees that are about it. It would be difficult to know it, but 
 for its very high flag-ftaff, and large flag, which being ere died on a very high 
 tower, may be feen over the tops of the trees. 
 
 The town and fort of Cochin is the chief fettlement of the Dutch on the 
 Malabar Coaft, and a place of great trade. It is fituated on the fouth fide of 
 the river, at the entrance, and is in latitude 9? 58" N. and longitude 76? 8' E. 
 from London. The variation, by feveral obfervations, in the year 1763, 
 was 1? 34' W. You may 4-^ in Cochin Road from 5* to 6^ fathoms, 
 muddy ground-; the flag-ftaff bearing ENE. or EbN;N. off fhore 1 ' mile. 
 Here you may get plenty of wood and water. Poultry and all kind of 
 refrr fhments are to be had in great plenty here. 
 
 Being in the offing, any where about Cochin, 6 or 8 leagues to the 
 
 northward or fouth ward of it, .you will but juft fee the land off deck, ia 
 
 - 22 or 23 fathoms, or about 6 leagues off fhore. You have 16 fathoms, 
 
 3 leagues off, with gradual foundings to the fhore ; all muddy ground, 
 
 excepting as follows. 
 
 There is a fhoal with 4 fathoms water on it, lies off the Dutch fettlement 
 Pauian, or a little to the northward thereof, in latitude 10? 34'N. about 4 
 miles off the fhore. Within this fhoal there are 6| and 6 fathoms within a 
 mile, or a mile and a half of the fhore ; and there are 9' or 10 fathoms, a 
 mile without it, muddy ground ; and 14 fathoms, a mile and a half or 2 miles 
 
 without
 
 144 -A AVw Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 \\ ithout it. His Majefty's fhips Weymouth and Cumberland were on this 
 fhoal in 1758. The Weymouth had 4 fathoms water on it : and the Cumber- 
 land, miffing flays, °|-}ed on it in 5 fathoms water, and founded well about 
 it. The Weymouth <f->ed a mile without it in 9 J fathoms water, and founded 
 well about this fhoal. This fhoal is but fmall, and we do not know that there 
 is any lefs than 4 fathoms water on it ; but it is alarming to come fuddenly, 
 in the fpace or" a mile, from 11 or 12, into 4 fathoms; therefore great mips 
 mould keep out in 1 3 or 14 fathoms hereabout, in order to keep clear of this 
 fhoal, and to prevent their being furp riled by coming too fuddenly into fhoal 
 water. 
 
 CLX1X. Of Callicut, Tillicherry, Mahe, Mount Dilla, and 
 
 Cananore. 
 
 From Cochin to Callicut the coaft lies NNW. a little northerly, diftance 
 20 leagues. The land near the lea is low. and woody, but clear of danger. As 
 you come near Callicut, if the weather is clear, you , may fee, a great way 
 in-land, exceeding high mountains ; thefc are part of the great chain of moun- 
 tains which extend from Cape Comorin, and run a great way farther to. the 
 northward, called the mountains of Gatta. You may coaft it along from 
 Cochin to Callicut in S, 9, or 10 fathoms, muddy ground, at 2 1 01-3 miles 
 off ffiore ; and "you will have 20, 25 and 30 fathoms, fi;om 4 to 5 and 6 leagues 
 oft fhoje. 
 
 Callicut may be known by the many little hills near the fca, and very high 
 mountains in-land ; there are alio feveral little pagodas near the ihore, which 
 appear very white. Here the Englifh, French, Danes and Portuguefe, have 
 each a factory-houfe, whereon they hoi ft their flags. This is a place of coii- 
 iiderable trade, in pepper, timber, and cardamums. The latitude of Callicut 
 is 11? 2 FN. and longitude 76? 3'E. from London. The variation by obser- 
 vation, 1763, was 30'E. You may <f-} in Callicut Road in 5 '. or 5 fathoms, 
 fort muddy ground, off fliore about 2 miles ; and the tombs to the northward 
 of the town bearing ENE. orENE',N. When Callicut bears eaft about 6 
 miles, you have 15 or 16 fathoms; and when the Englifh flag ftaff bears 
 NEbE. about. 2 miles, there is a ihoal with 3 fathoms, hard rocky ground, 
 which extends NNW. and SSE. a large quarter of a mile, and its breadth is 
 little more than 2 fhips lengths, and has 5 fathoms juft without. 
 
 From Callicut Road to the Sacrifice Rock, the courfe is NWbW. diftance 
 6 leagues. This iil.uul, or rock, is about as high, a>> a large .ihjp.V hull oui 
 
 the
 
 Mr. NichelsonV Defcription of the Malabar Coast. 145 
 
 the water, and deep to 011 all fides. It lies about 3 leagues from the Conti- 
 nent, and is very white, being covered all over with bird's dung. Its latitude 
 is ii?36'N; the variation, 1763, was 14/YV. I never was through between 
 this ifhnd and the main, but have fecn (hips go through, and been informed 
 by thofe on board them, that there is a good channel, with 8 or 9 fathoms 
 clear ground, and regular foundings. By going within- fide this rock, you 
 make a fhorter cut to Tillicherry. You have foundings from Callicut to 
 the Sacrifice Rock, from 6 or 7 fathoms, to 14, 15, 16, and 17 fathoms, 
 14- mile without-lide the rock ; and 24 or 25 fathoms about 4 or 5 miles off it. 
 In the night or hazy weather, 1 would advife you not to come under 20 
 fathoms, but keep in 20 or 22 fathoms ; this will carry you clear of all danger. 
 
 From Sacrifice Rock to Tillicherry the courfe is NlYV. diftance 7 leagues. 
 Being in 17 fathoms water, 1 \ or 2 miles without the rock, you will have 
 very regular foundings between that and Tillicherry, from 17 to 5^ fathoms, 
 ouzy ground. You may =f^ in 5J- or 5 fathoms, the flag-ftaffat Tillicherry 
 bearing NEbN. Green I (land (a pretty high ifla, d, covered with trees) 
 NbVVlW. off fhore \\ or \\ of a mile. There are fcveral great rocks to the 
 northward of the town, but no danger, as they are clofe in fhore. Tillicherry 
 is an Englifh fettlement, in latitude 1 1? 5o'N. and longitude 75? 45TS. from 
 London; the variation, 1763, by feveral oblervations, was i?W. Here may 
 be had good frefh water, and other refreshments. 
 
 About 2 leagues to the fouthward of Tillicherry, flood the forts and town 
 of Mahe, which was the chief fettlement belonging to the French, on the 
 Malabar Coaft. They had built the town and forts, and made it a ftrong 
 place. The principal fort was fituate on a bluff point, at the mouth of a little 
 river, which is navigable for only fmall country veflels ; there were 2 other 
 forts, both built on hills. This place was taken by the Englifh in February, 
 1760, and deflroyed. The beft °H>ing in Mahe Road, in fine weather, was in 
 5 or 6 fathoms, the flag ftaff EbN. or EbN^N. 1 \ or 2 miles off fhore. 
 
 The coaft: between Callicut and Tillicherry is low, and covered with wood ; 
 but there are feveral high hills a fmall diftance in-land, and very high moun- 
 tains a great way in-land. 
 
 FromTillicherry'to Mount Dilla the coafl lies NW^N. diilance 7; leagues, 
 and is low and woody ; but high hills are feen in-land. You may coaft it 
 between them in from 10 to 14 or 15 fathoms, from 4 to 6 miles off fhore ; 
 but off Mount Dilla, in 14 or 15 fathoms, you will not be more than 3 or 4 
 miles off fhore. I have palled it in 10, ii, or 12 fathoms, 2 or 3 miles off 
 
 U it.
 
 146 A Ndtv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 it. The foundings of it are very regular. In the offing between Tillicherry 
 and Mount Dilla, you have foundings from 20 to 26 fathoms, ouzy ground, 
 from 4 to 5 leagues off more; and from 25 to 30 and 35 fathoms from 5 
 to 6 or - leagues off more. When Mount Dilla bears from EbN. to SEbE. 
 diftance 6 or 7 leagues, you have 31, 32, or 33 fathoms, fandy ground. 
 
 About 2 leagues to the northward of Tillicherry is the Dutch fettlement 
 of Cananore. 
 
 Mount Dilla is a high mountain, lying ENE. and WSW. and forms a 
 point of land that projects into the fca. The French had a fmall fort on the 
 outer part of it, next the fea, which may be feen as you pafs it. Coming from 
 the northward or fouthward it appears Separate from the coaft, the land within 
 it, and on each fide of it, being very low ; i'o that at a diftance it appears 
 like an iftand, which renders it very remarkable to navigators. The latitude 
 of Mount Dilla is 12? 6'N. the variation off it, 1763, 34/E. It may be feen 
 9 or 10 leagues in clear weather. 
 
 CLXX. O/Mangalor, Annanore, Bassalore, the Permira Mid St, 
 
 Mary's Rocks. 
 
 From Mount Dilla to Mangalore, the coaft lies NNW. diftance 16 leagues 
 and frill continues low and woody, as well as clear of all danger. About 5 
 or 6 leagues to the northward of Mount Dilla, and fome difhnce in-land, 
 there is a high hill called mount Formoia ; and about 6 leagues to the north- 
 ward therof is a long, high, Hoping hill, called Barn Hill, w'ith feveral other 
 hills further in-land. You may Hand in more to 7 or 8 fathoms with fafety, 
 and coaft it in 9 or 10 fathoms, at 5 or 6 miles diftance. In the offing 
 between them you will have 16 fathoms 1\ leagues off ffiore ; and from 27 to 
 30 fathoms, ouzy ground, from 5 to 6 leagues off ffiore. Mangalore bearing 
 E : iN. and Barn Hill ESE. off more 4! or 5 leagues, you will have 2 r or 22 
 fathoms ; and Barn Hill EbSfS. and Mangalore eaft, off ihore about 6 leagues, 
 you will have 30 fathoms, land and ouze. 
 
 Mangaldfe, a pl.ee of great trade ffr rice, is Situated at the mouth of a river, 
 navigable only for fmall (hips, as it has a bar. On the fout'a fide of thi 
 there is a fort, belonging to the Portuguese, where trieyTioift their eolou'is, 
 which mav be feen a great way at fea. The i f-^nge in th 
 the iiver in 5, 6, or 7 fathoms, foft muddy ground. 1 
 place is 1 2? 5C/N. The* variation, 1763, was j^^V. Here;. 
 pretty high. 
 
 -
 
 Mr. NiciiELSoNV Dcfcription of the Malabar C<-ast. 147 
 
 From Mar.g-alore to Annanore, the coaft lies NNW. 21 leagues. A little to 
 the northward of Mangalorc, the coa(l bcgias to be very high. About 8 or 9 
 leagues to the northward of Mangalcrc, there is a Moors fcttlement, called 
 BalL'dore, at the back of which is a very high mountain, with a remark/ 
 peak, called the Peak of Balfalore. It continues high and mountainous a great 
 way to the northward of Annanore. This high land is not clofe to the lea, 
 though it appears fo : for the coaft near the fea is low and woody, wi'.h Regular 
 foundings toward the fhorc, and continues lb to that part oppoiite Pigeon 
 I Hand, which bears from Mangalore NNWiW. 28 leagues. Between Mount 
 Dilla and Pigeon Ifland, you have foundings further off the land than any other 
 part of the coaft. From 30 to 40, 50, and 56 fathoms, fine land, from 7 to 
 10, 12, or 14 leagues off more and very regular foundings. 
 
 From Cape Comorin to Mangalore, is the proper Coaft of Malabar ; and 
 from thence to Bombay the Coaft of Canara : but people in general call the 
 whole by the name of the Malabar Coaft. 
 
 The Permira Rocks bear from Mangalore NWbN. 10 or ri leagues ; they 
 lie 3 or 3! leagues off fhore, in latitude 13? 17'N. are as high as a Imall fhip's 
 hull out of the water, and may be feen 3I or 4 leagues from a fhip's deck. 
 Come no nearer thefe rocks, in the night or hazy weather, than 18 fathoms. 
 I have founded well about thefe rocks, and have pafted them in 16 J, 16$, : 6, 
 15} fathoms, at 2 or 22 miles diftance without them ; and you will have no 
 lefs water cloie to them : the foundings are regular and even, fand and ou?e. 
 You have 17 fathoms 3 miles without thefe rocks ;. 18I fathoms about 4 miles 
 without them ; and 20 or 21 fathoms 5 or 6 miles without them ; and then 
 you will be 5 or 6 leagues off fhore. The variation of thefe rocks, 1763, 
 was 28'W. 
 
 The St. Marv's Rocks are feveral little iflands., or rocks, lying 2|or 3 leagues 
 off fhore, in latitude 13? jo'N. lome of which are as high as the hull of a fmall 
 fhip, others low and flat ; they bear NNW. 4 or 5 leagues from the Permira 
 Rocks, and may be feen 3 or 31 leagues from a fhip's deck. You have 151 or 
 16 fathoms 2 or 3 miles without thefe rocks. I would not advife you to 
 come nearer them than 16 fathom's; and in the night or hazy weather, not 
 nearer than 17 or 18 fathoms, in which depth you will pals 4 or 5 miles 
 without them, you have 21, 22, or 23 fathoms, 6, 7, or 8 miles without 
 them, when you are 5 or 6 leagues off fhore. The variation, 1763, was 43' W. 
 
 From St. Mary's Rocks to Pigeon Ifland, you have regular foundings toward 
 the fhore, viz. from 10 to 12 fathoms, 4 or 5 miles off fhore ; 15 or 16 
 
 U 2 , fathoms
 
 148 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 fathoms 3 leagues off; 19 or 20 fathoms, 4 leagues off; 24 or 25 fathoms, 
 5 leagues off; and $0 to 2,3 fathoms, 6 or 7 leagues off: vc-.y regular found- 
 ings, a;;d ouzy clear ground. 
 
 CLXXI. 0/"Pigeon Island, Hog Island, Annanore Road, Anjedivjb.' 
 Isle, Cape Raimas, W St. George's Island. 
 
 Pigeon Ifland is a fmal!, but very high round ifland, which may be fecn 9 
 or 10 leagues in clear weather. It lies about 3 leagues from the Continent, in 
 latitude 1 4.? 4' N. has a little ifland, or rock, to the fouth-eaflward, and another 
 to the eaftward of it. The variation, 1763, by leveral obfervations, was 
 1? a'W. 
 
 From Pigeon ifland, E*S. z| leagues, lies a fmall, but very high ifland, 
 with a peak much like the top of a iugar-loaf, called Hog Ifland. It lies near 
 the Continent, with feveral fmall iflands or rocks near it, and has gradual 
 foundings toward them from 8 to 9 fathoms. 
 
 The Continent hereabout is very high and mountainous. You may with 
 great fafety go between Pigeon and Hog Ifland. You have 16 or 17 fathoms 
 mid-channel, to 11, 10 or 9 fathoms on the continent fide. When to the 
 northward of Hog Ifland, you may coaft it along to Annanore Road, in 7, 8, 
 or 9 fathoms, 3 or 4 miles off fhore, without danger. 
 
 In Annanore Road you may 4-^ in from 5 to 6 rathoms, foft muddy ground; 
 the flas;-ftaff at Annanore bearinsr EbN. or ENE. Fortified Ifland, NbW. off 
 fhore 1 j or 2 miles ; and Pigeon Ifland SbW. 31 or 4 leagues. A confiderable 
 Indian town is lituated at the mouth of a falt-water river, where the Englifh 
 have a factory ; it is noted for producing great quantities of rice and pepper ; 
 its latitude is 14? 14'N. The variation off this place, 1763, was 1? 16' \V. 
 There is no frefh water to be had here. About r§ mile to the north ward of 
 Annanore, is a high oreen ifland, level a-top, a imall diftance from the Conti- 
 nent, with an Indian fortification on it ; therefore it is called Fortification 
 
 Ifland; 
 
 In the flream of Pigeon Ifland, you have 20 and 21 fathoms. I have palled 
 without this ifland feveral times, within 3 or 4 miles of it, bearing from 
 E'bS. to EbN 7 . and had 24, 24 and 25 fathoms. In the night or hazy weather, 
 a Ihip lhoxdd not come nearer than this depth. You will have 30, 32, or 
 I L.hom c , 3 or 4 leagues without it, when you are 6 or 7 leagues off 
 fhore : regular foundings, land and ouzo. 
 
 From Annanore, NWbN. 15 or 16 leagues, is the ifland Anjcdive ; and the 
 Duckty or Oyilcr Rocks, from Pigeon Ifland NbW. 17. leagues, and from 
 
 Cape
 
 Mr. Nichelsok's Defcription of the Malabar Coast. 149 
 
 Cape Raymas SEbS. about 5 leagues. They lie in latitude 14? 55' N. at the 
 entrance of Carwar, which is a large and deep bay. 
 
 The fettlement of Carwar, which formerly belonged to the Englifh, but 
 now to the Portuguefc, is on the north fide of the bay : the fort is iituated 
 on a hi >h point of land, and is very white; this makes it very conipicuous a 
 great way at fea. When the fort at Carwar, and the Duckey Rocks, are in 
 one, ENE;E. diftance off fhore 3 leagues, and from the rocks 7 or 8 miles, 
 and Cape Raymas NiW. you have then 16 and 1 7 fathoms. In the offing, 
 in 19 and 20 fathoms you will be 32 or 4 leagues off fhore. You have 25 to 
 28 or 30 fathoms, from 5 to 7 leagues off ihore ; fandy ground. Between the 
 Duckey Rocks and Cape Raymas, you have 14, 15 and 16 fathoms, from 5 to 
 7 miles off ihore. 
 
 From Annanore to Cape Raymas, the coaft lies NNWiW, diftance 21 
 leagues; and from Pigeon Ifland, NbWiVV. 22 leagues. It is high and 
 mountainous, but bold and clear of all danger. Cape Raymas (coming 
 either from the northward or fouthward) fhews itfelf a very high, ileep, bluff 
 head-land, and has, on the top thereof, an Indian fortification. It is in 
 latitude 15? 7' N. The variation off it, in 1763, was i° 26' W. I have 
 paffed within 2 miles of this cape, in 1 1 1 and 12 fathoms, regular foundings, 
 fandy bottom. When it bears from EbS. to EbN. 3 or 4 miles diftance, 
 you have from 14 to 153 fathoms ; and 5 miles off this cape, you have 16 and 
 162 fathoms ; and hkewiie 5, 6, or 7 leagues off, you have 30, 36, to 45 fathoms ; 
 from which depth to the ihore it fhoalens gradually. From Pigeon I (land to 
 Cape Raymas, you have 10, 11, 12, or 13 fathoms, from 2 to 3 leagues off 
 fhore. There is a high rock, fome diftance from the fhore, off a point a little 
 to the northward of Cape Raymas. 
 
 From Cape Raymas to Goa, the coaft lies NbW. diftance 8 leagues. The 
 land between them, near the lea, is low and woody ; but at fome diftance in- 
 land it is high. This part of the coaft is clear from danger : you may coaft: 
 it along Ihore, as far as St. George's Ifland, in from 13 to 12, 11, or 10 
 fathoms, recrular foundings, {and andouze; but attemot not to 2:0 between 
 St. George's Ifland and the Continent, there being no pafl'age that war. From 
 Cape Raymas to die outer part of St. George's Ifland, the courfe is NNW|W. 
 diftance 6 or 6± leagues. You have foundings between them, 22 or 3 leagues 
 off fhore, from 17 to 18 fathoms. 
 
 I have paffed feveral times, within 3 or 4 miles of St. George's Ifland, in 
 15 and 15! ftthoms, regular foundings, fandy bottom : this was in the day 
 
 time ;
 
 150 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 time ; but in the night or hazy weather, I would not advife you to go into 
 le s than 18 or 19 fathoms ; in which depth you will pals 5 or 6 miles without 
 it, clear of all danger. You have from 25 to 30, and 35 to 40 fathoms, from 
 
 4 to 6 or 7 leagues without this ifland. Its latitude is 15? 23' N. It may be 
 {cen 6 or j leagues in clear weather. 
 
 A little to the northward of St. George's Ifland lies the Ifland Marmagou 
 Salfet, being a long, high., but level ifland, breaking oft almoft perpendicularly 
 at both ends ; the north point of which is called \Iarmagon Point. When 
 this point and the north part of St. George's Ifland are in one, or touching, 
 they bear NNE, and from this point the Algarda Fort, at the north fide of 
 the entrance into Goa, bears N|E. diftance 7 or 8 miles : you have foundings 
 between them from 16 to 14, 12, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5! fathoms ; in which depth 
 you may °f-> in Goa Road. From the outer part of St. George's Ifland, to the 
 head-land on the north fide the entrance into Goa Bay, which is a high table 
 land, and breaks off with a Hidden flope towards the fea, the courfe is N1E. 
 diftance 3 or 4! leagues. 
 
 CLXXII. Of Go a Road or Bay, Alguarda Fort, the Anchorage, 
 
 Tides and Soundings. 
 
 This head-land being high and level at top, is eafy to be known, there 
 being a church on the inner, and a light-houfe on the outer part of it, in 
 which the Portuguefe keep a light during the S\V. monfoon. The latitude 
 of this head-land is 15? 31' N. and longitude 73? 44' E. from London ; the 
 variation, by feveral obfervations, 1763, 1? 50' \V. Near the light-houfe is a 
 fmall fort, which has a line of communication with the Alguarda Fort, fituated 
 at the foot of the laid high land dole to the fea, which has a great number of 
 guns, and commands all the Bav of Goa. In this fort is the watering-place where 
 fhips get all their water. Oppofite to the Alguarda Fort is the monaltery Noftra 
 Seinora de la Caba, iituate on a hLh, fteep point of land, which makes the 
 iouth fide of Goa Bay. This being a large building, kept very white, and of 
 an elevated iituation, is very confpicuous, may be feen a great way at fea ; 
 and by it Goa may be ealily know n. St. George's Ifland is alio a good mark 
 to know when you are the length of Goa.- 
 
 The Bay of Goa is large and round, but very fhallow water all over it : 
 the deep If water is on the r.orth fide; there you have no more than 5$ or 
 
 5 fathoms at high, and 4J or 4!. at low water ; loft, muddy bottom. It is not 
 only (hallow, .but rocky, on the fouth lide of the bay, towaids Noftra Seinora 
 
 de
 
 Mr. Nichelson's Defcription of the Malabar Coast. 151 
 
 de la Caba, from which there runs out a reef of rocks above water, and under 
 Water : thele fliould be avoided. This bay is a very good road, where fhips. 
 may lie in great fafety during the NE. monfoon ; but in the S\V. monfoon 
 they are expofed to both winds and fea, which then rage with great violence. 
 
 In the beginning, or toward the middle of May, it is reckoned dangerous 
 for fhips to lie in this bay. The Portuguefe then lend inch of their fhips a; 
 can go, into the river, where they lie all the monfoon in great fafety. Such 
 as. cannot get into the river, go and lie for the monfoon at Marmagon Salfet : 
 they moor clofe under that ifland ; there they are flickered from the S5\V. 
 W. and WNW. winds, which are the prevailing winds in that monfoon. 
 They are likewiie pretty well flickered from the fea, though there forfcetimes 
 rolls in a large l'wcll to the road where they lie : this is called Marmagon 
 Road, it being the only place the Portuguefe have for their great fhips to lie 
 in, during the bad-weather feafon. The ground is clear and good °f-> a g e « 
 
 If, coming from the fouthward, you are bound into Goa, being off Marmagon 
 Point in about 15 fathoms, fleer to the northward till you bring the head-land 
 on the north fide of Goa Bay to bear NE. cr the flag-ftafF at the Alguarda 
 Tort ENE. in order to avoid a dangerous flioal of rocks under water * of the 
 way between Marmagon Point and the Monaftery of Noftra Seinora de la Caba. 
 
 You may fleer in for Goa with the Alguarda flag-ftafF: ENE. or EbN. 
 having gradual foundings from 15, 14,' 12, u, 10, 9, 3, 7, 6, 52 : fathoms, in 
 which depth you may +} in Goa Road ; or in I lefs 5 fathoms, the flag-ftaft 
 at the Alguarda Fort NNE. the Monaftery of Noflra Seinora de la Caba SE. 
 and the outer point on the north fide of the bay, NbW. diftance oft fliure ■§- 
 or t mile. 
 
 You may 4-} flili further in, and nearer the Alguarda Fort, in 4* fathoms ; 
 the flag-ftafF bearing; NbE. or N. diftance I or I of a mile; and the entrance 
 into Goa River EbN. or EbNJN. I have <f}ed in a 70 gun ihip, in a very 
 convenient birth fa)- watering with difpatch, the Alguarda Fort N. io?W. 
 diflance a large i or I of a mile, the monaftery Noflra Seinora de la Caba 
 S. 31? 30' E. the entrance of Goa River E. 20? 30' N. and had 5 fathoms at 
 high, and 41 at low water. This is a good birth. 
 
 On the NE. fide of Goa Bay is the entrance of a very luge river, 
 navigable for fhips of 500 or 600 tons, that can go quite up to the city or 
 Goa, which is 7 miles up the river ; but this river is difficult of accels, 
 having a bar acrofs its mouth, which makes the navigation into it very 
 intricate ; therefore a pilot of the place muft be had to carry the (hip in and 
 
 out
 
 152 A New Directory for the East -Indies. 
 
 out. On this bar there are 16 or 1 7 feet at high water, on fpring-tides. 
 The Portuguefe have a fort on the north fide of the entrance of this river, on 
 a high hill ; and a low battery on the fouth fide of the river ; both of which 
 a ihip muff go very clofe to, in entering the river. 
 
 The tide in Goa Road flows at full and change, ENE. and WSW. or at 
 I pail: 4 o'clock ; but always fets out of the river, though it ebbs and flows 
 regularly about 6 feet perpendicular by the more. In the bay, the flood is a 
 kind of ftill water ; for the tide has no motion whilfr. it is flowing, which is 
 about 4 hours. From the time of high water it fets pretty ftrong out of the 
 bay for 7 or 8 hours. 
 
 Goa is the chief fettlement belonging to the Portuguefe in India. It is a 
 large and fpacious city, fituated on the fouth fide of a fpacious river, which 
 it gives name to, 7 miles above its entrance ; it is very populous, and the 
 reiidence of a vice-roy. There is a confiderable trade carried on at this place, 
 but not fo great as formerly ; it is famous for making Goa arrack, in which 
 its trade now principally confifts. There are many .fhips belonging to this 
 place, it being the general rendezvous of the Portuguefe men of war, and all 
 their cruifers, of which they have a great number. They have convenient 
 places up the river for heaving (hips down, and repairing them, at which they 
 are very dexterous. They alio build many ihips here, having plenty of timber 
 for the purpofe. Naval ftores of all kinds may be had here. 
 
 Wood and water may be got here in plenty ; the watering-place is in the 
 Alguarda Fort, where the water is conducted down to your boats in fpouts, 
 to which you fix a hole, and fill your calks with great eafie and difpatch. 
 
 Freih provifions, vegetables and fruits, may be got here ; and alio fome fea 
 provisions, fuch as rice, callivances, arrack, fugar and fome flour. 
 
 Oil Goa you have 9 or 10 fathoms 3 or 4 miles without the Alguarda Fort ; 
 and from 22 to 24 fathoms 3 or 4 leagues off; and from 30 to 3,- fathoms 
 5 or 6 leagues off; and from 60 to 62 fathoms 9 or jo leagues off; and a 
 little without that, 90 fathoms, in which depth you can but juil difcern the 
 land ; all ouzy ground. 
 
 CLXXIII. Of the Vingorla Rocxs, Garia, Rogipore, or Rajapour, 
 
 and the Cape Dobs and Z. 
 
 From Goa to the Vingorla Rocks, the courfe is NWbN. diftance 12 leagues: 
 they are pretty high and bold, clear from all danger; the outermoft part of 
 thefe rocks bearing from Vingorla River, WSW. 4 leagues; and 3 or y r 
 
 leagues
 
 Mr. Nichelson's Defcription of the Malabar Coast, i ^3 
 
 leagues from the continent. They are 12 or 14 in number, and may he feen 
 about 5 leagues from a fhip's deck ; lying in latitude 16? N. It is laid that 
 there is a paflage between thefe rocks and the continent. 
 
 You may coaft it along from Goa in 10, 1 1 or 12 fathoms, from 4 to 6 
 miles off more. You have 15 and 16 fathoms 3 leagues off fhore; and 20, 
 25, ^o to 35 fathoms, from 4 to 6 leagues off ihore. I have patted within 
 2 or 3 miles of thefe rocks in if% fathoms ; and when they bore eaft 5 or 6 
 miles, I have had 18 fathoms. You have from 30 to 35 fathoms, 5 leagues 
 off, when they can but juft be fcen from a large fhip's poop : ouzy ground. 
 I would advife you, if parting thefe rocks in the night-time or hazy weather, 
 not to go under 20 fathoms : this will carry you 25 or 3 leagues without 
 them. 
 
 There is a good road to the fouthward of thefe rocks, where a fhip may 
 cf-^ in cafe the wind blows hard at NW. by bringing the outermoft rock to 
 bear WNW. or WbN. and the extremes of the land to the fouthward, SE. 
 in 12, 13, or 14 fathoms, clear, muddy ground. Here you will lie in very 
 fmooth water, and well lheltered from the NW. fea. 
 
 In the river Vingorla there is a neft of pirates, who are always on the 
 look-out ; they have a great number of gallivats and fome grabs, cruizino- 
 about the Vingorla Rocks, and take fhips of all nations that they can conquer. 
 It is dangerous for fliips of little or no force to come near this place : fuch 
 therefore keep in the offing, out of fight of land, unlefs they have a convoy. 
 
 From the outermoft of the Vingorla Rocks to Gariah or Garey, the 
 courfe is NbWiW. dirtance 13 leagues: the coaft between them is prettv 
 high, and clear of all danger. You may coaft it between them in from 13 to 
 14 fathoms 4 or 5 miles off fhore, to 20 or 21 fathoms 3 or 3I leagues off 
 fhore. You have 25 and 26 fathoms, 5 leagues off fhore; and from 30 to 
 2^ fathoms, 6 or 7 leagues off ihore ; regular foundings and ouzy ground. 
 
 Gariah lies from Goa NNW. diftance 23 leagues, and is iituated on Point 
 Vigiadore, which makes the fouth point of Gariah bay : this is a high bluff 
 point, whereon is a ftrong fort, with very high walls and a great number of 
 guns. This place formerly belonged to Angria, and was his principal port ; 
 but now belongs to the Marattas. The fiag-ftaif" at Gariah is very high, and 
 may be feen a great way at fea. Its latitude is 16? 36' N. the variation off 
 this place, 1763, was 1? 1 6' W. When the flag- fta if bears EbS. 2 or 3 
 miles, you have 11 or 12 fathoms; EIS. 6 or 7 miles, 15! or 16 fathoms ; 
 from EbN. to EbS. $i leagues, 20 fathoms ; and with the fame bearing 6 
 or 7 leagues, from 30 to 33 fathoms, ouzy ground. 
 
 X From
 
 154 & Nczv Directory for the East-Indies- 
 
 From Gariah to Rajapour Ifland the coaft lies NNW. diftance to leagues: 
 this is a fmall but high ifland, covered with trees, and lies but a fmall 
 diftance off" the continent, and 3 or 4 miles to the fbuthward of Rajapour 
 River. Its latitude is 1 7? 3' N. The river has a wide entrance like a large 
 bay, with pretty high land on each fide it. From Gariah to Rajapour the 
 coafl is tolerably high, bold, and clear of danger. You may coaft it alon°- 
 between them in from 14 to 16 and 17 fathoms from 4 to 6 miles off fhore.. 
 You have from 20 to 25 fathoms 4 or 5 leagues off fhore ; and from 25 to 
 30 and 35 fathoms 6, 7, and 8 leagues off more, muddy ground. 
 
 NNW. 7 leagues from Rajapour Ifland, lies Cape Dobs, in latitude 
 17? 23' N. being a high bluff head-land, fhooting out into the fea : the coafl 
 between them is clear of all danger, and bold. You may ftand in to 9 or 10 
 fathoms 2 or 3 miles off fhore, and coaft it along in rz or 13 fathoms 5 or 6 
 miles off fhore. You have 1 6 fathoms 3 leagues off fhore ; 20 fathoms 4 
 leagues off; and from 36 to 40 fathoms 7 or 8 leagues off the land hereabout ; 
 iand and ouze. 
 
 From Cape Dobs the coafl: lies NNW. 5 leagues to Cape Z. in latitude 
 i7?37'N. The variation, 1762, was 44' W. This is a high, fteep, red, 
 head-land, lying out a fmall diftance into the fea. It appears- very white 
 when the fun fhines on it, which, with its being high and fteep, makes it 
 very remarkable. Between thefe capes the coafl: is high and bold : there are 
 feveral openings, like entrances into rivers or harbours. When near the fhore, 
 you may fee Ieveral Indian fortifications. The coaft is clear of all danger, 
 
 1 have ccaired it feveral times clofe in fhore. You may ftand in to 8 or 9 
 fathoms with fafety, i 1 or 2 miles off fhore ; and you may coafl it along in, 
 11, 12, or i 3 Fathoms from 2 to 3 leagues off fhore. You have from 1 7 to 
 20 fathoms 4 or 5 leagues off; and 25 to 30 fithoms 6 or 7 leagues off 
 fhore ; fetid, jmud, and ouze. 
 
 CLXX.1V. O/Dat.ull, Fort Victory, Dunde-Rajapovr, Ciioul, 
 Ucnaky and Kanary Islands, and Bombay. 
 
 From Cape Z. to Dabull the coaft lies NNW. diftance 7 leagues. The 
 land hereabout is high near the fea, but very much higher inland. The coafl 
 is Iv! ,1 auJ clear from danger. You may ftand in to -8 or 9 fathoms, 13 or 
 
 2 miles off fhore ; and may coafl it along in 1 2 or 1 3 fathoms, 4, 5, or (S 
 miles off fhore. You have from 1 7 to 20 fathoms, 4 or 5 leagues off; from 
 25 to 30 fathoms 6 or 7 leagues oil"; and from 35 to 40 ami 45 fathom;.
 
 Mr, Nichelson's Defcnption of the Malabar Coast. 155 
 
 8, 9, or 10 leagues off fhore; find and ouzc in the offing; in fhore, muddy 
 ground.. 
 
 Oppofite to Dahull, the Englifh have lately eftablifhed a factory, and built 
 a fort called Fort Victory, which frauds on a high hill near the Tea, fo that 
 their flag may be ken a great way. Its latitude is 17? 56' N. the variation, 
 1763, was 25" W. To 4-} in the road, bring the fort to bear ESS. and the 
 extremes of land from N|W. to SSE. where you have 7 fathoms water, t 
 miles off fhore. You have 7 or 8 fathoms zl or 3 miles off ; n or 1 2 fathoms 
 5 or 6 miles off; 17 or 18 fathoms 31 or 4 leagues off; 20 fathoms 5 leagues 
 off; and 25 to 30 fathoms 7 or 8 leagues off Fort Victory. 
 
 From Fort Victory to the harbour and river of Dunde-Rajapour the coaft 
 lies NNW. diftance 8 leagues, being high and clear from danger. The 
 land in the country is mountainous, and may be {een a great way in clear 
 weather. You may ftand in to 8 or 9 fathoms muddy ground, 2 miles oft 
 fhore; and coaft it along in n or 12 fathoms 2 or 21 leagues oft more. 
 You have 20 and 22 fathoms 5 or 6 leagues off; 25 to 30 fathoms 7 or 8 
 leagues off ; and from 25 to 4° fathoms 9 or 10 leagues off fhore, ouzy 
 ground ; fbmetimes fand without ouze ; but you will have it muddy in 
 fhore from 15 to 7 fathoms. 
 
 Dunde-Rajapour is reported to be a very fine harbour, fit to receive fhips 
 of any lize : it has a large and wide opening to the .'en, with a fmall ifland 
 near the north fide of the entrance, and high lands on both fides. Its latitude 
 is 18? 17'N. the variation, 1763, was 25' W. 
 
 From the entrance into Dunde-Rajapour, NNWFVV. diftance 7 leagues, 
 lies a fmall low and flat ifland, with an Indian fortification on it, called 
 Choul Ifland, from its lying oft" the town of Choul, in latitude i8?g6'N. 
 The town of Choul is large and coniiderable, as an Indian town ; with a 
 fort built on a little eminence, that may be {ecn 4 or 5 leagues at fea. The coaft 
 between thefc places is foul and rocky fome diftance from the more. I would 
 not advife you to ftand in fhore hereabout nearer than 8 or 9 fathoms ; though 
 I have always found the foundings very regular, and muddy bottom. 
 
 In failing along this part of the coaft you fee many buildings. Near the 
 fea is the high land, called the High Land of Choul ; and in-land are manv 
 hiah and rugged mountains. Oil" Choul there are manv ffhin °- flakes in 
 7 or 8 fathoms 2 or 3 leagues off fhore : I have feveral times failed through 
 them. There are regular tides off this part of the coaft, where it flow s 
 N. and S. or at 12 o'clock, at the full and change of the moon : the flood to 
 
 X 2 the
 
 156 A New Directory for the East-Indies, 
 
 the northward, and the ebb to the fouthward, pretty ftrong tides, which you 
 are to obferve, and take advantage of. You have 8 or 9 fathoms 4 miles 
 off Choul, and may coaft it along more from Dunde-Rajapour in 10 or 
 ii fathoms 2I or 3 leagues off more. You have from 16 to 18 fathoms 
 4 or 5 leagues off; from 20 to 26 fathoms 6 or 7 leagues off; from 
 30 to 36 and 40 fathoms, 8, 9, or 10 leagues off more ; mud, fand, and 
 ouzy ground. 
 
 From Choul Ifland you will plainly fee the lflands Hunary and Kanary j 
 the latter is the outermoft. From Choul Ifland to the Ifland Kanary the 
 courfe is NW. diftance 4' leagues ; between them you may keep in 8, 9, or 
 10 fathoms water, and no danger. Ships do not go between thefe iflands, as 
 the channel is narrow, though I have founded well between them, and found 
 3 and 3 \ fathoms. You may pafs to the wefhvard of Kanary in 6 or 7 fathoms 
 3 or 4 miles off it ; you have 4' or 5 fathoms within a mile of it ; 1 1 or 12, 
 to 15, 16 or 18 fathoms from 3 to 4 or 5 leagues off it; 34 to 36 fathoms to 
 8 or 9 leagues off it ; and 4 to 45 fathoms, io, 11 or 12 leagues off it. The 
 latitude of Kanary is 18? 45' N. The variation off it, 1763, was 1? 39 / W. 
 
 When this ifland is firft leen, at about 5 leagues diilance, either from the 
 northward or fouthward, it appears like 2 rocks or iflands, a fmall diilance 
 afunder, being higher at the extremities than in the middle : by this it may 
 be known. It is fortified all round after the Indian method.. 
 
 From Kanary you may fee Old Woman's Ifland, juft riling out of the 
 water, the outer part thereof bearing N^E. diftance 1 1 miles. You have 7, 8, 
 9, 10, and 10 \ fathoms, regular foundings, between them; muddy bottom. 
 
 There lies a bank parallel to the coaft, of about 11 or 12 leagues in length, 
 
 ' and 3 in breadth ; the fouthernmoft part being in 18? 6'N. and the northern- 
 
 moft part in 1 8? 43' N. I have had 23 fathoms on the fouthernmoft part of 
 
 this bank, 28 fathoms without it, and 27 within it, off fhore 7 or 8 leagues. 
 
 In latitude 1 8? 1 6' N. I have had 30 fathoms without it, 25 fathoms upon it, 
 
 and 29 fathoms within it, off fhore 8 or 9 leagues ; fandy ground. In latitude 
 
 1 8? 28' N. I have had 30 fathoms without it, 26 fathoms upon it, and 32 fathoms 
 
 within it, off fhore 6 or 7 leagues; fandy ground. In latitude i8?43'N. or 
 
 the northenimoil part of this bank, I have had 36 fathoms without it, 
 
 32 fathoms upon it, and 37 fathoms within it, off fhore 8 or 9 leagues ; fandy 
 
 ground. 1 have been informed by fome navigators, that on lome parts of this 
 
 bank they have had only 16 fathoms, gravelly, fhingley bottom, 9 or 10 leagues- 
 
 off the coaft. You have foundings near 20 leagues off this part of the coaft, 
 
 which (fcoalen gradually* as vou run in for the coait, 
 
 CLXXV.
 
 Mr. Niciielson's Defcription of the Malabar Coast. 157 
 
 CLXXV. 0/"Point de Gall, ^ //v Mountains o/"Zeloan. 
 
 The land about Point de Gall or Gaula, is pretty high and hilly ; but to the 
 wefhvard of it, the land is low. The point is bluff to the fea ward, and rifes 
 higher gradually toward the land. A little to the wefhvard of this point, is 
 the Bay or Harbour of Gaula, where the Dutch have a confiderable fcttlement : 
 this has a good appearance from the fea, and is faid to be well fortified. 
 
 The ifland of Zeloan has perhaps fome of the higheft and moft remarkable 
 lands in the world : the firft of thefe, here to be mentioned, is an exceeding 
 high mountain with a peak on the top of it, called Adam's Peak. This moun- 
 tain is fo high, that it is moft frequently hid or covered with the clouds, and 
 therefore is not always feen, but when the weather is clear. It may be feen 
 an incredible diflance at fea ; you frequently fee nothing but its peak above the 
 clouds. In this manner it may be feen, and its bearing taken, 18 or 20 
 leagues off the coafl of Zeloan, when you are going from Point de Gall, and 
 are bound for Cape Comorin. It is faid this mountain is near the middle of 
 the ifland ; but it feems neareft the SW. part thereof. 
 
 There is another high and remarkable hill, fituated on a plain or level part 
 of the country, refembling an hay-cock, from which it takes its name. 
 When this mountain bears NbE'E. and in a line with point de Gall, you are 
 then about 3 leagues from Point de Gall, and there are 30 fathoms water. If 
 you are 4 leagues off with this bearing, there are from 40 to 44 fathoms water. 
 But when Point de Gall's flag-flait bears NW-lN. diflance 3 or 4 leagues, 
 and the hay-cock bears N'E. you will have foundings 33 fathoms brown land. 
 
 Within 3 or 4 leagues oft the fhore, off Point de Gall, the currents are 
 weak ; but 8, o or 10 leagues off, they fet ftrong to the wefhvard. 
 
 The latitude of Point de Gall is 6? 6 N. and longitude 80-? io'E. from 
 London. The variation in the, offing, 1760, was io/W. 
 
 If you would <f-> in good ground in Gaula Road, come no nearer than 18 
 or 20 fathoms water, the flag- flail' bearing between NNE. and NEbN. As to 
 the °b} a ge within the harbour, I need take no notice of it for the reafons above 
 mentioned. 
 
 There are two rocks under water, going into Gaula, upon one of which 
 the water breaks very high ; and to the wefhvard of Gaula there are alio feveral 
 {haggling rocks under water, on which thr fea breaks very high. You ought 
 «ot to come under 25 fathoms hereabout. 
 
 CLXXVL
 
 ijS A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 CLXXVI. 0/"Woody Island, Red and Matura Bays, Dunder-head, 
 
 NlVELLE, and NlEBWELL. 
 
 The Coaft from Point de Gall to Red bay lies about EbS. 5^ or 6 leagues ; 
 and about a league to the wefhvard of this Bay is a fmall ifland covered with 
 trees, called Woody Ifland. To the caftward of this Bay are high land-;. 
 
 From Red Point, (which is the eaflernmoft point of Red Bay) to Matura, 
 the coaft lies EbS. about 3 leagues. Matura is a Dutch fettlement, having a 
 fmall fort, which may be feen a great way at fea, bearing from NN\V. to NE. 
 as the coaft is pretty high hereabout. 
 
 Matura Bay is very open ; but you may oj-^ before Matura, and ride fmooth 
 enough there, in the NE. monfoon, in 22 or 20 fathoms ; fand mixed with 
 ihells and ouze ; Matura Ifland bearing NElN. and Dunder-head NEbE. or 
 ENEofffhore about 2 miles. Under 20 fathoms, in Matura Road, is foul 
 ground, unlefs in fome fmall fpots, which the Dutch fhips are acquainted with. 
 Here you may get plenty of wood and good water. 
 
 Matura Ifland is imall and rocky, much refembling a hay-cock, and lies 
 oppofite the fort : behind the ifland is a good flicker for boats, where they 
 come to 4->, as they cannot land on account of the furf, and the fhallownels 
 of water. The Dutch fend off canoes, to carry people out of the boats on 
 ihore. 
 
 The entrance of the river is about \ a mile to the wefhvard of the fort. 
 Boats go into the river a fmall diftance to fill water, which is very good ; but 
 the entrance of the river is dangerous by rocks which lie under water, and the 
 outfet of the river is very ftrong ; fo that, if the boats ihould touch on thefe 
 rocks, they would be in danger of being overfet, and the people drowned : 
 it is therefore befl to have the country people to pilot them in and out ; and 
 then you may water here very expeditioufly. 
 
 Matura Fort bearing NNW. and Dunder-head N!\V. 3 leagues, there are 
 no foundings at 90 fathoms. 
 
 From Red Point to Dunder-head the courfe is EbS-S. diftance about 4I 
 leagues ; and from Matura to Dundcr-hcad it is Kcckoned SEIE. 4 or 5 miles. 
 Off Dunder-head there lies a ledge of rocks, ftretching out to the gWbW. 
 about ii mile, upon which 1 have feeh the lea break very high. As far as I 
 could judge from appearances, great fhips ihould not come within 25 fathoms, 
 the foundings being very uncertain hereabout. Dunder-head is a low point of 
 land, its extremity being very low, -and having on it a large chiller of high 
 cocoa-nut trees, which makes it eafilj known. 
 
 The
 
 Mr. Nichelson's Description of the Malaba* Coast. 
 
 The Red Cliffs a pretty high remarkable land, clofe to the fea, a little to 
 the eafhvard of Dunder-head) bearing NEIE, and the extremes of the Ian ; 
 the weftward NW|W. off ihore about 3 leagues; there are no foundings at 
 100 fathoms. The coaft is very fteep hereabout. 
 
 A little further to the eafhvard of Dunder-head is the point Gaelies, an high 
 fteep land, with trees on it by which it may be known. 
 
 Nivelle is a place of fome trade ; it may be known by a pretty high fteep 
 point on the weft fide of it : there is on this point a large white building with 
 a cupola, which makes it very remarkable. Off this place you will have 31 
 fathoms, 4 miles off fhore : here I faw a large Dutch {hip lying in the roach 
 You will have 52 fathoms between 2 and 3 leagues off Ihore ; without that 
 no foundings. Off Nivelle in 32 fathoms water, in latitude 5? 49/N. diftance 
 off fhore 4 or 5 miles, you will fee Gaelies Point bearing WbN. diftance 5 or 
 6 leagues. 
 
 Between thefe two laft mentioned places there is a bay, called Niebwell or 
 Nielwell Bay : the weft point thereof appears like an ifland ; it has a row of 
 very high cocoa-nut. trees from the one end to the other, by which it may be 
 known. This point bearing NE. diftance 3 leagues, there are no foundings 
 at 50 fathoms. 
 
 CLXXVII. Of the Soundings between the Coast and Great Basses. 
 
 Between Dunder-head and the Great Bafles there is deep water near the 
 coaft : you will not have foundings any where along this part of the coaft above 
 
 2 leagues from the fhore, and in fome places not above 2 or 3 miles off fhore ; 
 therefore let none trait to their foundings along this part of the coait in the 
 night-time, but keep a good look-out, 
 
 Ships that fail along this part of the coaft, in the SW. monfoon, have no 
 bufinefs in Ihore after they pais by Dunder-head, or the Red Cliffs ; but, as 
 they have a fair wind, they always fhape a courfe from thence to go clear of 
 the Great Baffes. Ships in the NE. monfoon, being off the Bafles, and bound 
 weftward, having alio a fair wind, fhape a courfe from thence to the Red Chris 
 or Dunder-head. A WbS. courfe from the Great Bafles, diftance iS leagues, 
 will bring them fair with Dunder-head, Within 4 or 5 leagues of it ; but truft 
 not too much to your courfe, for the current lets ftrong to the SW. and will 
 fet you off the land ; therefore keep the fhore clofe aboard. Within 2 or 
 
 3 leagues, there is no danger. 
 
 Ships
 
 160 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Ships taking their departure (as it were) from the above-mentioned places, 
 in the different monfoons, and fhaping their courfe as above mentioned, make 
 this part of the coaft, between thefe places, very little frequented. 
 
 I have been more than once coming this way in the month of October, 
 and beginning of November, and have met with ftrong wefterly winds, 
 which obliged me to keep in with the land, and coaft it along more : this 
 gave me an opportuniry of feeing and founding the coaft. There is no place 
 of note between the Baffes and Dunder-head ; but there are feveral places 
 where the Dutch coafting veflels frequent, of little or no confequence. 
 
 The coaft between Dunder-head and the Great Baffes lies nearly ENE. and 
 WSW. diftance 17 or 18 leagues : in this diftance the more is fteep, and 
 tolerably high near the fea, but much higher in-land. In moft places you 
 have from 30 to 36 and 40 fathoms water, 3 or 4 miles off the (hore ; and 
 in fome places you will find the water deepen, the nearer you go to the fhore ; 
 all foul rocky ground. There are no foundings without 50 fathoms, and you 
 will have that depth not above 6 or 7 miles off (hore ; fo that there is no 
 dependence on the foundings. There is foul ground and rocks, in fome places 
 full two miles off the fhore. 
 
 It is reckoned 20 leagues from Dunder-head to the Great Baffes. The 
 Englifh Pilot and the New Directory differ much in regard to the coaft. The 
 Englifh Pilot fays you fhould fleer ESE, and the Directory, that you fhould 
 fteer Eaft, which will carry you 8 leagues to the fouthward of the Great 
 Bafles ; and that he takes to be fufficient for the fet of current to the northward ; 
 but that you fhould take care to found from time to time. I muft beg leave to 
 differ fiom them both in regard to the true courfe from Dunder-head to the 
 Great Baffes ; it being my opinion, that a fhip 2 or 3 leagues off Dunder-head, 
 may with great fafety fteer EbN. which will carry her 4 or 5 leagues without 
 the Great Baffes. The currents are very changeable, and as often fet to the 
 weftward as to the eaftward, and much oftener to the fouthward than to the 
 northward, moftly lbuth-wefterly ; and take this caution in regard to the 
 diftance. 
 
 Though it is 20 leagues from Dunder-head to the Great Bafles, vet, when 
 you reckon you have failed 15 or 16 leagues, you will be oppoiite to it; 
 feveral fhips have even thought they had got no further than 1 2 or 13 leagues. 
 This bbfervatiori is worth attending to, as well for fhaping your courfe, as for 
 the diftance. 
 
 I have been feveral times cruizing off the Friar's Mood and the Baffes in the 
 months of July and Auguft, being the very height of the SW. monfoon, and 
 
 always
 
 Mr. Nichelson's Defcripiion of the South Coast o/*Zeioan". i 6 i 
 
 always found ftrong fbuth-weftefry currents, which have let the (hip 40, 50, 
 65, or 75, miles to the (buthward or (buth-weftward, in 24. hours more th; u 
 the run (by log) gave. I have alio coafted it this way in the months of 
 October, November, and December, being the beginning and the middle of 
 the NE. monfoon ; and have found the current on an average, run 24 and 30 
 miles (and fome days 60 or 70 miles) more to the (buthward than the run 
 would give. In the months of February, March, and April, I have found a 
 itrong fouthern or fouth-weitcrly current ; but not io ftrong as in the fore- 
 mentioned months ; and in general, about the Friar's Iluod and Bafles, the 
 currents run more or lefs to the (buthward or fouth-weftward all the year round. 
 I have tried the current feveral times, in light of the Bafles, and alio in fight 
 of the Friar's Hood, and found it let to the SWbW. SW. or SVVbS 2 and 2| 
 knots ; which will fufficiently (hew the (trength and fet of the current about 
 this part of the Coaft of Zeloan. 
 
 CLXXVIII. Of the Great Basses, the Elephant, Little Basses, 
 
 Chimney and Pagoda Hii.ls. 
 
 The Great Bafles are a clufter of rocks, extending about 1 ' mile in length, 
 and as much in breadth : the fea breaks very high on them, and fome of them 
 are a considerable height above water. You muft give them a good birth, 
 and come no nearer them than 34 or 35 fathoms, or, in the night, than 40 
 fathoms. They lie about 3 leagues off fliore. It is laid there is a channel 
 within them. The latitude of the Great Bafles is 6? ic/N and longitude 81? 
 45'E. from London ; the variation 25' eafterly, for 1760. 
 
 The Elephant is a remarkable high rock near the lea, and ferves as a fca- 
 mark, &c. for there being no other hill or rock near, it is very confpicuous ; 
 and, -as its fituation is clofe to the fea, it may be feen at a great diltance 
 either from the northward or fouthward. It bears from the Great Bafles N^W. 
 about 3 leagues. 
 
 When the Great Bafles and Elephant were in a line, N|W. about 3 miles 
 from the Bafles, we had 35 fathom water, coarfe brown fand, with (hells. 
 Chimney Hill then bore NNE. about 4 leagues. When the Elephant and 
 Great Bafles were in a line diftant from the Bafles 5 or 6 miles, we had 38 
 fathoms, coarfe brown land with (hells. The Elephant bearing N^E. and 
 the Great Bafles NbE^E. 4 or 5 miles, diltance offfhore about 3 leagues, we 
 had 39 fathoms, brown find and (hells. We founded every quarter of an 
 hour, and, as we were {landing WNW. the next cad had 25 fathoms ; then 
 
 Y 14 fathoms
 
 \Gz A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 14 fathoms, brown {and: tacked fhip to the outhward, the Great Bafles 
 bearing NNE. 4 or 5 miles, and the diftance off fhore 5 or 6 miles. I would 
 therefore advife the keeping further off fhore hereabout. The Elephant NbW. 
 about 5 leagues, we had 50 fathoms, brown land. The Great Bafles NjE. 
 about 3 leagues, we had 34 fathoms, dark-grey land. 
 
 By working the courfe and diftance from the Great to the Little Bafles, by 
 fleering NE^E. and SW'W. you fail no further from one than the other, 
 and coniequently they bear thus one from the other ; the diffance about 7 
 leagues. You may coaft it along between the Bafles, about 3 \- or 4 leagues 
 offfhore, in 35 or 36 fathoms water ; though there is no trufting to foundings 
 hereabout. 1 
 
 The Little Bafles are rocks under water, no part of them being feerf ; but 
 the fea generally breaks on them very high. Should the lea be fo uncom- 
 monly fmooth as not to break on them, keep the Elephant W ^ or ^ N. until 
 you bring Chimney Hill to bear WNWjW. you will then be clear to the 
 northward of them. By the appearance of the breakers they may be about a 
 mile in length, and as much in breadth : they feem to lie about 2 or ^\ 
 leagues from the fhore ; are the more dangerous as there is deep water clofe to 
 them, having no ground with 30 fathoms, and the next caff 16 fathoms, 
 within half a mile of the breakers. 
 
 To know when you are near the Little Bafles, there is a pretty high peaked 
 hill on the fhore, near the fea, without any other bill near it ; on the north 
 fide of which, near the top, there is a remarkable rock, reicmbling a 
 chimney, which occafions its having the name of Chimney Hill. When 
 Chimney Hill is on with the Breakers of the Little Bafles, it bears exactly 
 N\V. and when the breakers of the Little Bafles and the Elephant are in one, 
 they bear W[S. 
 
 When Chimney Hill bore WbN. and the Little Bafles SW. diftance off 
 fhore 7 or 8 miles, we had 19 fathoms water; tacked to the eafhvard, and 
 m ide our way about ESE. 4 miles, and had no ground with 50 or 60 fathoms 
 of line; at the lame time tried the current , and found it fet SWbW. 1 \ knot. 
 
 A little to the northward of the Chimney Hill, and in-land, is another hill, 
 not quite lo high, which has upon the top, or near the top, on the north 
 fide of it, a rock rifing up in the lame manner as that on Chimney Hill, but 
 much larger, refembling a pagoda, or rather a caflle. It is not to be diftin- 
 guifhed from other hills, but by this mark. When Chimney Hill bears NW. 
 it is then touching the north foot or part thereof; and when Chimney Hill 
 
 bears
 
 Mr. Nichelson's Defcription of the South Coast of Zeloan. 163 
 
 bears NW-fN. The Pagoda Hill is fhut in witn it. The land hereabout is an 
 high broken land ; it hath many hills, and is mountainous. 
 
 CLXXIX. Of Juuus Nave, the Fkiar's Hood, False Hood, Acuin 
 
 Peak, jw/Batacalo River. 
 
 There is an high white fandy point, clofe to the fea, called Julius Nave, 
 bearing about NNW4VV. from the Little Bafles, and diftance about 3 or 3'- 
 ieagues. 
 
 There are a great number of remarkable mountains in-land on this part of 
 the Ifland Zeloan ; but the higheir, and moft remarkable, is called the Friar's 
 Hood, on account of its rcfembling, at its extremity, a friar's hood ; but it 
 makes only in this form whilfl it bears from W. to S. When it bears NW. 
 or WNW. its peak is like the top of a pyramid. 
 
 The Friar's Hood is a part of Zeloan, which mips often fall in with, and 
 as often take their departure from: the latitude is 7? 1 6'N. in 22 fathoms, 
 about 2 or 3 leagues off more, and the Friar's Hood bearing nearly weft. 
 The longitude of the fea-coaft, in the parallel of the Friar's Hood, is 82? S'E. 
 from 'London. The current fel SbE. 1 knot. The variation was 35' cafterly 
 in 1760. 
 
 There is another mountain fouthward of the former, which is not quite fo 
 high, and is called the Falfe Hood, as it bears a great refemblanee to the true 
 Hood, and is fometimes miftaken for it. 
 
 Being 4, 5, or 6 miles off the Little Bafles, you may fleer NNE. 9 or 10 
 leagues, keeping in 30 to 25 fathoms. This courfe and diftance will bring 
 you a-breaft of a hillock, near the lea-fide, called Aguin, or Aganis f I , 
 which has a fmall peak like a tower ; and a little to the northward of the faid 
 peak, but further in- land, lie 2 fmall hummocks near each other. 
 
 Aguin is the laft high land you fee near the fea, until you come to Trin- 
 kamalay ; the land all the way between them being one entire low and fiat 
 plain, both to fea-ward and invland. Nothing remarkable is to be feen but the 
 Sugar-Loaf Hill, which is a great way in the country, and feems to be in the 
 middle of the plain. Two other fmall hills are much farther in the country 
 than the Su°;ar-Loaf. 
 
 When the Pagoda Hill and the Peak of Aguin are in one line, WbS. diftance 
 off more about 3 leagues ; the extremes of land to the northward bore N|W. 
 and we had 20 fathoms water. 
 
 Being 2'f or 3 leagues off Aguin Peak, you may fleer N^E. or a N. courfe, 
 along more, in between 20 and 25 fathoms water. The diflance from Aguin 
 
 Y 2 Peak
 
 164 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Peak to ' Batacola, is 18 or 19 leagues; you find nothing remarkable between 
 them, the land bein^ all extremely low and flat,, as above mentioned. The 
 currents hereabout little or none ; fometimes letting to the northward, and 
 ibmetimes to the louthward. 
 
 You may coaft it along fhore, from the Little Bafles to Batrcalo River, 
 at the diltance of 5, 6, or 7 miles.; and have foundings from 40 to 30, and 
 from 30 to 20, and fometimes 17 or 1 S fathoms ; but moftly between 25 and 
 30 fathoms. 
 
 No regard fhould be paid to the irregular foundings in this part of the Ifland 
 Zeloan, There are holes in feveral places, having from 1 8 to 20 fathoms, and 
 fuddenly to 60 or 70 fathoms ; Ibmetimes ioo fathoms, or perhaps no ground; 
 and afterwards in 2 or 3 carts, to 40, 30, 25, or 20 fathoms. Thole who 
 coaft it about this ifland, ought to obferve this, and not to be furprifed at it, 
 nor at the currents, which fometimes fet on fhore, as well as off lhore. 
 
 Batacalo is known by the mouth of a fmall river, which you cannot fee 
 till you are to the northward of it. It is very narrow, turns fhort round to 
 the fouthward, and is parallel to the beach along fhore- On the north fide of 
 the entrance, the Dutch have a fmall factory-noufe, with a flag-ftaff on it, by 
 which alio this place may be known. The land hereabout is very low. 
 When the Friar's Hood bears SW^W. you are off Batacalo. 
 
 I have palled Batacalo feveral times in the day-time, within 2 or 3 miles 
 of it, and had 19, 20, and 22 fathoms water, but faw nothing of the reef 
 that both the Englifh and French talk fo much of. We kept our lead con- 
 ftantly going, and a good look-out with fair weather and fmooth water ; yet 
 law frothing of it. 
 
 CLXXX. Of Vkndelos- Bay, the Sugar Loaf, Provedien Isi.e, Foul 
 Point, Trinkamalay Bay, Pigeon Is-lano, and ^\Iollv. Wall. 
 
 From Batacalo to Vendelos Bay, the coaft lies NWbN. diltance about 9 
 les; the land between them is low and woody. Small fhips may coaft it 
 in 10 or 12 fathoms; but great fhips muft keep out in 20 or 25 fathoms, 2 or 
 q leagues off more; this will cany them clear of all danger. 
 
 7 ndelos is a fmall bay, on the north fide of a frecp rocky point of Imd : 
 it may be known by a finall hillock, which lies a long way iu-Lind, and fe 
 to be in the middle of the plain, as before mentioned : this hillock is called 
 the Sugar Ixxtf, from the great refemhlance it has to the top of a fu "ar-loaf 
 broke oil". When the Sugar-Loaf bears W»S. you are oil" Vendelos 11' v. 
 
 South u and
 
 >r'j D'Jlription of i he South Coast o^Zeloan. 165 
 
 Southward of the Sugar-Loaf", at fbme diftance, are 2 or 3 other hillocks ; 
 but they are further in the country, as before mentioned 
 
 Ships bound to the northward in the §W. monfoon, mould keep this coaft 
 clofe on board ; for, if once they get off from the Lnd, they will nut eafily 
 regain it. In more hereabout is little or no current; but if a (hip once gets 
 off from the land, Hie will find a ftrong current letting to the NNE. which 
 will prevent getting hold of the land again. 
 
 From Vendelos Bay to the Ifland Provedien or Providence, the courfe is 
 NNW.W. or NNW^YV. 3^ leagues: the land between them lies rounding in 
 a bight ; and the ground all along foul, which makes it bid anchoring, 
 Hereabout the foundings are irregular, ihoaling or deepning 2 or 3 fithoms 
 at a caff In more here, the bottom rocky, and the foundings irregular, from 
 22 to 17 fathoms, 4 or 5 miles off fhore. Keeping in between 20 and 24 
 fathoms, 2 or 3 leagues off more, carries you clear of all danger. 
 
 The Iiland Provedien is a white rock clofe to the more, and makes like the 
 fail of a fampan ; fo that it may be eafily known. It appears like a iail when 
 3 or 4 miles off it. The coaft hereabout is low and woody ; to the lea- ward 
 it is ffecp ; iron-coloured rocks. The coaft continues foul for 3 or 4 leagues 
 further to the northward. 
 
 From the Ifland Provedien to the SE. point of the great Bay of Trinkamalav, 
 (fometimes called Foul Point, or the Point of Cataris) the courfe is NNWi-W. 
 diftance 7 or 8 leagues. The coaft is. low and woody, and there is a fine 
 white fandy beach all the way between thefe places. By keeping in from 
 18 to 22 fathoms, 3 or 4 miles off fhore, you go clear of all danger. 
 
 From Batacalo to the SE. point of the great Bay of Trinkamalav, or Foul 
 Point, the coaft lies NNW-^W. diflance 18 or 19 leagues. Being 3 or 4. 
 miles off Batacalo, by fleering this courfe it will carry you clear of all danger; 
 or keeping in between 20 and 25 faihoms, you will pal's 3, 4, or 5 miles 
 from the fhore. 
 
 Foul Point is low and even, covered with trees. Three or four leaeues to 
 the fuuthward of this Point is good oj-^age, about z miles off ihore, in 14 or 15 
 fathoms water; and no danger if vou 2,0 into 10 or 12 fathoms. A clear 
 fandy bottom from 4 leagues all die way to the point. From Fold Point 
 there is a dangerous fhoal runs out to the NNE. at leaft a mile and a quarter,, 
 being all rocky and foul ground, which gives it the name of Foul Point.* 
 Come no nearer this Point than 14 or 15 fathoms. When round Ifland is a 
 fid's breadth open to the fouthward of Marble Point, you are clear of all danger 
 off Foul Point. 
 
 From
 
 166 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 From Foul Point to the Flag-ftafF Point at Trinkamalay, the Coaft is 
 NW'W. diftance 8 or 9 miles. You will carry foundings from Foul Point 
 I of the way toward the Flag-daft Point from 15, 20, 30, 3$, and 40 fathoms; 
 then no ground, until you come within a mile of the Flag-ftafF Point, when 
 you will have foundings at 45 or 50 fathoms, and fhoal gradually as you 
 approach the fhore. 
 
 The Flag-ftaft Point at Trinkamalay, is a very high, fteep bluft point; at 
 the top thereof the Dutch hoift a flag, which may be {een a great way at fea. 
 There is no danger near this point : you have 17 or 18 fathoms within a fhip's 
 length of it. 
 
 Being 3 or '4 miles to the eaftward of the Flag-ftafF Point, a NNW courfe 
 will carry you clear of Pigeon Ifland, which you may pafs at 2 or 3 miles 
 diftance, in 22 or 23 fathoms. The diftance between Flag-ftafF Point and 
 Pigeon Ifland is 12 or 13 miles. 
 
 From the land a-breaft Pigeon Ifland to Point Pedra, the coaft lies NWbN. 
 a little wefterly, diftance 25 or 26 leagues ; the coaft low and even, covered 
 with trees ; and good clear cj-^ing-ground all the way : but you muft be careful 
 of feveral ihoals that lie off this part of the coaft. 
 
 The fTioal of Molle Wall lies 3 leagues oft" Ihore, with 3 and 2 * fathoms 
 water upon it. Between Molle Wall and Point Pedra there is another fhoal, 
 about 2 leagues off fhore, with only 2 fathoms ; and EbN. 2 '. or 3 leagues off" 
 Point Pedra, lies a dangerous rock, with only 9 feet water on it ; alfo a bank 
 of fand 3 ' or 4 leagues off fhore, with very unequal foundings on it. It is 
 dangerous for fhips to come near it ; therefore you fhould be very cautious in 
 failing along this part of the coaft, and keep your lead conftantly going. 
 
 From Pigeon Ifland, to clear the fhoal of Molle Wall, the courfe is NNW. 
 10 or 11 leagues, taking care to keep in from 18 to 20, 22 or 24 fathoms. 
 Having run NNW. 10 or 11 leagues, and you are in 19, 20, or 22 fathoms, 
 you may then fteer NNWf W. or NWbN. 14 or 15 leagues, according as 
 you find yon deepen or fhoalen your water, taking care to keep in from 
 20 to 24 or 25 fathoms; having as much regard to the depth of water as the 
 cour.'e fteered. The above courfe, diftance, and depth of water, will run you 
 clear of all danger from, and bring you a-breaft of Point Pedra. 
 
 CLXXXI. Of Point Pedra and Negapatnam. 
 
 Point Pedra is very low land, with only fhrubs and brufhes on it. It runs 
 out into the lea in fucb a manner, that at lbmc diftance it looks like the wrecks 
 
 of
 
 Mr. Nichels n s Defcription of the South Coast o/"Zeloan. 167 
 
 of old fhips in the water. In this manner I have feen it very plain from the 
 deck; (being becalmed a little to the lbuthward of Point Podia) we had no 
 ground with • oo fathoms of line ; but lading, in half an hour we had 50 
 fathoms, and then 40 fathoms. Soon after there coming on a light air at 
 north, we flood WNW. 4 miles, and had from 40 to 30, 20 and 15 fathom-, 
 and when in the latitude of about 9? 30' N. the extremes of the land bore 
 from WbNf N. to S. diftance off fhore about 3 leagues: we then fleered out 
 NNE. till we deepened our water to 20 fathoms : then fleered NNW. till 
 we had 26 fathoms: then NNW|\V. till we had 30 fathoms: then fleering 
 NW. and NWbW. for Negapatnam, had no foundings. 
 
 The latitude of Point Pedra is 9? 48' N. the longitude So? 31' E. from 
 London; the variation 25' eafterly, 1760. 
 
 Being a-breaft of Point Pedra, in 20 or 24 fathoms you will foon deepen 
 your water to 28, 30, 35, 40 and 50 fathoms; and then no ground. When 
 you have deepened your water to 30 or ^S fathoms, you may haul up NW. 
 orN'vYbW. in order to get hold of the Coromandel Coafl, about Negapatnam; 
 and about mid-way you willlofe foundings. The courfe and diflance between 
 them is N 42? W. 27 or 28 leagues. 
 
 In crolfing from Zeloan to the Coafl of Coromandel, fhips fhould be very 
 careful to keep well to the weflward, and make the land about Negapatnam, 
 on account of the weflerly winds which blow very flrong off this Coafl, in 
 the SW. monfoons, and prevent fhips making the coafl; and frequently very 
 flrong northerly currents will horfe a fhip to the northward in a furp riling 
 manner. Many fhips, by not obferving this precaution, have been driven to 
 the northward of their deligned port, before they could get hold of the coaft ; 
 by which means they have loft a great deal of time, and have been put to 
 many inconveniencies. 
 
 We always, by obferving the directions above, fell in exactly with Nega- 
 patnam. I have feen. -from the deck, the flag on the high black pagoda, a 
 little to the northward of the town, called the Chinefe Pagoda, in 1 4 or 13 
 fathoms, bearing WNW. 5 or 6 leagues : this is the fir ft thing to be feen near 
 this part of the coafl, the land being very low, though it is covered with trees. 
 To the fouthward of the town is a thick wood, higher than the reft of the 
 trees along this part of the coafl. 
 
 The higheft of the five pagodas, which are to the northward of Negapatnam, 
 is very high, and being white, may be feen a great way at lea. I have feen it 
 much about the fame diftance as the former, bearing WNW. in 14 fathoms; 
 
 when
 
 i68 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 when firft feen, they look like fo many fail of fhips. I have feen the land 
 about Negapatnam, from the mail-head, in 35 fathoms. Without 40 fathoms 
 you have no foundings; and from 36 to 40 fathoms, or no foundings, it is 
 not more than 2 or 3 miles. 
 
 Negapatnam is the moil confiderablc place belonging to the Dutch on the 
 coaft. of Coromandel ; it has a coniiderabic trade, though very few vefiels 
 belonging to the place. The fort is a fquare, regularly fortified ; and has a 
 good ditch, with water, furrounding it. The town lies to the northward of 
 the fort ; and to the fouthward of the fort is the mouth of a fmall river, 
 capable of receiving fmall country vefiels. On the north fide of the entrance 
 of this river is a batterry of 14 guns, to which boats, that enter the river, 
 muff, go within the length of their oars ; and the landing place is clofe to it. 
 There is a bar at the mouth of the river, which, in bad weather, breaks very 
 much, and makes it dangerous for boats to go over it. 
 
 We uled to 4-^ in Negapatnam Road in 7 fathoms, clear and good holding 
 ground; the flag itaff bearing W~S. and the higheft of the five pagodas NW<N. 
 off ihore 2 £ or 3 miles. The watering-place is about ' a mile up the river, 
 at a great tank, entirely commanded by the fort. It would be both trouble- 
 ibme and tedious watering here, without the afliitance of the natives, and 
 their boats. Freih provilions for prefent ufe may be had here, with other 
 refreihments, vegetables, fruit, &c. fufficient to fupply a fquadron of men of 
 war ; but no kind of fea proviiion, except rice ; and fire wood is a fcarce arti- 
 cle. The latitude of Negapatnam is 10? 50'N. and longitude from London) 
 80? o'E. the variation 30'W. 1760. 
 
 The ihore is very flat off Negapatnam. I have been told, that when Ne- 
 gapatnam Flag-itaff bears NNW. about 3 leagues, there is a fhoal with only 
 3 fathoms water on it : I never could find it ; it is belt to keep your lead 
 going, and a good look-out. There is lefs current off this part than any other 
 of the Coaft of Coromandel ; the current generally goes with the wind, and 
 increafes as you go to the northward. 
 
 CLXXXII. O/'Calderoon, Karvcal, Trankabar, and Porta Nova. 
 
 From Negapatnam to Calderoon the coaft lies north and fouth, 13 or 14 
 leagues; is low, woody, and all the way free from danger, till you come to 
 Calderoon ; with regular foundings as you approach the ihore. There are no 
 foundings without 45 and 50 fathoms : beyond that depth the bank goes off 
 fudlcnly to no foundings. In that depth you will be 6 or 7 leagues off the 
 
 land.
 
 Mr. Nichelson's Dcfcripiion of the South Coast o/'ZeLoan. i6g 
 
 land. In 40 fathoms you \\\\\ be about 5 leagues off; and it fhoalens gradually 
 toward the (bore to 10 or 1 1 fathoms ; then you will be about 3, 4, or c 
 miles off more. You may coaft it all the way in 11 or 12 fathoms, at about 
 2 leagues off more, till you come to the reef of Calderoon ; then you muft 
 keep out in 14 or 15 fathoms, there being 12 fathoms clofe to the reef. 
 
 About 4 leagues northward of.Negapatnam is the river Karycal, where the 
 French had a fettlement, which was taken by the Englifh in the year 1760. 
 It has a very high flag-ftaff, by which it may be known. 
 
 Two leagues to the northward of Karycal is Trankabar, the chief fettlement 
 belonging to the Danes in the Eaft-Indies. The fort is remarkably white, 
 by which it may be known at a diftance. 
 
 In failing along fhore to the northward, between Trankabar and Cal- 
 deroon, you will fee two fmall pagodas near each other, in-land, up in the 
 country. 
 
 Calderoon is known by a thick bufhy wood, clofe to the fea, which appears 
 higher than any of the land thereabout. At a diftattce at fea it appears like a 
 low ifland, whole greateft height is in the middle, and its extremities low ; 
 by this it may be known. j 
 
 At the back of Calderoon Wood are 4 very large high pagodas, called the 
 Chalambarang Pagodas. Thefe pagodas, when they appeared juft touching 
 the fouth part of Calderoon Wood, bore W^N. at the fame time we had 
 25 fathoms about 3 leagues oti fhore. When they appeared on the middle of 
 the wood they bore due Weft, by which Calderoon may be known :■ bur, 
 if you are well in fhore, the wood will prevent your feeing the pagodas, till 
 you open them to the northward ; then they will bear WbS^S. 
 
 The north part of Calderoon Wood forms a point of land, occafioned by the 
 River Divecotei coming out here, efpecially when you come from the fouth- 
 ward, and fail near fhore ; becaufe the coaft, whofe direction was hitherto 
 North, forms an elbow here, "and trenches away NNW. ' W. and NVVbN. 
 3 I leagues as far as Porta Nova. 
 
 From the mouth of Divecotei River extends a bank or fhoal, which reaches 
 42 or 5 miles from the fhore, and ftretching along to the fouthward, joins 
 to the fhore about the fouth part of Calderoon Wood; this is called Calde- 
 roon Shoal. This fhoal is fteep to and dangerous; fo that from 1 1 or 12 fathoms 
 you will, in fome places, fall fuddenly into 3 or 4 fathoms. I have feveral 
 times flood well in with this fhoal, and had a good view of it : a great part 
 of it is dry, and the fea generally breaks very high upon it. I have flood in 
 
 Z the
 
 170 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 the day-time into ill or 12 fathoms, fecmingly about a mile from it; and a 
 floop, a fmall distance a-head of us,, had only 4 fathoms* on which we tacked 
 immediately. I would not advife a great fhip to come nearer this fhoal than 
 15 or 16 fathoms in the night, nor 13 or 14 in the day.. 
 
 His Majefty's fhip Falmouth narrowly efcaped being loft on this fhoal, in 
 the night : they were ftanding in for it, and intended to tack in 1 2 fathoms ; 
 but miffing ftays, they were in 4! fathoms before they could put about, 
 and were obliged to 4-} : in the morning, the weather being moderate, they 
 warped off, and came to fail. 
 
 I have been in 114 fathoms about 1* mile off the north part of this fhoal, 
 when the flasj-ftaffat Porta Nova bore WbN'N. and the two middlemofl of 
 the four Chalambaransr Pagodas in one, WSW. Then I could fee numbers of 
 black people on the fhoal, fifhing. This is a pretty good mark for the north 
 part of this fhoal : but a fhip bound into Porta Nova muft bring the two 
 middlemofl pagodas open to the northward, to bear WSW7S. and at the fame 
 time Porta Nova flag-ftaff" WbNiN. Then you are clear to the north part 
 of the fhoal (which lies about 5 miles off fhore) and may hawl it in for Porta 
 Nova; or, if in 18 or 20 fathoms, you may hawl in for it when the flag-ftaff 
 bears WNW. and when the fouthernmoft of the Chalambarang Pagodas is 
 on with the fouth part of Calderoon Wood, you then are a-breaft of the 
 fouth part of this fhoal ; but this does not lie fir off fhore. Note, the water 
 fhoalens fafter on ftanding in toward Calderoon, and deepens fafter in ftand- 
 ing off it, than any other part of the coaft. 
 
 Porta Nova is an Indian town of confiderable trade, where the Dutch have 
 a factory, on which they hoift their flag. Here is a fmall river navigable only 
 for fmall country veflels : frefh water is filled out of a tank, a little way up 
 the river ; but it is bad and brackifh, as.feveral of our men of war experienced. 
 They came up from Cuddalore to this place to water; but found the bad 
 effedls of it, from its giving the people the flux. 
 
 Porta Nova Road is by much the fmootheft and fafeft on all the Coroman- 
 del Coaft ; fo that there is little or no current in this road : the bottom is 
 clear; muddy, and good holding ground. Its fmoothnefs is occafioned by the 
 Calderoon Shoal, to the fouth-eaftward, which fhelters it from the great fvvcll 
 that you find in every other part of the coaft. 
 
 You may °H> in Porta Nova Road in 6 fathoms water, the flag-ftaff at 
 Porta Nova WfN. and the fouthernmoft of the 4 pagodas at Chalambarang 
 SW'iW. off more 2 miles. The latitude of Porta Nova is 11? 32'N. 
 
 CLXXXIII.
 
 Mr. Nichelson's Decfription of the South Coast o/"Zeloan. 171 
 CLXXXIII. O/Fort St. David's WCuodalore. 
 
 From Porta Nova to Fort St. David's (belonging to the Englifli) the coaft 
 lies NbE. 6 leagues : you may coaft it along more hereabout in 8, 9, or 10 
 fathoms, about a league off more. A little to the northward of Porta NoVa 
 begin the white fand-hills, which extend along the coaft near the fea. At a 
 diftauce this part of the coaft refembles feveral iflands, the land bank near 
 the fea being higher than any other part of the coaft, which is exceeding 
 low. 
 
 About 3 miles to the fouthward of fort St. David's are the town and 
 river of Cuddalore. The river is mallow, with a bar, fit only for boats to 
 
 enter. 
 
 We lay feveral months in Cuddalore Road, during the blockade of Pondi- 
 cherry, and 4-}ed in Ci fathoms, clear and good holding ground; Cuddalore 
 Bar WSW. the flag-ftaff NW1N. the ruins of Fort St. David NNWAY. 
 off more ix mile ; the current fetting to the northward at the rate of a mile 
 an hour, as it always does off this place in the SW. monfoon. Here we 
 we were Supplied with plenty of frefh provifions, vegetables, fruit, and other 
 refrefhments. 
 
 The latitude of Fort St. David's is 1 1? 48' N. longitude, 80? 5' E. 
 from London; and the variation 3C/W. 1760. 
 
 From Fort St. David's to Pondicberry the coaft lies NNE;E. 4! leagues. 
 You may coaft it along between them in 10, 1 2 or 14 fathoms, 4, 5, or 6 
 miles off more. In the offing you will have from 38 to 40 and 42 fathoms, 
 5 or 6 leagues off more, and without that no foundings. There is nothing 
 remarkable between them ; to feaward the land is low and fandy, and 
 woody in-land. 
 
 From Fort St. David's to Sadras the coaft. lies NNEiE. 21 leagues. 
 
 CLXXXIV. Of Pondichf.rry, Sadras, Alemparva, the Seven 
 Pagodas, Covolam, and St. Thomas. 
 
 Pondichery has been the chief of the French fettlements in India, the 
 refidence of the governor-general and head council, and, before it was deftroyed 
 by the Englifh, was by much the largeft and moft beautiful European fettlement 
 In India, affording a moft delightful profpeet. from the fea. The latitude of 
 Pondicherry is 1 1? 56' N. and longitude, by feveral aftronomical oblervations, 
 79? 57'E. from London; the variation 30' W. 1760. 
 
 Some diftance in-land, there is a remarkable black land on a flat hill, with 
 a grove of trees on it, higher than any other part of the coaft or country 
 
 Z 2 hereabout,
 
 172 A New Directort for the East-Indies. 
 
 hereabout, which is the firfr. thing you will fee on th'.s part of the coafl: coming 
 in from the fea, and by which you may know Pondicherry : we called it 
 the Tuft of Trees m-Iand from Pondicherry. When on with the middle of 
 Pondicherry, bearing W|N. ^\ or 3 leagues we had 15 fathoms, and WbN. 
 5 leagues, we had 38 fathoms: there are no foundings without 40 or 42 
 fathoms, then the bank goes off very fuddenly. 
 
 The French mips generally anchored right off the town in 7 or 8 fathoms, 
 about -I of a mile, and fmall ihips in 5 or 6 fathoms, £ a mile off fhore. VV e 
 anchored in 10 fathoms, the flag-ftaff WIS. and the tuft of trees on the high 
 land at the back of Pondicherry WNW. off fhore z\ miles; the bottom clear, 
 and s;ood holdino; ground. 
 
 In June the current fets NbE. 1 knot, fometimes more or Iefs. To the 
 northward of this place, and clofe to the north baftion,< is the entrance of a 
 river capable of receiving pretty large country velTels over i,ts bar, which makes 
 it very convenient for trade. ' 
 
 From Pondicherry to Sadras the coafl: lies NNEIE. diftance 1 6 leagues : the 
 the coafl is low, with, fome land hills, and in-land it is woody. 
 
 About 9 leagues to the northward of Pondicherry, on the fame courfe, are 
 the ruins of Alem-Parva, formerly a French iettlement, but deflroyed by the 
 Englifh. You may coafl: it along to Alem-Parva, in 10, ^2, or 14 fathoms, 
 4, 6, or 8 miles off fhore ; in the offing 38, 40, or 44 fathoms, 5, 6, or 7 
 leagues off more; and without that, no foundings: the bottom fand and gravel. 
 
 From Alem-Parva you may fee the high land of Sadras, a chain cf high 
 mountains (lbme of which are very ragged) up in the country at the back of 
 Sadras: the coafl between thorn lies NNEIE. 7 leagues. You may coafl it 
 along fhore in 10, it, or 12 fithoms, at 5, 6, or 7 miles off fhore. In the 
 offing you hive from 30 to 40 and 45 fathoms, coarfe brown fand and gravel, 
 5 or 6 leagues off fhore. The high land of Sadras NW. 4 or 5 leagues; 30 
 fathoms. The flag-ftaff WSW. 3 leagues ; 25 fathoms. The flag-ftaff NWiKT. 
 3 or 4 leagues 5,30 fathoms. No foundings without 45 fathoms. 
 
 When the fouth part of the high laud of Sadras bears NW. then Sadras 
 hears W. About zi or 3 leagues to the fouthward of Sadras, there is a 
 thick wood extending about 2 or 3 miles to the northward: off this wood the 
 water is fhoaler than to the northward or fouthward thereof: it is beff, therefore 
 to keep a Utile further off fhore hereabout, in 11 or 12 fathoms. 
 
 About 5 or 6 miles to the northward of the above wood there is another 
 thick wood, which (as you come from the fouthward) feems to run out into 
 
 the
 
 Mr. Nichelson's Defcription of the Coromandel Coast. 173 
 
 the Tea, and form a point of land. From the fouthern part of this thick wood 
 you may fee Sadras (a Dutch fettlcment) with a high flag-ftaff, which fhews 
 the flag over the trees, and may he feen a long way at fea. Were it not for 
 this, Sadras would not, be eafily discovered, on account of the thick wood 
 that furrounds it. 
 
 From Sadras to Madras the coaft lies NbE. 12 or ^leagues: the land 
 near the fea is low and woody, but feveral high mountains in-land. 
 
 The coaft. from Sadras to Covolam, and to the northward thereof, is fteeper 
 to, and has deeper water than off Sadras, or fouthward of it. You may coaft 
 it along fhore from Sadras to Covolam in 20, 22, or 24 fathoms, 4, 5, or 6 
 miles oft fhore; in the offing you have from 30 to 40 fathoms 4 or 5 leagues 
 off fhore ; and without that no foundings. 
 
 About ^\ or 3 leagues to the northward of Sadras are the Seven Pagodas, 
 which are thus fituated : there are 2 pagodas near the fea, 4 in the valley 
 near the foot of the fouthernmoft high land, and one on the very pitch thereof. 
 The fight of thole in the valley is often intercepted by the woods, efpecially 
 when they bear about Weft. 
 
 From the Seven Pagodas to Covolam the coaft lies NbE, a little eafterly, 
 diftance 5 leagues. You may coaft it along fhore between them in 18, 20, 
 22, or 24 fathoms, at 4, 5, or 6 miles off fhore. In the offing you have from 
 30 to 40 fathoms, at 4 or 5 leagues off fhore; and without that no foundings. 
 Covolam is a Portuguefe factory-houfe, on which they hoift their flag : and 
 the houfe is very white; by this it may be known. 
 
 From Covolam to the town and church of St. Thomas the courfe is as the 
 coaft lies, NbE. 3I leagues. This alio is a Portuguefe town, fituated clofe to" 
 the fea; and the church ftands quite upon the beach, by which it may be 
 known. You may coaft it between them in from 20 to 15 or 14 fathoms diftance 
 from 6 to 3 miles off fhore. In the offing you have from 30 to 40 or 44 
 fathoms, at 4, 5, or 6 leagues diftance; and without that, no fbundin .-. 
 
 In-land there are high mountains, the northern moft of which is the loweft, 
 and is known from any others round it by being a lower and flatter hill, with 
 a church built at the top of it, which is plainly to be i'cen, failing along fhore: 
 this is called St. Thomas's Mount. 
 
 From the town or church of St. Thomas to Madras the coaft lies NbE 
 3 miles You may coaft it in 10, 11, or 12 fathoms water, 2 or 3 miles off 
 iiiore. About half way between them is a remarkable high black pagoda. 
 
 CLXXXV.
 
 174 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 CLXXXV. Of Madras or Fort St. George, and Pullicat. 
 
 Madras, or Fort St. George, is the chief Englifh fettlement on the Coro- 
 imandel Coaft, the feat of a luperior governor and council, and very well 
 fortified. It is a place of great trade, though few or no (hips belong to it, and 
 is divided into the White and Black Town ; the former of which is fmall, 
 but well built, and {lands within the walls of the garrifon ; the Black Town is 
 considerably larger, and lies to the northward of the fort. Here a fmall river, 
 over which there are two bridges, empties itielf to the fouthward of the 
 town, forming an elbow in its courfe from the northward; whereby it furrounds 
 moil part of the fortifications : this adds greatly to the ftrength of the place. 
 The watering-place is about \\ mile to the northward of the fort; but your 
 (hip muff, be watered by country boats, as none other can land, on account 
 of the great furf ; and they are often overfet in it. 
 
 The latitude of Madras is 13? 12'N. its longitude is 80? 32'E. from London, 
 and the variation was 25' W. 1760. 
 
 The road is bad and open : you lie there expofed to all winds that blow, 
 with a large fwell perpetually rolling in upon the fhore ; which makes fhips 
 labour very much in this road. The bell: marks for °f-}ing are, the flag-flaff 
 and the cupola of the town-clock in one, NWbW. St. Thomas's Mount 
 SW^W. and the high black pagoda WSW. in 10 fathoms, off fhore \\ or 2 
 miles. The bottom is muddy, and good holding ground ; but further to the 
 northward it is reckoned foul, there being many wrecks, loll anchors, &c. I 
 have known many fhips fpoil their cables in this road. There is generally a 
 northern current in the SW monfoon, and a fouthern one in the NE. mon.oon, 
 at fome times running very llrong, at others little or none. 
 
 Here is to be had plenty of all forts of provilions and refrefhments for a fl 
 of men of war, or other (hips. The country hereabout is extremely beautiful, 
 plcafmt and plentiful, and affording a charming prolpecl ; but wood is a very 
 fearce article. The landing place is at the fea-gate ; but the furf breaking 
 very high on the fhore, makes it very dangerous landing, the furf being greater 
 here than at any other part of the Coall of Coromandel. The m mi r of 
 landing is thus : the (hip's boat cf-^'s juil without the furf, where what we 
 call the bar-boats come, take out the pailengers or goods, carry ti em through 
 the furf, and bring them on fhore. Thele boats are fomeiimes oveilet, the 
 people drowned, and goods loll. 
 
 As at this time we went no further to the northward on the Coall of Coro- 
 mandel ; and, according to my original delign, not intending to give any 
 
 description
 
 Mr. Nichelson's Defcription of the Coromandel Coast. 175 
 
 defcription of thofe parts where I have not been ; yet, as in a fucceeding 
 voyage, from Diego Rayes to Madias, we fell in with Pullicat, off which 
 there is a very dangerous fhoal, I (hall therefore in this place proceed to 
 give fome account thereof, and fo conclude this defcription of the Coafl of 
 Coromandel. 
 
 From Pullicat to Madras the coaft lies SbWlW. diftance 7 or 8 leagues. 
 You have from 18 to 14 fathoms water, 3 or 4 miles off fhore ; and from 
 30 to 35 fathoms, fandy ground, 3 or 4 leagues off fhore. The land near the 
 iea is low and woody ; though in fome places, the trees (being pretty high) 
 make the land appear, at a diftance, like hillocks or very broken land. In- 
 land there are very high mountains, called the High Land of Pullicat ; they 
 are at a great diftance from it, and not to be {een in hazy weather. 
 
 The flag-ftaff at Pullicat is very high, and when the flag is hoifted, it may 
 be feen 4 leagues. When the high land of Pullicat bore WbS. and the 
 extremes of land from WSW. to WNW. off fhore about 4 leagues, we had 
 36 fathoms; and when the flag-ftaff of Pullicat bore WSW; W. about 3^ or 
 4 leagues, we had 30 fathoms. The latitude of Pullicat is 13? 40'N. the 
 longitude 80? 3S'E. from London ; and the variation was 42 W. ] 760. 
 
 There is a dangerous fhoal off Pullicat, with only 15 or 16 feet water on 
 it ; and the outiide fleep to. I once $-$ed in the night off this fhoal, in 10 
 fathoms, having fhoalened it luddenly from 12 fathoms; and imagining we 
 were coming on the fhoal, we veered away I a cable (the wind being eafterly) 
 and had but 8 fathoms. In the morning, at day-light, fent the boat a found- 
 ing on the fhoal, and found (a cable's length within where the fhip lay) no 
 more than 3 fathoms; the diftance from 12 to 3 fathoms was not 2 cables 
 length. 
 
 A great fhip fhould not come nearer this fhoal than 13 or 14. fathoms. 
 
 If you have a leading gale, you may clear the north part of this fhoal by 
 keeping the flag ftaff off Pullicat WbS. but if the wind fhould be northerly, 
 it will be neceffary to allow it a larger birth, and fleer in WSW. You may 
 <f-^ in 5 \ or 44 fathoms water, muddy ground ; 1^ or 2 miles off fhore, the 
 flag-ftaff bearing from WbS to WSW. 
 
 Here ends Mr. Nichelfon's Defcription of the Coromandel Coafl. 
 
 of
 
 146* A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Of the Coafts of Arrakan and Ava 
 
 CLXXXVI. Of the Eastern Coast of the Gulf or Bay of Bengal, 
 Arracan River, and the Negraille Isles. 
 
 From Sagor ifle to Chittigong, the coafl: is exceeding low ; or rather it is a 
 chain of ifknds formed by the different mouths of the Ganges, which fpread 
 over the northern coafl: of the Bay of Bengal. Thefe iflands are furrounded 
 with very dangerous banks, which extend louthward asfar as 21? 23' north 
 latitude. There are between thefe banks and iflands feveral paflages, which 
 are not. frequented, becaufe moft of the rivers are fubject. to fuch a fudden rife 
 of water, that, as loon as the flood makes, it rifes in a wave or bohr, feveral 
 feet in an inflant. 
 
 A fmall Portuguefe flap, drawing 10 or 12 feet water, got into one of thefe 
 paflages ; and after many attempts, it was lucky enough to find its way into 
 the Ganges, by the River Rangafoula. 
 
 The iflands that border upon thefe banks are barren and uncultivated ; 
 they have no water but the overflowing of the fea. The crews of fhips, 
 eicaped hither from fhipwreck, have been ready to periih with hunger, 
 neceffity obliging them to feed on the pith of reeds ; and it was not till they 
 had endured many fatigues and diftrefles, that they. at length arrived at places 
 inhabited. 
 
 The danger of approaching this coafl-, is the reafon why navigators have 
 not attained any farther pa ticulars of it. As to thole of the river Chittigong, 
 the relators do not eflentially agree amongft themfelves. 
 
 From Chittigong to the river Arrakan is computed 50 leagues SEbE. The 
 hazard there is in trading with the people of Arrakan (its government being 
 very anarchical) makes this coaft little frequented, and confequently not much 
 known. It is only known, that 10 leagues SE. from Chittigong is a bank 
 extending 5 leagues from the ihore ; and that from this bank, for the diitance 
 of 25 leagues, the draughts do not defcribe any danger. 
 
 This fhoal, according to the charts, ftretches to the fouth-weftward from 
 the north point of a river, which, according to M. d'Anville, is Shatigan (or 
 Chittigong) River. M. d'Apres fcems to underfhnd the great river to the 
 north-wefl-ward of this, to be the River of Chatigan, which, according to 
 IU. d'Anville, is the great branch of the Ganges. 
 
 Tii'- rivers which empty thcmlelves hereabout, are neither confiderable nor 
 navigable, At the end of this extent begin the banks, which continue albne 
 
 the
 
 Of the Coasts of Arrakan and Ava. 147* 
 
 the coafl, as far as the mouth of Arrakan River. The edge of that which 
 projects the firtheft, is 6 leagues from the land to the weftward of Mawhill, 
 fituate on the north fide of the river of that name. That to the fouthward is 
 formed by the ifiand of Badremacan, which makes the north point of Arrakan 
 river ; and that of Maw is one of its mouths. 
 
 To go into the River Arrakan, you muft make the Broken Ifland in latitude 
 19? 47'N. in order to avoid the banks to the fouthward of Point Badremacan. 
 Off Broken Ifland, you have regular foundings, which gradually decreafe 
 to 7 fuhoms. You continue to coafl tins ifland as far as its NW. point ; 
 there you may 4-}, and wait for a pilot, if you want to go up the river. 
 
 To the SE. of Broken Ifland the coafl forms a confiderable bay, full of 
 different fized iflands, the fartheft and fouthemmofl of which is Cheduba ifle. 
 From this to Point Negrais or Negraille is 55 leagues. 
 
 Coming from the weftward, and in fight of the fouth point of the great 
 ifland Negraille, you make directly towards it, taking care (in approaching it) 
 of the bank which projects a league from it to the WNW. For this it 
 will be proper to have the lead near at hand, there being 4 fathoms clofe to 
 it. You may coafl it in 5 or 6 fathoms. The depth is not above 6 fathoms 
 any where, between the fouth point of Great Negraille and Diamond Ifland, 
 nor any lefs towards Diamond Ifland till within half a mile thereof. The 
 bottom dark grey find. Tins depth, round the fouth point, is known by a 
 great rock, almofl contiguous, and by a little pagoda, fituate upon a hill. 
 Without this remark, the difcontinuation of the coafl, and Diamond Ifland 
 (which you may fee at a diftance) are fufficient to prevent your being mifiaken. 
 
 You mufl continue to coafl the fouth and eafl parts of this ifland, till you 
 are athwart the NW. point of the Little Negraille or Deer Ifiand ; then you 
 quit the larboard fide and keep on the {larboard, to round this point of the Little 
 Negraille, within which you may 4^, in 6, 8, or 10 fathoms water, off the 
 low land. In this courfe come not too near the Great Negraille, on account 
 of a fand bank (fteep to) right off a bay full of trees, which are to be fecn 
 here. Thefe inftrudtions are by the Sieur de la Touche. 
 
 From the Little Negraille to Diamond Ifland, at about | of the diftance of 
 one from the other, lies a fhoal, pretty fteep on the NW. fide, which makes 
 the entrance of the harbour dangerous, and obliges you for fafety to coafl along 
 the Great Negraille, keeping in 6l fathoms, becaufe in 7 fathoms you may 
 run a-ground before you are aware. Thus it happened to the French king's 
 fhip, called L'Indien, commanded by M. de Predine, which was loft there in 
 1698 ; imagining, by the incieafe of the depth, that he was in the belt channel. 
 
 A a Some
 
 i^S.. A 'New Directory for the East -Indies. 
 
 Some pretend there is a channel between the fouth part of this bank and 
 Diamond Ifland; but it feems not auvifeable for any to go that way, even in 
 a middling fhip. 
 
 Coming from the eaflward to enter I "egraille, you pafs i \ league to the 
 fouthward of Diamond Ifland, without coming near it, on account of a reef, 
 which runs off to the fouthward. Having doubled it, you muft not be too 
 hafly to gain the channel, left you run on the SW. part of it. The bed 
 couife is to keep along the edge of it, till you bring the fouth point of the 
 Great Negraille to bear NE. then ftand directly for it, and coaft it as already 
 mentioned. The fhips that come from the S. or SW. are alfo to take notice 
 of this paragraph. 
 
 The weft fide of the Little Negraille is low, filled with trees and bufhes ; 
 the eaft fide on the contrary is hilly, from whence defcends good water. In 
 the woods are elephants, wild buffaloes, flags, hogs, and feveral other forts 
 of animals. 
 
 CLXXXVII. Of the Coast from the Negraille Isles to Siriam River. 
 
 It is reckoned about 55 leagues from Diamond Ifland to the mouth of Siriam 
 River. The coaft: (which runs EbS. and ESE. as far as Baragou River, and 
 afterwards ENE.) is no more than a continuation of iflands, fepatated by 
 different channels and banks. 
 
 The bight of Martaban, which, according to the modern geographers, 
 makes the principal mouth of the river Ava, is not well known ; it is faid to 
 be exceeding dangerous, on account of feveral fhoals, on which the fea rifes 
 fuddenly 10 feet. The fhips bound to Siriam fhould be cautious of the tides, 
 which run there with great rapidity. 
 
 CIXXXVIII. Of the Andaman Isles, andothcrs in the Gulf ©/"Bengal. 
 
 'i lie middle of the ifland Preparis is in i5?N. latitude, about 80 'leagues to 
 the weffcward of the Coaft ofTenaffertm ; it extends about 3 leagues NNE. and 
 SSW. At each end of it there is a little ifland, or rock, one of win h 1 i 
 4 leagues off to the SSW. in fuch a manner, that theie little iflands, with the 
 principal ifland, are in length about 9 leagues, from latitude 1 4? 45' to 15? 8 '. '. 
 They arc furrounded with rocks above water, upoft which the fea bre 
 continually ; this makes it very dangerous coming near I . The. land 
 of Preparis Ifland appears woody, pretty regular, and of a height to be feen 
 
 8 leagues off at fea in clear weather. 
 
 Fourteen
 
 Of the Islands in the Gvlv of Bengal. 149*' 
 
 Fourteen leagues SWbS. from the fouth point of Preparis, you fin 1 the 
 Cocos Iflands. Their latitude, by obiervaddn, is 14? 5'N. They' I ,/n 
 the iflands that encompafs the notfih point of the Great Andaman, InE. 
 
 9 leagues. On the eaft fide of the fouthernmo'l ifland, yon may °\-$ in a fandy 
 bay, and get wood and water. Thole who have been there, allure of their 
 fafety. The northernmoft of thefe iflands is a fmall diftance from the others, 
 ani feems to afford a paflage between them. In fine weather they may be teen 
 
 10 leagues. Captain Morris, in the Bofcawen, <+^sd at thefe iflands, in 
 January, 1763, about 3 miles of the N\V. part of the fouthernmofr. iflands, 
 in 22 fathoms. Me fent the boat to found from the fliip to the fliore, which 
 found regular foundings decrealing to 10 fathoms, within a mile of the fliore. 
 They landed on the well fide of the ill md, in a line fandy bay; but found 
 the reft all rocky. They found wood he-e, but c^,uld not find any frefli 
 water. Here are regular tides, flowing NNE. and SSW. The latitude of 
 the fouthernmoft ifland, and which is alio the wetiernmoit, they found to 
 be 14? i'N. 
 
 The Andaman Iflands lie north and fouth, from 13? 42', to 10? 30' north 
 latitude. They are divided into Great and I ittle Andamans, and are inhabited ;- 
 but the favage difpofition of the natives (who are (aid to be canibals) is the 
 reafon they are not frequented ; and therefore we can have no exact defeription 
 of them. 
 
 The Great Andamans are reprefented in all the charts as two large iflaodi, 
 feparated by an arm of the fea. The navigators who have approached them, 
 report that they are befides furrouned with a number of little ones, as v\cit 
 on the eaft as weft fide ; and that there are, moreover, many apparent and 
 hidden dangers. Between the Great and Little Andamans, that is to 
 fav, to the ibuthward of the former, fome fay there is an exceeding fine 
 paflage for fhips bound to the eaftern coaft ; but we have no particular account 
 thereof. 
 
 The north part of the Great Andaman, or rather that of the iflands which 
 furround it, lies in 13? 42' north latitude. Between thefe and the Great 
 Andaman is a paflage, or channel, through which the (hip Le Pondicherry 
 failed in her way to Pegu. The account the captain gives of it in his journal, 
 fliews that it is neither advifeable nor ufeful to follow his example, becaufe 
 the paflage is exceeding dangerous, and you can reap no benefit by it. The 
 beil channel is between the Iflands Cocos and thefe, which is 9 leagues from 
 one to the other. The account is as follows. 
 
 A a 2 The
 
 i§o i A Kc-zv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 The 2 2d of November at noon, we faw land : the mod remarkable part was 
 a low point extending to the northward, at the extremity of which we discovered 
 fome little iflands. The Portuguefe pilot, whom I engaged at Madras as acoaft- 
 ing pilot, was defirous of having a nearer view of tiiern both ; therefore v. e 
 fleered eaft for the above-mentioned point. At <; P. M. we were two leagues- 
 from a fmall [{land; this the pilot called the Little Cocos. As night came on I 
 judged it proper to put about immediately, and fleer SWbS. to avoid entangling 
 myfelf among thefe iflands in the night-time, eipecially as there was the appear- 
 ance of bad weather. At half an hour paft fix we founded in 40 fathoms, fine 
 land: at nine, as it was almoft calm, and fearing the tides might horfe me too 
 near the fhore, I ^ed in 24 fathoms, red fand, i| league from the low land, 
 which lies at the foot of 2 °reat hills in land. 
 
 At 5 A.M. we weighed, with the wind at SW. and NNE. to open the chan- 
 nel: we then brought the cape to bear ENE. and EbN. to enter it, leaving the 
 two hills and body of the land on the {larboard fide ; and on the larboard feveral. 
 little iflands (including the Little Cocos above-mentioned) which are all of a 
 moderate height, even and woody, and feern, as you come from the fouthward, 
 to flop up the paiTage ; but by bringing them to the eaflward, you open it, there 
 b^ina; about two miles from one fide to the other. 
 
 At noon the calm obliged us to °)-^ in 25 fathoms, large gravel ; the {lar- 
 board point call about 2 miles; and that on the larboard, ENE jE 2 leagues. 
 The whole afternoon it rained, the wind blowing" very frefh at eaft, which obliged 
 us to veer out all our gheer, to prevent our driving.. 
 
 At 6 P.M. the wind being favourable, the pilot would needs weigh. The fear 
 of fome accident in the night-time, in a paflage that appeared to me to be full of 
 difficulties, made me endeavour to difluade him from his defign. He ftill pcr- 
 fifled; alluring me that he was perfectly acquainted with the place, and faid he 
 had been through it ten or eleven times. I at la ft vielded to his folicitations, and 
 weighed. We then flood for the paflage, fleering Eafl, EbS. and EbN. by our 
 foundings, which we found very uneven, and full of rocks on the Andaman fide, 
 fiomctimes in 22 fathoms, then 11, and then 5, fallowing the ft ream of the tide , 
 which let us very near the larboard ifland. This feems to be the ifland Cocos, 
 as being the principal and largeft ifland on the larboard hand, going to the eafl- 
 ward, and forming the northern part of the (trait. 
 
 When you have entered the ftrait, the larboard fide is iomewhat fafer than tl e 
 other ; though there are two or three rocks even with the water in the middle of 
 the paflage. At midnight the wind failing, and the tide againft us r we 4-^cd, 
 
 being
 
 Of the Islands fa the Gulf r/lk ?;o it. 151 
 
 bein° about two-thirds through. At day-break I found myfelf about half a mile 
 from the rocks juft mentioned, which are above half way. There is one rock 
 quite even with the water, and the other two lomewhat higher toward the lar- 
 board ifland. There is a little cormorandiere, or quick-fand, on the ftarboard 
 fide, toward Andaman Ifland, from whence there Teems to project a very dan- 
 gerous reef. 
 
 As foon as the tides were favourable I weighed, and failed through mid-chan- 
 nel exceeding quick, founding in t$, 18, 25, and 30 fathoms. In going out 
 v. e perceived 3 or 4 little iflands on the larboard fide: there are two in an open- 
 ing, one of which.is round, the other flat and very fmall, with three little lllct; 
 at the end of it. Toward the great Andaman Ifle, there is a large and round 
 ifland, with many others extending to the fouthward. My coafting pilot told 
 me the tide flowed at five o'clock, at each end of the channel. 
 
 You may fee, on the eafl: fide of Andaman Ifland, as well as on the weft, 
 exceeding high mountains. At 6 P. M. when we were out, the larboard point 
 bearing W 4 N. 4 leagues ; that of the great Andaman WhS^S. the fouthernmoft 
 land in fight, SSW. 7 to 10 leagues ; we faw two little iflands to the leeward, 
 which the pilot called the Great Cocos. 
 
 From what I could obferve, he made us pafs between the north point of the 
 Great Andaman and the adjacent little iflands. I would not advife any one to 
 frequent this paflage, efpecially at night, on account of the dangers wherewith it 
 is filled. Thus far the Journal, 
 
 The latitude and fituation of the Car-nicobar Iflands, and fome others about 
 them, are but imperfe&ly known. 
 
 To the northward of Sombrere channel, you find feveral iflands, between 
 which it is not prudent to pafs without a more perfedT: knowledge of them than 
 has been yet attained. The journals of fome (hips that have 4~}ed there, men- 
 tion feveral dangers : however, you may depend on the extent of the channel, 
 as represented by the charts; although the latitude of the iflands are not well 
 known. 
 
 CLXXXIX. Of the Nicobak Islands. 
 
 The Nicobar Iflands are fituate fouth of Sombrere Channel : the fouthernmoft 
 is the largefl, being about 9 leagues long; the northernmoft is as extenfive from 
 eafl: to well:, but much lefis from north to fouth. Between thefe iflands is a very 
 good paflage, about 6 or 7 leagues long, called St. George's Channel; it lies 
 ENE and WSW. The biggeil fhip-s may paTs fafely, if they keep
 
 152* A New Directory^/ - the East-Indies. 
 
 mid-channel. At each end of this channel is a little ifland, which muft be left to 
 the fouthward either way. That on the weft end has at its north point a reef, 
 extending; half a mile at ieaft. 
 
 The paflage between this little ifland and the fouthernmofl: Nicobar is too dan- 
 gerous to be ventured upon. You ought alio to fail to the northward of the other 
 little ifland at the eaft end, on account of a reef in the middle of the channel, 
 which may be feen to thefouthward, and which renders, this paflage dangerous. 
 
 The fhips that fail in or out of the Straits of Malacca, and thofe that go from 
 Acheen to the well ward, generally pafs to the fouthward of Nicobar, whofe 
 fouthernmofl: end is in 6? 50' north latitude, and 28 leagues NWbW. from Pulo 
 Rondo. This ifland of Nicobar has feveral good ports on the weft fide, and in 
 St. George's Channel. The land is high, and may be feen ro or 12 leagues at 
 fea; it is inhabited, as alfo are thofe round it. In good weather, the natives eome 
 on board \ r ou, to traffic for fowls and other refrefhments. 
 
 CXC. Of the North Part of the Bay o/Bengal. 
 
 From Cape Negrais to the river Arrakan, the coaft ftretches about N. and 
 Nb\V. From the broken Iflands of Arrakan to Sundiva, and to Sagor Sand, the 
 coaft lies WbS. and WSVY. but when paft Sagor Sand, the coaft, to where the 
 pilot (loops lie from October to January, ftretches WbN. and WN W. 
 
 The diftance from Point Palmiras to the mouth or entrance of the River 
 Arrakan, is about 1 00 leagues ; and the whole bottom of the Bay of Bengal, frcm 
 Sagor to Sundiva Ifland, is low, fvvampy ground, covered with bullies, inter- 
 lecled with many creeks, and feveral unknown entrances, by which the River 
 Ganges difcharges itfelf into the bay. This divides the land of the fouth part of 
 Bengal into numberlefs iflands, which are for the moll part uninhabited, except 
 by wild beafts, and in fome places by a few poor people, who come therein the 
 • dry feafon tofiih and make lalt. 
 
 From Sundiva Ifland fouthward, to within 10 or 15 leagues of Arrakan River, 
 there Corns unknown dangerous lands that lie a good diftance -from the fhore ; 
 and, though the fhore from thence to Cape Negrais is bold, yet there are fome 
 rocks in deepifli water, that muft be avoided. 
 
 Old Captain Hamilton tells of one near Cape Negrais, about latitude 16? 30' 
 N. a league off" more. The journal of the Hector India man nfterts, feeing 
 breakers on a reef of rocks two miles without them, when they lay at $-$ 4 
 leagues off fhore, in about latitude i/?2o'N. but it is thought they have either 
 miftaken their diftance off fhore, or taken fome riplings for breakers; becaule no 
 rocks were ever leen by others Co far off fhore in that latitude. 
 
 Within the Ifland of Cubeb, theie is a fair and good paflage for any fiiip to 
 
 pais :
 
 Of the Islands in the Gui.f of Bengal. : - 153* 
 
 pi's: freih water is alfo to be had there, looking well after the natives. Both 
 that ifland, and the iflands oif the Mouth of Arrakan River, yield g'dcid ilv.lt.-. r 1 j 
 ihips in bad weather. 
 
 The hard and off* Point Palmiras is infome places of a light, arid in others of 
 a daik-brown colour, with fhells and ftdftes ; this (and ftrotches into 20 or 22 
 fathoms water. The Braces, Sea-reef, Sagor and other fahds eaftward of Point 
 Palmiras to Sundiva lfle, are, as to what are yet known of them, dark coloured, 
 blackhh land, and fomctimes a mining black ; nor do any of them reach into 
 above 12 or 13 fathoms water, all without that being foft ground. 
 
 From the fea-reef to the fand off Point Palmiras, the ground it, from 20 to 23 
 fathoms : though foft, it is commonly mixed with dark, blackifh land and broken 
 fhells ; but in the channel between the Braces, and between all the other fand., 
 eaftward to Sundiva lfle, the ground is ouze, exxept on the edge of the land ; 
 there it will be found dark fand and ouze. 
 
 About half way between the Arrakan Iflands and Sagor Sand, the main part of 
 the great River Ganges empties itfelf into the fea, between two banks, in a channel 
 of about 6 or 7 miles bread, which is too deep for our common hand-line to 
 meafure. For want of knowing this, many fhips have been in great perplexity. 
 
 All fhips working upon the Arrakan Coaft, ought to keep fome 4-}s clear, f. 
 good look-out, and the lead going. If they are in want of water, or in bad 
 weather, they may go under or within the Iflands Cubeb (or Cudeba) or within 
 Bolonga Iflands, &c. in the mouth of Arrakan River (there the channel is deep 
 and good) as the wind and their fituation requite. 
 
 Ships near this coaft, bound to Bengal between the middle of OcVber and 
 the middle of December (if they want flo wat'ejr, and the weather tolerable) 
 had heft keep along flipre, at 8 or. 9 leagues diftancc. By this they will keep 
 within 25 fathoms water, till they get as high as the Arrakan Iflands, in 
 latitude 19? 13' N. to 20? N. then by edging off to N\V. or rather NWbW. 
 they will deepen their water, .and perhaps (though feldom) lofe founding.-, 
 and by failing 20 or 30 leagues, will come again into foundings. Let them 
 
 ;p en to the N "•■ . till they get into 18 or 20 fathoms, and then keep all along 
 WbS. and WSW. this will carry them in much the fame depth, ti'' t 
 reach the above-mentioned deep channel of the Ganges, about 2? weftward of 
 Arrakan River, in latitude 21? or 21? 20' N ; where, perhaps, the water will 
 fuddenly deepen to 30, 40, or 50 fathoms, and no ground. 
 
 Then keeping on WbS, about 6 or 7 miles farther, they will again have 
 much, the fame .depth of 18 or 20 fathoms, in which let them keep on a 
 WbS. and WSW. courfe till they find that courfe deepens their water. They 
 
 may
 
 154* -A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 may then red affured they are pail: Sagor Sand, and fhould immediately haul 
 up to the N\V. or NWbN. till they get into 13 fathoms. Let them then fleer 
 WNW. and WbN. and that will lead them right into the track where the 
 
 D 
 
 pilot (loops lie in 9 fathoms water, to which depth they will come by a very 
 flow and gradual decreafe from 13 fathom?, all foft ground, fometimes mixed 
 with fand, fhells and rotten flones, that will eafily crumble. 
 
 Thefe are the bed tracks for (hips bound to Bengal at this feafon, fuppofing 
 the winds favourable ; but, as that is not often the cafe, (hips bound this way 
 ought nor, at this feafon of the year, to keep too near the Arrakan Coafl ; 
 becaufe with NW. winds they -will be [obliged to <f-}, if in fhore ; whereas, 
 with 8 or 10 leagues offing, they can make a good (letch to the NNE. This 
 however, is wrong in October, or late in December, becaufe in October 
 there are often foutherly winds in the Bay of Bengal. Befides, if the coaft is 
 once fesn, it can always be reached asrain, becaufe there is no current letting; 
 from it ; and late in December, the current is quite done all over the north 
 part of the bay ; fo that, if the fhip fhould fail to leeward of Point Palmiras, 
 (he can eafily work round to Balafore, provided fhe keeps clofe to the fhore', 
 and . makes ufe of the tides. 
 
 The courfes above mentioned, along the north coafl of the Bay of Bengal, 
 are to be underflood as true courfes. Ships fhould be careful in obferving 
 the fit of the currents, fo as to fhape a true courfe. For inflance, fuppofe 
 it is wanted to fleer along fhore WbS. if the current runs flrong to the SW. 
 or SWbW. it will be required to fleer W. or WbN. by the compafs, to make 
 a WbS courfe good. The depth of water will adjufl this fometimes ; but it 
 is befl done by ef-^ing ; or, if that is incovenient, the true fet of the currents 
 can be nearly afcertained, by obferving how the lead-line grows from the fhip, 
 after veering out a good deal of line. 
 
 The deep channel above-mentioned is not met with by every fhip ; fbme 
 pafiing fwiftly over it, and neglecting the lead ; others get not into foundings 
 till they are to the weftward of it. Ships running in fhore, between the 
 Falfe Point and Point Palmiras, have foft ground till they come into 8 fathoms 
 water ; there the ground is hard and dark fand, like that of the Braces and 
 the caftern fands. 
 
 of
 
 ( *55*) 
 
 Of the Weft Goad of Sumatra, by Captain Manlcy. 
 
 CXCI. Of Bencoolen, Sillabar, Buffalo and Manna Pom. 
 
 The River and old Fort of Bencoolen lie hi a deep bay, none living there 
 now but Malays. The new fort or Fort Marlborough Hands on an hill, over 
 Ozang-Corang, which, in the Malay language, is a point of rocks, and is now 
 called Marlborough Point. 
 
 Coming from the northward or fouthward in Bencoolen Road, you will fee 
 Pulo Tecoofe, or Rat Ifland, at leaft 5 or 6 leagues, if clear weather. It has 
 been obferved, coming from the northward, that Rat Ifland is not icen even 
 from the mad-head, until the Sugar-Loaf bears due Eaft. 
 
 When you 4-^ in the Road of Bencoolen, the nearer the ifland the deeper 
 the water, and foul ground : but the beft °f->mg is the mid- way between the 
 ifland and fouth breakers, in about 10 or 12 fathoms, ouzy ground. Rat 
 Ifland SW. the Sugar-Loaf NE. Pulo Point SSE. Fort Marlborough ENE \ E. 
 and the Black Rock SE. 
 
 The marks for coins: into the Corans; through the north channel (which 
 you ought always to do with the wind northwardly) are as follows. Bring 
 the Sugar-Loaf and Rat Ifland NE. and SW. then fleer right in for the 
 Sugar-Loaf, and you will go mid-channel between the north and fouth 
 breakers. If a fmall veflel or any thing larger than a long-boat, keep the lead 
 going, and do not come into lefs than 4 fathoms. As you round the ibuth 
 breakers, give them a good birth: if they do not break, you will always fee 
 a fwell on them. When you have the fort, or fhg-itafF, well open to the 
 north-eaftward of the large cocoa-nut grove that is by the water-fide, you may 
 fleer right in for the Corang, on the Red Cliff, keeping the fort, or flag-flafF, 
 on the larboard bow, or as you fee neceflary, accord ng as you have the wind. 
 You will always lee the channel going in there ; but be lure, as you go in, 
 to allow the rocks that are off the point on the ltarboard-bow a good birth ; 
 then you may fleer for the Jetty-head. 
 
 When you have the wind fouthwardly, always go through the fouth chan- 
 nel with your boats : this channel is between the fouth breakers and the point 
 of rocks on the (larboard tide going in. You mull keep well near thefe 
 rocks, left the current and fwell heave you on the fouth breakers. Obferve 
 in going on fliore from the Ihip, through the fouth channel, to keep the fort, 
 or flag-ftaff, open to the fouthward of the large cocoa-nut grove that is by the 
 
 B b water-
 
 156* A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 water- fide, till you come pretty near the fhore-breakers, or breakers on the fouth 
 point. When you have the channel well open, as you will fee by the fvvell 
 over the fouth breakers, then keep right in with the Sugar-Loaf, till you open 
 the fort, or flag-ftaff, well to the NE. of the cocoa-nut grove (as before 
 directed for the north channel). When you are under the Red Cliff, keep 
 alone more for the Jetty-head. The rocks above-mentioned make a conve- 
 nient place for boats, where no wind nor lea can hurt them. When it blows 
 any thing frefh, boats lie along- fide the lhips with great difficulty, and fome- 
 times they cannot at all. At Mocha-mocha, Bental, and Triamong, it is 
 much the fame ; but at Ippoe (without any thing extraordianary to raife the 
 fwell) fhips have been known to roll their guns in the water ; for which, 
 reafon, much care ought to be taken of the fervices of the cables, they fre- 
 quently wanting to be mended. 
 
 Sillabar lies about 4 leagues SE. of Fort Malborough, in the bottom orV 
 bay. There lies, about mid-way between both places, a large range of rocks, 
 called Black-Rock, which breaks very high, and may be eafdy feen and 
 avoided : there is generally a rolling iwell on the fhore. 
 
 Sillabar Riser and Refidency lies in the bottom of a bay, the paggar 
 ftanding on the fcarboard tide of the river, about a mile up. From thence to 
 Pulo Point it is about z or three miles further : this is a good place for mips 
 to lie at in the NW. monfoon, lying always fmooth, and lheltered from any 
 wind, if within the rocks. ; 
 
 Three leagues WNW. from Pulo Point, lies a large ledge of rocks, on 
 which there arc not above 14 feet water : they do not at all times fhew them- 
 felves, but arc verv dangerous, and fometimes break very high. Pulo Point, 
 at Sillabar, is a verv low point, with one tall tree furrnounting the reft upon 
 it ; this point extends itfelf to the WNW. toward the fea, with a reef of 
 rocks breaking a confiderable way from it. 
 
 Three or four leagues to the fouth eaftward of this point, is around bluff 
 £>oint, called Buffalo Point (which may be feen in Bencoolen Road) : there 
 is good <f-}ing for (hipping off it, as to the ground and depth of water ; but 
 open to the fea, from 7 fathoms to what depth you pleafc, foft ground. 
 rfaere is a Dooiam or village inhabited, but a very bad bar, which makes it 
 not r:, (i by b 
 
 From Buffalo Point to Manna Point are 10 or 11 leagues. It has been a 
 very erroneous opinion, that there are no foundings to the fouthward of Buffalo 
 Boint ; for we found good regular foundings from Manna to Buliulo Point, 
 
 from
 
 Of the West Coast of Sumatra, l S~* 
 
 from 12 to 30, 40, 50, 60, and 70 fathom-:;, fui;ly [-round, and v. ]i'.rc you 
 may <+-> if ocoafion requires; but when Pad Manna Point, to the 
 between that and Pulo Pifl'ang, could get no ground till near Fortune liland ; 
 and there you lofe foundings. There is generally a great fwell on the fhore 
 alons; the coaft. 
 
 Fortune Iiland, acording to captain Norton Hutchinfon, lies near E. and 
 W. about 7 miles diftance from Flat Point, which makes a fort of a hook, 
 forming a little bay : here a fhip may ride with fafety. Captain Hall makes 
 Fortune Iiland to lie in 5? 58'S. but captain Hutchinfon, in taking his 
 departure from Flat Point, allows it in 5? 52 'S. 
 
 Of the Coafl in Sailing from Bcncoolen towards Mocha-Mocha. 
 
 CXCII. O/Single Demoon Point, Catown, and Sibblat, Ippoe, 
 Bantall, Fkedrickett, and RLcha-Mocha. 
 
 In failing along more to the northward, be fure you give Single Demoon 
 Point a good birth, by reafon of the foul ground and rocks that lie a con- 
 fiderabie way off it. Your beft way is to keep the more on board, that you 
 may not be deceived by the high land, which oftentimes fhews itlelf it many 
 different fhapes, according to the weather. A little to the northward of Single 
 Demoon Point you will fee Red Cliffs : you may run into what depths }ou 
 pleafe, as 9, 10, and 11 fathoms, and out to 20 fathoms. You will meet 
 with good ouzy ground for °r-^ in g all the way, if occafion requires, till you 
 come near Ippoc (as hereafter mentioned) then you will loie fight of the 
 Red Cliffs. 
 
 From Benccolen to Catown is about 10 or 11 leagues NWbN. it appears 
 with an opening between the Red Cliffs like a river. From thence NW. 
 about 4 or 5 leagues further lies Sibblat, which appears alfo with an opening 
 between the Red Cliffs and Catown. 
 
 From Sibblat to Ippoe, the courfe is NW. 4 or 5 leagues. To the SW. 
 of Ippoe, there runs out a bank of foul ground from the fhore, extending near 
 2 leagues into the fea. You will find upon it, from 6 to 10 fadioms, large 
 coral. On the outermoft edge of it there lies a coral rock, SWbS. 2 leagues 
 from Ippoe, with no more than 14 feet water on it, and from 8 to » 6 fathoms 
 round it. On this rock the Swallow ftruck. Come no nearer than 10 
 fathoms, it being very fleep, and but a little way off it 30, 40, and 50 
 fathoms, and then prelently no ground. 
 
 B b 2 When
 
 158* A Neiv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 When you bring Ippoe NEbE. you are to the northward o "V bank, and 
 may fafely ftand into Ippoe Road, where you will fee, a little to the fouthward, 
 three red cliffs, like the country boat-fails, called Tombongo nd three 
 
 green hills, if clear weather, without thefe. The nuddlemofl of thefe is 
 that on which the old paggar ftood, bearing NEbE. the extremities of laud,, 
 from NNW. to SEbE. Large mips fhould come no nearer to <f-> than- 9 or 
 10 fathoms, the road being clear; but within is ihoal water and foul 
 ground. 
 
 Between Ippoe and Bantall are 4 rivers, Aijer, Ruttah, Etam and Triamong. 
 Bantall lies about 7 leagues to the northward of Ippoe, in a deep bay. You 
 may ftand in to what depth you pleafe, after you are part Ippoe ; but keep off 
 fhore in founding from 15 to 7 fathoms, you will find good ground,, and even 
 foundings. In crofting the bay from Bantall you will fee a fmafi red cliff, 
 which is the north point of Triamong River, pretty low, near the water's. 
 edge : this is the only red cliff difcernable between Ippoe and Mocha-mocha. 
 When you fee it, vou may be certain where you are ; and then look out for 
 Bantall River's mouth, which you may fee as you advance to the northward, 
 if you keep in 6, 7, or 8 fathoms, as you may iafely do. 
 
 A little to the fouthvvard of fome ftraggling pine-trees, you will fee the 
 houfes aud river's mouth a little to the northward thereof: you will fee two 1 
 white cliffs, which in the offing appear much like boat-fails. Thefe marks 
 (in clear. weather) you may fee a conliderable way : and by them you may 
 depend on knowing the places, in cafe you can fee no other. It is a very good 
 road to +^ in ; when you have the river's mouth NE. and the two above- 
 mentioned cliffs NNE. you are then in the belt of the road, and may 4-^ in) 
 o-ood fand and ouzy ground, from 8 to 6 fathoms. 
 
 About 4 leagues NW. from Bantall is Fredrickctt ; its river has a large 
 bar, which renders it unna ible, even for boats. When you are near it, 
 you will fee the river's rriouth open : you may eafily difcover it by a parcel 
 of tall trees that fiand thicker on each fide of the river's mouth than any where 
 elfe. 
 
 About 3 leagues NW. of Fredrickett lies Mocha-mocha : all the way between 
 them is white land, ana generally a great lwell, heaving in upon the fhore. 
 A little t\ the northward of Fredriekett you will fee a bluff point, full of 
 treses, called Buffalo Point, which you may be lure (if bound to Mocha-mocha) 
 to keep well on board, by rounding it in 6 or 7 fathoms : this you may do 
 without danger; othervvife you m \y mi!"; the port. Alter you are about it, 
 
 you
 
 Of the Wt'sT Coast 0/ Sumatra. isQ-.i 
 
 you will fee a tall fpiral tree, which ft in 's a little to the northward of the 
 river's mouth, appearing at firft fight like a flag-ffaff, to the fouthward of 
 which, as you open the bay, you next fee a long houfe, which makes like a 
 row of buildings, being the Datta-Bugafe's houfe. Next look out for the 
 flag- ftaff and pagger, which you will not fee till you are fhot. well to the 
 northward. 
 
 You may at pleafure 4-} in Mocha-mocha Road, from 6, 7, to 10, 11, 
 or 12 fathoms, foft ground; the flag-ftaff bearing from NEbE. to SEbE. 
 according to the monfoons, for conveniency of boats coming on board, or 
 going on fhore. 
 
 As you fail along fhore, Mocha-mocha appears in the bottom of a fmall bay, 
 and clear of trees, when you have the bay well open. If you are to the north- 
 ward, you may fee the houfes and faclory in the middle of the clear. 
 
 On each fide of the bay frauds a row of tall pines, which make both extremes 
 appear bluff; but in the morning (if not very clear) you can hardly fee houfes 
 or facfory, till the fun is 3 or 4 hours high above the land, by reafon of the 
 lhade the land and trees make, which are at the back of it. 
 
 WNW. about 3 leagues from the flag-ftaff there is foul ground, as rock 
 and fand : by this (when coming from the northward) vou may know you 
 are near Mocha-mocha, in cafe you have not an opportunity of feeing the land, 
 or flag-ftaff. Soundings upon it are from 35 to 18 and 11 fathoms, and 
 doubtlefs lefs water, for it breaks very high. 
 
 Never depend on your didance : run any where along this coaft, as there 
 are very ftrong currents, frequently running above 2 knots an hour, and very 
 uncertain, being chiefly influenced by the fluffing of the winds; for a twelve- 
 hours gale along fhore will cccafion a current. 
 
 If a fhip fhould be in want of water whilft fhe is to the northward, the 
 natives will bring it off to you. Their ufual price has been 3 dollars for only 
 6 puncheons: your own boat* cannot fupply you, by reaibn of the great furfs 
 and fhoal water there is on the bars. 
 
 Of Iflands in the Indian Ocean. 
 
 CXCIII. Of the Comero Islands. 
 
 The Comero Iflands take their name from the largefl; of diem, which is 
 called the Grand Comero. Thcfe Iflands are very high and mountainous, 
 and the latitudes and longitudes of them are as follows : 
 
 Comero's
 
 160* A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Comero' s latitude 1 1? 40'S. Longitude 42? 52'E. from London. 
 
 JoannVs latitude 12? n'S. Longitude 44? 5'E. 
 
 Mayotta's latitude 13? io'S. Longitude 44? 30'E. 
 
 Mohilla's latitude 1 2? 2o'S. Longitude 43? 56'E. 
 
 Comero bears from Joanna WNW. diirance 26 leagues ; but from land to 
 land are only 22 leagues. Mayotta bears from Joanna ESE?S. diftance 23 
 leagues; but from land to land are not more than 10 or 11 leagues: this 
 ifland hath an high and remarkable peak on the fouth part of it. Mohilla 
 bears from Comero SEfS. diftance 17 leagues; but from land to land not 
 more than S or 9 leagues. The variation amongft thefe iflands was 18? 42W 7 . 
 in 1762. The prefent variation is 19? W. Thefe Iflands being very high, 
 are feen a great way at fea in clear weather. 
 
 Amongft thefe iflands, in the SW. monfoon, you generally meet with little 
 winds, variable and calm ; and you will generally find a ftrong current fetting 
 to the fouth-weftward. A fpirt of wind will drive a fliip from Joanna to 
 the NE. part of Comero, where fhe may be becalmed, and drove with the 
 current to the SW. of Comero. Many fhips have been driven fo by the 
 current in calm weather. 
 
 People who have been afhore there, while lying becalmed off Comero, 
 have reported, that they were very civilly received by the inhabitants, who 
 gave them plenty of fruit, and fuch as the ifland afforded ; and feemed much 
 inclined to encourage ftrangers to come amongft them. This ifland abounds 
 with freih provihons, and refrefliments, in as great plenty as at Joanna ; and 
 the inhabitants are as civil : the reafon why it is not frequented is, that there is 
 no good road, or bay, that we know of, where fhips can lie fafely at <f-^. 
 
 When fhips have completed their water, &c. at Joanna, they fail to the 
 northward for India, and take their departure from the Ifland Comero, being 
 the laft ifland they fee. As they run to the northward, they will rind freih 
 and fleady gales at SSYV. and SW. and the more they run to the northward, 
 the more weflcrly they will find the winds, and the frefher they blow. 
 
 It is cuflomary for fhips, when they take their departure from Comero, to 
 make their courfe north- wefterly, ib as to make 1? W. longitude from Comero, 
 when they are in latitude 8? S. to avoid the fhoals laid down in the draughts, &c. 
 to the eaftward. You have, in this latitude, variation 18? 20' W. and in this 
 run you will find a ibuthcrly current. 
 
 CXCIV.
 
 Of Islands in the Indian Ocean. 161* 
 
 CXCIV. Of the Bass as de Palram, and Bass as de Amber. 
 
 From latitude 8? S. and longitude, made 1? W. from Comoro, you may 
 make your courfe north, fomething eaftcrly, (o as to run down your wed: 
 longitude made; but not to make any eaft longitude from Comero, when in 
 latitude 4? 25' S. in this latitude lies the Baflas de Palram, near the meridian 
 of Joanna; or in longitude 44? y E. from London; and 1? i5'E. from 
 Comero. 
 
 Being- in the meridian of Comero, and having cro (Ted the latitude of Baflas 
 de Palram, and got into latitude 4? io' S. and variation 1 6? W. you may make 
 your courfe NE. or NEbE. fo as to make 5? E. longitude from Comero, and 
 variation 1 2? W. when you crofs the line. 
 
 You mould not make more longitude from Comero to the line, than 5? or 
 5? 20'E. at moft ; for there lies upon the line a dangerous fhoal, called the 
 Baflas de Amber. Several navigators afl'ure that they have feen this fhoal, 
 and that part of it is dry. All accounts agree that it lies upon the line. Its 
 longitude is 51? 38' E. from London, or 8? 46' E. from Great Comero. 
 
 If you crofs the line, and have made 5? or 5? 20' E. longitude from 
 Comero, you will go 3? 46' or 3? 26' to the weft ward of it. With that 
 longitude you will crois the line with 1 2? W. variation. Here you will find 
 a foutherly current, of from 10 to 15 miles in the 24 hours. 
 
 Continue your Courfe NE. or NEbE. till you are in latitude 3? 3o'N. and 
 you have longitude, made from Comoro 9? 30' E. and variation 8? 2 3'W. 
 You are then clear of all danger, and may fteer as you pleafe. 
 
 CXCV. Directions for Ships hound to Bombay. 
 
 When fhips have got thus far in the above latitude, longitude, and variation, 
 and are bound to Bombay, they will of courfe haul to the northward, in order 
 to get into the latitude of their port, and then run down upon it with an eaft 
 courfe. As they run to the north-eaftward, they will decreafe their variation 
 very faff. 
 
 If they come on the coaft in July or Anguft, they will meet with ftrong 
 gales and fqualls, with abundance of rain, and thick hazy weather; and the 
 wind constantly fouth-wefterly, being the height of the SW. monfoon. 
 
 Let a fliip keep the parallel of 18? 5C/N. till fhe has foundings (which fhe 
 will have 28 or 30 leagues off the coaft, at 80 or 90 fathoms, which fhoalens 
 very gradually, as you run in for the coaft) in the above latitude, in foundings, 
 you will have the variation 1? 30' W. You will, at this time of the: vrar, 
 
 gen
 
 i>')2 i: ' A Ke"jj Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Generally find a current fetting to the fouthward, along the coafl, from it 
 to 20 and 24 miles, in the 24 hours: which you muil make an allowance 
 for in your courle fleered, and may run in for the land by your foundings. 
 If the weather is clear, you will fee the land about Bombay, in 40 fathoms 
 water; and then you will be diflant from the laud 10 or [i leagues. The 
 land near Bombay (being very high) may be {eei\ a great way in clear weather. 
 From ^5 fathoms, brown fand, you will run 22 or 20 leagues before you 
 fhoalen the water to 36 fathoms, muddy ground. In 36 fathoms you will be 
 8 or 9 leagues off"; in 26 fathoms you will be 6 or 7 leagues off; in 17 or 18 
 fathoms you will be 4 or 5 leagues off the land, in latitude 18? 50'N. 
 
 CXCVL Cautions to he obferved in Sailing toward Bombay. 
 
 If you keep in latitude 18? 5-0' N. you will run in exactly mid- way between 
 Old Woman's Iiland and the I Hand Kanary ; and you will fhoalen your water 
 gradually from 1 7 or 18 fathoms, 4 leagues off fhore, to 9 or 1 o fathoms, 
 5 or 6 miles off Ihore; but if you are to the northward, in latitude 18? $j' or 
 19?N. on the back of Old Woman's Bland, at high-water time, you will 
 have 10, 11 and 12 fathoms, within 2 or 3 miles of Old Woman's Iiland. 
 Another difadvantage, will attend your being to the northward in the lafl- 
 mentioned latitude, namely, the winds are at SW. and often SSVV. j'ou will 
 not be able to fetch round the reef, in order to go into the harbour ; but will 
 be obliged to tack and fland off to fea again, by which you may lofe time, 
 and an opportunity of getting into the harbour. - 
 
 If you are to the fouthward of latitude 18? 45'' N. you will crofs a bank, 
 with 24 and 26 fathoms water on it, and 32 and 34 fathoms between that 
 bank and the fhore; by which you may know you are not more than 7 or 8 
 leagues from the coall. 
 
 Of the Seafons, Winds, and Weather, &c. near St. Auguftine's 
 Bay, or between Madagafcar and the Continent, in all the 
 Months of the Tear. 
 
 CXCVII. Of the Winds and Weather /'« the South-West and North- 
 
 East Monsoons. 
 
 All the weft fide of Madagafcar, between it and the Continent, from Cnpe 
 Corientes to Mofambique, is what may very properly be called a gulf, on 
 
 account
 
 Of Islands in the Indian Ocean. tC^ 
 
 account of the variablcncfs of the winds, the uncertainty of the weather, and 
 the fudden ftorms that frequently happen there at all times of the year, but 
 moil fo in the NE. monfoon. 
 
 In the SW. monfoon, or the fair-weather feafon, which is from April to 
 the beginning or middle of November, the weather is moftly moderate and 
 fair, the winds chiefly from SW. to SE. In fhore you have fca and land 
 breezes ; but the winds in the offing are often variable, and frequently nor- 
 therly. If you have a florai in thole months, it is either at NW. or SE. 
 Ships ride out fmart gales of wind at NW. and NNVV. in St Auguftine's Bay, 
 in Auguft : this throws a great fea into the Bay, and the fea breaks very high 
 on the Ihoals without. It very frequently blows hard at SE. and ESE. though 
 this is the fair-weather feafon. During all this feafon, you generally find a 
 foutherly current all along the Coaft of Madagafcar ; though fometimes it lets 
 to the northward, but very feldom 
 
 In the beginning; of November, the NE. monfoon fcts in at the Ifland 
 Joanna, and the iflands adjacent, and the north part of Madagafcar. The faid 
 monfoon fets in at St. Auguftine's Bay, about the middle or toward the latter 
 end of November ; after which time it is dangerous lying in St. Auguftine's 
 Bay : for, though it is called the NE. monfoon, the wind is often at N. and 
 NW. blows right into the bay, and throws in fo great a fea, that it is dangerous 
 for (hips to lie there. 
 
 This NE. monfoon feldom reaches much beyond St. Auguftine's Bay, unlefs 
 by chance, now and then, when the winds are variable, and it is inclined to 
 be ftormy weather ; for the SE. winds moftly prevail about the fouth end of 
 Madagafcar at all times of the year. At this time of the year, that is, the 
 latter end of November, December, January, and February, thefe SE. winds 
 blow very ftrong ; and die wind is often S. and SW. with fqualls and rain. 
 
 Thefe SE. and foutherly winds, forcing themlelves to the northward, and 
 meeting the ftrong NE. N. er NW. winds, repel each other with great fury : 
 this occaiions terrible ftorms and tempefts, the winds flying about like a 
 whirlwind, the iky dark and cloudy, with a deluge of rain, and a moft con- 
 fufed fea. 
 
 In the NE. monfoon, the northerly winds generally prevail as far as to the 
 fouth ward or fouthern tropic, and fometimes not fo far, but only to latitude 
 21? or 22? S. where they are met by the SE. or foutherly winds, which 
 generally carry it againft the northerly winds, efpecially to the fouthward of 
 the fouthern tropic. 
 
 C c This
 
 164" A New Directory for the Fast-Indies. 
 
 This bad-weather feafon cont'nnes from November to the middle or latter 
 end or* March, and makes thofe feas between Madag fear and the Continent, 
 like a gulf; and therefore it may be Called the Gulf of vladagafcar, on account 
 of the fudden ftorms and chan^eablenels of the wind- nd weather. 
 
 During the NE. monioon the current generally runs ftrong to the fouth- 
 ward and fouth-weftward, near the Continent, fo as to fet a fhip 20 or 2$ 
 miles in 24 hours, At the fame time it runs as ftrong to the northward, near 
 the Coaft: of Madagafcar. At this time of the year you will find your (hip 
 much to the weftward of the reckoning, occafioned by the current, which 
 fets ftrong to the fouthward and iouth-weftward. 
 
 In this Gulf of Madagafcar, the NE. monfoon feldum blows farther than 
 the fouthern tropick ; there it is met by the SE. S. or SVV. winds, which 
 repel it ; but the SW. monfoon blows quite through between Madagafcar and 
 the Continent, into the Indian Seas ; then it turns more weftcrly, the further 
 you go to the northward. 
 
 In the SW. monfoon, between Madagafcar and the Continent, there are 
 frequent revolutions of the winds : it is fometimes variable, and frequently 
 northerly as before-mentioned ; but the winds in general are moftly foutherly, 
 or from SE. to S. and SW. 
 
 When fhips fail from Madagafcar, or St Auguftine's Bay, they fomerimes 
 take their departure from a place called Weftrnmfter-Hall, which is an hill a 
 long way in the country, and therefore a very improper place to take your 
 departure from, as neither the latitude nor longitude of it is afcertained. I think 
 Sanday Ifland, on the fouth fide of St. Auguftine's Bay, a more proper place, 
 as it lies parallel with the coaft. Its latitude is 23? 42'S. and longitude 43? 
 5o'E. from London 
 
 CXCVIII. Of Sandy Island. 
 
 When fhips fail from St. Auguftine's Bay, for India, thev generally run to 
 the wefhvard, and make 50' or 52' W. longitude from Sandy Ifland, and then 
 make their courfe due north. They do this to keep clear of the W. Coaft of 
 Madagafcar, which is all foul ground, with feveral fhoals lying fome diftance 
 Pit' the coaft, all the way to the northward from St. Auguftine's Bay to Cape 
 St. Andrea, in latitude 15? 58'S. and to fhun a rock which is laid down in 
 the India Pilot, and other draughts, in latitude 21? 27^. 
 
 When you have made 52' or 50' W. longitude from Sandy Ifland, a north 
 comic carries you clear along the coaft, to th- eaftward of ihe above-mentioned 
 
 rock, and clear of all danger. 
 
 In
 
 Of Islands in the Indian Ocean. i 65 ii 
 
 In latitude 22? S. and longitude made from Sandy Ifland, 1? W. the variation 
 has been obferved 23? 42' W. and no foundings: nor will you have any till 
 you come into latitude 17? 32' S. In failing along this part of the coaft of 
 Madaoafcar, you will generally find a foutherly current, fctting from 10 to 15 
 and 20 miles to the louthvvard in 24 hours; though it fometimes fets as much 
 to the northward. 
 
 Before you come into latitude iS? S. or thereabout, take care to keep more 
 to the eaftward, (o as to reduce your longitude, made from Sandy Ifland, to 
 30' W. or thereabout, in order to keep to the eaftward of St. Chriftopher's. 
 
 CXCIX. Of St. Christofher's Isle. 
 
 By journals, the latitude of St. Chriftopher's is 1 7? 27' S. and longitude 2 2'E, 
 of the Sandy Ifland, near St. Auguftine's Bay. St. Chriftopher's is a lmall, low, 
 bare ifland, with few breakers about it. The variation off this ifland, was 21? 
 44W. 1756. and 21? W. 1776. 
 
 In latitude 17? 32'S. longitude made from Sandy Ifland, 50'W. the variation 
 is 22?W. foundings at 26 and 27 fathoms water, then 30 fathoms, coaiTe brown 
 land ; continued foundings from latitude 17? 32' to 17? 14'S. but very irregular, 
 as from 25 to 30, 18, 14, 25, j6, 20, 27, 25 fathoms: and then no foundings 
 at 60 fathoms. 
 
 In latitude 16? 4o'S. and longitude made from Sandy Ifland, 25'W. the vari- 
 ation 21? 32'W. hereabout, you ought to keep to the eaftward, and to make your 
 courfe NbE. to avoid a dangerous fhoal, feen by three Indiamen, (the Chefter- 
 field, Walpole, and Hector) in Auguft, 1756. An account thereof, taken oat 
 of the Cherterfield's log-book, is as follows. 
 
 At 5 A. M. faw breakers from the mad-head, right a-head of us ; hauled our 
 wind, in order to go the Weft ward of them, though I perceived the pafiage 
 good to the eaftward. The Walpole and Hector did the fame, and I believe 
 were nearer to them than we, though we were not half a cable's length from 
 the White Heads. This fhoal appears to be a mile long, and half a mile broad, 
 and lies near E. and W. There is on it one fmall rock, that is dry, and a little 
 to the eaftward of that rock, a patch of reddifh land, that is dry alfo ; againft 
 which the fea broke furioufly, though moderate weather. There was a con- 
 futed fea where the fliip went through. 
 
 They had 30 fathoms water when they firft faw the fhoal, and were fteering 
 NE. The breakers were then right a-head of them : then they had 19, 20, 
 12, 10*, 7, and 6 fitthoms. They paft them in 6 fathoms, within half a cable's 
 
 C c 2 length
 
 i66* A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 length of the breakers ; then y\, 12, and 25 fathoms. 2 or 3 leagues to the 
 weftward of the fhoal ; then no foundings at 40 fathoms. 
 
 At noon they were in latitude, by obfervation, i5?59 / S. and longitude, made 
 from Weftminfter-Hall, 58'W. they experienced a northerly current, which 
 fet the fhip 1 2 miles to the northward of the reckoning. 
 
 The courle and diftance from 5 A. M. to noon, with an allowance for the 
 north current, is W36?N. diftance 24 miles from the breakers on the fhoal; 
 by which the fhoal is in latitude 16? i^S. and longitude, from Weftminfter- 
 Hall, 38'W. 
 
 They faw the ifland St. Chriftopher, at 6 P. M. the evening before, bearing 
 eaft, diftance 2 or 3 leagues. Their courle and diftance from St. Chriftopher's, 
 with the bearings of it, at 6 P. M. and allowance for the northerly current, 
 make the fhoal they faw, called the Chefterfield Shoal, to lie from St. Chrifto- 
 pher's N. 5?E. diftance 72 miles, or 24 leagues. This fhoal is not laid down in 
 any former map, book, or chart; it ihould be carefully avoided. 
 
 Your longitude, made from Sandy Ifland, when in latitude 16? 2C/S. fhould 
 not be more than 1 2 / W. the variation 2 1 ? 1 o'W. 
 
 From this latitude you may make your longitude, eafterly ; fo that in latitude 
 13? I2'S. you may have made 5o'E longitude from Sandy Ifland. Variation 
 20? io'W. in which latitude, longitude, and variation, if the weather is clear., 
 you will fee the Ifland Mayetto, bearing about eaft of you, diftance 8 or 9 leagues. 
 This ifland is high land, and has a high remarkable peak on the fouth fide of 
 it, which you may fee at the above-mentioned diftance. 
 
 Hereabout you will find a ftrong foutherly current, which will fet the fhip 
 from 20 to 24 miles to the fouthward in 24 hours. ■ Make your conrfe NNE. 
 4 or 5 leagues, and you will lee the ifland Joanna bearing about NNE. or 
 NNE^E. diftance 1 1 or 12 leagues, it being very high land, much higher thafi 
 either Mayotta or Mohilla, with a very high peak in the middle ; and then May- 
 otta will bear EbS. You have no foundings hereabout. Steer for the weft part 
 of Joanna, and you will foon fee the Ifland Mohilla, which is alio an high 
 ifland: you will fee it to the NW. of you. 
 
 Ships always go between Joanna and Mohilla ; and go within 2 or 3 miles 
 of the weft part of Joanna, and lo to the eaftward of Angazecha, or the Great 
 Corflcio, there being a fmall ifland to the northward of this, in latitude 10? 30 / 3. 
 called the little Ccmero. If bound into Joanna, obferve the following. 
 
 CC. Of
 
 0/"Islands in the Indian Ocean. %&' * 
 
 CC. Of Joanna Road. 
 
 There is a reef lies off the SW. and W. parts of this ifland, at fome diftance 
 from the fhore, which you will fee as you come near it. This reef runs to the 
 weft point of the ifland, and joins to a fmall ifland with -a faddle in the middle 
 of it, commonly called Saddle Ifland, which lies a fmall diftance off the weft 
 point of Joanna. You may fteer for this ifland, and round it, at about half a 
 mile's diftance, in i o fathoms water. The water there appears as if a fhoal ; 
 but you have no reafon to be afraid ; keep in 10 or 1 1 fathoms water, no danger. 
 
 As foon as you are a-breaft of the Saddle Ifland, you will open the Bay and 
 Road of Joanna ; then haul up to the eaftward, and keep the weftern fhore 
 aboard, if you can. You will find the winds variable and fqually, and drawn by 
 the valleys: be cautious in carrying much fail ; for the fqualls, out of the bay, 
 are fudden and heavy. You may round the bay by keeping in 25 fathoms water, 
 about a mile from the fhore, till you bring the church SE^E. and then you 
 may of-^. 
 
 You will be very lucky, if you are not obliged to make feveral tacks before 
 you get into c f-^ing ground. When the church bears SE [E. and the weft point 
 of the bay WbN, and the eaft point NE^-N. then you are right abreaft of the 
 watering-place ; and you may <f-} with thefe bearings in 25 or 20 fathoms water. 
 You may carry out your kedge or ftream <f-}, and haul in fhore, fo as to raft 
 your cafk oft" with the ftudding-fail, halliers, &c. 
 
 There is another watering-place, that comes through the firft Toddy Tope, 
 to the eaftward of the town ; for which bring the church SEbS. 
 
 Here you get plenty of good water ; but wood is rather a fcarce article. Here 
 are alio plenty of frefh provilions and other refrefhments, fuch as beef, goats, 
 fowls, lemons, oranges, cocoa-nuts, &c. at a cheap rate. The inhabitants are 
 Mahometans, and are a civil, courteous people, and ready to help ftrangers. 
 The ifland is pleafant and healthy, though very high and mountainous. 
 
 The NE. monfoon comes on, or fets in at Joanna, and the iflands adjacent, 
 about the 10th or 16th of November : then it is dangerous for a fhip to lie in 
 Joanna Road. 
 
 CCI. Captain Thomas NealeV Account of his Pafage in the Swift Grab, from 
 Bencoolen toward the Bafles de Chaeos, and the Sevchelle Iflands, is as 
 
 ■ follows: 
 
 I failed from Bencoolen the 7th of May, 1772, and continued my courft to 
 the weftward. In order to proceed with greater certainty, I endeavoured to 
 
 make
 
 *68« A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 make either the Ifland Ady or Candy, but miffed them, though I had always 
 Shortened fail in the night, and kept frequently founding. When I had made 
 26? 45 'W. meridian diftance from Triefte (a foul ifland oOencoolen, the fli'ip's 
 place on the chart was about 30 leagues to the weftward of Ady and Candy. 
 
 On the 31ft of May, at 3 A. M. I got foundings at 50 fathoms, muddy 
 bottom ; and from the care I had always taken, I was ready to believe that my 
 foundings were upon one of thefe iflands. I immediately lay-to with the vcflel's 
 head to the fouthward, intending to wait till day-light ; and then to go in and 
 take fome turtle, which it is faid may be got at thefe iflands. In lying to, we 
 fhoaled very gradually, till half pad: 4 o'clock, to 45 fathoms, mud ; then had 
 43 fathoms, white fand ; and the next cart, 25 fathoms, coral rocks, and fome 
 calls 2^ fithoms, fand and fhells. I then wore, and flood to the eaft ward under 
 the topfails; had 24, 18, 17, and J ; lefs 11 ; then 14 fathoms, white fand and 
 fhells ; then deepened to 24 fathoms, and the next caft had no ground at 100 
 fathoms. At day-light I expected to have feen the land, but did not ; by which 
 I knew I was upon the eaft fide of the Bafles de Chagos. After we were out 
 of foundings I fleered north, in order to get into a lower latitude, and then 
 proceed again to the weftward. At 9, law rocks again under our bottom; 
 founded 15 fithoms, upon which (and feeing the water in many places difco- 
 Ioured and green, a lure flgn of rocks) I hauled off NE. and had no more 
 foundings. At noon I obferved in 5? 50 fouth latitude, and fleered NEbN. 
 
 At 4 P. M. June 1, law two ranges of iflands : the body of one bore SWbW. 
 and the body of the other ENE. I immediately fleered for thoie in the ENE. 
 which were diitant near 5 leagues, and by 1 o'clock was within a mile of one 
 of them, and being favoured with the light of the moon, flood very near 
 to them, but could get no ground at 100 fathoms. Upon which I continued 
 making fhort tacks till the morning, when I fent the boat on fhore, which toon 
 after returned laden with cocoa-nuts and boobies; but, as the landing here was 
 very difficult, on account of the great furf, I made fail to the eaflward in fearch 
 of a better landing-place; and about 9, dilcovcred a very fine bafbn. I fent the 
 boat to found it, in order to go in there; but they found it a rocky bottom: how- 
 ever, the water was very imooth, lo that a veflel having a chain might ride 
 there. The boat landed there upon a tine fandy beach, without any danger. I 
 gave them fire-arms to lhoot w ith, but they had no occafion to ufe them : the 
 birds were lo tame, they might be taken off die trees. We found no water here. 
 It is laid, that wherever the cocoa-nut grows, water may be got by digging; but 
 we did not want any. The cocoa-nut grows upon almoft all this range of 
 iflands. There are ten of them in number : they are joined to each other by a reef 
 
 of
 
 Captain Neali.'j Vajfagc to the Seyciielle Islands. 169 
 
 of rocks, over which the Turf breaks with great violence, and are each about the 
 fize of Kanary, off Bombay. The variation here I obferved 3? jAV. the latitude 
 5? 23'S and it is high watei on the full, at 12 o'clock. It bears from the lirffc 
 ibundhiP's about N. 62? E. 20 leagues. 
 
 The other range of iflands feen to the SWbVV. are innumerable; as they were 
 to leeward, I did not think it prudent to entangle myfelf with them: they may 
 be feen, I believe, 8 or 9 leagues in very fine weather. I luppofe the hazinefs 
 of the morning prevented my feeing them fooner. 
 
 In refpect to the fituation and extent of the BaiTes de Chagos, I was on them 
 once before in a fhip, called the Greyhound, Capt. David Simmons, in the 
 year 1768, going the fouthward paffage from Madras to Bombay, in the month 
 of September. We had made j?W. meridian diftance from Madras ; and our lati- 
 tude by account 4? 46'S. when we faw the rocks under her bottom, and had 
 foundings at 7, 8, and then 52 fathoms, rocks, and then no more foundings. 
 Therefore their extent from N. to S. is from latitude 4? 46'S. to 6? 23'S. if not 
 more, as I have been upon them in both thofe latitudes ; and if 7? are meafured 
 weft from the Meridian of Madras, and 26? 45'W. from Triefte, both thefe will 
 fhew the true place of the Bafles de Chagos. I have heard that the Winchelfea 
 Indiaman, Captain Howe, was alfo upon them : if lb, his reckoning will be of 
 fervice, in fome meafure, to compare with this. 
 
 In order to give you as much intelligence as poffible as to the reafons of my 
 examining that track, you may obferve that I was fent from Bombay, and failed 
 the 10th of March, 1772, to difcover and explore certain iflands called the Three 
 Brothers, whole fituation is uncertain, but laid down in the charts in longitude 
 62? 30'E. and latitude 3? 5C/S. alfo the the Seven Brothers laid down in longi- 
 tude 60? 15'E. and latitude 3? 30'S. (which iflands have alio been fought for by 
 a lnow belonging to the India Company for two years lucceffivelv, with the lame 
 fbecefs) ; but meeting with lome accidents at fea, after much perfeverance I was 
 obliged to bear away for Bencoolen, diftance near 20?, having on board but one 
 legar of water, and arrived there May 2, 1772. Sailed again on the yih, and 
 proceeded to the weftward in the SE. trade. 
 
 After I lelt Praflin, I proceeded back to the eaftward, and examined very 
 well all the track to the eaftward of Praflin for dangers that are faid to exiit 
 thereabout, and ran 6? 43 E. in the parallel between 4? and 3? of latitude, and 
 afterwards back wefterly to Praflin again, and had no foundings nor light oiany 
 other lands in all the three times I ran in that track. 
 
 The ifland named Seychelles is inhabited by the French, and has a good har- 
 bour, &c. 
 
 To
 
 170* A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 To this account of the Seychelle Iflands, by Captain Neale, it Teems not 
 improper to add, that the largeft of thefe iflands is called Mabe or Seychelle Ifle ; 
 the next is Praflin Ifle; the next Curieufe, Digvi, Silhouette, Felicity, Mariane, 
 Frigate Ifle; and about 12 others of lefler magnitude, whole latitudes and lon- 
 gitudes are exprefled in the chart which defcribes them. 
 
 CCII. An Abstract of the Swift Grab's Journal, from Bencoolen 
 
 toward the Seychelle Islands. 
 
 Wednefday, 13th May, 1772. 
 At 4 paft 2 PM. Triefte in fight from 
 the deck, bearing EbSlS. diftant about 
 6 leagues, from which I take my de- 
 parture. 
 
 Courfe made good, S7i?W. 
 
 Diftance made good, 94 miles 
 
 Latitude by an indifferent obferva- 
 tion, 4? 39'S. 
 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 1? 2c/W. 
 
 Thurfday, 14th May, 1772. 
 Courfe made good, WbS. 
 Diftance made good, 94 miles. 
 Latitude obierved, 5? o'S. 
 Latitude by account, 4?57'S. 
 Merid. dill, from Triefte, f. i / W. 
 
 Friday, 15th May, 1772. 
 Courfe made good, S7i?W. 
 Diftance made good, 62 miles. 
 Latitude by obfervation, 5V 40'S. 
 Latitude by account, 5? 20'S. 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 40? o'W. 
 
 Saturday, 1 6th May, 1772. 
 Courfe made good, weft. 
 Diftance made good, 47 miles. 
 
 Latitude by obfervation, 5? 4o'S. 
 Latitude by account, 5? 4i'S. 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 4? 47' W. 
 
 Sunday, 17th May, 1772. 
 Courfe made good, S2i?W. 
 Diftance made good, 21 miles. 
 Latitude by obfervation, 6? 6'S. 
 Latitude by account, 5? 59'S. 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 4? 54W. 
 
 Monday, 1 8th May, 1772. 
 Courfe made good, Si4?W. 
 Diftance made good, 27 miles. 
 Latitude by account, 6? 32'S. 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 5? i'W. 
 
 Tuefday, 19th May, 1772. 
 Little wind and fair weather. 
 Courfe made good, weft. 
 Diftance made good, 19 miles. 
 Latitude by obfervation, 6? 36'S. 
 Latitude by account, 6? 33'S. 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 5? 2o"W. 
 
 Wednefday, 20th May, 1772. 
 Little wind and fair weather. 
 Courfe made good, S65?W. 
 
 Diftance
 
 Captain NeAle's Pajfage to the Seychelle Inlands. 
 
 171 
 
 Diftance made good, 20 miles. 
 Latitude by account, 6? 4.4'S. 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 5? 38'W. 
 
 Thurfday, 21 ft May, 1772. 
 Moderate and hazy weather. 
 Courie made good, Sy6?W. 
 Diftance made good, y$ miles. 
 Latitude by account, 7? 2'S. 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 6?' 5i'W. 
 
 Friday, 2 2d May, 1772. 
 Courie made good, weft. 
 Diftance made good, 124 miles. 
 Latitude by obfervation, 7? 30'S. 
 Latitude by account, 7? 2'S. 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 8? 55'W. 
 To the fouthward of account thefe 
 
 Monday, 25th May, 1772. 
 Moderate and hazy weather. 
 Courie made good, \VbN|N. 
 Diftance made good, 1 3 7 miles. 
 Latitude by account, 6? .j-o'S. 
 Merid. dift." from Triefte, 1 5? 43'W. 
 
 Tuefday, 26th May, 1772. 
 Freih breezes, and cloudy weather 
 throughout. 
 
 Courfe made good, WbN. 
 Diftance made good, 139 miles. 
 Latitude by obfervation, 6? 27'S. 
 Latitude by account, 6? 13'S. 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 17? 59^. 
 
 Wednefday, 27th May. 1772. 
 Moderate and hazy weather. P. M. 
 
 laft 3 days, 28 miles, which I impute bent the cables. Sounded every hour 
 
 in the night, and kept a good look-out 
 for the Iflands Ady and Candy. No 
 
 to the fteerage. 
 
 Saturday, 23d May, 1772. 
 Moderate and cloudy weather, 
 large following fwell throughout. 
 Courfe made good, weft. 
 Diftance made good, 140 miles. 
 Latitude by obfervation, 7? 4.0'S. 
 Latitude by account, 7? 30'S. 
 
 ground at 20 fathoms. 
 A Courfe made good, WbN. 
 
 Diftance made good, 1 10 miles. 
 Latitude by obfervation, 6? 5'S. 
 Latitude by account, 6? 5'S. 
 Merid. dift". from Triefte, 1 9? 4/W. 
 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte 
 
 1 1? 1 
 
 Sunday, 24th May, 1772. 
 Modei ate and- Cloudy weather. 
 Courfe made good, WbN. 
 Diftance made good, 140 miles." 
 Latitude by obfervation, 7? 2o'S. 
 Latitude by account, 7? i7'S. 
 Merid. dift." from Triefte, 13? 32'W. 
 
 ,'W. Thurfday, 28th May, 1772. 
 
 Sounded every hour iri the night, and 
 kept a good look-out. 
 Courfe made good, weft. 
 ' Diftance made good, 109 miles. 
 Latitude by obfervation, 6ro'S. 
 Latitude by account, 6? 5'S. 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 21? 36'W. 
 
 Dd 
 
 Fridav,
 
 17;2* 
 
 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Friday 29th May, 1772. 
 
 Fair pleafant weather. Sounded 
 every hour in the night, and kept a 
 good look-out. No ground at 30 
 fathoms. 
 
 Courfe made good, W3?S. 
 
 Diftance made good, 109 miles. 
 
 Latitude by obiervation, 6? 1 o'S. 
 
 Latitude by account, 6? 5'S 
 
 Merid. dift.fromTrieae, 23? 25'W. 
 
 Saturday, 30th May, 1772. 
 
 Moderate breezes and fmooth wa- 
 ter. Sounded every hour in the night. 
 No ground at 60 fathoms. 
 
 Courfe made good, weft. 
 
 Diftance made good, 1 ?5 miles. 
 
 Latitude by obfervation, 6? 1 i'S. 
 
 Latitude by account, 6? 2'S. 
 
 Merid.-dift. fromTriefte, 25? zo'W. 
 
 Sunday, 31ft May, 1772. 
 Moderate breezes and hazy weather. 
 A fwell from the SE. At fun-fet 
 fhortened fail, and went under the 
 top-fails all night, keeping a good 
 look-out. At 3 AM. brought-to 
 main top-fail to the maft. Sounded, 
 and had 50 fathoms, muddy ground. 
 At -I paft 4, had 45 fathoms, then 43 
 fathoms, white find. At 5, had 25 
 fathoms, coral and fhclls : then wore 
 and flood eail a little ; the foundings 
 24, 18, 17, \ lefs 11, then 14 fa- 
 thoms, white find and (hells : then 
 deepened, to 24 fathoms, and then no 
 ground at 100 fathoms. At fun-rife 
 
 very hazv, and no land in fight ; by 
 which 1 conclude that we are on the 
 eaft fide of the Bafles de Chagos, 
 though by Herbert's Directory we are 
 5? 20' to the eaftward of them. At 
 9, faw rocks again under the bottom ; 
 had 15 fathoms red and white coral; 
 and then no ground. 
 
 Latitude by obfervation, 5? 5C/S. 
 
 Latitude by account, 5?29S. 
 
 Monday, 1 ft June, 1 7 7 2 . 
 Moderate and fair. At 4 PM. faw 
 the land from the deck : two clufters 
 of iflands ; the one bore ENE. and the 
 other SWbW. At fun-fet one clufter, 
 which is the fmalleft, bore EbN^N 
 4 or 5 leagues ; and the other from 
 WbN to WS W. diftant 7 or S leagues. 
 Kept making fhort tack> under the lee 
 of the fmall clufter of iflands. Sounded 
 conftantly; no ground at 100 fathoms 
 within ~ of a mile of the fhore. When 
 up to this clufter of iflands, the others 
 are juft out of light. I fuppofe their 
 diftance about 1 1 leagues. At 5 A. M» 
 hoifted out the boat, and fent her on 
 fhore. Variation by a good morning: 
 
 JO o 
 
 amplitude, 3? 7'W. At 8 ^ed with 
 the beft bower in 22 fathoms, gravel ; 
 diftance from the fhore, about 60 
 yards. Ditto, the cf-^ flipped off the 
 bank, and was immediately out of 
 foundings. Hove up the oj-^ and con- 
 tinued under fail. At 10, the boat 
 returned loaded with cocoa-nuts and 
 boobies. At noon, latitude by a good 
 
 pbfeivation,
 
 Captain Ne ale's PaJJage to the Seychelle Islands 
 
 173 * 
 
 :■■■■ 
 
 obfervation, 5? 23/S. The extremes 
 of this fmalleft range of iflands from 
 SWbS to E. off more about \ a mile. 
 No ground at 100 fathoms. Scut 
 the boat in fhore to found a fort of 
 harbour. 
 
 Tuefday, 2d June, 1772. 
 
 Moderate and fair. At 1 PM. the 
 boat returned with the following 
 report; that having examined the 
 bafon, or harbour, the bottom of 
 which was rocks ; however excelTive 
 fmooth water, and water enough for 
 a veflel to ride, provided they had a 
 chain ; and I believe room enough for 
 about 6 fail; and, as we found the 
 wind to blow conftantly from the SE. 
 believe it does fo the whole year : but 
 it is by no means a proper place, unlefs 
 in extreme want. The boat landed 
 within the bafon with great fafety 
 upon a fandy beach. A SW. wind 
 would be very dangerous, as it blows 
 right in. At 4, I take my departure 
 from the fmalleft duller of iflands, 
 which are the eafternmoft iflands of 
 the BafTes de Chagos ; their body S3E. 
 6 or 7 leagues. 
 
 Courfe made good, N27°W. 
 
 Diftance made good, 9 1 miles. 
 
 Latitude by obfervation, 4? 2 y S. 
 
 Latitude by account, 4? 2'S. 
 
 Merid. dift. fromTriefte, 26? 5 l'W. 
 
 Meridian diftance from the Iflands, 
 o? 4 i / \V. 
 
 Wednefday, 3d June, 1772. 
 
 At 3 PM. fleered weft, being ill 
 the parallel of the Three Brothers. 
 
 Courfe made good, W%°N. 
 
 Diftance made good, 116 miles. 
 
 Latitude by obfervation, 3? 57'S. 
 
 Latitude by account, 3? 55'S. 
 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 28? 46W. 
 
 Meridian diftance from the iflands, 
 2? 36'W. 
 
 Thurfday, 4th June, 1772. 
 
 Pleafant breezes, and fair weather. 
 
 Courfe made good, W2?N. 
 
 Diftance made good, 117 miles. 
 
 Latitude by obfervation, 3? 40'S. 
 
 Latitude by account, 3? 53'S. 
 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 30? 43'W. 
 
 Meridian diftance from the iflands, 
 4? 33'W. 
 
 Variation allowed, i of a point, 
 wefterly. 
 
 Friday, 5th June, 1772. 
 A pleafant breeze and fair weather. 
 Courfe made good, W. -i S. 
 Diftance made good, 1 14 miles. 
 Latitude by obfervation, 3? 53'S. 
 Latitude by account. 3? 46'S. 
 Merid dift. from Triefte, 32? 3/W. 
 Meridian diftance fiom the iflands, 
 6? 27'W. 
 
 Saturday, 6th June, 1772. 
 Moderate and cloudy weather. 
 Courfe made good, W| S. 
 D d 2 Diftance
 
 J 7+ 
 
 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Diftance made good, 1 1 7 miles. 
 Latitude by .obfervation, 3? 53'S. 
 Latitude by accoxint, 3? 5o'S. 
 Merid: dirt. from Triefte, 34?34 < W. 
 Meridian diftance from the iflauds, 
 8? 24' W. 
 
 Sunday, 7th June, 1772. 
 Moderate and fair weather. 
 Courfe made good, W -i S. 
 Diftance made good, 125 miles. 
 Latitude by oblervation, 3?58 / S. 
 Latitude by account, 4? 4'S. 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 36? 39W. 
 Meridian diftance from the iflands, 
 so? 29/ W. 
 
 Monday, 8th June, 1772. 
 
 At 6 PM. fhortened sail and went 
 under an eaiy fail all night. Sounded 
 every two hours. No ground at 25 
 fathoms. At 4 A. M. brought-to and 
 founded ; no ground at 85 fathoms. 
 
 Courfe made good, weft. 
 
 Diftance made good, 1 1 2 miles. 
 
 Latitude by obfervation, 4? 5'S. 
 
 Latitude by account, 3? 58'S. 
 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 38? 3 1 'W. 
 
 Meridian diftance from the iflands, 
 12? 2l'W. 
 
 Tuefday, 9th June, 1772. 
 
 At 6 PM. fhortened fail, and went 
 under the top-fails all night; the 
 mizen top-fail aback. At 2 AM. 
 brounht-ta and found,; d ; no ground 
 at 100 fathoms: then made fail as be- 
 fore. At 4, brought-to and founded 
 
 again; no ground at ico fathoms: 
 made fail as before ; and at 5, made 
 more fail. 
 
 Variat. allowed, \ a point wcfterly. 
 
 Courfe made good, W.4?N. 
 
 Diftance made, 96 miles. 
 
 Latitude by obfervation, 4? i6'3. 
 
 Latitude by account, 3? 58'S. 
 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 40? /\V. 
 
 Meridian diftance from the iflands, 
 i 3 ?57'W. 
 
 Wednefday, 10th June, 1772. 
 
 Courfe made good, W 1 5?N. 
 
 Diftance made good, 91 miles. 
 
 Latitude by indifferent obfervation, 
 4? 6'S. 
 
 Latitude by account, 3? 52'S. 
 
 Meridian diftance from Triefte, 41? 
 35'W. 
 
 Meridian diftance from the iflands, 
 15? 25'W. 
 
 Thurfday, nth June, 1772. 
 
 Frefh breezes, and very hazy wea- 
 ther. Lay-to in the night, and founded 
 every hour; no ground at 100 fa- 
 thoms. 
 
 Courfe made good, \V. 
 
 Diftance made good, 71 miles. 
 
 Latitude by obfervation, 3? 53'S. 
 
 Latitude by account, 4? 5 S. 
 
 Merid. dift. from Triefte, 4 2?46'W. 
 
 Meridian diftance from the iflands, 
 i6?2 6AV. 
 
 Variation per evening amplitude, 
 
 7°5< 
 
 -° <o'W. 
 
 Friday,
 
 Captain Neal's Pajfage to the Seyciielle Islands. 
 
 175 
 
 Friday, 12th June, 1772. 
 At I part 4 PAL law land to the 
 fouthward. At fun-fet the extremes 
 of Praflin and the adjacent iflands, 
 from SWbS. to S ; W. diiiance from 
 the nearefl, which is the island Aride, 
 6 or 7 leagues ; and a fmall low even 
 ifland, which is not in the chart, 
 NWfW. diftant about 4 leagues. 
 This imall low even ifland, I think, 
 cannot be lien above 4 leagues : its 
 latitude is exactly 3? 53 S. At noon 
 the extremes of Praflin and the adja- 
 cent ifland, one extreme SEbE. 
 difrance about 6 leagues, the other 
 NWiW. diftant 2 leagues. 
 Latitude obfei ved, 4? 1 j'S. 
 
 Saturday, 13th June, 1772. 
 
 Frefh breezes with heavy fqualls 
 off the land. Working; to windward 
 for theharbour. At 4 +-}ed with the 
 beft bower in 13 fathoms, fand and 
 fhells. Veered to I a cable, midway 
 between the eafl end of Praflin and 
 Curieufe Ifles ; and the northernrnpft 
 extreme of Praflin W4S. and the end 
 of Curieufe EbS.S. 
 
 A. M. employed in wooding and 
 watering. 
 
 June 12. At 7 hours founded; 
 30 fathoms, find and fhells. At 9 
 .hours, 30, 25, 25, 25, 27, fand and 
 flones ; 30, 30, 28 fathoms. At 
 10 hours, 30, 33, 33, 30, 30, 30, 
 28, land and fhclls. At 11 hoi;: , 
 3?, 30, 29, 33, g re y f al 'd and broken 
 fhclls ; 34, 33. &\. 12 hours, 30. 
 28, 29, 28, fand and ihells. At 14 
 hours, 28, 29, 27, 25, 22, ditto. 
 At 15 hours, 2,8, 30, 28, 28, grey 
 fand and fhells, with pieces of coral. 
 At 20 hours, 34, 35, 34, fand and 
 rotten flones. At 21 hours, 34, 36 
 tacked, 30, 27, 29, 30. At 22 hours, 
 25, fand £nd fhells ; tacked. At 23 
 hours, 23, fand and broken flones. 
 
 I fhall here deliver my opinion, 
 that thefe iflands, where we are now 
 at, are the Three Brothers and the 
 adjacent iflands ; and will abide by 
 that opinion, till convinced to the 
 contrary, as there are no iflands to 
 the eaftward of them in their lati- 
 tude, and many to the weftward ; 
 however, fome others think to the 
 contrary, on account of the high 
 variation of the compafs at this 
 place. 
 
 tt 
 
 tie
 
 176 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 The bejl Methods and Times for navigating Ships from Port to 
 Port in Tndia, in corifequence of the Winds and Currents. 
 
 CCI1I. From Bombay to the Red Sea, in November and December. 
 
 In November and December, a fhip bound from Surat or Bombay, being 
 got once a little off fhore, will have a frefh gale at NE. with which fleering 
 large, fhe will have a fpeedy paffage to the Red Sea ; but as it blows hard 
 (eipecially weftward of Soccatra) and the weather is often obfcure and cloudy, 
 it is beft not to attempt feeing that ifland (becaufe running pair, to the fouth- 
 ward might be attended with very bad confequences). Therefore keep to 
 the northward thereof, and fall in with the Coaft of Arabia near Aden ; being 
 careful to keep the lead going, and a good look-out. Aden is an high pro- 
 montory, with a bay on the eaft fide, near to Aden, about 14 leagues long, and 
 about 3 leagues broad, in which a (hip may eafily be embayed. Though 
 Aden is high land, yet it has been taken for the Stone Iflands ; becaufe the 
 cod of the bay, being very low land, is feldom {eea : however, the water in 
 this bay is flioal ; and if a fhip keeps in 35 or 40 fathoms, fhe will neither 
 be embayed, nor hurt by any thing on this coaft. 
 
 CCIV. From Aden to Mocha. 
 
 From Aden, obferve, that if the fhip is not large, fhe may go into Mocha 
 Road between the fands and the main, where fhe finds from 21 to 22 feet 
 water, and by this means avoids much trouble. As it blows hard along fhore 
 at this feafon, a fhip, when round the fands, can feldom luff into the road, 
 but is often obliged to 4~i> to the leeward, and wait (riding hard) many days, 
 for eafy weather to warp up. 
 
 CCV. From Bombay to the Red Sea, in January, February, March 
 
 and April. 
 
 A fhip going the fame voyage in January and February, will have much 
 the fame winds, but more moderate, and very fair weather. It is beft for her, 
 therefore, to fleer for the eaft end of the ifland Soccatta, taking care to be in 
 the latitude of it, before the wefling is run down, 20 or 30 leagues. The 
 land being high, is to be feen far off, from 12 to 16 leagues ; nor is there any 
 unfeen danger near it. She may range all along the north fide, which lies 
 nbout WIN. 20 leagues; and from the weft end and fleer directly for Aden, 
 
 heaving the lead as fhe draws neai the Coaft of Arabia. 
 
 In
 
 Of the UJl Times for Sailing in the Indian Seas. 177 
 
 In March and April, fhips bound this way will Inve fainter and lefs con- 
 flant NE. winds, than in the four proceeding months, and frequent winds 
 from the N .'.'/. quarter', with fair weather and calm;. The land and fea 
 breez.s, or perhaps the SW. winds and currents, being now begun near the 
 fhorcs of Arabia, fhe muft (to avoid them) fleer from Bombay WSW. and 
 SW. fo as to pais 10 or 12 leagues to the fouthward of Soccatra, and after 
 getting in with Cape Guardafui, work up along the coafl of Africa, till pail 
 the White Rock, and then crofs over for Aden. 
 
 If a fhip leaves Bombay in April, it is more efpecially neceflary to keep well 
 to the fouthward of Soccatra, becaufe, if fhe cannot weather that ifland with 
 a SW. wind, fhe muft lofe her paffage . If fhe cannot reach the Coaft of 
 Africa, fhe can always work along fhore high enough to fetch Aden ; from 
 whence, even in June and July, fhe may work up to Mocha, by keeping very 
 near the fhore. By this fhe will, in a great meafure, avoid the currents, and 
 fometimes (during the fprings)" have a current in her favour. The winds alfo 
 will vary often, and be moderate ; but when the winds or current are ftrong 
 down the gulf, fhe muft °f->. Some late (hips, by not keeping fufficiently to 
 the fouthward, have loft their paflage, and lain at Soccatra, till October, and 
 then proceeded on their voyage. 
 
 The road is fafe, and about the middle of the ifland on the north fide, in 
 depth from 9 to 7 fathoms. The people are civil ; and the place affords 
 good water, fifh, fowls, fome fheep and cattle. 
 
 No fhip ought to keep nearer the African Coaft than about 1 5 or 20 leagues 
 weftward of .the White Rock ; becaufe there are deep bays, full of b:mks, 
 rocks, and eddy currents, along the ihore, till paft Babelmandel. The Bay 
 of Zeyla is remarkably fo; in which the Robert galley from Bombay was near 
 loft, about the year 1740. 
 
 CCVI. From Mocha to Judda. 
 
 The navigation up the Red Sea, from Mocha to Judda, is the mid-channel, 
 the fhores being incumbered with many iflands and fhoals : among which 
 however there are fafe channels, through which trankeys fail to Judda ; but 
 thefe channels are unknown to Europeans. 
 
 The proper time for this paflage is doubtlefs between October and March, 
 when the ibutherly winds prevail : however a fhip well found and managed 
 will always gain her paflage, by perfeverance, even in May or June, the cur- 
 rent running frequently to the northward againft the winds, in tho'e months, 
 
 efpecialy
 
 178 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 efpecially in the fprings. A good look-out, both night and day, is very 
 requiilte in this track ; for there are feldom foundings, and the fhoals are lb 
 fteep, that a {hip will have 10 or 15 fathoms on rocks under one end of the 
 ihip, and no ground under the other at 60 fathoms. 
 
 CCVII. From the Malabar Coast to the Red Sea. 
 
 The navigation from Anjango, Cochin, Callicut, &c. ports on the Mala- 
 bar Coafl, to the Red Sea, is (at each feafon) much the fame as from Surat 
 or Bombay ; only it is to be obferved, that all fhips from this coafl. ought to 
 pafs through the Laccadive Iflands. Though mips that fail in November, 
 December, and January, may fafely pafs through what part of the Laccadives 
 they pleafe, yet (hips that fail in February, March, and April, ought not to 
 quit the lhore to the fouthward of 10? or 11? of north latitude. This will 
 prevent the rifque of being carried among the Maldives, by the SSE. current, 
 and high winds, that they certainly will then find among theie iflands. A 
 fhip cannot well avoid being to the fouthward, when pall: the Laccadives (per- 
 haps in 9? or 8? north latitude) inflead of fleering to the \VS\V. and S\V. 
 ihe ought to fleer WNW. or NWbW. to get into 1 1? 30' north latitude, and 
 then weft. This is the beft track for a fhip to fleer that leaves the coafl: 
 early in March ; but late in March ; or early in April, 9? or 10? north lati- 
 tude is the befl' track ; though this will feldom be found practicable, the 
 winds blowing ufually from N. to WNW. 
 
 She muft therefore fleer, clofe hauled, betwixt the WNW. and SW. as 
 the winds will permit ; then to the northward (for the SSE. currents) rather 
 than go too much to the fouthward, {landing fometimes a few hours NbW. 
 N. or even NbE. But thefe trips ought feldom to be made, getting to the 
 weftward being chiefly wanted ; and Ihe ought by no means crofs the equi- 
 noctial, nor even go beyond 2? north latitude, if it may be avoided. 
 
 When a (hip, late in April, or early in May, has got within 50 or ico 
 leagues off the Coafl of Africa, Ihe will generally meet with Uwm SW. to 
 SSVV. winds, that will carry her to the windward of Cape Guardafui ; but if 
 ihe tails to the leeward of Soccatra, in that feafon her paflage is LA. 
 
 CCVIII. From Surat and Bombay to Persia. 
 
 The directions in the Coafling Pilot, from Bomby or Surat, to go by 
 Din Head, and thence along the Coafl: of Guadel to Periia, are good for 
 early (hips. Thole that fail in March, April, or May, ought to ftand dole 
 
 hauled
 
 Of the be/l Times fir Sailing in the Indian Seas. 179 
 
 hauled (either from St. John's or Bombay) with the NW. M inds to the 
 WSW. and SW. till fufficient to the weftward, to fetch a few leagues to the 
 weftward of Cape Rofalgat. Late in March the SW. winds will be found, 
 near the Coaft of Arabia ; and in April or May, ftill further off more : this 
 renders the paflage much eafier than it was deemed in former times. 
 
 The Succefs galley, captain Barton, bound to Perfia, failed from Surat Bar, 
 May 19, 1747, and flood from St. John's, clofe hauled, to the W. and 
 WSW. 'till ihe met with the SW. monfoon, with which, on the other tack, 
 me eaiily made Cape Rofalgat in 26 days, and reached Gamberoon in 30 days, 
 from Surat. 
 
 CC1X. From the Malabar Coast to Persia. 
 
 Ships bound to Perfia from Anjango, Cochin, Sec. and that can leave the 
 Malabar Coafl any time in November, December, or January, had be ft work 
 along fhore, with the land and fea breezes, to near Goa ; and then (taking 
 the opportunity of the firft brifk northerly wind) to ftretch, clofe hauled, 
 over for tire Coaft of Guadel. If a fhip in thefe months is (for fear of an 
 enemy) obliged to go through the Laccadives, her beft way to go through 
 them, is as far to the northward as fhe can, and then, according as the wind 
 varies, work to the northward and weftward in the orling, being careful not 
 to go too far weftward. If Ihe docs not weather Cape Rofalgat 10 or 15 
 leagues, me will greatly lengthen her paflage. 
 
 The Grandifon, captain Fanton, bound to Baflbrah, left Tillicherry, about 
 the middle of December, OS. 1736, and palled through the Laccadives, in 10? 
 40' north latitude. Having got 2? or 3? to the weftward ; to the northward 
 of them, fhe found moderate breezes from WNW. to NE. and with them 
 fleered fometimes to the NW. WNW. and W. and femetimes N. NbF. and 
 NNE. as the wind varied, tacking every 3 or 4 hours ; but upon the" whole 
 managed lb, as to fall in 2 leagues weftward 'of Cape Rofalgat. This was 
 done in three weeks after fhe left Tillicherry, and it was 19 days more before 
 fhe got over the Guadel Coaft, about 25 or 30 leagues eaflward of Cape 
 Jafques, which fhe reached the next day. In rounding Cape Rofalgat fhe 
 had often ftrong gales from NNE. to NNW. with thick hazy weather, 
 occaiioned by fine duft blowing from the fhore, that covered her rigging, 
 cables, &c. 
 
 When this fhip was without the Laccadives, if fhe had flood lefs to the 
 
 E e weftward,
 
 180 A Neiv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 weftward, and more to the northward, fo as to have fallen in with the Coaft 
 of Guadel, her paffage to Cape Jafques would have been fhortened i o or 15 
 days ; as was experienced the fame year and feafon by the Richmond, captain 
 SutclifF, and the Poultney, captain Caitles, which put off from Cochin, and 
 by working in this way, made the Coaft of Guadel, along which coal! they 
 found either land or fea-breezes, or moderate eafterly winds. 
 
 The Grandifon alfo found eafterly winds along this more; nor would fhe 
 have reached it in 19 days, if fhe had not (during the fprings) met an acci- 
 dental current, that carried her for 3 days from 25 to 30 miles a day, right 
 againft the wind ; for it is remarkable, that at this very time fhe was under 
 her courfes, the wind blowing a ftrong gale at north. 
 
 Ships that leave the coaft in February or March, ought to make the Co.. ft 
 of Arabia, between the iflands Merceira and Cape Rolalgat. Therefore, if 
 they pafs through the Laccadives, it fhould be well to the northward, work- 
 ing to the north and weft as the winds will permit, in the fame manner as an 
 early fhip, but more to the weftward. 
 
 The Succefs galley, bound to Perfia, left Cochin April 20, 1757, pafled 
 thiough the Laccadives about the latitude of 9?; after which fhe had fmooth 
 water, and fteady moderate breezes, between NbW. and WbN. but chiefly 
 from NWbN. to NWbW. With thefe fhe worked to the weftward, and 
 was careful fometimes to ftand a few hours N. and NbE. notwithstanding: 
 which, by the time fhe had got between 1 .? and \z°. weftward of Cochin, 
 fhe was near the latitude of 17? North ; and as the wind was then very fteady 
 at NWbW. fhe tacked and ftood N ' E. As fhe ftood to the northward, the 
 wind veered gradually to WNW. WbN. and W. with this fhe kept clofe 
 hauled N. NbW. and NNW. 
 
 As' fhe approached the Coaft of Arabia, the winds frefhencd, and came .to 
 WbS. VVSW. and SW. with which fhe made the KLind Merceira, and then 
 bore away round Cape Rolalgat, with a frefh gale along fhore. Being round 
 the Cape, fhe had 3 or 4 days light variable wind, : with which fhe failed to 
 Mufcat, and <f->ed in the harbour fome time in May. 
 
 CCX. Of Working along Shore, near the Coasts of Malabar aui 
 
 Persia. . 
 
 If a fhip in the larc months, inilcad of going through the Laccadives, 
 chtifes to work to the northward along fhoie, titl/near or above Goa, a: .1 
 then ftand over for the Coaft of Arabia with the lirft brilk northerly wind, 
 
 it
 
 Of the bejl Times for Sailing in the Indian Seas. 181 
 
 it is equally fafe : this will lbmetimes fhorten, and lbmetimes prolong the 
 pallage. 
 
 If the (hip is at Cochin, Callicut, &c. (Malabar potts) and finds a briik 
 Ipirt from the fouthward, or land and fea bree/,cs, or even moderate thou 
 pretty variable winds, from N. to WNW. (all which fometimes happen) it 
 is much the belt to coalt northward ; becaufe the coalt lying NNW. (he really 
 goes Co much in her way as me gets. Was (he put off more, when the:e 
 winds prevail near the land, fhe would certainly hud light winds and calms 
 among the Laccadives, and be driven to" the SSE. by the current, without 
 getting proportionably to the wefhvard. If a ihip, at leaving any of thefe pbrj , 
 finds frefli gales, a chopping lea, and fmall current from NW. and NNW, 
 it is much better to run off more ; for thole ulually continue 6, 8, feo 15 
 days, near the (hore ; nor can a fhip gain any ground by working a. 
 them ; they affift her in running off more, and there (lie will certa.nly 
 meet moderate winds to work with. 
 
 CCXI. In the Gulf of Persia, from October to March. 
 
 From October to March, a drip going either in or out of the Gulf of Perfia, 
 had belt keep along the Guadel Coalt from or to Cape Jafques, though that 
 Coalt is little known to us : but from March to September, mid-channel, 
 01 rather neareft the Arabian (hore, is belt. None ought to go within lefs 
 than 2 or 3 miles off the (hore, between Cape Roialgat and Mufcat ; becaufe 
 there is no ground till extremely near the land ; and lbmetimes tide upon the 
 (hoie, which would oblige a (hip to °)-^ in 55 fathoms, within A of a mile 
 ot the ftrand, under the prodigious high and long mountain of Curiatta, 
 From Cape Jafques quite up to Karack, the bell: track is, to Gambaroon ' 
 Road, between the Illands Larack and Ormus, leaving Kifhmc on the larboard 
 fide. 
 
 A (hip may go between Qrmus and the main, keeping cioic to the ifland ; 
 but the channel is much narrower, and there is lets water than through the 
 other. The belt track from hence up to Karack, is within the Ifland Kilhme, 
 and all the iflands along the Perfian (hore, except the little iflands of Jarak, 
 Indernea, Monjela, &c. that are too near the main. At Gambaroon, a pilot 
 may be got to Carack, or Baflbrah, but one, till paft Kifhme, is enough ; for 
 when paft the ftrait, keeping a moderate look-out, and the lead going, is all 
 that is neceflary. 
 
 The Coaft of Arabia, from Cape Muffeldom to Bahareen, is unfrequented, 
 
 E e 2 and
 
 182 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 nnd therefore unknown to Europeans. Many fhips go from Karack without 
 Kifhme, Polior, and all the other iflands, except the Two-Tombes (Raze and 
 Nabejou), Bomofa, Surde and Nobflure, between which laft and Polior, 
 they pals in 50 fathoms water. 
 
 They may alfo go to the fouthward of all thofe laft-mentioned iflands ; but 
 it is feldom done. Either way muft always prolong the paflage ; becaufe the 
 capes and iflands very much break the force of the NW. winds and currents 
 near the lhores. Along thefe there are ufually more or lets tides, and often 
 a current, that will run 3 or 4 days to the weft ward. During the ebb (or if 
 a current (hould happen to run ea Award) a (hip can always °}-> with fafety 
 under fome cape or ifland ; fo (lie can, if the wind blows too hard down 
 the gulf. The middle channel has no fuch advantages ; for there are no per- 
 ceptible tides ; the currents feldom run up, but generally down the gulf; and 
 the NW". winds fometimes blow with great fury : from them there is no 
 fhelter, nor place to 4-> with fafety in, without lofing much ground, 
 
 CCXII. 'The cafe f the GrAndison Captain Fenton, and Others. 
 
 The latter end of January, 1737, at 7 A. M. the Ifland Karack bearing 
 WNW. about 8 leagues, the wind atSSW. it quickly veered to S\V. and blew 
 fo extremely hard, that (he could carry only a reefed main-fail and whole fore- 
 ful. Thus, clofe hauled, (he fetched under the lee of Ormus, and °}->e<l in 
 the afternoon, near the old caftle. Had (he been embayed between Jafques 
 and Ormus, fo as not to be able to clear the (ho re, (he muft have °h> e d 
 without any (belter, where the wind and fea were fo great, that it is doubt- 
 ful whether ail her <+->s could have held her. That evening the gale ceafed, 
 and before morning a fine land-wind fprung up from the northward, with 
 which Ihe ran out, and pafled with veerable moderate winds up the middle 
 channel, leaving Larack, Ki(hme, Polior, and all the iflands near the Peri;au 
 coaft, to -he northward, and the Two-Tombes (Raze and Nebajou), Bomofa, 
 Surde and Nobflure, to the fouthward of her. Being as high as the ifland 
 Baflieab, (he- was taken with & violent gale from the NW. and after lying 
 24 hours under h.r rnain-'ail, fhe was obliged to bear away, and having run 
 within the NW. ' of the Ifland Keyne or Quefche, fleered along the iniide 
 ( ( it, till fhe came a-breaft of the village near the eaft end. There (he °p^ed till 
 the weather was over, which (lie might as well have ■' under 'Baffoeab, 
 had fire been in (Lore the beginning of the gale; Cnv Richmond and 
 
 Poult) . • , that were then working in fliore, met no fuch bad weather. 
 
 Iii
 
 Of the beji Klines for Sailing in the Indian Seas. 183 
 
 In 1755, or 1756, a Dutch Europe ihip, bound up to Karack from Batavia, 
 went to the iouthward of all the iflands, and having, little wind and a current 
 down the gulf, °K>ed on the edge of the Pearl Bank, about the latitude 25?3<o'N. 
 The wind was at NWbN. and NNW. and greatly increafed, as did likewifc 
 the fea; fo that, being unable to clear the irtore, they were obliged to ilrikc 
 yards and top-mails, &c. and at lail had almoil foundered with all anchors 
 a-head. Luckily for them, they held fail till the gaie was over, or every foul 
 would have periihed on that delert and unhoipitable coaft. 
 
 CCXIII. From Bengal to the Coast of Coromandel, &c. 'in August, 
 September, October, November, December, January, February, 
 March, and April. 
 
 From the middle of Auguft to April, mips may fail from Bengal to any part 
 of the bay; but either earlier or later, it is very difficult to get out of the river. 
 Ships that are going only eailward or iouthward, may fail 10 or 15 days later ; 
 but thofe who fail after the beginning of April, for the Coaft of Coromandel, 
 will find it difficult to get to the weftward, and perhaps lofe their pafTage. 
 
 Ships that fail from Bengal, in Auguil or September, to the Coromandel 
 Coail, will meet with unfettled weather; fometimes moderate and fair, at other 
 times hard fqualls, thunder and much rain; the winds u finally SSW. to WNW. 
 and fometimes SSE. They ihouldf therefore keep in from 15 to 30 fathoms, 
 clofe along the ihore of Orixa, Golconda, &c. for the benefit of the currents that 
 begin to run along the ihore to the SW. The wind, by often blowing from the 
 land, renders keeping near the ihore difficult, eipecially between Vixagapatam 
 and Armagon ; and Handing off ihore, is fometimes very advantageous : there- 
 fore a ihip ought, under thefe circumfhnces, fieldom or never to go out of 
 foundings. 
 
 By going clofe along ihore, it is meant not to round the bays of Salang, Maf- 
 fulipatnam, and Montepoly. ; but thwart them, from point to point. Early 
 ffiips will fometimes have little or no current; and even thofe which fail later, 
 will fometimes find the current fail them, when iouthward of 1 7°N. If they 
 keep near the ihore, they will have no current againfl them, (except perhaps a 
 frefh out of the adjacent river) and the winds fiufficiently variable to get the 
 pafrage. They make ufe of every opportunity that offers, and tack as often and 
 quickly as the wind changing makes proper. 
 
 The ihip Sarurri, bound to Madras, was, early in September, in fight of 
 Gordv/are, and from thence flood, at times, SSW. and SbW. until in latitude 
 
 t e°W
 
 184 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 i5?N. the weather fair, and water fmooth ; breezes moderate, from W. to WSVV. 
 In this latitude, finding, by obfervation, a current to the northward, they im- 
 mediately tacked, and after lofing 15 days, fell in with the high land 18 leagues 
 to leeward of Point Gordware, which (hewed the current to fet north-eaftward, 
 as indeed it always does in the offing, at this feafon, if there is any current at all- 
 September 10, 1739, the William and Mary, bound to Madras, was at that 
 port at fun-rife, the flag-ftaff bearing weft, depth 28 fathoms. The wind was 
 then a light land-breeze, and fhe (leered at the rate of 2 knots to the fouthward. 
 Finding there was a current by the water deepening, and the bearing not alter- 
 ing ; at 10 A. M. (lie anchored in 35 fathoms, and found the current run, by 
 the log, 2^ miles an hour, NE. A French (hip, bound to Pondicherry, was 
 then about 2 leagues eaftward of her, and fuppoled out of foundings : it being 
 almoft a calm, before night (he drove almoft out of fight to the NE. 
 
 During the mouths of October and November, the navigation (liould be much 
 the fame as in September ; but no (hips go from Bengal to the Coromandel Coaft 
 in thole months, becaufe the (trong NE. winds, fea, and currents, render it 
 extremely dangerous. Some (hips, on extraordinary occafions, have rid out 
 the whole monfoon, in from 1 2 to 20 fathoms ; this can anfwer no mercantile 
 purpofe, nor ought any ihip to be on the coaft from the beginning of October 
 to the latter end of December. 
 
 By a ftorm that happened October 2, 1746, the greateft part of Monf. La 
 Bouidenay's fquadron was loft (after taking Madras) in or near the road. 
 
 Between the 10th and 15th of December, is loon enough for any fhip to 
 leave the mouth of Huohlv or Bengal River, for the Coromandel Coaft. From 
 that time to the middle of January, the be ft courfe (fuppofhig her for Madras) 
 is to the SW. directly, to make Armagon Hill. As fhe approaches the coaft, 
 fhe will probably have frefli gales, and a ftrong current to the fouthward ; 
 therefore keep the lead going, and a good look-out. Armagon-Hill will be lecn 
 when (he is 2 or 3 leagues without the north end of the Armagon Shoal, 
 if the weather is not obfeure ; but, as that (and is very fteep, it is dangerous to 
 run in with it, when dark: whoever does, fhould go flanting with the fand, 
 SWbS. or SSW. under an eafy fail, cafting the lead every mile fhe fails, and the 
 moment (he ftrikes ground, haul off fhore, till clear of it. No ftranger ought 
 to go within the Armagon Shoal at this leafon, the channel being too narrow. 
 
 If a fhip in the evening is fhort of Madras, it is better to anchor than lie-to ; 
 but if the fea is too great, turn to windward; it will fave lee- way. 
 
 An InJiaman bound to Madras, in December, being off Pullicat in the even-
 
 Of the beft 'Times for Sailing in the Indian Seas. 185 
 
 kig, thiuking (he had drift enough, brought-to nil night, in order to run into 
 the road in the morning; but, deceived by the current, found herfelfoff Cabeton 
 or Couvelan, at day-light ; where fhe 4~>ed, and was 8 days in warping up 
 to the road. Had me °f-}ed in the evening, or turned to windward all night, 
 this could not have happened. Another Indiaman, that brought-to off Pulhcat 
 at night, found herfelfoff Zeloan in the morning. 
 
 At this feafon (toward the end of the year), it is heft to 4-^ in 9 or 10 
 fathoms, Madras flag-ftaff W. becaule the boats, being light when they come off, 
 can ealily row againft tha wind along ihore, and go afhore loaden with a large 
 wind, which they could not do if the wind was much fouthward. °rr£ing to 
 the eaftward of the port, is to be obferved at every port on this coaft. 
 
 Early in January, a fhip will find much the fame currents and winds as in 
 December, but more moderate. She ought alio to follow the fame track, except 
 the eaiterly winds are very faint, in which cafe it is beft to keep more to the 
 fouthward, and not go within 20 leagues of the land, till in the latitude of 
 Madras, and then run weft for the road. This ought more efpecially to be done, 
 if the fhip leaves the Pilot in January. But whether fhe leaves him early or 
 late, if (by meeting with light winds) fhe fteers fome days SSW. or SbW. and 
 the winds fhould afterwards begin to blow frefh from NE. (perhaps in the lati- 
 tude of 16? or I4?N.) it is bell for her to fteer away W. WbS. or WSW. fo as 
 to fall in with P-ullicat, or rather with the fouth end of Armagon Sand ; efpe- 
 cially if it blows very hard, and is like to continue fo. 
 
 Early in January, O. S. 1739, captain Standard, coming to Madras from 
 Pegu, as he approached the coaft, having ftrong gales at NE. he run direclly 
 for the road, where letting go his 4^, the cable parted. The fame was done 
 with a 2d and 3d. Having then only the ftream 4-} left, he was obliged 
 to make fail, and run round Zeloan. Had he made the land near the Armagon 
 Shoal, and brought-to, the gale would have been done before he drove pafl the 
 road ; at lead: he would have- had time to have got down his top mails, and 
 when all was (hug, brought up, with 2 4-^, any where northward of 
 Madras, or in the road. There the Godolphin Indiaman from China, and feveral 
 other fhips from Bengal, rid the gale out lately. 
 
 The fhip George, captain Taylor, belonging to our company, left Vizaga- 
 patam., January 17, O. S. bound to Madras: and though the current ran near 
 1 knot to the northward for feveral days before he weighed, yet he would work 
 along more. The confequence was, what he got by the land and fea breeze-, 
 he loft by the current. In 6 weeks he reached the north end of the Armagon 
 
 land;
 
 i36 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 fond ; and finding (after 8 days longer turning) that he could get no further, he 
 bore away for Mafiulipatam for water. After fraying three days, he failed E. 
 ESE. and SE. till he got 4? or 5V eafting ; where mceing the u'ual eaflerly 
 winds, he flood S. SSW, S\V. and W. till he fell, in with Fort St. David, where 
 he 4-}ed, juft 3 months after he left Vizagapatam. He' would have done 
 this probably in a fortnight, if he had at fir 11 proceeded from Vizagapatam, as 
 he did afterwards from Mafiulipatam. 
 
 The month of February is the fineft month in the year, through all the Bay 
 
 of Bengal. 
 
 Ships in the middle, or eaftern parts of the bay, are generally fure of fine 
 breezes from the eaftward and northward ; and near the weftern fhores, they are 
 lure of land and lea breezes, or moderate gales from the WNW. to SW. 
 
 All who are bound to the Coaft of Coromandel, in this month of February, 
 from Beno-al, Orixa, or Golconda, fhould keep well off fhore, to avoid the 
 calms, land and fea-breezes, and NE. currents that then prevail from Zeloan to 
 Ballafore. From Bengal (if early ill the month of February) it is be ft to fteer 
 SbW. SSW. SW. WSW. and W. and if it blows frefh from the NE. to fall in 
 directly with the fhip's port. It will generally be better to run near the coaft S 
 or 10 leagues to the lbuthward of the fhip's port ; becaufe fhe is always fure to 
 o-et back ; befides, on getting foundings, or feeing the land from the maft-head, 
 fhe can eafily reach her port, by hauling upon a wind WNW. N W. or NN W. 
 according as her latitude requires. 
 
 Late in February, it is bell to fteer (if practicable) fouth for fome clays, then 
 SbW. SSW. and SW. &c. fo as to fall in 20 or 30 leagues to the fouthward of 
 your port; for about the time you approach the coaft, not only the northerly 
 currents run ftrorig, but the SW. wind begins to prevail along fhore. There- 
 fore, you mufl exped being obliged, when near the land,. to fteer WNW. or 
 perhaps NW. clofe hauled, with a leeward current; and make allowance 
 accordingly, bv keeping well to the fouthward in the offing while it is in your 
 
 power. 
 
 About 1745 or 6 captain Hopkins was coming from the Straits of Malacca to 
 Madras, and early in February, O. S. being pad the middle of the bay, fleered 
 weft, in the latitude of Madras, with light gales at NE. and ENE. Being come 
 Within 20 leagues of the coafl, the wind failed, and he got into variable light 
 airs and calms, with a current to the northward : this carried him near the 
 Anna on Shoal, before he got into 4-}ing- ground ; from whence he was 3 weeks 
 
 working
 
 Of the tfines for Sailing /;/ /Zv Ikdian Seas. \Zy 
 
 working up into the road. Keeping 10 or 15 leagues to the fbuthward woi 1 
 
 have prevented this misfortune. 
 
 The Succefs galley left the Pilot, February 13, 1757, and reached Madras 
 the 2 2d inftant. 1'he Ganges left the Pilot 10 days before her, and arrived at 
 Madras 1 day after her; fo that one fhip was 9 days on her paflage, and the 
 other was 20 days. The Ganges had the advantage of failing 10 days earlier in 
 the feafon than the other; but the Succefs was a better failing fhip. The great 
 difference in their paflage arofe chiefly from this : the Succefs flood from the river 
 S. SbW. SW. cScC. as before directed, by this fhe had ftcady breezes from the 
 eaftward, the whole paflage. The Ganges fleered a more direct" courfe to the 
 fbuth-weftward : fhe went not along fhore, and, by being too much to the weft- 
 ward, was out of the track of fair winds, and had much calm, with variable 
 light winds, at the very time the other was failing" with a fair fteady breeze, 
 about 40 leagues to the eaftward of her. 
 
 Ships bound from Bengal to any part of Orixa, or Golconda, ought (in the 
 fame manner) to keep off fhore, till they are to the fbuthward of their port, 
 according as they are late or early, and the NE. winds are frefh or faint. 
 
 One of our Europe fliips going from Bengal to Vizagapatam, in January, by 
 not keeping off fhore, was forced to oj-^ feveral days off the high land of 
 Baras or Pondy. Luckily a breefe fprung up, that carried her to her port, and 
 and faved the trouble of putting off fhore, as the George was obliged to do, and 
 by that means prolonged her paflage 10 or 15 days. 
 
 Ships that leave Bengal in March or April for the Coromandel Coaft, ought 
 more efpecially to avoid going to the weftward at firft. Their befl track (fup- 
 pofing the wind fan) is SbE. and S. keeping about 15 or 20 leagues to the eal to- 
 ward of the meridian of Point Palmiras, till in the latitude of 1 3? or 1 2? north ; 
 .and then SSW. and SW. till they fee Zeloan, about Batacalo. 
 
 As the SW. winds range the coaft of Orixa at this feafon, inftead of a fair 
 wind, fhips ufually leave the'Pilot with a frefh gale between WSW. and S. In 
 this cafe the be ft way is to fteer, clofe hauled, to the SSE. or even ESE. (rather 
 than tack) as the wind will permit. Thefe courfes will, in a few days, bring; 
 them into light breezes, ufually from the NE. quarter, with* which they ought 
 to fteer S. SbW. SSW. &c. till they fee Zeloan, as above. 
 
 The wind will fometimes continue fo long in the SW. quarter, that a fhip 
 will be 3? or 4? to the eaftward of Point Palmiras before they change, and per- 
 haps in latitude 15? In this cafe, when the wind comes fair, it is beft to fhape 
 her courfe direct for that part of the bay in latitude 13? or 12? and 20 leagues eaft 
 
 F f of
 
 1 88 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 of Point Palmiras ; and from thence directly to Batacalo, and ftand upon either 
 tack as the wind will permit. 
 
 The NE. breezes commonly begin between 1 7? and 1 5?N. when well to the 
 eaftward; but fometimes after leaving the Pilot, you will have light WSW. W. 
 WNW. and NW. winds, and fo continue till the (hip is in the latitude 14? nay 
 1 3? : let nothing, however, induce you to go weftward of the meridian prefcribed, 
 but fteer fouth. By doing this, you will certainly have eafterly winds at laft, 
 which to the weftward you w r ould not have : or at leaft they would be fhort, 
 weak, and unfteady, with much calm. On the other hand, it is by no means 
 advifeable to go near the Andaman Ifles, becaufe they make a dangerous lee more, 
 with a gale from the weftward ; which fometimes happens late in April. 
 
 About 26 years ago, the captains Jones, Warwick, &c. going this paffage, 
 were all loft on thofe iflands, by fuch a gale. 
 
 Ships that fail before the middle of March, and are bound to the northward 
 of Madras, need not fee Zeloan, but being got into latitude jo? or 10^? north, 
 may fteer weft for the coaft. They will always fetch to windward of Madras; 
 becaufe they will not get into the SW. winds and northerly currents till near 
 the land; but fhips that fail later, or even at that feafon, if bound more foutherly 
 ought to fee Zeloan, and from thence coafting (not too near Point Pedra) may 
 crofs the gut to Negapatnam, and vifit every other port on the coaft. 
 
 Sometimes fqualls (ufually light) with thunder and rain, happen in this 
 paffage, efpecially near Zeloan : thefe are of great advantage to late fhips, in 
 this aim feafon. They ought to be very careful, when the weather is fair, 
 and the breezes variable, to carry what fmall fails they can mufter, and trim to 
 every breeze that offers; which is too often neglected, efpecially in large mips. 
 
 By following this method of navigation, and thofe hereafter mentioned, 
 from Madras, lome ihips (even heavy-failing ones) make annually 3 voyages 
 from Bengal to Madras, and back again. Many feamen think that a good failing 
 fhip, well fitted, and difpatched quickly from each place, may make 4; but by 
 the neglect of this management, many ill ips either lofe or prolong their paffage. 
 
 Three European fhips left the Pilot lome time in April, 1758, and were 3 
 months going to Madras. A poor country fhip failed feveral days after them, 
 and got there in 30 days. Whoever compares their journals with what is 
 written above, will caiily ice in what they erred. 
 
 CCXIV.
 
 Of the befl Times for Sailing In the Indian Seas. 189 
 
 CCXIV. From Bengal to Surat and Bombay, in August, October, 
 December, January and March. 
 
 Ships that leave Bengal between Auguff. 15, and October ro, for Surat, muft 
 work clofe along the mores of Orixa, Golconda, and Coromandel, to Madras 
 or Pondicherry, as is already directed ; and from thence (as the winds arc* 
 ufually variable in October) fteer over for Zeloan, taking care not to go tod far 
 from the more, for fear of lofing the current ; except it is late in October, or 
 the winds hang eafterly. In either of thefe cafes it will be bed to ftand off 
 more, for fear of being entangled in the bite. Come no nearer Zeloan than from 
 10 to 20 leagues, 'till about the latitude 7? 20' or 7?: there it is proper to fee 
 it, becaufe the current runs fwiftly round the iflands. From thence (having 
 coafted round the Bafies) keep pretty near the more, till you fee Columbo ; and 
 then ftand off for Cape Comorin. 
 
 The winds and weather in October, round the fouth fide of Zeloan, are 
 unfettled : fometimes there are hard fqualls from the land ; at others much calm, 
 or trifling and even frefh winds from the fea, with fqualls and rain. The 
 fqualls always give warning; and it is proper, at this feafon, for fhips to °f-}, 
 when they fee them coming off more, to avoid being driven from the ifland. 
 The fame ought to be done in calms when the current fets offfhore. 
 
 By neglecting this caution, captain Pearfe, in the Sarum, was driven among 
 the Maldives, in 1738. 
 
 If (hips, at this feafon (having coafted round Zeloan, fo far as the Barberin 
 ifland) are taken with a brifk gale from the northward, it is befl to ftand over, 
 clofe hauled, for Cape Comorin, and not lofe time in working up to Columbo ; 
 but Barberin ifland mould bear eaft before you quit Zeloan. 
 
 In croffing Tuttacareen Bay, the winds will be found variable, fometimes 
 frefh, and often faint ; but a fhip having reached Cape Comorin about the middle 
 of November, will have fine -land and fea breezes to work along fhore, quite to 
 Surat. Thole land and fea breezes fometimes blow off fhore about WSW. and 
 fometimes on more ENE ; but this is feldom. The wind generally comes off 
 fhore in the night, at NE. NNE. and perhaps N. and the tea-winds generally 
 come in the forenoon, at W. WNW. and NW. amort calm ufually, though not 
 always, intervening. You mult there edgefo far off fhore, with the land-wind, 
 that the fea-breeze may bring her in again to ftretch off with the firft of the 
 next land-wind. This will commonly be done by fleering with the land-breezes 
 NWbN. NW. NWbW. or for an hour or two' WNW ; and with the fea- 
 
 F f 2 breezes
 
 ioo A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 breezes Nb\V. N. NbE. and NNE. according to the diftance off more, and as 
 thefe breezes are more or lefs northerly, and of fhort or long continuance. 
 
 By this management a fhip makes all poflible advantage, on each tack, that 
 can be made, and often faves the trouble of 4-^mg; whereas, if (he has not' 
 fufficient offing when the fea-winds begin, me will be in with the land, and be 
 obliged to 4-} before it is half done. By this means a fine flretch of 8 or 10 
 miles to the NbW. and N. will perhaps be loft: and on the other hand, if me 
 ftands too far off more, the fea-breeze may fail before me is within 6 or 8 miles 
 of the land. In fuch a cafe, a good part of the land-wind will be done before 
 it reaches her : and if it falls calm, and the fwell or current fets to the fouth- 
 ward, me mull 4-} in deep water. 
 
 The direction and ftrength of thofe land' and fea winds, being fubjecl to great 
 variation, a diligent obftrver fliould endeavour to learn how far he mould ftand 
 off more, and when he ought to 4-}. If the inequality of thofe winds fome- 
 times hinders him from making the moft of them, the lofs will be (mall, and the 
 error one day will be rectified by the next, either by 4-^ing between the breezes j 
 or fleering mere or lefs off or tow aid the land, or going a greater or lefs diftanee 
 from the more, as the cafe fhall require. 
 
 Between the middle of October and the middle of December, mips will com- 
 monly find light or moderate gales, juft after leaving the Pilot. As they go to 
 the fouthward, they v, ill ulually have frefh gales north-eafterly, with fqualls 
 and cloudy weather, efpecially drawing near Zeloan ; and as the current then 
 runs ftrongtothe weftward, the beft courfe for fome days is SbE. then S. SbW.- 
 SW. &c. fo as to make Zeloan in latitude 7? or 7? 20'N. 
 
 The current renders the difference of longitude very precarious. When fhe 
 comes into latitude 8? 20 N. fhe ought to run weft all day (looking out well for 
 the land at maft-head) SVVbS. or SSW. and in the night carrying an eafy fail, 
 heaving the lead every 2 miles run, and keep a good look-out. If the land is 
 icen northward of 7? jo'N. fhe ought to haul off, for fear of being entangled 
 with a lec-fhore. 
 
 By not following thefe cautions, many (hips have been loft. 
 
 About December, 1734, captain Tolfon, in the Heathcote Indiarrian, bound 
 from Bengal to Bombay, by fleering SSW. from the Pilot, run a-ground in the 
 ni°"ht, on the jfand near Point Ped'ra. The people were about quitting her in 
 the lonf-boat, when they found the fea had beat over the: bank into deep and 
 fmooth water. An <f-} was immediately le: go, and by that means the fhiji 
 was faved. 
 
 A year
 
 Of the bejl "Times for Sailing in the Indian Seas. 191 
 
 A year or two afterwards, captain Montgomery, in the defence Indiaman, 
 going the fame voyage, at the lame feafon, found himlclf, unexpectedly, dole 
 to Zeloan. He immediately hauled to the fouth-eaftward, and the fhip ftruck 
 thrice on the fouth end of the hank near Batacalo ; yet having freih \s ay, fhs 
 quickly got into deep water, and was faved; 
 
 Captain Sutcliffe, in the Richmond, 1736, hound from Bengal to Bafforah, 
 left the Pilot, fleered SbE. S. S\V. &c. and being at noon in latitude 8?N. fleered 
 weft to make the land, but at fun-fet could not fee any. He ordered the fame 
 courfe to be continued till mid-night, and then hauled up to SSW. At 10 P. M. 
 they faw the low land, and breakers right a head : immediately they hauled their 
 wind SEbS. (the wind being at EbN. with a large fea) and by carrying a prefted 
 fail, juft cleared the more. In this run it is remarkable, that neither the captain 
 nor the officers, by the log, had made above 2? 30' meridian diftance, weft from 
 Point Palmiras, when they faw the breakers ; though the ufual vvefting to the 
 eaft fide of Zeloan is from 4? to 5?. They were no more than 7 days from the 
 Pilot: this fufficiently ihews how ftrong the current runs weft ward in this 
 month. 
 
 A fine fhip, bound to Surat, belonging to Mr. Williamfon, was loft near Bata- 
 calo, by the captain's obftinately running directly in with Zeloan in the night, 
 December, 1754. Captain Richards alfo loft the Eagle, and his life, by neg- 
 lecting his lead, and running in with Zeloan in the day-time, in thick weather. 
 The Indiana was very near iTiaring the fame fate at the fame time. 
 
 March 3, 1754, the Succefs galley, captain Duncan-, bound to Surat, left the 
 Pilot, when Point Palmiras was- judged to bear WSW. 1 2 leagues diftance, with 
 light (but mofily fair) winds. She flood out from S. to SbE. for 3 days, and 
 for 5 days more ftood clofe hauled, to the SE. having the wind between the 
 fouth and weft, but moftly from SWbS. to SWbW. She was that day (March 
 10) at noon, in latitude 13? 36IM; and 2? 2/ meridian diftance eaft from Point 
 Palmiras. Next day, with variable light winds, me failed SbE;E. 34 miles, 
 and at noon was- in latitude 12? 56' N. and meridian diftance 2? 3j'E. then a 
 brilk breeze fprung up at NNE. with which ftie run 154 miles Sb\V. in 28 
 hours ; and in 20 hours more 135 miles : then her latitude at noon (March 13) 
 was 8? 50'N. and meridian diftance 1? 16'E. Next day, with a frefli gale at 
 NE. fome fqualls and rain, fhe run S5i?W. 154 miles; her latitude was then 
 6° 53"N. meridian diftance o? 26' W. from Point Palmiras. March 1 5, with the 
 fame winds and weather, fhe ran S77?W. 108 miles, and found- a northerl 
 current of 21 miles : her latitude was 6? 50'N. and meridian diftance 2? 12' W. 
 
 Next
 
 1^2 A New Directory /£/* the East-Indies. 
 
 Next day fhe hat! lefs wind from the fame quarter, and ran 95 miles S J4?W. 
 and found only 5 miles northerly current; her latitude being 6? 30' N. and 
 meridian diftance 3? 4z'W. from Point Palmiras. The 3d day following, with 
 un fettled weather, much rain, and variable light winds, chiefly from NNW. fhe 
 fteered to the weft ward; fo that the 19th at noon her latitude obferved was 6? o'N. 
 and meridian diftance 5? 23'W. From this (lie fteered about N. W. 6 miles, and 
 faw the Elephant on Zeloan bearing NWbN. 7 leagues off", and at the fame time 
 had a fmall current to the fouth-weftward. March 20 and 21, fhe coafted 
 (with fine land and fea breezes from NE. to SEbS.) round to Point Gaula : and 
 the laft of thofe days, at noon, that town bore NbE ' t E. 7 leagues off. From 
 thence, with a fine gale at SE. fhe ftood over for Cape Comorin, N49?W. 78 
 miles. On the 2 2d, and the next day, the wind veered to WbS. SWbW. and 
 SW. with which (clofe hauled) fhe made her courfe N40?W. diftance 63 miles. 
 The 24th flie continued the fame courfe with the fame winds, till midnight; 
 then they had 25 fathoms, and were by account, in latitude 8? o'N. meridian 
 diftance 2? 13'W. from Gaula Town. She continued to fteerNWbW. 9 miles 
 further, and being in 12 fathoms at 5 A. M. ftood off SbE. 4I miles. They 
 were then about 7 miles off fliore, faw the cape bearing WbS. a great way off; 
 and were plagued 3 days before they got round it 
 
 Being paft Cape Comorin, fhe had land and fea breezes, with which they 
 reached Cochin in 3 days, where, having rilled her water, &c. April 7, fhe failed 
 for Surat. 
 
 For 6 days fhe had briflc breezes, between WSW. SWbW. and SW. and 
 fometimes to NW. NNW. N. and NbE ; fo that her latitude was io?N. and 
 meridian diftance 3? 41'W. from Cochin. The 14th (after running 8 miles 
 SW from this point) fhe law the two fmall iflands, called Seuhelipar, to the 
 WNW. 3 leagues off; which, by this account, lie 3? 55'W. from Cochin, 
 in latitude io?N. This day fhe had light trifling \\ inds, with fome fqualls and 
 rain, that ended with fine light breezes from SE. with which fhe ran 
 two days, nearly NWbW. and was then (the 1 6th at noon) in latitude 11? 
 14'N. and 5? 57'W. from Cochin. The next day fhe had light winds from 
 SSW. to N, with which fhe made her courfe N40?W. diftance 38 miles. 
 The 1 8th fhe failed, fometimes on one tack, and fometimes on the other, fo 
 as to make her courfe N4i?W. diftance 21 miles; the winds light and vari- 
 able. The 1 9th, fhe had for 5 hours a brifk breeze, at NEbN. and the other 
 part of the day, light winds from NW. to N. fteered as yefterday, fometimes 
 from NWbN. to NNE. at others from WSW. to WNW. courfe N. 50?W. 
 
 diftance
 
 Of the bejl 'Times for Sailing hi the Indian Seas. 19$ 
 
 diftance 49 miles, latitude obferved at noon 12? 19'N. and meridian difliar.ee 
 7? 14'W. The 20th and 2 t fl:, Heady bieezes from N. to NNW. flood clofe 
 hauled, \V. and WNW. and the 2jft, at noon, was by obfervation in latitude 
 12? 21 'N. and 9? 28'W. of Cochin. Laid her head to the north-eaftward, 
 with the wind NNW. (fometimes NWbN.) Hood NEjE. to NEbN ; fo that 
 the 23d, at noon, was in latitude 13? 46'N. and meridian diftance 7? 49'W. 
 The 24th, the winds more wefterly, viz. NWbN. to NW. and NWbW. 
 flood as before, clofe hauled, from NE-^N. to NbE. latitude at noon 14? 56'N. 
 and meridian diftance 7? 15'W. The 25th, the winds ftill more wefterly, 
 viz. NW. NWbW. and WNW. flood 18 hours from NNE^E. to N. and to 
 chafe a galley, not 6 hours from WSW. to SW^W. latitude at noon 1.5? 34'N. 
 and meridian diftance 7? 8'W. The 26th and 27th, fteady breezes from 
 NW. to WNW ; flood fometimes on one tack, and fometimes on the other ; 
 fo that the 27th at noon, her latitude was, as before, 15? 34'N. and meridian 
 diftance 8? 8'W. The 28th and 29th, variable faint breezes and calms. The 
 29th at noon, latitude obferved 16? 3o'N. and meridian diftance 8? 1 7'W. 
 The 30th, and May ift, a fine breeze at W. and S.W (chiefly SW.) fleered 
 N; and the 1 ft at noon, was in latitude 1 8? 44'N. and meridian diftance 8? 
 17W. May 2, fteady breezes from SSW. to WNW; fleered the firft 6 
 hours NbE. then 12 hours NNE. and the la ft 6 hours NE ; direct courfe N. 
 2 7?E. diftance 82 miles, latitude obferved 19? 45'N. meridian diftance 7? 4o'W. 
 The 3rd, fteady breezes from WNW. to WSW. fleered firft 24 miles NE. 
 (in 7 hours) then 21 miles ENE. (in 5 hours) and had foundings 30 fathoms, 
 grey fand : this was midnight. She continued her courfe till noon between E. 
 and ENE. latitude obferved 20? 15'N. and meridian diftance 6? 23'W. the depth, 
 increafed to 42 fathoms. Next day, with a frelh breeze at WSW. fhe fleered 
 between ENE. and ESE. (having no lefs than ] 7 fathoms, foft ground) fo as to 
 make at noon her courfe E. diftance 85 miles, latitude obferved 20? 15^. and 
 meridian diftance 4? 58'W. The high land of St. John's bore them EbS. diftance 
 9 leagues. The gale continued frelh from the weftward, and run her to Surat 
 Road next day, viz. May 5, 1754. 
 
 The fame Hup (namely the Succefs Galley) bound to the fame port, under 
 the command of the fame perfon, left the Pilot, next year, March 6, and being 
 in ■'o fathoms water, Point Palmiras WbS. 20 leagues off, with frefh gales from 
 '• vV. to WSW. run, clofe hauled, to the fouth-eaftward ; fo that, on the 8th 
 at noon, her latitude obferved was I7?N. and meridian diftance from Point Pal- 
 miras 2{° eaftward. The winds became now more moderate, and the water 
 
 fmooth ;
 
 i94 d New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 fmooth; fo that the next two days fhe fleered S. 187 miles, with fine light 
 breezes between WbS. and SW. the latitude obferved at noon (the 10th) being 
 13? 44', and meridian diftance 2'? eaftward. The wind now veered to NbE. 
 and continued to blow, between that and eaft, a fine gentle breeze, and pleafant 
 weather for n days, with which the fhip went as follows; viz. March 11, 
 S5?W. ys miles, latitude obferved 12? 26'N. meridian diftance 2? 24'E. The 
 1 2th, Si7?W. 63 miles, latitude obferved 11? 26'N. meridian diftance 2? 6'E. 
 The 13th, S2 8?\V. 62 miles, latitude obferved 10? 30'N. meridian diftance 
 1? 37'E. The 14th, SW. 66 miles, latitude obferved 9? 46'N. meridian dift. 
 5o'E. The 15th, S53?W. 65 miles, latitude obferved 9? 6'N. meridian diftance 
 o?^W. The 1 6th, S48?W. 48 miles, latitude obferved 8? 3 i'N. meridian 
 diftance 38' W". The 1 7th, SW. 48 miles, latitude obferved 8? + 'N. (which is 
 7 miles northward of account) meridian diftance 1? 12W. The 1 8th, SW. 
 100 miles, latitude obferved 7? I2'N (which is 19 miles northward of account) 
 meridian diftance 2? 2 3'W. The 19th, SW7W. 97 miles, latitude obferved 
 6? 24'N. (which is 13 miles northward of account) meridian diftance 3? 38'W. 
 The 20th, fteered W. all the day, and SW. in the night, her true courfe 
 S70?W. diftance 90 miles, latitude obferved 5? 47^. which is 6 miles northward 
 of account) meridian diftance 5? 2 / W. The 21ft, (lie ran the fuft 3 hours 
 WNW. 1 9 miles ; and then law Zeloan bearing NbW. continued the fame 
 courfe 192 miles more, till fun-rife; when fhe ran WbS. 8 miles, and W. 43 
 miles ; then faw Adam's Peak, NNE. off fhore 4 leagues. Point Gaula was 
 then judged to bear ENE. 6 leagues off. She fteered weftward till noon, and 
 then was, by obfervation, in latitude 5? 5 6'N. meridian diftance from Point 
 Gaula 35'W. With this day the NE. winds ended. The next 4 days fhe had, 
 as before, fine ferene we.ither, and very light breezes, chiefly from SEbE. to 
 SW. fometimes WSVV. with which fhe fteered NWbW. and NW. The 25th 
 at noon, her latitude obferved was 7? 27'N. and meridian diftance from Gaula 
 3? 6' weftward. The 26th, the wind veered to WbS. W. WNW. and NW. 
 with which fhe fteered 13 hours, clofe hauled, 37 miles, NWbN. NNW. N. 
 and NNE. and then (at 1 A. M.) faw the land a-head, in depth 18 fathoms, 
 coarfe fand and lhells. She then tacked, and loft two days in working round 
 the cape. From March 28, (when fhe pafled Cape Comorin) to April 11, was 
 pleafant weather, with fmooth water, and variable light breezes, moftly from 
 NNW. to W. and once or twice a faint land-breeze : with thefe fhe worked 
 along fhore, often +^ing ; becaufe off ihore there was ufually a current of from 
 I to 1 mile an hour to die SSE. and SE. which would have obliged her to 4-} 
 
 in
 
 Of the bejl Times for Sailing in the Indian Seas. 105 
 
 in deep water, if it fell calm, or to lofe ground: for this reafon fhe avoided 
 going too far offfhore. 
 
 She 4->ed one day at Cochin, another at Tillicherry ; and April 11, was off 
 Mount Dilla. The two next days ihe made but little way ; fqually weather, 
 with much thunder, lightning, and rain. The 15th at noon, her latitude 
 obferved was only 12? 17'N. Mount Dilla then bearing SEtS. offfhore 4 
 leagues. From this day, till fhe reached Surat, fhe had fmooth water and 
 pleafant weather, with which fhe fleered as follows, (viz.) April 14th, with a 
 fine gale from SSE. to S. fhe ran 121 miles NNVV. and NW. and at noon 
 was in 40 fathoms water, latitude obferved 13? 3j"S' about 10 leagues WSW. 
 from Bafalore. As Angria's fleet made it dangerous to pafs further along 
 fhore, fhe put off", April 15, with moftly from WSW. to SWbW. winds : 
 fhe made her courfe N50?W. diftance 47 miles, latitude obferved 14? 14N. 
 meridian diftance 1? 4'W. from Bafalore. The 16th, with ft'eady breezes, from 
 NWbN. to WbN. fleered, clofe hauled from WbS. to SWbW.*all day except 
 3 hours that fhe flood NbW. and N. and made her courfe good, S6o°W. 
 diftance 56 miles, latitude obferved 13? 54'N. meridian diftance 1? 5o'W. 
 The 17th, brifk breezes at NWbN. to N. ran, clofe hauled, from WbN. to 
 WNW. and made the courfe W. diftance 83 miles, meridian diftance 3? 19/W. 
 and latitude obferved 13? 37'N. (which was 17 miles to the lbuthward of 
 account). The 18th, brifk breezes, from NbW. to NW. fleered, clofe 
 hauled as yefterday, and made her courfe S8o?W. diftance 30 miles, latitude 
 obferved 13? y'N. (which is 14 miles lbuthward of account) meridian diftance 
 4? 5AV. The 19th, fhe flood flill to the weft ward, with more moderate 
 breezes, from N. to NW. and made her courfe NS5?W. diftance 49 miles, 
 latitude obferved 13? ^'N. (which is only 5 miles lbuthward of account) meri- 
 dian diftance 5? 50' weft ward of Bafalore. The fnft part of the 20th, with 
 light winds from NbE. to NbW. fhe fteered from NWbW. to WbN. 39 
 miles, then from NNE. to NE. 1 7 miles, the wind at NWbN. and NNW. 
 at noon her true courfe was N44?W. diftance 36 miles, latitude obferved 13? 
 19'N. (which was again 14 miles to the lbuthward of account) meridian 
 diftance 6? i§W- °f Bafalore. The next 4 days, with moderate breezes 
 between NNW. and W. (chiefly from NWbN. to WbN.) fhe flood, clofe 
 hauled, from NEbN. to NNW. and the 24th at noon, was 5? i2 7 W. meridian 
 diftance from Bafalore ; latitude obferved 17? 50'N. She then edged away, 
 (having much the fame wind, but frefher,) all the 2<;tb, NNE,E. 100 miles. 
 The 26th, from midnight till noon, fteered NEbE. 64 miles ; her meridian 
 
 G g diftance
 
 196 A Netv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 diftance was then 5? 52'W. from Bafalore, latitude obferved 20? 9/N. depth 20 
 fathoms, mud. Not feeing the land that night, they fleered till 10 P. M. from 
 EbN. to ENE. 45 miles; in depths 18', 17, 17, 16, 16, 16}, 18 fathoms; 
 from 10 to 11, P. M. run 7 miles EbN. and deepened to 20 fathoms; hauled 
 up NE. 7 miles till midnight, and then NEbN. 19 miles till fun-rife; when 
 fhe was in 13 fathoms, and faw the land from the maft-head, about ESE. 
 At 8 A. M. me <f-^ed during the laft quarter ebb, that runs 3 knots ; and in 
 the afternoon ran up to Surat Road. 
 
 A (hip having reached Zeloan, ought to coaft round it, at a moderate 
 diftance, to Point Gaula : (he will have no occafion to o)-^, there being now 
 no land fquals or calms, but a brifk gale and ftrong current to the eaftward. 
 About Point Gaula the gale will begin' to fail : fhe ought therefore to keep 
 nearer more, and avoid opening Tuttacareen Bay, till as high as Barberia 
 lfland, and from thence {land over, clofe hauled, for Cape Comorin. Ships at 
 this feafon, will commonly have fair weather, and a frefh gale, between N. 
 and NEbN. If this gale prevent you getting quite fo high as Barberin Ifle, 
 it is generally better to ftand over, than lofe in working along fhore. 
 
 From Cape Comorin, mips ought to work up the coaft with land and fea 
 breezes, as is already direcled. If thefe breezes are intercepted by a brilk 
 gale from NNW. to NYV. which fometimes happens in December for 3 or 4 
 days) they mould turn to windward, or (if nothing can be gained that way) 
 -f-} till the gale ceaies. 
 
 Ships leaving Bengal between the middle of December and latter end of 
 January, will ulbally find much lefs current, and fairer weather, with fteady 
 (but more moderate) gales from the NE. than in the preceding month. A 
 SbW. courfe, with the Pilot, is now bed for fome days, then SSW. &c. 
 going a 1 mo ft in a right line for that part of the bay in latitude 7? 30'N. and 
 from 20 or 25 leagues eaftward of Zeloan. From thence they ought to fteer 
 W. &c. as already direcled, and make the illand about Julius Nave, or in 
 latitude 7? oN. the weather will then be fine, and the wind fair : with this 
 they fhould coaft round to Point Gaula, and (having brought that point eaft- 
 ward) ftretch over to Cape Comorin, with a moderate (perhaps a brilk) gale 
 from N. to NEbN. which is uiual at this feafon. 
 
 The direction to navigate from Bengal to the Coromandel Coaft, in February 
 and March, is pretty fufficicnt, with regard to the Bay of Ben ;al. Let it be, 
 obferved, that the meridian of Point Palmiras mould not be palled till in the 
 latitude of io?N. li\ at leaving the Pilot, the fhip is forced by the ufual 
 
 SW.
 
 Of the bejl Times for Sailing in the Indian Sf.as. 107 
 
 SW. Winds to the SE. when a fair wind come?, let her fhapc her courfe for that 
 point that lies Couth of Point Palmiras, in latitude 10?, or 9? 3o'N. From thence 
 let her {leer SW. SWbW. and WSW. for the fouth fide of Zetoan, between, 
 the Elephant and Dundre-head : and (as no time mould be loll) kt her not 
 Shorten fail; but when in latitude 7? or 6? 30'N. fleer about weft in the day, and 
 SW. all night. This perhaps may carry her into 5? 3o x N. but it matters not, 
 fhe will have the better wind for it. When her wefling is run down, (whi 1 
 is about 5?^ from Point Palmiras to the Elephant) then a WNW. or NWbW. 
 courfe will always bring her in with the ifland. . 
 
 To the fouthvvard of 8?N. and about 2? weftward of Point Palmiras, fhips 
 ufually find a northerly current of from 10 to 20 miles a day; this is what runs 
 along the north-eaft fide of Zeloan, and requires 2 or 3 days to crofs it. 
 
 When Zeloan is plainly feen, it is proper to keep 7 or 8 leagues oft" fh ore ; 
 becaufe near Point Gaula a brifk gale from SW. often begins, with which a fhip 
 ftretches over to Cape Comorin. Sometimes fhe is not able to weather it : this 
 caufes a lofs of 2 or 3 days to work round. 
 
 From Cape Comorin, fhe mufl work along fhore as well as fhe can, till it 
 happens to blow frefli down the coaft : it is then befl to fland oft" fhore (as if 
 bound to Perfia) through the Laccadives ; but this ought not to be attempted till 
 in Latitude io?N. for fear of being driven by the foutherly current, among the 
 Maldives. Should weak land and fea breezes, moderate variable winds, or 
 foutherly winds prevail, her beft way is to keep along fhore, and not fland off" 
 till fhe can gain nothing ; and that perhaps may be in latitude 14? or I5?N. She 
 need not fland to the weftward, {o far as fhips bound to Perfia, for her bufmefs 
 is chiefly to the northward. As fhe gets nothing, the wind will commonly 
 veer to the weftward, and drawing near St. John's, it will come to WSW. and 
 SW. 
 
 The following abftracTs of two pretty well-conducled voyages, by captain 
 Duncan, at this feafon, will'fct the whole in a clear light: only obferve that in 
 both voyages, he took too wide a range in the bay. In the lil voyage, when 
 the wind came NNE. (being March 10, at noon) in latitude 12? $6'N. meridian 
 diftance 2? 33'E. from Point Palmiras ; and in order to bring that point N. in 
 the latitude of 10?, inftead of fleering SbW. and SSW. he ought to have fleered 
 SWbSjW. and SW4W. and then for Zeloan, as above directed. 
 
 In the 2d voyage he took lefs range, but llill too much ; for the track pre- 
 ferred is beft. 
 
 In both voyages he kept too near Point Gaula, and thereby loft 2 days each 
 
 G g 2 voyage
 
 198 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 voyage in doubling Cape Comorin. It is true, his nearnefs to Zeloan could not" 
 be detrimental, if at leaving it with the wind at SE. March 22, 1754, and March 
 22 and 23, 1755, he had iteered W. for fome time, and then WbN. &c. fo as 
 to be lure of weathering the Cape : but no perfon ought to trufl to that ; becaufe 
 ibmetimes the wind fets in frefh from SW. earlier than the latter end of March, 
 
 The latter end of February, 1 747, captain Rannie, in the fhip Fanny, bound 
 to Surat, had the hay-cock over Point Gaula bearing N. off more 10 leagues: 
 then the wind let in frefh from SW. toWSW. with which fhe carried a prefled 
 fail a-crofs the bay, in order to weather the Cape; but could not fetch it by 10 
 leagues, and was 3 days in going round it, after making the land. 
 
 Let it be remembered, that ihips hound to Surat, who leave Bengal a little 
 later than the Succefs Galley did, run the rifque of lofing their paflage. 
 
 The Ledie loft her paflage; round Zeloan in March ; and the Two Brothers 
 bound to the Maldives, who left the Pilot March 23, NS. .1739. Captain 
 Riccards, in the Ann, loft his paflage round Zeloan the fame year, by falling 
 in with Batacalo. 
 
 CCXV. From //a'Coromandel Coast to Bengal ///January, February, 
 March, April, May, June, July, August, September, ana October. 
 
 Between the 10th of January and ifl of February, the current commonly 
 begins to creep to the northward, clofe to the fhores of Coromandel ; the rains 
 are then done, and the weather grows mild and fair. The NE. winds, that have 
 blown ftrong near 3 months, are now moderate; or perhaps land and fea breezes, 
 from ENE. to WNW. prevail. 
 
 Ships bound to Bengal from Madras, Pondicherry, &e. ought now to work 
 clofe along more, to the northward, in the fame manner as they are dice&ed to 
 the fouthward, in the month of Auguft, when bound from Bengal to this a<:n\ : 
 they ought likewife to be careful not to go any diftance from the fhore ; becaufe 
 whoever does ib, in flea d of a northerly current, with land and fea breezes, will 
 probably get into calms, and a foutherly current. They ought not now, nor in 
 Auouft, to be afraid of the fhore; but work near, and keep the lead going, and a 
 fhip ready to flay. 
 
 The current has not, for many years, changed, in Madras Road, fooner than 
 December 30, OS. (or January 10, NS.) That happened in 1745, when gover- 
 nor Morfe difpatched the Exeter, captain Wefton, for Bengal ; and a few days 
 afterward, the Falmouth, captain Field. Both mips got their-paflages in 12 or 
 15 day.-; did all their bufinefs in Bengal, and were difpatched to Europe in. 
 
 Marc';;
 
 Of the bcji Times for* Sailing in ihe Indian Seas. 199 
 
 March ; but neglecting to heave the lead, the Falmouth was almofl a-ftiore on 
 Due Point. 
 
 On the other hand, the current has been known not to change till the 1; tter 
 end of January. The Britannia, captain Sumner, failed out of Madras Road, 
 January 8, OS. (or January 19, NS.) 1 75 1, and could not get above where 
 Ihe <+-^ed in 6 days. She then returned to the road, and waited till the current 
 changed, which happened that feafon to be about January 25, OS. 
 
 Jn March and April, (hips bound to Bengal are generally Cure of either land 
 or fea breezes, or foutherly winds ; their bell: way is therefore to work as above, 
 only it is not fo neceflary to keep clofe to the fnore till part Vizagapatam. Now, 
 by keeping near the more, the paflage will be got lboner. 
 
 During the next 4 months, mips generally find freih gales from the SW. 
 quarter with cloudy weather ; and along the coait of Golconda, Orixa, and Bengal, 
 frequent fqualls with rain. 
 
 Their beft courfefrom Madras Road is NE. till near the latitude of 1 6?N. then 
 NEbN. or NNE. in the day, and NE. in the night : this will commonly bring 
 them in with the land about Pondy or Barras : if it does not, they ought imme- 
 diately to haul up NbE. N. or NbW. in order to reach the ihore. 
 
 There are inflances of fhips that have flood as above, till in the latitude of 
 Vizagapatam, and from thence NNE. and NbW. night and day; yet have only 
 fetched in with the Falfe Point, and been puzzled to know whether it was the 
 Falfe or True Point ; which, in the night efpccially, is eflentially neceilary. 
 
 Ships may fleer in fliore with any part of the land from Negapatnam to Balla- 
 fore, provided they heave the lead every i| or 2 miles run ; for there is not lo 
 much as 30 fathoms, 3 miles off more, any where all along the coaft, except 
 on the call fide of the Armagon. When fhips run directly in with that land, 
 the lead fhould be heaved every 'mile they run. 
 
 t'eing got in with any part of the land, they ought to fleer along more NE. 
 and NEbE. in from 25 to 30 fathoms water, keeping the lead going. When 
 they draw near IVIanikpatnam, the water will fhoal, and they muft haul more to 
 the eafhvard ; becaufe on that coaft the land ftretches fo. Let them pais Manik- 
 patnam in 1 5 to 16 L thorns; then fleer in from 12 to 14 fathoms, till pafr. 
 the Black Pagoda; and then in about from 17 to 18 fathoms to the Falfe Point. 
 From the Falfe Point to the True Point, in from 15 and 17 fathoms, are the 1 
 depths ; and not lefs than 13, nor above 16 fathoms, is the proper track to round 
 Point Palmiras. 
 
 As foon as a lhip, in from 14 to 15 fathoms, has got foundings upon the !
 
 200 A New Direct oiLf for the East-Indies. 
 
 {and off Point Palmiras, fhe ought to fleer north about 15 leagues, and then 
 NNW. and NWbN. and NW. till in 9 fathoms, where the pilot {loops ufually 
 
 lie at 4->. 
 
 Captain James Sterling, in the {hip Jenny, from Bombay, June 1738, °h}ed 
 in the evening, between the points, being afraid to round Point Palmiras in the 
 
 night. 
 
 In June or July, 1737, the (Europe fhip) Devonshire, captain Prince, and 
 the Leflie, captain Adbon, coming from Madras to Bengal, were fo much afraid 
 of the land, that they kept off in deep water : this carried them without the 
 hard foundings that lie off both points ; and they came into flioal water among 
 the fands, near Sagor, before they thought of hauling up for Ballafore Road. 
 The fhoal, foundings, and their quadrants, {hewed their error. After fatiguing 
 their people, and tearing their mips, fails, and rigging to-pieces, in working againrt. 
 the monfoon (in ftrong gales, a great fea, many fqualls, and rain) chiefly under 
 double and treble reefed top-fails; at the end of a fortnight, they reached Balla- 
 fore Road. If any accident had happened to their lower marts, they would, 
 (probably) never have been heard of. The AracanandChittagong rivers, which 
 are to the leeward, cannot be approached at this feafon, witijput extreme danger, 
 efpecially by {hips in diftrefs. 
 
 The cafe of the Elizabeth Indiaman, July 17, 1749; that of die Two Bro- 
 thers in July, 1739; with Mr. Miller the pilot's miftake about the points, &c. 
 Extracts of captain Duncan's journal, viz. January 10 at noon, and mort part of 
 the next day, 1754; June 18 and 19, 1756; June 8 and 9, 17 $5; March 10 
 and 11, 1756, would illurtrate this fubjecl: farther; but they are not come to 
 hand. 
 
 From Vizagapatam to Manikpatnam the land is moftly high, and the fhore lies 
 NE. and NEbE. From Manikpatnam to the Black Pagoda, the land is low, and 
 nothing remarkable is upon it, but Jagrenat and the Black Pagoda. The coaft 
 ftretches ENE. and EbN T . from the Black Pagoda, quite round Palmiras to 
 Canacka Bay ; and the land is lb very low, that no mark can be leen to alcertain 
 where a {hip is, except fome fcattered trees, and low fandy hillocks. Theie 
 may be fecn in fair weather; but then they are known to good pilots onlv, or 
 people who have long frequented the Tade. The fhore lies NEbE. and NE. 
 
 From Manikpatnam to near the Black Pagoda, there is (along more) a flat, 
 hard fand f chiefly brown) that reaches from the beach to 14 fathoms water: 
 further off this, loft ground, mixed with land: without that is all foft ground. 
 From the black Pagoda to the Falfe Point, and from thence to Point Palmiras, 
 
 the
 
 Of the beji 'Times fur Sailing in the Indian Seas. 201 
 
 the ground is hard fend, from the beach to 7 or 8 fathoms water. Further off 
 is foft ground, in feme places black, in others greenifh, often mixed with dark- 
 coloured fand, and a few broken fhells. 
 
 The hard flat finds that run out from Point Palmiras and Falfe Point, are too 
 much alike to be diftinguifhed by their foundings, or any other good mark. 
 Each has much the fame depth, at the fame diftance from the more ; each has 
 various coloured fand, chiefly brown, with fiones and fhells; and each ftretches 
 a great way into the fea. That off Point Palmiras ftretches into 21 and 22 
 fathoms; that off Falfe Point, into 1 8 or 19 fathoms. In thofc depths the fpits 
 being very narrow are quickly paft, and often without being felt by the lead. 
 
 In order to avoid bad confequences of miftaking one point for the other, 
 (which is either being embayed between them, or running pad Ballafore, among 
 the eaftern finds) a fhip's only guidance is the latitude obierved, diftance run, 
 and the foundings. An obfervation is often not to be had ; and the diftance run 
 (if flie has been long from feeing any known land) is very precarious, on account 
 of currents. You ought therefore to endeavour to fee either Jagrenat or 
 the Black Pagoda ; and for that purpofe keep well in upon the fand that lies 
 at a good diftance from the ihore. Near Jagrenat, in from 1 1 to 13 fathoms 
 water, you will not pafs it unfeen, even if the weather fhould be a little hazy. 
 Your diftance from thence to the Falfe Point is too fmall to admit anv confider- 
 able error, if the log is well attended to; confequently, both your diftance run, 
 from feeing the Pagoda, and the hard foundings off Falfe Point, will afcertaiu 
 where you are ; and you may boldly ftand on NEbE and NE. to Point Palmiras. 
 If, after feeing the high land, bad w r eather, or the night, prevents your feeing 
 the Pagodas ; when thought near Jagrenat, take care to be in 13 or 14 fathoms. 
 The fhore ftretching well to the eaftward, will make you fleer from ENE. to 
 EbN. perhaps E. Upon thefecourfes you will (when paft the Pagodas) lofe the 
 hard ground, and deepen the water to 16 or 17 fathoms. Then fteer NEbE. 
 and NE. this will carry you along in 16 and 17 fathoms, or at mo ft jS fathoms : 
 without this you ought not to go ; and when you are within about a mile of the 
 fand off the Falfe Point, the water will perhaps deepen 1 or 1 \ fathom ; but conti- 
 nuinga NE. courfe, will quickly fhoal it again to what it was before ; or perhaps you 
 will have a fathom or two lefs, hard land, which is the founding off the Falfe 
 Point. From thence continue your courfe about NEbE. in 15 to 17 fathoms, and 
 that will certainly bring you on the hard brow 11 land off Point Palmiras, in 
 from 14 to 16 fathoms. When you find this hard brown fand, immediately fte.e 
 north, &c. as above directed. 
 
 If
 
 202 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 If by misfortune, or otherwife, you fee no land after leaving Madras, or 
 have had no obfervation or reckoning, that can be depended on, and are fure of 
 being fomewhere between Point Palmiras and Ganjam (called Carepave in the 
 Coafting Pilot) even then you may go to Ballafore, with the great eft fafety, by 
 your lead. Suppoie for inftance fuch a fhip is, at this feafon, ftanding in for the 
 land NW. with thick weather, and a frefh gale from the fouthward, and in the 
 evening fhe ftrikes ground in 25 or 30 fathoms ; let her ftand on NW. without 
 fear (heaving the lead brifkly, and getting all ready for veering) till in 17 or 18 
 fathoms ; then veer round, and fteer NEbE. If upon this courfe the water 
 fhoals pretty quickly, let her ftand on to 16, 15, 14 and 13 fathoms; this laft 
 will be hard fand, and plainly (hew the fhip to be between Manikpatnam and 
 the Black Pagoda. She muft then haul off EbN. and E. till the water deepens 
 to 16 fathoms ; whence, fteering as above directed, fhe will find the foundings 
 off Falfe Point, and afterward off Point Palmiras. If fteering NEbE. in 16 and 
 17 fathoms, carries her along in much the fame depth, foft ground or mud and 
 fand, fhe is either between the Black Pagoda and Falfe Point, or between Falfe 
 Point and Point Palmiras : let her therefore continue fteering NEbE. and NE. in 
 15 to 17 fathoms ; and fhe will certainly come to hard fandy foundings from 14 
 to 16 fathoms. To know whether thefe foundings are near the True or Falfe 
 Point, let her continue her courfe ; and if it is the Falfe Point, fhe will carry 
 along much the fame depth of water, foft ground, with fometimes mixtures of 
 dark fand and (hells, from 9 or 10 leagues, and then come upon the hard land 
 foundings off Point Palmiras ; but upon a NE. courfe, the water deepens 2 or 3 
 fathoms, perhaps 4 or 5, upon being paft Point Palmiras. If fo, fhe ought 
 inftantly to haul up NNW. and NWbN. for Ballafore Road; the water will then 
 fhoal very gradually, and fhe will come into foft ground, with various mixtures 
 of land, fmall (hells (moftly broken) gravel, and dark-coloured rotten ftones, 
 that may be eafily crumbled to-pieccs. 
 
 From this it plainly appears, that failing along fhore, in fight of the high lands 
 and 'Pagodas, is the raoft fatisiactory, and the fhorteft way; and that otherwife 
 her fhip has reaion to <+-}, lie-to, or fhorten fail to fee the Pagodas or Point 
 Palmiras ; becaufe v. itli a moderate attention to her courfe, and depth of water, 
 fhe may' fail fafery' to Ballafore, without feeing any ofti.em. She need not be 
 directed by the precarious colour of the ground, but by from \ to 5 fathoms 
 incrcafed depth of water, which no man can well miftake ; and it is certainly 
 what all ftlips will find, after coming upon the hard fandofl Point Palmiras, even 
 by fteering NEtN or N EbN. No matter whether they ftrikc fnft the hard 
 
 fand
 
 Of the bcjl Times for Sailing in the Ikdian Seas. 203 
 
 land in 14 or 18 fathoms. Nor let any think the depths here mentioned are 
 too near the fhore ; they are far from it : no mifchief can ever happen by keep- 
 ing in this track ; but many fhips have fufrered by keeping too far off. 
 
 Ships that go from Madras to Bengal in September, generally fail with a fair 
 wind, but fhould fail more caflcrly than in the preceding months ; and the later 
 in this month they leave Madras, the wider range they ought to take to the 
 eaflward. For example, admit that Point Palmiras bears NE-^N. from Mad:\.% 
 and a fhip fails from Madras between the 1 ft and middle of September : lier befl 
 way will be (with a fair wind) to fhape her courfe fo as to keep Point Palmiras 
 2 points on her larboard bow, for fome days ; that is, fleer from Madras Road 
 ENE. 193 miles: this will bring the point to bear NEbN then to fleer NEbE. 
 164 miles, and the point will then bear NNE. then fleer NE. about 1 16 mil s, 
 and the point will bear about NbE. then fleer NEbN. 78 miles, and the point 
 will then bear N. then fleer NNE. 50 miles, and the point will bear about 
 NbW. near 100 miles diflance; and the nearefl part of Orixa will be alfo 70 or 
 80 miles off. From this if the wind blows brifk from SW. fhe ought to fleer 
 NbE. and N. till fhe brings Point Palmiras to bear about WNW. or WbN. fhe 
 will then have Ballafbre Bay open, and perhaps foundings, and fo may boldly 
 fleer in NW. for die road. But if (when the point bears NbW. 100 miles off) 
 the winds are light and variable, fhe had better keep on NNE. and NbE. till 
 in about the latitude of Point Palmiras, and then haul up NW. for the road. 
 This range will exceed the direct diflance above 40 miles ; yet, by avoiding the 
 current along the Coafl of Orixa and Golconda, fhe will greatly fhorten the 
 paflage. Although fome fhips, with a flrong gale, have run it along fhore, at 
 this feafon, others have failed in the attempt, and, befides prolonging their 
 paflage, have fufrered great inconveniencies. 
 
 The French fhip Union, from Baflbrah, left Madras in September 1-738, and 
 was bound to Bengal. With a frefh gale from SW. fhe fleered as is ufually 
 done in June, and reached Baliafore Road in 5 days and a half. 
 
 Three days after the Union failed, (September 5, 1738) the Expedition, 
 captain Sutdide (from Baflbrah) left Madras, and bound to Bengal. With a 
 frefh gale from SW. fhe failed as the Union did, and got very near Jagrenat 
 Pagoda in 4 days. Here it fell calm, and a flrong current running to the SW. 
 captain Sutclifre who was an experienced leaman) declared, that the frefh SW. 
 winds had deceived him, and that he mufl, at any rate, get off fhore. He was 
 obliged often to °)-^ in deep water, and the wind being faint, chiefly from 
 E. and ESE. his fhip was driven almofl as far fouthward as Vizagapatam, before 
 
 II h it
 
 204, A New Directory for the East-Indies, 
 
 it could be done. Being got offfhore at lafl, fhe fofi the current, and ranged' 
 to the NEward, as above directed. She reached Ballafore in i ftsonth from. 
 Madras ; fo thai fhe was 26 days in getting lefs than 50 lea juts. - 
 
 The fame day that captain Sutcliffe left Madras, the Gamberooiv Merchant,, 
 captain Riccards, arrived there from Bengal (having worked up along fhore, in 
 Augufr, by the help of the current, againft the wind- which is commonly called" 
 the Auguft paffage). She was laden with rice, &c. this fhe delivered, and 
 inftead of ballaft took in a load of fait. She failed again for Bengal, September 
 1 7, which was twelve days after the Expedition ; and though fhe had but 
 indifferent winds, by ranging eaftward (as above directed) fhe got into Ballafore 
 Road the fame day with the Expedition. 
 
 If a (hip fails after the middle of September, it is beft to keep Point Palmiras 
 about 3 points on the larboard bow, for fome time ; therefore let her fteer from 
 Madras Road, as follows, viz. EbN. about i^miles, ENE. 141 miles, NEbE.- 
 1 16 miles,. NE. 90 miles, NEbN. 179 miles, and then N. till fhe has foundings, 
 in from 40 to 50 fathoms, which ought to be about 100 miles EbN or ElN. 
 from Point Palmiras : {o much as fhe is lefs, fhe has been, fet to the weftward by 
 the currents. 
 
 If (lie fails about the end of September or earlier, but meets light variable 
 winds, it is proper to take a wider range ; and therefore fhe ought to fail from. 
 Madras, as follows, viz. EbN. 153 miles, ENE. 258 miles, NEbE. 1S7 miles* 
 NNE. 204 miles, and then N. till fhe get foundings in about 40 to 50 fathoms,, 
 which ought to be about 180 miles EbN. or ENE. from Point Palmiras ; but 
 fhips generally find themfelves to the weftward of this account:' fhemuft then 
 coaft along weftward to Ballafore. See the. directions for next month. 
 
 By thefe ranges it is not intended to give each exact, courfe and diftance that 
 a fhip ought to make (the variable winds render exa&iicfs impracticable) but 
 only to point out the beft tracts, by following of which (if the winds permit) 
 flie will commonly make a fpeedier pallage than by any other method. Late 
 fhips meet frequently with light variable winds, and ought rather to range more 
 eafterly than is here prelcribed. On the contrary, mips being got near the 
 latitude of Point Palmiras, with brifk foutherly winds, inftcad of fleering N. 
 had better haul up NNW. N\V. and WNW. as they bring the point to the 
 fouthwarcl of \V. 
 
 Many fhips bound to Bengal, from Madras and other neighbouring places, in 
 September, thinking they are far enough to the eaftward, fall in with the Coafl 
 of Orixa : this miles from their going loo far northward before they gft fufficient 
 
 eailing i
 
 Of the bejl Tunes for Sailing in the Indian Seas. 205 
 
 eafting: thereby they meet with light variable winds and wefterly currents. 
 Let fuch ft tike oft" more immediately, until they get into the track above men- 
 mentioned, and follow it.' The reafon of this will appear from the following 
 in fiances. 
 
 The Heathcote Indiaman, and Fanny country fhip, bound to Bengal, fuled in 
 company from Madras, September 13, 1740; but not keeping enough to the 
 eaftward, they fell in with the land ofFPondy or Barva. The Heathcote imme- 
 diately put off" more, and by taking a range ea ft ward, got to Bengal about October 
 13; but the Fanny, attempting to get her paffage along the coaft, met nothing 
 "but light winds, calms, and ftrong currents to the SW. till November. Then 
 the monfoon began with a frefh gale from NNE. and NE. with which (lie was 
 •glad, at laft, to croud under her courfes, and take a range eaftward ; by this 
 means fhe reached Bengal late in December, after being obliged to kill 6 or 8 
 Arab horfes, for want of water. 
 
 Six days after the Heathcote and Fanny left Madras, September 19, 1740, the 
 William and Mary fnow failed from Madras for Bengal ; and by failing eaftward 
 (as above directed) got to Calcutta in 25 days. It appeared afterward, by com- 
 paring journals, that at the time the Fanny was becalmed, in fhorc, between the 
 latitudes 18? and iq?N. the fnow in the fame latitude had a brifk gale at WSW. 
 This wind gradually decreafed till fhe got into the latitude of 2i?N T . where fhe 
 had foundings 70 fathoms, and was above 50 leagues eaftward of Ballafore. As 
 the breezes were very faint, fhe was defirous of getting into 4-}i n g ground, and 
 for that purpofe fleered right in fhore North : then it fell calm, and continued 
 fo for a week, during which time fhe drove with the tide and current up to Bal- 
 lafore Road. 
 
 To underftand how that was done, it muft be obferved, that from Ballafore, 
 as far as 60 or 70 leagues eaftward, and as high up the River Hughley as 
 Ingellee, the firft part of the ebb tide runs E. then ESE. SE. and SSE. S. SSW. 
 SW. and WSW. then the ebb is done ; and the flood tide begins to run on the 
 oppoftte points, viz. W. WNW. N\V. NNW. N. NNE. NE. and ENE. the 
 flood is then done, and the ebb begins again to run eaft ; but at this feafon of 
 the year, die frefhes from the river caufe much ftronger ebb tides or currents to 
 the WSW. and SW. than the flood tide in the oppolite points. The ebb tide, 
 for the fame reafon, runs much longer. 
 
 The fnow, therefore, ufually continued to °f-> in 9 or 10 fathoms water, 
 when the flood tide began to fet to the eaftward of north : fhe lay at ^ during 
 the laft part of the flood, and firft of the ebb tide, but got under weigh as foon 
 
 H h 2 as
 
 v . ' .; D rectory fur the East -Indite. 
 
 'ule got to the weflward of Jouth, and drove out SSW.-SW. an<£ 
 WSW, To : . -hen the flood beganito r et W..fhe was perhaps in from 20 to 23; 
 fathoms, ; thence con inued driving WNW. NW. NNW. and N. till 
 
 in 8, 9, or 10 fathon , where fhe again <f}ed. 
 
 ' Jlip that fails in (X.- ber, ought to take a wider range than in September. 
 Letiuch, therefore, if the winds permit, fleer from Madras Road E. 2?^, EbN. 
 3?, ENE. 3?;, NEbE. 3?, and then NE. till they fee the Coaft of Arrakan. 
 But the SW monfoon is now almofl done, and that from theNE. commences,, 
 and the winds will feldom or never permit fuch a track to be followed; therefore 
 fhe ought to be careful not to go within it, except when, near the Arrakan 
 Coafl, fhe has flrong SW. winds; then her bufinefs will be to avoid that fhore, 
 and freer NNE. N. and NNW. till in foundings, and then along the fhore to 
 Ballafore Road. If fhe has. light variable winds, fhe ought to take a wider rano-e 
 than is prefcribed; particularly with NE. winds fhe ought not (till far eaflward) 
 to fleer to the NNW. for that will certainly lofe her paflage : but rather fhe 
 ought to fleer EbS. ESE. and SEbE. by this perhaps fhe may lofe 1? 2? or 3? of 
 Latitude; but then fhe will get eafling, which is chiefly wanted ; for when fhe 
 has got well to the eaflward, fhe is always fure of winds to carry her N. NbW, 
 and NNW. 
 
 Some people judge it abfolutely neceflary to fee the Coafl of Arrakan, but it 
 is not: late fhips had better fee it; becaufe that, in fome meafure, fecures the 
 paflage. The following examples are for 1748 ; becaufe during the months of 
 Oclober and November, that year, there were lefs NW. and more fleady NE. 
 winds, than had been known for many years. 
 
 The Bombay-Caftle Indiaman, captain Brown, bound to Bengal, left Pondi- 
 cherry Road, October 2, 1 74-8, and. with light breezes from SE. to SW. and' 
 WSW. was, the 6th at noon, in latitude 13? 6N. meridian diflance 3? 31'E. 
 The 4 next days fhe had light variable winds and much calms, fo that, the 
 10th at noon, her latitude obferved was 13? 14'N. meridian diflance 4? 49ID. 
 Here moderate and other faint northerly winds began, and continued between the 
 N. and E. with fcarce any intermiflion all the paflage.- With thee winds fhe 
 flood clofe hauled, commonly ESE. and EbN. and fomecimes tacked and flood 
 NbE. to NNW. to the 24th, at noon, when her latitude obtervedwas 12? 54N. 
 meridian diflance from Pondicherry 13? 32'E. Half an hour afterward fhe faw 
 the Great Andamans from SE:E. to ENEjE. to or 12 leagues off. Atfun- 
 iet they were 4 leagues off fhore, in 46 fathoms, fine fandy ground. Sent their 
 I oajt in fhore to found, and found even foundings to within a mile of the fhore, 
 
 wh
 
 i •/ the be ft ~l:n:- f r f ' ;• "\g In the Indian Seas. 207 
 
 v/h .c were 20 fathoms. She continued working to the NNW. and eaftward, 
 as the wind permitted ; and October 29, at fun-fet, the north end of the Anda- 
 Ihan: x.L from SWb-. to SSE^E. diftance about 5 leagues. 
 
 Th _ Fanny, captain Rannie, failed from Cuddalore to Bengal, Oct. 5, 1748, 
 ?cnd with winds from the NE. quarter, fleered, cloie hauled, between EbN. and 
 NEbE. till (he has made, by her reckoning, 1 1? meridian diftance E. and was in 
 lrtitude 9?N. She then tacked and flood between NbE and NbW. (as the wind 
 would permit) till in latitude 1 8?N. and meridian diftance io?E. That day fhe 
 was, by obfervation, 20 miles fouthward of account, which caufed a fufpicion 
 of drawing too near the Coaft of Orixa. She tacked, and ftood over between 
 EbN. and SEbE. till fhe made her meridian diftance 1 6? 3o'E. and was, by 
 obfervation, in latitude 1 y?N. Several appearances of fmall birds, Sec. made them 
 judge the Arrakan fhore to be near ; but they did not fee it. The wind coming 
 to EbN. fhe tacked and ftood, clofe hauled, NbE. to NNW. this carried her to 
 Eallafore, having juft weathered Point Palmiras in 18 fathoms water ; and made 
 13? meridian diftance from Cuddalore, during a paffage of fix weeks. 
 
 The day after the Fanny left Cuddalore (October 6, 1 748) the Lapwing 
 Indiaman and Succefs galley (both bound to Bengal) failed frcmPondicherry, and 
 with the fame wind as the Fanny had, from the NE. quarter. They ftood, clofe 
 hauled, between EbN. and SEbE. till they were to the eaftward of the Nicobar 
 lliands, and then tacked and ftood northward ; patted the Cocos, coafted the 
 Arrakan ' oaft, took in fome water at the Ifland of Cudeba or Cubeb, and'croilld 
 ever to Ldlafore, which they reached, after a pafTage of 6 weeks. 
 
 This was the route taken by the Lapwing Indiaman and Succefs galley ; but 
 as tliv / ued much fafter thai the Fanny (and perhaps better than moll fhips 
 in die world) it is probable they would have got their pafiagc 8 or ten days 
 former, if they had followed the route taken by the Fanny ; for fhe fufficiently 
 avoided the current that runs along the Coaft of Orixa, without taking fo wide 
 a range ; hov% ever, the range taken by the Succefs and Lapwing makes the paffage 
 the more fecure. 
 
 CCXVI. Of Foyzgcs from the China Seas and other JLafem Parts to 
 
 Bengal. 
 
 Ships coming from China to Bengal in December, by keeping clofe to Junk- 
 feiion Head, and from thence ftanding northward, clofe hauled, commonly 
 weadier the Andaman, and fometimes the Cocos Iflands ; but they never 
 make it their bufinefs to fee either Cape Negrais or the Coaft of Arrakan. 
 
 They
 
 zo8 A New Directory jor the East-Indies. 
 
 They afterward fhud on toward the bottom of the bay ; but when the wind 
 comes too far northward, they tack and run tothe eafhvard : and when it veers 
 eafhvard, they (leer again to the northward. 
 
 The channel eafhvard of the Andaman Ifles is fair and good : nor is there 
 any thing under water to hurt a Chip, except they go very near the more. 
 Narcondam is an high tteep ifland, which may be iecw 14 leagues off, and 
 hath deep water all round it. The fmall ifland laid down to the fouthward of 
 Narcondam, in the Englifli Pilot book, and about EbN. from the Nicobar3, 
 doth not exitt. Monday, by fome called High Ifland, near the Great Anda- 
 man, is very high, and has no ground at 100 fathoms, 2 leagues off it. The 
 north end of the Andamans is a fair pretty high more, and good foundings 
 along it. Captain Barton, one voyage, juft weathered the NE. point of it, 
 in 8 fathoms ; but that was too near, for he was not \ a mile from the 
 ftrand. The Cocos Iflands are pretty high, and have many trees ; but the 
 Preparis are lower, and more barren. There are regular foundings round 
 thefe clutters of iflands. The channel between the Andamans and Cocos, 
 alfo that between the Cocos and Preparis, is very fair and good ; the water alio 
 is deep. 
 
 Many fhips, after reaching the Coatt of Arrakan, have been much at a lofs 
 In crofting over to Ballaibre, fome having judged themfelves at the Braces, 
 when they were icarcely half way : fome, too much afraid of the fands, have 
 run part Point Palmiras ; while others, too little afraid of them, or not con- 
 fidering how the Coatt lies, have got fnddenly into thefhoal water : others again 
 have been obliged to ride a hard gale at °j-^> irt the open fea ; and fome have lott 
 a month in working up this coatt, when they had no occafioii to lofe an 
 hour. 
 
 The Hetter Indiaman failed from Bencoolen September 4, 1705, bound to 
 Bengal. She worked along the Arrakan Coaft, and had the latt light of it 
 October 6, being pretty high land, bearing NE. about 10 leagues off: her 
 latitude, by account, 20? 40'N. Twelve days afterward, getting fuddenly 
 from 6 to 5 fathoms, they thought themfelves at the foot of the Braces, and 
 and tf-}ed in 5 fathoms ouze and land; latitude obferved, 21? zi'N. meridian 
 diftance from the Arrakan Coatt 3? 25'W. at the fame time, faw land from 
 N. to NW. about 6 leagues off. From thence the gunner was lent alhoie in 
 the pinnace, to enquire where they were; he returned tie 20th, with an 
 account that all was low drowned land, dettitute of inhabitants. At the 
 fame time they met a company's floop going to Chittigong, who told them 
 
 their
 
 Of the hcjl Times for Sailing m the Indian Sea*. 209 
 
 their error, and that they were 100 miles eaftward of Sagor lfic. They then 
 made the beft of their way to the weftward, and reached Ballafore October 
 24, having made 5? 30' meridian diftance, (including allowance for currents, 
 according to their beft judgment) from the Arrakan Coift to 6 ',- fathoms, in 
 fight of the Bankfhall houfe at Ballafore. Before they faw the (loop, they 
 loft foundings fometimes. Soon after, by fleering too northerly, they got 
 into fhoal water ; fhe alfo rid at <\-^ in 1 8 fathoms water, a whole night and 
 morning, in a hard gale of wind, in latitude 21? i2'N. 
 
 Captain Glen, in a country (hip, by keeping in from 22? to 24? (from 
 Sagor Ifle) paft Point Palmiras, and got into fhoal water near Falfe Point, 
 from whence fhe was 8 days in working round into Ballafore Road. The 
 Bombay Caftle Indiaman, already mentioned, would have done the fame ; for 
 without the Point, in 23 fathoms, me was fteering WNW. with the wind at 
 NE. and NEbN. but luckily in the morning law a country fhip clofe hauled ; 
 fhe did the fame, and upon a NWbN. and NNWiW. courfe juft weathered 
 Point Palmiras, in 1 7 fathoms water. 
 
 November 17, 1759, the Prince George Indiaman, bound to Bengal, was, 
 Jahuary 8, at noon, in latitude 21? i2'N. per observation, 1? 5.7'W. meridian 
 diftance from the Broken Iflands of Arrakan, depth 20 fathoms. From this 
 point with the wind at NE. fhe run (the 9th) 35 miles WNW. and had very 
 even foundings, gradually fhoaling to 12 fathoms, by 10 PM. The next 
 hour, fhe fteered the fame courfe 4 miles, and deepening her water quick to 
 15, 17, 23 fathoms, at 11 PM. hauled up NW. but in * an hour (running 
 li mile) had from 35 to 40 fathoms, then no ground at 90 fathoms; upon 
 which' they wore to the eaftward, but immediately having ground again 100 
 fathoms, wore and ftood WbN. to WbS. 8 miles, and had foundings from 
 100 fathoms, to 50, 24, 18, 10, and 5 fathoms, fliff clay : wore again and 
 fteered SE \ S. then had from 5 to 25, and prefently no ground. They con- 
 tinued this courfe 1 [ hour, *#ien they hauled gradually round to S. SSW. and 
 WSW. then ftruck ground 45 fathoms, at j 1 AM. The next hour fhe run 
 4 miles WbN. and had 36 fathoms, latitude obierved 21? 5'N. meridian 
 diftance, 3? 2'W. from Arrakan Iflands. Having a frefh gale at NE. fhe run 
 next day W. 28 miles, and was then in 15 fathoms. At 8 PM. fteered WbN. 
 y\ miles; depth 14! 13, 15. At 9 PM. fteered then WNW. 16 miles, 15 
 to 16 fathoms; but by lying-to, to fpeak to a (loop, the deepened to 22 
 fathoms. Hauled up N WbW. 3 { miles, and had the fame depths ; therefore 
 hauled NW. 2 miles, and had 50 fathoms; then NWbN. 5 miles, and had 1-7 
 
 1*.
 
 210 A Ncvo Directory /j>* the East-Indies. 
 
 16, 14 fathoms. Edged away NW. 5 miles, and bad 14, 13^-, 12, 12 
 fathoms ; then NWbW. 5 miles, and had foundings, £llj 11, £10, and 10 
 fathoms. It was then 8 AM. and fhe faw the pilot Hoops bearing SWbS. 
 
 In the foregoing accounts, the days of the month are according to the Julian 
 account, or Old Style, which is 1 1 days later than New Style, and what was 
 then ufed. 
 
 Mr. NichelfonV Account of a Pajfage from Madras, i:- and from the 
 Ifland Diego Rayes, or Rodrigues, in the South-IP 1 ' eft Monfoon. 
 
 CCXVII. Of the Pajfage from Madras to the Island Rodrigues. 
 
 This ifland is called by fome, Diego Rayes, by others Diego Roiz, and by 
 others Rodrigues. It is lituated about 1 6? of longitude eaftward of the middle 
 of Madagafcar, and fhould be diftinguifhed from a fmall ifland near the equi- 
 noctial, whofc longitude is 6? more eaftward, and which is properly named 
 Diego Rayes. 
 
 The Elizabeth failed from Madras, in company with his Majefty's fquadron 
 under the command of Commodore Tiddeman, on the 4th of Auguft, 1761. 
 We continued working: alone; fhore to the fouthward, taking all advantages of 
 the fea and land winds, and found little or no current, either for or againft us. 
 
 On the 10th, being ofFTrankabar, the Commodore was perluaded to put off 
 
 the coail ; accordingly did ib, and on the nth found we had a ftr'on,| lortherly 
 
 current againft us : by obfervation we were 25 miles to the northward of account, 
 
 and the next day 28 miles; tried the current, and found it fet 1 knot 2 fathorrisj 
 NbE. and had the winds from SE. to SW. 
 
 Thefe ftrong northerly currents obliged us to ftand in again for the coaft, and 
 determined vis to abide by our fuft plan of operation, which was, to keep 
 along the coaft as far as Negapatnaro, and from thence ftretch ov >r Zcloan, 
 to water at Trinkamalay ; then coaft it along that ifland as f>r as the Fruir's- 
 Hood , and from thence take our departure for Diego Roiz, or Rodrigues. 
 
 The 13th and 14th, the current fet us each day 22 miles to the northward. 
 On the 14th, at 10 PM. faw the land, Calderoon Wood bearing weft. From 
 thence we worked along fhore, and 4-^ed occafionly, having the current only 
 from 3 to 5 fathoms to the northward. The 15th, at noon, were off Nega- 
 patam, and took our departure from it, for Trinkamalay. From the day \ve 
 left Trankabar, and flood off the coaft to the time wc fell in with Calderoon 
 
 Wood
 
 Description of the Island Rodrigues. 
 
 21 I 
 
 Wood, was 4 days ; and from the time we made Calderoon Wood, to the 
 time we <4-}ed in the Back Bay, was 4 days : which mews, that, if we had 
 kept in fhore, we mould have been at Trinkamalay at the time we fell in 
 with Calderoon ; which was 4 days loft. 
 
 On the 1 6th, found no current; and on the 17th, at noon, the flag-itaff 
 point at Trinkamalay bore WSVV. about 5 leagues : here we had ftrong 
 WSW. winds, and were fet 24 miles to the fouthward of account. The 
 18th, at midnight, °r-}ed hi Back Bay, Trinkamalay. The 20th having 
 completed our watering, at midnight weighed from thence, with ftrong WSW. 
 winds. 
 
 We coafted it along Zeloan by help of the fea and land breezes from SE. 
 to SW. and W. and found little or no current ; and the 22d, in the evening, 
 took our departure from the Friar's Hood. 
 
 In our paffage from Zeloan to the equinoctial line, we had frefli fteady 
 gales from WSW. to SW. from the equinoclial line to latitude 3? £S. had little 
 winds, variable, and intermixed with calms ; from thence, had the winds in 
 the SE. quarter, generally from ESE. to E. foon increafing to frefli gales, 
 which continued all the way to Rodrigues, off which ifland we arrived the 
 15th of September. 
 
 CCXVIII. A Defcription of the Island Rodrigues. 
 
 Rodrigues is an ifland fituated in latitude 19? 40'S. and longitude 63? 13'E. 
 from London. The longitude we made, from the eafl coaft of Zeloan, in the 
 parrallel of the Friar's Hood, home to Rodrigues, was 21? 40'W. fo that, 
 allowing that part of Zeloan in 82? 2'E. from London, it will make Rodri- 
 gues to lie only in 60? 22'E. from London. The variation, about 10 or 12 
 leagues to the eafl: ward of this ifland, was then 9? 15'; about 3 miles off the 
 eafl end of it, 15? 52'; in the road or harbour, 9? 41'; and 8 or 9 leagues to 
 the weftward of the ifland, 12? io' weflerly. 
 
 This ifland is very high and mountainous, and from all appearances looks 
 as if it had been fliaped by an earthquake, there being fcarcclv 50 yards of 
 level land upon the whole ifland ; and it is every where covered with trees, 
 fhrubs, &c. It is about 15 or 16 miles long, and 6 broad ; environed with 
 reefs of rocks and fhoals, in fome places 3, 4, 5, or 6 miles, more or lefs, 
 from the fhore, except the NE. part of the ifland, which is bold to ; having, 
 within -I a mile of the fhore, 16, 18, and 20 fathoms. From this depth as ycu 
 fland to the northward, you will have 25, 30, 40, and 45 fathoms, 3 miles 
 
 I i . oft
 
 2I2 A New Directohy for the East-Indies. 
 
 off iTiore ; and without that, no foundings: farther to the weft ward the 
 1 mdings are more gradual. 
 
 Near the middle of the ifland there is a remarkable high peak, which is a 
 good mark for the road or harbour : when this peak bears fouth, you are; 
 a-breaft of the road ;, when it bears from SbW. to SSE. you may ftand in more 
 to 1 6 or 1 8 fathoms, gradual foundings. The bottom in general is coral rocks 
 though you m ty End fome few fpots, fand and mud. There is no fuch thing 
 as effing without the road with fafety. You may ftand off more with the 
 above bearings, the water deepening gradually to 30, 40, and 45 fathoms, in 
 fome places,, more or lefs, and then no foundings, 3 or 4 miles off more. 
 
 During the 7 weeks we cruized off this ifland, I have obferved, for feveral 
 days together, the current run fo ftrong to the weftward, that it was with great 
 difficulty we could keep our flat ion, with a conflant prefs of fail on the fhip, 
 and often foand that we loft ground for feveral days together. At other times 
 I have obferved the current ran as ftrong to the eaftward ; and when it has 
 blown fuch a gale of wind, as to put us under elbfe reefed top-fails, we have got 
 ground, or at lead held our own for feveral days together. In moderate wea- 
 ther, while lying-to for 8, 10, or 1 2 hours together, the current has kept us 
 up, fo that we have held our own. The current ran ftrongeft at the 
 full and change of the moon. 
 
 The winds blow conftantly between the E. and the SE. fometimes very 
 ftrong gales, with mowers of rain ; and moft frequently frefh gales, with fair, 
 cloudy, or hazy weather ; fometimes the weather is moderate, fair, and clear, 
 and the fea extremely fmooth for feveral days together. It is fometimes calm, 
 but very leldom. 
 
 There is a good road or harbour on the north-eaft fide of this ifland, right 
 under the peak. This is called ]\ lathe wren Bay. There is a fmall fpot cf 
 level land between 2 hills, with a level fandy beach, that extends along fhore 
 lor about {- a mile, and feems to form a imaj^und of ^ttu. m tne middle of 
 which {land 2 or 3 fmall wooden houfes : one, largeVthan ifr& reft, was the 
 habitation oi a French governor, as wtf^j^ed Iwmj^hc was a lieutenant in the 
 French Eaft-India Company *s fervice, and' had hTrfarrnly there, a furgeor., and 
 feveral fla\es, in order to get a quantity of.fea n*d land turtle in readinefs to 
 fend to Mauritius when the veflels arrived from thence, which are coriftatr 
 empl ye 1 on that fervice. ^ 
 
 Tli s mul harbour is very fife when you are in ; yoTR^hiay" %-$ in i.',~ 
 13, or 14 fathon.s fand a id mud, clear an 1 tood" hiding ground, abaut : : a 
 
 mile
 
 Defcription of the Island Rodriguez. 21 
 
 ;> 
 
 mile from a reef, in fhore from you, about | of a mile from the more, which 
 is very mallow ; whereby the landing at low water is very bad. Our whole 
 fquadron went in and °|->ed in this Road (Mathewrcn Bay) through the 
 eaftern channel, though it is very difficult of accefs; therefore I can give no 
 proper directions for failing into this road through it. 
 
 We were obliged, after a great deal of trouble in founding to find out this 
 channel, to buoy and beacon it off in a very particular manner; the foundings 
 being very irregular, one caff 10 or 12, the next 5, 4, 3, or 21 fathoms; the 
 bottom all lharp coral rocks like pyramids. I have been with a boat on the top 
 of one of thefe pyramids in a calm, when, the water being very clear, I could 
 fee it very plain, and had 3! fathoms at the boat's bow, and 13 or 14 fathoms 
 at the flern ; the top of this rock was not bigger than a fhip's mizen-top. 
 
 Notwithstanding the intricacy of this channel leading into the road, fome 
 fhips have blundered into and out of this place ; and though fome of them 
 have ftruck pretty hard upon thefe rocks, have efcaped without being loft. 
 
 A fmall fhip, that draws no more than 12 or 13 feet water, may run into 
 this road over all, by keeping the peak SbWJW. or SbWIW. and the governor's 
 houfe, if {landing, SSW1W or SSWIW. With thefe marks fuch a fhip may 
 run in clear of all danger, but will have irregular foundings. 
 
 Whilft the fquadron lay at Rodrigues, great pains was taken to found and 
 furvey this harbour. We difcovered a very fine, open, and clear paftao-e to 
 the v^eftward, which we call the Leeward or Weftern Channel, never before 
 known. Ships ufed^go out the way they came in : this was more difficult 
 and dangerous than going in ; for they ran athwart the dangerous fhoal of 
 rocks called the Middle Ground, feveral places thereof being fo fhoal that the 
 lea breaks on it in a frefh gale of wind. In fome places you may have 3 fathoms, 
 at others 2|, 2, and if fathom : thefe are all different fhoals, with 6, 7, or 
 8 fathoms water between them. 
 
 I fhould look upon it next to a miracle for a great fhip to go out clear of 
 all thefe fhoals (as they always go out with a fcant wind) although fome fhips 
 have been lucky enough to do it. 
 
 The marks to go out of the road or harbour, through the Leeward or 
 Weftern Channel, are, to run fo far to the weftward as to bring the peak about 
 a fail's breadth to the eaftward of the governor's houfe. Keep the peak fo, 
 or a little more open to the eaftward of the governor's houfe ; and that will 
 lead you out in a fafe and clear channel. Your courfe out will he about N. by W. 
 and the peak, will bear about S;E. You will have 17, 18, x6, 13, 12, and 
 
 lis no
 
 2i4 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 no Iefs than 11 fathoms; and when the eaft point of the ifland is open with 
 the eaft point of the bay, you are in 1 8 fathoms, clear of all the fhoal ; and 
 may fteer away as you pleafe. 
 
 There are gradual foundings off the NW. part of the reef; and off Booby 
 Ifland it fhoalens gradually from 30 fathoms, 2 or 3 miles off, to 7 or 8 
 fathoms within a cable's length of the reef. 
 
 You may +■} in the harbour in 11, 12, or 13 fathoms, the peak bearing 
 S|\V. or S'W. the eaft point of the bay, which is the eafternmoft land in 
 fight, EbS-^S. Booby Ifland W^N. and Diamond Ifland WSWiS. when it is in 
 one with two little hillocks near the weft part of the ifland. For a better 
 explanation of this road or harbour, I refer you to my draught of the north 
 fide of this ifland, fhewing its dangerous reef, the middle ground, and other 
 dangers. 
 
 This ifland is fubjeft to ftorms and hurricanes, and has the fame feafons they 
 have at Mauritius and Mafchareen, or, as the French name them, the Ifbnds 
 of France and Bourbon. Their ftormy months are January, February, and 
 March ; then the hurricanes are fometimes very violent. 
 
 In the harbour of Rodrigues or Mathewren Bay, there is a regular tide; 
 the flood to the eaft ward, and the ebb to the weft ward, at the rate of 2 knots 
 an hour. It flows NbE. or i- of an hour; being high water at | paft 12 
 o'clock, on the full and change of the moon ; then alfo it rifes perpendicularly 
 about 6 feet. 
 
 Plenty of water may be got here; near the governor's houfe is- a running 
 ftream of good water. There are feveral other good watering-places in this 
 bay, and all good water. There is alio plenty of fire-wood for cutting. In 
 October and November, 1761, all our fquadron wooded and watered here 
 with great eafe. 
 
 Here is abundance of feveral forts of fifh; thofe caught with hook and line 
 in deep water, are reckoned unwholfome and of a poifonous nature; thofe goC 
 in a faine, or net, in-fhore, are exceeding good and wholefome. 
 
 Here is great plenty of lea and land turtle, particularly the latter: we 
 victualled our lick people entirely upon them, and ferved the mips companies 
 feveral davs in a week with them. Here are manatees, which are good and 
 wholfome food; but herbs and vegetables are very fcarce, no part of the ifland 
 being cultivated, except a fmall garden of the governor's. 
 
 The foil is rich and fertile, and would produce any thing iown or planted 
 in it. Many things grow here ipontaneoufly, fuch as limes, oranges, figs, long- 
 pi ;»pcr,
 
 Pafage from Rodrtgues to Madras. 215 
 
 pepper, and feveral other things ; but none of them were in feafon when we 
 were there. The air of this ifland is healthy, and of a fine temperature: our 
 lick people that were fent on fhore recovered very faff, particularly thofc who 
 had the fcurvy. 
 
 CCXIX. Return from Rodrigues to Madras. 
 
 On the 1 ft of December, 1761, wc failed for India, with all the fquadron 
 in company. From the Ifland Rodrigues to latitude 27? S.- we made longitude 
 from thence 7? 36' E. found the variation 12? 34/W. and had the wind from 
 ESE. to NE. but moftly in the NE. quarter; and fometimes to the weflward 
 of north. In the above latitude, we found the winds variable, with fqualls 
 and rain ; this kind of weather continued to latitude 23? 2o'S. the winds 
 variable, but moftly between NW and SW. The longitude made to the 
 laft-mentioned latitude 11? 8'E. from Rodrigues, and there found the variation 
 7? 4i'W. Then we had the SE. trade from E. to SEbS. this continued to 
 latitude 10? 4/S. and longitude made from Rodrigues, 18? 3</E. there the 
 variation was 26'W. From thence to latitude 1? N. and longitude, from 
 Rodrigues, 28?E. the variation was 54/E. Frefh gales, and cloudy fqually 
 weather, with much rain ; the winds veering from E. to SE. S. SSW. and 
 WSW. and from that to WNW. and NW. and back to SW. again. From 
 latitude i?N. to 3? 42'N. near the fame meridian, and the variation 48E. had 
 little winds, variable ; though moftly from SW. to NW. and N. and fometimes 
 calm. Then had the NE. monfoon, or fteady moderate gales, from NNE. to 
 ENE. this continued all the way to Pullicat and Madras, with fine, clear, 
 pleafant weather, and fmooth water. We arrived at Madras, the 26th of 
 January, 1762, and made 18? 5'E. longitude to Pullicat. 
 
 CCXX. Of a Pajfage from Madras to Trinkamalay in the Island 
 Ceylon, in order tofhun the Petty Monsoon. 
 
 We failed from Madras the 9th of April, 1762, and had moftly little winds 
 and fair weather, with fome fmooth water; the winds chiefly from ESE. to 
 S. SSW. and fometimes SW. Sometimes- we had the winds m the NE. 
 quarter, and then the breezes were frefher and ft-eadier than in any other. 
 
 We had various kinds of currents, fetting fometimes ftrong to the north- 
 ward, at others as ftrong' to the fouthward, and for feveral days together were 
 ienfible of no current at all. Though the currents are thus variable in the 
 Bay of Bengal, and they change with every Ihift of wind of any ftrensth or 
 
 continuance ;
 
 216 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 continuance ; yet it may be depended on for certain, that the nearer the coaft, 
 the ftronger the current. For inflance, the ift day we left Madias, the cur- 
 rent fet the fhip 62 miles to the northward ; the next day only 8 miles ; and 
 the 3d we found no current at all. The day before we made Ceylon, the 
 (hip's run and the obfervation agreed exactly ; we made Ceylon at 6 A. M. 
 and at noon found the fhip 35 miles to the northward of our reckoning. 
 When we got in fhore, and °f-^ed, we found the current fometimes run at 
 the rate of 2 knots ; which proves, that the nearer the land, the ftronger 
 the current. Notwithifanding the different currents we met with on our 
 paiTage from Madras to Ceylon, we found our reckoning pretty juff. at our 
 
 making the land. 
 
 All alono- the Coafl of Coromandel, the variation (what little there was) was 
 wcfterly. This variation continued for 1 f or 2? of longitude eafr. from the 
 coaft, and then it changed to eaft variation ; you might depend upon it, if 
 coming in with the Coromandel Coaft, you changed your variation from E, 
 to W.you were then not more than 30 or 40 leagues from the coaft:. 
 
 In April, and to the middle of May, the winds near the NE. part of Ceylon 
 are moflly from SE. to S. in the day time, and fouth-wefterly in the night. 
 Thefe foiuherly winds occafion a very ftrong northerly current at this time 
 of the year. I would recommend it to all (hips, bound to Trinkamalay ac 
 this feafon, to make the land in latitude 8?N. which is { a degiee to the 
 ibuthward of Trinkamalay ; this will lave much time and trouble. We fell 
 in to the northward : there we met with foutherly winds and northerly 
 currents, and were forced to work up in more, °f-}ing, &c. Hereby we loft 
 " davs, not getting into Trinkamalay till the 8th of May, whereas we might 
 as well have got in the day we made the land, which was the iff of May. 
 Let this (tx\t as a caution to thofe that come this way hereafter. Remember, 
 that is better to fall in 20 leagues to the ibuthward, than 2 leagues to the 
 northward. 
 
 We lay in Trinkamalay Harbour from the 8th of May to the 5th of July, 
 in which time I Hnifhed my furvey of Trinkamalay Bay and Harbour. 
 
 From the 8th to the 14th of May, had regular land and fea breezes, with 
 hot fultrv weather ; the fea breeze at SE. and the land winds from S\V. to 
 WbS. From the 14th had no more fea breezes ; but the land winds blew 
 cpnftantly from SW'bW. to SWbS. frefh gales, and clear weather : they were 
 fometimes moderate, but very fcldom, and then of fhort continuance. Thefe 
 l.uid winds blow fa flrong fometimes, that they may juftly be called gales of 
 
 wind.
 
 Directions for failing info. Trinkamalay Bay. 217 
 
 Wmd, particularly in the opening of the great bay ; there they fomctirncs 
 blow exceffive hard. 
 
 We failed from Trinkamalay for Madras, the 5th of July. In the evening 
 of the 8ih of July, being off Calderoon Wood, we were taken a-back with 
 a very hard fquall of wind and rain, with much thunder and lightening, from 
 the NE. quarter ; which obliged us to lie-to under fore-fail and mizen ; 
 then had ftrong gales, and variable all round the compafs, with much rain, 
 thunder and lightning, lb as feveral times to be taken a-back. This weather 
 continued till midnight, when it moderated ; but we had then frefh gales 
 from SSW. with a conftant heavy rain, till 4 A. A I. Next day *f->ed in 
 Madras Road. 
 
 CCXXI. The Method of making a PaJJagefrom Trinkamalay to AIadras, 
 or any other Part of the Coast of Coromandel, in the Nobth-East 
 Monsoon. 
 
 Our fquadron (when at Trinkamalay in the north-eaft monfoon, and 
 bound to the Coaft of Coromandel) always ftretched off from Trinkamalay 
 to the eaftward ; a fmall diftance, more or lefs, as the wind hung to the north- 
 ward or eaftward ; always taking the advantage of the winds veering to the 
 eaftward, to ftand to the northward, and when the wind veered to the north- 
 ward, to ftand to the eaftward. 
 
 In the offing, the winds hang pretty much to the eaftward ; and if a degree 
 ©r two of eafting from Trinkamalay, you will be able to fetch any part of the 
 coaft you may be bound to. Several of our fhips have made a paffage from 
 Trinkamalay to Pondicherry, in 9 or ro days, and to Madras in 12 or 13 days, 
 even in December, which is the height of the north-eaft monfoon ; taking 
 care to fall in to the northward of their port in this monfoon. 
 
 CCXXfl. A Description of Trinkamalay Bay, the Harbour oj 
 
 Back Bay, &c. 
 
 Having never met with a defcription of Trinkamalay Bay, in any of our fci. 
 books or charts, nor feen any good draughts of the harbour or bay, I (hail 
 therefore be as particular in my defciiption of it as 1 can. 
 
 Trinkamalay is, perhaps, one of the fin eft harbours in the known world,, 
 being very large and iafe. It is entirely fur rounded by the land ; you he there 
 fecured from all winds that can blow ; the bottom is clear, and good holding 
 ground ; and k is ipic.ous enough to contain 1000 fail of flnps : there arc 
 many good and convenient coves for careening mips, &c. 
 
 There
 
 2i8 New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 There are feveral watering-places which are particularly diftinguifhed in my 
 draught of this bay. The mips that water in Back Bay ufually fill it in the 
 fort ; and thole which do not, rauft fill at the well in the town, where they 
 will have ^ of a mile to roll their cafks. The watering-places are commanded 
 by the forts in Back Bay ; and thofe in the harbour by the forts at the mouth 
 of the harbour. As for wood, it is to be had every where in plenty. 
 
 Freih provifions for prefent ufe, and refreihments, may be got here ; but 
 in fmall quantities, not more than fufficient to fupply two men of war. The 
 only fpecies of freih provifions to be had here, are beef, buffalo, hogs, and a 
 few fowls; little or no vegetables; and what you do get is very dear. As for 
 fea provifions, there are none of any kind to be had. * 
 
 Although the fituation of this port, and its commodioufnefs, make it a 
 convenient place for trade, little or none is carried on here. Here are no mips 
 belonging to the place, only country boats and fmall veffels. The Dutch 
 European fhips call here about the month of July or Auguft, tranfact their 
 bufinefs, and depart again before the north-eaft monfoon fcts in. They generally 
 lie in Back Bay. 
 
 The latitude of Flag-flaff Point, by feveral obfervations, is 8? 32 / N. the 
 longitude, by aftronomical obfervation, is8i?4o'E. from London ; and the 
 variation was 45' eafterly, 1760. It flows here, on the full and change, \ 
 E. and W. or at 6 hours ; and it flows perpendicularly 3 feet. The tide has 
 little motion but on the fouth fide the bay : there it runs, at fpring tides, 
 the ebb 1 1 knot to the eafhvard, and the flood a knot to the wefhvard ; the 
 flood 4 hours, and the ebb 8 hours. 
 
 The land round Trinkamalay is very remarkable, it being high land all 
 round the harbour, and no other high land near it, either to the northward or 
 fbuthward. To the fbuthward of the high land, near the harbour, is the great 
 Bay of Trinkamalay, which is 6 or 7 miles north and fouth, and 7 or 8 miles 
 eaft and weft. This bay is very deep and large, having no foundings but on 
 the fouthern fhore, which is all low land, and on which there are 4 rivers ; 
 but none of them navigable for any thing but fmall boats. 
 
 The Flag-ftafF Point is ftill more remarkable; it being very high, fteep, 
 and covered with trees. It is narrow, and ftretches out into the fea about 1 of 
 a mile ; there it terminates in a point, which breaks off fuddenly from its full 
 height, perpendicularly down to the fea, with a rock about the height of a 
 (hip's hull, in the fea, clofe to the point. On the top of this point the 
 Dutch have a look-out houfe, whereon they hoift their flag when any (hips 
 
 are
 
 Directions for Trinkamalay Harbour. ziy 
 
 are In fight in the offing : by this Trinkamalay may be known a great way at 
 fea. The high fteep point, and the Dutch flagon it, make it very confpicuous 
 This point makes the fame, coming cither from the northward or the fouthward. 
 There is alfo on the middle of the flag-ftafF point of land, a very large remarkable 
 tree, which, when in one with Chapel-Point, is a mark for clearing the fhoal 
 fouth-weft of Norway Ifland. 
 
 To the northward of Flag-fhff Point, between it and Elizabeth's Point, there 
 is a fpacious and fafe bay, called Back Bay, being a fine large round bay, with a 
 fmooth fandy beach, and good landing any where. In the SW. monfoon, it is 
 very, fafe and fmooth lying in this bay, which has a clear fandy bottom, with 
 gradual foundings toward the fhore. You may <f-^ any where in this bay from 
 7 to 12 or 15 fathoms, from * of a mile to ^ mile off more ; the Flag-Staff 
 point bearing from SEbS. to SbE. Here is plenty of water and wood. Ships 
 that water in this bay fill it in the fort, where there are feveral wells with 
 abundance of water. The proper landing-place is at the fort, where the Dutch 
 have built a wooden pier for the conveniency of landing. 
 
 CCXXIII. Directions for a Ship coming from the Southward, bound into 
 Trinquemale or Trinkamalay Harbour. 
 
 The firft danger to be guarded againft, going into Trinkamalay Bay, from 
 the fouthward, is Foul Point, which may be avoided by keeping in 14, 15, or 
 1 6 fathoms; and when Round Ifland is a fail's breadth open to the fouthward 
 of Marble Point, you are clear of that danger. Marble Point will then bear 
 WbS^S. Thus you clear the reef off Foul Point. 
 
 With the above marks you may run up the bay till you open the harbour's 
 mouth ; but you have no foundings as you run up the bay, after you are to the 
 weftward of Norway Ifland. Thus you may fleer up the bay. 
 
 The courfe into the harbour is NWbN. keeping mid-way between Round 
 Ifland and Elephant Ifland, where you ftill have no foundings. Thus you may 
 enter the harbour. 
 
 Come not near the weft point of Elephant Ifland ; for, about a cable's 
 length NWbW. therefrom, lie dangerous rocks, with only 6 feet water on 
 them ; to go clear of which, keep the White Houfe, that ftands on the top of 
 Ofnaburgh Point, 2 fails breadth open with Elephant Fort Point. Thus you 
 may avoid the Elephant Shoal. 
 
 The harbour's mouth is very narrow, being not more than 2 cables length 
 over, and 30 fathoms water in the middle ; each point fteep to, lb that you may 
 
 K k go
 
 220 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 go within a fhip's length of either : therefore you may run boldly inj, there 
 being no danger but what may be feen. 
 
 After you have got through the narrow entrance, you will come into a fine 
 fpacious harbour, where lhips lie fheltered from all winds that blow ; the bottom- 
 clear, and good holding ground. In the middle of the harbour lies a dangerous 
 fhoal of rocks, on which there are not above 5 feet water, called York Shoal f 
 this you will avoid by keeping Round Ifland a fail's breadth open with Ofna- 
 burgh Point, till you bring the flag-ftaff on Flag-ftaff Point, upon the gap o£ 
 the wood, at the town ; then you are clear of it, and may run up toward the 
 town, and <f-> where you pleafe, or in what depth you pleafe from 17 to 8. 
 fathoms. Thus you may avoid the York fhoaL Here are many convenient 
 coves and place for mips to lie in, or careen, heave down, &x. as may be feen: 
 more particularly in Mr. Nichelfon's draught of this place. 
 
 CCXXIV. DiRECTlONsyor Ships coming from .the Northward, and bound into 
 
 Trinkamalay Harbour. 
 
 You may pafs by Pigeon Ifland within a mile, a mile and an half, or 2 miles 
 of it, in 21, 22, or 24 fathoms. Pigeon Ifland is a clufter of rocks, both above 
 and under water, the outermost of which is the largeft and highefr, and has 
 feveral green trees and fhrubs on it : between it and the main there is no paffage, 
 it being all foul ground, with rocks above and under water. I have founded 
 about the outer part of this ifland, and had 22 fathoms, a mile and a half without 
 it; founded toward the ifland, and had 21, 20, 19, 17, and. 16 fathoms, 
 foft ground, within half a mile of it. 
 
 Pigeon Ifland bears from the Flag-ftaff Point, in Trinkamalav, NbW'iW. 12 
 or 13 miles. Off Pigeon Ifland, when you have 36 or 38 fathoms, you are juft 
 at the edge of the bank, and the next caft may be 40 or 42 fathom, or perhaps 
 no ground. If it proves calm, or the current is againft you, take care to <}-}> 
 rather than be let off the bank. Thus you may avoid Pigeon Ifland. 
 
 Prom Pigeon Ifland you may coaft it along as far as Elizabeth's Point in 2<r 
 or 18 fathoms, though the foundings are a little irregular between them. 
 Elizabeth's Paint is the north point of Back Bay, near Trinkamalay. Off this 
 Point lie 2 rocks above water, about the bignefs of a boat : they are about l of 
 a mile from the more ; from them to feavvard runs out a reef of rocks under 
 water, for I of a mile, having 7 or 8 fathoms water clofe to them, and much 
 about the fame water clofe to the rocks, both to the northward and fouthward 
 of them. Come no nearer than in 12 or ^fathoms; nor, to the fliore to 
 the northward of them, than in 1 7 or 1 S fathoms, the bottom being foul, and 
 
 the-.
 
 Directions for Trinkamalay Harbour. 221 
 
 the foundings very irregular in that depth of water, but more fo under that 
 depth. 
 
 Thefe rocks bear from the outer part of Pigeon Ifland SbE'E. 9 or 10 miles, 
 and from the Flag-ftaff Point NbW^W. 3 or 4 miles. If you keep Chapel 
 Point juft open with the Flag-ftaff" Point, it will bear fouth a little wefterly ; 
 and this mark will carry you clear of all danger from thefe rocks, in 1 2 and 1 3 
 fathoms water. Thus you may avoid the rocks off Elizabeth's Point. 
 
 If you keep out in 25 or 30 fathoms between the above-mentioned rocks 
 and Flag-ftaff Point, you will foon be off the bank, and lofe foundings; for 
 there are no foundings further than 2 miles off the fhore hereabout. .Off the 
 Flag-ftaff Point, not above \ of a mile, you will have 100 fathoms, or perhaps 
 no ground. 
 
 
 
 Being off the Flag-ftaff Point, with the wind fair, and bound into Trin- 
 kamalay Habour, you may borrow as near as you pleafe to the Flag-ftaff Point, 
 there being 17 or 18 fathoms within a flap's length of it, and ho danger. 
 
 Between Flag-ftaff Point and Chapel Point there arc rocks that appear above 
 water, and run out fome diftance into the fea, but are pretty fteep to, A -large 
 quarter of a mile off Chapel Point there lies a rock above water, about the big- 
 nefs of a fmall boat, from which a reef of rocks, under water, runs right out 
 to fea-ward, about a large cable's length. The v\ hite mark on the inlide of 
 Elizabeth's Point, kept about a fail's breadth open with the Flag-ftaff Point, 
 carries you clear of all danger hereabout, in 18, 20, or 22 fathoms. Thus. you 
 may avoid the reef off Chapel Point. 
 
 Being paft the rock and reef off Chapel Point, you may fteer up the bay, 
 keeping Marble Point open to the northward of Round Ifland till you open the 
 harbour's mouth : this carries you clear of all danger ; but you will have no 
 foundings. Then keep mid-way between Round Ifland and Elephant Ifland, 
 jind fteer in for the harbour's mouth NWbN. as before directed, in coming 
 from the f mthward. Thus-you may fleer up the bay. 
 
 Marble Point (a fail's breadth open to the northward of Round Ifland) is the 
 leading mark both in and out of the bay, carrying you clear of all danger on the 
 fouth fide of the bay ; and paffmg the fhoal off Foul Point in 12 fathoms. 
 
 CCXXV. Marks ^or turning into Trinkamalay Harbour. 
 
 A fhip off Foul Point Handing to the northward, and bound into Trinkamalay 
 Harbour, with the wind wellerly (as it raoft commonly is during the SW. mon- 
 foon) may borrow, on the back of the fhoal off Foul Point, into 1 4 or 15 
 
 K k 2 fathomt ;
 
 222 A New Directory for the East-Indies,. 
 
 fathoms ; and, when you open Marble Point to the northward of Round Ifland,. 
 you may keep up for Flag-ftaff Point, if the wind will let you.- For a confi- 
 derable lpace between thefe two points there are no foundings, although you have 
 foundings for i or it mile to tne northward of Foul Point. About Foul 
 Point are gradual foundings approaching it every way. From 4 to 36 fathoms, 
 on the edge of the bank, when Flag-ftafF Point bears W7N. and Foul Point 
 SiE. the next caft no ground. 
 
 The beft way to get into the Harbour of Trinkamalay, with the wind off 
 fhore, is to work up under the Flag-ftafF Point, and to the northward of it. Take 
 care not to ftand to the fouthward, fo as to open the great bay, until you can 
 pafs the reef off Chapel Point with the leading mark for clearing the fame (as 
 above mentioned) on account of the ftrong outfrt which generally accompanies 
 the wefterly winds. When you ftand to the northward, there is nothing to 
 fear but what you fee. Between the rocks of Elizabeth's Point and the Flag- 
 ftaff Point you may ftand in to 8 or 7 fathoms, the bottom being clear and fandy, 
 with gradual foundings from 20 to 7 fathoms. When you tack, and ftand 
 to the fouthward, keep as clofe to the Flag-ftafFPoint as poffible, and borrow as 
 near the rock and reef that lies off Chapel Point as you can, obferving the 
 leading- mark in the former direction. 
 
 In (landing; over toward the fouth fhore, take this- precaution ; do not be too 
 bold in {landing toward it ; for between Foul Point and Norway Ifland it is all 
 rocky and foul ground, with very irregular foundings, fhoaling 5 or 6 fathoms 
 at a caft. By no means ftand in to lefs than 20 fathoms; for about halfway 
 betwebn Foul Point and Norway Ifland, lies a very dangerous rock, with only 
 8 feet water on it, called the Northefk Rock, ^ib called from a ftore-fhip of that 
 name being loft thereon in the year 1748). 
 
 On or near this rock you have the following bearings ; Flag-ftaff Point 
 N35?W. a hill in- the country, and Marble Point, touching Wio?S. Norway 
 Ifland S3S?W. Foul Point Eio?N. There are 8 and 9 fathoms all round it, 
 and 15 and 18 fathoms a very little way without it. It is not advifeable to 
 ftand further to the fouthward, than juft to bring Round Ifland on with, or 
 touching Marble Point, until you get well to the weftward of Norway 
 Ifland. With thefe bearings you will have foundings from 18 to 20, 22, and 
 24 fathoms, all the way between Foul Point and Norway Ifland ; and, when 
 a-bre.ift Norway Ifland, 13, l\, or 15 £ '.thorns. Thus you may avoid 
 Northefk. Rock. 
 
 When you tack and ftai.1 to the Nonhwvrd again, you will lofe foundings. 
 
 It
 
 Directions^ Trinkamalay Hareour. 223 
 
 If you {land in with Chapel Point (off which lie a parcel of rocks above 
 water, called Chapel Iflands) there is no danger but what you lee. Thefe rocks, 
 and all the north fide of the bay to Elephant Ifland, and that Ifland alio, arc fleep 
 to, and no danger but what may be feen ; the land being high, and no foundings 
 on this fide the bay, a cable's length from the more. 
 
 When you tack and Hand again to the fouthward, be careful how you (land 
 toward Norway Ifland ; for without it, within it, and all round it, are rocks 
 above and under water. It is very dangerous coming near this ifland ; there- 
 fore be careful to obferve the marks above given, for keeping clear of danger on 
 the north fide of it. 
 
 When you can weather Norway Ifland, you may fland a good way further to 
 the fouthward of the great bay of Trinkamalay ; but obferve this caution. Being 
 off Norway Ifland, or a little within it, in {landing to the fouthward you will 
 often meet with large flaws of wind, which will invite you to fland on, and make 
 you imagine you can weather away Norway Ifland. Be not defirous of flanding 
 on that way too foon ; for to the SW of Norway Ifland, and a great way out in the 
 bay, lies a large flit fand-bank, on which there are only 3, 3^ and 3, fathoms. 
 What makes this the more dangerous is, it is fleep-to, has no foundings a very 
 little way without it ; and from 15 or 16 fathoms, in half a {hip's length you 
 will have 3 ' or $\ fathoms. 
 
 The marks to clear this fhoal, are thefe. Keep the great tree on the middle 
 of the Flag-flaff Point of land, in one with Chapel Point, or jufl touching it ; 
 this will carry you clear to the weflward. If you find you open the tree with 
 the point, as you fland on, tack to the northward again, in order to keep the 
 mark fhut in or touching, when you fland to the fouthward again. When you 
 can do this, you may with fafety fland over for the fouth fide of the great bay ; 
 and when you open the fmall ifland in the mouth of the lake to the fouthward 
 of Pigeons Ifland, you are clearto the fouthward of it. 
 
 In flanding to the fouth fide of the great bay, you will have no foundings 
 until you are within a mile of the fouth fhore : however, you rauft keep your 
 lead going j for it fhoalens vei;y fuddenly. You may have, the firft caft, 35 or 
 40 fathoms ; the next, perhaps, 18 or 20 fathoms; and the next, 10 or 12 
 fathoms. Into Iefs than 1 2 or 14 fathoms, it is advifeable for you not to go 
 with a great fhip, but tack immediately to the northward ; for from 12 to 4 
 fathoms are not above 2 cables length, and in fbme places not above 1. In fbme 
 places 4 fathoms at £ or £ a mile from the fhore ; therefore the difiance from 
 the fhore may be the more apt to deceive you. 
 
 The
 
 224. A New Directory/?/- the East-Indies. 
 
 The moft gradual foundings, on the fouth fide of the bay, are o# the river 
 Cotiar. The foundings are further off fhore, oppofite this river, than any- 
 other part of the bay. Ships may 4-^ off this river, in from jo to 12 fathoms, 
 fine, foft, muddy bottom, and clear, good, holding ground ; the river's 
 mouth bearing SbE. about \ of a mile ; there it is very fmooth lying in the SW. 
 monfoon. 
 
 Small fhips may <+-> in 7, 8, or 9 fathoms, any where along more, between 
 Cotiar river, and Sambor, or the eafternmoft. river ; good ground, muddy bottom, 
 fmooth water, and fafe anchorage, \ a mile from the more. 
 
 It hath been mentioned above, that in ftanding toward the fouth fide of the 
 great bay, when in 14 or 12 fathoms, you mould tack to the northward : by fb 
 doing, (fuppofing the wind wefterly, as fuppofed all along) you will lie up for 
 Round Ifland, and muff, go clofe under the lee thereof, it being fteep to : this 
 will enable you to fetch into the harbour with a full fail. As you pafs through 
 the harbour's mouth, keep clofe on board the weather more, on which you may 
 borrow within a (hip's length any where, and fo run into the harbour, and °f-} 
 where you pleafe. 
 
 Mr. NichelfonV Directions for making a Poffage from the Coaft of 
 Coromandel to Bombay, in the South-Weft Monfoon. 
 
 CCXXVI. Of Ships Jlr etching off the Coast, near Madras. 
 
 I have known feveral fhips that have made this paflage in the fouth-weft 
 monfoon, but it has been tedious and troublefome. Thole that ftretched 
 directly off the Coaft of Coromandel from Madras have met with ftrong northerly 
 ■currents, and the winds (which generally hang much foutherly) ib that they 
 have not been able to fetch any further than Acheen Head. They have been 
 hampered with foutherly winds and northerly currents, which have prevented 
 their getting lo the fouthward, and made their paflage long and troublefome. 
 Some have been three, and others four months in making this paflage, which in 
 common is reckoned a ten-weeks paflage ; whereas it may be made in fix weeks 
 with great eaic, by taking proper methods. 
 
 If I were to make a paflage from Madras to Bombay, in the fouth-weft 
 monfoon, I would work up along the Coromandel Coaft from Madras as far as 
 Negapatnam, by taking the advantage of the fea and land winds ; and would 
 cf^ \\ hen the wind and current were againft me. This paflage from Madras 
 
 to
 
 Mr. Niciielson's DiRECTiONs/?r the Coast c/*Coromandel. 225 
 
 to Ne^patnam may be made in 10, T2, or 14 days at moft, in any month of 
 the year, except May, or the latter end of April ; at that time the current runs 
 very flroiig to the northward. 
 
 In June, July, or Augutt, mips generally make a pafliige from Madras to 
 Negapatnam in 9, 10, or 11 days ; and when you are off Negapatnam, the word; 
 part of the paflage is over : or it may be faid to be made fure ; for there you 
 will meet with ftrong land-winds, which will run you over to Ceylon in 48 
 hours. I have feveral times run from Negapatnam, and 4-}ed in Back Bay at 
 Trinkamalay in 48 hours. 
 
 All along the north-eaft part of Ceylon you will meet with ttrong wetterly 
 winds, which will run you to the fouthvvard very quickly. I would advife 
 you to coaft it along Ceylon as far as the Friar's Hood : this I have done with 
 the wetterly winds from Trinkamalay in two days. From the Friar's Hood I 
 would ftretch off, and take my departure from it. With brifk gales at SW. and 
 WSW. I have crofled the line the third day from the Friar's Hood. Longitude 
 made from the Hood, 5? 26'E. variation 37'W. In latitude 2? or 2? 3o'S. you 
 meet the SE- trade-winds. I woukl run to the fouthward, into 9? 30' or io'S. 
 there you will have the SE. trade-winds blow frefh ; and there 1 would rnn 
 down my wetting. About 14? or 15? wetting from the Friar's Hood will be 
 fufficient. The land near the feaoffthe Friar's Hood, when k bears weft, lies 
 in latitude 7? i6'N. and longitude, by computation, 82? 8E. from London, 
 The longitude of Seuhelipar, which is one of the wefternmott of the Laccadive 
 Iflands, is 72? 24'E. from London ; fo the difference of longitude between the 
 Friar's Hood and Seuhelipar is 9? 44'W. If you go 4? or 5? to the wettward 
 of the Laccadives, you will be far enough to the wettward ; this will make near 
 14? or 1 5? wetting from the Friar's Hood. 
 
 Being, in latitue 9? 30' or jo?S. I would tteer fn that by the time I had mads 
 9? 30' or 10? weft longitude from the Friar's Hood, the latitude fhouli be 3? or 
 3? 30'S. Then I would tteer to the wettward 4? 30' longitude more, in latitude 
 2°S. This track leads between the iflands called Yas de Diego Rays and the 
 flioals of Bafles de Chagos. 
 
 Thofe who have made the Iflands Yas de Diego Raves in going this- track, fay 
 they are pretty high. I have leen them fet, ui Hup' s journals, from NNE. to 
 NE. dittant 8 or 9 leagues ; but know no bulinefs that (hips have near them. 
 
 They are a large clutter of iflands, the body of them near the line, and near 
 the meridian of the wefternmott of the Laccadive Iflands. I would crofs the 
 latitude of them, or any other iflands, or fhoal, in the day-time. 
 
 Being
 
 2*6 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Being in latitude 2?S. and longitude, made from the Friar's Hood, about i 4? 
 30?W. I would then crofs the line, and freer northward. Hereabout the weft 
 variation begins to increafe. Before you crofs the line, you will meet the fouth- 
 weft monfoon ; and, as foon as you get into north latitude, you will have frefli 
 gales, with hazy dirty weather, and the more fo as you run to the northward. 
 
 Having crofled the line in the above-mentioned longitude, 14? 30 W. from 
 the Friar's Hood, with this wefting you will (leer to the northward, taking 
 care to keep up your wefting. Let me remind you that the Coaft of Malabar 
 lies NNW. and SSE. fo that a north courfe will carry you in upon the fhore, 
 and a NNW. courfe will carry you parallel to the Coaft of Malabar. I have 
 feen by mips journals, that for want of this confideration, they have fallen in 
 with the coaft fooner than they intended, by fteering north. 
 
 In failing this track, the variation has increafed to about 3? or 3? 30' W. 
 This (if properly attended to) will correcl: your longitude. I have failed this 
 track, and very carefully obferved the variation, which I would recommend 
 sis your principal and fure guide, in filling along the track above-mentioned. 
 
 In latitude from 8? to io?N. and 7? to the weft ward of the Laccadive Iflands, 
 I have had 4? 1 2'W. variation ; and in the above latitudes, variation 3? 3o'W. 
 5? 30' to the weft ward of thefe iflands ; alfo, variation 2? 27' or variation 2? 3o'W. 
 in longitude 3? 30' to the wefhvard of thefe iflands ; likevvife in the above 
 latitudes, variation 1? 27', or 1? 3o'W. to the weftward of thefe iflands. And 
 variation 1? 5' or 1? 8' W. in fight of thefe iflands. When you have the varia- 
 tion as above, you may depend upon being the fcveral diftances to the weftward 
 of the Laccadive Iflands. Sailing more weft, the variation has increafed, and 
 eaftward it has decreafed. 
 
 In latitude from 1 1? to I2?N. variation 3? 5'W. 8? 26' to the weftward of 
 Goa. In latitude from 12? to I4?N. variation 3?. Alfo, variation 3? 5' W. 7? 
 weftward of Goa. In latitude 14? 3o'N. variation 2? 1 z'W. in longitude 3? 30' 
 weftward of Goa. In latitude 15?, and 15? 3o'N T . variation 1? 28' or 1? 30' 
 when 2? weftward of Goa. Off Goa, in light of the land, in latitude 15? 30', 
 variation 42 7 W. Thefe for near the year 1 760. 
 
 A ihip keeping in 2? 30'W. variation, has gone far enough to the weftward, 
 and clear of every thing, in going the outer paflage to Bombay. Keeping in 
 3?\V. variation, a ihip has been carried along to the northward, parallel to the 
 coaft. 
 
 In order to go through the remaining part of your paflage, obferve as fol- 
 lows. Steer to the northward till you <ret into latitude j8?5o': this ib the 
 
 proper
 
 Mr. Nichelson's D'ir colons for Sailing into Bombay Harbour. 227 
 
 proper latitude to fleer in to the eaflward for Bombay. You mufl mal-.c an 
 allowance, in the courfe fleered, for a foutherly current, which in the fouth- 
 weft monfoon, you generally find fetting along the coafl, from 15 to 20 and 
 24 miles in 24 hours. Steer to the eaflward in the parallel of j 8? 5o'N. till 
 you have foundings ; thefe you have full 30 leagues off the coafl, at 80 or 90 
 fathoms, and they fhoalen very gradually. 
 
 CCXXVII. Directions for Ships bound to the Malabar Coast, from 
 
 Acheen Head. 
 
 If a fhip is bound to the Coafl of Malabar, Bombay, &c. from off Acheen 
 Head, fhe mufl fleer for Ceylon,, and take care to fall in with Ceylon, about 
 the Friar's Hood or the Great Baffes ; then keep the Coafl: of Ceylon clofe 
 aboard, and coafl it by Point de Gall, &c. taking care to keep in foundings, 
 fo that in calms or contrary winds you can <f-> By this means you will 
 pievent being driven off the coafl by the flrong fouth-wefl currents ; for feme 
 fhips have been driven from Ceylon to the Maldive Iflands, by their not keeping 
 in °)-^i n g ground. 
 
 CCXXVIII. Mr. Nichelfon's Description of the Road and Harbour of 
 
 Bombay. 
 
 The town of Bombay is fituated on the SE. part of the ifland of the fame 
 name, in latitude about 19? 10'N. It is fortified all round on the land fide, 
 and has a flrong fort or caflle which commands the harbour, which is large and 
 fafe, and where fhips may lie fheltered from all winds. But it is difficult and 
 dangerous of accefs, on account of rocks and fhoals that lie hid under water; 
 therefore it would be imprudent for any perfon, not well accquainted with 
 thefe, to attempt carrying a fhip in without a pilot, who generally comes off 
 to fhips when they appear in the offing. I have often feen fhips above the 
 Sunken Rock, before the pilot has been on board ; then the greatefl danger 
 has been pafl. There are no good draughts of this harbour, nor have I ever fcen 
 either a good defcription of it, or tolerable directions for failing into or out of 
 this place. I fhall therefore give a defcription of the appearance of the land 
 about Bombay, and the dangers going into and out of this harbour ; with the 
 exacl marks for them, and the befl marks to go clear of them ; alfo of the beft 
 'f-^ing-places, both in the fair and foul weather monfoon, &c. 
 
 L 1 CCXXIX.
 
 228 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 CCXXTX. Instructions^;* knowing the Land about Bombay Harbour, 
 
 The high laud of Choul, to the fouthward of Bombay, is an high bluff to 
 the northward, and to the fouth part low land, ftrctching out to the weflward ; 
 at a diftance making very much like iflands. From thence to the northward you 
 will fee the high land of Tull ; and then the Ifland Caranjar, which is very 
 remarkable, having an high hill at each end, and being extremely low in the 
 middle : at a diftance they appear like feparate iflands. The fouthernmoft of 
 thefe hills is the largeft and higheft, and is called Great Caranjar : on the 
 northern part of this hill, quite on the top of it, are the remains of an ancient 
 monaftery, built by the Portuguefe when they were in pofleflion of this part of 
 India. The other hill on this ifland is alio high, and is called little Caranjar. 
 Thefe hills bear SbE. and NbW. of each other, and are about a mile a funder, 
 This ifland makes the eaiterrt part of the Harbour of Bombay. 
 
 A little to the northward and eaftward of Little Caranjar, lies a fmall ifland, 
 called Elephanta, which appears at the diftance of 3 or 4 leagues, with the 
 2 hills of Great and Little Caranjar, like 3 feparate iflands 5 the Elephanta the 
 loweft and fmalleft of the three. 
 
 To the northward of the Elephanta, there is a very remarkable high land, 
 which makes like a Neat's Tongue, the bluff end to the northward ; it may 
 be feen, in clear weather, 14 or 15 leagues. When the higheft part of the 
 Neat's Tongue and Bombay Church are in one, they bear NEbN. 
 
 As you run in for the land from the weflward, you will raile Malabar Point : 
 this is the fii ft part you will fee of Bombay Ifland. It appears flat, and full 
 of trees ; and as you approach it nearer, it makes in a fteep point to feaward, 
 with a fmall white pagoda a little to the northward. 
 
 Hunary and Kanary are 2 fmall iflands, in latitude 18? 45' N. and are not to- 
 be feen farther than the Tombs on Old Woman's Ifland. Kanary, when firft 
 feen, appears like 2 fmall rocks or iflands, a fmall diftance afunder, (it being, 
 higher at the extremities than in the middle) by which it may be known : 
 this is the outermoft of the two iflands, and it is fortified all round. Fron* 
 the Ifland Kanary, to the fouthernmoft part of Old Woman's Ifland, the 
 courfe is N Z E. 10 or 11 miles; the depth of water b»tween them is 8, 9, 
 and 10 fathoms. 
 
 Old Woman's Ifland is feparated from that of Bombay by only a very 
 narrow channel of the fca, which is fordablc at half-tide : it is about 1 \ mile 
 in length, but very harrow; lying NbW. and SbE. There are two 
 
 remarkable
 
 Mr. Nichelson's Directions for Sailing into Bombay Harbour. 
 
 220 
 
 remarkable white tombs on it, which may be feen a great vvav at fen.; the 
 one round, which is alfo the whiteft; the other fquarc : they bear South 52? 
 30'W. and N. 52?30 / E.'of each other. It has alfo an high grove of cocoa-nut 
 trees on thattfpart of it next Bombay. The outer, or fouthernmoft part of 
 this ifland is the higheft ; on it is a look-out houle, with attendants, where 
 flgnals ar#«made to the fort when they fee any mips or veflels in the gfima 
 The other parts of this ifland are low. 
 
 There is a remarkable hill, a confidcrable diftance in land, which bears the 
 refemblance of a Funnel turned upfide down, and is therefore called 
 Funnel Hill. Whether it be a tower built on the top of this hill, or the 
 effect of nature, I cannot tell. 
 
 CCXXX. Of the Dangers going into and out of Bombay Harbour; 
 
 with' the Marks for them. 
 
 Thp firfl: danger, that lies in the way, going into Bombay Harbour, is the 
 reef off the fouthernmoft part of the Old Woman's Ifland ; it runs out in 
 2 prongs, one toward the SE. and the other toward the SW. full 2 miles. 
 Great part of this reef dries at low water. Thefe prongs are the more dangerous, 
 fince the water does not fhoalen as you approach them, efpecially the SW. 
 prong, there being as much water within a flap's length thereof, as there 
 is a mile without it, viz. 7 f* fathoms at low, and 9 -\ fathoms at high water ; 
 and the fame water between the prongs. The SE. prong is not quite fo fteep 
 to : it fhoals from 8 or 7^ fathoms, to 5^-, 5, and \\ fathoms, with over- falls 
 of 1, or 1 \ fathom, more or lefs, at a caff. ; fo that great fhips fhould be very 
 cautious in ftanding toward this reef, and take fpecial care they do not get 
 between the prongs ; for there foundings will be no guide to them. 
 
 The marks for the outer part of the SW. prong are, the Flag-fluff of OKI 
 Woman's Ifland, on the higheft part or the Neat's Tongue, N40?E. and the 
 Funnel Hill-one with, or touching, the firfl: riling low land, at the foot of the 
 north part of Great Caranjar Hill. The Funnel then bore eaft ; had 1 \ and^ 
 fathom at low water ; a lhip's length without that, had 7 \ and 7^ fathoms, and 
 the fame water between the prongs. 
 
 The marks for the outer part of the SE. prong are, the Oyfter Rocks, a fhip's 
 length open with the NE. baflion of Bombay Fort, when the north part of 
 Great Caranjar Flill bore E3?S. and the inner part of Malabar Hill one with the 
 outer part of Old Woman's Ifland ; then had 3I and 3I fathoms at low water, with 
 great over-falls, of about 2 fathoms at a caff ; and when the Oyfter Rock 
 
 LI 2 was
 
 230 A New Directory for the East-Indies, 
 
 was in one with the NE. baftion, had 61 and 7 fathoms; at high water, 8 1 and 
 9 fathoms. 
 
 The Sunken Rock is alfo very dangerous, as it lies right in the fair way going 
 into and out of the harbour, and is fteep to ; there being as much water within 
 hali" a fliip's length of it, as any where without it. There are 7 and 61 fathoms 
 clofe to it. Part of this rock dries at low water on fpring-tidesv 
 
 The marks upon it are, Mazagon Houfe (a fquare white houfe under Maza- 
 gon Hill) juft fhut in with the NE. baftion of Bombay Fort, which bore 
 Nq?E. the Flag-ftaffon Old Woman's Ifland, Nj£W. Malabar Point, N36W. 
 and the round white Tomb on Old Woman's Ifland, which is the northernmofr, 
 N27? 30' W. 
 
 The Dolphin Rock is alfo very dangerous, it being dry at low water, 
 fpring-tides, and as there are 4 and 3* fathoms, within a fhip's length of it, at 
 low water. 
 
 The marks upon this rock are as follow. Malabar Point, half a fhip's length 
 open to the northward of the north part of the grove of cocoa-nut trees (on the 
 north part of Old Woman's Ifland) which is called Broughton's Grove ; and the 
 brab-tree in Bombay Cattle in one with Dungaree Fort ; alfo the round white 
 tomb on Old Woman's Ifland and alow brab-tree in one. 
 
 Right oppofite Bombay there is a fhoal, called the Middle Ground, which is very 
 dangerous. It is formed by fharp ragged rocks, like pyramids, and of courfe 
 has very irregular foundings upon it, fhoalening or deepening 2 fathoms at acafiv 
 This fhoal is fteep to, on all fides, having 45 or 5 fathoms cloie to it at low 
 water, which is as much as there is in any other part of the harbour. It has- 
 about 3 feet water on it, at low water, on fpring-tides ; though fometimes in the 
 fouth-wefr. monfoon, 1 have feen about the length of a boat of it dry. 
 
 The marks for the fhoaleft water on the Middle Ground are as follows. 
 Mendam's Point, N73?W. Bombay Church and Hough's Houfe in one, 
 N43?W. and Suree Fort jufl fhut in with, or touching, the eafl part of Crofs 
 Ifland, N8? 30T. 
 
 The Shoal of Caranjar is very dangerous ; it is moftly fand, but in fome places 
 there are rocks. It lies N. and S. from the fouth point of Great Caranjar to the 
 north point of Little Caranjar, and ftretehes {- of the harbour over from Caranjar. 
 It has only 6 feet water on it at low water, and in very low tides part of it is dry. 
 On mod parts of it, the foundings are very irregular, from 3 to 1 fathom. When 
 you come near it, you fhoalen your water from 61 to 4 fathoms, and foon to 3 
 and z\ fathoms. 
 
 The
 
 Mr. Nichelson'j Directions for Sailing into Bombay Habeour. 231 
 
 The marks for Caranjar fhoal, are as follow. The fouth point of the Neat's 
 Tongue juft Coming on with the weft part of Butcher's Ifland. You are then 
 on the outer edge of it. When the Funnel Hill is on with the north part of 
 the ifland that lies to the eafhvard of Little Caranjar, you are then on the north 
 part of it ; and, when the fouth part of Great Caranjar bears E [N, you are then 
 on the fouth part of it. 
 
 There is likewife another fhoal off the weft point of Pen River, called Tull 
 Point ; which is very dangerous. They arefharp rocks with irregular foundings 
 on them. On this fhoal the Medway ftruck, and narrowly efcaped being loft ; 
 it has 3 ' , 31, and 3 fathoms water upon it. As you approach it, the water fhoal- 
 ens fuddenly from 7 to 4 and 3 [. fathoms. 
 
 When the outer low point of Pen River, and the high bluff inner point of 
 the fame river are in one, (E'S.) you are right off it ; it lies right out about 
 a large mile WIN. and is pretty broad. 
 
 CCXXXI. Directions for a large Ship to round the Reef offOhn Woman's 
 Island into Bombay Road and Harbour. 
 
 Being in the offing, in between id and 12 fathoms, fteer in for the outer 
 or fouthern part of the Old Woman's Ifland, till you open the Funnel with the 
 north part of Caranjar Hill : keep them juft touching; they will then bear 
 EjN. Steer to the eaftward -with thefe marks on ; and when the Flag-ftaff 
 at Old Woman's Ifland is on with the higheft part of the Neat's Tongue, or 
 Ni}o?E. you are then a-breaft of the SW. Prong. 
 
 By ftill fteering on to the eaftward with the fame marks, you will have 9, 
 9^-, and 10 fathoms, according to the time of tide ; and when you bring the 
 ' Oyfter Rock to the weftward of Bombay Flag-ftaff, you will be clear of 
 the SE. Prong, and will have depth of water from 8', 9, 9', or 10 fathoms, 
 according to the time of tide. You may then haul to the northward, and fteer 
 up towards the harbour, with .the latter marks on ; and when you have fhut 
 in Malabar Point, with the outer part of Old Woman's Ifland in 8 fathoms, 
 then keep to the eaftward, and open Mazagon Houie a fail's breadth to the 
 eaftward of the NE. baftion, in 7!, 8, or 8^ fathoms. 
 
 Steer up the harbour with theie marks on (Nio?E.) and when Malabar Point 
 is on the north part of the Brab Grove, (on the outer part of Old Woman's 
 Ifland) you are then a-breaft of the outer or fouthern part of the Sunken Rock ; 
 and when the round white tomb is on with the fouthern part of ihe Oyfter Rock, 
 you are clear to the northward of the Sunken Rock, in 7', J$-, and 8 fathoms, 
 and may then haul in toward Old Woman's Ifland, in 7^ and yf fathoms. 
 
 To
 
 232 A New Directory jor the East-Indies. 
 
 To keep clear of the Dolphin Rock, you mu ft open the Bunder Gate to the 
 eaftward of the Battery Pier-head ; and when Malabar Point is opened a large 
 (hip's length to the northward of the north part of Broughton's Grove, you are 
 then clear to the northward of the Dolphin Rock, in 6, 64, and 6jfathoms. 
 
 Another good leading mark to go clear of the Dolphin is : go no nearer Old 
 Woman's Ifland than to bring Dungaree Fort and Bombay Flag-daft" in 
 one ; but rather keep Dungaree Fort a ihip's length open to the eaftward of the 
 Flag-ftafT; this carries you clear of all danger from Old Woman's Ifland (after 
 you are paft the Sunken Rock) in 51, 6, and 6 1 fathoms, according to the time 
 of tide. 
 
 To avoid the Middle Ground, (going to the eaftward of it) keep Suree Fort 
 a large (hip's length to the weft ward of Crofs Ifland. This will carry you 
 dire&ly to the harbour of Bombay, which is between the Middle Ground and 
 the Fort ; there you may 4-> in 4, 4 -J- or 4! fathoms at low water, and 67 or 7 
 fathoms at high water. To go to the eaftward of the Middle Ground, you muft 
 open Suree Fort, 2 large (hips length to the eaftward of Crofs Ifland ; this will 
 carry you clear in 54, 6', and 64 fathoms. The beft mark for the fouthern 
 part of the Middle Ground is, Malabar Point and Mendam's Point in one : this 
 mark will carry you clear, to the fouthward, in 57, 6, and 6^ fathoms. The 
 beft mark for the north part of the Middle Ground is, the Church-fteeple in one 
 with the Bunder Gate : this will carry you clear, to the northward, in 47, £$, 
 and 6 fathoms. 
 
 CCXXXII. Directions for turning into Bombay Harbour. 
 
 Being in the offing, with the winds contrary, and being obliged to turn it 
 
 into Bombay ; when you have got lb far in as to have opened the Funnel Hill 
 
 to the northward of the north part of Great Caranjar Hill, and you are ftanding 
 
 to the weft ward, toward the reef off Old Woman's Ifland, you ought to 
 
 tack juft before you bring the Oyfter Rock on with Bombay Flag-ftaft : this 
 
 is a good mark for you, until you (hut in Malabar Point with the outer part of 
 
 Old Woman's Ifland. The next turning mark to be obfsrved on this fide the 
 
 harbour is as follows. Having (hut in Malabar Point with the outer part of Old 
 
 Woman's Ifland, you muft not (land further toward Old Woman's Ifland than 
 
 to bring Mazagon Houfe a (hip's length open to the eaftward of the NE. baftion 
 
 of Bombay Fort : and when you have pafled the Sunken Rock (which is when 
 
 the round white tomb on Old Woman's Ifland is on the fouth part of the Oyfter 
 
 Rock) you may then ftand toward Old Woman's Ifland, and tack juft before 
 
 Dungaree
 
 Mr. NichelsonV Directions for Sailing into Bombay Harbour. 233 
 
 Dungaree Fort is on with Bombay Flag-ftaff. This is a good mark for you all 
 the way up to the harbour. 
 
 CCXXXIII. Directions for funding in towards the Eastern Shore of 
 
 Bombay Harbour. 
 
 Being in the offing as before, and turning into Bombay, you may ftand 
 toward the eaftern fhore into 7 fathoms water, but come no nearer ; and when 
 you come a-breaft the fouthernmoft point of Penn River (called Tull Point, 
 off which there is a dangerous fhoal) ftand no nearer the point than 7 fathoms, 
 and guard againft the indraught of Penn River, the flood fetting ftrong round 
 this point into Penn River. If you are drawn into this flood, you will be 
 obliged to °K>, though the bottom is very foul and rocky : this makes it 
 dangerous =f-}ing. As the flood fets ftrong in, lb does the ebb let as flrong out, 
 which may be as much to your advantage as the flood was to your diladvantage ; 
 for, if you fhouid happen to be over on that fhore, when the ebb begins to 
 make, it will fet you up to windward, and enable you to fetch into Bombay. 
 For a long mark, Hand no further to the eaftward than to keep the fouth point 
 of the Neat's Tongue a large fhip's length open to the wefhvard of the weft 
 part of Butcher's Ifland ; this will carry you clear both of this fhoal, and that 
 of Caranjar. In turning up to Bombay (as you may have occafion to make 
 feveral trips over toward Caranjar) obferve always to tack when the fouth part 
 of the Neat's Tongue comes within a fhip's length of the weft part of Butcher's 
 Ifland. 
 
 It is very common for fhips (with the wind northerly) to turn up between 
 Caranjar and the Middle Ground, and come round to the northward thereof, 
 into the harbour ; this is the beft way to come in on that occafion. The marks 
 to keep clear of the Middle Ground on all fides, have been before defcribed. 
 You will have 7, 8, or 9 fathoms between the Middle Ground and Caranjar 
 Shoal, according to the time of tide. 
 
 In the SW. monfoon (which is the bad-weather time, and when no fhips can 
 be hove down at Bombay, on account of the fwell at that feafon) fhips go 
 behind Butcher's Ifland, and heave down there, the fea being much fmoother. 
 The navigation from Bombay to Butcher's Ifland is fomswhat difficult (on 
 account of a large reef of rocks, to the fouth-weilward of Butcher's Ifland, 
 both above and under water ; and another reef of rocks, over towards the Shoal 
 of Little Caranjar, which is never feen but on extraordinary fpring tides, at low 
 water). The leading marks for cany lug a flu'p to Butcher's Ifland from 
 Bombay, are as 'follow, 
 
 Keep
 
 234 'd New Directory for ?£; East-Indies. 
 
 Keep Blatchford's Houfe (a high houfe in Bombay) about its breadth open 
 with the Battery Pier-Head; this will lead you clear of all danger to Butcher's 
 Ifland. You will have depth of water, in going, 5, 5^-, and 6 fathoms for about 
 halfway over; and as you come nearer Butcher's Ifland, you will have 7, 8, 
 and 9 fathoms, according to the time of tide. 
 
 There is another leading mark, which you will fee as you run over, equally as 
 good as Blatchford's Houfe ; and when you are -f of the diftance over, it is 
 better, by being nearer to you, and better feen ; namely : on the fouth part of 
 a low ifland (called Hog Ifland) which is extremely low, are fome tall ftrag- 
 gling trees ; about a fhip's length from the low extremity of this point, you 
 will fee a tuft of large high green trees : keeping this tuft of trees open, or 
 fhut, or juft touching with the fouth point of the Elephanta, will carry you 
 clear of all danger. Run with this mark till you open all the high land of the 
 Neat's Tongue to the eafhvard of Butcher's Ifland ; then haul up to the north- 
 ward of Butcher's Ifland, and 4-} to the eafhvard of it, right off the 
 Tower, in 41 fathoms at low water, and 6[ or 7 fathoms at high water, 1 ' s 
 cable's length from the ifland. Here the tides run very ftrong. 
 
 Between Butcher's Ifland and the Elephanta you have 6, 7, 8, and 9 fathoms 
 water. Off the NE. part of Butcher's Ifland there is a fhoal runs out for a 
 confiderable way. The SE. point is bold to ; but off the fouth point begins the 
 rocky reef, which is very dangerous. 
 
 CCXXXIV. Marks for anchoring in Bombay Harbour. 
 
 The proper place for cf-^ing is between the Middle Ground and the Fort. 
 Large fhips fhould not go higher up than to bring the brab-tree in the fort in 
 one with the flag-flair, or rather the tree open to the fouthward of the flag-ftaff. 
 Higher up is fhoal water, and not fit for great fhips. The lower part of the 
 harbour is when Mendam's and Malabar Points are in one. Between thefe is, 
 what is properly called, the harbour ; being very large and fafe, and fit to 
 contain a great number of fhips. 
 
 As good a birth, and as convenient as any in the harbour, is the church- 
 fleeple on the north part of Hough's Houfe, N47?W. Bombay Flag-ftaff N 
 29?W. and Crofs Ifland N2i?E. With thefe bearings you are about a large 
 quarter of a mile diftant from the fort, and have 4 fathoms at low water, and 
 61 and 6i fathoms at high water. No where in the harbour are there above 4t 
 fathoms at low water, fpring tides. Juft within the fouth or lower part of the 
 Middle Ground, you may lie in 4^ and 4t fathoms at low water. 
 
 When
 
 DiREcTioNsy&r Sailing out ^Bombay Harbour. 235 
 
 When mips are ready for failing, they go out into (what is called) the Road ; 
 this is to the fouth-eaftward of the Middle Ground : there they <f-> in 5 [ 
 fathoms at low water, and 7! or 8 fathoms at high water ; Bombay Flag-ftaff 
 NbWiW. or NNW. the Flag-ftaff on Old Woman's Mand WbS^S. and 
 Broushton's Grove WNWiN. diftance from the fort about a mile, or i-J mile. 
 
 There is a good 4-}ing-place for great mips without the Middle Ground. In 
 May, 1 761, the whole of his Majefty's fquadron being at Bombay, and part 
 being ready for the fea, (being then the bad-weather monfoon) it was thought 
 unfafe for thofe mips that were fit for fea, and drew too much water, to he in 
 the harbour, there not being at low water, fpring-tides, above two feet more than 
 they drew. They went without the Middle Ground : there they moored, and 
 lay in fafety, in 64 fathoms at low water, and 8 l s fathoms at high water. 
 
 The bearings in the Elizabeth, which was one of them, were as follow. 
 The Flag-ftaff on Old Woman's Ifland and the Oyfter Rock in one, WSW. 
 Bombay Flag-ftaff NWfW. Crofs Ifland N1W. the Bunder Gate on with the 
 church-fteeple, N55?W. and Mazagon Fort a fail's breadth open to theeaftward 
 of Crofs Ifland, Nio?W. Here {hips have room enough to drive, and let go 
 another °f-}, if they happen to part their cables, in the ftormy months. 
 
 There is another good cf-}ing-place, where fhips may <f} when they cannot 
 get out in one tide, which often happens in the SW. monfoon. In order to 
 keep what you have got, and to be ready to take the advantage of the next tide, 
 the beft place to 4-> u * is> t0 bring Malabar Point on with, or touching, 
 the outer part of Old Woman's Ifland N 1 q?W. and the breakers on the Sunken 
 Rock on with Bombay Flag-ftaff No?E. in 7 fathoms at low, and 9 fathoms at 
 high water. Here you are well fbeltered from the great SW. fwell by the reef 
 off Old Woman's Ifland, the bottom clear, and good holding ground. 
 
 CCXXXV. Directions for Sailing out of Bombay Harbour. 
 
 Being bound outward from Bombay, keep Suree Fort a fhip's length open 
 to the weftward of Crofs Ifland ; this will cany you clear of the Middle 
 Ground : and when you open Malabar Point to the fouthward of Mendam's, 
 you are then to the fouthward of it, and may haul out to the eaftward. Steer 
 down the harbour, with Mazagon Houfe a f hip's length, or only a fail's breadth 
 open with the NE. baftion (this will carry you clear of the Sunken Rock) till 
 Malabar Point is open to the fouthward of the Brab Grove on the outer part of 
 Old Woman's Ifland. 
 
 You are then paft the Sunken Rock, and may fhut Mazagon Houfe in with 
 the NE. baftion ; and when you open Malabar Point with the outer part of 
 
 M m Old
 
 236 New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Old Woman's Ifland, you may keep clofe up under the reef, if the wind is 
 wefterly, as it generally is in the afternoon). For a leading mark, keep Bombay 
 Flag-ftaff a fail's breadth, or a (hip's length open to the eaftward of Oyfter 
 Rock, till you have fhut the Funnel Hill in with the north part of Great 
 Caranjar Hill : then you are clear of all the reef off Old Woman's Ifland, and 
 may haul to the weftward as you pleafe. 
 
 If vou are bound out of Bombay Harbour, and have the wind fair, keep 
 Suree Fort a (hip's length open to the weftward of Crofs Ifland ; and when 
 Malabar Point is open with Mendam's Point, you are to the fouthward of the 
 Middle ground. After you are below the Middle Ground, you may keep more 
 to the eaftward, and need no other mark but to keep Mazagon Hovife a fail's 
 breadth open to the eaftward of the NE. baftion, till you (hut the Funnel Hill 
 in with the. north part of Great Caranjar Hill : then being clear of the SE. 
 Prong, you may haul to the weftward, or do as you pleafe ; and when Bombay 
 Church is on with the higheft part of the Neat's Tongue, NEbN. you are 
 clear of the SW. Prong. 
 
 If vou are coming into Bombay Harbour, with the wind large, you need no 
 other marks than thefe. When you have opened the Funnel Hill to the north- 
 ward of the north part of Caranjar Hill, keep Mazagon Houfe a fail's breadth 
 open with the NE. baftion : this will run you up the harbour, clear of all danger, 
 'till you come to the foot of the Middle Ground. Then be lure to open Suree 
 Fort a (hip's length to the weftward of Crofs Ifland, before you bring Malabar 
 Point and Mendam's Point m one ; lb run up to the weftward of the Middle 
 Ground, and <f^ between it and the Fort, as you pleafe. 
 
 The reafon why fo many marks are given in the above directions, is, to (hew 
 how near a (hip may borrow upon the reef, with a (cant wind, in order to make 
 the moft of the wind, time, and tide, in going in or out of the harbour : for, by 
 a (hip's keeping clofe up under the reef with a wefterly wind, and rounding 
 the Sunken Rock as clofe as poflible, a (hip may fetch into the harbour; whereas, 
 by giving them too large a birth, (he will not. 
 
 CCXXXVI. Marks for coming into Bombay Harbour in hazy Weather, 
 
 Being in the offing in hazy weather, fo that you cannot fee the proper marks- 
 for coming into the harbour, obferve as follows. If you cannot fee the Funnel 
 Hill (which is (bmetimes the cafe) keep the north part of great Caranj.ir EbN. 
 til] you open the harbour of Bombay : and if vou cannot fee Mazagon I laufe nor 
 Hi.'l, which is often the cafe in hazy weather, then keep the NE. baftion of 
 
 Bombay
 
 Of Wooding and Watering at Bombay. 237 
 
 Bombay Fort N. or Ni-E. this will carry you clear of the Sunken Rock. When 
 you are within that, you will lee the other marks to carry you clear of the 
 Middle Ground, &c. 
 
 Being in the opening of the harbour, and feeing nothing elfe but the NE. 
 Baftion and Dungaree Fort ; keep the faid fort juft open, or touching the NE. 
 baftion, and you may be fure that mark will carry you clear of the Middle 
 Ground, and alfo of the Dolphin Rock, into the Harbour ; where you may 
 °r-} with fafety. 
 
 CCXXXVII. The Setting of the Tides in and cut of Bombay Harbour. 
 
 The fii-fr. of the flood fets SEbE. acrofs the points of the reef off Old 
 Woman's Ifland. The middle and latter part of the flood fets E. and EbN. 
 right acrofs the harbour into Pen 11 River, very ftrong; and the ebb is the 
 reverfe. When Malabar Point and the outer part of Old Woman's Ifland are 
 in one, you then have the tide fct up the harbour NbE. It continues to fet fo 
 as far as the upper part of the Middle Ground, without which it divides. One 
 part fets ftrong over toward Butcher's Ifland, and then runs to the eaftward 
 between Butcher's Ifland and little Caranjar ; and there it (oon divides again, 
 one part fetting to the SE. between the Elephanta and little Caranjar, and the 
 other between Butcher's Ifland and the Elephanta. From the upper part of 
 the Middle Ground, another part fets to the northward, up toCrofs Ifland, from 
 thence to Suree, and fo round the Ifland of Bombay, &c. The ebb is the 
 reverfe. 
 Note, The tide runs longer without the Middle Ground than any where 
 within it. In the harbour it flows full and change nearefl: SbE. and NbW. 1 1 
 hours 15' or ± after 11 o'efock ; and in the offing N. and S. or 12 hours. It 
 flows perpendicularly 16 or 17 feet in fpring tides. 
 
 The latitude of the fouthernmofr. part of Old Woman's Ifland, by feveral 
 obfervations, is 18? 56'N. The longitude deduced from Goa, is 73? 6'E. from 
 London. The variation of the compafs, by feveral obfervations, 53' wefterly, 
 1760. 
 
 CCXXXVIII. Of Wooding and Watering #/ Bombay. 
 
 There is no wood here but what is brought over in country boats, and in 
 very fmall billets : it is pretty dear, notwithstanding great quantities are brought 
 over. The watering-place is in the middle of the garrifon ; but the water is 
 
 M m 2 conducted
 
 238 -^ New Direct ory for the East-Indie3. 
 
 conduced in pipes to the Bunder: there the cafks are filled in the boats, by 
 means of leathern hofe that lead from the cocks. There is great plenty of 
 water in the garrifon. 
 
 CCXXXIX. Of Provisions and Refreshments at Bombay. 
 
 Good provifions and refreshments are to be had here both for prefent ufe and 
 fea-ftore, fuch as fheep, hogs, ducks, fowls, frefh fifh, and vegetables, in great 
 plenty; alfo bifcuits, peafe, rice callivances, flour, arrack, and fugar; this 
 place being plentifully fupplied from Surat, and all the adjacent places, both 
 coaft-ways and from in-land parts, by country veffels bringing them down the 
 rivers. 
 
 Frefh beef is the only fcarce fpecies of provifions here : not that there is any 
 Scarcity of cattle in the country hereabout ; but the inhabitants, being Gentoos r 
 will not fell their cattle, nor fuffer them to be killed ; fo that what frefh beef the 
 fhips are fupplied with here, is brought from Surat, Bencoot, and other places 
 along the coaft. ; this makes it very fcarce. 
 
 The fituation of this port, and its being a fafe and fpacious harbour, with a 
 good marine yard and docks fit to receive large fhips, where they can be repaired 
 with all manner of conveniency, makes it a place of great trade, and much 
 frequented by fhips to and from all parts of India. There are alfo many fhips 
 and veffels belonging to this place. Here is an excellent dock-yard, where they 
 build the India Company's fhips of war, grabs, and other veffels, having great 
 plenty of timber, and all forts of naval ftores. Here are alfo two excellent dry 
 docks, one a- head of the other. The inner dock will receive a 50 gun fhip,. 
 and the outer one a 70 gun fhip : they were building another in 1763, without 
 the other two, which will be fit to receive a 74 gun fhip. 
 
 CCXL. Other Directions for knowing the Land, going [into Bombay 
 
 Harbour. 
 
 The high land of Choul is bluff to the northward, and the fouthernmoft part 
 is low land, ftretching out to the wefhvard, making very much like iflands. 
 From thence to the northward, you will fee the high land of Tull; and then 
 the Ifland Caranjar, which is very remarkable, having an high hill at each end, 
 and being extremely low in the middle. The fouthernmoft of thefe hills makes 
 not unlike a fhip's bottom, near the northernmoft end whereof there remain 
 the ruins of an ancient monaftry, by which fhips fleer when bound into 
 Bombiy Harbour. 
 
 A little
 
 Directions for Knowing the Land going into Bombay Harbour. 239 
 
 A little to the northward of Caranjar lies a fmall high ifland, called Elephaata. 
 This ifland appars, at the diftance of 4 or 5 leagues, with Caranjar, like three 
 Separate iflands, and to the eaftward is a very remarkable high land. That part 
 under which Bombay lies, makes like a Neat's Tongue, the bluff to the north- 
 ward, may be feen in clear weather, 17 or 18 leagues off. As you run in for 
 the land from the wefhvard, you raife-Malabar Point : this is the firft part you 
 will fee of Bombay ifland ; it appears flat and full of trees. The Iflands Ilunary 
 and Canary two fmall iflands, in latitude i3? 5o'N. are not to be feen further 
 than the Tombs on Old Woman's Ifland. 
 
 To go clear of the reef or prongs which run out from Old Woman's Ifland, 
 keep the Funnel or Savajee Caflle juft open with the White Building, or ruins 
 of the Antient Monaftery, on the fbuthernmoft hill of Caranjar. If, in thick 
 weather, you cannot fee the Funnel, then keep the faid building EbN. or E^N. 
 till Hunary (the wefternmofl: of the two iflands) bears S|W. or S. or that you 
 have Crofs Ifland (a fmall round ifland above Bombay Harbour) well open to 
 the eaftward of Oyfter Rock ; then you may fafely haul round the SE. Prong 
 of the reef for the road. 
 
 A ftranger fhould not round the reef under 9 fathoms, left he be hampered 
 between the Prongs, as it fometimes happens. In 6 and 5 fathoms you have 
 hard ground and over-falls. 
 
 If you are obliged to turn it, be on your guard againft the indraught into 
 Penn River, and tack in about 61 or 7 fathoms, according as you find the 
 tides ; but after any great rains yon have ftrong outfets from the rivers. 
 
 Next you are to avoid the Sunken Rock, which is fometimes dry at very low 
 tides, but moftly it has 3 feet on it at low water, and the water rifes about 1 7 
 feet. To keep clear thereof, to the eaftward, the long mark is Mazagon Houie 
 (which is a fquare white houfe under Mazagon Hill) kept open a large fail's 
 breadth with the eafternmoft baftion of Bombay Cattle. Steering with thefe 
 bearings you generally have'Sorp fathoms, till you are the length of the 
 Oyfter Rock; and for a thwart mark bring the wefternmofl: white tomb, on 
 Old Woman's Ifland, open to the northward of the eafternmoft tomb on the 
 faid ifland. 
 
 The tombs in one, is the mark for the rock; and open either wav, you are 
 above or below it. There were formerly three tombs on Old Woman's Ifland, 
 but one of them is demolished. 
 
 Another thwart mark are 5 brab-trees on Old Woman's Ifland, planted thus 
 »*! the middle one being in one with Malabar Point; the rock Is then in the 
 
 fame
 
 240 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 fame direction. It" you go to the wefhvard of the Sunken Rock, between that 
 and Oyfler Rock, which is a clear channel, of about a mile in breadth, having 
 4 fathoms, ouzy ground, between the rocks, almoft clofe to; the leading mark 
 is to keep Mazagon Houfe (hut in behind the higheft part of the cattle ; but 
 fliips generally pafs it to the eafhvard ; there they have more fea-room. 
 
 When you are pail the Sunken Rock, fleer for the fliips in the road, keeping 
 Crofs Ifland open to the eafhvard ; or if you go the inner palTage, then open 
 to the wefhvard of Sion, or Siam Hill, which is the higheft on Bombay, and 
 has a fort on it ; and when you have fliut in Malabar Hill, with the trees on 
 Mendam's Point, you are above the lower end of the Middle Ground ; then you • 
 may birth the fliip as you think proper, in 4 or 5 fathoms. The beft ground 
 for European fliips is to keep the brab-tree open ; but if the wind hangs in the 
 NE. quarter, it is much the beft way to work it round the north head of the 
 Middle Ground, becaufe the tide holds longer there than toward Old Woman's 
 Ifland, and you like wife gain a leading wind to birth your flap. When you 
 have the brab-tree, in the caftle, open to the northward of the Flag-ffaff, you 
 may run in with fafety. 
 In the harbour it flows, full and change, neareft SbE. and NbW. or \ after 
 M o'clock. 
 
 CCXLI. Directions for Ships that are obliged to fail from Bombay in the 
 T'ime of the South-We st Monsoon - , and bound to the South ward. 
 
 At this feafon of the year, as foOn as you have got without the harbour of 
 Bombay, there runs a prodigious fea, which, with a flrong ebb-tide, occafions 
 it to break, as though you were in flioal water. We experienced this in the 
 Elizabeth (which failed from Bombay, in company with the America, Falmouth, 
 and Chatham, the iff. of July, 1761, it being then the very height of the SW. 
 nionfoon) fhe pitched fore-caftle under, and filled both her upper and lower . 
 decks with water. 
 
 When you have got out of Bombay, employ your utmoft endeavours to {jet 
 an offing, taking all advantages of the fhifts of wind, which you will frequently 
 find to fliift 2, 3, and fometimes 4 points at a time, in the fqualls. This you 
 will have abundance of, with almofl conflant rain. By no means be prevailed 
 on to come to an °}-^ (as we were in the before-mentioned voyage, by the advice 
 of fome fair-weather navigators, who, I believe, were entirely ignorant of the 
 conkqucnccs of a fhip's °)-^ing in the open fea ; alio at this flormy feafon of the 
 year, where they lay expofed to the violence of both wind and fea). 
 
 Our
 
 Directions for Sailing from Bombay in the South Weft. Munfoon. 241 
 
 Our fhips rolled, laboured, and pitched, in flich a manner as I thought 
 would have torn them to pieces. At midnight the Falmouth parted her cable, 
 and flood off to Tea: we immediately made the fignal to weigh ; and it took 
 us from midnight to day-light to purchafe our °j-^, which we at laft did with 
 great difficulty. We tf-^ed in 17 fathoms, it being then low water. The 
 intention of our °h^' n g was, to prevent the flood (which was then coming on) 
 driving us to the northward. 
 
 The tides are not ftrong in the offing : we tried them every hour, whilft 
 at <+-}, and at the very ftrength of the title (though it was then fpring-tide) it 
 ran but 6 fathoms NEbE. and the ebb much the fame, fouth-wefterly. 
 
 In your endeavour to get an offing, always obferve to iland on that tack 
 you can make moft wefling of; but at the fame time having a ftrict regard to 
 the tides. If poffible, fland on that tack you can beft ftera the tide on. We 
 always flood to the weflward with the ebb, which fets V& the fouthward ; and 
 to the fouthward with the flood, which runs to the northward. 
 
 The tides flow on this part of the coaft N. and S. (12 hours) at full and 
 change of the moon. After we were to the fouthward of ij?N. we took no 
 further notice of the tide The beft latitude reckoning to get an offing, is 1 8?-'-N. 
 When you have got an offing, and are in 35 or 40 fathoms water, you may 
 fteer the along fhore courfe (if the winds will permit") making an allowance 
 of at leaft f or i. of a point, for the prodigious fwell that comes from the 
 WSW. If you can make your courfe good, SSE. and keep your depth of 
 water, you may depend on that courfe carrying you clear of all the coaft. I 
 am well allured, from my own obfervation and experience of this coaft, that, 
 from the Iflands Hunary and Kanary, the coaft lies due SSE. and NNW. fa 
 that, being 5 leagues ofFKanary, a SSE. courfe will carry you quite clear to 
 Cape Comorin ; and you will pais at much the fame diftance, from every head- 
 land all along the coaft that you were from Kanary. 
 
 Although the wind fhould favour you (as you will rind it to do) as you run 
 along the coaft to the fouthward (and the further you get to the fouthward, 
 the more will you find the wind favour you) be not covetous to take too great 
 an offing. By no means go out of founding 1 ;, but keep in 40, 45, or 50 
 fathoms, till you get into latitude l2?iN. or ia?N. When you iland in toward 
 the land, I will not adviie you to come nearer than 16 or 15 fathoms, as the 
 weather is moftly very hazy at this feafon. 
 
 Notw ithftanding you have generally a great deal of rain, and thick cloudy 
 weather throughout the whole of this monioon ; for feveral days toward noon, 
 
 we
 
 24Z A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 we had a fight of the fun fufficient to get an obfervation. Thereby we found 
 we had a ftrong foutherly current, which favoured us with 20, 22, and fome- 
 times 26 miles in the 24 hours, more than the run gave. You ought to make 
 this allowance all along the Malabar Coaft, at this feafon of the year, and will 
 find it to anfwer, whether you have an obfervation or not. 
 
 Being in about the latitude of 1 2?N. and 45 or 50 fathoms, you may be 
 fure you are within the Laccadive Iflands. If you lofe foundings on the coaft 
 you cannot be fo certain whether you are without or within them ; and run a 
 great rifque of falling in amongft them, if not upon them, as the weather is 
 generally thick and hazy. 
 
 Soon after this you lofe foundings ; for further to the fouthward there are 
 no foundings at that diftance from the more. You may then with great fafety 
 fleer SSE. this will carry you clear of the Malabar Coaft. and of the Laccadive 
 Iflands, to Cape Comorin. You need not now regard your foundings as here- 
 tofore ; only to. have a caft now and then, to fatisfy your curiofity, whether 
 you are in foundings or not. There are good and regular foundings all along 
 this coaft ; only in ibme places deeper, and others fhoaler water. 
 
 When you are got as far to the fouthward as Cape Comorin, and are clear 
 of all the Coaft of Malabar, you may fteer SEbS. or SE. according as you 
 have the winds, till you are in the latitude of Gaula ; and then fteer E. for Gaula, 
 commonly called Point de Gall ; ftill making allowance for a foutherly current, 
 at the rate of 18 or 20 miles in 24 hours. 
 
 We ran for Gaula in the night, (having had a good obfervation the day 
 before) fleering EbN. and EbN|N. to make an allowance for the foutherly 
 current ; and with that courfe kept in parrallel of Gaula, fo as to get foundings 
 in about 40 fathoms ; accordingly, at 2 A. M. ftruck foundings in 42 fathoms ; 
 then lay to under top-fails till day-light ; then Gaula bore EbS, about 4 
 leagues; made fail, and coafted it round Ceylon, as ufual. By our reckoning 
 we pafled about mid-channel between the Malabar Coaft and the Laccadive 
 Iflands ; but by our foundings, much nearer the former, thereby judging our- 
 felves not more than 12 or 14 leagues off the laid coaft; yet, on our land-fall 
 with Gaula, found our reckonings very exac~l. 
 
 It is remarkable, that as foon as you get about half a degree to the fouthward 
 of Cape Comorin, you get clear of all the rain, and hazy weather; and have 
 then a fine clear iky, and fair weather : this fhews what exac~l bounds the rains 
 are confined to. 
 
 CCXLII.
 
 Directions for Rounding the Reef c/Toint Palmiras. 245 
 
 CCXLII. Directions for Visiacapatam Road. 
 
 Pigeon Ifland (the only ifland near that coafl) lies clofe in fhorc. It cannot be 
 diftinguiihed as an ifland at any diflance, but appears in a fmall round hummock. 
 The coaft a-breaft the ifland is an high land-bank, the eaiternmoft part whereof 
 is full of trees. 
 
 When Pigeon Ifland bears north, diflance 6 or 7 miles, the Dolphin's I 
 (which is on the weftemmoft point of Vifiagapatam Road) may be diftinguifhed. 
 There is a large mofque on the top of it ; but this is not eafily i'ecn till you are 
 pretty near, becaufe it ftands on the cafternmoit declivity of the hill. 
 
 To +-> in Vitiagapatarli Road, bring the two high cocoa-nut trees, which 
 grow before the fort, in one ; the entrance of the river will be open to you, 
 in 12 fathoms you have good ground for a large fliip (but you ffluft bend 
 your beft bower cable, to an 4-} of about 16 cwt. otherwife it will be impofl ' 
 for you to weigh it). Or, bring the mofque N\Y. or N\\\\V. and <f-} in 
 9^ or 10 fathoms. 
 
 The bar lies within the Dolphin's Nofe. 
 
 CCXLIII. Directions for Rounding the Reef of Point Palmiras, and fo 
 into Ballasore Road by Night or Day. By Captain Jonathan Ranl'on. 
 
 As the miftaking Falfe Point for Point Palmiras, has been feveral times attended 
 with fatal confequences, either by failing in among the dangerous reefs to 
 the eaftward, or getting embayed in the Falfe Bay, to avoid thefe, obferve as 
 follows. 
 
 Between Falfe Point and Point Palmiras, and all over Falfe Bay, you will meet 
 with ouzy ground of a greenifh colour ; audio foft, that your lead will bury 
 itfelf every cafl. But any where to the northward of Point Palmiras, having the 
 Bay of Ballafore fairly open, you will have {tiff ground; namely, blueiih clay, 
 with variety of mixtures, as you change your fituation (to v, it) the above with 
 land and (hells, the fame with gravel, with iron ftones, rotten ftones, and 
 fmall pebble ftones, <Scc. 
 
 Some of thefe mixtures with clay, you will have all the bay over, which being 
 known, is iufficient to rectify your judgment, whether you are to the northward 
 or fouthward of Point Palmiras, , if you are otherwife doubtful. 
 
 Neverthelefs, all bound to the Bay, fhould endeavour to make the land to the 
 fouthward, about Pondy (the laft high land on the coafl) or Jagrenat Pagoda : 
 or if the weather fhould be hazy (as it frequently is in the months of April, 
 
 N n May,
 
 244 -A Nezv Directory for the East-Indies, 
 
 May; and June, fo that you cannot make the land) then by your latitude 
 endeavour to get foundings to the fouthward of Falfe Point, keeping in 16 or 
 iS fathoms water. You cannot mils the true foundings off Falfe Point (they 
 are coarfe fand and gravel ftones) ; whereas by keeping too great an offing you 
 may chance fo to do. 
 
 The land hereabout is very Tow, and the Falfe Point (if you fee it) has nothing 
 upon it remarkable to know it by, otherwife than its making a point by the land 
 to the northward, trenching away and baying fo that you lofe light of it. In 
 Falfe Bay (mould you happen to be well in) there are two remarkable fand-hills 
 near together, whereby this bay may be known. 
 
 From Falfe Point, to round the reef off Point Palmiras, the courfe is NEbE. 
 9 or 10 leagues. In falling off the hard ground of Falfe Point, you will come 
 into foft ouze (as before obferved) and with the obferved courfe will hold your 
 cbpth of water, with little or no variation, till you come upon the reef of Point 
 Palmiras. Your fir ft coming on will be fine light find, and further on,' coarfe 
 fand with gravel ftones ; thefe are the foundings of the reef. Obferve that you 
 will deepen your water in falling off. When this appears evident to you, haul 
 two or three points more to the northward, till you come into ftiff ground 
 (to wit) ftiff clay, with fome fmall ftones, or with fand and ihells, as before 
 obferved ; then you may lately conclude, you have the Bay of Ballafore fairly 
 open off the Point, and may fteer in boldly NNW. for the road, having regard to 
 the tides, which flow in the road at 9 o'clock on the full and change ; the flood 
 fettting in NW. and the ebb SE. 
 
 If you round the reef in about 18 fathoms water (which is efteemed beft)' 
 you will have about 7 or 8 leagues run into 9 fathoms water (there the pilot— 
 fldops generally lie) flioaling very gradually as you run in. You will find the 
 ground as above defcribed, only in 14 fathoms water, the dry fand-bank off 
 the point bearing SW- There is a fpot, not always met with, of a bright yellow 
 ill if clay, like oakcr, with fmall pebble-ftones ; this fpot lies rather to the 
 weftward of the common track. 
 
 Should it fo happen (as in fome feafons of the year it may) that the pilots have 
 all left the road, and you would lend in your boat over the bar of Ballaiore, to 
 give notice to the company's factor refiding there, of your arrival ; run in with 
 your (hip into 7 or 6 fathoms water at plcafure (this mult be undcritood at low 
 1 iter, for upon the fprings, the tides ebb and flow 11 or 12 feet in the road.) 
 Bring the flag-ltaff at Buleramgury, or the Bankfall-houfc, to bear NNW. from 
 v ou, ;/:•! there 'f-}. 
 
 It
 
 Di recti ONs/Jr Rounding the Reef off Palmiras. 245 
 
 It flows upon the bar on full and change at 10 o'clock, and the fending your 
 boat from the (hip mould be io timed, that the iirft: quarter flood may be pretty 
 Well fpent before you get upon the bar, to avoid the breakers, which (upon 
 the firlt of a flood) fometimes break very high, and arc dangerous. 
 
 You ought not to forget to put a grapnail in the boat, and a compafs, as they 
 may both be ufeful. Keeping the above Flag-ftafFNNW. by the compafs, will 
 lead you to the outermofr. beacons, or marks for the channel, which arc poles 
 pitched in the ground, on each fide, at convenient diftances one from another, 
 and will lead you dole on board the fouthernmoir. point of the opening: there 
 formerly the Old Bankfall-houfe flood; but the new houfe Hands on the other 
 fide, at the bending of the fecond reach, going up. 
 
 hi failing from Madras, for the Bay, any time in the month of June, it will 
 be neceflary to time your failing fo as to be in Ballafore Road before the full- 
 moon happens in that month, or elfe not till the lafr. quarter is over; for in 
 this month you may expect bad weather, which has been experienced never to 
 fail, and has been known fome years to hold 3 or 4 days together, very violent 
 and mifchievous in its confequences. In the year 1739, when the Revolution 
 Indiaman, with three flout country fhips, were loft in the gale, with all their 
 crews, Captain Ranfon having the charge of another (hip as pilot, at the fame 
 time cut from his °f-^s, with 4 feet water in the hold, and put to fca, and 
 by God's providence weathered the ftorm, with the lofs of the mail, 4-}s from 
 the bows, and fome of the wafle sjuns, and in 10 days after sot fafe into 
 Chittisiongr. 
 
 Thele gales blow always againft the monfoon at firiL and then commonly 
 back round to the N\V. making a confined fca, till it fixes again in the SW. 
 quarter, before it clears up. They generally happen between the full and laft 
 quarter of the moon ; and to a diligent obierver exhibit certain figns of its 
 approaching, fometimes 5 or 6 days before it comes. 
 
 If you rind the SW. wind, which is that of the monfoon, die away, and have 
 light airs of wind all round the compafs, with intermitting calms ; the weather 
 more clear than common all round the horizon ; objects looming ; a murmuring 
 in your rigging like wind, though none perceptible ; a more common fmooth 
 fea, and cob-webs ftreaming about your rigging ; you may conclude that thele 
 are fure prognoftics of an approaching gale. 
 
 N n 2 CCXLIV'
 
 246 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 CCXLIV. Directions/^ Sailing^/™/;; Point de Gall to Cave Comorin', 
 or fr-m Cape Comofun to Point de Gall, in cither Monsoon. By Mr. 
 
 Nichciion. 
 
 Cape Comoria bears from Point de Gall WijjfN. or NWbN. diitance 65 or 
 66 leagues. This bearing and diftance you may depend on. 1 have feveral 
 times made my courfe from Gaula W ^o?N. diitance 58, 59, or 60 leagues, being 
 in latitude 7? 38 N. and longitude made 2?3i'W. Then 1 have feen Cape 
 Comorin bearing NNE. or NEbN. 5, 6, 01-7 leagues ; and had foundings from 30 
 to 35 fathoms. In the SW. monfoon I have made my courfe from Cape Comorin 
 E32?S. diitance 59 leagues ; and then Point de Gall bore EbS. 4 or 5 leagues j 
 44 fathoms, coarfe fand. 
 
 In the NE. monfoon the currents are very uncertain about Point deGall, and 
 in croflihg the Gulf of Manara. They fet off Gaula WSW. and in the opening 
 of the Gulf thev have often been found to fet SW. very ftrong ; fo that feveral 
 ftiips, in light winds and calms, have been driven fuddenly on the Maldivia 
 Iflands. To avoid this, I would advife all mips to round the Iiland Zeloan, at 
 leaft as far as Caltura (a Dutch fort and fettlement about half way between Gaula 
 and Columbo) from whence, and not before, you may fafely crofs to Cape 
 Comorin. If unexpectedly you mould happen to make the land to the eaftward 
 of Cape Comorin, avoid coming too near the coaft ; for it is encompafied with 
 many rocks and dangers. 
 
 In the SW. monfoon things are quite rcverfed : you rauft therefore take care 
 of the currents, which fet ftrong into the Gulf of Manara ; by them many mips 
 have been driven to the northward into the gulf, and with great difficulty and 
 lofs of time have got out of the gulf again, not without danger of being -loft. 
 The experienced navigator will either way be upon his guard. 
 
 Thefe are very necefl'ary cautions to navigators. I never experienced any of 
 thefe ftrofitf currents ; nor do I believe any fhip, that keeps Zeloan cloic on 
 board, within 2, 3, or 4 leagues of the fhore (until flie gets to the northward as. 
 fir as Caltura^ will meet with any of them. I have many times between Gaula 
 - and Caltura, had ftrong northerly currents in my favour ; and however ftrong 
 the current mav run to the SW. or WSW. to the foutliward of Gaula, you lofe 
 it all as i'oon as you get in fhore to the northward of Gaula. Ships that ch not 
 obferve this caution are driven off Zeloan, among the Maldivia Iflands, &c. 
 
 CCXLV.
 
 Directions for Coasting along Zeloan, tic. 247 
 
 CCXLV. Directions for coafing along Zeloan, from Point de Gall to 
 Caltura ; and crofing from thence to Cape CoiMorin, in ^North-E 
 
 Monsoon. . • 
 
 Being 2 or 3 leagues oft* Point dc Gall, with the I Iaycock ami it in one, bearing 
 NbE IE', you will have 30 fathoms. From thence I would advife you to coaft it 
 along lhore as far as Caltura, (a Dutch ilttlement, where they have a confiderable 
 fort, on a riling ground near the fea) taking care to keep from 2 to 4 or 5 leagues 
 off fhore, in depths of water in the day-time, from 44 or 40 to 25 or 20 fathoms. 
 Under that depth 1 would not advife you to go ; for there are feveral it rao-gl mo- 
 rocks lying 2 or 3 miles off more, to the northward of Ganla, and between that 
 and Caltura, feveral of which have 16 or 18 fathoms clofe to them ; and in 25 
 fathoms you will not be more than 3 miles off fhorc. 
 
 In the night time, I would advife you not to go under 28 or 30 fathoms ; 
 for in fome places, in that depth, you will not be more than 4 or 5 miles off 
 more ; and (night or day) not to go without 40 or 44 fathoms ; for, if io, you 
 will foon be oft* the bank, and have no foundings. If it mould then prove Iio-ht 
 winds or calm, and the current is foutherly, you wall be driven back ac-ain, or 
 perhaps oft the coaft ; this may be prevented by keeping in the depths above 
 mentioned; there you may c|-^ on occalion, and keep what you have <^ot. 
 
 As you come near Caltura, you may make bolder with the more, and fraud 
 into 15 or 16 fathoms, clear fandy ground. By {landing in fhore, in blouino- 
 weather, you will find the fea very fmooth. I have flood in 13 fathoms, Caltura 
 bearing NNE;- E. 4 or 5 miles off" more. I have flood in with the fort, bearinp- 
 ESE;S. and had from 1 5 to 10 fathoms, 4 or 5 miles off fhore : then the extremes 
 of land to the northward bore north. Off Caltura the variation was 1 8'E. in 
 1760: Caltura and the Haycock are in one, bearing SE'E. 
 
 I have feveral times coafled jt along this part of Zcloan, and have fometimes 
 found a {mall foutherly current, frequently no current at all ; and have found, 
 when it has blown very frefh at N. or NNE. for 24 hours together, a very 
 flrong northerly current, with which, by keeping within the depths above 
 mentioned, I have turned it up along lhore, and gained a great deal of ground. 
 
 From Caituta, in latitude 6? 3.7 N. and longitude 79V 42'E. from London, 
 you may with fafety ilretch acrofs the Gulf : ua for CapeComorin, which 
 
 bears from Caltura W^SV'N. or \YN\V;N. diilanee 54 leagues. 1 have taken 
 my departure from Caltura, and made my courfe WzzTS. diftance 49 leagues; 
 
 then
 
 2 + 8 A New Directory jot" the East-Indies. 
 
 then I have ieen the land about Cape Comorin, bearing NNW|W. diftance 6 
 or 7 leagues, and had 26 fathoms water. 
 
 CCXLVI. Directions^ - Ships bound to the Coast of Coromandee, from 
 between Madagascar and the Coast of Africa. 
 
 Being in latitude 3? 30'N. and longitude E. from Comero Ifle 9? 30' with 
 variation io?„I5'"yV. and bound for the Coaft of Coromandel, you direct your 
 courfe for the Laccadive Iflands, through which there are feveral paflages or 
 channels. 
 
 As you run to the eaftward, the variation will decreafe pretty fall ; amongft 
 the Laccadive Iflands, the variation was i?8W. in the year 1760. By this 
 you may know when you have got the length of them. 
 
 In the S\V. monfoon, the winds between Cape Bafles and the Laccadive 
 Iflands blow conflantly in the SW. quarter, moftly from WSW. to SSVV. and 
 iometimes S. frefh and fteady gales. As you come near the iflands, you have 
 frelher gales, and fqually weather ; except it is in the latter end of the feafon, 
 the end of September, or beginning of October ; then near the Laccadive Iflands 
 vo\i will find little winds and variable, with fqualls and rain. 
 
 Between Cape Bafles and the Laccadive Iflands, there is aconftant weflwardly 
 current, which is very deceiving, and makes (hips much out in their reckonings. 
 Mr. Nichelfon's account of this current is as follows : 
 
 I have (cen an account of the fhip Pelham, and another Indiaman, on their 
 voyage to Bombay, who were 1000 miles out in their reckoning. One was 
 carried in fight of the Ifland Soccatra, and the other in fight of the Coaft of 
 Arabia, (by the weflwardly current) when by their reckonings they were looking 
 out for the Coaft of Malabar : and I have reafon to believe (from my own 
 experience, and the journals I have feen) that this current always lets to the 
 we ft ward. 
 
 In the SW. monfoon, between the Coaft of Malabar and the Laccadive Iflands, 
 the current lets to the SSE. (as the coaft lies) at the rate of 20, 24, or 26 miles in 
 24 hours. Among the I^accadive Iflands the current lets to the SSVV. and SW. 
 at the rate of from 18 to 22 miles in 24 hours; and you have this current about 
 2? or 3? to the weftward of the Laccadive Iflands; then the currents fet wholly 
 W. or WSW. at the rate of 8 or 10 or 11 miles in 24 hours; and you will 
 frequently find the fhip (by obiervation) 10, 12 or 14 miles to the northward 
 or (buthward of the reckoning, but moftly to the fouthward. 
 
 It is therefore reaibhable to believe, that this current fets moftly to the SW. 
 or WSW. between Cape Bafles and the Laccadive Iflands, at the rate of 8, 10,
 
 Direct ions for Sailing toward the Coast in India. 249 
 
 11, or 12 miles a day, and makes mips fo much out in their reckoning. 
 
 I therefore recommend the variation to them for their guide, which, it fincHy 
 obferved, will always correct the reckoning, and particularly in failing for the 
 Laecadive lflands. 
 
 CCXLYII. Directions for Sailing toward Lasd in the Indian Ocean, 
 
 from the Nicobar Islands. 
 
 If you are bound to Bengal in the north-eafl: monfoon, you ought to keep 
 along the Mallaye Coaft, and go well to the northward before you flieteh over, 
 in order to make great allowance for the fouthe-t/fy currents, and the winds, 
 which fometimes hang much to the northward. 
 
 If you are bound to the Coaft of Coromandel, in the north-cad: monfoon, you 
 may go through the Sombrere paflage, in latitude 7? 36'N. which is a lafe and 
 clear paflage. I have gone through it in the night, with a fquadron of men of war. 
 But go through which paflage you will, you ought to ihape your courfe lo as to 
 fall in with the land, to the northward of your port, on account of the current 
 running always to the fouthward. When you come in with the land, you w ill 
 have the winds moftly from the northward. Should you fall to the iouthwatd 
 of your port, you may lofe much time, and have much trouble in getting to it, 
 by driving againft wind and current. 
 
 If you arc bound to the Coromandel Coaft in the months of March or April, 
 keep well to the fouthward, and endeavour to fall in with Zeloan, near the 
 Friar's Hood, coafting it along Zeloan to Point Pedra, where you will have 
 variable winds and a ftrong northerly current in your fwour. 
 
 If you are bound to the Malabar Coaft, in the north-eafl monfoon, it will be 
 proper to fall in with the Ifland Zeloan, near the Friar's Hood, or between that 
 and the BaiTes ; but be fure to. fall in to the northward of the Baffes, and keep 
 the Coaft of Zeloan clofe on board, becaufe the current then lets ftrong round 
 the ifland to the fouthward; and fhould you be driven off the Coaft of Zeloan, 
 ycu may not be able to regain it. Some fhips, by not obferving this precaution, 
 have been driven oft" Zeloan, amongft and through the Maldivia lflands, whereby 
 they have been expofed to great danger and hardfhips. 
 
 The meridian diftance between Pulo Rondo and the Great Bafles is 11? 30' 
 and from the fouthernmoft Nicobar, 10? 20'. But truft not too much to your 
 reckoning, becaufe the currents are very deceiving in thofe leas. I have known 
 fhips that have made the land with little more than half the meridian diftance.* 
 
 CCXLVIII.
 
 ~> r 
 
 50 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 CCXLVIII. Directions for Sailing from the Coast of Coromandel to 
 the Coast of Malabar, Malacca, Batavia, and other Places. 
 
 The bad weather, which lafts from April to Oclober, will not permit you to 
 r.emaia there during this interval ; but the fine weather opens the trade, and 
 brings (hips from all parts of the Indies. 
 
 Thole who fail from the Coaft of Coromandel, Bengal, or any other places 
 more eaftwardly, from the beginning of October to January, mould (in order 
 to render their paflfoge fhorter and fafer) make the Ifland Zeloan, to the 
 northward of the Bafles ; then keep along the fcuth coaft as far as Columbo, 
 from which place crofs to Cape Comorin, and make the beft of their way for 
 the deftined port, obferving the following inftructions : 
 
 If in the months of Oclober and November, you find (to the fouthward of 
 the Ifland Zeloan) the winds blow from the W. to NNW. you muft turn to 
 windward, making advantage of the currents, which frequently fet to the 
 weftward very ftrong. This advantage will be the greater by keeping near the 
 lbore. 
 
 The time of departing from the Coaft of Malabar for that of Coromandel, 
 Bengal, or other places to the eaftward, is generally from the month of February 
 to April, keeping along fhore as far as Cape Comorin; from thence crofs over 
 to Point Gaula, and then direct your courfe according to the place you are 
 bound for. 
 
 Coaft the Ifland Zeloan as far as Point Pedra, if you are bound to the Coaft 
 of Coromandel ; but if you go directly to Bengal, it is fufficient to coaft Zeloan 
 as far as the Bafles, from whence you ftecr to make the Coaft of Orixa. 
 
 The fhips bound to Malacca pais wide of the Baffes, and crefs the Gulf 
 toward the iflands which lie to the northward of Acheen. 
 
 The (hips bound to Bantam, or Batavia, (when they arc at Point Gaula') mould 
 ciofs over to Sumatra, keeping along the iflands that lie off it, and then go 
 through the Straits of Sunda. 
 
 The time prefcribed for ihips to fall from the Coaft of Malabar to different 
 parts of the Indies, is no way relative to thofe bound for Europe. The latter 
 mould fail in December, or at fart h el the middle of January; otherwife they 
 will run the hazard of not doubling the Cape of Good Hope, especially if they 
 are bound firft to the Iflands of France, or Bourbon. 
 
 The bed way is to keen along the coaft as far as Cape Comorin ; then make 
 Point Gaula, and from thence ftecr SEbS. as far as the equinoctial line, to 
 
 avoid
 
 Directions for Sailing to the Malauar Coast, &c, 251 
 
 avoid the Maldives, allowing for the currents, which fet ftrong to the weft- 
 ward. 
 
 It is fuppofed that a paflage may be gained, in cafe of neceflity, from the 
 Coaft of Malabar to that of Coromandel, to arrive at the latter end of January. 
 In 1733 and 34, a trial was made of it in thefhipLa Galathee, from the example 
 of the fquadron of M. le Baron de Palicre, which fuccecded very well, in 1740. 
 
 That a paflage may be gained this way, is not to be doubted ; but care mould 
 be taken to provide good ground tackling, and even then to quit this coaft before 
 the petty monfoon fets in, which it generally does about the beginning of April; 
 then it is dangerous lying here, as there are no ports for flicker : however, if 
 neceflity urges your longer ftay, it is beft to <f-} as far orFfhore as you conve- 
 niently may. 
 
 You muft fail from Mahe, Callicut, or Cochin, by the middle of December, 
 
 or fooner, if the place you depart from be more northerly, coafting as fir as 
 
 Cape Comorin, &c. as above directed. You have the winds there at this time 
 
 ' of the year from NNE. to ENE. with which winds you muft make as much 
 
 eafting as may be neceflary. 
 
 It is not always needful to make Sumatra, nor to crofs the equator. It is 
 fufflcient, if, on the contrary tack, you can fetch to windward of your configned 
 port. 
 
 CCXLIX. Directions for Sailing from the Coromandel Coast to 
 
 AcHEEN. 
 
 The time of departing from the Coaft of Coromandel to go to Acheen, is 
 generally limited to the middle of Auguft, or at the lateft the middle of 
 September. 
 
 When you are got out at fea, you have the winds from WSW. to S\Y. which, 
 you muft take the advantage of, and make the Ifland Sumatra in v north 
 latitude; that is to fay, 5 or 6 leagues to the fouthward of King's Point, which 
 forms the weft fide of Acheen Road. 
 
 Here you commonly meet with foutherly winds, at this time of the year ; 
 fo that by this means you will be to the windward of the Surat Paflage, which 
 though the narrowed, is the beft, becauie you can <+-} in it. 
 
 This paflage (if undertaken at the time prefcribed) may be made in 10 days; . 
 but if delayed later, the uncertainty of the winds and calms may make it longer. 
 
 As to the effect, of the currents, on examining feveral journals of this paflage, 
 it is rare to find them fet to the northward ; but on the contrary, they are often 
 
 O ° experienced
 
 252 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 experienced to fet to the fouthward. Several navigators have found their 
 miitake, hy being too confident of the currents fetting with the wind. It is 
 fafer to compute they fet to the eaftward ; prudence advifes to be diffident : 
 either way keep a. good look-out in time. 
 
 If you make the coafl of Sumatra in 4? north latitude, you will fee in land 
 feveral high mountains, and beneath low land, even and very woody, v\hi;h 
 continues to the more. Four or five leagues from more you have 50 fathoms, 
 all the way good <+-)mg ground, and no danger about the coafl. 
 
 In failing to the northward, in 4? 43'N. you perceive the mouth of a river, 
 wherein boats may enter ; from thence the coafl is bordered with many fmall 
 Mauds, low and woody, which may be coafled fafely. One league and a half 
 off more you have 26 fathoms, mud. The charts make a bank oppofite thefe 
 iflands. 
 
 Captain Griffin, of the Lapwing, in December, 1764, <f-^ed upon this bank 
 in 6 fathoms, and fent his boat to found all over it. The lead water was, mark, 
 under water 3 fathoms, and the moff. 7 fathoms. There are 17 fathoms both 
 within and without. The length of it is about 1 mile, and its breadth 3 or 4 
 cables length ; lying in latitude 4? 55'N. 
 
 About 5 or 6 leagues to the SE. of King's Point, the low land is equally 
 woody, but of lefs extent ; and like that of the high mountains, very eneven 
 and irregular near the fhore. The foundings in this part vary continually; in 
 fome pl\ces it is fand mixed with mud, in others gravel, and fometimes rocks; 
 fo that there is noting here, unlefs in cafe ofneceffity. About 2 leagues- 
 from the land you have 2,5 fathoms. 
 
 King's Point (the latitude of w hich place is 5? 32'N. as taken by 4 Hadley's 
 quadrants) makes the fouth tide of the Surat Paflage. It is not eaiily known 
 coming from the SE. becatffe at thefe bearings it appears fo contiguous to lb 
 
 c 
 
 iflands of Gome/., Nancy, and Brafle, that there is no paflage to be (ecu 
 between them. 
 
 In ranging the coafl, there is (about 2 leagues to the fouthward of the 
 Sarat Paflagej a big, t or bay, which you will readily take for a ftrait : at its 
 SE. point are two rocks above water, on which the fea breaks, and anotl 
 again within the bay, like a ihip at 4-} without her mads. h\ this bay the 
 land is low, flocked with trees, and fine (and along the fhore. The breadth 
 of this hay is about a league from one point to the other. 
 
 At the loot of the high mountains near Acheen there appears three fmall 
 hillocks. Half a league oil" the SE. point of this bay you have 17 fathoms, 
 
 fine
 
 DiRKcTioNsy"^- Sailing to Acheen. 253 
 
 fine fand ; and a little to the northward, 1 6 and 1 5 fathoms : a quarter of a 
 league off the NW. point, there is the fame depth at half a gun-fhot from the 
 fhore. Oil this place you may perceive King's Point, which appears like a 
 great ftecp hill. Pulo Gomez then makes like two paps ; its weflern point 
 is very low, and at the extremity is feen a little ifland, from whence it breaks 
 above [ a league, extending to the WSW. and about the fame diflance WbS. 
 of Pulo Gomez, there is another rock, whereon the fea alfo breaks very much. 
 It is dangerous going between thefe two, as in all probability there is a com- 
 munication from one to the other. To avoid thefe dangers, keep King's Point 
 (which is fife) clofe on board, in 12 and 14 fathoms, red land ; and when 
 you have doubled this point, the opening of the paffage difcovers itfelf. Con- 
 tinue on the ftarboard fide till you are got to the narroweft part ; then keep 
 mid-channel without fear, and you will foon be through. 
 
 In cafe of meeting with a contrary wind, you had beft <f-> under King's 
 Point ; and wait till the flood has made, which lets NEbE. and the ebb SWbW. 
 At about I flood, w T eigh and lay the fhip's head to the northward fo you will 
 have the tide under your lee bow : thus by backing and filling, you may not 
 only get through the Surat Paffage very fafely, but to the 4-}hig place. In 
 the Lapwing, December 1764, the captain nor any of his officers having been 
 here before, and no caution given in the former editions in cafe of contrary 
 winds, they laid the fhip's head to the fouthward. As foon as they had got 
 clear through the paflage, they met with fuch a confufed fea, occasioned by the 
 meeting of feveral tides from the different paffages, that it broke through the 
 cabbin windows, and over the deck fore and aft, and the veffcl loft all 
 command of the helm. They were forced to put back again, and wait for the 
 next flood. In the mean time Captain Griffin went in the boat to diicover 
 the caufe, and when he made fail next, he laid the fhip's head to the 
 northward ; by which means they got to the "f-^irig place \\ ithout the lead 
 difficulty or danger. 
 
 You fometimes meet with a contrary tide, which ftts very ftrong out of the 
 Bay of Acheen ; if you have not wind enough to item it, «f-^> (till it has 
 Slackened) before you get to the entrance. 
 
 From Surat Paffage the couri'c is EbN. 2 leagues to the 4-^agc of Acheen. 
 About \ a league from the Coaft of Sumatra there is a little ifland, furrounded 
 with breakers. You may <f^ before the river in what depth you pLafc. There 
 are always fome fhips in this road, therefore there i 3 no occaiion for more paiti- 
 
 O o 2 cular
 
 452 -A Nezv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 cular directions. Haifa league off fhore you have 12 fathoms, and 7 fathoms: 
 about i of a league. 
 
 The fecond paflage to enter Acheen Bay, is that of Sedre. The Ifland: 
 Nancy makes the north fide of it ; Pulo Gomez and Stone Ifland, the fouth. 
 Through the Surat paflage is preferable, this however is lefs to be feared than 
 fome charts reprefent. There is nothing dangerous but the rocky bank that 
 extends WSW. from Pulo Gomez above mentioned, and another from Pulo 
 Nancy about mid-channel. There is alfo the rock before-mentioned bearing; 
 WbS. from Pulo Gomez. 
 
 It has been faid, that no accident ever happened" to any fhip failing through 
 the Surat Paflage ; though feveral navigators have queftioned this, oh account 
 of its being fo very narrow, and have rather chofe to fail to the northward of 
 Pulo Brafle, through the Bengal Paflage, between Pulo Vay, (or Way) and 
 Brafle and Nancy. This latter, which is 4 leagues wide, would be preferable 
 to either of the other two, if from thence there was an eafy paflage to the 
 Road of Acheen; but the winds (which generally blow between SSW. and S.) 
 do not always permit it ; and there is no <+-}ing there (on account of its great 
 depth) if a calm ihould happen, you are tolled about by the currents (which fet 
 to the N eaftward) and run a rilque of not reaching Acheen. If you do reach 
 Acheen, it is not without much difficulty: feveral ihips having been horfed near 
 Pulo Way (where there is no <f4age) have been obliged to fail round about,, 
 and re-enter at the Malacca Paflage, after more than 15 days hindrance. 
 
 Frequent examples of the like inconveniences deferve the regard of thofe who 
 have the charge of ihips, and fhould determine them always to prefer the moil 
 experienced method, and not give way to chimerical fears. 
 
 The third paflage to Acheen is that of Malacca, fo called becaufe the fhips 
 which go from Acheen to Malacca generally pals through it. This paflage is 
 bounded on the NW. by the fouth Point of Pulo Way, and on the SE. by that 
 of Sumatra. You find here a little round ifland (Pulo Bouro, or Malora) 
 or rock above water; but it is feep-to, and the paflage fteep on all fides. It is 
 a leagues NE. from Acheen Road. 
 
 NNW. 3 leagues from the NW. part of Pulo Way, there is an ifland called 
 Pulo Ronde (or Roundo) on account of its form, and within ' of a league to 
 the fouth ward thereof are 7 or 8 great rocks above water. To the northward 
 of Pulo Brafle are alio 3 little iflahds, the outermofl: of which is above \ a 
 league therefrom. 
 
 The
 
 Directions for Saimnc into Acheen. 255 
 
 The trade of Acheen is very confiderable ; jQhipe come hither from muft parts 
 of the Indies, particularly on account of the gold, whereof they procure great 
 quantities : the hazard of being paid is the only difficulty of this traffick. The 
 town is lituate upon alow ground, which continues from the foot of the moun- 
 tains that are feen in land. Acheen River pafies through this plain, and makes 
 thereof feveral iflands. In the rainv feafons the low lands are almoft all over- 
 flowed. The principal entrance of the river has a bar, over which imall veflels 
 of about 25 or 30 tons may pafs at high water; but at low water a boat or 
 canoe can fcarcely get over. The Portuguefe and Englifh had each of them 
 formerly a fettlement at Acheen, which the perverfe behaviour of the inhabitants 
 caufed them to forfake. 
 
 The Tea rifes and falls 7 feet in the road, and it is high water at 9 o'clock oil 
 the full and change ; but the lea breezes and rains make confiderable alteration-;, 
 and render this rule iometimes invalid. You are here flickered from the wefterly 
 monfoon, which is the ftrongeft, and blows from April to November ; then the : 
 eaftern monfoon fets in, and brings with it more moderate winds, except thofe now' 
 and then from the NW. which blow very violently, and oblige the fhips to have 
 good =f-^s and cables to withftand their force. 
 
 The inland parts of Sumatra hereabout are very mountainous, among which 
 is one very high, and may be feen 20 leagues at lea ; it is called Queen's 
 Mountain, and by the Englifh Golden Mountain. 
 
 Tiie fhips bound for Europe (which on their return from Acheen are to touch 
 on the Coaft of Coromandel) fhould depart hence by the 20th or 2 2d of December, 
 hi order to arrive there at the beginning of January. Having made fail to go 
 through the Bengal Paflage, they fhape a courfe toward Nicobar Ifland, which 
 lies NWbW. of 1'ulo Roundo, dillant 28 leagues. 
 
 1 his ifland may be feen 10 leagues at ica, though its fouth point is low. There 
 is no occafion to c;o through St. George's Channel ; it is fufficient to 2:0 to the 
 fouthward thereof, and when, you have pafled it, keep on your proper courfe to 
 bring you to your conflgned port. It muft be oblerved to make the land at this 
 feaiuii to the northward of the port, in order to get thither the eafier and fooner. 
 You muft alio have regard to the currents fetting to the weftward, which 
 otherwife may occafion your falling in with the land fooner than you are 
 aware of. 
 
 For fhips whofe bufinefs detains them longer at Acheen, and which feldoru 
 fail fooner than March or April, the courfe is different. The S. and SSW. 
 winds, which blow then in the Bay of Bengal, and the currents, which .e to 
 
 the
 
 256 A New Directory for the East-Indies, 
 
 the northward, require them to make the land to the fouthward of the place they 
 are bound for. 
 
 CCL. Directions^/ - Sailing to different Places near the Gulf of Bengal, 
 
 at different Seafons of the Tear. 
 
 The molt favourable times for fliips to fail in the Gulf of Bengal, are from the 
 end of February to the middle of September ; but as navigators (in order to fhape 
 their courfe for a good landfall) fhould be mindful of the winds and currents, 
 which prevail in the Gulf during this period, it will be neceflary to give fome 
 inftructions relative to the variety of both, in the different months of the year. 
 
 If you fail from the Coaft of Coromandel, for the Coaft cf Bengal, toward 
 the end of February, and during the current of the month of March, it is 
 neceffary to keep a good offing, in order to reap the advantage of the S. SSW. 
 winds that blow here (whereas near the coaft they often vary from NE. to SE.) 
 then fhape your courfe to make the Coaft of Orixa, in about the latitude of 
 l y?N. and coaft it thence to Point Palmiras. 
 
 The mips that fail in this feafon, from the Coaft of Malabar for Bengal, 
 without touching at any place on the Coaft of Coromandel, ought to keep the 
 Ifland Zeloan on board, as far as Batacalo, and thence make a ftretch to the 
 Coaft of Orixa as above. 
 
 During the months of April and May, (when the winds blow more frequently 
 from the fouthward, and are in their full force) you mult, in like manner, 
 make the Coaft of Orixa ; guarding particularly agaiuft the currents, which let 
 to the NE. or northward, and keep a good oiling, as foon as you experience 
 them ; becaufc with the SE. winds you will be troubled to clear the coaft, if you 
 follow the dilterent bights which it makes. 
 
 When you lee the Pagoda of Jagrenat, keep in from 15 to 20 fathoms, as 
 far as the bank of Point Palmiras, to which you muft come no nearer than 
 18 fathoms. 
 
 As the westerly monfoon is in its height in June, July, and Augull, it is 
 neceflary to keep more to the windward than in the preceding months ; that is 
 to fay, to make the coaft in latitude 18? 30'N. This precaution is the more 
 neceflary, as you may be often miftaken in the eftimation of jour courfe by the 
 currents, which generally are governed by the dire&ion and force of the 
 winds. This is the reason tha": (hips fall in with the land more eafterly than 
 they imagine. 
 
 When
 
 Directions^/- Sailing in the Gulf of Beuoal. 257 
 
 . When you are within ilghl of land, keep in between 12 and 16 fathoms; 
 and fur the reft conform to the directions above, particularly concerning the 
 bank oft Point Falmiras, which youmuft then keep well aboard. 
 • The courie which ihips ought to make, that iail from the Coaft'of Coromandel 
 after the middle of September, and in October, is very different from the 
 preceding ; becaule the wefterly monfoon then draws toward a conclufion, and 
 the winds frequently blow from the NE. therefore, inftead of making the land 
 to the fouthward of Falfe Point, you muft at leaft keep out in the middle of the 
 bay, fo as to be able to weather Point Palmiras : nor will this always fuffice ; 
 for the nearer the time of the monfoon's change, the more you muft guard 
 againft it. 
 
 The veffels that can make the Coaft of Arrakan, by help of the varying of the 
 winds,.aremuch more fure of faving their paflage than thofe who neglect it, and 
 think it fufficient to keep mid-channel. 
 
 If by rreglecV, or any unforefeen accident, you fall in with the land to the 
 fouthward of Falfe Point, you rifque the lofs of your paflage, or at leaft. a 
 confiderable delay (for want of favourable winds to get to the northward) and 
 ftem the violent currents, which fet SW. from the latter end of September till 
 the month of February ; but their greateft force and rapidity is in November and 
 December, when they run 3 miles an hour. 
 
 The fhips which fall in to the northward of Falfe Point (if thev would double 
 that of Point Palmiras) muft take advantage of the tides, by °Hing when they 
 make againft them. 
 
 If you iail from Mergui for Bengal, toward the end of October, you mu it tide 
 along the Coaft of Tenaflerim, but no farther than latitude I5?N. or at mo'ft 
 latitude 15? io'N. (on account of the banks in the bight of Martaban, which 
 are exceeding dangerous, becaufe they are dry in many places, and the tides there, 
 which are very violent and terrible, riling 10 feet at once, in a bohr). 
 
 Having got into this latitude, you lhape your courie WbN. to fall in with 
 the Coail of Pegu to the eaftward of Negraille, (or Cape Ncgrai.,) but come no 
 nearer the banks that furround it than 7 or 8 fathoms. The lands are extremely 
 low : you can only diftinguifh the trees, without any mark in particular : for 
 this reafon, in hazy weather, it is riecefiary to keep the lead couftantly going. 
 
 From hence direct your cour.e to fail 1 f kague wide of Diamond Ifiand, on 
 account of a rocky bank, which breajes at low water, and projects one league to 
 the fouthward of this ifiand. In this track you Will have 8, 9, ic, an.! 11 
 fathom-;, muddy ground. At Diamond Ifiand is great plenty of turtle ; many of 
 them are 400 or 500 pounds weight. 
 
 About
 
 2j3 A Kevc Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 About 5 leagues SSW. of Diamond Ifland is a rocky bank, called Negada, or 
 Neijada, or Lequads (it is one with Diamond Ifland, and the Little Negrais, 
 when they bear NNE. and SSW.) or the Sunken Ifland, a little above water. 
 Half-way between thefe they lay there is a rock on which are 20 feet water, 
 at leaf! fometimes. The fhip Le Caftricon faw it in 1698 ; and others report, 
 that failing in 1 1 fathoms water, they perceived its breakers very near. This 
 circumftance proves there is lefs water on this rock, and that every fhip fhould 
 carefully avoid it. The iureft method is not to exceed 10 fathoms in palling 
 Diamond Ifland. 
 
 Having doubled Diamond Ifland, you fleer for the fouth point of the great 
 Negraille Ifland, which is remarkable for a great rock, riling above water, very 
 near it ; and an hill, on which is a pagoda. Then you keep the wind, to coaft 
 the well fide of this ifland, which lies NbW-i-W. taking care of a bank, clofe 
 to which are 4 fithoms water : its weftern extremity lies WNW. 3 miles off 
 the fouth point above-mentioned. The weft Coaft of Negraille is of a moderate 
 height, rugged at top, and may be feen 9 or 10 leagues. There are along this 
 coaft feveral fmall iflands. 
 
 The depth from the fouth end, as far as 5 leagues more northerly, is 45 
 fathoms, 4 leagues off fhore, and 12 fithoms a league off. Toward the north 
 end there are no foundings 4 or 5 leagues off; but 2 or 3 leagues off you have 
 40 fathoms. 
 
 Leaving Negraille Ifland, you continue to ftand to the northward, in fight of 
 the Coaft of A va ; off which are many iflands, and fome dangerous', which are 
 faid to be all vifible. The moft dangerous of thefe iflands is in latitude 17? 6'N. 
 5 leagues from the main land. It is a little low ifland, Unrounded with rocks 
 under water for \\ league off, and is called the Buffalo. 
 
 Twenty-five leagues more northerly, in latitude 18? 20'N. is another ifland, 
 furrounded- with rocks for half a leaeue round. It is q leagues Sb\V from the 
 Iiland of Cheduba. 
 
 The Ifland Cheduba, fituated in latitude 18? 45'N. extends 7 leagues NbW. 
 and SbE. At a diftance it appears like a clufter of little iflands, on account of 
 its ruggednefs. From each end projects a reef, 1 | league north and fouth ; and 
 as you pals it £ a league diftance, you lee a little ifland about the middle ol it. 
 
 From Negraille Iiland to that of Cheduba, the Coaft of Ava has no foundings 
 off it ; therefore you fhould avoid coming top near it in the night, for fear of the 
 dangers about it. This advice is chiefly to thole who depend too much upon the 
 effimation of the diftance. 
 
 When
 
 Directions// 1 Sailing in the Gulf /Bengal. 259 
 
 When you have got the height of Cheduba Ifland, and about 8 or 9 leagues 
 to the weftward, you fhould fleer NW. till you get into 50 fathoms, mud; 
 which is generally met with in 40 or 45 leagues, on this point of the compafs. 
 Thence fleer WNW. and WbN. to get foundings on the foot of the Ganges 
 banks. You may near them in 1 2 fathoms. They are eafdy known when 
 you are near them, by the foundings which are hard fand. You find no mud, 
 but at the entrance of the feveral channels, which are formed by thefe banks. 
 Keep in the depth above mentioned, not exceeding 15 fathoms; this will 
 carry you to Ballafore Road. 
 
 There can be no direct courfe pointed out from the foot of the Ganges banks 
 to this road, on account of the tides off the different mouths of the Ganges. 
 The heft method is to keep the lead conftantly going. 
 
 It is not always fufficient to fail to the height of Cheduba ifland to crofs from 
 the eaftern coafl of the Gulf to Ballafore Road ; for you fometimes (in this 
 feafon) meet with variable winds from NE. to NNW. and with thefe winds 
 you cannot make the courfe above mentioned. In this cafe, (to render the 
 paffage more certain) you muft work to the northward, till you are in fio-ht of 
 the Broken Ifland, which forms the fouth point of the river Arrakan, from 
 whence, with more certainty, you may crofs, and get foundings off the Gan- 
 ges as above ; only obferve, that after paffing Cheduba the tides of the Arra- 
 kan River have an effect. 
 
 Ships bound from China, Manilla, or any other part to the eaftward (in 
 pafling the Straits of Malacca, during the NE. monfoon) muft keep as far to 
 the northward as poflible, along the Coafts of Queda and Tenafferim, in order 
 to make Negraille ; and thence direct their courfe as in the preceding direc- 
 tions. 
 
 CCLI. Directions//- Sailing from the Coromasdel Coast /oMergui, 
 from the Beginning -of August io the Middle of September. 
 
 In failing from Pondicherry, Madras, or any other part of the Coaft of Coro- 
 mandel, to Mergui, it is proper to fhape your courfe according to the time of 
 the year. Without this precaution you run a rifque of lofing your paflage, or 
 at leaf! of meeting with great difficulties from the winds and currents : there- 
 fore, thefe directions are divided into two parts, on account of the monfoons, 
 which give occafion for this diftinction. 
 
 The winds (which, from the beginning of Augufl to the middle of September, 
 
 P P blow
 
 260 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 blow from W. to SSW.) oblige you to direct your courfe to the fouthward of 
 the Little Andaman, (or fouthemmofl part of the Little Andaman Iflands; there 
 being feveral cncompafled with a bank, that go under that denomination) and to 
 get in time into latitude 10? io'N. or 10? 15'N. If you pafs this channel in 
 that latitude, you muft look out for the laid ifland, and then direct your courfe 
 with more certainty toward the eafl coafl, endeavouring to make the Tores 
 Iflands, fituate 20 leagues SVVbS. from that of Tenaflerim." In the charts, the 
 outermofl bears but SSW. and the diftance not above 15 leagues; fo that, if this 
 bearing is truefl, either the Tores Iflands fhould be laid down further to the 
 we Award, or that of Tenaflerim' more to the eaflward. 
 
 It is very rare, at this time of the year, to find a difference to the weflward; 
 yet if- is prudent, when you have not feen the Little Andaman, to run 30 leagues 
 to the eaflward of its computed diflance, before you fland to the northward, left 
 b\ fome unforefeen miftake you run upon this ifland in the night-time, when 
 you reckon yourielf pafl it. You ma)' alfo go through the Sombrere channel ; 
 but you will be enough to windward in pafhng that of ro? 
 
 In crofling from the Little Andaman, or the iflands to the northward of the 
 Sombrere channel, to the coafl of Tenaflerim, you fometimes arrive there fooner 
 than you expect, by means of the currents which run to the NE. but, as you 
 have foundings 12 or 14 leagues offthefe iflands along the Coafl of Tenaflerim, 
 it is eafy to prevent the fad confequences that may happen by thele errors in 
 the night time. 
 
 All the iflands of this Archipelago are very high, and may be r een in fine 
 weather 14 or 15 leagues. That of Tenaflerim (which you endeavour to make) 
 when in latitude 12? 3o'N. appears, at firfl light, in feveral hillocks like iflands, 
 by reafon of its unevennefs ; but on approaching it, they are feen to join. To 
 the northward and fouthward are feveral other iflands of different fizes; but the 
 mofi remarkable ^and which makes Tenaflerim eafily known) is a round little 
 ifland, high and fteep, called the Weflern Canifler, about 2 or 3 leagues to 
 the north-weftward. 
 
 The refembiance of this little ifland to a canifler inverted, which is a kind 
 of round bafket, is the reafon of its being called by a name common to all 
 thofe which are thus fhaped. 
 
 NE^E. from this lafl you fee the ifland Cabofla, which is of a middling 
 fizc, extending rrom E. to W. It is the height of thole round it, but not 
 fo regular as that of Tenaflerim. The Ifland Cabofla has a little ifland or 
 rock to the northward of it. It may be eaiily known coming from the tbutji- 
 
 w aid,
 
 Directions for Sailing to Mercui ami Ju nk-Seilon. 261 
 
 ward, as there is no other to the northward, but feems to terminate this range 
 of iflands. 
 
 Having got fight of this laft, you may pafs it either to the northward or 
 fouthward, leaving the Weftern Canifter on the ftarboard fide : ftanding to the 
 eaftward, in foundings from 30 to 35 fathoms. There are many iflands of 
 different fizes round about, which are but imperfectly known. 
 
 When you are between theie iflands you muft regard the tides, which flow 
 at y\ hours (at the full and change of the moon) off Cabofla ; but are very 
 irregular making their way through the different paflages formed by thefe 
 iflands. It is therefore neceflary to <4-^ while they are unfavourable. 
 
 As foon as you have pafied Cabofla, you may perceive (at S or 9 leagues 
 diftance) a fmall ifland almoft round, called the Little Canifter ; it is high, 
 fteep, and covered with trees, and very much like the Weftern Canifter above 
 mentioned. The difference between them is, that the north end of the Weftern 
 Canifter flopes more gradually than the fouthern one, and forms a fort of fnout ; 
 inftead of which the fouth fide of the Little Canifter is different, as appears by 
 the draught. 
 
 You may fail either to the northward or fouthward of it, at what diftance 
 you think proper (for this ifland is very bold and lafe all round) then fteer 
 between the ifland Tavay and Iron Ifland. The breadth of this channel is 
 about 2 leagues, clear of danger. You cannot <\-$ there fafely on any emer- 
 gency, having 60 or 80 fathoms, rocky ground. The fhip Penthievre 1 740, 
 coming out of this paffage, of-^ e d •about mid-channel, in 60 fathoms, the tide 
 of flood coming in with great rapidity, and after veering about two-thirds of 
 the cable, founded again in 80 fathoms. Providentially the winds, though 
 too weak to refill the tide, were favourable, and gave an opportunity to oppofe 
 the fails againft the ftream ; by this means the <j-> (relieved from a confider- 
 able part of its ftrefs) remained faft, 'till the ebb made, and delivered the fhip 
 from a bad paflage. 
 
 Either in coming in or going out, take care to cf} till the tides turn in your 
 favour, according to which you are going. This may greatly afiift you. 
 
 From Cabofla Ifland to about 1 of a league to the fouthward of the Little 
 Canifter, the depth diminifhes gradually from 35 to 24 fathoms ; but increa es 
 afterward in the channel above-mentioned. 
 
 When the SW. part of Iron Ifland bears SEbE. and the Little Canifter 
 WNW. 2 leagues, you will find 35 fathoms, fmall gravel mixed w ith mud. 
 This is the lift convenient +-*age to the weftward, going through the paflage 
 between Tavay and Iron Ifland. 
 
 P P 2 About
 
 262 New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 About 2 leagues Nf W. of the Little Canifter, lies an ifland of a middling fize, 
 called the Great Canifter. The land is high, and very irregular. 
 
 The fouth part of Tavay Ifland is formed by feveral little iflands and rocks, 
 fteep to, and ieparated by very fmall channels. The north part of Iron Ifland 
 (which bears Sf E. from this laft) terminates alfo in a point, with rocks above 
 water. You find at the foot of thefe rocks from 25 to 30 fathoms water. The 
 tides meeting hereabout, occafion eddies and whirlpools, which have different 
 directions. It is faid, that the flood runs to the northward, and the ebb fouth ward. 
 The beft courfe feems to be at an'equal diftance from either fhore. 
 
 From hence Long Ifland bears EbS. extending from north to fouth, along the 
 edge of a bank "of rocks under water ; the Coaft of TenafTerim, from the mouth 
 of Tavay river to that of Mergui, is encompaffed by fuch. 
 
 Inftead of Hearing this ifland, you muft (as foon as you have doubled the 
 north point of Iron Ifland) fleer along its eaft coafl, at about 2 miles diftance. In 
 this channel you have 40, 25, 20, and 17 fathoms, fan d and mud, as far as the 
 entrance of King's-Ifland Bay, which lieth to the SSE. 
 
 This bay is formed by the eaftern coaft of the ifland of this name, and the 
 weftern coaft of Fig, or Plantain Ifland. Here the French company's Ihips 
 generally winter, unlefs particular bufinefs obliges them to <f-> in 7 fathoms,, 
 without the bar of Mergui, 6 or 7 leagues to the fouth-eaftward of this place. 
 
 One league NNE. from that point of King's Ifland which forms the entrance 
 of the bay, is a fhoal, on which the Lys touched in 1724. 
 
 This paflage has the fame defect as the other, having no <f-^ a g e but in very 
 deep water. Prudence fuggefts to avoid it, 'till the tide favours your getting 
 through. When you come from the Ifland of Cabofla, if the tides "fail, ^ as 
 near to Iron Ifland as convenient, to wait the be'jinninscof the next flood. 
 
 From this laft 4~}age get into the channel, and keep nearer Iron Ifland than 
 King's Ifland, till you are part the iflands and rocks to the northward of this laft 
 (the outermofl: ifland being very low, with a dangerous fhelf) then leave Iron 
 ifland to round that of King's Ifland. 
 
 This paflage is longer, eaft and weft, than that to the northward of Iron Ifland, 
 v. hofe extent is not ib perceivable, becaufe that part of the ifland terminates in a 
 point, whereas the fouthernmoft part is about I of a league broad. You generally 
 have calms to leeward of this ifland, during which you are expofed to the tides, 
 which do not fet always alike. Some fhips have been driven within a ftone's 
 throw of Iron Ifland, and then back again to and fro, by thefe eddies ; and 
 although the cjaft is very bold, even at this diftance, there are bad conlcquenccs 
 
 to
 
 Directions for Sailing into Bay o/King's Island. 263 
 
 to be feared. Upon the whole, the preference fhould be given to the north 
 channel before-mentioned. 
 
 CCLII. DiRECTioNsyiJr Sailing into, and coming out of, the Bay o/"King's 
 
 Island. 
 
 As the going into this bay chiefly depends upon the fituation of the Lys Shoal, 
 for the better underflanding thereof it is neceflary to refer to the view of this bay 
 in the chart of thefe iflands. 
 
 The Lys Shoal is a little chain of rocks under water, extending about a cable's 
 length ESE. and WNW. Its fummit, which is the only danger, bears NNE. 
 of the point A, (the north-eaflernmoft fide of King's Ifland) which is on the weft 
 fide of the bay. It is half a league diftant from the nearefr, land E. The 
 founding upon the fhoaleft part is 19 feet, at high water ; and only 9 feet at 
 low water. At the fame time the point A, and the Ifland B, were in one ; 
 and the Ifland D, called Panella, in one with F, the higheft part of the N\V. 
 point of Fig Ifland. 
 
 On the weft fide ; the northernmoft of the little iflands between Iron Ifland 
 and King's Ifland was open, about the width of a fiSip's courfe from the north 
 point of King's Ifland. Sailing from the fhoaleft part towards A, gave 6, 7, 10 
 and 12 fathoms; and to the northward 7, 10 and 15 fathoms. Again, toward 
 Fig Ifland the depth increafed gradually from 6 to 7, and from 7 to 9 fathoms ; 
 rocky ground for about a cable's length of Panella Ifland, which is a little rock 
 on a bank of land. On this Panella Ifle is a clufter of trees, lying about a gun- 
 fhot from the N W. point of Fig Ifland, with which, at a diftance, it appears 
 confounded. To the eaftward (almoft joining to this rock) is another fand- 
 bank ; and to the SW. extends a reef of rocks, part of which only appear at low 
 water. 
 
 To enter King's-Ifland Bay, whether from the northward or wefhvard, you 
 mult leave the north part of King's Ifland a league to the fouthward, and ftand 
 to the eaftward till you have opened the bay (as it appears in the draught above 
 referred to) and can fee the ifland B, and C, at the farther end of the bay ; 
 then you may enter, leaving the Lys Shoal on the ftarboard, and Panella on 
 the larboard. You may pa's this lalt fafely, provided care be taken of the reef 
 of rocks above-mentioned, which extends to the SW. toward the bay. This 
 care is the more requilite, as the reef fieldom breaks, and as you riique (by the 
 turn of the tides) being horfed upon the rocks very fail ; ncverthelefs, as the 
 pafbge between them is wide enough, you may very well keep clear of it. 
 
 As
 
 264 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 As foon as you find you have paffed the Lys Shoal, fleer weftward, and 4-> 
 under King's Ifland, oppofite a bay, into which runs a ftream of exceeding good 
 water. The marks of this °f-}age are, ift, The point of King's Ifland (which 
 makes the entrance of the bay) N. or NbW. half a league. sdly, The NW. 
 point of Fig Ifland E^S. 3dly, Long Ifland, NbE|E. 
 
 The fea rifes and falls here 10 feet, and it is high water about i. pair 9 o'clock 
 at the full and change. This is (as raoft of thefe iflands are) inhabited. Here 
 is plenty of wood proper for (hip-building ; likewiie, a number of tigers and 
 in a kes. 
 
 This bay is not very deep to the fouthward of the °}-^age. There is a little 
 channel, feparating King's Ifland from that of Fig-tree, which is only pafiabie 
 for country boats. 
 
 If by contrary winds, or change of the tides, you are obliged to enter King's- 
 Ifland Bay, through the channel, between the point A, ad the Lys Shoal 
 (which at moft is but half a league wide) you muft keep along fhore at about 
 4 or { of a mile diflance from it ; and take fpecial care not to open the bay, 
 till you are about this diflance from it ; becaufe, if you approach King's Ifland 
 wich the point A, and Ifland B, in one, you run direct on the fhoal ; but it is 
 n: ceflary that the ifland C be fhut in by the point A, till you are within the 
 above diflance from the land E; then you may coafl it along King's Illand, 
 and to the °f->age. 
 
 To go out of the bay of King's Ifland, the befl track is to keep mid-channel, 
 between the NE. point of King's Illand and Panella, without borrowing from. 
 the weft, till you have paflcd the fhoal, which you may be allured of when 
 you have opened the fecond little ifland or rock, between King's bland and Iron 
 Ifland. 
 
 If you are obliged to go out by the little paffage, you mull keep along 
 King's Ifland, rounding the point which forms the bay, at about ; a mile 
 diflance, and not toward Iron Ifland, till the ifland C is quite (hut in by the 
 point A. 
 
 CCLT1I. Directions for Sailing lo and from MERour. 
 
 When you arc off King's-Ifland Bay, and would <f-} before Mergui River, 
 in t\ fathoms at low water, you muft fhape your courfe to fail about a league' 
 clear of the NIC. point of Fig Ifland ; and having paffed it, if you would keep 
 mid-channel, in failing toward the Ifland Madramacan (which you will fee to the 
 SSE.) you muft mind to keep the Little Caniilcr open with the fouth point of 
 
 Iron
 
 . Directions for Sailing to Mergui. 26c 
 
 Iron Ifland, and almoft: (hut in by the north part of Fig Ifland. You find the 
 bottom mud in 15, 13, 12, 9, and 8 fathoms. The heft <+-^ a g c for large mips 
 is in 9 fathoms at high water, and 6 at low. 
 
 The bearings at this place, are, 1 ft, The north point of Fig Ifland in one with 
 the fouth part of the Little Caniflcr ; and the fouth point of Iron Ifland N\V 
 open about to? from the Little Canifter; 2dly, The northernmoft: part of 
 Madramacan Ifland, which makes the (larboard fide, going into the river of 
 Mergui, S3?E. 1 1 league ; 3dly, The larboard point of Mergui River SbE. 2 
 leagues. The tides flow here almoft: north and fouth ; or it is high water at near 
 noon, on the full and change days ; then the water riles 15 feet. 
 
 It is reckoned about 2 leagues from this road to Mergui (a. fea-port town, 
 tinder the dominion of the king of Siam). Middling veflels can go up the riser, 
 taking the pilots of the place to pafs trie bar, and <+-$ before the town in 5 fathoms 
 water. 
 
 At Mergui you meet with all necefiary refrefhments, except oxen, which the 
 inhabitants dare not fell, fmce the Metempfychofis has been introduced there, 
 and made a law. The Metemplycholis is the Pythagorean opinion of the 
 tran (migration of fouls, which being adopted by the ftate as a law, it is the 
 reafon why the fale of thefc animals is prohibited, left: the foul of a relation be 
 incorporated therein. The chief trade confifts in elephants teeth, calin (pewter, 
 or tutenague) and rice, which they export to feveral parts of India. 
 
 Although idolatry is the eftabliihed religion here, the Chriftians have permifiion 
 to profefs their religion publicly, and have a church fupplied by a prieft of the 
 foreign miflionaries, under the title of Apoftolical Vicar. This curacy, like all 
 the millions in the kingdom of Siam, belongs to this community, who have a 
 feminary in the capital. 
 
 At Mergui are many Mahometans, who are the principal traders of it, and have 
 feveral ftiips which they end to different parts of the Indies. 
 
 The French had formerly a'iettlement in this port ; there are ftill the remains 
 of their fort to be fe< n. 
 
 When you fail from the road without the bar, you mu ft: follow the fame 
 inftructions given to fail thither; namely, Steer with the Little Canifter jult 
 oren for the north point of Fig Ifland ; then coaft this latter at A of a league 
 dijftance, and the c fail toward Iron Ifland, keeping the Little Canifter fomewhat 
 feparate from its fouth point. This will bring you fife, oppofte to King's-Mland 
 Bay, from whence you may go out, either to the northward or ioutiiward of Iron 
 Ifland, as fhail be moit convenient. 
 
 All
 
 266 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 All that hath been hitherto faid, fuppofes a leading gale ; when it is the 
 contrary (whether failing in or out, or to make advantage of the tides) you are 
 obliged to +-^. You mufi have new marks to proportion the courfes to the 
 different breadths of the channel, in order to avoid the rocks on both (ides, as 
 follows : 
 
 From athwart the Bay of King's Ifland, as far as the Little Ifland, about half 
 way from thence to Mergui, you may ftand to the northward, till you fee the 
 fouth point of Iron Ifland in one with the middle of the Little Canifter, and 
 to the fouthward till within t of a league from the -land of Fig Ifland, taking 
 care not to be entangled among the iflands. 
 
 When you have pafied the little ifland above-mentioned, between it and 
 Madramacan you may ftand to the northward, till the fouth part of Iron Ifland 
 adjoins to the Little Canifter ; but the moft certain mark is to leave a fmall fpace 
 between them. Without this obfervation, you inevitably run foul of the banks 
 oft the Coaft of Tenaflerim, as happened to the fhip Le Lys, which narrowly 
 cfcaped being loft here in 1730. 
 
 In Handing to the fouthward, take care to put about before the north point 
 of Fig Ifland is in one with the fouth point of Iron Ifland, leaving between them 
 at leafl the breadth of a (Lip's courfe, in order to avoid a bank which projects 
 on this fide the Ifland Madramacan. 
 
 CCLIV. Directions^/- S ailing front, the Coromandel Coast to Mergui 
 and Junk-Seilon, in the North-East Monsoon. 
 
 The belt, advice that navigators can take, who fail after the middle of September 
 from Pondicherry, or Madras, for Mergui, is to prefer the channels to the 
 northward of the Andamans rather than the fouthern ones. The example of 
 iome fhips fucceeding by the latter, ought not to be depended upon always ; 
 for by fo doing you expofe yourfelf (if the pafiage is a little long) to the NE. 
 winds, which will prevent your getting to windward of Mergui. Several fhips 
 have found t.hemfelves in this plight ; and having in vain ftrove againft the 
 v\ inds and currents, have been obliged to winter at Junk-Seilon, or Jan-Celon. 
 To avoid the like inconveniency, fhape your courfe between the Cocos Iflands 
 and the north point of the Great Andaman, or between the former and the 
 Preparis, whofe extent and latitude are determined. 
 
 When you are between thefe iflands, if the winds are wcflcrly, you may 
 fafely fleer for the Ifland Cabofla. 
 
 Twenty-
 
 Directions for Sailing to Mehgui and Junx-Seilon. 267 
 
 Twenty-five leagues EbS. of the north point of the Great Andaman, or 22 
 leagues SE. of the Cocos Iflands, in latitude 13? 19'N. you fee the ifland Nar- 
 condam ; high, and perceptible 18 leagues at fea. On approaching it, you 
 perceive a little rock, joining almoft its fouth point, and another larger on the 
 eaft fide. This ifland, in conlideration of its fmall extent, is, as one may fay, 
 but a high rock ; but appeared fafe to thole who have been near it. 
 
 In the Bofcawen, Captain Morris, at the beginning of the year 1763, had 
 fight of rhis ifland, Barren Ifland, and the northern part of the Great Anda- 
 man, at the lame times and law one and another of them for 5 or 6 days 
 fucceffively ; particularly the Ifland Narcondam bore ElS. when the northern 
 part of the Great Andaman bore N^W. from the faidfhip's journal : the latitude 
 of the Ifland Narcondam is 13? 25'N. and the north end of the Great Andaman 
 is 13? 35'N. When the Ifland Narcondam bore NE. and the north end of the 
 Great Andaman WbN,;N. Barren Ifland bore SbE. 7 leagues. The variation 
 hereabout was between 30' and 40 / W. The wefternmofl-, which is the 
 fouthernmofl: of the Cocos Iflands, lies in latitude 14? i'N. 
 
 From Narcondam Ifland to that of Cabofla (the wefternmofl: of the Archipelago 
 ofMergui) the courfe is-EbS. diftance 67 leagues. As foon as you have loft 
 fight of the former, you get foundings on the Coaft of Tenaflerim, in 60 fathoms. 
 As foon as you have made the Ifland Cabofla, you may conform yourfelf to the 
 foregoing directions for failing to Mergui. 
 
 When you are within fight of the Cocos, Andaman, or Preparis Iflands, If 
 the winds blow northerly, the fureft way not to mils Mergui is to make the 
 Mofcos Iflands, in latitude 13? 40 'N. They may be feen 10 or 12 leagues at 
 fea. The fouthernmofl: bears WNW. of Tavay Point, which forms the weft 
 fide of the river fo called. From this point the coaft (which extends north as 
 far as latitude 1 5? 30'N.) is bordered with iflands pretty clear of danger ; and 
 where (it is laid) are convenient places for oj-^ing. The fouthernmofl: are thole 
 of Mofcos above-mentioned.- 
 
 South'by eaft of thefe iflands, in latitude 13? 6'N. lies the north point of 
 Tavay Ifland, between which and the continent there is an exceeding fine 
 channel, through which you may fail to go to Mergui. It is furrounded on 
 the eaft fide by a bank, the edge whereof lies north and fouth, encompafling 
 all this part of the coaft of Tenaflerim, as far as the river Calouan near Mergui. 
 
 When you have brought the Mofcos Iflands to bear north, and are defirous 
 of palling this channel, fteer SbE. in foundings of mud, and the depth unequal, 
 as 35> 3°> 2 5» 20 > ana< 15 fathoms, then 35 and 25, to within 1 £ league of the 
 
 Q q north
 
 268 A Neiv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 north point of Tavay Ifland. It is belt to keep nearer the eaft coaft of this ifland ' 
 than the bank above-mentioned, becaufe there is lefs water about it. 
 
 On the fide of Tavay Ifland are four little ides, which you may coaft, 
 leaving them on the ftarboard. You have from 30 to 25 fathoms between the 
 north point of Tavay Ifland and the rocks ; but this depth decreafes, after they 
 are pafled. The tides flow here SE. and NW. or at 9 o'clock, at full and 
 change ; the flood to the fouthward, and the ebb to the northward. The lea 
 rif s and falls here 3 fathoms. 
 
 The fouth part of Tavay is a number of iflands, feparated by fmall channels 
 or arms of the fea, which are imperceptible in coming from the northward ; fo 
 that it appears contiguous and united. On the eaft fide is a little round ifland, 
 called the Canifter of the Bank, which points out the brink thereof on that 
 fide, like as Long Ifland does about 2 leagues to the louthvvard. 
 
 Off this latter you may fee King's Ifland Bay to the fouthward, toward which 
 you mult fail, conforming to the foregoing directions, whether you would go 
 into it, or +-^ before Mergui River. 
 
 If, coming to the northward, you pafs to the weftward of Tavay Ifland 
 (between feveral great fteep rocks, lituate along this coaft, and the Ifland the 
 Great Canifter) from hence direct your con .fie between the north point of Iron 
 Ifland, and the fouth Point of Tavay, as before directed. 
 
 If you pals theNE. monfoon at Mergui (on account of its being too early 
 for the Coaft of Coromandel) your departure Ihould be made about the 15th 
 or 20th of -December, in order to arrive there about the beginning of January ;. 
 then that coaft is (afe f 
 
 It has been fhewn, in the preceding inflrucfions, what courfe you muft take 
 from the Road of Mergui, or from the Bay of King's Ifland, to the different 
 paflages through which you muft go out of this archipelago. 
 
 If you fill whilft theNE. monfoon is in its height, direct, your courfe from 
 the Ifland Caboffa to pafs between the Iflands Preparis and Cocos, or between the 
 laft and the north point of the Great Andaman ; from thence you may fail to 
 the Coaft of Coromandel, with this obfervation, always to make the land to 
 the northward of the place bound to. This precaution is the more neceflary,, 
 becaufe, if you fall in to the fouthward, you will find it difficult beating up 
 againft winds and currents, which are then contrary. 
 
 It fometimes happens, that the- (hips trading to Mergui are not always ready 
 to lail in January ; if neceffity obliges them to ftay till the middle of February,, 
 it will be beft going through the channel to the fouthward of the Little Andaman,. 
 
 making
 
 Directions for Sailing to Mergui and Junk-Seilon. 269 
 
 making advantage of the foutherly winds, which at this time blow out in the 
 Bay of Bengal more than the northerly ones. 
 
 The whole eoaft of TenafTerim, from Mergui as far as latitude 10? 50'N. is. 
 encompafled with a number of iflands of different fizes, which form feveral 
 channels, that are only pafiable by the fmall country fhips ; and 6 or 7 ! 
 to the ibuthward of Mergui is another mouth ofTenafierim river, from whence 
 to the fouthward the coaft is begirt with a bank, containing many little iflands, 
 between which the fmall country veffels go to Bartgry and Junk-Seilon. 
 The largeft and raoft confiderable of theie iflands is called Omell, extending 
 9 leagues from north to fouth, the NE. part whereof nearly adjoins to the 
 above-mentioned bank. 
 
 Beyond Omell Ifland they fay the coaft is navigable, even for large fhips, as 
 far as Junk-Seilon, provided care be taken of a bank, fituate between the 
 continent and the bordering iflands. Although this bank be 3 leagues diftant 
 from the former, and thereby, affords a good paftage between them, it leems 
 better to fail without all, where every danger is avoided. 
 
 The body of Junk-Seilon Ifland lies in latitude 8? 15'N. its fhape is irregular ; 
 extending from north to fouth about 18 leagues. On the eaft frde of it are very 
 good harbours which you may fafely put into ; food and refrefhment being 
 very plentiful, and the inhabitants fociable. 
 
 About 45 leagues SE. of Junk-Seilon, you find the port of Quedah : there 
 is a trade for calin, or tutenagne, and elephants' teeth, to export to different 
 parts of the Indies. 
 
 CCLV. Directions for Sailing from Madras to Pegu in the Little 
 
 and Great Monsoons. 
 
 If you fail from Fort St. George for Pegu in the Little Monfoon, (that is, by 
 the 25th of April) it is convenient to keep well to the fouthward, becaufe at the 
 laft full or change of the moon in April, or at the nrft full or change in May, 
 you have generally blowing weather from that quarter. If you find the wine's 
 ftahd good at fouth-weft, fhape your courfc to go through the 14? channel, 
 
 ilch is between the Great Andaman and the Cocos Ifland, keeping as near 
 the Andamahs as poffible. As foon as you are through, fraud E. or EbS. if you 
 can; and go within a league or two of the Ifland Narcondam, which is very 
 highland, in htitude 13? 1 9'N. and when you are 10 or 12 leagues to the 
 eaflward thereof, your paflage is fecure. 
 
 Q q 2 If
 
 270 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 It you do not fail before the middle of May, the monfoon is then fet in, 
 and you may keep between the latitudes of 13? 30'N. and i4?N. but do not 
 go to the northward of latitude i4?N. and go through the faid channel as 
 above. 
 
 At this time of the year, if your glafs be true, and the log is well kept, 
 you will make the Andamans, when you have made about 10? eafting. When 
 you are through the channel, fteer E. or EbS. and when the Ifland Narcondam 
 bears fouth 2 or 3 leagues, you may fteer ENE. NEbE. or NE. till you have 
 2? 30' eafting from the faid ifland. In this run be fure to keep the log well ; 
 then fteer north for Siriam Bay, and keep a good look-out to the eaftward ; 
 for if you are 5 leagues to the eaftward thereof in clear weather, you will 
 certainly fee the high land of Martaban ; and if you do not fee the faid land, 
 you may conclude you are not fo far to the eaftward of the bar. 
 
 Ships that come on the Pegu coaft at this time of the year, ought to be 
 well provided with good °f-^s and cables ; for, fhould you be obliged to ride 
 out a full or change of the moon ; the latter end of May or beginning of June, 
 you will certainly ride very hard, being fhoal water and very ftrong tides, 
 which run 5, 6, and 7 knots, and flow from 18 to 21 feet. If on the 
 fpring tides you chance to meet with dark dirty weather, ride it out in 8 | 
 or 9 fathoms ; and when you would deal with the coaft, do not venture 
 under 6 fathoms, till you fee the land, and know whereabout you are. If you 
 meet with ftiff foundings, mud or clay, in 6t" or 7 t or 8 fathoms, then you 
 may be aflured you are to the eaftward of the bar, for to the weftward is all 
 foft ouze. 
 
 Thefe ftiff foundings are the beft marks in blowing: weather: but in fair 
 weather, when you can fet the tides, you may know thereby whether you are 
 to the eaftward or weftward of the bar; for all along; to the weftward of the 
 bar, the tides fet to the north-eaftward, or more eafterly ; whereas all along 
 to the eaftward of the bar they fet NNE. and NbE. therefore, if you happen 
 to fall into thefe latter tides way, you may depend upon it you are to the 
 eaftward of the bar ; then come away to the weftward with the ebb as foon as 
 you can. In thefe tides way you meet with the aforeiaid ftiff" foundings. Thofe 
 who were exact in running the before-mentioned eafting, fell in with the bar 
 very well, not exceeding 4 or 5 miles on either fide. 
 
 If you fail from Madras, in the Great Monfoon, that is, in the month of 
 September, when you have made about 11? \ eafting, in latitude 13? 40'N. or 
 
 thereabout,
 
 Directions for Sailing from Madras to Pegu. 271 
 
 thereabout, you will fee the land of Andaman. Some have made 13? eafting . 
 this may be the fault either of the glafs or log. After you are through the 
 channel, follow the directions aforefaid, at leaft as near as you can ; but if you 
 mould meet with calms, as mod do who fail late, ft rive for «f-}ing ground ; but 
 take care you do not fall to the weftward of Baragou Point. 
 
 After you have <f-}ing-ground, be fure to keep it (for if you lofe it, you 
 run a great rifque of loling your paflage) get into 7 or 8 fathoms, as oppor- 
 tunity prefents ; then fail along more in 6 J- or 7 fathoms, keeping your lead 
 going, at leaft twice a glafs ; and when you find your water deepen a fathom 
 or thereabout, you are the length of Siriam Bar ; there is the deepeft water of 
 any along the coaft. 
 
 Keep a good look-out for the marks of the bar, which are 5 or 6 Palmira 
 trees and aloes to the weftward of the river's mouth ; but there are feveral on 
 the eaftern fhore : to the eaftward of them the trees have fmooth tops, and are 
 like a wood. Thefe are the beft marks to know the river by. 
 
 Bring the Palmira trees on the weft fide of the river NW1W. and ftand in 
 NNE. and north, for the bar; and as foon as you have the river's mouth open, 
 ftand in NNW. or more wefterly, as judgment (hall direct. After you are 
 over the bar, the river is wide enough. The beft time for going over is, at 
 half or three quarters flood ; for then the tide fets NNE. and north ; but the 
 firft of the flood the tide makes the eaftward very ftrong. If it be clear 
 weather, you may fee the high land of Martaban, when you are within Siriam 
 or Pegu bar. 
 
 About the meridian of the bar, in 9, 10, or 11 fathoms, the water will be 
 very white and thick, and the foundings foft and ouzy ; but to the eaftward 
 of the bar the water is green, and the foundings blue mud, fomewhat ftifK 
 
 Between the Fal'e River and Chinabuckear (or Chinabacore) are fmall 
 foundings for the diftance of 4 or 5 leagues, fo that you will be obliged to fteer 
 more eafterly ; and as foon as" you begin to deepen your water, you are then 
 near Chinabuckear. If you fall in with the land to the weftward of Siriam, 
 be fure to mind your foundings : there is no mark on the land that will direct 
 you, till you are oft Chinabuckear ; there is a great tree, or tuft of trees, a little 
 to the weftward of the river's mouth, which makes like an old chapel or barn, 
 and is the beft mark to know Chinabuckear by. 
 
 It is high water on Siriam Bar, full and change, at \ paft 3 o'clock. 
 
 CCLVI.
 
 2-2 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 CCLVI. 'The Situation of the Our as. 
 
 In the year 1728, the Compton, Captain Mifencr, hound for Coafr. and Bay, 
 in latitude o? 55'S. difcovered 3 recks, about the height of his main-top 
 above water.. He made thence eafting to the Friar's Hood on Zeloan about 
 40' ; and iuppoied it to be the Ouras laid down in the charts to the northward 
 of the line. 
 
 G E N E R A L
 
 [ *73 ] 
 GENERAL, and PARTICULAR 
 
 IR.EGTION S 
 
 FOR 
 
 SAILING to, in and from the EAST-INDIES. 
 
 CCLVII. DiRFCTioNsyor Sailing from the Lizard to the Island Madeira, 
 /fo Canary Islands, Capede Verde Islands, and the Equinoctial Line. 
 
 AVING pafled the Britifh Channel, and taken your departure from the 
 Lizard ; if pofiible, fhape your courfe fouth-weflwardly, fo as to come into 
 latitude 43?N. about 60 or 70 leagues weftward of Cape Finifterre. The Lizard's 
 latitude is 49? 58'N. and longitude 5? 2o'W. from St. Paul's, London. The 
 latitudes and longitudes of Cape Finifterre and other places, are fliewn in the 
 tables, or by the charts. 
 
 In the above latitude 43°N. you will be about longitude 14? io'W. from 
 London, and a Sb\V-^\V. courfe (the variation being allowed, and the true 
 courfe found) will carry you between the iflands Madeira and Porto Sanfto; 
 diftance from that place off Cape Finifterre, about 210 leagues. 
 
 If you can continue nearly the fame courfe (mil every where allowing for the 
 variation) you may pals by the Canary Iflands ; but if your courfe be more 
 weftwardly, thefe iflands will be left to the eafhvard of you. 
 
 If thefe courfes are fleered with an open wind, the iflands above-mentioned 
 may be feen by thofe courfes ; but if the winds are contrary, by endeavouring, 
 as much as pofiible, to come in fight of the Canary 111 pu will there f; 1 
 
 tie NE. trade-wind begin to blow toward the SW'. as hath been already largely 
 explained in the former part of this Treatile. 
 
 At the time you get light of the iflands, it will be proper to refer to the views 
 of them in the charts ; becaufe by thefe, and- the fhipY latitude, they may Le 
 known ; alfp, : the dangers near them. 
 
 If
 
 274 <d New Directory Jar the East-Indies. 
 
 If the winds will permit you to keep to the eaftward, you may next fee either 
 the Cape de Verde Ifhnds, or the Coaft of Africa near Cape de Verde. Other- 
 wife, by more weftwardly courfes, you may be to the weft ward of them. By 
 endeavouring to fee them, when you are no great diftance from them, you mav, 
 if vou can, fhape your courfe SbE. till you come nearer the equinoctial line, 
 where may be expected, at certain feafons of the year, variable winds. 
 
 It has been found by experience, that when mips crofs the equinoctial, 
 within certain limits of longitude, they come to the Cape of Good Hope in lefs 
 time than when they crofs the line either too far eafl: or weft of thofe limits. 
 By crofting the line too much to the eaftward, they are frequently driven toward 
 the Coaft: of Guinea in Africa ; and by crofting it too much to the weftward, 
 they are driven towards the Coaft of Brazil, either of which may occalion them 
 to prolong their voyage, if not lofe their paflage. 
 
 For the foregoing reafons, fbmetimes there are lines drawn on the charts of 
 this part of the ocean, fhewing the limits between which fhips fhould pals the 
 equinoctial, when bound to the Cape of Good Hope, or India. 
 
 In latitude 5?N. off the Coaft: of Africa, the tornadoes, or variable winds, 
 may be expe&ed. Thele are troublefome and very unheakhful, and fhould be 
 avoided. 
 
 It is reckoned that about the longitude i5?W. of London is no improper place 
 to crofs the equinoctial for fhips outward bound. Some have done it in longitude 
 
 1 2?\V. of London. Some others more to the weftward. The whole breadth 
 of the limit in which it has been reckoned proper for fhips outward bound to 
 crofs the equinoctial line, is from 12?W. to 2 6?W. longitude from London, the 
 middle of which is iq?W. longitude. The fhips that crofs the line to the 
 eaftward of the limit, rifque their being driven toward the Coaft: of Africa ; and 
 thofe that crofs the line to the weftward of the limit, rilque their being driven 
 toward the Coaft of Brazil in South America. 
 
 If you crofs the equinoctial line within the above limits, you have the lefs 
 to fear of the ESE. current, fetting toward the Coaft of Africa, or of the 
 NWbN. current letting toward the Weft India lflands. Some navigators have 
 recommended it to crofs the line near the meridian of the ifland St. Jago, one 
 of the Cape de Verde lflands, which is in longitude 23? 15'W. from London. 
 The prefent variation at the equinoctial in this longitude is 7? 37 W. In longi- 
 tude 1 2? W. from London, at the line the variation is 1 2? 1 5 W. and in longitude 
 
 2 6r\V. the variation is 6? o'W. by which numbers the place of the ihip near 
 the line may be determined. 
 
 CCLVI1I.
 
 ( 2 73*) „ 
 
 CCLVIII. Direct i oss for Sailing into Porta Pray a Rpad, in lie Tfi,i:;d 
 
 St. Jaco. 
 
 It has b?en cuftomary for fhips bound to India to put in St. JagO (one of 
 the Cape de Verde iflands) to get a fupply of water and frefh proviiions, of 
 which there is a great plenty at that ifl.md. It is well worth their while to ftop 
 there, efpccially if they had a long paflage from England ; fince this contri- 
 butes greatly to the health of the fhip's company the remainder of the paflage 
 to India. 
 
 Ships unfortunate enough to mils this ifland, when they fully intended to flop 
 there for refreshments, have been forced to proceed to India without any ; 
 this has laid them under great difficulties, and proved very injurious to. the 
 health of their people. 
 
 The principal caufes of fhips miffing the Ifland St. Jago are thefe : at the 
 time of the year when they want to call there, the fun is near the zenith of the 
 ifland, and therefore their obfervations are not very correcl ; at this time alfo 
 the weather is generally fo very hazy about thefe iflands, that they cannot be feen 
 far; therefore, their fleering to make St. Jago is likewife wrong. The following 
 method for making the Cape de Verde iilands, when bound to St. Jago, feems 
 preferable. 
 
 Being in the latitude of Sail, 16? 50'N. with n?W. variation, you will be 
 12 or 14 leagues to the eaftward thereof. Steer WbN. This courfe, with 
 allowance for variation and a foutherly current (which you have always amongft 
 and near thefe iflands) will keep you in the parrallel nearly. 
 
 The Ifland Sail is an high bold ifland with a peak upon it, and may be feen. 
 a great way in clear weather ; it lies fo near the ifland Bonaviita, that you can- 
 not but make one or the other of them, (they bearing nearly N. and S. of 
 each other) that is, you cannot pafs between them without feeing both. When 
 you get fight of them, keep to the eaftward of Bonavifta ; and when to the 
 fouthward of it, fleer for the Ifland of May ; which you will foon get fight 
 of. You'muft alfo go to the fouthward of the ifland of May : and when you 
 are near it, you may fee the Ifland St. Jago, which is high land : fleer for 
 it, and keep along the SE. coaft thereof until you come to an high fteep point 
 of land, a-breaft ot which you will have Porta Praya Road open all at once, 
 and may fee the governor's houfe, and the caftle, it being white on the top 
 of the hill, and the town near it. 
 
 You muff haul clofe round the above, mentioned point, and keep within a 
 cable's length of the fhore, until you come a-breaft of the fmall ifland that 
 lies on the well fide of the road, or bay ; then you may <+-^ in 7* fathoms 
 
 R r water
 
 274 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 water, the eaft point of the bay bearing EbS. the weft point SWbW. and the 
 fort NW^W. 
 
 Being come to the equinoctial, you are to proceed in order to double the 
 Cape of Good Hope, with as much expedition and fafety as poflible. It ihould 
 be here noted, that from the month of November till March, near the Coaft 
 of Brazil, the winds blow often to the northward of the eaft ;."on which account 
 it is thought beft to keep your courfe as much to the SE. as poiliole, till you 
 come into latitude from 20?S. to 35?S. or even 40?S. if contrary winds ihould 
 not have permitted you to keep more to the eaftward, till you can lhape a 
 fouth-eafterly courfe, in order either to come to, or double the Cape of Gcod Hope. 
 
 In theie parts of the fouthern ocean, it will be proper to keep a good look- 
 out by night and day, there bring fuppofed feveral fmall iflands, rocks, and 
 fhoals, at different places in this ocean, whole latitudes as well as longitudes 
 are not well known, although they have been feen by different voyagers. 
 
 The principal iflands you may expect to meet with far off from the coaft, 
 in this fouthern ocean, are the lfland St. Matthew, St. Helena, Afcenfion, 
 Fernando Norono, Trinidada, and Triftan de Acuna ; with feveral others of 
 lefler note, whole latitudes and longitudes are ihewn by the charts. 
 
 CCLIX. DiRccTioNsyor Sailing round the Cape of Good Hope. 
 
 Being in the vaft ocean between the Coaft of Africa and Brazil, in the 
 months of May, June, July, or Auguft, which are the months wherein fhip-s 
 generally fail round the Cape of Good Hope for India, you will meet with 
 frefh gales, and fometimes hard gales, from NW. to SW. with a great fea, 
 and mowers of fleet, hail, or rain, and the weather pretty cold ; the more fa 
 as you approach the Cape. About 25? or 26? of longitude weftward of the Cape 
 of Good Hope, you will have 7? 20' W. variation, which you will increafe gra- 
 dually as you run to the eaftward toward the Cape ; and, a-s you come nearer 
 the Cape, the variation increafes fafter, in proportion, than when you were at 
 a greater diftancc from the Cape. A good parrallel of latitude to run to the. 
 eaftward in, is between %y and 36? of fouth latitude. 
 
 The principal winds that blow at the Cape of Good Hope, are the SE. and 
 NW. the othef winds flldom Lifting more than a few hours ; the E. and NE. 
 Mowing the lcldomcft of any : the N. and NW. winds generally bring on foul 
 weather and hurricanes. 
 
 In May, June, July, and Auguft, the W. and SW. winds (which are 
 1 ; lently accompanied with fogs and cloudy weather) are foon over; whereas 
 
 the
 
 Directions^/- Sailing round the Cape of Good Hope. 275 
 
 the NW. winds fometimes blow violently for feveral clays together in the above 
 months, and fometimes in September, and by fits in other months : the iky is 
 then conftantly clouded, and they generally end in rain. The SE. winds 
 blow at the Cape in moft months of the year, but chiefly in October, November, 
 December, January, February, March, and April : they are cold and dry, and 
 the Iky is generally very clear. 
 
 In March and April they have frequently very thick fogs at the Cape, and 
 along the coaft. As to the general temperature of the air, the Cape is by no 
 means an hot country ; though fometimes the heat is exceftive, but of fhort 
 duration : and it rarely freezes in winter, though the nights feem very cold. 
 Thunder is feldom heard near the Cape. 
 
 The latitude of the Cape ofGoodHopeis 34? 24'S. and longitude, by agrono- 
 mical obfervations, 18? 3o'E. from London ; variation obierved afhore at the 
 Cape, i9?W. 1764, variation obferved at fea off the Cape 3 or 4 leagues, 19? 
 30' W. in 1764; and 20? 3o"W. in 1774. 
 
 It has been a general pra&ice for fhips, pafTing by the Cape of Good Hope 
 to the eafhvard, to keep in the parallel of 36?, or 36? io'S. which is too hig!i a 
 latitude for a fhip to keep in, to ftrike foundings on the Bank oft" Cape Lagullas ; 
 for 36? io' will but juft run over the outer edge of the bank : fo that if a fhip 
 mould neglect to found very often, me may run over the bank, without having 
 foundings at all ; for in that parallel of Latitude the bank is hut narrow, it 
 being not more than 25 or 30 leagues broad ; and a fhip may run that diftance 
 in one night's time, and fo have no foundings at all. Some ihips have been fo 
 circumftanced, and obliged to proceed on their voyage, without having an 
 opportunity to correct their reckoning ; which may have been attended with 
 very dangerous coniequences. 
 
 In fleering to the eafhvard, in order to double the Cape, and to ftrike 
 foundings on the bank off Cape Lagullas, keep between the parallels of latitude 
 2§? 45'S. and 36?S. and do not go to the fouthward of latitude 3^?S. 
 
 As you run to the eallward you will find the variation in create very fift. 
 Make the variation and latitude your fure guide. Your reckoning will always 
 be a-head of the fhip in failing round the Cape, occationed by a ftrong wefterly 
 current, which takes its beginning at the fouth end of Madagafcar, and runs 
 to the weftward all along the Coaft of Africa to the Cape of Good Hope ; there 
 it runs ftronger than any where elfe. 
 
 This ftrong wefterly current letting againft the violent W. and NW. winds, 
 makes monftrous high feas off" the Cape : fo ftrong is this wefterly current, 
 
 R r 2 that
 
 276 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 that it has frequently fet fhips, returning from India, round the Cape to the 
 weftward when they have leaft expected it ; even when they have been lying-to> 
 under a reefed mainfail, or a balanced mizen. 
 
 The ingenious navigator mould take the latitude and variation for his principal 
 guide ; thefe, if carefully obferved, will not deceive him. 
 
 Beino- to the weftward of the Cape of Good Hope, and fleering to the eaftward, 
 between latitude 35° 45'S. and 36?S. if you have increafed the variation to 
 20?W. you muft then keep a good look-out, as you are then not far from the 
 Cape. When you have increafed the variation to 20? 3C/W. (fuppofing the 
 observation good and exact) you are then a-breaft of it ; that is, the Cape bears 
 from NbE. to NbW. (or thereabout) of you ; and the diftance will be your 
 difference of latitude from it. 
 
 You muft continue to fteer to the eaftward, between the forefaid parallel cf 
 latitude, and you may foon expect to get foundings ; fo that in latitude 35? 45^. 
 you have foundings much fooner than in latitude 36?S. for the bank rounds off 
 with a flope to the eaftward. 
 
 When you have increafed the variation to 2i?W. 21? ic/W. or 21? 12W". 
 in latitude 35? 45'S. 35° 52'S. or 36?S. you will be fure to have foundings at 
 70, 75, or 80 fathoms water, fine grey fand. Cape Lagullas will then bear 
 off you, from NbW. to NbE. or nearly N. and the difference of latitude 
 will be your diftance from the faid Cape, which will be about 17, 19, or 22 
 leagues. 
 
 Cape Lagullas's latitude is 34? 54/S. and longitude 20? I5'E. from London ; 
 the variation, 1764, by feveral obfervations off this Cape, was 20? 2W. 20? 
 1 z'W. The variation, 1774, was 21? 12W. 
 
 You have foundings all the way between Cape Lagullas and the Cape of Good 
 Hope, from 50 to 60, yo, and in fome places 80 fathoms ; fand and ouzy 
 ground, from 5 to 10 leagues off lhore. 
 
 Off the pitch of the Cape of Good Hope SWbS. diftance 3 or 4 miles, there 
 is a ledge of rocks even with the water's edge, on which the fea breaks very 
 high. Faffing about 3 or 4 miles without them in, from 30 to 33 fathoms, are 
 coral rocks. When in 33 fathoms, Cape Faltb bore E|N. and the eafternmoft 
 part of the Cape of Good Hope NbE. diftahoe 3 leagues, and from the breakers 
 3 miles ; from thence, ftanding to the wc{hvard, loon deepened the water to 
 40 and 46 fathoms, corally bottom ; and fopn after loft foundings. You have 
 do foundings after \ ou are pail thefe rocks, till you come within 2 miles of 
 Freeman"* Point. 
 
 The
 
 Directions^/" Sailing round the Cape of Good Hope. 277 
 
 The Cape of Good Hope makes the weft point of Falfe Bay ; it lias rocks 
 under water near its weftern, fou'thern, and eaftern coafts, which makes it 
 hazardous for (hips that come too near it without proper draughts, mewing the 
 places of thefc dangers. 
 
 In 1751, x 75 2, and 175}, the Abbe de la Caille determined its latitude and 
 longitude by obfervations ; and drew a fmall map of the Cape and the. adjacent 
 places. 
 
 He found that the principal winds at the Cape are the SE. and the NW. the reft 
 feldom lading more than a few hours ; the E. and NE. blowung the feldomeft 
 of any. The N. and NNW. winds generally bring on foul weather and hurricanes 
 in April, May, June, July, and Auguft ; the W. to- the SYVbS. are frequently 
 accompanied with fogs and clouds, which are foon over : fometimes violent NW. 
 winds blow for feveral days together in May, June, July, Auguft, and Sep- 
 tember, and by fits in the other months ; the fky is then conftantly clouded, 
 and they generally end in rain : the SE. winds blow at the Cape in moft months 
 of the year, but chiefly in October, November, December, January, February, 
 March, and April ; they are cold and dry, and the fky very clear, unlefs after 
 a rainy feafon. As to the general temperature of the air on land near the Cape, 
 it is by no imans an hot country : though fometimes the heats are exceflive, 
 they are but of fhort duration. 
 
 In February, 1752, Reaumur's thermometer was up at 36 ; this was thought 
 very extraordinary ; at midnight it w r as funk to 15 : an epidemic diforder imme- 
 diately followed, which carried off numbers. It rarely freezes in winter, though 
 the nights leem very cold. He never knew his thermometer fink fo low as 4 [- 
 below feezing. 
 
 The mountains of Drakerfteen, the height of one of which meafured 107 1 
 toifes, appear white at the top for fbme weeks, as if covered with fnow ; but it 
 is no other than hail. Thunder is feldom heard near the Cape ; but it lightens 
 frequently. The barometer varies from 27 inches 10 | lines to near 28 inches 
 8 lines, and this chiefly in winter. The variation of the magnetic needle was 
 19 W. from the north. The new moon makes high water at the Cape at ^ % an 
 hour paft 2 P. M. and the tide feldom rifes more than 3 feet, except after an 
 hurricane, or fome extraordinary caufe. 
 
 This is a moft excellent place for all kinds of refrefhments ; and being a moft 
 wl olefome climate, the lick feamen recover here fpeedily, eipecially from the 
 fcurvy. 
 
 Wood
 
 zyZ A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Wood is a very fcarce article, -and confequently dear ; but here is plenty of 
 o-ood water. In Table Bay the watering-place is at the wooden pier oppofite the 
 fort, and within mufket-fhot thereof; the water is brought down to the pier- 
 head in pipes, to which you fix an hofe, and fill your cafks in the boat ; fo that 
 o-reat difpatch may be made in watering here. 
 
 CCLX. Directions for going into Table Bay, at tbeCA?E of Good Hope. 
 
 Beino- off the Cape of Good Hope, and paft the above-mentioned rocks, or 
 breakers, you may fail clofe along fhore, and no danger till off Freeman's Point, 
 which is to the northward of Chapman's Bay, where there are fome rocks, 
 which lie a fmail diflance from the fhore. You may go within I \ mile of 
 Freeman's Point, and have foundings in 52 or 53 fathoms, fandy bottom ; 
 then fleer for Green Point, keeping 1 1 mile, or thereabout, off fhore ; you 
 will have from 50 to 48, 46, 40, 36, and 34 fathoms, fine fand and broken 
 fhells. The coaft forms a bay between Freeman's Point and the Sugar-Loaf 
 Hill, which is called Freeman's Bay. 
 
 Before you come to Green Point you will fee Penguin Ifland, which is a low- 
 flat ifland, with a look-out houfe on the middle of it : there they hoifl a flag 
 when fhips are in fight. If you are pretty well in the Freeman's Bay, you will 
 fee Penguin Ifland, bearing NNE^E. or NEbN. From the foot of the Sugar- 
 Loaf Hill to Green Point, which is a low green point, you will fee feveral 
 rocks above water, lying fome diflance from the fhore ; there is no danger but 
 what you fee. 
 
 As you run in, give thefe rocks a reafonable birth, and you will fhoalcn your 
 water gradually from 34 to ^o, 26, 20, 16, and 12 fathoms, rocky ground ; 
 fo that there is no <+-}age hereabout. You may borrow upon Green Point, 
 to 10, 9, or S fathoms, and no danger; fo fleer up the bay,, and you will 
 have 8, 7, or 6 fathoms, regular, foundings ; but rocky ground till you get 
 about a mile to the eaflvvafd .of Green Point ; then the bottom is fandy, and 
 fit for 4-} a ge. 
 
 You may <f-^ in Table Bay, oppofite the town, in 7, 6, or 5 fathoms ; but 
 it is not very holding ground. A good and convenient birth (and indeed it is 
 allowed to be the belt birth in the bay) is the houfe on Penguin Ifland, bearing 
 N [W. Green Point N\V|N. the flag-ftaffon the Lion's Rump W',S. Charles's 
 Mount Sj W. in 5 fathoms, diflance from the town 1 mile, and from the neareft 
 fhore < x a mile. About 1 , L or 2 cables length further to the eailward, is 
 
 another
 
 Di recti oms for going inio Table Bay. 279 
 
 another good birth ; there you have 6 \ fathoms. All over the well fide the 
 bay is clear ground, bur the NE. part of the bay is all foul. 
 
 All the land about the ape of Good Hope is very high ; but the Table 
 Land is moil: remarkable, it being an exceffive high mountain, quite level on 
 the top, and breaks off perpendicularly at both ends, till it joins the other high 
 lands near it. The eaft part of the Table Land joins to a high peaked mountain, 
 called Charles's Mount ; and the weft part joins to the Sugar-Leaf Hill, a very 
 high and remarkable peaked mountain, much refembling the top of a fugar 
 loaf: on the top of this hill the Dutch have a look-out houfe, where they 
 hoift a flag when any (hips are in fight. To the north-weftward of the Sugar 
 Loaf, and joining thereunto, though at a pretty good diftance, is another 
 mountain, but much inferior to the Sugar- Loaf Hill in height, called the Lion's 
 Rump : there they alfo keep a look-out, and hoift a flag. 
 
 Thefe lands make this place very remarkable, particularly the Table Land, 
 which is much higher than any land near it, and may be feen a great way at 
 fea in clear weather. The latitude of the Table Land is 34? 4/S. and the 
 fame longitude as the Cape of Good Hope ; they are nearly north and fouth of 
 each other. The Cape town is fituated at the foot of the Table Land, in a fine 
 pleafant valley near the fea. 
 
 It frequently happens, that when fhips get a-breaft Green Point, and come to 
 open Table Bay, they meet with ftrong fiery "breezes from SE. or ESE. blow ino- 
 right out of the bay fo hard that a fhip cannot turn to windward. 'When that 
 is the cafe, it is ufual for (hips to bear away for Penguin Ifland, takin°- care 
 to keep well to the fouthward and eafhvard of it, and not go within 1 -- or 
 2 miles of the S. or SW. parts thereof; for at that diftance there lies a ledo-e 
 of rocks under water,- on which the fea breaks very high in bad weather • 
 but they do not fhew themfelves in fine weather, therefore they are then the 
 moft dangerous. 
 
 You may <+-> on the eaft Tide of Penguin Ifle, in 1 2 or 1 4 fathoms 1 or 
 r \ mde off it, or within 1 of a mile of it, in 10 or 1 1 fathoms : there you 
 are a good deal flickered from the SW. fea by the ledge of rocks above-men- 
 tioned, and have clear <r-}ing ; but all the N. and InE. parts of this bay are 
 foul ground. 
 
 Ships lie at Penguin lib till the wind comes to SW. or W. which it Generally 
 does in the morning, during the fair-weather feafon ; then they weigh, and 
 run into Table Bay, and <>}-} in a proper birth. 
 
 In
 
 280 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 t 
 
 la their Cummer time, or fair-weather feafon, at the Cape, which is from 
 O&ober to April, you generally have, in the mornings, regular fea-breezes 
 from SW. and W. which continue till noon, or fometimes longer ; and then the 
 Wind comes off the land at SE. or ESE. and moftly blows frefh the remaining 
 part of the day, and all night till morning ; then the fea breezes comes off 
 a^ain. 
 
 In the months of May, June, July, and Auguft, the W. and SW. winds 
 blow ftrong, and are frequently accompanied with fogs and cloudy weather, 
 but are foon over. Sometimes violent NW. winds blow for feveral days 
 together, and by fits in the other months ; the fky is then conftantly clouded, 
 and they generally end in rain. Thefe winds extend to the 27th degree of fouth 
 latitude, and from 100 leagues to the wefhvard to 200 leagues eaft of the 
 Cape. 
 
 The principal winds at the Cape are the SE. and NW. the others feldom 
 kiting longer than a few hours ; the E. and NE. winds blow the feldomeft of 
 any : the N. and NW. winds generally blow in hurricanes, and bring on foul 
 weather ; the SE. winds blow in molt months of the year, more or lefs, but 
 chiefly in the fummer feafon ; then they frequently blow ftrong for feveral days 
 together : thefe are the moft prevailing winds for 200 leagues to the eaftward 
 oi: the Cape at this feafon. 
 
 Whenever you fee the Table land begins to be clouded, it betokens a fTxong 
 E. or ESE. wind, which, foon after is clouded over, comes on, and blows 
 excefiive hard, fometimes 2 or 3 days together ; whereby mips frequently part 
 their cables, or bring both oj-^s a-head : therefore it is ufual, as foon as mips 
 are moored in this bay, to ftrike their yards and top-mails, and make all as fnug 
 as poflible. 
 
 It is reckoned extremely dangerous for fhips to lie in Table Bay after the 10th 
 or 15th of May. The Dutch never fuffer their fhips to lie after that time, on 
 account of the approaching feafon, when the NW''. winds are daily expected to 
 fet in, which blow (0 violently that no fhip can poffibly ride it out. Many fhips 
 and lives have been loft in the attempt, or when they have been iurpriied here 
 unexpectedly with thofe winds. 
 
 As it is cuftomary for fhips to fall from Table Iky with the wind fouth- 
 caVilv, they generally go out between Penguin Ifland and the Continent ; 
 thereby thev carry a true and ftcady wind with them all the way they go ; 
 whereas, if they fail out between Penguin and Green Point, they run out of the 
 true wind, and may lie becalmed feveral hours under tiic high land. 
 
 A fhip
 
 Directions for going into Table Bay. 281 
 
 A fhip that is about doubling the Cape of Good Hope for Europe in the 
 
 months of May, June, July, or Auguft, when the winds blow very ftrong 
 
 from the weftward, will always find a current in their favour, fetting round the 
 
 Cape, again ft thofe ftorms, even though they were lying-to. Such a (hip, 
 
 having had foundings, &c. off Cape Lagullas, will foon after, asfbe goes to the 
 
 weftward, lofe foundings ; which is a convincing proof that fhe is to the weftward 
 
 " of Cape Lagullas. As the weather at this fcafbn is generally thick and cloudy, 
 
 fo that you cannot fee the land far (and as it would be imprudent to attem p 
 
 it, after lofing foundings to the weftward of Cape Lagullas, fince you cannot 
 
 be very exact in your reckoning, on account of the ftrong current) that you 
 
 may know when you may fteer to the north-weftward with fafety, your Left: 
 
 and fureft guide is the variation. Being near the latitude of the Cape of Good 
 
 Hope, and finding the variation any thing under 20?W. you may be a flu red you 
 
 are far enough to the weftward of the Cape of Good Hope, and may fteer to the 
 
 north-weftward for St. Helena. 
 
 CCLXI. Directions for Sailing into Simon's Bay, en the Western 
 
 Coast of False Bay. 
 
 Simon's Bay is a fafe and good road at all times of the year, but more efpe- 
 cially from the beginning of May to the beginning of October, when fhips 
 cannot lie in Table Bay ; and where all kinds of refrefhments may be had the 
 lame as at the Cape Town. 
 
 Hottentots Point, or Cape Falfo, is the outermoft point on the eaft fide of 
 Falfe Bay ; it lies about 6 leagues due eaft from the Cape of Good Hope, and 
 may be feen 8 or 9 leagues in clear weather : between them is the entrance into 
 Falfe Bay. In the opening of Falfe Bay you have 54 and 56 fathoms, muddy 
 ground ; Hottentot Point bearing ENE. and the eafternmoft part of the Cape 
 of Good Hope NW »W. diftance 3 or 4 leagues, in latitude 34? 25 'S. and varia- 
 tion 19? 30'W. 1760, or 2i?\V. 1776. 
 
 Entering into Falfe Bay, it will be beft to fteer about midway between the 
 Cape of Good Hope and Cape Falfo ; and when within the laid capes, edge over 
 for the weftern fhore until within a league of it ; in which track you will have 
 foundings from 40 to 39 fathoms, fandy ground. In cafe of its falling calm, 
 or that you have not day-light enough to get into Simon's Bay, you may <^ 
 in from 36 to 20 fathoms, clear fandy ground. As you fail up Falfe Bay, 
 you will fee, on the NW. fide, fome remarkable white faud-hills appearing 
 
 S s Lke
 
 28a A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 like fiiow : keep failing about a league off fhore until thefe hills are fairly- 
 open ; and then fleer for them NWbN. by compafs, until Noah's Ark and 
 Roman's Rocks appear. If the wind fhould be out of the Bay, you may 
 turn it in, (landing within a mile and a half of each fhore, without danger. If 
 you have a S. or a SE. wind, it will be befl to fleer in for Simon's Bay between 
 Noah's Ark and Roman's Rocks ; for when near in, the winds are apt to draw 
 off from the high land to the weft ward ; but you may go in on either fide of 
 Roman's Rocks, and cf^ in Simon's Bay, about half a mile off fhore ; Noah's 
 Ark bearing about SEbE. and Roman's Rocks Ej- S. in 8 or 9 fathoms, fandy 
 ground ; and though fand, it holds furprifingly. 
 
 In Simon's Bay 13 or 14 fail of fhips may lie moored in fafety. Ships moor 
 here a cable each way, the beft bower to the NW. and fmall bower to the SE. 
 as the NW. winds generally prevail in the winter-time, and come off the hills 
 in exceffive flrong gufls, with rain and hail. The new moon makes high water 
 here at half paft 3 P. M. The tides feldom rife more than 3 feet, except after a 
 ftorm, or fome extraordinary caufe. 
 
 There is no tide nor current to be perceived all over Falfe Bay ; the foundings 
 alfo are regular, with a clear fandy bottom. Ships muft come no nearer the Si. 
 and SE. parts of Seal Ifland than 22 fathoms, for there are funken rocks which 
 extend near a mile off. 
 
 Simon's Bay is much more commodious for mips at any time of the year 
 than Table Bay. The frefh water here is exceffive good, and all kinds of pro- 
 
 vifions and refrefhments are to be had here the fame as at the Cape Town, and 
 at the fame prices. From Simon's Bay to the Cape Town is about 1 7 or 1 8 
 
 miles : the road goes along the fide of the hills until you come to the Cavalry 
 
 Houfe; from whence it is flat, clear, and tolerably good. 
 
 For further remarks and directions fee Mr. Nichelfon's draught of Falfe Bay 
 
 and Simon's Bay, wherein are the views of the land, &c. 
 
 Ships going into Falfe Bay fhould take great care to keep at leaft 4 or 5 
 
 miles off the coaft of the Cape of Good Hope ; becaufe a little within this 
 
 diftance the Colnbrook Eafl Indiaman lately flruck on a funken rock, and was 
 
 loft ; befides which here are ieveral other funken rocks in this bay, and near 
 
 its coafl. 
 
 CCLXIL
 
 ( **3 ) 
 
 CCLXIT. Directions concerning the Cape o/*GoodHope, and the Southern 
 
 most Part ©/"Africa. 
 
 The Cape of Good Hope is the wefternmoft Cape on the fouthernmoft Coaft 
 of Africa, and hath three bays belonging or adjoining to it, namely, Table 
 Bay, on the north ; Hout Bay, on the weft ; and Falfe Bay, on the fouth ; 
 the principal of which is Table Bay ; Hout Bay being fmall and inconvenient for 
 fhips, and Falfe Bay being dangerous of accefs, at fmall diftances from the 
 more, on account of funken rocks, whereby feveral (hips have been loft. 
 
 To the ESE. from the Cape of Good Hope (variation of the compafs being 
 allowed for) diftance 90 miles or 30 leagues, is Cape Lagullas, (as it is commonly 
 called) which is the fouthernmoft Cape of Africa, in latitude 35?S. 
 
 The breadth of this fouthernmoft promontory of Africa, between the parallels 
 of 34? and 35? fouth latitude, is near 400 miles, or 133 leagues ; and .the 
 foundings fouthward extend about 90 miles, or 30 leagues. 
 
 Between the extent of 400 miles before-mentioned, along the fouth Coaft of 
 Africa, there are feveral bays, fome of which are larger than others, but all of 
 them little frequented by fhips. The firfl of thefe is St. Sebaftian's Bay, on 
 the weft fide of which is Cape Infant. The fecond is St. Blaife's Bay, whofe 
 foundings are pretty well known. The third, St. Catharine's Bay, on the weft 
 fide of which is Cape Talhado. The third, Formofa, or Moffel Bay, on the 
 weft fide of which is Cape del Gada. The fourth, is De la Goa Bay, having on 
 its weft fide Cape Arcifes, or Cape Recifs. 
 
 Thefe bays all of them are open toward the ocean is a fouth-eaftwardly direc- 
 tion ; and have their refpeclive diftances from each other, as defcribed in their 
 refpe£tive draughts. 
 
 CCLXIII. DiRECTioNsyorSAiLiNcyrow off the Cape of Good Hope, toward 
 
 the Inner Passage^ India. 
 
 Cape Lagullas bears from Cape Good Hope E. t 9?S. or EbS^S. diftance 30 
 leagues; you have foundings all the way between them, in fhore, at 40, 50, 
 and 60 fathoms, fand and ouzy ground, fometimes muddy land. In the above 
 depths you will be from 5 to 10 leagues off fhore. 
 
 The land between thefe Capes is very high, but Cape Lagullas is not hi°bi. 
 A defcription of the land about this Cape, and the coaft to the eaftvvard of it, 
 is given in returning from India. 
 
 S s 2 Suppofc
 
 284 <d AVw Director for the East-Indies. 
 
 Suppofe you had foundings off Cape Lagullas, in the latitude, variation, 
 and 'epth of water above-mentioned: fu -poie the latitude 35? 52', variation 
 21? iz'W. the depth of water 75 fathoms, fine grey land, and Cape Lagullas 
 to bear N. of you, diilance 19 lea es ; ail thefe things we are lure of, and 
 they will anfwer the fame end as if you had fe^n the land. Were you to fee 
 the land (as the weather is generally cloudy and foggy) you could not judge 
 how far you were got to the eaftward, except you law fome very remarkable 
 part of the land that you knew : and it would require your being well acquainted 
 with it, to know it well. So that the foundings anfwer all the ends of feeing 
 the land ; and by the foundings you may correct your reckonings and take a 
 frefli departure. 
 
 " Cape Lagullas is fuppofed to bear north of you, diilance 19 leagues. Yoa 
 may now fleer to the eafhvard, in the parallel of latitude 5,6?S. In this latitude, 
 and 1 4 or 15 leagues to the eaftward of where you firft had foundings, you will 
 have 90 fathoms water, brown muddy fand, variation 21? 39'W. Hereabout 
 the variation increafes very faft. Fifteen or 20 leagues to the eaftward of this, 
 you will have no foundings in latitude 36?S. 
 
 The fhips that are bound to China, when they have had foundings off Cape 
 Lagullas, take their departure, and fleer for the lflands St. Paul and Amfterdam, 
 and then to the Straits of Sunda. The method of making that paflage, is 
 farther on. But firft for the Inner Paflage. 
 
 CCLXIV. Direct loxsjor proceeding toward the Inner Passage, or between 
 
 Madagascar and Africa. 
 
 The fhips that are bound through the Inner Paflage, that is, between Mada- 
 gafcar and the Continent, which is much the neareft way to India, obierve the 
 following directions for making that paflage. 
 
 When you have had foundings off Cape Lagullas, as before-mentioned, you 
 fleer to the eaftward in the parallel of latitude 30?S. or thereabout, till you 
 have made lorgitude I2?E. from Cape Lagullas, or rather till you have increafed 
 the variation to 2 6?W. You may then make fome northing, but with caution. 
 Hereabout the flrong wefterly and NW. winds, that you had off the Cape, 
 and have continued with you thus far, begin to moderate, and become variable, 
 and are frequently S. and SW. and fometimes SE. 
 
 liefore you go to the northward of 35?S. you fhould make I5?E. longitude 
 from Cape Lagullas, or have 26? 50', or 26? 55'YV. variation; and let the 
 variation be your guide. 
 
 Confide*
 
 Directions for proceeding toward the Inner Passage. 285 
 
 Confi.ler the (hocking account of the lofs of the Doddingtoa Indiaman. 
 The day at noon, before (he was loft, (he was in latitude, by obfcrvation, 35?S. 
 and had made longitude from Cape Lagullus, 12? 50'E. They had t..e winds 
 from SSW. to SSE. ftrong gales, with a large fea ; and altered their courfe 
 at noon, from E. to ENE. and run about 70 miles on that courfe, till about 
 a quarter before one A. M. when fhe (truck, and went all to-pieces in lefs than 
 20 minutes. 
 
 The Doddington's latitude, by account, when fhe ftruck, was 34? 6'S. 
 longitude, made from Cape Lagullas, 13? 45'E. by carefully working their 
 fuppofed run to the time (he was loft : what variation they had is not known ; 
 it would be of ule, it not having been taken on that coaft. 
 
 This (hocking circumftance of the lofs of the Doddington, and fuch a 
 number of lives, will make the (kilful navigator (hudder, and make him rack 
 his invention to point out the caufe of fuch misfortunes, and contrive how to 
 avoid the like accidents happening for the future, by finding proper methods 
 effeclually to prevent them. 
 
 The firft caufe of the lofs of the Doddington feems to have been, that their 
 reckoning muft have been very mucha-head of the (hip, occaiioned by the current, • 
 which runs ftrong to the weftward, all along this part of the Coaft of Africa 
 to the Cape of Good Hope. 
 
 The fecond caufe ; that the land is erroneoufly laid down in our draughts, 
 charts, and books ; the land lying much more to the fouthward than it is laid 
 down. The charts make it ^trench away to the northward too quick : this is 
 a very great error ; it deceives and mifleads the navigator, making him haul to 
 the northward too foon, running him into danger ; whereas he fhould keep 
 more to the eafhvard to avoid it. 
 
 The third caufe is, that the Doddington made her courfe too much 
 northerly. She fteered ENE.. and muft at lead have had 2 5?W. variation, 
 which is 2;- points, with a great fea from the fouthward : fo that (he could 
 not make her true courfe better than NE'N. which was too northerly a 
 courfe, had (lie been 2? of longitude to the eaftward of where (he was by her 
 
 recKonmg. 
 
 The Doddington's reckoning feems to be very erroneous ; for they had made 
 longitude to where the (hip was loft 13? 45'E. from Cape Lagullas ; and where 
 the (hip was loft is not more than 8? to the eaftward of the ("aid Cape. By 
 the Iateft obfervations it was but y?E. of Cape Lagullas 
 
 The
 
 286 Neiv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 The variation hereabout, as well as feveral other parts, may be looked upon 
 as a principal and fure guide in navigation. This unfortunate (hip (hould be a 
 caution for all navigators to be very cautious not to haul to the northward too 
 foon ; for the currents are very deceiving. 
 
 It appears, by the account of the people that were faved out of the Doddington, 
 that (lie was not the only (hip that had been call away on that ifland ; for they 
 faw the remains of the wreck of feveral other (hips, that had been loft there; 
 no doubt, by the fame caufe that (he was loft. 
 
 By feveral journals of experienced navigators, on the navigation between 
 Cape Lagullas and Madagafcar, it appears that (hips in general make 24? of 
 longitude from Cape Lagullas to St. Auguftine's Bay. on the Ifland Madagafcar, 
 or the land in latitude 24?S. which is the place (hips (hould fall in with. As 
 there are 24? of longitude between Cape Lagullas and Madagafcar, why 
 (hould (hips haul to the northward when they have not made more than half 
 that longitude, and run the rifque of falling in with the coaft unexpectedly ? 
 This coaft is frequently a lee (bore, by the winds blowing more foutherly, or 
 from SE. to SW. with ftrong gales, a great fea, and often hazy weather ; all 
 difagreeable circumftances to be upon a low (hore with. It may be avoided by 
 the following method. 
 
 When a (hip, in latitude 35?S. has made I5?E. longitude, and has increafed 
 her variation to 27?, (he may haul to the northward with fafety, and make 
 her courfe ENE. then NE. and bv degrees more northerly : thereby you will 
 continue the variation from 27? to 26? 5o'W. till you get into latitude 3i?S. 
 and make from Cape Lagullas about i8?E. longitude. From hence the variation 
 will decreafe fafter as you run more to the northward. In latitude 25? ic/S. 
 and longitude, made from Cape Lagullas, 20? 4TL. you will have variation 25? 
 io'and 25? 4'W. In latitude 24? 3'S. and longitude, made from Cape Lagullas, 
 23? 20'E. you will have variation 23? 45'W. This is not far from the land of 
 Madagafcar. Here a (hip (hould keep to the fouthward of latitude 22? 30'S. in 
 order to (hun the dangerous (lioals of the Bafliis de India. 
 
 CCLXV. Directions for avoiding the Eassas de India. 
 
 The Baflas de India is a mod dangerous flioal ; in length 5 or 6 miles, and 
 very near as broad : it is even with the furface of the water, confiding of 
 fbme dry fpots of find and rocks, there being nothing higher upon it than a 
 high catamaran under fail : feveral parts of this (hoal have the refemblance of 
 
 aa
 
 Directions for avoiding the Bassas de India. 287 
 
 an Indian catamaran under Tail ; there are breakers every where about them ; 
 and they cannot be feen from a fhip's deck above 5 or 6 miles, or from the 
 maft-head above 9 or 10 miles. There are no ioundings within 3 miles of 
 them. 
 
 This fhoal was feen by his Majefty's fhip Norfolk, in January, 1764, in 
 returning from India. She firft made Cape St. Sebaftian on the Continent, in 
 latitude 22? 41'S and longitude from London (by computation) 36? 32'E. 
 
 Cape St. Sebaftian is tolerable high land ; about as high as the land of the 
 Start Point in England, and proje&s but a little way out into the fea. When 
 you are off this Cape, it appears higher land than any other in fight, either to 
 the northward or ibuthward of it, and has no foundings within 3 miles of it. 
 The coaft all hereabout is tolerable high land, with a fteep white fandy beach, 
 which, at a diftance, appears like chalk cliffs. 
 
 The Norfolk had the winds foutherly, and took her departure from Cape 
 St. Sebaftian; when fleering to the eaftward, the third day at noon had a very 
 good obfervation, and at 3 P. M. made the Baflas de India, in the NE. of 
 them, which obliged them to tack : they were within 3 miles of them, and had 
 no foundings. They mike this fhoal to lie in latitude 21? 45'S. and longitude 
 eaftward of Cape St. Sebaftian, 4? 2o'E. They then flood to the weft ward, 
 and made Cape Corientes ; snd 5? io'W. longitude from the Baflas de India to 
 the faid Cape St. Sebaitian. Cape Corientes is alfo tolerable high land, and 
 has much the fame appearance as the land about Cape St. Sebaftian. Cape 
 Corientes lies in latitude 23? 42'S. and longitude, by computation, 36? 4C/E. 
 from London. This Cape, and the land about it, may be feen, in clear weather, 
 9, 10, or 1 1 leagues, and appears to be as bold a fhore as that about Cape St. 
 Sebaftian. 
 
 Hence the longitudes of thee places from London, will be thus : 
 St. Sebaftian on the Coaft of Africa, longitude from London 
 Longitude made by from C: St. Sebaftian to the Baflas de India 
 Longitude of the Baflas de India, inferred from C. St. Sebaftian 
 Longitude of Sandy Ifland, (off St. Auguftine's Bay) 
 Longitude of Bafles de India, as inferred from Sandy Ifland, 
 The Baflas de India, weft longitude of Sandy Ifland, 
 
 It is furpriiing how fhips can blunder through between Madagascar and the 
 Continent, without endeavouring to make the land, when there are fo many 
 fhoals and danger's lying in their way, and when there is the greateft proba- 
 bility 
 
 36? 
 
 o-j'F 
 
 4? 
 
 2o'E. 
 
 40? 
 
 52'E. 
 
 44? 
 
 15'E. 
 
 40? 
 
 52E, 
 
 3 ? -- 
 
 13 W.
 
 «88 A Nezv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 bility of their reckoning being incorrect. In going through this paffage they 
 unexpectedly fall in with this or the other fhoal, and narrowly efcape being 
 loft, when they might with eafe arid fafety make the Continent, either about 
 Cape Corientes, or Cape St. Sebaftian, and from thence takeafrefh departure. 
 If they were not inclined to make Madagafcar about St AugufHne's Bay (which 
 fbmetimes perhaps they maybe forbid to do) they might then either make the Con- 
 tinent as above mentioned, or the fouth part of Madagafcar, about St. John's, 
 in latitude 25? 30'S. or thereabout, and take a frefh departure. If forbid to ftop 
 at St. AugufHne's Bay, it is advifeable to make the land of Madagafcar in 
 latitude 24? io'S. or 24?S> it being a pretty clear part ofthecoaft, and not 
 far from St. Au Pauline's Bay. Or a fhip may fleer for Madagafcar in latitude 
 17? 40'S. until fhe gets foundings upon the Precellas bank from 30 to 15 
 fathoms. On this bank the foundings are very irregular ; but keep in 20 
 fathoms, it is a good depth till you lofe foundings ; then fleering NEbN. will 
 carry you in fight of Joanna. The land in latitude 24?S. is low near the fea, 
 but rifes gradually in land to a tolerable height, and may be feen from a fhip's 
 mall-head 9 or 10 leagues, and from the deck 6 leagues. 
 
 CCLXVI. Directions for making the Land of Madagascar and St. 
 
 Augustine's Bay. 
 
 Mr. Nichelfon made the land of Madagafcar in latitude 24?S. and longitude, 
 made from Cape Lagullas, 23? 55'E. variation 22? 2 i'\V. There were 8 fail in com- 
 pany, who all made the variation Z2?W. founded, and had 50 fathoms water, 
 coarfe yellow find ; 3 leagues off fhore. The longitude of the land, in lati- 
 tude 24?S. by computation, was 44? 20 / E. from London. 
 
 The coaft from latitude 24?S. to St. AugufHne's Bay, lies north and fouth by 
 compafs, without reckoning the variation, diftance 6 or 7 leagues. There is a 
 reef lying along parallel to the fhore, N. and S. diftance from the fhore 2 or 
 3 miles, which the fea breaks upon in mcft places ; but it is very fmooth 
 within it. Between latitude 24?$. and St. AugufHne's Bay, the variation was 
 23?W. 1760. 
 
 Before you come as far to the northward as St AugufHne's Bay, or Sandy 
 Ifland, you will fee the high land about St. AugufHne's Bay, which is pretty 
 bisrh land near the fea, but much higher at fome diftance in land: there is 
 one hill on the north fide of the Bay, which much relembles the roof of 
 Weftminfter-IIall ; therefore navigators call it Weftminfter-Hall. This hill lies a 
 long way in the country, and bears from you, when at «}-} in the Bay NEjN. 
 
 As
 
 Directions for making the Land ^Madagascar. 289 
 
 As you fail to the northward, you will raiic a fmall low ifland, with fome 
 low trees and fhrubs on it, and a very white iandy beach ; this is called Sandy 
 Ifland. There is a ledge of rocks NW. from this illand a large half- mil:-, 
 with foul ground and breakers all round it, fome diftance from it. 
 
 This ifland lies near the fouth fide of St. Auguftine's Bay, at the weftern- 
 moft part thereof, and is in latitude, by obfervation, 23? 4z'S. and longitude 
 by computation, 44? 15'E. from London ; variation 23? 57'W. 1760. You 
 have very deep water all about this part of the coaft. Sandy Ifland EbN'J-N. 
 diftance 5 or 6 miles ; 1 60 fathoms, rocky ground. 
 
 In failing in for St. Auguftine's Bay you mud go to the northward of Sandy 
 Ifland, and borrow upon it, to avoid the fboals on the north fide of the Bay, 
 there being rocks under water, on which the fea breaks in ftormy weather, 
 bearing: from the Tent Rock NWbN. 
 
 You will have no foundings till Sandy Ifland bears SbE. or S. of you. You 
 may borrow upon the ifland to 1 2 or 13 fathoms water ; and palling it in that 
 depth, you will continue foundings for about a mile, from 12 to 15 and 16 
 fathoms ; then no foundings. 
 
 After this you mult not expect to get foundings with your hand-line, till you 
 come on the bank of the Tent Rock ; at lead it is not advifeable for a (hip to 
 go into fo little water, as to get ground with the hand-line ; for in 12 and 14 
 fathoms water, you will not be more in fome places than 3 or 4 (hip's lengths 
 from a reef that lies parallel to the fouthern fhore, and about half a mile from 
 it. 
 
 CCLXVII. Directions^ Sailing into Ft. Augustine's Bat. 
 
 Having pafl'ed Sandy Ifland in 12 or 13 fathoms water, and fleering to the 
 eafhvard for St. Auguftine's Bay, you will fee high land clofe to the fea, on 
 the fouth fide of the bay ; alfo high land fome diftance in the country; and 
 the mouth or entrance of the liver will be open to you: this ferves as a 
 leading mark up to the bay, and carries von clear of the reef, and of all danger. 
 
 The noith point of the river is a fteep bluff point ; the fouth poi.it of the 
 river is alfo a fteep point, with a low wooclv point running out to the northward 
 from the fteep point thereof : thefe points are good leading marks. Keep the 
 high bluff point, on the north fide of the river, a fail's breadth open, with 
 the low woody point on the fouth fide of the river; when the bluff point, on 
 the north fide of the river, will bear E^S. 
 
 T t As
 
 290 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 As you run to the ea ft ward, after you lofe foundings from Sandy Ifland, 
 you will have no foundings till you come off the firft low fandy point on the 
 fouthern fhore. Off this point is a fhoal running out a fmall diftance, on 
 which the fea breaks : there are 9 and 10 fathoms clofe to the breakers, and 
 14 or 15 fathoms, two cables length without them. It deepens gradually 
 from 14 to 28 fathoms 1 of a mile to the northward of this point ; then no 
 foundings. The leading mark muft be kept a large fail's breadth open in 
 paffing thefe breakers, which you fhould pafs in 14 or 15 fathoms. 
 
 As the wind generally blows off the fouthern fhore, the leading mark will 
 carry you up along the back of the reef. From this point to the Tent Rock 
 there is a reef that lies parallel to the fhore, and a large half-mile diftance from 
 it, which dries at low water, but is intirely covered at half-tide ; and there are 
 two rocks almoft at the eaft part of this reef, which are always feen, unlefs at 
 high water on fpring-ttdes. At -l flood, or 4 ebb, they appear like two fmall 
 boats or canoes. About half way between thefe rocks, and the low fandy 
 point, where the breakers are, there is a fwatch in the reef, having 16 or 17 
 fathoms clofe thereto, which may be apt to miflead people that are not 
 acquainted with it, and go by their foundings. 
 
 At high water time, when this reef is covered, and a fhip coming in, not 
 acquainted with the place, having no foundings with the hand-lead, hauls in 
 toward the fhore, in order to get foundings, fhe may thereby run bump upon 
 the reef, before they have any foundings with the hand-line. Thole who 
 thought themfelves well acquainted with this place, have committed this error : 
 lucky for them, it was flowing water ; by this they got off, though with the 
 lofs of their fore foot and part of their keel ; and narrowly efcaped being loft. 
 
 Obferve the leading marks ; keep them a fail's breadth open, and you will 
 pafs this fwatch in 21 fathoms water; two cable's length further out, you. 
 will have 34 fathoms, and then no foundings. 
 
 Between the fwatch of the reef, and the two rocks that appear at ' tide, 
 you will have no foundings at 70 fathoms, with the leading marks a fail's 
 breadth open : for here the reef is fteep to. 
 
 Steering on to the eaftward with the leading marks above mentioned, you 
 will have foun. lings 29 and 30 fathoms; then you come a-breaft off the two 
 rocks, that appear at | tide. There are 12 fathoms within three fhips length 
 of thefe rocks, and 20 fathoms a fmall cable's length without them ; 30 
 
 homs N;E. from them, and three cables length without them, the leading 
 
 mark
 
 Directions/?/* Sailing into St. Augustink's Bay. 291 
 
 mark as before mentioned ; a little without that, 32 fathoms, and then no 
 foundings. 
 
 Steer to the eaftward with the points of the river a fail's breadth open, (the 
 north point of the river will then bear E^S.) till you bring Weftniinfter-Hall 
 with a low fandy point on the north fide of the bay ; then it will bear NE|N. 
 Then begin the regular foundings on the bank, and you will be paft, or a little 
 to the eaftward of the two rocks that fhow at \ tide ; and they will then bear 
 SVV. of you, and you will have 26 fathoms water; and now you may bring 
 the points of the river in one, or fhut them in with each other, without danger. 
 You fhoalcn the water gradually from 26, 21, 1 8, 15, 12, 11, 10 to 9 fathoms. 
 There is good °}-}mg in from 8 to 12 fathoms, the Tent Rock bearing from 
 
 s;-e. to stw. 
 
 There are other marks for °}-}ing, viz. obferve the low woody point on the 
 fouth fide the river. Some diftance from this point the land rifes up to a fteep 
 bluff, fomething like the bluff point on the north fide of the river, but much 
 higher: bring thefe two bluff points in one, or touching, or a little fhut in ; 
 and the Tent Rock from S|E. to S|W. is the bell +^ing. With thefe bearings 
 you will have from 10 to 12 fathoms water, clear and good holding ground ; 
 and Weftminfter Hall will bear about NEi-N. or you may go nearer the Tent 
 Rock, in 8 or 9 fathoms water, and have a very good birth, with good holding 
 ground, clay and mud. 
 
 Here you fhould moor eaft and weft, that you may ride between the tow, and 
 with an open haufe, when the wind comes to the northward, and blows hard, 
 which it fometimes does ; fhould you moor north and ibuth, in fome places, 
 your outer °}-} would lie in very deep water. 
 
 The broadeft part of this bank is with the Tent Rock bearing S^E. You 
 will have foundings ^- of the bay over from the Tent Rock, with the fteep 
 points of the river open and (hut, or touching. From 11 or 12 fathoms to 16, 
 17, 19, 21, 21 Ij 24^, 27, 2*9, 33, and 40 fathoms, with the bluff point (on 
 the north fide of the river) EbS^S. and Tent Rock S^E. Without this no 
 foundings. 
 
 No fhip fhould let go an <+-> in more than 15 or 16 fathoms, unlefs it is 
 with the Tent Rock bearing S^E. and then in not more than 18 or 20 fathoms; 
 for the bank goes off very fuddenlv in moil places, from 20 or 24 fathoms, to 
 no foundings. The Tent Rock bearing from S2E. to Sj-VV. in from 8 to 12 
 fathoms water, is the beft place for a fhip to lie in ; for there is good ground 
 and moft drift. 
 
 T t 2 Here
 
 292 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Here you may get wood and water. You water in the river, at the mouth 
 of which there is a bar, with only 2 feet at low water. It flows here at full 
 and change NEbN. and SWbS. and perpendicularly 8 feet at fpring-tides. 
 I -ere you get plenty of good beef, mutton, and fowls, and other refreshments, 
 at reaibuable rates. The inhabitants are civil ; but, if affronted, are of a 
 revengeful difpoiition. They are great beggars, and will over-reach you in trade 
 if they can, and are a little inclined to thieving. Vegetables are \evy fcarce 
 at this place. The latitude of this Bay is 23? 4o'S. and longitude 44? 2o'E. of 
 London. 
 
 CCLXVIII. DiREcnoNsyor Ships that go the Outward Passage to India ; 
 or for thofe that are bound to China, through the Straits of Lomboc, 
 Bally, or Sunda ; as communicated to Mr. Nichellbn by an experienced 
 East-India Commander. 
 
 A fhip being in foundings off Cape Lagullas in May, June, July, or Auguft, 
 and bound the outward Pafiage, latitude 37? S. or $y? 3°'S. is high enough to 
 run down the eafting. In this latitude you will have ftrong gales from WSW. 
 to SSW. and NW. and in running to the eafhvard you will make but little 
 alteration in the variation in failing many degrees. In latitude 37? 3CS. and 
 longitude made from Cape Lagullas, 33?E. there was 23? 1 8' weft variation, 
 1760. In latitude 37? 33'?. and longitude made from Cape Lagullas, 47? I4'E. 
 there was variation 21? 2i / W. 1760. About 7 to the weft ward of the Iflands 
 St. Paul and Amfterdam, the preient variation is 21? 3o'\V. 
 
 A (hip that intends to make the Ifland St. Paul, muft fleer to the eaftward, 
 and keep in latitude 37? 3o'S. or 37? 35'S. Keeping in this latitude will carry 
 you clear of St. Paul's, in the night or day, and yet will carry you fairly in 
 fi *ht of it. 
 
 St. Paul's, the northernmofl of thefe two iflands, is a fmall but an high ifland, 
 and may be feen at a great diftance in clear weather; its latitude 37? 52'Sl 
 longitude, by run from Cape Lagullas, 54? 23'E. (from London, 74? 38 E). 
 There were 18? 45', or 19? weft variation near thefe iflands, 1760. Later 
 oblervations make the longitude of St. Paul's 75?3oE. 
 
 Ships that endeavour to make St. Paul's keep to the northward of it, ia 
 latitude 37? 3o'S. or 37? 35'S. In this latitude you may plainly fee St. Paul's 
 bearing SbE. S. or SbW. of you 6 or 7 leagues. Ships might correct, their 
 reckoning, by the variation off thofe iflands, witho it feeing them ; that is to 
 fay, a (hip being near the latitude of St. Paul, and having 18? 45', or 19? weft 
 
 variation,
 
 Directions for Ships that go the Outward -Passage to India. 293 
 
 variation, might be lure fie was as far to the ealtward as thefe iflands ; that is, 
 that-fhe was in the longitude of diem ; by which they might cone I their 
 reckoning as well as if they had leen the iflands, and from thence take a frefh 
 departure, and proceed on their voyage. 
 
 An experienced and judicious commander in the India fervice, is laid to have 
 feveral times corrected his reckoning by the variation off the Iflands St. Paul and 
 Amfterdam, without feeing them. Allowing the variation at or near thefe iflands 
 to be 18? 45'W. or 1 o?W. when he had this variation he always reckoned himlelf 
 as far to the eaftward in longitude as thefe iflands are, or in the longitude of 
 them. His own account of it is as follows. 
 
 When by my variation (laid he) I was convinced of being the length of the 
 iflands St. Paul and Amfterdam, on examining my reckoning, I was, by account, 
 full 12? to the eaftward of the place where the fhip was in ; accordhiglv, from 
 18? 45' or '9? weft variation, I flood full 1 7? tardier to the eaftward ere I 
 lowered my latitude under 35?S. and was careful not to get under the latitude 
 of 26?S. till I reduced the variation to y?W. In latitude 22? 30'S. I made 
 the Coaft of New Holland, variation then 5? 20' W. and found the error of my 
 reckoning agreeable to the variation. 
 
 A contrary inflance happened to me this laft voyage. When I was bound to 
 Bencoolen, on the Coaft of Sumatra ; being the fame length, with the variation 
 I9?W. I found myfelf 5? to the eaftward of account ; but not being under the 
 neceffity of making New Holland, or of running fo far to the ealtward, I 
 edged away to the northward, after running 10? farther to the eaftward, and in 
 the fame latitude, 37?S. or 38?S. This height I think the belt, as the winds 
 hold moftly wefterly, and frefli gales ; whereas, under latitude 30?S. they are 
 frequently eafterly. I made the land 20 leagues to the eaftward of Java Head, 
 and had then 2? 30' weft variation ; which again confirmed the error of my 
 reckoning. 
 
 A fhip having made the Ifland St. Paul, or Amfterdam, or fuppofing them- 
 felves as far to the eaftward by their variation, 18? 45' or i9?W. and bound to 
 China through the Straits of Lomboc, or Bally, muft fleer for and make the 
 Coaft of New Holland, and for their guide obferve the following dhecVions. 
 
 From the Ifland St. Paul, or from 18? 45' or 19? weft variation, a fhip may 
 run 17? or 18? to the eaftward before they lower their latitude under 35? S. 
 and then be careful not to go under latitude 26?S. till they reduce the variation 
 to 7?W. and make the Coaft of New Holland in latitude 22? 30 S. variation 5? 
 ao'W. and have the ftrictefl: regard to die variation. 
 
 Here
 
 2 (j 4 A New Directory jar the East-Indies. 
 
 Here I muft obferve, that till under the latitude of 2 6?S. the Coaft of New- 
 Holland muft be approached with caution, as there is great danger ; though 
 there are many never-failing (and confequently unerring) guides, to warn you 
 of your approach ; as great quantities of fkuttle-bones, weeds, and drifts ; and 
 near the Bank, grampufes playing like feals, and innumerable quantities of 
 tropick birds ; but flcuttle-fiih and weeds are commonly the firft marks. The 
 land, in latitude 22?S. and 23? S. is low; the foundings 130 fathoms, mud, 
 about 14 leagues off the coaft. 
 
 Clouts Ifland is in general agreed to be in latitude 22? 6'S. but not determin d 
 as to its lon"-itude. From making the Coaft of New Holland, and comparing 
 my obfervation of the variation with their's that have feen it. I am periuaded 
 it does not lie above 1? 30' or 2?W. from New Holland. Jt is a very dange- 
 rous ifland ; and ihips bound through either the Straits of Lomboc, Bally, or 
 Sunda, fhould be careful in pafting the latitude. Its longitude is, b\ com- 
 putation, 32? 5o'E. from St. Paul ; and from Cape Lagullas 84? 26'E. Variation 
 near this Ifland is 6?W. and allowing Clouts Ifland to lie 2?W. of the Coaft 
 of New Holland, the land in latitude of Clouts Ifland is, in longitude, 34? 
 50' from St. Paul. 
 
 CCLXIX. DiRECTioNsyir the Straits -^/"Lomboc ; by the fame. 
 
 A fhip bound through thefe ftraits muft be fure to make the Coaft of New 
 Holland as before-mentioned, and take their departure from it in latitude 19? 
 20'S. or thereabout, to make the Coaft of Cumbava, a little to the eaftward of 
 the Straits of Alias. The land hereabout is ealily known ; for the Coaft of 
 Cumbava is very high and irregular land. On Lomboc there is an high and 
 remarkable peak ; which mountain is beft feen through the Straits of Alias, 
 being neareft that fide. The ihore is bold ; nor do I know, or have heard of 
 any danger but what is perceprible. Betwixt the Straits of Alias and the 
 Straits of Lomboc, the more, for the molt part, is a fandy beach, with 
 feveral large ftraggling rocks bordering the fhore. and one feemingly large river. 
 As we neared it, we perceived an immenle number of fires. Our diftance 
 from the fhore I am perfuaded, did not exceed 3 or 4 leagues for full 50 leagues 
 that we coafted it ; and as we approached the Straits, little more than 3 or 4 
 iriiles. 
 
 In the entrance of the Straits of Lomboc (but neareft the Bally fhore) is a 
 large ifland, called Banditti, the ridge of which is like a barn, appearing (at 
 the diftance it is firft iecn at) (harp at top; the fides chalky, like the cliff's of our' 
 
 Forelands.
 
 Directions'/- //!?<? Straits c/T^omroc. ' 295 
 
 Forelands. Off the ends of Banditti (as you near it, and as you open the paffage 
 betwixt that and Bally, in palling the NE. end) there are many rocks, or 
 little iflands : at the lame time you will fee a deep bay at the bottom of a large 
 mountain, called the Peak of Bally, which takes its Spring from the weft fide 
 of thele ftraits. Were there no other gui.le, the Peaks of Lomhoc and Bally 
 diflinguifh thefe from any other, as neither thofe of Alias or Bally have fuch on. 
 both fides. 
 
 Thele ftraits are extremely fteep on either fhore ; and in the faireft and fafeft 
 paflage for any fhip there are no foundings. The great ripplings you will fee 
 in entering thofe ftraits are uncommon, and have caufed the generality of people 
 to form dreadful ideas of there being rapid tides, which (joined to the want of 
 foundings, and being liable to be becalmed by the high land) makes them dread 
 apparent danger as real. 
 
 The ftraits are fhort, as the eaft point of Bally may be feen from Banditti 
 Ifland. There is a flux and reflux, but I could not learn the flowings (or time 
 of high water, at full and change). A fhip not hauling too loon round Lomboc, 
 but keeping mid-way betwixt Banditti and Lomboc, let the ftream be which 
 way it will, can be in no danger ; and if it blows, it will loon carry it clear. 
 In light winds it would not be advifeable to haul too foon in for the Bally fhore, 
 till well paft Banditti Ifland ; and then to round Bally Point pretty clofe, as 
 the fhore is bold and very clear. 
 
 L,eil any be tempted, from the inviting appearance of Bally Bay, without 
 trial of the foundings, to enter it, 1 think it neceffary to inform them, I am 
 of opinion there is no 4-^ing for a fhip. I fent my boats a founding, about 2 
 miles from the fhore, and had no foundings ; and not being fatislied (as I faw 
 feveral prows in the bottom of the Bay, near the fhore) I went the day fol- 
 lowing myfelf, and not a mile from the fhore, on .the north fide, had i^o 
 fathoms, rocky ground, and within a little more than a cable's length, 68 fathoms, 
 coral. 
 
 CCLXX. Directions'/- going through the Straits of Bally , by the fume. 
 
 By the draughts of thefe ftraits, and views of the hills, any one may know 
 the entrance of thefe ftraits. The principal care is in fecuring the land-fall 
 from New Holland ; for it is efteemed, and I believe it to be, very impracticable 
 to beat up, though they fhould fall but 10 leagues to leeward, becaufe the 
 current and winds fet hereabout as the fhore lies. 
 
 Ballambouansr
 
 296 . A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Ballambouang cannot be miftaken by the draught. You may <f}, with 
 Goningham fouth, in 6 or 7 fathoms water ; after you get this length, it will 
 be very necefl'ary to attend the fhift of the ft ream, lb as to take the beginning 
 of it to weigh with, which, with the afliftance of your boats (though it 
 ihould be calm) will carry you through. Keep nearly mid-channel, and when 
 you get up with Gilliboang you will meet with regular foundings. 
 
 The tides here, fet ftronger than thofe I have met with in any other ftraits, 
 having found them to run 6 knots an hour : care therefore mould be had not 
 to come- too dole to any of the points, as the tide rounds the bay 3 very ftrong. 
 1 have experienced the hazard of it in fome fhips for want of this attention. 
 
 I have particularly remarked on thefe coafts, that betwixt the land and fea- 
 winds in thefe ftraits (as well as amongft the iflands betwixt them and Borneo) 
 before a fhift of the dream, a calm has fucceeded. This, if properly noticed, 
 when there is +-}ing ground, may fecure what is got, betides preventing 
 danger. 
 
 Paffino - thefe ftraits for China, I took particular notice, that the fhoals are 
 laid down very well in the Waggoner, betwixt the ftraits and Madura, except 
 that between Gilion and Pondy. This reef is very dangerous, being covered at 
 high water, and in the SE. monfoon it is at no time very vifible : mips that 
 pafs betwixt Pondy and Gilion muft go very near it ; yet the paffage is very 
 o-ood on either fide of the fhoal, when it can be feen, or its {situation is well 
 known. When the reef bears S^i^E. the SE. part of Madura bears NiyrE. 
 and the fouth part of Gilion, S35?E. 
 
 In turning into the channel, betwixt the iflands and Madura, for Zamonap, 
 yon may ftand to the iflands to 15 or 14 fathoms, and toward Madura fide 
 to 10 fathoms; but you cannot enter the Bay of Zamonap. You may «(-} 
 before the Bay, or the north more, in 6 or 7 fathoms water ; here you may 
 get frefh water, and other refreshments, of the Dutch, who have a fort here. 
 Clofe round the point, in the Bay, there are feveral fprings. 
 
 The Ofterly 4->ed in 5 fathoms, blue mud ; the fouth point of Zamonap, 
 W<3?S. the point that forms the Bay of ditto, N23?W. the Dutch Fort, 
 N33?W. the SE. part of Madura, E. Gilion Ifland, E;S. diftant from the 
 neareft fhore, 2 \ miles. 
 
 To "•() between Pondy and Madura, you muft keep the Pondy more clofe on 
 b >ard ; for it is very flat, for more than A over, betwixt Madura and Pondy. 
 Yom will not have lefs than 11 or ? 2 fathoms within a mile of Pondy. la 
 pal ' .'.ion Ifland, I would not haul up for Pondy till I was the length of 
 
 the
 
 Directions for the Hack o/Banka. 297 
 
 the weft end, and then fleer for the point of the ifland. If you fhould fhoal 
 to 4 or 5 fathoms, as you haul to the ifland, you will deepen. 
 
 CCLXXI. Directions for the Back of Banca. 
 
 From Pondv, for the paflagc betwixt Borneo and Billiton, after leaving Pondy 
 I would fleer NWbW. to get fight of the ifland Lubec ; this courfe will give 
 it a good birth, for on the eafl fide there are very dangerous and extenfive reefs. 
 From thence, Peering NW. will carry you clear of a large reef of rocks, that 
 lie in latitude 3? 35'S. this reef is likewife extremely dangerous, having 16 
 and 20 fathoms, in many places, clofe to them, and the highefl not 3 feet 
 above the furface of the water ; therefore, if it cannot be pafled in the day, I 
 would advife you to <>}-}. 
 
 From this latitude fleer NNW. to latitude 1? 40 'S. then you will make a 
 very high ifland, with a great chain of fmall iflands. Betwixt latitude 3? 4'S. 
 and 1? 40 / S. the foundings are from 22 to 18 fathoms, fand, with ibme few 
 cafls, muddy foundings, extremely regular ; but when you come to pals this, 
 latitude, namely, 1? 4o'S. you will meet with foundings 18 fathoms, fine red 
 fand. Leaving the high land on your flarboard fide, fleer NW. or rather 
 weflerly : this will carry you in fight of Pulo Auro ; the foundings regular, 
 from 18 fathoms increafing to 30 fiithoms. As you near the China Seas, 
 fand mixed with mud. It may be you may fee the Holy Spirits, but I know 
 no danger near them. I have feen them 7 or 8 leagues off. Thus far the 
 directions communicated to Mr. Nichellon, by the commander of an Eafl- 
 India fhip. 
 
 CCLXXII. Directions^ the Straits o/Sunda. 
 
 A fhip being off the iflands St. Paul and Amflerdam, or near them, in 
 variation iq?W. or variation 20? W. and bound to China, through the Straits 
 of Sunda, is not under the necefifity of making the Coafl of New Holland, 
 or running fio fir' to the eaflward ; but may run 10? or 1 1? fu'ther to the 
 eaflward in latitude 37? 308. or latitude ffiS. Having made 10? or 1 i?eafting 
 from St. Paul's, and in the above latitude, you may then edge away to the 
 northward, and will then decreafe your variation pretty fafl. In latitude 34? 
 46'S. and longitude, made from St. Paul's, 13? 26'E. you will have 14? 30'W. 
 variation. 
 
 U u la
 
 2q8 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 In latitude 25? or 26?S. and longitude, made from St. Paul's, 27? 30T. or 
 hereabout, you will meet the SE. trade winds, ftrong gales ; and in latitude 
 io?S. longitude made from St. Paul's 33?E. you will have variation 2? 3d'W. 
 With this variation you will make the land in latitude 8? i 6'S. 20 or 25 leagues 
 to the eafhvard of Java Head ; and all fhips, bound through the Straits of 
 Sunda, mould take care to fall in with the land to the eafhvard or Java Head. 
 Ships, for want of proper attention to the variation, have fallen in to the 
 weft ward of the Straits of Sunda, and have been obliged to go through the Straits 
 of Malacca, with great lofsof time. 
 
 As you approach this part of the Coaft of Java, you will fee a great numbcr 
 of birds like boobies, and drifts of bamboos, which are certain tokens that you 
 are near the coaft : but let the variation be your guide ; take care not to decreafe 
 it below 2? 3C/W. before you make the land of Java, and you cannot err. 
 Endeavour to make the land in latitude 8?, or 8? I5 / S. 
 
 In fight of Java, in latitude 7? 15'S. the extremes of the land bearing from 
 NEbN. to Nt W. diflance 1 o or 1 2 leagues, variation 2? 5', or 2? 8'W. Between 
 the weft end or weft point of Java and Prince's ifland, is the baft paflage into 
 the Straits of Sunda, having foundings on both fides ; efpecially along the Java 
 fide, there is all along good +-}ing from 20 to 25 and 30 fathoms water. The 
 courfe through, between Prince's Ifland and Java, is ENE. northerly, being 
 a fair channel ; no danger but what is vilible to the eye. 
 
 In thefe Straits, between Prince's Ifland and the Sumatra fhore, there is very 
 deep water, efpecially toward the Sumatra fhore ; in fome places no foundings, 
 whereas all along the Java fide there is good °f->ing, as before-mentioned ; {& 
 that it is beft to keep along the Java fide. Java Head latitude 6? 4o'S. Thefe are 
 Mr. Nichelfon's additional Directions. 
 
 CCLXXI1I. Directions^/' Snivsbou/idto India, ctChina, early hi the Seafon. 
 
 Ships bound to India, or China, early in the feafon, and going round the 
 Cane of Good Hope in the months of March or April, muft not come near the 
 Cape of Good Hope ; for at the Cape, and all along the coaft to the eaftward of 
 t • • Cape, at this time of the year, the SE. winds prevail, ami frequently blow 
 [ \.tty ftrong. Such (hips bound to India, or China, at that time of the year, 
 muft keep to the fouthward, in latitude 39? or 40? S. there they will have 
 t.cfh and '"' ady gales at WSW. S\V. audNW. with which they willciuickly 
 run Jov'. 11 their eafting. 
 
 They
 
 DiREcnoNsyor Ships bound to India, or China, early in the Seafon. 299 
 
 They may fee Gough's Ifland, which is high land, and lies in latitude 40? 
 tjj'S. and longitude 3? 23'E. from the Lizard, or 1? 57'W. from Londofl. 
 They mould keep in that high latitude till they draw near thfe longitude of the 
 Iflancfs St. Paul and Amfterdam. They may either make" thofe iftands, or go 
 fo near them as to correct their longitude or reckoning by the variati >n, as 
 before-mentioned ; and they will probably have a quick paflagc to India, or to 
 either of the ftraits, which ever they are bound to. After taking their depar- 
 ture from St. Paul or Amfterdam, they may proceed according to former 
 directions. 
 
 Captain Vincent, in the Ofterly, in the year 1758, being early in the feafon, 
 kept to the fouthward in latitude 40?S. and run a great many tic ices to the 
 eaftward in this parallel of latitude, and had the higheft variation he ever found 
 in the Indian Seas, viz. 2-?\V. He made the ifland called Gough's lfla d 
 (which is high land, taking its name from Captain Gough, who, it is hippdfed, 
 was the firit that ever law it). Captain Gough law it in 1715 ; Captain Vincent 
 in the year 1758, and made it near the fame latitude and longitude that Captain 
 Gough did ; that is, in latitude 40? 15'S. longitude 3? 23'E. from the Lizard ; 
 though Captain Vincent is perfuaded it lies to the weftward of the Lizard, by 
 his finding his reckoning feveral degrees a-head of the (Lip. This ifland is 
 little known to the generality of people that go this track ; and it is a pity but 
 its exact fituation was alcertrined. 
 
 CCLXXIV. DiRECTiONsy^r Ships bound to India, faffing the Cafe ofGooo 
 
 Hope, late in the Seafon. 
 
 Ships off the Cape of Good Hope, or in foundings off Cape Lagullas, in the 
 latter part of the feafon (as in September, or any time between September and 
 April) and bound to India, mult go the track before-mentioned ; and run down 
 their eafting in latitude 37? 3,8'S. making the Ifland St. Paul, or Amfterdam ; 
 and from thence take a freih departure, but they need not make fo much 
 eafting as (hips bound to the Straits of Sunda. From St. Paul and Amfterdam 
 Ifles they may run down their northing and eafting together, and will decreaie 
 the variation very fait, as they run to the northward. 
 
 In latitude 25?S. they will meet with* the SE. trade-winds ; and in latitude 
 10? 30'S. they will have reduced the variation to 30VV. On the line there is 
 38' or 45'E. variation, and from 40' to 5o'E. or thereabout all over the Indian 
 Seas ; at leaft this was the ftate of the variation there in 1764. 
 
 U u 2 From
 
 300 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 From latitude 10? 30'S. to the Line, in the months of November, -December,. 
 January, February, and frequently in March, you will meet with Frefli gales 
 of wind from SW.. to NW. with fqually weather and much rain. Here lhips 
 may run down their ea fling very faft from latitude io?S. to the Line. Ships 
 that want to run down their eafting, fhould take care to do fo before they cro:s 
 the Line ; for as foon as they crofs the Line, and get into north latitude, 
 they lofe the frefh wefterly winds which they had from latitude io?o. to the 
 Line. In latitude i?N. they will meet the NE. monfoon, which blows con- 
 flantly in the Indian Seas, from October to April, between NEbN. andENE. 
 
 Let a fhip be bound to what part of India flie will, in this feafon, they mould 
 endeavour to keep as far to the eaft ward as Acheen Head. If bound to Bengal, 
 keep to the eaft ward of the Nicobar and Andaman Iflands, and along the Arrakau 
 fhore, till they can ftretch over for Ballafore Road. If bound to Madras, they 
 may ftretch over from Acheen Head, and fetch their port very well, taking 
 care to fall well to the northward of it, on account of the winds being moftly 
 northerly, and the current running ftrong to the fouthward. Should a fhip 
 fall in to the fouthward of her port, they will lofe much time, and have 
 much trouble, before they can gain their port. 
 
 CCLXXV. Directions for Sailing toward China, through the Straits 
 
 of Sunda, Banca, SV. 
 
 From what hath been delivered in the former part of this treatife, it may be 
 oblerved, that throughout the Indian Seas, to the northward of the Equinoctial 
 Line, the winds are divided into the eaftern and weftern monfoons ; that the 
 former commonly reigns from October to March, and the latter the remaining 
 part of the year. 
 
 In the eaftern ocean, between the Cape of Good Hope and the Land of 
 . Concord on the Coaft of New "Holland, to the fouthward -of the 25th degree of 
 fouth latitude, the winds blow from the weftward, moft part of the year, except 
 that in January, February, and March, near the Cape of Good Hope, or about 
 200 leagues from the eaft and welt coafts, the winds come ofteaer from the 
 eaftward than from the weftward. 
 
 Between latitude 35?S. «nd latitude 28?S. you have variable winds; but 
 
 ond, as far as the parallel of 10? or 1 1? fouth latitude, the id blow f om 
 
 SK. toE. without any confiderable interruption. They are ufually c dl< d general 
 
 winds, becaufethey blow thus, not only in the eaftern ocean, but in the other 
 
 fbuthern
 
 Direct ions j6r Sailing toward China. 301 
 
 fbuthern feas ; only there, their power extends nearly as far as the Equar , ■ 
 whereas in the eaftern ocean they feem confined between the parallels of 28? 
 and io?fouth latitude. 
 
 From latitude io?S. to the Equinoctial, the winds divide the year into two 
 feafbns or different monfoons, blowing about 6 months one way, and 6 the 
 other. Although this difference is the fame throughout the Indian Ocean ; 
 yet the winds have a contrary dire&ion at the fame time ; and while they have 
 the eaftern monfoon in the northern hemifphere, the weftern blows in the oppo- 
 site part. The eaftern monfoon begins to the fouthward of the Equinoctial in 
 April, and continues till November ; then the weftern fucceeds, and continues 
 till April. 
 
 The months of April and November (in which the monfoons break up) are 
 fubjecl to variable winds ; becaufe they do nut change all of a Hidden. 
 
 Among the Sunda Ifiands, as far as Timore and Solore, the wefterly winds, 
 which begin in November, bring bad Weather with them ; in December they 
 blow ftronger, and are accompanied with rain : but in January they are in their 
 height, blowing exceflively hard, with thunder, lightning, and rain ; thefe 
 continue till the middle of February, when they begin to die away, and are 
 quite fpent at the end of March. The rains and tempefts are not every year 
 alike ; fome years they are both of them more moderate. 
 
 In April, with the fhifting of the winds, comes fair weather, with only fome 
 fqualls of fhort continuance. In May the winds fettle in the eaftern board. In 
 June and July they blow ftronger, but with a clear and ferene iky, which 
 continues till the end of September. In October they grow faint and variable, 
 till the return of the. weftern monfoon. 
 
 The currents during each monfoon, fet with the winds, excepting in April 
 and November ; then they are contrary, and their velocity increafes with the 
 winds, as alio at the full and change of the moon. 
 
 The currents in the weftern monfoon are much ftronger than thofe of the 
 eaftern ; for this reafon the (hips which tail from Batavia, from the Ifiands of 
 Timore, Solore, and from the Moluccas, in the eaftern monfoons, find lefs 
 difficulty than thefe which return from thence in the weftern monfoons. 
 For the fame reafon the (hips which go from Europe to Batavia, the Gulf of 
 Siam, China, &c. go through the Straits of Sunda, ealier in May, June, 
 July, and Auguft, than thofe which return in December, January, aai 
 February. 
 
 The
 
 *02 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 The winds, during the eaflern monfoon, generally blow from SSE. to E. and 
 from NNVV. to W. in the weftern monfoon. 
 
 Near the Equinoctial Line the winds are much more variable, and confequently 
 lefs to be depended on. For this inconftancy two caules may be affigned ; the 
 firft, becaufe to the northward of the Line the monfoon s are oppofite; the 
 other may ari'e from the frequent rains near the Line, efpecially at Borneo, 
 where it rains incefl'intly eleven months in the year. 
 
 At the Moluc:as the monfoons are the fame as at Java ani the adjacent 
 iflands, with this difference only, that in the Moluccas they call the weftern 
 monioon the northern, and the eaftern the fouthern ; becaufe, during the 
 former, the winds blow more generally from NNW. than from the W. and 
 during; the latter from SSE. than E. 
 
 The northern monfoon, at the Moluccas, brings much rain, and the fouthern 
 great droughts. It is the fame at Java, and the other adjacent iflands ; but at 
 Borneo there is very little difference. 
 
 Having {hewn the general rules for the winds and currents in this part of the 
 fouthern henrifphere, it is to be determined, in confequence thereof, the courfe 
 (hips muff, fleer, to arrive at their deflined ports. 
 
 When you take your departure from the Cape of Good Hope, or from the 
 foundings of the bank, increafe your latitude to 37?S. or 38. S.' to make advan- 
 tage of the weflerly winds, which are more conffant there than in a lower 
 latitude, and which generally blow from NW. to WSW. Though they 
 moftly blow the flrongeft in the months of June, July, and Augufl, it happens, 
 that in April and May (which in thofe parts fhould be looked upon as the 
 end of autumn) you -fometimes have violent fqualls of wind. Thefe gales 
 are generally forefeen by black clouds which obfeure the horizon from NW. 
 to W. 
 
 As foon as you perceive thefe prefages, prepare for their reception, becaufe 
 they come on apace, and are fometmies accompanied with whirlw inds. They 
 begin to blow violently from WNW. to W. then" they lhift with fury to the 
 SW. but when they get to fouth, the wind abates, and it falls calm all of 
 a fudden ; but the lea (agitated and railed by the boiiterous winds) is not fo- 
 foon compofed ; this is frequently of worie confequence than the height of 
 the gale. 
 
 Several mariners have imagined it poflible to foretell thefe fudden calms by 
 a fehuble interruption, or diminution, and by a clearing-up which precedes 
 them ; but this opinion is contradicted by experience : it is not to be depended 
 
 on ;
 
 DiREcTioNsypr Sailing toward China. 303 
 
 on : therefore every navigator fhould avoid (by a fkilful precaution) the fad 
 accidents which always follow thefe events when they arc unexpected, and con- 
 fequently not provided again ft. 
 
 About 1 50 leagues to the eaftward of the Cape of Good Hope, you frequently 
 meet with hard gales of wind, accompanied with much thunder, lightening, 
 and rain, infomuch that they rarely have a clear fky for two days together ; 
 and this continues lo for 300 leagues further. Several perfons who have fre- 
 quented thefe feas, have obferved that it extends as far as the meridian which 
 pailes through the eaftern part of the Ifland Madagalcar, or 5i?£. longitude 
 from London. 
 
 In the fouth-eaftern ocean, the different variation of the magnetic needle is 
 fo regular in failing from weft to eaft, or from eaft to weft, that you may 
 thereby correct errors in your account of longitude ; but then the obfervation 
 muft be taken with a good inftrument, and at the time when the fhip has not 
 too great a motion. 
 
 At the Cape of Good Hope, and to the fouthward, near its meridian, the 
 variation obferved was i6?W. 1740, and failing to the eaftward it encreafed, 
 till off the Ifland Madagafcar, to the fouthward, where it was 25? 30'W. 
 afterward it decreafed on approaching the Coaft of New r Holland and the I Hands 
 of Sunda. 
 
 When you are in latitude 37?S. you muft keep therein, fleering eaft, for 
 about 1 100 leagues, or till you have made about 70? eaft longitude from the 
 Cape of Good Hope. It will not be abfolutely neceflary to fee the ifland of 
 St. Paul or Amfterdam, though the light thereof will greatly aflift you in recli- 
 fying your account, and fhapingyour courfe afterward. They are fituate 56? 
 30' to the eaftward of this Cape. The former is the northernmoft, and may 
 be plainly feen 12 leagues at fea. It is about 6 or 7 leagues in circumference. 
 Its weft end rifes very high. The obfervations of feveral navigators, compared 
 together, fix its latitude in 37? 5-0'S. 
 
 About 6 leagues to the fouthward of this lies the Ifland of St. Paul, which is 
 fmaller than that of Amfterdam. The variation there was obferved 18? 30 W. 
 on board the Defence and other fhips, in 1742. 
 
 If, before you„have made the longitude prefcribed, an extraordinary change 
 of the winds fhould prevent your keening your courfe to the eaftward, it will 
 be proper, in ftanding to the northward, not to pal's the latitude of 35-3. 
 becauie under that latitude you frequently have the winds from NE. to E> 
 Several (hips, for want of obierying this, after lofing a deal of time in beating to 
 
 windward
 
 304 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 windward, have been obliged to run to the fouthward, as far as latitude 
 
 40?S. to regain the wefterly winds. This makes it evident, that in cafe of 
 contrary winds you mould rather put the head to the fouthward than the 
 northward. 
 
 When you have made 70? eaft longitude from the Cape, you edge away by 
 degrees to the northward, in fuch manner as to be able to pafs the Tropic of 
 Capricorn in S^?E. longitude. If, before you fail to the northward, you can 
 obferve the variation, you will be more certain of the pofition you are in. By 
 examining fome latter journals of this navigation, the variation, 70? eaft of 
 the Cape, was 12? jo'W. or 13?, in 1740 ; but now it is altered. It is advi- 
 feable to make the Ifland of St. Paul, if you are bound to the Stiaits of Bally, 
 or any other place to the eaftvvard of thofe Straits. 
 
 From the Tropic of Capricon fteer NNE. to go 60 leagues to the weftward 
 of the Trial Rocks, which are a clufter of various high rocks above and under 
 water, extending about 1 5 leagues from eaft to weft, and 5 leagues from north 
 to fouth. Thefe were difcovered by a Dutch fliip in 1 7 1 9 : their exiftence 
 was afterward confirmed by a (loop lent from Batavia to determine the exact 
 fituation, which was found in latitude 19? 30'S. and 80 leagues weft of New 
 Holland. It will be moft prudent to pafs their latitude in the day-time, becaufe 
 you may fall foul of them in the night, when you reckon yourfelf a good 
 way off. 
 
 In latitude 22? 6'S. and 74? 3o'E. of the Cape of Good Hope, lies Cloate's 
 Ifland. 
 
 The firft account we have of this ifland is from Mr. Nafh, of the fhip Houfe 
 of Auftria, from Oftend for China, in 1719. They faw it firft (being very 
 clear weather) about 3 A. M. on which they immediately brought to and 
 founded, but had no ground with 100 fathoms, though not above 4 miles off 
 fhore (fome accounts fay, they had no ground within 2 miles of the ifland). 
 The day before, and feveral days after, they obferved an incredible quantity of 
 fea-wceds, like thofe from the Gulf of Florida, and frnall birds like lapwings, 
 both in ii/.e and flight. This ifland cannot be feen far, even in clear weather, 
 and bis NEbN. and SWbS. about 32 leagues in length, with terrible breakers 
 from each end, tunning about 3 miles into the fea. It lies in latitude 22?S. and 
 92?E. longitude Irom the Cape. From hence they made 3? 6' eafting to the 
 If a r'd Bally, and 7? 26' welling to Java Head. As they did not find any account 
 o it in their books or charts, they gave it the name of Cloate's Ifland, in honour 
 of a Flemilh Baron, probably one of their owners. 
 
 The
 
 Directions/^- Sailing toward.CpisA. 305 
 
 The Haeflingfield fell in with it in 1 743 ; they faw it at day-light, bearing 
 from SElS. to EbS. about 6 leagues. They report it lies NE. and S\V. 7 or 
 8 leagues in length, of a moderate height, and pretty level, with a gradual 
 dope to each end, from whence they faw the breakers. By their accounts, 
 they make it in latitude 22? y'S. and longitude 32? 49/E. from the Ifland St. 
 Paul, and in 84? 26'E. longitude from Cape Lagullas, their variation the 
 morning before was 6? 1 7'N. weflerly. From this ifland they fleered nearly 
 north for 7 days ; then they made the land of Java, in latitude 8?ir and 44'W. 
 meridian diftance, and in 3^ days more made Java Head, in 7? 1 2'W. longi- 
 tude from Cloate's Ifland. 
 
 By comparing thefe accounts together, we may obferve the variation does 
 not alter very much hereabout ; and although they differ about 7? of longi- 
 tude in their reckonings from the Cape (which is not to be wondered at in fo 
 long a run, when fometimes they (hall differ half as much on board the fame 
 (hip) yet they agree as near as can be expected in their run from thence to 
 Java Head ; fo that we may conclude the difference of meridians between this 
 ifland and Java Head to be about 7? 20'. 
 
 That it does not lie above 3? or 4? at moft, from the Coaft of New-Hol- 
 land, appears from the following reafons. The fhip Prince of Wales, in 1738, 
 the evening before they made this coaft (in the latitude of Cloate's Ifland) 
 obferved the variation 5? 55'N. weflerly, being then at the largeft computation 
 about 38 leagues from the land ; alfo the faid ihip made but 4? ' meridian 
 diftance" from thence to the weft end of Cambava, Ivinsr according to thefe 
 charts, much about 12? to the eaftward of Java Head, which agrees nearly 
 with the other two mips run's ; for by deducting the 4?,' eafting, there 
 remains 7? \ wefting to Java Head. 
 
 Here it may not be amifs to infert fome account of this land from Captain 
 Pelly. At firft fight it made like fmall iflands, fo very low that it could not 
 be feen off the deck : he faw .only a great fmoke ariling from it, and let it 
 only at 5 or 6 leagues diftance. He alio founded, but had no ground with 160 
 fathoms; nor did he find any figh of foundings as he ran in toward it, the 
 water being not at all difcoloured. Standing in ENE. he railed the land, 
 found it long and level, about the height of the Lizard, that might be feen 8 or 
 10 leagues, and believed that the land like iflands, joined to the reft. He 
 made about 39?^ eaft longitude from the Ifland St. Paul home to this land. 
 It was difcovexed by Captain Nafh, who reported that it extended about 10 
 
 X x or 1 1
 
 306 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 11 leagues NEbN. and SWbS. and that it might be feen 10 or 12 leagues at 
 fea. 
 
 Having pruTed the Trial Rocks, you miift continue your courfe NNE|E. till 
 within fight of Java ; fo you will make the land about 50 leagues to the eaft- 
 ward of the Straits of Sunda; and this is diftance enough to prevent any error 
 to the weftward. If you follow thefe directions, you generally find the error 
 on the other fide. The journals confirm this, that the fhips which fail from 
 the Cape of Good Hope to Java, by following nearly this track, have fallen in 
 with this land further to the eaftward than they reckoned ; but obferve, that 
 it is even dangerous fometimes to run too far to the eaftward, on account of 
 the difficulty you have to get out of the bays, formed by the Coafts of New 
 Holland, and the iflands to the eaftward of Java; there you often meet with 
 frequent calms and currents, which run with rapidity through the channels 
 of thefe iflands. 
 
 It is not thus with fhips which fail from the iflands of France and Bourbon, 
 for the Straits of Sunda ; their error, from whatever caufe it ariles, is generally 
 70 leagues to the weftward. It will be proper for navigators who make this 
 voyage, to take care to prevent this difference, by (landing fo far to the eaft- 
 ward, as that, after pafiing the Trials, you muft make good a NEbN. courfe, 
 till within fight of the Coaft of Java. 
 
 In either of thefe cafes, if, after all the precautions neccflary, you mould 
 fall in to the weftward, and in 7? 30' fbutb latitude you do not fee the land, 
 haul upon the wind, to get to the eaftward till within light of it. 
 
 Seventy-feven leagues to the fbuthward of the weft point of Java, or Java 
 Head, in latitude 10? 22'S. lies an ifland, called Chriftmas Ifland by the 
 Englifli, and Money Ifland by the Dutch. Some years fince a (hip of that 
 nation run aground there in the night, and was wrecked. Its longitude is 
 105? 55'E- of London, and variation 2? 5f'W. 
 
 This ifland is high, very woody and of a very beautiful appearance, affording 
 frefh water, land tortoifes, and wild hogs. It is laid to be fife all about, and 
 that on the north fide there is °|-}>ng in 14 or 15 fath< rns. It may be fcen 10 
 leagues in clear weather. There are many birdb flying about it, 
 
 The Killing, or Coco Iflands, were obferved by Captain Hudion to lie in 
 the. latitude of 11° 50'S. who alio made 6? 50' meridian diftancc weft from 
 Java Head. They are fmall broken iflands, and not to be feeti above 4 leagues. 
 They are covered all over with trees, and have abundance of breakers about 
 them. They extend about z\ leagues N. and S. but not fo much E. and \V. 
 
 \\ hen
 
 DiRECTioNsyor Sailing toward China. 307 
 
 When you fall in with the fouth coaft of Java, there is np judging with 
 certainty (for want of good remarks) of your diftance from the Straits of Simda; 
 experience only can enable you to diftinguifh this. The land near the fhore 
 is generally very woody. There are feveral bays and fome iflands, or rocks, 
 which border the coaft, and feem to render it dangerous landing there. The 
 bottom is not proper for 4-^ing, but very near the ihore. In land it is covered 
 with high mountains, efpecially the eaft part ; there they are very craggy. 
 
 Being in fight of this coaft, when you are about 4 or 5 leagues off it, fail 
 along by it, lying generally about EbS. and WbN. except near Wine-cup 
 Point ; there it trenches a little more north and fouth. 
 
 Wine-cup Point lies in latitude 7? 28'S. and may be known, coming from 
 the eaftward, by the coaft's feeming to terminate there. The double Ian.!, 
 near the fhore, lowers toward this point, which is low and covered with 
 trees. At its extremity there is a little fandy ifland cloie to the water's 
 edge ; and the coafl in this part is encompaffed with breakers a quarter of a 
 
 league off. 
 
 From Wine-cup Point the coaft lies NbE. for 3 leagues, and after forming a 
 bay to the eaftward it trenches away again to WbN. as far as the entrance of 
 the Straits of Sunda. In this laft extent, about 2 leagues off fhore, is a little 
 low ifland covered with trees, called by the Dutch Trouwers Ifland, and 3 \ 
 leagues WbS. therefrom you meet with Claps's Ifland (ca led by the French, 
 lies des Brifans) ; this is low and woody, like the former. You may <+-} hereabout 
 in 25 or 30 fathoms. 
 
 Being paft Wine-cup Point, fleer WNW. toward Claps's Ifland, bearing 
 thus about 20 leagues therefrom. As you near it, you may perceive to the 
 north-weftward the weft point of Java (or Java Head) on which there is a 
 mountain of a moderate height, whofe weft end lowers more fuddenly than 
 the other. 
 
 To the eaftward of this mountain is another, very much like it in fhape 
 and height ; between the two is low land, covered with trees. If you come from 
 feaward, and are too far off to perceive this laft, the wefternmoft mountain 
 appears like an ifland ; and when you raife the eafternmoft, the fpace between 
 them feems to form the entranceof the ftraits ; then appear the trees, and the 
 low land that unites the n. 
 
 It is about 7 leagues N WbW. from Claps's Ifland to the weft point of Java 
 or Java Head, which feems to terminate very bluff, it being on a great rock, 
 feparated from the foot of the mountain, with which it appears confounded. 
 
 X x 2 Coming
 
 308 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Coming from the fouthward, there are fome other little rocks above water, 
 about a auarter of a league off more; and to the fouth-eaftward thereof a reef 
 upon which the fea breaks. 
 
 NNW. 4 leagues from this point, is Capuchin, or the firft point of the Straits 
 of Sunda, on the Java fide ; and at its extremity a rock, with a tree upon it, 
 which navigators call the Friar. The coaft between thefe two points forms a 
 bight, all along which there are feveral high rocks, relembling, at a diftance, 
 boats under the fail. 
 
 In the draughts of the Straits of Sunda, the firft point of the ftraits is placed by 
 fome in' more northerly than it mould be. By Mr. Herbert's observations-, 
 and thofe of feveral navigators, its latitude is 6? 39/. If on fome draughts you 
 draw a ftraight line, from the firft point to Crakata, or Crockatoe Hill, the 
 eaft part of Prince's Ifland will then be between them ; whereas, when thofe 
 two objects are in one, the eafternmoft point of Prince's Ifland, inftead of being 
 fhut in, appears open 2? or 3?. 
 
 To the northward you may fee the land of Prince's Ifland, whofe SE. part 
 makes the north coaft of a little (trait, by fome called Prince's Straits ; the 
 Dutch call it Behouden, or the Safe Pafiage ; by this you enter the Straits of 
 Sunda. At the fouth point of this ifland, and 2 leagues NVVbN. of the 
 Friar, are feveral great rocks, called the Carpenters, extending WSW. about 
 a quarter of a league ; they are almoft clofe to one another, and fteep to, 
 having 60 fathoms clofe aboard them. All the coaft off Prince's Ifland is 
 equally bold. 
 
 One league eaft of the firft point, in a bay on the coaft of Java, you find 
 the Little Ifland Cantaye, called by the Englifti Mew Ifland, where feveral 
 mips put in for water and wood. In °r-}ing at this place, be cautious of a 
 ledge of funken rocks, which bear about NbW. one mile from the Watering- 
 place. Some charts lay down a bank projecting to the weft ward, from the 
 north point of this ifland ; but an experienced navigator (M. le Chevalier 
 de la Boifiiere) affirms, that at half a quarter of a league from this point he 
 found 6\ fathoms : therefore you need not be too fearful of turning it in this 
 part. 
 
 .vecn the ifland Cantaye and the Firft Point, there lies a great rock, or 
 li tie ifland. 
 
 As the winds, during the monfoon of April and November, generally blow 
 between SSh". and ESli. to enter this ftrait, you muft keep the Coaft of Java 
 on board, and go as near the Friar as poffible ; this rock is fafe, and there 
 
 . / appears
 
 Directions for Sailing toward 'Chin a. 309 
 
 appears no danger within a cable's length of it. When you are near it, and it 
 bears NNE. you may perceive, beyond it, in the fame direction, a very high 
 hi'l, like a fugar-loaf, upon the Ifland Cracata ; then the eaft point of Prince's 
 liland (whereon alfo is another peak) bears a little more northerly. 
 
 Thoic w ho intend to put in at Cantaye Ifland, as foon as they have pafled the 
 Friar, ftand to windward, to round the north part of this ifland, at whofe 
 extremity is a great fteep rock, but no danger about if, it being feparated only 
 by a little channel. For conveniency of your boats wooding and watering, you 
 may of-} mid- way between this little ifland and the Coaft of Java, in 18 fathoms, 
 fandy ground ; its point bearing between the NW. and W. at the diftance of 
 half a league. 
 
 This ifland is not inhabited. The huts, or villages, are on Java, and that a 
 good way from fhore. The refreshments to be had at this place are fea tortoifes, 
 or turtles, fowls, and cocoa-nuts, which the inhabitants of Prince's Ifland bring 
 in their proes on board the (hips ; thefe commodities are generally fcarce, and 
 their price is exorbitant. Upon this ifland is a ftone, with the arms of Holland 
 cut thereon ; and an inscription, letting forth, that they have taken ppfTeflion 
 of it. You get wood on the ifland, and water oppolite thereto, upon Java ; 
 it fails in cafcades down the hill by the fea (ide, and is the only water you can 
 get hereabout. 
 
 It is mceflary, in this fesfon, to prefer the little ftrait, between the Coaft of 
 Javd and Prince's Illand, to that northward thereof, as it will be exceeding 
 difficult, on account of the winds that blow at this time, to gain the Coaft of 
 Java. You (hould keep this co.dt on board, not only for the benefit of the winds, 
 but alfo to get °h}ing ground in cafe of a calm and a contrary current, which is 
 the reafon you cannot lucceed on the ( oaft or Sumatra. 
 
 If lome fhips, after falling to leeward of the Straits of Sunda, have been 
 lucky enough to re-enter through the great channel, they have employed much 
 time in beating againft winds .and currents ; this is enough to prevent your 
 making choice of it. 
 
 When you fail from Cantaye Ifland, keep along fhore as far as Welcome, 
 or the Second Point, which may be rounded at \ of a league diftance, and even 
 nearer upon occafion. Within Welcome Bay there are feveral iflands ; it 
 extends as far as Pepper Bay^ or more properly Pepper Point, the Third 
 Point in the ftrait, which lies 6 leagues NEbE|E. of the Second Point. To 
 the ENE. of this Second Point there is a bank, upon which an Engliih fhiprun 
 aground ; it will be proper for thofe who are obliged to turn it, in this part, to 
 
 pay
 
 310 New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 pay attention thereto. It has but 9 feet water ; in fome places it ftretches to 
 the ENE. and WSW. 2 cables in length, and 1 in breadth. When on it, the 
 northern moft peak on Prince's Ifland is one with Welcome, or the Second Point, 
 bearing WNW. about 5 miles, and Pepper or the Third Point, NEiE. About 
 a cable's length NNW. from it, there are 19 fathoms. 
 
 When you are to the northward of Welcome, or the Second Point, freer NE. 
 for the Fourth, which lies about 14 leagues therefrom on this point of the 
 compais. Having failed about 9 leagues, you may perceive, to the NEbN. an 
 ifland -of a moderate height, and very uneven, called by navigators Thwart the 
 the Way, or the Middle Ifland, becaufe it is nearly fo between the Coafls of 
 Sumatra and Java. This ifland is about 4 miles long, NEbN. and SWbS. 
 At its SE. point a reef projects a little. 
 
 The Ifland Cantaye being unable to fiipply fhips that fland in need of proper 
 refrefhments, or whole condition wants repairing ; thofe who are lo circumflanced 
 will do well to cf-^ at Serigny, to the north -eaft ward of Pepper Bay, at the foot 
 of feveral high mountains, which are on that fide. 
 
 To gain this place, having pafl'ed the Second Point of the Strait, fhape a 
 courfe toward the Third, which is more extenlive than the other, forming feveral 
 little bays, and containing about 3 leagues in circumference. Within Pepper 
 Ifland is an ifland, to the north-wefhvard of which are breakers, which render 
 its approach dangerous ; as is the whole Bay. 
 
 When you are off Pepper, or the Third Point, about a league diftant, 3'ou fee 
 the little Ifland Serigny bearing EbN. which, from this fituation, is confounded 
 with the Coaft of Java near it ; it may be known by feveral great trees upon it, 
 in fome places thick, in others fcattered and lcfs confided. In failing toward 
 this ifland you mull take care to keep it always on the ftarboard fide, and to °)-^ 
 about l of a league NNW. thereof: you will then be about the fame diflance 
 from the village of Serigny j on the Coaft of Java, under the declivity of the 
 Second Mountain in Pepper Bay. There are many inhabitants, and a market 
 eveay day. The g< \ v. nior, who rciides there, is dependent on the king of Baiitam, 
 and all the country round about belongs to that prince. The Dutch only r'eferye 
 trade. The people in general are very felfifh, and will buy every kind of 
 ! . ichandize, provided you will (ell them at a very low rate, and pay in exchange 
 very deaf for their commodities. They appear very affable, but vou mufl be on 
 your guard if you would not be cheated by them. You may let up tents, and 
 (end your (ick afhore upon the ifland. There is a reef, about a mile to the 
 n >rtfiward, which trenches from thence to the fhure. 
 
 It
 
 Directions for Sailing toward China. 311 
 
 It is about \\ leagues NbE. from Serigny to the Fourth Point. The land 
 along fhore is full of cocoa-nut trees, which are the ftaple of this country. In 
 fome places, and efpecially beyond the village of Negery, thcreare feveral breakers, 
 the rartheft of which reaches half a quarter of a league from the fhore. Having 
 weighed from Serigny, keep about a league off fhore. Notwithstanding the 
 irregular foundings, which increafe farther off, there is good °r-}i n g ground in 
 20, or at molt 30 fathoms : therefore keep within that depth, in cafe it fhould 
 fall calm, or you have not wind enough to ftem the current, which generally 
 runs in this feafon to the fouth-weftward. 
 
 The Fourth Point has nothing remarkable, except that beyond it the coaft 
 runs about a league and a half to the fouth-eaftward, as far as that of Anger 
 or Anjere. The principal village to which navigators have given this name, is 
 lituate near the fea-fhore, about two miles on this fide of the point. Here you 
 may get buffaloes, hogs, fowls, and ducks. Thofe fhips that are fhort of 
 provilions may put in here. You will be oppofite this place when the Middle 
 Ifland is in one with the high land of Sumatra, about Hog Point : but oblerve 
 that there is no holding ground between the two points above-mentioned, and 
 that a ft ron g current is iufficient to drive you. 
 
 NNE. 1 \ half league from Anjere Point, and at the fame diftance ESE. of 
 the fouth part of the Middle Ifland, lies a little round ifland, covered with trees, 
 commonly called the Bonnet, or Little Cap. This name was given it to 
 diftinguifh it from another like it, but larger and higher, called the Hat of 
 Brabant, or the Great Cap, bearing N^W. 7 miles off the Bonnet. The latter 
 of thefe is called by the Englifh the Button. 
 
 From Anjere Point till you are pall thefe iflands, there is no good 4-^ing., 
 but in very deep water; it will not be prudent to leave the Coaft of Java, to 
 go between them, but with a frefh breeze, and not, as feveral fhips have done, 
 at the firft appearance of wind, which feldom lafts long enough to get to 
 the northward of St. Nicholas Point, Bantam, or the length of the northernmoft 
 of thefe iflands. Without this precaution, if it mould prove calm, you are 
 driven to and fro by the currents, which hereabout are exceeding rapid, becaufe 
 the channels through which they run are fi* narrow that they augment their 
 velocity. 
 
 To the north-eafhvard of the Little Cap, it is laid there is a dangerous bank 
 extending along the Coaft of Java. This is called Biouwer's Sand, and is very 
 dangerous, fhoaling very iuddenlv. The Harrifon's long-boat was on this land, 
 in 1 1 fathom, with 4 or 5 fathoms within a caft all round about it ; the Cap 
 
 then
 
 2i2 A New Directory jor the East-Indies. 
 
 then bore SWjS. Thwart the Way WbN. the Button NWiN. the point of an 
 ifland near the fhore, which ftiut in Bantam Point, NbE. a very little ifland, 
 clofe in fhore, ENE. Whether you fail from Anjere Point, or any place on 
 this fide of it, you muft always leave this ifland (the Button) to the ftarboard, 
 and fail between it and the fouth point of the Middle Ifland ; then pafs the 
 Great Cap on the eafl: fide, at what diftance you think proper. About a mile 
 off the SW. part of this ifland (the Little Cap) there is a rock 1 4 feet under 
 water, upon which an Englifh flap damaged her keel. Navigators were a long 
 time ignorant of this danger, feveral having failed on all fides of this ifland, 
 without perceiving it ; whence it is thought not very extenfive. There is 
 alfo an account of one with 17 feet water on it, from whence the Button bears 
 SEbE. 2 miles. 
 
 St. Nicholas Point (called by fome Bantam Point, on account of its nearnefs 
 to the town of that name) bears E|N. 3 leagues from the Great Cap. It 
 feems unneceflary to come near this point, unlels upon the appearance of an 
 approaching calm, to fecure convenient <f-^ a g e « After paffing the Great Cap, 
 fleer NNE. to get fight of the Two Brothers, 1 7 leagues therefrom, on this 
 point of the compafs, and in latitude 5? r j'S. They are two little iflands near 
 each other, and of an equal fize and height : they may be feen 6 or 7 leagues, 
 rather by the height of the trees planted thereon, than that of the land. When 
 they bear NbE. and SbW. they make in one. 
 
 From each end of thefe iflands are two reefs near the water's edge, which 
 extend half a quarter of a league north and fouth ; and though they encompafs 
 alfo the eafl: and weft coafts, you may near them (efpecially the laft) within 
 i of a mile to the weflward of them, and have 10 or 11 fathoms, without 
 dinger. It is improper to keep too great a diftance from them, in order to avoid 
 two fhoals, one of which, called the Shabander (from the name of a Dutch 
 fliip which narrowly efcaped being wrecked here), lies 7 miles YYbN'N. 
 of the fouthernmoft ifland. The fliip Jupiter, commanded by M. Deftaudrais 
 du Frefne, ftruck upon it, returning from China, and had 17 feet of her keel 
 knocked off, which obliged him to go to Batavia to careen. This fhoal feems 
 to be {battered in different parts, and to extend further than is generally imagined. 
 
 Moft of the manufcript charts place this danger at a greater diftance from 
 the Two Brothers than it really is : the fame error is found with refpect to the 
 eaft coaft of Sumatra, from whence thefe iflands are not above 6 or 7 leagues 
 diftant. 
 
 Two
 
 Directions for Sailing toward China* 313 
 
 Two leagues and au half EbN. of the northernmoft of the Two Brothers, 
 are two little banks of fand (called Brouwcr's Sand) upon which, feveral 
 perfons, who have been near them, affirm they have {cen rocks ; but as others 
 fay nothing of them, it may be prefumed that they are covered at high 
 water. 
 
 All the Coaft of Sumatra, from the Straits of Sunda to the length of the 
 Two Brothers, is high land ; and beyond, as far as the Straits of Banca, is 
 low and woody. Along this lhore are the mouths of feveral rivers, the moft 
 conliderable of which is called Tollong Bouang : there lies before it a great 
 bank ; the verge of which is near 3 leagues off; and to the northward thereof 
 is another, projecting ftill further in fome places, and on which are feveral 
 dry parts. This lad is known by a point (which they fay is an ifland) whereon 
 are trees higher than in any other place hereabout ; for this reafon it is called 
 Great-Tree Ifland. From thence to the entrance of the Straits of Banca, the 
 coaft forms a bight, and extends NbE. 13 or 14 leagues. 
 
 By the bearings of this coaft you may conclude the Ifland Lucepara bears 
 NbE. 34 leagues off the Two Brothers ; yet the irregularity of the currents 
 which run into or out of the Straits of Banca, together with the ebbing and 
 flowing of the rivers along the Coaft of Sumatra, prevent your lhaping a direct 
 courfe from one to the other. The beft method is to fteer by the foundings 
 as follows. 
 
 As foon as you have fight of the Two Brothers, fteer fuch a courfe as to 
 go about three quarters of a league to the weftward of them in 1 2 or 13 fathoms. 
 From thence fteer NNE. in order to keep in 13, 12, and 10 fathoms. If it 
 increafes to 1 5 or 16 fathoms, this is a proof that you are too far off the Coaft 
 of Sumatra, to the eaftward ; if fo, you muft borrow more from the north, 
 and even from the weft, fo as to regain the Coaft of Sumatra. 
 
 On the contrary, if by means of the tides you are driven too near the Ifland 
 of Sumatra, the depth will decreafe to 12, 10, and 8 fathoms: as foon as 
 you have this laft depth, ftand to the eaftward, or o(-^, if the winds will not 
 permit that, in order to avoid the banks bordering the Coaft of Sumatra ; the 
 moft dangerous, and that which projects the furtheft, is off Great Tree 
 Ifland, before mentioned, called by fome Turtle Bank. 
 
 In the day-time, and clear weather, you may know your diftance from this 
 ifland, as well by fight thereof as by your foundings; but in the night-time, 
 or hazy weather, it is neceffary to keep the lead going. 
 
 Y y When
 
 314 -A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 When you are paft Great-Tree Ifland, as you near Lucepara, the depth 
 decreafes very regularly, to 7 ' fathoms ; then you may fee it, in latitude 
 3? 13'S. It is fmall and the land is low, but by means of great trees it may 
 be ealily feen 6 leagues at fea. You fland toward this ifland till it bears north 
 about 2 1- leagues ; and then 4-}, if the tide or night will not permit you to 
 Set within the Araks. 
 
 From the fouth point of the Ifland Banca extends a flioal near 5 leagues 
 SSW. If for want of following this direction (namely, bringing Lucepara to 
 bear north about 2 \ leagues) or if any unforefeen accident fhould force you on 
 that fide ; as foon as you perceive it (whether by feeing the land to the north- 
 ward, or by diminution of the foundings) you raufi: fleer WNW. till you get 
 fight of Lucepara. Thefe marks are unneceflary when you are to the 
 eaflward thereof, and confequently fouth of Banca ; it is fufficient, in order to 
 be certain of it, that you cannot fee the land to the weflward. 
 
 CCLXXVI. Directions concerning a Sand to the wejlward of the Two 
 Brothers, on which the Sandwich was a-ground in 1749-50. 
 
 January 27, got through the Straits of Banca. The 28th in the morning,, 
 faw the Two Brothers, then flood in for the Sumatra fhore, and at 3 \ P. rVL 
 run a-ground on a Sand, when had the following bearings. The northern- 
 moft part of Sumatra in fight NbW. the fouthernmoft SWbWtW. the 
 fouthernmoft of the Two Brothers SEbE'E. the northernmoft ENE. 
 northerly diftance 3 leagues, and from the Sumatra fliore 4 leagues. 
 
 About 2 A. M. by the water riling a little, got off into 18 feet water, but 
 foon after was faft again. We got off a fecond time, and foon a-ground a 
 third. By founding round the fhip, found the fhoaleft water 19 feet, except 
 where fhe lay, which were only 17 feet, and a little way a-head were 4 or 5 
 fathoms. Set fails, flarted water, and threw fome lumber over-board ; fo that 
 with afrefh breeze and a fmall fwell, drove her fairly over by 10 o'clock. The 
 fhip thumped exceflive hard, but made no water. <f-}ed in 4^ fathoms, having 
 been 19 hours from the firft grounding to getting clear the third time. 
 
 The 30th (after fending the boats to found, and finding no lefs than 4 
 fathoms) made fail • arid flood on for about 5 miles ; then the fhip flruck 
 
 again, but did not flick ; on which, cf-}ed in 4'- fathoms. The boats were 
 font out again to the fouthward, and, to their great joy, found the water deepen 
 gradually to 9 fathoms : this they had about 5 miles from the fhip. 
 
 ccLxxvn.
 
 ( vs ) 
 
 CCLXXVII. Directions for the Straits '/"Banca. 
 
 Thefe Araits extend about 35 leagues from SE. to NW. The Ifland of Banca 
 whence it derives its name, bounds it on the eaft fide ; and part of the Coafl: of 
 Sumatra on the weft. This coafl: is very marfhy, and has no other elevation 
 but the trees, the lower parts of which, near the more, are wafhed by the fea. 
 You mutt not approach it too near, on account of a mud bank that borders it, 
 extending half a league out, and even more in ibme places. 
 
 The Ifland of Banca is higher : on it are feveral mountains ; but the moft 
 confpicuous are thole of Parmifl'ang and Monopin. 
 
 The Little Ifland Lucepara (before-mentioned) lies at the SE. part of theic 
 ftraits, and forms two channels to enter it*"; the eaftern one is very wide, and 
 feems to make an exceeding fine paflage, but it is not frequented. It hath 
 been faid, that this is the beft paflage, the leaft depth being 8 fathoms ; but 
 it feems to require the confirmation of experience ; for all the fhips, to this 
 day, prefer the weftern channel, between the Coafls of Sumatra and Lucepara, 
 which is about 3 leagues broad. Thofe who have the charge of (hips fhould be 
 particularly careful in this part, on account of its fhoalnefs : feveral fend their 
 boat a-head to found, which is very prudent ; but without this precaution it 
 will be eafy to determine the track which you mult keep in this paflage, with 
 regard to Lucepara and the Coafl: of Sumatra. 
 
 Obferve, that the tides run very ftrong and irregular throughout the Straits 
 of Banca; the flood fets to the northward, according to the channel it run^ 
 through ; the ebb to the fouthward in like manner. The continuance of eitht 
 of them cannot be exactly afcertained ; oftentimes the ebb lafts 16 hours without 
 interruption, and fometimes lefs ; you cannot calculate the beginning nor end 
 thereof. It fufneeth to attend to the different changes, and to 4-} when there 
 is not wind enough to flem a contrary tide. 
 
 If you fet out from the place where Lucepara bears north, diftance about 2, 
 leagues, where is convenient c f-}age ; from thence fleer WNW. till you briag 
 Lucepara to bear NNE. then NW. till it bears NE. In this track you find 
 57 or 6 fathoms, fbft mud. If your foundings are hard land, in this pafla< v e, 
 it always denotes being near the banks that encompafs Lucepara ; therefore 
 keep more to the weftward, in order to get into mud foundings : this is the 
 proper channel. 
 
 The Ifland Lucepara bearing NE. fleer NWbN. till it bears ENE. then 
 NNW. and if it bfe neceflary, NbW. fo as to give the Coafl: of Sumatra a 
 
 Y y 2 good
 
 3 1 6 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 good birth, which you mud then keep at a league, or a league and a quarter 
 diflance. This will carry you clear of the bank which lies NWbN. of Lucepara, 
 and SE. of the Firft Point, with only 10 feet water, and on which you may fee 
 the breakers at low water. This is the fhoal that the Cruttenden, Captain 
 Bowland, was upon in 1765. It extends about NW. and SE. 2 leagues. There 
 is another fmall one, which lies a little to the weflward of the middle part of 
 this, where the Cruttenden was, and about fouth from the NW. which is the 
 fhoaleft part. There is alfo another fmall bank, to the fouthward of thefe, on 
 which Capt. Charles Newton, in the Concord, was a-ground. When Lucepara 
 bore SSEtE. and the firft point of Sumatra NNW. they had foundings as faft 
 as they could heave the lead, from 10, 7, 4, 3 fathoms, to 10 feet. You muft 
 carefully avoid bringing Lucepara to the fouthward of SEbS. till the firft point 
 bears NWbW. then you are clear of thefe banks, and deepen your water apace, 
 though you fleer NNE. 
 
 You muft come no nearer the Coaft of Sumatra, if you would not rifque the 
 running upon the bank which borders this coaft, and whofe verge runs out half 
 a league, or more in fome places. Several fhips, by ranging this coafl too near, 
 hive met with this accident, and have not been able to get off again without. 
 great difficulty. 
 
 As you near the Firft Point of the Straits, (of which there are four on the 
 Coaft of Sumatra) the depth increafes to 1 2 fathoms, mud ; and beyond that it 
 is greater. 
 
 When Lucepara bears eafl of you, if the weather is clear, you may eafily 
 perceive the mountains of Parmiffang, on the Ifland ofBanca, which lieNbW.. 
 of the Firft Point of the Straits. 
 
 According to the observation of feveral navigators, the depths in the paffage 
 between Lucepara and Sumatra vary at different times, at the fame bearings off 
 Lucepara, and at the fame diflance. Upon examining feveral journals, notice 
 has been taken of this inequality. Several fhips found 4 fathoms in the fame 
 place (according to iheir eflimation) where others had found 6 at another time : 
 this may be occationed by its being nearer to, or further from, the time of 
 high water ; or by the inundations of rivers, occafioned by frequent and 
 s ; or the difference of judgment, in the eftimation of the diflance 
 from Lucepara. On the Coaft of Sumatra, where it is very fhoal, if inftead. 
 of 2 leagues WSW. v . uc from it, it is not furprifing to find 
 
 there lei water. When this happens ? you mull fland toward Lucepara for 
 1 i : ■ . ter. 
 
 It
 
 Directions for the Straits of Banc a. --ly 
 
 It is reckoned 8 \ leagues NWbN. from the firft Point of thefe Straits to 
 the feconcl. The coaft between them forms two Falfe Points, fo called to 
 diitinguifh them from the principal ones. This part is alfo bordered with a 
 mud" bank, which projects a mile, fo that the coaft may be ranged at 2 miles 
 without danger. The depths (though unequal) are generally about 15, iS, 
 and 20 fathoms. 
 
 Upon the extremity of the Second Point is a tree, which fcerns a little feparate 
 from it ; fo that at the firft fight you would take it for a fhip at 4-}. The 
 coaft beyond forms a great bay : this feems to have efcaped the notice of 
 authors, as well as the mud bank, which fills up the whole extent. Several, 
 navigators have imagined, that off this extremity was a little bank, between 
 which you might pafs ; but founding from the Second Point, as far and farther 
 than this pretended bank, this bay was very fhoal, fo that moft of the bank 
 might be it&w at low water. The courfe from the Second to the Third Point 
 was NW^N. 
 
 The fhip Lynn, in 1733, fell in with a fhoal, bearing NEbE. about 2 cables 
 length diftance ; at which time the Second Point of Sumatra bore WSW. about 
 7 miles : then they had 7 fathoms ; the caff before had no ground with the 
 hand-lead. They took this fhoal for the fame as is here mentioned, though 
 they were rather nearer the Banca than the Sumatra fhore ; and moft fhips may 
 go to the weftward of it, though they imagine they go to the eaftward. In 
 the day-time it is vifible enough, and eafily avoided ; but it muft be dangerous 
 in the night. 
 
 The mailer of a Dutch floop gave an account, on board the London, in the fe 
 Straits, in 1738, that he had been upon a rock, with 20 and 16 fathoms ail 
 round it, which lies eaftward from the Second Point, about mid- channel, but 
 rather nearer Banca ; likewife of a fend laid down in the Dutch draughts between 
 the Third and Fourth Points, .hear the Banca fhore, which he fays lies near the 
 mid-channel. 
 
 Within the Second Point, about a quarter of a league to the weftward, there 
 Is a great tree, encompa^ed with feveral others of an equal height, but, as this 
 is taller than the reft, it looks like a tree left to grow in the middle of a 
 clipped hedge ; it ferves as a mark to know the Second Point by, in coming 
 from the northward, and to avoid the extremity of the bank which lies 
 KbWiW.ofthis tree. 
 
 By thefe remarks it is evident, that it is not only dangerous to range the 
 Coafl of Sumatra, between thefe two points, but alfo to fail direct from one to 
 
 the
 
 318 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 j 
 
 the other. The propereSt courfe, after pafling the Second Point, is to (land 
 toward the largeSt Pulo Nanka, which then bears about NbE. At this bearing 
 its two extremities appear low, and the middle ibmewhat higher. In this 
 track you have 1 8 or 20 fathoms, which decreafe to 1 5 fathoms : as you near 
 the iflands, keep in this depth. 
 
 If you are in want of freSh water or wood, you may be conveniently fupplied 
 therewith upon the largeSt ifland. As there are, between thefe iflands, fome 
 dangers near the water's edge, you muft cf-^ without all, and not enter their 
 channels without having firft proved them. 
 
 When you are oft the northernmost ifland, Steer for the Third Point, and 
 leave the Coaft of Banca, along which are Several dangers, and in general very 
 foul ground. 
 
 From Pulo Nanka, when the weather is clear, you may fee, to the NWbW. 
 Monopin Hill, fituate on the welt end of the Ifland Banca. Its height Shews it a 
 good way oft", and makes it a fure mark to enter the Straits, in coming from the 
 northward, or to go out of them, coming from the Southward. 
 
 The Third Point of the Straits, a little higher than the others, is distinguished 
 by a beach of red fand ; from off it, Steer WbN. toward the Fourth Point, 
 which lies 20 miles \V|N. therefrom. You fail a little more northerly than 
 the bearing of theie two points, to avoid the edge of the banks off the river 
 Palimbam or Palambang, which begin immediately after the Fourth Point, 
 about which you often find unequal depths, of 12, 8, and 6 fathoms : this is 
 not to be wondered at, as it deepens amain by Standing to the northward. 
 
 To the weStward of the Fourth Point is a bank, on which the Stafford was 
 a-ground, in company with the York and St. George ; a fmall fnow coming 
 by, ran a-ground alfo. The bearings on board the Stafford (while a-ground) 
 were the Third Point (being the eaiternmoft land in fight) ESE. the Fourth 
 Point SEbE. the weSternmoSt land of Sumatra, in fight, weSt ; the weSternmoSt 
 land of Banca Nb\V. Monopin Hill north, off the Sumatra Shore 3 1 miles. 
 Sending the boat to found, found the bank run quite to the Shore, and to the 
 Fourth Point. It is foft mud at the edge of this bank, which is hard Sand, 
 and fo Steep, that in running acrofs it, in 3 or 4 boats lengths, had from 7 to 3 
 fathoms. The York, in the morning, could not come to the 4-} She let go 
 over night. 
 
 The firft river's mouth beyond the Fourth Point, is not that of Palimbam, 
 but you meet with it foon afterward ; alio a little further, with a Second 
 brai.ch, which divides alfo into two branches, though this laft double branch 
 
 dilcmbogues
 
 Directions^ the Straits s/Banca. 519 
 
 difembogues itfelf by one mouth in the Straits. The Dutch have a fadtory 14 
 or 15 leagues up it : their principal trade here confifts in pepper, calin, and rattan, 
 or tutenaguc, and fmall cane. 
 
 Four leagues NEbN. off the Fourth Point, is a dangerous reef, formed by 
 feveral fummits of rocks (encompafled with fand) juft above water ; 20 fathoms 
 water about a (hip's length therefrom. 
 
 SWbS. about 5 or 6 miles from thefe rocks, is a bank of 10 fathoms : any 
 one, not apprifed thereof, by founding on it, in the night, may think himfelf 
 on the edge of the bank of Sumatra, and by (landing off may run upon thefe 
 rocks. 
 
 The tides run in and out of Palimbam River with great rapidity, especially 
 in the rainy feafons, which caufe it to overflow greatly ; then the water appears 
 muddy round about, feveral drifts float along upon the water, and fomctimes 
 even 3 or 4 trees, furrounded with buihes, refembling floating iflands, which 
 the violence of the torrent forces into the lea. In failing from this river, you 
 mufl: guard againft the force of the flood, which drives toward the banks, and 
 the ebb, which drives toward the Banca (hore : there the foundings are vevy 
 dangerous ; for, befides the different reefs you meet with, there is a coniiderable 
 bank of gravel, which proje&s 1 § league SW. off the weftern point of this 
 ifland, near which there is a rock, with only 9 or 10 feet water. 
 
 In failing from the third to the fourth point ; when Monopin Hill bears 
 NNW. you muft fleer NWbW. to range the banks off the river Palimbam ; but 
 whether by day or night, you mufl: not approach it under 8 fathoms. Continuing 
 this courfe, you difcover, to the NW. the Falfe Point of Batacarang, and foon 
 afterward the True one : thefe two points, and the low land which lies at the 
 foot of Monopin Hill, 6 leagues to the eafliward, terminate the Straits of Banca, 
 on the NW. fide. 
 
 The principal danger which is found in this channel, is the Rock Frederick- 
 Endrick (or Hendrick), on which a Dutch (hip was loft ; it is ("aid that on its 
 fhoaleft: part there are but 1 2 feet water : the (hip Atalanta ftruck on it in 1 729, 
 and was happy enough to get off without hurt. The rock lies WNW. (or, 
 according to fome, WfN.) of the highefl: part of Monopin Hill, and about 
 7 miles from the low land of this part of Banca. You may avoid it by keeping 
 rather nearer the Coaft of Sumatra, in 8 or 9 fathoms, (or from the firft: cad 6 » 
 fithoms fleer no further wefterly than SbW. and fo long as you keep under 
 10 fathoms there is no danger with that courfe) ; and you have nothing to 
 fear from the banks which encompafs the points of Batacarang ; but the increafe 
 
 of
 
 320 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 of that depth, about thefe points, is a fign of nearnefs to Fredrick-Endrick. 
 You muft be careful of this, otherwife you fuddenly fall from 1 6 to 5 and 3 
 fathoms. In coming out of the Straits, you difcover, to the northward of 
 Monopin, feveral little iflands, fome upon the north Coait of Banca, others 
 further off. 
 
 CCLXXVIII. Directions for Sailing from the Straits of Banca to 
 
 PuLO-TlMOAN. 
 
 Having doubled Fredrick-Endrick, you fleer NbE. to pafs between the 
 Seven Iflands and Pulo Taya ; the former lies about 14 leagues on this point of 
 the compafs from Monopin Point in latitude 1? fUs. They are of various 
 fizes, and high enough to be plainly feen 8 leagues diftance ; the fouthern- 
 moft appears very fmall, and a little feparate from the reft ; the northernmofl: 
 is the largeft. The coafting along thefe iflands is fafe on the weft iide ; but 
 on the oppotite fide, and between them, it is not known what dangers may be 
 met with. 
 
 Pulo Taya (25 miles NW. of the northernmofl: of the Seven Iflands) is High, 
 and may be eafily feen, in fine weather, 10 or 12 leagues. On the north 
 fide thereof are two great rocks. Moil: latitudes taken on the paiallel of this 
 ifland fix it in o? 48'S. 
 
 In failing from the Straits of Banca toward thefe iflands, the depth increafes 
 from fz to 12, 1 5, and 17 fathoms. In the night-time, or in cloudy weather, 
 you may perceive whether the currents fet to the weftward by the foundings 
 decreafin^, and having fand mixed with mud ; whereas on Banca lide they 
 increafe, and are mud only. 
 
 Beyond Pulo Taya there are iflands large, middling, and fmall ; and all in 
 general are exceeding high. The moft conlidcrable is that ofLingen, which 
 ihews itfelf above the reft by a mountain, whofe top terminates in two pointed 
 fpires, like two fteeples, near each other. On the eaft part of this ifland is 
 another mountain joined to the former by low land, which at a diftance looks 
 like an ifland ; this laft is not fo high, nor rugged at the top. To the eafhvard 
 of this lies a little ifland of a middling height, covered with trees, about 1 I 
 league diftance from Pulo Lin seen Point. 
 
 Some navigators fay, that between Pulo Taya and the fouth point of Pulo 
 Lin gen, lie feveral iflands, which are not marked upon the charts. There is 
 a dangerous bank, on which the fliip Ilchefler was a-ground, 1754; but by 
 backing all her tails inflantancoufly, (he providentially got off again. They 
 
 obferved
 
 DiREcnoNsyor Sailing from the Straits o/Banca. 321 
 
 obferved at noon, in latitude o? 2I-S. and fleered per log WbS. about 3 leagues, 
 and ftruck in a quarter lefs 3 fathoms mud ; at the fame time they faw tv. o 
 hummocks, bearing NNW. wefterly. The call before they ftruck was 24 
 
 fathoms. 
 
 To the northward of the eaft point of Pulo Lingen, and exaftly under the 
 Line, are feveral little low iflands, furrounded with rocks, called the Domi- 
 nies. 
 
 When you are about 5 leagues eaft of Pulo Taya, fteer NEbN. till hi lati- 
 tude o? 30'N. in order to go without the two banks hereabout. The eaftern- 
 moft lies NEbN. of the eaft point of Pulo Lingen. It is prudent to beware 
 of them. 
 
 The foundings in this track, between Pulo Taya and the Equinoctial Line, 
 are 18 or 20 fathoms, fine grey fand ; and beyond it, 24, 25, and 27 
 fathoms, the fame ground. 
 
 Having palled the banks above-mentioned, you muft fteer NbW. to get light 
 of Pulo Auore, called alfo Pulo Aor, or Pulo Auro. 
 
 You generally experience, in this track, fome helps to the northward and 
 weftward, and confequently you make Pulo Auore fooner than you expected. 
 Some navigators attribute thefe events to the currents, which run into the 
 Straits of Malacca ; however generally this opinion may be received, it doth 
 not appear probable. In fact, as almoft all mips fix the fame difference, it 
 fhould leem that the currents continually fet into thefe ftraits ; but the expe- 
 rience of both ebb and flood proves the contrary. If you mould happen to be 
 fet to the eaftward, toward the Anambas, you may be apprifed thereof by 
 your foundings, which will be 45 and 50 fathoms mud ; whereas in the fair 
 way to Pulo Auore, you have from 28 to ^S fathoms, fine grey fand, fome- 
 times a little coarfer, mixed with fmall black ftones, and very little mud. 
 
 From Pulo Auore you fail toward Pulo Tinaoan, and from thence take 
 your departure for Pulo Condore. 
 
 Some charts lay down the Iflands of the Holy Ghoft ; but few Journals or 
 Memoirs make mention of them. Some of thefe iflands have, ot late jears, 
 been feen by fome of our ihips, particularly the Ofterly, Capt. Frederick 
 Vincent, in 17^8, and the Albion, Capt. William Larkin's, 1762. Woody 
 Ifland, a fmall ifland lb nam:d on account of its being covered with trees, lies 
 in latitude \°. 40'N. and 46'E. from Pulo Taya. Saddle Ifland, making in two 
 hillocks, which bear about E. and W. of one another, was feen by both fhips ; 
 and lies in about 2? 20'M. and about 23 / E. There is a remarkable white rock, 
 
 Z z bearing
 
 t 22 A New Directory jor the East-Indies. 
 
 bearing about SbW. 5 leagues from Saddle Ifland, on the weft fide whereof the 
 Ofterly pafled within a mile of it, and had 28 fathoms, fine grey find. The 
 Albion went between them, rather nearer Saddle Ifland, and had 38 fathoms. 
 Mr. Powell, chief mate of the Ofterly, mentions 5 fmall iflands, or rocks, 
 to the north-eaftwaid of Saddle Ifland 3 or 4 leagues ; but Capt. Vincent takes 
 no notice of them ; nor Capt. Larkins, who pafled fo near Saddle Iliand that 
 he muft have feen them, had they exifted. The fouthernmoft of the Anambas 
 were feen at the fame time, and Pulo Domar foon after. 
 
 CCLXXIX. Direct ions jor Sailing from Pulo Condore toward China, 
 
 to the Etijlzvnrd of the Paracels. 
 
 This paffage deferves to be preferred by navigators to that between the Coaft 
 of Cochinchina and the Paracels ; for the fqualls and calms which happen 
 frequently in the latter, the number of dangers with which this coaft is fur- 
 rounded, and the little fuccour which the ports thereof afford, render the 
 voyage longer, more painful and dangerous, and without any one advantage : 
 on the contrary, in the eaftern paffage, the monfoons are conftant and frefh, 
 the paffage is fhorter, and the dangers (which are not many) may be eafily 
 avoided : therefore modern navigators chufe this, and have almoft wholly relin- 
 quifhed the other. 
 
 After you have fight of Pulo Condore, continue your courfe to pafs to the 
 fouthward, or rather eaftwardly thereof, as fhips ufually do, although on occa- 
 sion they may pafs fafciy to the weftward ; and after you are paft it, fhape 
 your courfe for Pulo Sapata, or the Shoe Ifland, bearing NEbE~E. 25 leagues. 
 (Capt. Vincent thinks it fhould be rather <;$ leagues, being 50 by the charts; 
 Mr. Herbert, that it fhould have been 52 leagues; Mr. Nichelfon makes its 
 bearing and diftance ENE^N. 48 leagues.) NNW. 4 leagues from this, is 
 another little round ifland, called the Great Catwick ; and between them both 
 a rock above water, called the Little Catwick, which refcmbles a little pyramid. 
 There is faid to be a fmall rock even with the water's edge, EbN. 15 leagues 
 from Pulo Condore, difcovered by Captain Boone ; it is prudent to keep a good 
 look-out. 
 
 Two miles to the fouth-eaftward of Pulo Sapata it is faid there is a fhoal. 
 
 M. le Chevalier ds la Boimere, commander of the fhip Neptune, in 1733, 
 
 ■ ! lis journal that he faw it break, about half a league from him, 
 
 and that it teemed to break for. about a cable's length. That the fhip Mars, 
 
 in 1 730, being becalmed^ about a league to" the fouth-eaftward 01 Pulo Sapata, 
 
 perceived
 
 DiREcTioNsyor Sailing from Pulo Condore. 323 
 
 perceived the rocks under the (hip's bottom, in 20 fathoms; He was then very- 
 likely on the extremity of the reef. Such well-grounded authorities for the 
 certainty of this danger, are fufficicnt to induce navigators to beware of it, and 
 not approach Pulo Sapata nearer than 2 leagues ; betides, it is enough to fee it, 
 without coming near it. 
 
 N. B. Weft 4 leagues from the Catwicks is a rock lately difcovered. 
 
 The Gottenberg, a Swedifh (hip, coming from Batavia, and bound for 
 China, in July, 1744, made Pulo Sapata, which at 8 A. M. bore NVVjW. 
 by compais, diftance by eftimation 4 or 5 Englifh miles. It being only light 
 airs and calm, hoifted out the pinnace, and rowed toward the middle of the 
 ifland, and heaving the lead, had 120, 70, 60, 30, 20, 14, 10, 7 and 3 
 fathoms, grey fand and red coral, with Hones ; hove the lead again, and had 
 immediately 13 to 14 feet, the middle of the ifland then bearing very near 
 NWbW. diftance 3 or 4 miles ; rowed away again to the land, and found 
 from 14 feet to 6 fathoms, and lb deepened away to 12 fathoms : then they 
 had a pretty breeze foutherly, and the fignal was made for the pinnace to 
 come on board ; fo that they had no time to heave the lead any more, other- 
 wife w r ould have taken the crofs bearings of Pulo Sapata, and the two fmall 
 iflands. 
 
 This may poffibly be the fame fhoal here mentioned ; or, as the foundings- 
 are fo irregular, it is not improbable but that there may alfo be another nearer 
 the ifland. For thefe, the caution of coming no nearer Pulo Sapata than 2 
 leagues may be fufbeient. The fhoal, or fhoals, mentioned by Capt. Hill, 
 Mifenor and Webb, bearing ESE. from Pulo Sapata : the former fets them at 
 about 7 miles diftance ; but Capt. Webb thinks they lie better than 3 leagues 
 off* the ifland bearing WNW. about 2 miles, when they fiw the fhoal only 
 from the maft-head, according to the following extract from his journal : 
 September r, 1 75 1 , at half an hour paft 1 1 A. M. Pulo Sapata bore N. diftance 
 about 1 \ mile ; at noon Pulo Sapata bore WNW. 2 miles ; the Small and Great 
 Catwick in one, NWbW. There feems to be a reef running from the Little 
 Catwick to Pulo Sapata, and a great rippling from the faid Catwick toward the 
 NEbE. about 6 miles. We alfo Jaw the breakers from the maft-head, formerly 
 feen in the Compton, Capt. Mifenor ; they bear about ESE. more than 3 leagues 
 from Pulo Sapata. 
 
 As there is no cccafion, it doth not feem prudent to go nearer Pulo Sapata 
 
 Z z 2 t..au
 
 324 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 than 4 leagues, not even in clear weather. This fhoal is really very dangerous. 
 Let this ferve as a general caution to all navigators, how they too confidently 
 aflert the non-exiilence of fhoals, becaufe they perhaps have pafled near the 
 fpot where they are faid to lie. None can have more reafon for fuch an affer- 
 tion than the above three mips ; yet the Swede's account is fo particular, 
 and in a great meafure confirmed by that of the Mars, that its exifcence cannot 
 reafonably be difputed. This is confirmed by Capt. Haggis, who faw them 
 in the Prince Henry, in 1758, and again next voyage, in 1761, and is confident 
 its diftance is not above 5 miles from Pulo Sapata, and is in one with Sapata 
 bearing SEbE^E. 
 
 Having pafled thefe iflands, about 2, or rather 4 leagues to the eafhvard, 
 the courfe is NE7N. to get foundings on the En glim Bank, or Macclesfield 
 Shoal, fituate between the parallel of latitude 15? 4o'N. and i6?N. thereby 
 you leave to the {larboard the Rock of Andrade, the Vigia of 11?, and a 
 rocky bank, which lies in latitude 12? 24'N. and 42 leagues NE^E. from the 
 latter. 
 
 In September, 1750, the York, Capt. Ward, cf-^ed on this bank, the 
 Macclesfield Shoal, in 10 fathoms, rocks and clay ; fent his yaul to found all 
 round about, and found no lei's than 10 fathoms. When he run off to the 
 northward, had 11, 12, 15, 19, and 25 fathoms, then no ground with 50 
 fathoms of line, and was at that time in latitude, by account, 16? $'N. He 
 made 4? i meridian diftance between Pulo Sapata and this bank, where he °f-}ed ; 
 but he imagines he had a flrong eaflerly current ; he afterward made 14' eafting 
 to the eallernmoft of the Lehmo Iflands. In the Prince Henry, 1758, about 
 the fame latitude, and 4? i6'E. longitude from Sapata, they had 47 fathoms 
 coral rock. Then {leered NbW. and foon after had 15, 14, 12*, n, 13 fathoms, 
 all coral rock, as far as they could heave the lead : then no ground, 17, 30, 
 45, 50 fathoms, having run in this time about 4 miles. 
 
 The Vigia in latitude 1 i?N. is a fandy ifland, near the furface of the water, 
 which has a reef at each end, . A navigator, returned from Manilla, law it, as 
 well as the rocky bank above-mentioned, upon which he founded, and had 9 
 fathoms. The Montague and Cambridge made it on a NEbE. courfe from. 
 Pulo Sapata, in 11? c'N. ■ •> -rvation. 
 
 N'EfN. ixpai Pulo Sapata, 111 latitude 12? 45'N. is a bank of zo fathoms. 
 Several fhips going to China, have a&ually feen the colour of the water changed 
 
 hereabout.
 
 Directions for Sailing Jrom Pulo Condore. 325 
 
 hereabout. Though this bank is not dangerous, to avoid it, in failing from 
 Pulo Sapata, fleer NE. till you are in the fame latitude, and then NEbN. for the 
 Englifh Bank, or Macclesfield Shoal. 
 
 This is that rocky bank under water, difcovcred in 1701, by the Macclesfield. 
 Its extent from north to fouth, as above-mentioned, is better known than that 
 from eaft to weft. On it are various depths; thole of 50, 40, 35, and 20 
 fathoms, are the mod common ; but on the NE. part it is much fhoalcr ; 
 there feveral (hips have found 9 fathoms, and immediately after, failing to the 
 eaft or weft, the depth exceeded 60 fathoms, by which you may judge the 
 ftcepnefs of its verge. 
 
 The Spectacles, or St. Anthony's Girdle, are feveral rocky pyramids, between 
 which it is exceeding dangerous to pafs ; fome rife to the furface of the water, 
 and many others have 66 or 80 fvthoms quite clofe on board of them. 
 
 It is very ufeful to get foundings on the Englifh Bank, or Macclesfield ohoal, 
 to correal the reckoning, that from thence you may, with more certainty, ihape 
 your courle toward that part of the coaft of China as you intend* 
 
 The necefllty of falling to windward of the conllgned port, obliges {hips, in 
 this monfoon, to make the land to the weftward ; therefore thole who are bound 
 to Macao, muft get fight of the Ifland Sanciam (or St. John), or Pulo Outchou 
 (or Pulo Baby) who'e fouth point is in latitude 21? 30'N. Therefore, from 
 the Englifh Lank, freer NNW^W. by this means you may be fure of feeing 
 them, or even the Mandarin's Cap, which is ftill more wefterly. 
 
 If the currents fet you to the eaftvvard, within light of the Ladroon and Lema 
 or Leehmo Iflands, you may know them from thofe on the weft fide, by means 
 of their latitude ; becaule the fouth point of the Great Ladroon is 23' more 
 northerly than that of the Ifland Sanciam. A difference of this kind ought not 
 to efcape an obferver. Befides thi c , the fize of the weftern iflands (each of 
 which, in particular, appears much longer than thole to the eaftward) and their 
 different bearings, are more certain figns than the quality of the foundings. 
 
 As it is very material to be certain whether you are to the eaftward or weft- 
 ward of the Grand Ladroon, thefe other rules and marks for this purpofe are 
 to be ofoferved. When you are in latitude 19? 30'N. found, and if you have 
 above 5$ fathoms, haul to the weftward (or above 50 fathoms in latitude zo?N.) 
 fo as not to have above 30 fathoms in latitude 2i?N. keep in that depth, and 
 it will bring you in fight of the Grand Ladroon. If you have more than 30 
 fathoms in latitude 2i?N. you may reckon yourfelf 3 leagues to the eaftward 
 
 for
 
 326 New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 for every 2 fathoms greater depth. In latitude 2i?N. and 30 leagues to the 
 eaftward of the Grand Ladroon, are 50 fathoms, coarfe fand and black fpecks. 
 
 In fight of land, to the weftward of the Giand Ladroon, you generally have 
 muddy ground. The Grand Ladroon is very high, and in fair weather may 
 be feen, from the maft-head, 14 leagues, or in latitude 21? 20 N. and no other 
 land in fight ; if it bears north, you have then about 35 fathoms. If you have 
 no foundings till you get into latitude 20? 4o'N. and then have from 45 to 50 
 fathoms, fine grey fand and ouze, the Grand Ladroon will certainly bear 
 between the N. and NbW. Others fay, South from the Grand Ladroon, in 40 
 or 45 fathoms, you will have black coarfe fand, and fometimes larger ftones, 
 and nearer it white coarfe fand and fhells. But if you have no foundings, 
 till you get to the northward of latitude 20? 40', you will find more than 
 50 fathoms, by which you may depend on being to the eaftward of the Grand 
 Ladroon. 
 
 In relation to foundings, it may be faid with certainty, that being to the 
 weftward of the Grand Ladroon, in latitude 20? 20'N. or latitude 20? ^o'N. 
 your firft foundings will be from 90 to 70 fathoms, dark fand and ouze ; then 
 by {landing to the noithward you will have 50, 40, 30, and 20 fathoms, fand, 
 coarle fand and fhells, fand and ftones, and fine grey fand. As foon as you get 
 into 18 fathoms, you will have foft mud, which continues to the Bogue Tigris 
 (the foil, and not the water). The reafon for being fo particular, is becaufe 
 the rule of foft ground to the weftward, and hard ground to the eaftward (if 
 followed) may ealily lead one aftray. 
 
 Another guide is the depth of water ; the iflands to the eaftward being much 
 fteeper than thofe to the weftward. Again, all the iflands to the eaftward are 
 high and uneven, having 16 or 17 fathoms water among them; whereas thofe 
 to the weftward are moderately even, very high, large and long, and make more 
 like a coaft than iflands, and have but 7 or 8 fathoms. To be certain, this is 
 faid to bean infallible rule. When in latitude 21? 30'N. fraud about 7 leagues 
 to the northward ; at which diftance, if you fhoal your w ater but 1 or 2 fathoms, 
 you are then undoubtedly to the eaftward; but if 7 or 8 fathoms, you are 10 
 the weftward. 
 
 When or wherefoever you fall in with them, pufli in boldly for them ; 
 and if you do not then know where you are, come to an «j-^ (for there is always. 
 1 'l-^ng ground) and get a pilot; for if you are fearful, and lie off, the 
 currents will drive you about, and other ill conic rpiences may follow. 
 
 When
 
 DiRECTioNsyisr Sailing from Pulo Condore. 327 
 
 Wheu therefore you are convinced, by one of the methods above mentioned, 
 that you have fallen to the eaftward of the great channel of Macao, coaft theie 
 iflands to the l'outhward, alio the Grand Ladroon, which being doubled, 
 you fleer NW. to approach the Ifland Mirou, which has a white patch on 
 the land in fhape of a mizen ; this makes it cafdy known. 
 
 According to feveral reports, the different channels which are formed by 
 the Ladroon and Lema Iflands, are deeper, and not ib full of- dangers as the 
 paflages between the weftern iflands ; yet it is not prudent to venture therein, 
 without a coafting pilot, which you will have come off to you on firing of 
 guns. For want of this, the fafeft way will be to fail to the l'outhward of 
 them, even though the wind is contrary, li nee you may fetch the Road of 
 Macao, by favour of the tides which ebb and flow. 
 
 Whether you fall to the eaftward or weftward of thefe iflands, the foundings 
 will always (hew their nearnefs, and you generally meet with them 16 or iS 
 leagues from land. v 
 
 If by any uuforefeen accident your voyage is prolonged, or by a too late 
 departure you are hindered from making Pulo Condore till the end of the 
 wefterly monfo >n, the courfe I have above defcribed will not be fafe. This 
 happened, in 1 740, to the fhip Jafon, commanded by M. Dordelin, who 
 having fallen to the leeward of the Straits of Sunda, and being in light of 
 Triefte Ifland, 3S leagues to the north-weftward of Engano, to avoid lofing 
 time to no purpofe in beating to the windward, he failed along the iflands off 
 the Coaft of Sumatra, and went into the eaftern feas, through the Straits of 
 Malacca. Delayed confiderably by calms and contrary winds, he did not make 
 Pulo Condore till the 12th of September, when, to render his paflage the 
 more certain, he refolved to follow the courfe above defcribed. The 3d of 
 October he got fight of the Ifland Luconia, and arrived on the Coaft of 
 China, about Groaning Ray, the 9th of the fame month ; and from thence to 
 Lintin, or Linting, by lading between the Iflands of Lema. Thus this voyage 
 was rendeaed fucceisful by the prudence and ability of the navigator. 
 
 The changeable winds and frequent calms, which ufually precede the 
 changes of the feafons, make it neceffary to take the following precautions. From 
 within fight of Pulo Condore, endeavour to make Pulo Sapata, as aforefaid, 
 then fteer NE. as far as latitude l^°N. to avoid the rocks fpoken of in the 
 fane article. From this fituation fteer NEbE. to get light of the north part 
 of the Ifl.ind Luconia. 
 
 * Upon
 
 328 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Upon approaching this ifland you fhould keep a good look-out for the dan- 
 gerous banks of rocks, which lie along the weft coaft, led: by an error in 
 your account of longitude you fall in with them, when you reckon yourfelf at 
 a diftance from them. You may perceive the breakers in the day-time ; but in 
 cloudy weather, or in the night, you run in danger of being loft : you may 
 prevent this accident, by getting to the northward in time, at leaft into lati- 
 tude ij?N'. m order to get beyond their latitude, and then fail toward the 
 coaft as far as within fight of Cape Bajadore. 
 
 You muft not expect to find foundings here, as in moft other places, whereby 
 to know the nearnefs of the coaft: its fteepnefs prevents your getting foundings, 
 even at a fmall diftance from the more ; but the land is high, and may eafily 
 be feen 12 leagues at fea. 
 
 From within fight of Cape Bajadore you fhape your courfe toward the coaft 
 of China ; and herein you muft be very careful to avoid the dangerous bank of 
 Plata, or the Praters on which many fhips have been loft. 
 
 This bank is fituate 78 leagues ENE. of Cape Bajadore, extending 8 leagues 
 from north to fbuth, between latitude- aof^'N. and latitude 20? i/N. and 
 10 or 11 leagues from eaft to weft. This fpace is filled with rocks above and 
 under water. On the N\V. fide lies a little ifland, in form of a crefcent, 
 near which you may °j-^ in S fathoms, white fand mixed with rocks. To 
 the north-eaftward is a bank of fand near the water's edge ; and in different 
 places are to be ieen °K>s, left by (hips that have been there. 
 
 Captain Dennis faw the Praters from NW. to ENE. and a fmall ifland 
 within the breakers NNYV. 3 leagues he founded, but no ground with 70 
 fathoms. They made the latitude of the Praters 20? 5'N. and meridian diftance 
 5? 55T. from Pulo Sapata. Pie afterward made 1? 46'W. to the Lema Iflands, 
 which he made in latitude 21? 58'N. and meridian diftance 4? o'F. from Pulo 
 Sapata. 
 
 The bank of Plata is fo much the more dangerous, as you do not perceive 
 the ifland in coming from the iouthward, nor from die eaftward ; you only 
 diflinguifh the rocks 2 or 3 leagues off, fo that to avoid them, you muft in 
 failing from Cape Bajadore) fleer N'VVbN. till in latitude 21? 30'N. then fteer 
 WNW. to make the Coaft of China, which you may range till within light 
 of the White Rock, fituate in latitude 22? G'N. and 5 leagues from the Con- 
 tinent. 
 
 This rock is eafily known by its whitenefs ; it is fafc, and fleep to on all 
 fiuco. You may pais between that and the Coaft of China ; the leaft depth is 
 
 1 <; fathoms.
 
 Directions^ Sailing from Pulo Condore. 3*9 
 
 15 fathoms. From thence, fleering WbS. you prefently fee (on the fame point) 
 the Iflands of Lema, between which there is a very fine channel to go to 
 Macao ; thofe who have failed through it fay that the dangers are vifible, and t : 
 you do not find lefs than 8 fathoms, mud. To the northward there is a i 
 called the Peak of Lantao. Thole who do not chufe this, may coaft the iflands 
 on the fouth fide, as far as the Great Ladroon, and conform to the inftruc- 
 tions to reach Macao. 
 
 CCJ>XXX. Caption D'Auvergne's Account of the Ship Scarborough 
 Jinking .on the South Maroona, off the Coast o/~Luconia, September. 
 12, 1748. 
 
 Moderate gales and fmooth water, the winds from N. to NNW. At fun- 
 fet I fent an officer to the mart-head to look out, the fhip being near the 
 latitude of a fhoal which in fome charts is laid down in 15? io'N. and in 
 others 10' more northerly : the officer law nothing. 
 
 As none of the company's fhips have been on the Coaft of Luconia, except 
 lately the Defence, Capt. Coates, and the Tigris, Capt. Petre ; and as the 
 draughts of the China Seas are very erroneous (varying greatly in their meri- 
 dian diitance between Pulo Sapata and the Coaft of Luconia, and confequently 
 in that of the Maroons) by -comparing thefe with the meridian difcance 
 Capt. Petre made to the faid coaft (viz. 10? 15'E.) I judged the Scarborough 
 at noon was at leaft 30 leagues to the weftward of the fouthernmoft of the faid 
 fhoals. 
 
 At 8 P. M. I fent a man to the bowfprit end, and another to the foreyard, 
 to look out ; notwithstanding which the fhip unfortunately ftruck at half an 
 hour paft 9. I directly caufed all the fails to be laid aback ; and though 
 the fhip went on eafily, foe would not back off. The wind, when the f] 
 ftruck, was at NiNW. By founding round the fhip, I found (lie- hung only 
 forward, having 38 fa horns a-ftern, and 17 fathoms a-rnid-fhip. I therefore 
 ordered all the guns to be brought aft, and 40 odd huts of water fiarteel in 
 the fore-hold, and all that could be moved aft, to be brought thither: all 
 this proved infufficient. I then ordered all the boats out to found ; and the 
 ftream-4-> was fdon after carried to the weftward, in the only place where an 
 4-} could be laid : it was hove on, but to no purpofe ; for the 4-} was on the 
 beam, and the fhip's fore foot (I fuppofe) lav between two rocks. 
 
 A fquall from the weftward caft the fhip's (larboard bilge on the rocks, till 
 which time [he did not beat, but lay without any motion, as die lea (when 
 
 A a a fhe
 
 O 1 
 
 o A New Directory for the East-Ikdies. 
 
 fhe ftruck) was very fmooth ; but the fquall being right on the fhoal, made a 
 little fwell ; however, it did not la ft long. Finding the fhip thumped ibmewhat 
 hard on the ftarboard bilge, it was judged necefiary to lighten her ; on which I 
 ordered all her guns to be thrown over-board. 
 
 While the fhip was on the fhoal, the water was perceived to fall from the 
 recks, and before fhe got off, to rife again ; which makes me believe the fhip 
 ftrtick either at high water or about half ebb. It was new-moon this day. 
 
 The fhip ftill remaining faft, the kedge-°}-} was therefore carried out a-ftern, 
 though I expected but little good from it, there being fuch deep water, that the 
 cable was almoft right up and down : however, when the fhip was hove 
 thereon, fhe began to come off; but this I attribute more to the rifing of the 
 water than the heaving ; for the fhip's fore foot being between two rocks, the 
 ftream-cf-^ was of no fervice, and the kedge-4-> was a-weigh before the fhip 
 was quite off. 
 
 At half an hour paft 6 A. M. the fhip's head payed round off; fo that 
 rather than run the rifque of bringing her up, and cafting the wrong way, 
 if I frayed to have the ftream-oj-^ hove up, I ordered the cable to be cut at 
 the bits ; and, under the bluffing of God, the fhip got off and made no water. 
 
 I made 6? 35'E. meridian diiiance from Pulo Sapata, when the fhip ftruck in 
 latitude 15? 6'N. (Some other remarks make this fhoal in 15? jo'N. and 9? 
 io'E. from Palo Sapata. Capt. Webb, in September 1 75 1 , made but 6? 52'E. 
 meridian diflance from Pulo Sapata to the fight of Luconia, about 1 5 leagues 
 diftance, in latitude about 1 7?N. They experienced a current to the northward, 
 which doubtlefs fet ftrong to the eaftward withall. They were 16 days on 
 their paiTage from one to the other.) 
 
 At day-light the rocks appeared frightful, though it pleafed God the fhip was 
 on the fea fide of the fhoal, which is at leaft 2 leagues over, and 8 long. On 
 the eaft fide of the fhoal, the rocks are almoft as high as thofe of Scilly, and a 
 terrible fea breaks over them. On the weft fide they are no bigger than a boat. 
 They feemed to lie about NNW. and SSE. I think the Scarborough was near 
 the north end of them, feeing the water blew to the northward of them, and 
 rocks were feen SEbS. 3 leagues from the fhip. 
 
 That my misfortune may be a warning to others, who have the honour to 
 
 navigate the Honourable Company's fhips in thefe leas, and intend to go on 
 
 oft of Luconia, at the latter end of the SW. monfoon, in order to lave 
 
 their paiiage to Canton, which is the fureft way ; I adviie them not to come to 
 
 tne northward of latitude 14? 14'N. before they are lure of being within this 
 
 fhoal :
 
 Directions for Sailing through the Straits o/"Sunda. 331 
 
 fhoal ; but, if they do not intend to go on the Coaft: of Luconia, then I advifc 
 them not to make more than 5? 3o'E. meridian diftance from Pulo Sapata. 
 
 This fhoal goes under different names, being called by the Portuguefe Cabeca 
 . or Calebaflbs dos Negros, by the Spaniards Mariingola, and by the Dutch Zcc- 
 flang, or the Sea-ferpent, it having that fhape in their charts ; but I believe it 
 is be ft known to the Englifh by the name of the South Maroona ; I have 
 therefore called it fo. On this fhoal are 3 fmall rocks above water, refembling, 
 at a lmall diftance, Negroes heads. The Scarborough went clofe to one of 
 them, and near the three. 
 
 The North Maroona, or Double-headed- Shot, called by the Spaniards Baxa 
 Boliana, by moft accounts lies nearly north from the other, or however not 
 above 5 leagues more wefterly. Thefe fhoals are reckoned to lie about 25 league^ 
 from the Coaft of Luconia. 
 
 In the latitude of 14? if'N. and about 12 leagues SSE. from the South 
 Maroona, lies another fhoal, univerfally called Baxos Mirabilis. Thefe three 
 fhoals make all the channels to the Coaft of Luconia very narrow, and, as they 
 are out of fight of the coaft, very dangerous. 
 
 CCLXXXI. Directions for Sailing through the Straits cf Sunda, tt 
 Bantam or Batavia, in the Western Monsoon. 
 
 Whether you come from the Indies, or any other part t'o the weftward, 
 endeavour to make Engano, or the Deceitful Ifland ; then with the wefterly 
 winds fail toward the fouth point of Sumatra, from whence this ifland is 35 
 leagues diftant. This extremity terminates in a low point, covered with trees, 
 very near which lies the little Ifland Fortune, low and woody, like the former. 
 Captain Hall, of the Worcefter, makes this ifland in latitude 50? 58 'S. On 
 Sumatra you may fee feveral high mountains. 
 
 Afterward you fleer fo as to 2:0 to the fouthward of Cracata Ifland, and from 
 thence you pafs between Middle Ifland and the Little Cap, conforming to wli.it 
 is already faid, in the beginning of the preceding directions. 
 
 If there is any danger in the paflage between Pulo Cracata and Sebefti, (or 
 Tamarin Ifle) it is apparent. The winds and currents being favourable in this 
 monlbon, it will be convenient to pafs them,- as well as between Middle Ifland 
 and thofe to the fouth-eaftward of Hog Point, efpecially as this courle is itraiter 
 than that juft mentioned. 
 
 A a a 2 When
 
 332 A Nezv Directory /or the East-Indies. 
 
 When you are it league to the northward of St. Nicholas Point, if you 
 would go to Bantam, you muft approach Pulo Panjang, a long and flatifland, 
 which you may pafs on either fide ; only obferve its ibuth point is dangerous. 
 The weft channel has 6 or 7 fathoms water, and the eaft channel, which is 
 wider, 8 or 9. Having palled this ifland, you fee, upon Java, a round hill, 
 which, when it bears SSW. the town of Bantam is in one with it. You muft 
 keep on till oppofite Golgotha Ifland, off which is the road : there you °)-} j 
 5 or 6 fathoms, mud. 
 
 If you go to Batavia, when you are a league to the northward of St. Nicholas 
 Point, you muft fteer EbS. to go between the coafl: of Java and the Iflands of 
 Baby and Tidang, (or Wapen Ifle) lying on the north lide, and continue this 
 courfe till within fight of the Great Cambuis (or Cambuyre) bearing thus 15. 
 or 16 leagues from St. Nicholas Point. You may come within a mile of the 
 north fide of it, and ftiil nearer to the Little Cambuis (three quartets of a 
 league EbS. of the Great one) whereby you will avoid feveral fhoals which 
 lie to the northward. For the particulars fee the charts, as fome of them have 
 beacons on them, and the others break, by which they may be ieen before 
 you come to them. That on which the Lyell was a-ground in 1734, bears 
 WbN-;N. 7 miles from the weft end of Great Cambuis, and NNW. 4 miles 
 from Maiieater-'s Ifland. 
 
 Two leagues SEbE. of the Little Cambuis is the Ifland Midleburg, near 
 which is that of ^mfterdam, which you alfo pafs to the northward. The 
 th in this track is 1 3 or 14 fathoms. Having palled thefe two, to enter the 
 Road of Batavia, through the great paflage, ftand to the eaftward, to come 
 within three quarters of a league to the Ifland Edam, from whence you 
 ftand to the fouthward, leaving Horn Ifland to the (larboard, and that of 
 Enchufen to the larboard. This track will lead you oppofite Batavia, where 
 you may ^H> in what depth you think proper. The road is always full 
 of fhips, of all the Indian nations, who come hither to trade. This town is 
 the chief of the Dutch fettlements in the Indies ; and here the general and 
 head conful refide. It lies in latitude 6? I2'S. and 107? o'E. longitude from 
 London. 
 
 CCLXXXII.
 
 [ 333 3 
 
 CCLXXXII. Directions for Sailing from Batavia to the Straits of 
 
 Banc a. 
 
 Going from Batavia to the Straits of Banca, you mult freer NNW. for the 
 South Watcher, 10 or 1 1 leagues from Batavia Road. You may pafs it either 
 to the eafl or weft, three quarters of a league. If you go to the eaftward, 
 you muit approach it before it bears NW. in order to avoid a little bank, 
 called (by the Dutch) Nafomver's Drooght, about 2 leagues to the fouth- 
 eaftw ard. 
 
 When the South Watcher bears SE. if you do not chufe to fail along the 
 Thoufand Iflands, you may (land to the northward, and NbE. to go wide of 
 them, and pafs between the bank or fandy ifland, called Brouvver's Drooght, 
 and that of Prince's Drooght : the fait lies about 7 leagues NE. of the South 
 Watcher, in latitude 5? 24N. the other 8 leagues NWbWtW. of Brouwer's 
 Drooght, in latitude 5? 12'N. Being in latitude 5?N. fleer a NNW. courfe, as 
 far as latitude 4°N. to get into 1 2 fathoms, eaftward of the bank off Great 
 Tree Hiand ; and cate muft be taken to found from time to time, to prevent 
 failing to the weftward of your reckoning. On the contrary, if the foundings 
 fhew by a great depth that you are to the eaftward, you muft then fteer more 
 wefterly than the courfe prefcribed, in order to gain 1 2 fathoms. After this, 
 follow the Directions for palling the Straits of Banca. 
 
 CCLXXXIII. Directions for Sailing from Pulo Sat at a toward Canton 
 in China, in the South-West Monsoon, and back again in the Nortii- 
 Eas r Monsoon. 
 
 From Pulo Sapata fleer NE. for 24 hours ; then NEbN. and NNE. fo as 
 to make about 3?,: or 4? eafling, by the time you are in latitude 1 6?N. or iy?N. 
 then fleering about N. will lead you fair with the Grand Ladroon. Ships 
 generally make 3? 50' or 4? eafling from Pulo Sapata to the Grand Ladroon. 
 
 The Grand Ladroon is a very remarkable ifland in latitude 21? 55'N. the 
 upper part greatly refembling the dome of St. Paul's at mo ft bearings ; but, 
 when it bears N. NbW. or NbE. the fmaller ones, that feero to join it on each 
 fide, are like two wings, but of the fame figure. 
 
 As you approach the Grand Ladroon, you will have deeper water 6 leagues 
 to the eaftward, then 12 leagues to the weftward. The foundings to the 
 eaftward are mud ; to the weft ward, fand ; and in the ftream of it, land now 
 
 and
 
 234 -d New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 and then mixed with mud. In latitude 2if io'N. and longitude, made from 
 Pulo Sapita, 3?57E. you have foundings 40 fathoms, loft ouze, and may 
 fee the Grand Ladroon. In 27 fathoms, foft ouze, you will fee the Afles Ears 
 bearing N^E. and the Grand Laxlroon, NNW. 8 or 9 leagues. The Grand 
 Ladroon bearing E. diftance 2 or 3 miles, you will have 19 fathoms. Here 
 you get a pilot. 
 
 The ifland called the Afles Ears lies to the eafhvard of the Grand Ladroon, and 
 is not very difiimilar ; therefore, any land with fuch an appearance may be 
 depended on, as there is nothing like it to the wefhvard. 
 
 On the approach of a gale of wind, if I could not gain Cabretta Bay before 
 night, and was the length of the Viados, or any iflands weft of Colong, I 
 would 4-} within them ; and if not, I would run for them ; for there is no 
 danger but what is viiible. It can be attended with but little (if any) lofs of 
 time ; and may be the fafety of the marts, paffage, and perhaps the fhip : the 
 want of knowing this circumftance has proved of very dangerous confequencc 
 to many. 
 
 There is but little variation all over the China Seas : in no place more than 
 a degree, and in moft, only from 45 to 55'W. Nor are there any confiderable 
 currents in thefe feas ; perhaps they may give 6, 8, 10, or 12 miles to the 
 northward or fouthward of the reckoning in 24 hours ; but this difference you 
 will find in any other feas. 
 
 From the Grand Ladroon fleer fuch a courfe, as to give a good birth to the 
 Pratas and Paracels. The Macclesfield Shoal lies between latitude 15? 14'N. 
 and latitude 15? 35'N T . meridian diftance from the Grand Ladroon, 35' or 
 40'W. There are foundings upon it from 5 to 10 fathoms, which is the 
 leaft water on it ; the fiouthernmoft part of this flioal is deep to. Steer to 
 the fouthward, and endeavour to make Pulo Sapata, whole latitude is 9? 58^. 
 and longitude, from the Grand Ladroon, about 4?\V. If the weather is clear, 
 you may fee it at 9 or 10 leagues diftance ; and, if it fhould be hazy, lo that 
 you cannot fee it, proceed according to the inftruclions above given. 
 
 CCLXXXIV. Prognostics, of a Tuffoon on the Coast o/'China. By 
 Antonio Pascal de Rosa a Portuguefe Pilot of Macao. 
 
 In the China Seas, on the 1 8th or 1 9th day of the moon's age, if the fun 
 fets angry, making the horizon in that quarter of a deep red, and tinging the 
 clouds with the lame colour, a ftorm certainly follows ; increafing lpeedily 
 
 from
 
 Prognostic of a Tuffoon on the Coast of China. 235 
 
 from a fmall air at NE. (fiom which quarter it is generally found to blow the 
 harden 1 ) to a prodigious hard gale, about midnight vee;ing to the eaft and fouth 
 round to the wefhvard : when' the wind veers ro the SW. the violence is 
 abated : but, when thefe appearances are attended with thunder and lightning, 
 nothing is to be feared but hidden fqualls of fihort continuance. 
 
 I have been an eye witnel's offhips overletting in thefe leas, by officers 
 defpifing the prognoflic, and neglecting to take in the fails in time. I would 
 therefore adviie keeping only the fore-fail abroad, in order to run before it ; 
 for the fea rifes very confufedly, fo that lying to is often fatal. 
 
 I do not affirm that the 18th and 19th day of the moon's age are the only 
 periods when a Tuffoon is to be feared. Thunder and lightning are the 
 reverfe, on this coaff, of what they are on others. 
 
 CCLXXXV. Directions for Sailing /o Malacca, from the Wef ward, 
 
 in the Westerly Monsoons. 
 
 If you are bound to Malac or Malacca, in this monibon (when the winds 
 throughout the Gulf of Bengal blow from the fouthward, and the currents fet 
 to the northward), the bed courfe you can take, whether from the Coait of 
 Coromandel, or from Point Gaula in the Ifland Zeloan, is to make the Acheen 
 lilands ; keeping as much as poffible in latitude 5? 30'N. or 5? 40 'N. or 5?N. 
 if you intend to put in at Acheen. Othcrwife you mult pals by the little iflands 
 or rocks to the northward of Pulo Bralla, and continue your courfe through 
 an exceeding fine channel, between the north point of Pub Way, and the 
 rocks \ of a league to the fouthward of Pulo Roundo. Capt. Griffin, in the 
 Lapwing, obfierved, off King's Point, which is the north- wefternmofl part of 
 Sumatra, and makes it to lie in latitude 5? 3C/N, 
 
 Having doubled Pulo W r ay, you proceed toward that part of the coaft of 
 Sumatra, between the NE. poii.it of Acheen and Tanjong Goere (or Diamond 
 Point), lying about EbS. or ESE. 40 leagues. 
 
 During this ieaion it is rare to find fettled weather, fo as to make a direct 
 courfe. The wind hereabout is very variable, and frequently blows from SSE. 
 to ESE. in violent fqualls, which, by withftanding their fury, would drive you 
 afhore, efpecially in a large fhip. Navigators mould be greatly on their guard 
 throughout this v hole ilrait, and 4-) in time, to avoid being driven off the 
 coaft, fo as to \>z unable to recover it eaiily. Sometimes alio it is necefTary, 
 to avoid any particular danger, to keep off the coaft when the wind blows 
 
 tin'' 1
 
 3j6 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 thereon. This premifed, once for all, relates in general the reft of the 
 {trait. 
 
 This part of Sumatra, between the eaftemmoft point of Acheen Road and 
 Diamond Point, is very high land up in the country ; but there is fome low 
 land by the fea-iide. When you are about half way, you muft not (if pofhble) 
 keep above 4 or 5 leagues off more, and in foundings of 25 and 30 fathoms, 
 fo as to be able to <+-} in cafe of a calm, or contrary tide ; for you often meet 
 with currents fetting to the northward with great rapidity. Some who have 
 been on this coafl remark, that there are no foundings above a mile off this 
 ccaft, with iod fathoms, efpecwily 'till you come near the Elephant Moun- 
 tain : others fay 2 or 3 miles. It muft be confefled, the diftance of fuch 
 high land is very deceiving. It has been proved, by experience, that fhips 
 make a much quicker paffage, by failing in with Pulo Perah, and ftanding 
 over to the Malaye fhore ; this is now generally, if not wholly, pradifed. 
 
 Before you come to Diamond Point, there is a large mountain called the 
 Elephant, which is about 9 leagues from the point : fome fay 14 leagues ; and 
 that between the Elephant and Diamond Point there are about 30 fathoms, 
 at 4 or ^- leagues diftance ; but farther off it deepens amain to 50 fathoms, and 
 then prefently off the bank. The latitude of Diamond Point is 4? 54'N. 
 
 Diamond Point is low, and encompaffed with dangers? to avoid which, 
 vou muft come no nearer it than o>\ 01 " 4 ' • - s - Prom hence the ccaft 
 Sumatra extends SEbS. and is only to be difcovered by the trees which are 
 upon it. "The foundings 2 or 3 leagues off at fea, are very unequal; this may 
 intimidate thofe who look for regular depths, proportioned to the diftance they 
 are off fhore. At 5 leagues diuance you have 35 and 30 fathoms, and in 
 ie parts 25 and 20 fathoms. 
 
 I Diamond Point, you tail along the Coaft of Sumatra, 
 
 , ard the Ifland Varella, which is feparated there! 1 1 about 8 leagues, and 
 
 . ind Point about S+SrE. diftance 33 leagues. Its latitude by 
 
 feveral obfervatious, has been determined. Capt. Gilbert Slater, of the Triton, 
 
 an accurate obfervation with Hadley's quadrant, makes its latitude 
 
 The tides between thefe two places Row nearly EbN. and WbS. that is to 
 
 I after 5 o'clock. The flood is here more rapid than the ebb, and runs 
 
 Capt. Mackmouth lays, in his remarks oh 6 voyages through thefe 
 
 :i the Sumatra coaft, and three on the Malaye, that from the NE. 
 
 point of Sumatra to Diamond Point there is generally a N\V. current, efpe- 
 
 cially
 
 DiREctions/w Sailing to Malacca. 337 
 
 cially when the wind blows frefh at W ; but at Diamond Point begin the 
 tides, where it flows full and change NEbN. or A after 2 o'clock ; but the 
 ebb tide fets out much longer and ftronger to the NW. than the flood to the 
 SE. This appears more confident with the account above of the contrary- 
 tides, and often meeting with currents fetting to the north ward with great 
 rapidity. 
 
 Pulo Varella may be about 2 leagues in circumference ; it is high, woody, 
 very clear, and bold, excepting fome fandy bays, the largefi of which lies to 
 the SE. You may Jft before this ifland in 1 2 fathoms, where you may alio 
 take in frefh water. On the fouth fide of this ifland is a fmall bay, where you 
 may 4-} in 18 or 20 fathoms, about a mile off fhore, and fill water, which 
 runs down a hill into a fmall well, but very flow. Some fliips have taken 
 turtle at this ifland in the night-time, and the fifhermen frequent it to dry 
 their nets. There is a little rock or ifland off the NW. point, and another to 
 the fouth ward. 
 
 To make advantage of the wind, you generally pafs between Pulo Varella 
 and the coaft of Sumatra. There is no danger in failing between them, the 
 bank marked in the charts having 8 or 9 fathoms water on it, befides which 
 there are others within 3 leagues of the fhore, fo that it is neceflary to keep 
 founding. There is alio a bank, from which Pulo Varella bears from EbS. 
 to ESE. 9 or 10 leagues, whereon there are 9 or 10 fathoms about 4 leagues 
 from the Sumatra fhore. Alfo another of 7 fathoms, grey land, the ifland 
 bearing SSE. about -> leagues; toward the ifland it deepens gradually from 10 
 to 15 fathoms. Likewife another to the NE. 8 miles off the ifland, at the 
 NW. end of Pulo Verura, with only 2 fathoms on it : when Pulo Verura 
 bears SbE. 3 leagues you may fee the bieakers on it, and are then a-breafl 
 of it. 
 
 Eighteen leagues EjN. from Pulo Varella you meet with Pulo Jarra, a 
 fmall high ifland, and fleep t©, which is generally made in turning it up this 
 ftrait. Capt. Slater obferved its latitude, wiih Hadley's quadrant 3? 56'N. 
 
 When you have paflfed Pulo Varella, fteer toward the Two Brothers, which 
 are two little iflands, bearing NE. and SW. about 2 leagues one from the 
 other. The northernmoft lies SEbS. 9 leagues from Pulo Varella. You pafs 
 to the eaftward of thefe iflands, near which you have 29 or 30 fathoms. There 
 is no need to pafs between them and Sumatra : befides, it is reported there is 
 ihoal water. 
 
 B b b From
 
 338 A New Directory for the East-Ikdies. 
 
 From the Two Brothers, (hape your courfe toward the Iflands Aru, (Aor, 
 Arcu, or Arroe) EbS. about 24 leagues, in irregular foundings, as from 35 to 
 50, 40, and in fome places 60 fathoms. Thefeare feveral iflands, encompafled 
 with rocks above and under water, efpecially on the weft: fide. They are in 
 two .clutters, and dittinguiihed by the Great and Little Arroes. The Little 
 Arroes, or the wefternmoit clutter, which are more particularly called by fome 
 Pulo Jumar, are feldom feen in keeping the new track, along the Malaye lhore. 
 Of the Great Arroes, the eafternmoft or round Arroe is the leading mark for the 
 Channel, between the north and fouth fands. There are two remarkable 
 rocks, with breakers round them ; one NE. about 4 miles from the Great 
 Arroe, which is not to be feen far at high water; the other NE. from the 
 Long Arroe. They may be feen 8 or 9 leagues ; the largeft of them is about 
 2| leagues in circumference. Capt. Ch. Haggis in the Prince Henry, by a 
 very good obfervation, makes its latitude 2? 58'N. Come no nearer than 1 ~ 
 league, lett the ebb tide horfe you among them, and into dangers. There is 
 water enough round about ; but the depth is very irregular, as is alfo the 
 quality of the foundings. 
 
 The Iflands of Aru are fituate in latitude 2? 49/N. according to feveral obfer- 
 vations which have been made near them. 
 
 As you are generally obliged to turn it hereabout, you mutt make the beft 
 advantage you can of the tides, and be very cautious, in (landing toward the 
 Malaye (Lore, to beware of the bank which lies off it ; the (hoalett part of which 
 is covered with rocks, whereon the fea breaks ; and other parts of it have but 
 2 or 5 fathoms water. It may be confidered as the mod: dangerous in thele 
 ftraits, and ihould not be approached nearer than 14 or 15 fathoms. Soundings- 
 of ouze are not always a certain proof of diftance from its verge, becaufe there 
 are (even upon this bank) foundings of this fort, clear and greenifh, which 
 would deceive any one who trufts to them. The fouth point of this bank 
 forms the north fide of the channel, through which 3 011 crofs from the Iflands 
 of Aru to Pulo Parcelar, for which reafon fome call it the North Sand. At 
 low water, there are not above 9 feet water. 
 
 To the fouthward of this bank, on the other fide of this fame channel, is 
 another, to which fome charts afcribe 10 or 12 fathoms water. This bank 
 rrwift be approached with care; for the fhip Montfort, in palling between thefe 
 fands, lint her pinnace a-head to found, which fome time after made fignal 
 for fhoaling, from 22 to 6 fathoms, on which the fhip °K>cd, in 16 fathoms, 
 ; (cht to the SE. to found upon the bank', and found 3 fathoms) Parcelar 
 
 Hill
 
 DiRECTioNsyor Sailing to Malacca. 339 
 
 Hill E|N. the low land juft in fight from the poop ; and though perhaps there 
 may be fome error in the bearings of Parcelar, yet this makes it evident, it 
 is dangerous being too free with the South Sand-head. Several others have 
 moaled to 6 or 7 fathoms, particularly Capt. Timothy Tully, in the fliip 
 Royal George, in 1732; in his paflage fell from 23 to 16, 12, 9, 10, 7, 62, 
 and then °|-}ed ; at day-light found he had very good bearings, viz. Parcelar 
 EiN. 12 leagues; and the Little (or Round) Arroe VV. 7 leagues; fo that 
 his anxiety was over, but he thought it rare to find fo little water with thefe 
 bearings and diftance : he immediately weighed, and fleered ENE. and had a 
 few calls at 6§, 7, 8, 10, 17 to 21 fathoms, and then $-$ed again, it being 
 calm. 
 
 This gives reafon to believe that the approaches toward it are not dangerous ; 
 and navigators, who have worked through this paflage, and pafled over it, 
 have aflured this, and that it muft be dillinguifhed from the channel, becnufe 
 the bottom of it is very hard land, and not proper for 4-}age. Several 
 experienced pilots of this channel are not of this opinion : they affirm, that 
 there are very dangerous inequalities ; and you muft beware. The fureft way 
 is to follow the opinion of thefe laft, as well for this bank, as the others to 
 the fouth-eaftward of it ; for it feems as if the paflage between their extremities 
 is not thoroughly known. 
 
 From the Iflands of Aru, to the low land weft ward of Mount Parcelar, is 
 reckoned 17 leagues E4S. This laft is a remarkable hill by itfelf, with low 
 land all covered with trees round about it ; it ferves as a mark to pafs between 
 the banks above-mentioned. Here follows the courfe you muft fteer. 
 
 In coming from the northward, or from the NW. after pafling the Ifiands 
 of Aru, when the largeft bears SW. 3 or 4 leagues, you muft fteer EbS. 
 Capt. Thorp fays, if you have Parcelar hill E^S. and the low land in fight off 
 deck, you will be near a bank of foul ground, about a quarter of a mile long. 
 I <f-}ed on it in 8 fathoms, -bearings as above: 1 founded, and found coral 
 rocks 2| fathoms, but all round it 7 and 9 fathoms. Take ipecial care of the 
 tides, which are here very rapid. It flows hereabout 10 hours on the full and 
 change ; the flood to the ESE. 7I hours, and the ebb to the Wi\W. This 
 rule, though variable, may be looked on as almoft general. In this track you 
 have unequal depths, as 40, 35, and 25 fathoms, mud. 
 
 When the liland Aru bears WbN. about 6 leagues, you may fee Mount 
 Parcelar EiS. It is beft to keep it in this direction, without bringing it to 
 bear more foutherly, and fteer accordingly. Then you have uneven loundings 
 
 J3 b b 2 in
 
 34° <£ Netv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 in 20, 18, and 15 fathoms, and keep at a proper diftance from the fouth point 
 of the north bank, which is moft to be feared. If by any accident you get 
 into 10 fathoms, and Mount Parcelar bears to the fouthward of E;S. as may 
 happen by the fhifting of the tide, then ftand to the fouthward to regain the 
 channel. 
 
 You muft alfo take care of the fouthern bank ; it is not proper to approach 
 it in a direction wherein Mount Parcelar bears to the northward of eaft. Capt. 
 Tully fays you may go clear of thefe lands by keeping Parcelar between E'N. 
 and E^S. and thefe are the utmoft bounds of dangers he ever met with. If 
 the depth decreafes, or the quality of the foundings prefage fome danger on that 
 fide, you muft keep off its verge, by edging to the northward. 
 
 It is imprudent to fail between thefe banks, without feeing Mount Parcelar, 
 which, for this purpofe, is a fure mark to prevent danger. Experienced naviga- 
 tors will take fuitable meafures, when the darknefs of night or hazy weather 
 obfcure the fight of it. 
 
 Having doubled the banks, you muft continue to fleer EfS. till within 
 a league and an half of the low land ; then fail along fhore as far as Cape 
 Rachada. 
 
 It is 12 leagues SE. from the low point WSW. of Mount Parcelar, to Cape 
 Rachada. The coaft between them is low and woody, forming a bay, which 
 you fhould not enter. Cape Rachada is an high fteep hill, fioping to a point 
 toward the fea, which makes like an ifland, when you firft fee it, coming from 
 the north-weftward ; being fituate on low land, which for fome time is not feen. 
 About 4 leagues off this coafl is the verge of the bank above-mentioned, which 
 lies SE. and NW. and bounds the pafthge on that fide ; the foundings along 
 which are very unequal. You have generally between 18 and 25 fathoms along 
 ihore, and 30 and 35 fathoms on the bank fide, which is counted very dangerous 
 on account of its fteepnefs. The tides in this part run SE. and NW. very 
 rapidly, efpecially in the fprings. 
 
 Four leagues north-weftward of Cape Rachada, and SEbS. of Mount Parcelar, 
 about a league off fhore, there is a fhoal, upon which a Dutch fhip was loft 
 in 1 yo 1 ; as foon as you are paft it you may fee a little ifland, with breakers 
 round it, bearing ESE. Adjoining to Cape Rachada is another reef of rocks, 
 extending 3 quarters of a league to the north-weftward. From Point Parcelar 
 to this cape you muft keep, at leaft, 1; league off fhore ; and even, for fafety, 
 farther off, to round the bank above-mentioned ; and having doubled it, yon 
 ftccr a courfe to go about 3 quarters of a league without the cape, oft which 
 
 the
 
 DiRECTiONsyor Sailing to Malacca. 341 
 
 the depth is irregular, from 15 to 30 fathoms. Parcelar Hill NNW. or 
 Cape Rachada ESE^S. will carry you 2 or 3 miles without it, in 16, 17, and 2a 
 fathoms. 
 
 If contrary winds oblige you to turn it, you muft be cautious of {landing too 
 near the coafton the one hand, and the bank lying off it, on the other, according 
 to the inftruetions above given. 
 
 As foon as you are off Cape Rachada you may fee the Coafi of Sumatra 
 bearing SSW. It appears low and woody. 
 
 Malacca is 9 or 10 leagues ESE. from Cape Rachada : the coaft between them 
 forms feveral bays, and there are to be feen feveral rivers mouths. You muft 
 not go too near fhore, on account of the rocks which lie along this coaft. 
 When you have doubled Cape Rachada, fleer SEbE. and you will foon fee the 
 Fort of Malacca. 
 
 On this fide of Malacca there is a little ifland, covered with trees, called Fifher's 
 or Lead Ifland. You pafs it about 2 miles, to °f-> in the road of Malacca, in 
 what depth you think proper ; the church, or the hill, NEbE. You have 7 
 fathoms a league from the town. The tides flow in this road at half paft 10 
 o'clock, full and change ; the flood to the ESE. and the ebb WNW. pretty 
 flrong, efpecially in the fpi ings. 
 
 Before vou come to Malacca, you fee, at fome diflance from the fhore, 
 feveral fmall iflands, called Water Iflands, the fouthernmoft of which bears 
 SEbS. 4 leagues from the road. 
 
 Malacca lies in latitude 2? 1 2'N. and longitude 102? q'E. of London. It 
 has been famous ever fince the difcovery of the Indies. The Portuguefe made 
 a conqueft oi it in 151 1. and kept it till 1641 : then the Dutch took it from 
 them, after 6 months liege. They pofiefs it full, and have made it their chief 
 fettlement on the Peninfula of Malaya. 
 
 Malacca gives name to the ftrait between the Coaft of Malaya and the NE. 
 fide of the Ifland Sumatra. It rs through this flrait fhips pafs from the Indian 
 Sea, to- the Gulf of Siam, China, the Philippine and Molucca Iflands ; fo that 
 this town, ill the middle of this ftrait, is one of the moft trading towns in the 
 Indies. 
 
 When you go afhore, with your boats, keep the fort well open to the 
 ftarboard, till you have the river .pen between the fort and the houfes ; then 
 fleer directly in for the river, that being the deepeit channel. The landing 
 place is on the larboard fhore, as foon as you enter die river, about two ftones 
 
 throw fhoit of the bridge. 
 
 On
 
 $±z A New Directory jor the East-Indies. 
 
 o 
 
 On landing, it is cuftomary to wait on the Shabander, whofe houfe is juft 
 
 by ; and he fends to the governor, to know if he is at leifure to receive you^ 
 
 when you wait on him, fome prefent is expected by them both. Here is 
 
 nothing to be had for the people, but old buffalo. The Enplifh pay 26 per 
 
 cent, duty on all trade. Be guarded againft impofitions. 
 
 CCLXXXVI. Directions^ Voyages to Malacca in the Easterlt 
 
 Monsoons. 
 
 The paffage from the Coaft of Coromandel to Malacca, at this feafon, is 
 liable to great difficulties, efpecially from Madras, Pondicherry, and other 
 places more to the fouthward ; becaufe the winds (throughout the Bay of 
 Bengal) then blowing from NNE to ENE. and the currents running to the 
 fouthward, afford no hope of fuccefs. For thofe who fail from Malulipatam, 
 or any other part of this coaft more to the northward, and from Bengal, thefe 
 directions are particularly adapted. They may likewife be ufeful to thole who 
 are bound to Malacca, from Point Gaula, Pondicherry, or Madras, about 
 the end of the weftern monfoon, when the calms and ihufflins; winds will 
 retard their arriving on the eaft coaft of the bay, before the fetting-in of the 
 eafterly monfoon ; at which time, if they conform to thefe inftructions, they 
 will ffiorten their paffages and render it more fafe. 
 
 In lading from Bengal to Malacca, in the eafterly monfoon, the track from 
 the ffioals off the mouth of the Ganges, is to make the weftern Coaft of the 
 Great Negraille ; and if, by an unforefeen error in your reckoning, you fhould 
 make the land to the northward, have a care of the little ifland called the 
 Buffalo, which lies off the Coaft of Ava, in latitude 17? 6'N. 
 
 When you are within fight of Negraille Bland, or Cape Negrais, it will 
 be ncceffiry to keep clofe along the weft coaft, to luff up to the fouth point ; 
 and then to beat away, fo as to pafs a league and an half to the fouthward of 
 Diamond Ifland ; and thereby you avoid the Negada or Sunken Ifland, and the 
 ro;:k between them. For greater furety it will be proper to bring Diamond 
 Ifland to bear NV/bN. 4 or 5 leagues before you ftand to the fouthward. 
 
 To make the moll advantage of the wind, and avoid the confequence of the 
 currents, which fet to the weftward : on leaving Diamond Ifland, endeavour 
 to make the Iflands Caboffa, Tenaflerim, or thofe of Tores, which are the 
 wefternmoft of the Archipelago of Mergui. Thefe iflands are very high, and 
 may be feeii far off at fea ; by the foundings about them, you may form a 
 judgment of their diftance. 
 
 From
 
 DiRECTioNsyor Voyages to Malacca. 343 
 
 From thefe iflands, fleer SbE. to go clear of thofe along the fouth part of 
 the Coaft of Tenafierim ; they are clear and without clanger, or at leait any 
 that is vifible. 
 
 Some charts lay down two iflands in latitude 9? 45' and $o'N. about 30 
 leagues to the weftward of thofe of St. Matthe>v ; different journals and 
 memoirs make no mention of them. The uncertainty of their true lituation 
 deierves the attention of thofe whom it may concern, 
 
 In latitude 8? 3o'N. and 13 or 14 leagues eafl of Junk-Seilon Ifland, lie the 
 Iflands of Seyer, which may be fecn 6 or 7 leagues off. Leave them on 
 the larboard, and from thence fteer SE. to make Pulo Bouton, which lies 27 
 or 28 leagues SSE. from the fouth point of Junk-Seilon, in latitude 6? 35'N. 
 Pulo Bouton is not the only ifland to be fern ; all the Coaft of Queda is encom- 
 pafled with feveial others of different fizes, and very high ; that of Ladda is 
 the moft confiderable ; to the eaftward of it lies the port of Queda, very much, 
 frequented by the Malayes, .and other Indian nations, whom trade brings 
 hither. 
 
 From Pulo Bouton to Pulo Pera the courfe is SbW. 18 leagues ; this laft 
 is a little round ifland, fleep to, covered with trees, and about 1 \ league in 
 circumference. It is clear all round, and may be approached with fafety. Its 
 fit nation is almoft in the middle ox the entrance of the Straits of 4 Malacca ; 
 being by itlelf, and out of light of the coaft and the adjacent iflands, make it 
 eaiily known ; and it is a mark to the fhips that come, or go out of this 
 ftrait. 
 
 Round about Pulo Pera you have 60, 50, and 40 fithoms. In croffin^ 
 from this ifland toward Diamond Point, or Tanjong Goere, at 27 leagues 
 dirlance SEbE you have the foundings much the fame. 
 
 Having had fight of Pulo Pera, leave it to the ftarboard, and ftand toward 
 Pulo Pinang, bearing EbS. 1 8 leagues from the former, and 3 leagues from 
 the Malaye Coaft ; between them there is a channel, through which the 
 country yefjels t;admg along this coaft ufually pafs to Queda. Pulo Pinang is 
 about 4 leagues long, north and fouth ; the middle is high, its fouth point 
 low, and upon its north point is a round hillock, which makes it eafly 
 known. The wefiern coaft of this ifland forms a bight, or bay, with a (andj 
 fhore. Near the fouth point of this bay there is an iiland, upon which may 
 be found vevy good water. 
 
 From Fuio Pinang, S26?E. 22 leagues, lies Pulo Binding. Between thera 
 it is fhoal on the Coaft of Malaj'e. This bank proje&s 3 leagues, and even 4 
 
 leagues
 
 344- A T <?w Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 leagues in fome places. Thofe who fail from one to the other with a fair wind, 
 fhould keep in 20 or 25 fathoms ; but if you are obliged to turn it, take care to 
 come no nearer the bank than 10 fathoms, mud. 
 
 Binding Ifland extends about 3 \ leagues north and fouth ; itsJand is high, 
 and forms 3 or 4 mountains contiguous. The Dutch have here a fort, for 
 the fecurity of their trade to the adjacent parts. South and SbE. are feveral 
 others of different fizes ; the fouthernmoft is 6 or 7 leagues diflant from this. 
 Thefe are the Sambelang Iflands, or Nine Iflands. 
 
 Wefhvard of this lair, at the diftance of 7 or 8 leagues, is a little fugar-loaf 
 ifland, covered with trees, called Pulo Jarra. You may pafs between this 
 ifland, and thofe above-mentioned in 25, 28, and 30 fathoms, mud. There is 
 no danger in this paflage. 
 
 From Pulo Jarra to the iflands of Am, the courfe is S24?E. diflance 22 or 
 •23 leagues. Having pafl'ed the former, failing mid-channel, between that and 
 the iflands which lie to the fouthward of Pulo Sambelang, you muft fleer SbE. 
 allowing for the tides, which fet fometimes toward the Malay e coaft, fiom which 
 you muft keep, efpecially about the iflands of Am, on account of feveral very 
 dangerous banks oppolite to them. If a contrary wind obliges you to turn it, 
 it will be prudent to keep the lead going, and come no nearer thefe banks 
 than 16 or 17 fathoms. Farther out the depth is irregular, in 30, 35, and 
 40 fathoms. 
 
 When you are \\ or two leagues paft the Aru Iflands, fleer toward 
 Parcelar. 
 
 Thofe who fail for Mafulipatam, or any other place on the Coaft of Golcdn'da 
 and Orixa, in the months of January and February, have no occafion to n il e 
 Negraille, or Cape Negrais ; it is then fufflcient to crofs over to tie e.Ocrn 
 coaft, between the Preparis and Cocos Iflands, or between thefe laft and the 
 north point of the Great Andaman Iflands. From laying thtfe iflands, they 
 muft ihape a courfe to get fight of Pulo Bouton, or Pulo Peia, and follow the 
 preceding directions. 
 
 Thofe who fail from Point Gaula on the Ifland Zeloan, Pondicherry, or 
 Madras, for Malacca, about the end of the weftern monfoon, may make the 
 Little Andamans, going through the channel on the fouth fide thereof, or that 
 
 7 o o o 
 
 of Sombrere, if you cannot reach the former ; from thence fail toward the 
 Coaft of Qu^da, to fall in with Pulo Bouton, or Pulo Pera, as above. 
 
 CCLXXXVII.
 
 ( 345 ) 
 
 CCLXXXVII. Directions for returning from Malacca to the Coast cf 
 Coromandel, Bengal, and other Western Parts, at different Scafons of 
 the Year. 
 
 The bad weather, which prevails on the Coafl of Coromandel and Golcoada 
 during the months of November and December, makes it unfafe for mips to 
 arrive there then; fo that they are obliged to wait at Malacca till the ioth of 
 December, which is the proper time to undertake this vovage with fafetv. 
 
 Having doubled Fifher's Illand, which forms the weft, fide of the road, you 
 fteer toward Cape Rachada, and thence to the low point off Mount Parcelar, 
 with a leading gale, the winds blowing then from ENE. to NNE. and obferve 
 the tides, to weigh when they are favourable. 
 
 As foon as you have paffed Parcelar Point, you muft fleer WNW. till 
 Parcelar Hill bears E|N. then keep it in this direction, to pafs between the north 
 and fouth banks. This courfe will foon bring you in fight of the eaflernmoft 
 of the Aru Iflands. This a little round illand on a great rock, which may be 
 feen 6 or 7 leagues ; and in clear we;>ther you may fee that and Mount Parcckr 
 at the fame time. 
 
 When you are within 2 or 3 leagues of the Aru Iflands, you may fail NW. 
 even to NWbN. Whilft you are within fight of the little rocks which encom- 
 pafs thefe iflands, you are weftward of the banks ; thefe confequently are 
 doubled, and will be in mid-channel, between the banks and the iflands, when 
 the htter bears SW. 3 leagues In this track you have foundings from 30 to 
 50 fathoms, as you near the iflands ; but it decreafes to 16 and 17 fathoms 
 going toward the foot of the north bank. -■ 
 
 Keeping NWbN. will bring you in fight of Pulo Jarra, between which and 
 tl e true S.imbehng, or Nine Ifknd, which lie to the fouthward of Pulo Dindino-, 
 th currents generally run NW. and afford an advantage not to be met with on 
 the Sumatra fide. 
 
 From Pulo Jarra, if you continue your courfe NNW. and NWbN. you 
 may firftfee PuloPinang, then Pulo Pera, which you may pafs at what distance 
 ypu pieafe. 
 
 From Pulo Pera, if you are 'bound to Pondicherry, or Madras, you mutt 
 make the Nicobar Iflands, which you may pafs between, or go the fouthward, 
 as you like beft. It is reckoned 95 leagues WbN^N. from Pulo Pera to thefe 
 iflands. Several fhips pafs through the Sombrere channel, which is more 
 
 C c c northerly ;
 
 ~±6 A New Directory for the East-Indies 
 
 northerly ; others bound to Pullicat, or Madras, . prefer (at this time) th© 
 Ten-de°ree Channel. Of thefe you make choice with refpect. to your con- 
 signed port. 
 
 If you are bound to Mafulipatam, or any other place more northerly, it 
 will be better from Pulo Pera to fhape your courfe to;pafs between the iflands 
 to the northward of the Andamans ; this proceeding is furer, on account of 
 the winds out in the bay, which blow from the northward, and the currents' 
 running to the fouthward. 
 
 Obferve farther (efpecially in January) to make the land always to the north- 
 ward of the port you are bound to ; and, as you come near the land, keep a 
 good look-out, in order to avoid being deceived by the currents. 
 
 Ships from the Gulf of Siam, China, or the Phillippine Iflands, which fail 
 in February or March, through the Straits of Malacca, for the Coaft of Coro- 
 mandel, muft follow the preceding inftrudtion, and fail by the Nicobar Iflands, 
 or through the Sombrere channel. 
 
 If you undertake this voyage, from Malacca, in the months of April, May, 
 and June, when the wefterly monfoons are fettled in thefe feas, you muft, 
 from the Iflands of Aru, fteer toward the Two Brothers, keeping along the Coaft 
 of Sumatra, and the iflands to the northward of Acheen, and from thence 
 endeavour to fall in with the Coaft of Orixa, in latitude 18? 3©'N. 
 
 Thofe who fail from Malacca, at the end of October or November, for 
 the Malabar Coaft, muft fteer from Pulo Pera to go to the fouthward of the 
 Nicobar Iflands ; then fhape a courfe to make the Ifland Zeloan to the north- 
 ward of the Bafles, and fail along the fouth coaft thereof, as fhewn in the 
 inftructions for voyages from the Coaft of Coromandel to that of Malabar. 
 
 CCLXXXVIII. Directions'^ Sailing from Malacca to Pulo Timoan, 
 through Governor's Si raits, commonly called the Straits o/~Sincapour. 
 
 When yon weigh from Malacca Road, pafs without the Water Iflands, the 
 fbuthernmoft of which bears SEbS. about 4 leagues from the road, and may be 
 coalled at about half a league diftance. Having pafl'ed it, fteer SE. to give a 
 o-ood birth to Formofa River, before which there is a bank, whofe outer verge 
 lies if league from the coaft, in foundings from 18 to 22 fathoms, in fome 
 places fandy. This bank lies along fhore SEbE. and NWbW. about 2 leagues 
 off fhore. From the SE. end Mount Formofa bears NEbN. and Mount Moor 
 
 NWbN.
 
 Directions for Sa.il.ikg from Malacca to Pulo Timoak. 347 
 
 NWbN. and from the NW. end (juft without the bank, in 5 fathoms, hard 
 ground) thefe hills filear'EjS. and N. or NbW. 
 
 ESE^E. 6 t leagues from the fouthernrhoft of the Water Iflands, lies Mount 
 Moor, remarkable for the land about it being all low and woody ; from thence 
 to Mount Formofa the ccaflE a retches SE. and SEbE. Mount Formofa bears 
 offthcoutermofl Water Iflands E'SEiS. n leagues, and off Mount Moor SE. 
 4 ;- leagues. This laft is more diflinct than Mount Moor. The bank above- 
 mentioned bars up the River Formofa, and permits no nearer approach to the 
 coafl than 5 or 6 miles. If you turn it, keep your lead continually going, 
 that you come not too near its verge. 
 
 From Mount Formofa to Pulo Pifang, the direct courfe is SE^S. 10 leagues. 
 Having doubled the bar off Formofa River, you fleer along SE. and prefently 
 raife this ifland, about 2 leagues from the Continent, forming a channel, in 
 which there are not lefs than 4 fathoms water. On the weft fide of Pulo 
 Pifang are three other little iflands ; the largeft affords good water, and boats 
 may land there commodioufly at high water, in a bay on the NW. tide. Ships 
 generally oafs without thefe iflands, but^iot under 9 fathoms, by reafori of a 
 fand-bank that furrounds them, and extends itfelf a mile without all. In this 
 channel, at a league, or a league and an half off Pulo Pifang, you have 18, 20, 
 and 24 fathoms, mud ; and have nearly the fame foundings all the way from 
 Mount Formofa. 
 
 To the weflward of PuloPifa ng, about 3 leagues off, there is a bank, very 
 dangerous for its irregular depths, which on the NW. part (particularly) 
 changes fuddenly from 25 to 4 fathoms ; and you may conclude the like all 
 over it. This bank lies about WNW. and ESE. 7 or 8 leagues, from the 
 .weflernmoft part of which Mount Formofa bears NEbN. and Pulo Pifang EbS. 
 juft in fight ; and from the eafternmofl end Pulo Pifang bears from ENE. to 
 NEbE. This channel, in the narrovveft part (which is off Pulo Pi'ang) is 
 about 2 leagues over ; and the leading mark through, is to keep Mount Formofa 
 NNW. weilerly, or the Great Cariman SSE. eaflerly, 'till Pulo Pifang bears 
 NE. and then you mav fleer more eaflerlv. Some think this channel is but 4. 
 miles wide. 
 
 This bank extends more northerly than is laid down in mofl charts of this 
 ft rait. The paflage next the Coaft of Sumatra (which may be feen to the SW.) 
 is exceeding dangerous ; it is not advifeable to try it. If, failing from Malacca 
 to Pulo Pifang, in the night-time, you fhould be horfed by the rapidity of the 
 tides to the weflward of thib bank, you mufl fleer to the SE. along its verge on 
 
 C c c 2 that
 
 3-,-S A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 that fide, without approaching the Coafl: of Sumatra, 'till you bring Pulo Pifang 
 to bear ENE. then you may (land to the eaftward, toward the Coafl of Malacca, 
 and regain the good channel. 
 
 The tides between Malacca and Pulo Pifang flow N. and S. (or at 1 2 o'clock) 
 full and change ; the flood to the SE. and the ebb (which is flxongeit. to the 
 NW. Though this is the general rule, yet it frequently varies ; for to the 
 eaftward, beyond Pulo Pifang, thefe tides are exceeding irregular, running 
 fometimes for 20 hours one way, and 18 hours the other way, efpecially in 
 the Sincapour and Governor's Straits, and at the eafl: entrance of the Straits of 
 Malacca ; fo that there is no depcndance on them. The fkilful navigator will 
 make advantage of them, when they are favourable to his purpofe, and <f-} 
 when they are contrary, unlefs by a frefh of wind he can item them. 
 
 As foOn as you are paft Pulo Pifang, the Ifland Cariman may be feen to the 
 fouth-eaftward, difiant about 8 leagues. Your courle is SEbE. to near Pulo 
 Cocops, a fmall even ifland, covered with trees ; and a little diltance from the 
 Coafl: of Malaye. It is fo clofe to the Malaye fliore, that you cannot diftinguifli 
 it to be an ifland 'till you have palftd it ; but it may be known by the trees 
 being of a very bright green. A point of land on the continent adjoining, 
 called Tanjong-Bouro, or Tanjong-Boulus, and the Little Cariman, bear NE. 
 and SW. 3 ', 4, or 5 leagues one from the other. 
 
 It is (SE?E.) about 6 leagues from Pulo Pifang to Pulo Cocops ; between 
 them lies a fmall bank, which you may avoid, by keeping a little off the Coail 
 of Malaye. The Malaye fliore between thefe two is pretty level ; to which 
 come no nearer than 15, or on an emergency 12 fathoms ; nor under 15 fathoms. 
 toward the Sumatra fliore, under which is foul ground, and ihoal water ; par- 
 ticularly when the eafternmoir. point of Cariman bears SE^E. about 5 leagues, 
 and Pulo Pifang N^E. about 4 \ leagues, it fhoals fuddenly fivm 15 fathoms 
 folt to 9 fathoms hard ground. In this channel you have foundings from iS 
 to 20 fathoms, mud ; and about a league off the latter you have 1 6 fathoms. 
 Beyond Tanjong-Bouro, the Coafl: of Malaye forms a bay, wherein fome little 
 rivers empty themfelves, on the eafi: fide whereof is a little ifland, called the 
 Ifland' of Adders or Snake Ifland, between which and the wefiernmoft point 
 of Pulo Pifang (called alfo Long Ifland, alio Sincapour, or Singapore JMlan.d), 
 is the entrance of the Old Straits of Sincapour ; and to the fouthwsrd of 
 laid point you fee alfo the entrance of the New Strait, io called, i ut 
 mo! ij at pt'dent, prefer Governor'^ Strait to cither, as being bodi (h< /Lcr 
 
 . r. 
 
 • J
 
 Directions^/?/- Sailing from Malacca to Pulo Timoan. 34.9 
 
 Being part Pulo Cocops, if you keep on SEbE. you will get fight of two 
 little iflands at fome diftance from each other, but nearly alike in fizeand height ; 
 they are called the Two Brothers (by fome), and lie on the eaft fide of the 
 Straits of Durion, or Dryon ; keeping thefe to the fouth-eafhvard, endeavour 
 to get fight of Tree Ifland, which is a bank of land, almoft even with the 
 water, upon which there are 5 or 6 duffers of fhrubs. At high water it is 
 almoft entirely covered, and you can difitinguifh only the bullies. It is fteeo to, 
 and therefore dangerous to approach it in the night, efpecially as you can form 
 no judgement of its diftance by the foundings ; for which realbn, if they cannot 
 be feen, come no nearer than 15 or 16 fathoms. Between Pulo Pifanw and 
 Governor's Straits, the tides are very irregular ; from this ifland to that of Cari- 
 man, the flood generally fets from SKbE. to EbS. and afterward runs ENE. 
 when Cariman bears SE. To the fouthward of Tree Ifland it is very dano-e- 
 rous, as there is a reef running therefrom a great way ; for which realbn fhips 
 bound through Governor's Straits always go to the northward thereof ; and 
 thofe who are bound through the Straits of Durion, or Dryon, give it a large 
 birth. 
 
 Five Miles EbN. from Tree Ifland, is fituate Square or Paflage Ifland (com- 
 monly called Barn Ifland), to the northward of which are two others, bearing 
 off each other SbE. and NbW. and near its fouth point are two great rocks, 
 which form the north fide of the entrance of Governor's Strait ; the fbuthern- 
 moft of which is called the Viol, on account of its fimilitude to that inftrument 
 at a certain point of fight. The iflands are called Rabit and Coney by the 
 Englifh ; the northernmoft Rabbit, and the fouthernmoft Coney. They are 
 fteep to. Mr. Nichelfon makes them in one NbE.jE. and SbW^W. and fays 
 he was very particular in making his obfervation thereof; 
 
 On the other fide of the entrance of this ft rait lies Red Ifland, bearing; 
 S^ 7 bS. about a league from this Lift ; it is a fmall ifland, io called from the 
 colour of the fand and earth : on the top of it are leveral green trees, and it 
 is a fure mark for this pillage. The Tree Ifland abovementioned is diftant 
 from it 1 J- league to the nonh-weftward. In cafe of necefiity you may cj-i> 
 a-breaft Reel Ifland, in 18 fathoms water ; but come no nearer it, on account of 
 feveral rocks that furround it. 
 
 To enter this ftrait, when you have fight of Tree Ifland, freer for the fouth 
 point oi" Pa€age Ifland ; and being up with it, you may round the little ifland, 
 called Viol, at what diftance you pleafe : then fleer EbN. for the fouth point 
 
 of St. John's Ifland, which bears thus from you ; its diftance i ut 4 7 
 
 leag
 
 35° d New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 leagues from PalTase Ifland. You mould not (ail along the fouth fide of this 
 paflage, as it is cncuinpafled with feveral rocks, which being moffly covered 
 at high water, make it very dangerous. The fame reafon will hinder you from 
 entering the bay on the north fide, wherein are found many little iflands ; but 
 keep directly in mid-channel. You are not long getting through v. ith the tide ; 
 it runs here very firong. In cafe of wanting wind or tide to get through before 
 night, there is good °f-}ing ground under Barn Ifland, in from 7 to xo or 12 
 fathoms, the ifland bearing from NE. to the Sli. 1 or 2 miles off ihore ; alio 
 under St. John's Ifland, in from 1 2 to 1 8 fathoms, the laid ifland WSW. or 
 SWbW. 1 or 2 miles ; where (and on moft of thefe iflands) you may have 
 plenty of wood for cutting, and water. There is alfo a bank in the fair-way, 
 between thefe iflands, on which, if belated, you may °y$, in 16 or 18 fathoms. 
 As to the depths, they are very unequal, as 20, 30, 35 and 40 fathoms, between 
 Red Ifland and the Viol ; beyond thefe you have various depths, as 30, 50, 80, 
 and 25 fathoms near St. John's Ifland. 
 
 The following are the moft known dangers on the fouth fide of this 
 channel. 
 
 SEbS. of Paflage Ifland, about 1 \ league, there is a reef of rocks, which 
 are only to be feen at low water : they are about a quarter of the channel from 
 the fouth fide. 
 
 Two leagues and an half EbS. of the fame ifland, there is a fingle black 
 rock above water, about the fize of a long-boat ; it is about one third of the 
 channel from the fouth fide : it is fo very fteep, that clofe to it you are in 17 
 fathoms, and a little more wefterly in 30 fathoms. This is by fome called 
 the Elephant, and by others the Buffalo, and is laid alfo to bear SWjS. 2 
 leagues from St. John's Ifland. 
 
 SE^-S. of St. John's Ifland lies a reef of rocks, even with the water, and 2 
 leagues farther WbS. of thefe, there are others, bearing SW ; S. of the fame 
 ifland. It alfo bears EbN. 2 leagues from the Elephant, or Buffalo ; but ti^jre 
 is alfo a fhoal without it, which bears SEbE. from St. John's Ifland ; between 
 which iflands and the rocks are foundings from 15 to 20, 30, 40, and 50 
 fathoms, and then fhoals fuddenly to the (buthward. 
 
 To the weflward of St. John's is another ifland, which being only feparated 
 from it by a little channel, appears to be the fame. You may fail along St. 
 John's Ifland at half or three-quarters of a league offing; from ^thence fleer 
 EbN. this will bring you in mid-channel, between the White Rock and Point 
 
 Romania,
 
 Directions/^- Sailing from Malacca to Pulo Timoan. 351 
 
 Romania, which two form the mouth of the Straits of Malacca to the cafl- 
 vvard. 
 
 At the eafl end of Pulo Panjang, or Sincapour, is a fhoal, projecting to the 
 fouth-eaflward, 2 \ leagues therefrom, even as far as the mouth of the river 
 Joor it is flcep to, having from 10 to 15 fathoms jufl without it, when Point 
 Romania bears EtN. 6 leagues; St. John's Ifland about the fame di fiance 
 WSW. and the eafrernmolt point of Pulo Panjang NWbN. 2^ leagues, and 
 Joor or Johor Hill NE. By keeping about 3 leagues off fhore, in 20 fathoms, 
 Point Romania bearing EbN. or a little more northerly, and St. John's Ifland 
 WbS. or a little more wellerly, you will go far enough without it. 
 
 The extremity of Point Romania is low ; but on this fide of it rifes a little 
 hill, called Barbucet Hill, which in coming from the northward, ferves for a 
 mark to enter the flraits. To the eaflward of Point Romania are feveral large 
 rocks above water, encompafled w ? ith many others underneath, which together 
 form a very dangerous reef for i| or 2 -/leagues without all. There is alio a 
 paflage between the continent and this bank ; but you fhould not attempt it, 
 even in a fmall fhip ; though thofe who have palled through it fiy, there are 
 not lefs than 3^ fathoms water in it. The furefl way then will be to pals to 
 the fouthward, between this reef and the White Rock, bearing SSE. 8 miles 
 off Point Romania. This rock is very fleep, and covered with bird's dung, 
 which makes it look white, and which you may pafs to the northward, within 
 half a league, without any hazard. The depth increases in the fair-way from 
 28, 30, to 35 fathoms. 
 
 The paflage to the fouthward, between the White Rock and the Ifland 
 Bintam, or Bintang, is full of rocks ; therefore make choice of that to the 
 northward, which has none. 
 
 From St. John's Ifland to the White Rock, you mufl frill avoid the fbuth 
 fhore, its bottom being very •foul. Having palled the White Rock, when it 
 bears SW. you fleer NNE. to give a good birth to the bank off Point Romania, 
 coming no nearer it than 16 or \~j fathoms ; beiides. which there is no danger 
 here, by night or day. 
 
 The flood tide runs flrong into thefe Straits, NW. and the ebb longer and 
 flronger. ENE. in the SW. monfoons, and the contrary in the other mon- 
 fooris; The time of flowing on full and change days is uncertain in both; 
 only in the former it flows nearefl north and fputh, (or at 12 o'clock) but in 
 the latter it has a greater dependance on the winds, the flood running in when 
 it blows frelh frequently for 12 hours together. 
 
 The
 
 352 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 The variation is about 2? north-weflerly throughout thefe flraits ; nor has 
 it varied much for many years. 
 
 When you have doubled this bank, fleer NbE. toward Pulo Aor (or Pulo 
 Aur) which bears NNE^N. 30 leagues from Point Romania. You pafs to 
 the eaflward of Pulo Tingy, an high land, which at this bearing makes in 
 a peak, rifing gradually from the eafl coafl. To the fouthward of this ifland 
 there are fome fmall iflands ; and SEbS. 3 leagues, there is a rock at the 
 water's edge, which you muft avoid in failing toward Pulo Aor (or Aur). 
 
 This lafl lies about 6'- leagues to the E. north-eaflward of Pulo Tingy ; it is 
 very high land, making in a faddle, and when it bears NE. its two extremities 
 appear higher than the middle ; but the eafternmoft is the high eft. When it 
 bears N.W. it hath a difference, the two little hills fhut in one. Near the 
 SE. point is a little ifland covered with coco-trees, and 3 or 4 others on the 
 north fide. This ifland affords water, and fome refrefhrnent?. You may 4-^ 
 either off a fmall fandy bay to the eaftward, or another to the weftward ; the 
 former in the weflern monfoon, and the other in the eaflern. 
 
 ivlofl fhips bound to the Gulf of Siam, after doubling the reef of Point 
 Romania, keep along the Malaye coafl, in 14 and 15 fathoms; pafiing to the 
 weftward of Pulo Tingy, and the iflands to the northward, through the 
 channel, in which there are not lefs than 8 or 9 fathoms. 
 
 The following is an extract from a journal of a very expert navigator, who 
 filled to the eaflward of Pulo Tingy, and palled to the northward, between 
 that and the ifland lying to the NW. thereof, and which will afford fome 
 knowledge of thefe parts, as far as Pulo Varella, which lies 9 leagues NWbN". 
 from the north point of Pulo Timoan, or Timoon. 
 
 June the 17th, 1682. Sailing from Pedro Branca, or the White Rock, we 
 flood to the eaftward. 2 2 01-3 leagues, rather for form's f.ke than through 
 ncccffity, to double a bank, which the Portugueie charts make to run out 
 a good diilauce from Point Joor (or Point Romania). I iiw no likelihood of 
 its projecting fo far out as thefe charts reprefent, I fleered north and NbW. 
 with a fteady gale at WSW. to get fight of Pulo Tingy'; and though tl i 
 ti les were againft us, that did not hinder us from perceiving (about midnight) 
 Pulo Tingy, from NNW, and NWbN. of us, and Pulo Aor north, fo that 
 on the 18th day at noon we were a league to the northward of Pulo Tingy ; 
 there I obferved, in a lit tic bay on the north fide thereof, fome banana-ta 
 palm-trees, and huts. The depth off this bay, at the above diftance, is 14 
 
 horns,
 
 Directions for Sailing from Malacca to Pulo Timoan. 353 
 
 fathoms, fand and ouze. We fleered WNW. and NWbN. to go between 
 Pulo Tingy and a large ifland to the north-weflward, which, when it bore 
 NNE. we flood to the northward ; leaving the iflands near the fhore on the 
 larboard, and leaving on the ftarboard this large ifland, which is long and high, 
 lying north and iouth, and the weflern fhore embellifhed with a border of fine 
 white land. Throughout this whole track we found 14, 12, 8, and 7 fathoms, 
 fand. About a gun-fhot from this great ifland, there is a lefler one, but high 
 like the firft. 
 
 Having been fet off to feaward from the continent, and being about 1 * 
 league to the eatlward of the north part of this ifhnd, in order to get in with 
 the land again, we fleered NNW. and NWbN. fo that on the 19th at noon, 
 Pulo Varella, a little ifland, which lies off the continent of Malaya, bore call 3 
 leagues of us. In this track we had 10, 8, and 6 fathoms, fand, gravel, and 
 fometimes ouze ; at the fame time Pulo Timoan bore from SE. to SEbE. about 
 1 1 or 12 leagues. The hnd of Malaye, thus far, is low by the fea fide, with 
 a fand fhore and fome downs. The winds blow in the day-time, from the SE. 
 and in the nights fhift round to the weflward, 'till about 10 or 11 o'clock ill 
 the forenoon. 
 
 By this extract you may fafely pafs between thefe iflands and the main. 
 Neverthelefs, thofe who fail this way, fhould keep a good look-out for fome 
 rocks, laid down in fome draughts ; between this ifland and the main, near the 
 water's edge. 
 
 To the north-weflward of Pulo Aor is fituate Pulo Pifang, which, like Pulo 
 Aor, appears about 2 leagues long, at this bearing. The channel, between the 
 iflands north of Pulo Aor and the fouth point of the other, is about 2 leagues 
 w ide, and free from danger. 
 
 The body of Pulo Timoan bears NNW. of Pulo Pifang ; and from the 
 north point of this it is computed 3 leagues to the iouth point of the other, 
 near which is a little ifland, or rock, which mufl be coafled to the fouthward, 
 when you fail through the channel for the wefl part of Pulo Timoan. 
 
 The latitude of the middle of Pulo Timoan, is 2? 50'N. It is the largeft of 
 all thefe iflands, and fo high, that the top of it is fometimes hid by the fogs ; 
 and there is one mountain terminating in two points, like the ears of an hare, 
 which navigators nave tnerefore called by that name. There is good 4"^ a gc 
 and good water on both the eaft and weft coafls ; the dangers are all apparent, 
 and the bottom clear : it is laid, that this ifland is the mod plentiful in refrefh- 
 riients, and very proper to put in at. The mofl confiderable village is in the 
 
 D d d SE.
 
 354 -A New Directory for /£<? East-Indies. 
 
 SE. part, at the bottom of a Utile fandy bay, where you may «f-^ in 20 or zz 
 fathoms, fand. 
 
 At which-ever of thefe iflands you land, you muft be on your guard againfl 
 the inhofpitable difpofition of the Malayes, or inhabitants, and not trufr. to their 
 fair appearance ; this they do but put on, the eafier to furprife frrangers unawares. 
 The faffeft way will be, not to go on more without being well armed ; and to 
 be careful not to go for from the fea fide, but make them bring the commodi- 
 ties you would purchafe. 
 
 At the NW. end of Pulo Timoan are 3 little iflands, between which and 
 the great one the channel is very deep, and confequcntly fure ; xear the 
 latter, under fheiter of thefe little iflands, there is very good °}~^ a g e in 1 2 
 fathoms. 
 
 To the eaftward of thefe iflands, about 23 leagues from Pulo Aor, you meet 
 with another clufter of iflands of different fizes, called the Anambas, which are- 
 very high ; but neither their number, nor their refpefcive bearings, appear to 
 have been known. The ancient charts reprefent them as a confu fed heap,, 
 without diftingnifhing or giving name to anyone of them : the journals of fome 
 navigators, who have fallen in with them, make between them feveral paflages ; 
 but what they have faid concerning them is not circumftantial enough to correct 
 the eld charts bv, and make one more accurate. 
 
 Fourteen leagues EbN. from Pulo Aor, there is a little ifland, or rock, to- 
 the weftward of the Anambas. This little ifland is named Domar in a Portuguefe. 
 chart, drawn in 1687. It is faid to lie pretty near in the fair-way between Pulo 
 Aor (or rather Pulo Piiang) and the Anambas. It is as high above water as 
 a fhip's main-top, and twice the length of a lara;e fhin ; fo that there is no fear 
 of it in the day-time ; but you ought to be cautious of it in the night. It lies 
 about 6 leagues from the Anambas, and bears about eafr. from Pulo Pi fang. 
 Pulo Pifan':, Pulo Aor, and this rock, have been iecn at the fame time. Capt. 
 Vincent fell in with it by defign, in July, 1758, and makes it tolieNSyfW. 
 6 leagues from the wefternmoil part of the Anambas, in fight at fun-fet, when 
 he alio faw another ifland, bearing WfS. which he thinks could be no other 
 than Pulo Aor. Having had a good obfervation at noon, he makes the latitude 
 • Pulo Domar 2? 43'N. and about 8' or io'W. from Pulo Taya, by his run 
 from thence ; though he fuppofes he may have been fet iomewhat to the call- 
 ward by the current, as is ufual at that kat n. 
 
 To the north-eaftward of the Anambas, there is another clufter of iflands like 
 (hi lafl, called the Nafcunas, whi ; . ■•■■-. as little known as the others. 
 
 If
 
 Directions j^rSAiLiNGyrtf/;/ Malacca /oPuloTimoan. 3$$ 
 
 If vou are coming: from the Gulf of Siam, Manilla, or China, in the eafterri 
 mon loons, and are bound through the Straits of Malacca, after you have palled 
 Pulo Aor, fleer SbW. in 30, 25, 20, and 18 fathoms, black fluff mud, inter- 
 mixed with fome fine fand ; but take care of the Sunken Rock in the fair- 
 way. On approaching the reef off Point Romania, when in 16 fathoms you 
 can fee that point, and the low land near it : come no nearer the reef than 1 5 
 fathoms, till Barbucet Hill bears WbN. or W. and Bintam Hill SbWjW. and 
 the White Rock SWbS. 2 or 3 leagues ; then you may round it, (leering SSW. 
 and SWbS. to SW. as far as weft, leaving the White Rock on the larboard 
 hand, off which the depth increafes to 20 and 30 fathoms. 
 
 At the entrance of the ftrait, the tides run in and out with great rapidity; 
 but in the north-cart: monfoon, flronger and longer, even at the rate of 3 or 
 4 leagues in an 'our, running thus 12 or 14 hours without ceafing : in the 
 fpring their courfe is (o irregular, that no certain rules can be given concerning 
 them. 
 
 If coming from the northward with a flrong gale of wind, and jou think 
 you cannot enter the ftrait before night, it is better to °J-"» at Pulo Aor, and 
 weigh from thence lb as to be able to reach the ftrait, and get in By day- light. 
 You muft, at this fea on, «f-*> °ff a little fandy bay, on the wefl fide of the 
 ifland, in. 25 fathoms, the extremities of the if land from NNW. to ESE. 
 When you fail from this place, you fteer, at firfl, due fouth, to avoid the 
 rock, which lies 3 leagues SEbS. off Pulo Tingy ; then SbW. and for the reft 
 conform to the directions already given. 
 
 Fiom the White Rock or its offing, you fteer weft to Joor River ; then 
 WbS. to the fouth point of St. John's Ifland, on which are feveral tall trees, and 
 a finall ifland on the fouth fide. In this track you muft take heed of a bank, 
 whiGh projects from Pulo Panjang. There is no danger by keeping in 1 8 or 
 20 fathoms ; but let not the* fear of approaching it induce you to take the 
 larboard, or fouth fide ; there the dangers are more than to the northward. 
 
 Having palled St. John's Ifland, if you have not wind enough, or the tide 
 
 proves contrary, to get through Governor's Straits, you may <f-"> about a league 
 
 SWiW. of St. John's Ifland, in 18 or 19 fathoms. A little more foutherly 
 
 there are alfb other proper depths ; but the bottom is foul, therefore it is not 
 
 advifeable to <f-} there. 
 
 From this place, fteer WbS. toward the ifland called the Viol, at the fouth 
 point of Tallage or Barn Ifland ; and having parted it, fteer NW. or a little 
 more northeiiy, if the tides fet upon Tree Ifland : when "you are paft that, 
 
 D d d 2 fteer
 
 2$6 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 freer WNW. for the channel, formed on the SW. by the Little Carimon, and 
 on the NE. by Pulo Cocops and Tanjong-Bouro. This paflage is very fafe, 
 though the depths are irregular, from 16 to 24 fathoms. 
 
 It is o-enerally better to keep on the NE- fide than mid-channel, becaufe the 
 tides that come out of the Old Strait of Sincapour fet to the fouthward ; 
 obferve therefore which way they run, in order to guard again ft them accord- 
 ingly. 
 
 It is about 6 leagues from Pulo Cocops to Pulo Pifang, which laft fhouli 
 be coafted at about a mile diftance along the foot of the bank which furrounds 
 it. From thence the courfe is NW. Regard the bank lying WSW. of this 
 ifland. and aive a srood birth to that ofFFormofa River; which being pafled, 
 fail clofe round the fbuthernmoft of the Water Iflands, and fteer NWbN. for 
 the Road of Malacca. 
 
 CCLXXX1X. Captain John Mallet's Directions for Sailing through the 
 
 Straits c/"Dryon. 
 
 When you have rounded the Little Carimon, keep in about 10 fathoms 
 till you have the opening fair between the great Carimon and Sabone 3 then 
 haul in 7 or 8 fathoms, and keep that depth on the ftarboard fhore, and this 
 will carry you clear of Middle-borough Ground (if there be any fuch thing) 
 being informed by a Dutch commander that it lies near the Two Twins. When 
 thefe bear EbN. they will be open to you ; and when they bear NEbE. they 
 will be Ihut in behind a bluff round ifland, which is of a reddifli colour near 
 the water ; then you may keep mid-channel. 
 
 When you firft open the Twins, you will fee a fmall ifland with a tree or 
 two on it, between the Twins and the Bluff Ifland : but it lies without them 
 confiJerably, as you will perceive it in running down the ftraits. Probably 
 this is what is laid down for the ihoal. 
 
 From the aforefaid iflands and bearings, fteer down the ftraits, about SbE. 
 or SbE^E. (having refpedl to the tides, which fet ftrong and very uncertain). 
 You will deepen your water to 12, 13, or 14 fathoms/; and as you run en, 
 you will fee the opening between the north and the fouth Drvon, beginning to 
 open EbS. fouthward from you. When the opening bears eaft, you will bring 
 a round ifland between you and the gap : and when it is on your larboard beam 
 about three quarters of a mile, you will have another ifland on your ftarboard 
 beam, diftance about 2 miles, and in 20 fathoms. This is the riarroweifc 
 
 parti 
 
 From
 
 Directions for Sailing through the Straits of Dryos. 357 
 
 From this opening, you keep neareft the larboard fliorc ; and about 3 miles 
 SSE. from the ifland you paflcd, on the larboard beam, is another ; this you 
 Draft give alx)ut a mile's birth, becaufe of the foul ground about ir. As you 
 round this ifland, you will open the cafternmofr. of the Three Brothers bearing 
 SEbE. 
 
 When round this ifland, you haul up ESE. and EbS. between the fouth 
 Dryon on the larboard iide, and a large ifland with high land on it on the {lar- 
 board fide. This part is about 5 miles over, and 17 or 18 fathoms all through, 
 till you bring the fouthernmoft part of the fouth Dryon, NEbN. or NNE. and 
 the eafternmoft of the Three Brothers SE \ S. and then your water flioals gradually 
 to 13 or 12 fathoms. 
 
 Off the fouthernmoft part of the fouth Dryon, clofe in fhore, lie three fmall 
 iflands, and a fhoal without them ; therefore come no nearer than a mile to the 
 iflands, the wefternmoft of which makes like a tomb-flone. 
 
 There is a paflage between the Three Brothers, but it may not be very fafe ; 
 therefore, if the wind and tide will permit, it is fafeft to go round the eaftern- 
 moft, and you will find regular foundings of 1 2 and 13 fathoms, mud. 
 
 From hence fhape your cou-rfe for the Calentagas, which lie north and fouth 
 about 13 leagues in length, in foundings from 17 to 30 fithoms, mud. Here 
 are ftrong tides, therefore it is bed to «j-} in the night. 
 
 When the Calentagas bear fouth, 5 or 6 leagues, you have 13 fathoms, mud. 
 When you bring the northernmoft to bear SEbS. 4 miles, you have only 9 or 
 7 fathoms, hard ground : this is taken to be the end of the fand, that runs off 
 from Tanjong-bafib Point ; for hauling in toward the iflands, the ground has 
 been found, fometimes hard, and fometimes (oft. They have been rounded 
 from 7 to 9, and from 9 to 7 fathoms, moflly hard ground ; and when they 
 bore NNE|N. ail in one, 5 miles, had 7 fathoms, foft mud, and afterward 
 hard ground. The fouthernmoft bearing NbW^W. 2 leagues, had 9 fathoms, 
 mud, and the iflands all open again. When it bears NNVV. 4 leagues and 11 
 fathoms, mud, you will fee Pulo Barella ESE. 7 or 8 leagues. If you go to 
 the weftvvard of thefe iflands, there you will meet with 10 fathoms, mud, all 
 through, and no danger, keeping neareft the iflands on the eaft iide of you, to 
 avoid two funken rocks, which lie about a league off the Two Brothers. There 
 are feveral rocks about thefe iflands ; but none far off, that are known, except 
 the above two. 
 
 Pulo Barella lies SE. 11 or 12 leagues from the fouthernmoft of the Two 
 Brothers ; for which fhape your courfe," leaving it on your larboard fide, about 
 
 3 miles
 
 358 A New DiRECTOR^f/or the East-Indies. 
 
 3 miles in 9 or 10 fathoms ; and if you find hard ground, haul in for Tanjoon- 
 boon Point ; but do not go under 5 fathoms water, there being off it very hard 
 fand, and fteep to. When you bring the fand point weft, haul in 7 fathoms, 
 and go not without that depth, till you round Batacarang Point. 
 
 CCXC. Directions for Sailing from Pulo Timoan to Siam in the 
 
 Westlrn Monsoons. 
 
 The fituation of the places, and the winds which blow from SW. to W. 
 throughout the Gulf of Siam, at this feafon, prove the neceflity of keeping 
 along the weftern coaft, in order to fave your paflage, or at lealt to render it 
 lefs tedious and hazardous ; therefore, if you fail without Pulo Timoan, from 
 its north point fteer NNW. to make the Coaft of Malaya, and then fail along 
 fhore, in what depth you pleafe ; for it is every where iafe, the land high, a^d 
 bordered with a fandy beach. 
 
 Pulo Varella bears NW. 9 leagues of the north point of Pulo Timoan ; it is 
 properly only a large rock ; but in paffing it to the eaftward, take care of a rock 
 under water, about 5 miles NEbN. off this ifland. 
 
 If you continue the before-mentioned courfe, you will fee Pulo Capas, in 
 latitude 4? 57'N. 7 leagues from the Maiaye Coaft, and 39 leagues NNW|N. 
 of Pulo Timoan. This ifland is high, and may be teen 10 or 12 leagues. You 
 may pafs on either fide of it, in 20 or 25 fathoms. If you go without all, you 
 rauft take care of a reef, which projects about half a league from its north 
 point ; this is the only danger about it. 
 
 The Ridang Iflands lie NWbN. of Pulo Capas, the fouth-eafternmoft being 
 about 10 leagues therefrom. They are high, many of them extending about 16 
 leagues NW. and SE. along the coaft ; and though they form a channel on 
 that fide, the beft way is to pafs without all, at half a league diftance, in 25 or 
 30 fathoms. 
 
 To fail between thefe iflands and the continent, as foon as you have doubled 
 Pulo Capas, you will fee, along the coaft, a long barren ifland in latitude 5? 
 1 5'N. You fail along the caft coaft thereof, and from thence through an exceeding 
 fmall, experienced channel, between the two fouth-weftcrnmoft iflands of this 
 archiepelago ; that to the NE. is high and round, with feveral fandy bays. In 
 this narrow paflage you have 9, 10, 11, and 14 fathoms water. The following 
 extract from a journal will better inform you of the necellary precautions for 
 palling between thefe iflands. 
 
 The
 
 Directions for Sailing from Pulo Timoan to Si am. 259 
 
 The 21ft of June we lay off a long and barren ifland, in latitude 5? 15'N. 
 The charts lay down a bank along this coaft ; nothing of it, nor any fi<rn 
 thereof; we had foundings from 22 to 18 fathoms. About 8 P. M. we palled 
 between the two fouth-weiternmoft Iflands of Pulo Ridang, in 9, 10, 11, and 
 14 fathoms, fleering NWbN. they are about two cables length apart. From 
 thence ftood NNW. and fometimes north, leaving on the right hand the other 
 iflands, where the depth is found from 14 to 25 fathoms, from that on the 
 flarboard, to another Ions; one which lies on the larboard, having 22 fathoms 
 dole to it. NW. of this ifland there are two larger ones, and NW. of them 
 3 or 4 little iflands, among which is one much higher than the reft, making 
 like a fugar-loaf. That neareft the continent is rocky, and bluff to the 
 northward ; the north-wefternmoft has a rocky point, projecting a quarter of a 
 league. 
 
 In this clufter, or archipelago, are reckoned 13 or 14 iflands; among the 
 reft, Pulo Ridang, which is large and high. The northernmoft of the other 
 two (between which we pafled) is high, round, and has fome ftrands of fand. 
 There are 9 or 10 other iflands to the north- weft Ward, 5 or 6 leagues from Pulo 
 Ridang ; 3 of which are large, and 4 others fmall. Coming from the fouthward 
 you leave them on the larboard, to prevent entangling yourfelf between them 
 and the continent, as there are fbme dangers which may be feen off thefe iflands. 
 Haifa league beyond thefe is the low land of Malaye. 
 
 The 23d at noon, obferved in latitude 6? io'N. This coaft trenches SE. 
 and NW. a little to the fouthward ; northward it is low, and forms little bays : 
 the depth, from thefe iflands to within about 2 leagues of the land, is from 18 
 to 1 5 and 10 fathoms. At night you have land breezes, and in the day-time the 
 fqualls are pretty ftrong. 
 
 The 24th at noon, the latitude obferved was 6? 36'N. From hence we 
 firft few the land about Cape Patani. All this coaft is low near the lea fide ; 
 but in land are high mountains, winding with the fhore, which is very 
 full of bays. You have here 20 and 24 fathoms, mud. Thus far from the 
 journal. 
 
 If you fail without the Ridang Iflands, after palling the latitude of the nor- 
 thernmoft, ha\il in for the continent, which from latitude 6? 3o'N. to Cape 
 Patani, in latitude 7? 4'N. ftretches to the north-weflward. This coaft, as 
 appears from the extract above-mentioned, forms feveiul bays, is low toward 
 the fhore, and hilly in the country. 
 
 About
 
 360 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 About 14 leagues off Cape Patani lies Pulo Lozin. The winds in the weftern 
 monfoon require you to keep in fight of the Malaye coafl rather than this laft. 
 Beyond Cape Patani the coaft forms a great bay, very {hallow, off which it 
 generally blows very frefh. 
 
 When you are about 4 or 5 leagues to the weftward of Cape Patani, fhape 
 your courfe for the Ifland Tantalam, which you may coaft in 12 or 14 fathoms. 
 The north point of this ifland forms the eaft tide of Ligor Bay. 
 
 Pulo Cara, or the Iflands of Cara (being three in number), lie north and 
 fouth, in latitude 8? 30'N. about 7 { leagues to the eaftward of the north point 
 of the Ifland Tantalam. The northernmoft, and largeft, has on the SW. fide 
 a fandy bay, in which (fonae navigators affirm) is to be found frefh water, 
 defcending from the top of the ifland to this bay. The fouthernmoft is only a 
 large rock, which appears white, coming from the fouthward. On the fame 
 fide, about two cables' length from its extremity, there is a flat rock, near the 
 furface of the water. 
 
 The paflage between thefe iflands and the continent is very good, having 
 from 14 to 18 fathoms, 2 or 3 miles off more. After you have palled them, 
 fleer NNW. toward Pulo .Carnom, diftance therefrom 32 leagues on this point 
 of the compafs, in foundings of 20 and 18 fathoms. Before you get the 
 length of Pulo Carnom you will fee, to the weftward, near the coaft, a confi- 
 deiable clufler of iflands and rocks, called the Larchin Iflands : to the eaflward 
 of thefe there is an high land, called by fome Point Lornorit. 
 
 Pulo Carnom, at hrft fight, feems to form two iflands, by means of two 
 mountains, feparated by a valley, which is not perceptible above 4 or 5 leagues 
 diftance. This ifland may be coafted as near as you pleafe, having no lefs than 
 10 or 12 fathoms a league otY fhore. 
 
 To the NWhN. are two iflands, of about the fame height as Pulo Carnom : 
 the firft is called Sancory ; the other, near the continent, is called Barda, or 
 BarJia. The former is but 7 leagues from Pulo Carnom, and the latter 7 \ 
 le. gujs fiom Pulo Sancory. You need not go near them ; but from Pulo 
 Carnom fleer north, toward Cin Point, bearing about N*E. 40 kagues. It 
 may be feen a great diftance, by means of the Mountains of Penfels, which 
 are quite clofe to it. Juft at the pitch of this point are two little iflands ; the 
 coa'.l beyond lies moflly NNE. and SSW. off which there are good foundings. 
 You may fail along it without fear, 'till you come near the Road of Pepery, 
 V) the fouthward of which is a bank, which projects about 4 leagues into the 
 fea ; it is ncceifary to keep the lead going, especially as you near it. If you do 
 
 not
 
 Directions^- Sailing from Pulo Timoan to Siam. 361 
 
 not flop here, after yeti are paft the bank, fleer NEbE. and ENE. 7 leagues, 
 to 4-} before Siam Bar, making proper allowance for the tides. 
 
 The iflands, which form the different mouths of the River Menam, arc Co 
 low that they can fcarcely be feen 3 leagues off. The chief paflage is known 
 only by the coaft's beginning here to rife a little higher, and being more woody. 
 The°|-}age is to the fouthward, in what depth you pleafc. 
 
 The city of Juthia, the capital of the kingdom of Siam, is fituate upon an 
 ifland, formed by this river, 16 leagues to the northward of its mouth. 
 
 Twenty-two leagues SbE. from Siam Bar may be feen Cape Liant ; it 
 bounds on the eaft fide that part of the gulf which the failors call the Bay of 
 Siam. To the northward of this cape are feveral iflands of different fizes, and 
 many other lefler ones to the fouthward and weftward. It is affirmed they are 
 fafe, and may be coafled without danger. 
 
 CCXCI. Directions for Returning fro?n Siam to Pulo-Timoan, in the 
 
 Eastern Monsoons. 
 
 To fail from Siam for India, or any other part to the weftward, you rmift 
 wait for the eafterly monfoon, as the only feafon in which you can Undertake 
 this voyage. 
 
 The winds begin to vary about the month of September, and in October 
 the monfoon generally breaks up with violent ftorms from the S\V. quarter, 
 which renders the navigation of thefe narrow feas rather dangerous ; but in 
 November the weather is fair and fettled : then this navigation is become fafe 
 and commodious for fuch voyages as are ufually undertaken at this feafon. The 
 currents let with the NE. monfoon on the weft fide, and againft it on the eafl 
 fide if this gulf; and the reverie during the SW. monioon. 
 
 When you fail from the road of the Bar, ihape your courfe to round Cape 
 Liant and the iflands that furround it ; then fteer SEbE. to make Pu!o Way, 
 ■in latitude 9? 55'N. You may near them, as they are high and fafe without- 
 Me; 
 
 Between Cape Liant and thefe iflands the foundings are mud, from 45 to 35 
 fathoms, juft in light of them. If in their latitude you do not fee them, and 
 have foundings from 50 to 45 fathoms, it is a fign that the currents have 
 fet you to the weftward, as it generally happens in this monfoon ; then you 
 mall luff up, and endeavour to iee Pulo Panjang. It is necelfary to ice this 
 , although you have feen Pulo W^ay : then bear away. You have 35 
 
 E e e fathoms,
 
 J 
 
 62 New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 fathoms, mud, 5 leagues to the weftward. This ifland is high, and encompafTed : 
 with feveral little iflands. It is proper to bring it to bear north, before you 
 begin to bear away ; then it is neceifary to freer SbE. to get fight of Pulo 
 Timoan. 
 
 It fometimes happens, that, in eroding the gulf, one fills in with the Malaye 
 Coaft fooner than expefted ; therefore look out in time. Some navigators give,, 
 as align of approaching it, foundings of coarfe land; whereas afar off they 
 are mud. This token doth not appear to be certain. The latitude of Pulo 
 Capas once pafled, all the Malaye Coaft is fafe, and the decreafe of the 
 depth is a fufficient caution to prevent your running afhore there in the night- 
 time. 
 
 If, on the contrary, you are in lefs than latitude $?N. and have 45 fathoms, 
 it will then be neceflary to ftand in with the land, to get into lefs water ; thus 
 you will not fail to make Pulo Timoan, and thence Pulo Aor, from whence 
 you fail toward the Straits of Malacca ; and if you defign to pafs that way, 
 conform to the preceding mftructions. 
 
 CCXCII. Direct loxsfor Sailing from Pulo Timoan to Pulo Condore, 
 
 in the Western Monsoons. 
 
 Pulo Condore bears N:i6?E. difrance 125 leagues from Pulo Timoan. Thole 
 who fail from one to the other muft not content themfelves with fhaping 
 their courfe according to their fituation, but muft be careful to guard a sain ft 
 the currents, which in this monfoon fet to the eaflward, and generally caufe 
 fome difference. Their velocity doth not depend upon the force of the wind,, 
 as feveral pretend ; for it hath been obferved, that with a moderate breeze the 
 erenee has been as confiderable as with a ftrong gale ; and. experience inva- 
 lidates the opinion of thefe currents and the wind having the lame direction, 
 iince from a S. and SSW. wind you find (contrary to this rule) as great differ- 
 ence to the eaftward, as with the wind at WSW. therefore this opinion muft 
 be falfe. 
 
 In the firft cafe, where the direction of the wind is the fame with that of the 
 two places, the only difference is, that you make a quicker paflage than was 
 i petYed,; yet this doth not oblige you to take a lweep more oneway thai) 
 another. In this part, it is difficult to fettle a certain rule concerning the 
 direction and ftrengih of the currents; you may, however, be hire of making 
 Pulo Condore, if, failing from Pulo Timoan, vou fleer NbE. 65 leagues, then 
 
 NNE.
 
 DiRECTioNsyor Sailing from Pulo Timoan to Siam. 363 
 
 NNE. Ti is is the way to prevent the ufual fet of the currents, and to get 
 light of this ■Hand, winch may be feea 15 or 16 leagues in clear weather. 
 At 5 or 6 leagues to the iouthward, there are 21 or 22 fathoms, fine grey fand 
 with fmall fhells. 
 
 If you have this depth, in latitude 8? 2o'N. without feeing it, arid, by 
 {landing N. or NNE. it decreafes to 17 or 18 fathoms; this will flievv that 
 you are to the weftward of Pulo Condore : on the other hand, if it increafes 
 to 24, 25, and 26 fathoms, you will find yourfelf to the eaflward thereof. 
 
 WbS. 25 miles from Pulo Condore, are two little iflands, or rocks above 
 water, called the Two Brothers, about 1 \ league from each other. The pana^e 
 between them and Pulo Condore is clear and iafe. 
 
 CCXCIII. Directions concerning Pulo Condore. 
 
 Pulo Condore is not one ifland only, but feveral, near one another. The 
 name is derived from two Malaye words ; the firft of which, Pulo, fignikes an, 
 Ifland in general ; and the other, Condore, implies Calabafh : this name was 
 given them from the great number of trees here which bear this fruit. They 
 are all very high, and covered with trees. Their fituation, according to the 
 obfervation of P. Gaubd, is in latitude 8? 40^. and io5?E. of Paris, or 107? 
 25'E. of London ; and they bear SbE. 1 7 leagues off the mouth of Cambodia 
 River. 
 
 Thcfe iflands may be divided into large, middling, and fmall. The Iar°-c 
 one (which is the only one inhabited) is about 3 leagues in length, and half a 
 league is its greateft breadth : it lies NE. and SW. It is (properly fpeakins) 
 a chain of high mountains, very difficult to pafs, extending from one end to 
 the other, and feparating the harbour from the great bay where the natives 
 dwell. 
 
 The middling one is as mountainous as the largeft, but not lb high ; its 
 length is one league, and its breadth half a league. It lies SE. and NW. Its 
 advantageous fituation to the weftward of the great one, forms, between the 
 two, an exceeding good harbour, capable of containing 8 (hips ; its entrance is 
 half a league wide, and the bay is equal to the length of the intdctiing ifland ; 
 but fhips cannot get to the farther end for want of water. Here the great and 
 middling iflands are ib near, that there is but a narrow paflage left for boats, 
 canoes, and proes. The tides, at the full and change, flow here NE. and SW. 
 
 E e e 2 or
 
 364. A Netv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 of at 3 o'clock, and the fea rifes and falls 3 feet. The heights of the hiUs 
 darken this harbour, and render the air thick and very unwholefome. 
 
 On the other fide of the hills, at the SE. part of the great ifland, there is a 
 very, fpacious bay, at the entrance of which, fome little iflands are fo difpofed, 
 that they clofe it up, as it were, half-way ; fo that the <f-}age would be very 
 good and fafe, if the bay was not fo wide, and fo much expofed to the winds 
 which blow in the eafterly monfoons. Its chief entrance is to the SE. The 
 other two are neither fo good, nor fo convenient. Within this bay, upon a 
 marfhy and fandy plain, about 3 quarters of a league long, and one quarter 
 wide, are difperfed (here and there) irregularly, the huts or dwellings of the 
 inhabitants, to near die number of 40 : they are built with bamboos, and covered 
 with c.ijans or grafs of the marihes. Here may be feen the remains of the 
 Englifh fort, which was kept only 5 or 6 years, beeaufe they found it of no 
 advantage to them. 
 
 Among the little iflands, one on the fide of the great bay is pretty large.. 
 They are not fo high as the others ; and are only fteep rocks, covered with- 
 mofs and fhrubs. 
 
 The land at the foot of the mountains on the great ifland, toward the harbour, 
 is but of fmall extent, uneven, hilly, all covered with trees of an uncommon 
 hardnefs, clofe and joined together by long and deep roots, and intermixed- 
 with rocks. The foil feems, at firft fight, to be blackifh and fat ; but upon 
 examination it is found to be only fand, fattened at top with the decay of dead 
 trees and leaves that have fallen. At the great bay it is nothing but fine white 
 land, dry, and of no fubftance. 
 
 This ifland produces none of the fruits fo common in all the other parts of 
 India ; here is neither rice nor pulfe, only fome potatoes, fmall gourds, water- 
 melons very bad, and certain little black beans, all in fmall quantities ; for, 
 befides the badnefs of the foil, the exceffive rains prevent their production ; 
 of this, the manner in which the natives manage their little gardens is a proof. 
 They place a bed, 4 inches thick, of prepared earth, upon a hurdle, about 4 
 or 5 feet fquare, fnpported by 4 props, about a foot and an half from the ground : 
 upon this they fow chibbols, and mint ; and every time it rains, they take care 
 to make holes in this bed to let the water foak through gradually ; but, noi- 
 withftand'mg all their care, thefe never come to great perfection. 
 
 This ifland produces many foreft-trecs, fome of which are fit to make mafis 
 and yards hr (hips : there is alio a tree that grows vevy tall and ftrait, from 
 which the i!lancjcrs extract a certain reddifll roiin, Iwcct-fcented, and very 
 
 combuftible,
 
 Directions concerning Pulo Timoan. 365 
 
 combuftible, called Dammer : they make one or more holes at the foot of the 
 tree, fomewhat like thofe made in Prance in the walls for holy water ; and 
 when they want any, they make a fire near the tree, for half a quarter of an 
 hour ; by which means the fap of the tree, being put in motion, diftils drop by 
 drop into the hole, or trough, which they take care to empty when filled. The 
 iflanders make ufe of other trees for their proes ; they hollow them out, and 
 raife their edges with planks, joined with ratan (or fmall cane). The fcarcity 
 of pafture is the reafon there are no cattle on the great ifland : there are fome 
 fowls, but they are fo few their price is exorbitant. The middling ifland hath 
 oxen and hogs, fptung from thofe left there by the Englifh ; but from their 
 original tamenefs they are become wild, wandering promifcuoufly over hill and 
 dale, yet fcarcely find pafture. 
 
 The eaftern and weftern monfoons divide the feafons into dry and wet ; the 
 weflern monfoon bringing rain, the eaftern fair weather : but this divifion of 
 rainy and dry weather is not fo equal as that of the monfoons ; for rains continue 
 here above a month after the fetting-in of the eafterly winds, which is generally 
 about the middle of October : fb that the rainy feafon, which begins in April, 
 lafts 8 months ; during which fcarcely a day pafles without abundance of rain, 
 which, defcending from the mountains in great torrents, deftroys and carries 
 away all before it. Befides, the ground, being foaked with rain, calls forth a 
 ftinking and offenfive vapour, which renders the air very pernicious, rotting 
 every thing within ; fo that you can preferve nothing, nor even do any thing 
 without doors. 
 
 The dry feafon brings another inconveniency : the water dries up almofl 
 every where ; the ground, which is only fand, becomes dry and barren ; and 
 the heat of the fun is fo exceffive, that you cannot be expofed to it without 
 danger. 
 
 This ifland has no fprings, affording only the rain water, which running 
 down the mountains among the rotten leaves, wherewith the ground is covered, 
 acquires a certain tincture, with an unwholefome quality ; therefore the inha- 
 bitants prefer the whitifh water of their wells to the clear water from the 
 mountains. Befides, thefe are drained in the dry feafon, when they can get 
 none but from wells, which mull: be dug where the ground will permit ; but 
 thefe places are not frequent, especially on the harbour fide, though it affords 
 fome fhelter from the heat at this feafon. 
 
 Hunting ca<i be but little ufed in a country fo improper, and whofe only 
 game confifis in fome wild pigeons and a fort of woodcocks. The fea produces 
 
 here
 
 ■) 
 
 66 A New Directory for the East-Indies 
 
 here but few (hells, and fiih is feldom eaten, though very good and iu 
 plenty ; becaufe the iflanders but feldom fiih in rainy weather, and in dry feafons 
 not at all, for fear of the boifterous winds. 
 
 Pulo Condore abounds in reptiles and infecls, both troublefome and hurtful. 
 There are alfo numbers of apes, and monftrous lizards 5 o: 6 feet long (which 
 deftroy all the poultry) and fmall ones winged, which fly from tree to tree ; 
 others which hifs, whofe fling is mortal ; makes of a prodigious fize and 
 length ; other fmall ones exceeding venemous ; centipeds, fcorpions, rats, 
 and in fhort an infinite variety of infecls, bred by the exceflive heat : but the 
 ants are the raorl troublefome of all ; they get into every thing, and fpoil 
 whatever they come at. 
 
 The inhabitants of this ifland amount to about 200, including women and 
 children. They are fugitives from Cambodia and Cochinchina, whom the love 
 of liberty and independency hath brought to this country. Hitherto they have 
 enjoyed it peaceably, as envy hath not yet excited in their neighbours, or the 
 Europeans, a defire to molefl: them in their pofleiiions. Thefe people have 
 neither a healthy nor ftrong look : they are lhort, h "-.in, very fwarthy, induf- 
 trious juft enough to fupply their wants ; but exceeding flothful, covetous, and 
 felfifh, yet extremely poor. As this country is incapable of lupplying their 
 neceffities in a fufhcient manner, they fetch from Cambodia and Cochinchina 
 what is requifite for their fubiiftence and cloathing : in exchange they carry 
 thither oil, tortoife fhell, a pickle made of a fmall fiih like an anchovy, and 
 flambeaux made of the bark of trees, torn in flips, and dipped in the rofin or 
 dammer before-mentioned, which they bind in a cafe of the leaves of a wild 
 plant, common enough in this ifland. 
 
 The Englith fettled here in the vear 1702, when the fiiclory of Chufan, 
 011 the Coail of China, was broke up. They brought with them iome Macaflar 
 foldiers, who were hired to afiitt in building a fort, and to be ducharged at 
 the end of 3 years ; but the chief not fulfilling his engagement with them, 
 they waited an opportunitv, and one night murdered all the Englifh in the 
 fort. Thole without the fort hearing a noile, took the alarm and run to their 
 b •ats, very narrowly efcaping with their lives (but not without much fatigue^ 
 hunger, and thirft), to the Johore dominions, where they were treated with 
 humanity. Some of thefe afterward went to form ihe lettlement at Behjar- 
 M, liken, on the ifland Borneo. 
 
 CCXCIV.
 
 [ 3*7 3 
 
 CCXCIV. Directions for Sailing, in the Westerly Monsoons, from 
 Si am to the River of Cambodia, Tonquin and China, to the W cjlivard 
 of the Paracels, along the Coast o/~Cambodia, Tsiompa, ^^Cochin- 
 china. 
 
 Sailing from Siam Bar, in the months of June, July, and Auguir, you 
 ftand toward the weft coaft of the gulf, and keep along it as far as Cin Point ; 
 from thence freer SE. till in the latitude of Pulo Panjang, then eaft, to get a 
 fight of it. This laft courfe is not always neceffarv, as the currents, which 
 run to the eafhvard, often fet you in fight of Pulo Way and Pulo Panjang 
 fooner than you are aware of therefore proper precautions muft be ufed. You 
 have 30 fathoms juft within fight of this ifland(Pulo Panjang) which decreafes 
 as you come Dear it. Bat obferve, that this depth is likewife found in many 
 other parts of the gulf, out of fight of the land. 
 
 As foon as you have paiied Pulo Panjang, the courfe is SEbE. 23 or 24 
 leagues to Pulo- Uby," fituate exactly at the eaftern extremity of the Gulf of 
 Siam, in latitude 8? 34'N. Itb height renders it perceptible at a great diftance ; 
 it is overfpread with various mountains and valleys, or hollows like faddles.. 
 Coming from the SVv". or weftward, thefe hills bearing NE. appear feparate, 
 (the fouthernmofr i? much higher than the reft, and the northernmoft feems 
 loweft) ; but when Pulo Uby bears north, they are in one. You may get 
 frefh water on the north fide of this iflaud ; but the belt °f->age is on the eait 
 fide, oppofite a little bay ; the little ifland at the SE point bearing fouth. 
 
 Between Pulo Panjang and Pulo Uby, you have 25, 20. 18 and 16 fathoms; 
 when you get into this laft depth, you are near Pulo Uby. 
 
 Coming from the weftwerd, when you have 28 or 25 fathoms, you are a 
 good way from it. 
 
 It is necelVary, that the mips from Batavia, Bantam, or Malacca, to the 
 river of Cambodia, as well as from Siam, fhould make Pulo Uby, that they- 
 may be far enough to windward to make advantage of the SW. winds, which 
 blow very itrong in the months above mentioned ; then the currents alfo let 
 fo ftrong to the eaftward, that if you fall to leeward, it will be exceeding diffi- 
 cult to regain the coaft. It is reckoned 40 leagues ElN. from Pulo Uby to 
 Pulo Coudbre, given in the preceding feclicn. 
 
 If you are bound to Cambodia; after doubling Pulo Uby, in 15 or 16 
 fathoms, fraud to the northward, to make the continent ; and when the 
 ioumenimoft point of the continent (which is low and covered with large trees) 
 
 bears
 
 368 A Netv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 bears NW. then fteer EbN. and ENE. keeping in the depth of 8 or 10 fathoms 
 mud. About 5 leagues off more, there is a bank of fend, with no lefs than 
 3 fathoms : this need not hinder you from continuing your courfe to the 
 * northward (allowing it a birth if in a large flap) as you foon after meet with 
 better foundings, in 5 or 6 fathoms ; and you may near the land as far as 4 
 fathoms, till oppofite a river, whofe banks are planted with trees, higher 
 than on any other part of the coaft. This river bears WSW. 22 or 23 leagues 
 from that of Cambodia. From thence, fleering NNE. in the above-mentioned 
 depth, you will fee the mouth of another river, from whence the coaft extends 
 caftward, as far as that of Cambodia. 
 
 This coaft is extremely low, and without any particular mark ; therefore 
 you muft keep near it, to obferve its bearing ; and as foon as you find it vary 
 from eaft, you may be fu re you are off Cambodia River, at the entrance of 
 which you have 5 fathoms. Then you may fee two points, and an ifland in 
 the middle of the channel , and before its mouth two banks, which, with the 
 ifland, forms a triple paflage : the weftern one is called the River of Eafach (or 
 Caffaba) ; the fecend, between the two banks, has 14 or 15 feet water, hard 
 fand ; and the eaftern channel, 18 feet in the height of the lprings. To go 
 between the two banks, you fteer north and NbW. in order to keep the weft point 
 on board, near which there are 34 and 36 fathoms, where you may fee two 
 little iflands, which you mult leave on the ftarboard, to coaft the weftern 
 fhore, for the fpace of 48 leagues. Thirty leagues above its mouth, the river 
 divides into two branches, one of which is a narrow pafiage, called Moullique 
 paflao-e, which you leave to the larboard, and fail through that on the ftarboard 
 keeping always on the weft fide, 'till you front the town. 
 
 The (hips which fail up this river muft be well provided with cables, °f-^s 
 snd hawfers, becaufe they muft warp above 50 leagues of the way. Still it requires 
 the conducl: of a ikilful pilot, as abfolutely neceflary to enter it with fafety, 
 on account of the annual fhiftings of the banks which happen in this river. 
 
 The River of Cambodia has many other mouths to the northward ; beyond 
 the above-mentioned, the coaft runs rounding to the NE. as far as a narrow 
 • trance, called the Eafter Channel ; then it trenches NbW. as far as the 
 Japonefe Channel, oft" which lies a little ifland called Crab Ifland. 
 
 NNE. of this laft, in latitude 10? 35.N. is Cape St. James, or Siukel- 
 Tac ues ; this is an high broken land, which may be feen 10 or 11 leagues at 
 fea ; and notwithstanding fome rocks or iflands near it, it may be coafted as 
 
 clofe
 
 Directions for Sailing from Si am to the River of Cambodia. 369 
 
 clofe as you d-jfirc, in 5 or 6 fathoms. The coaft beyond it is low, extending 
 NEbE. and forms feveral fandy bays, with two points, on which arc fume 
 downs of land, the land here making in hillocks. 
 
 To the northward of the fccond fandy point there is a great bar, or\ 
 the call fide whereof is a fmall ifland of a moderate height, called Cow 
 Mand. 
 
 Three leagues off this coaft, in latitude 10? 5o'N. lies a dangerous fhoal, 
 upon which a Portuguefe captain, named Matthew de Brito, was fhipwrecked ; 
 it may be {een a quarter of a league off, in 14 fathoms, gravel and fhells. To 
 avoid this danger, you muft come no nearer this land than 4 leagues, oppofite to 
 three- little white hills, by the fea fide. The mark to know this fhoal by, is a 
 fingle mountain, high eft -at the eaft end, and much lower at the weft end, 
 which is peaked, at the foot whereof appears Cow Ifland, like a little round 
 hillock. When the higheft part of this mountain and the hillock appear in one, 
 bearing NbW. the Brito fhoal is in the fame direction. 
 
 To avoid this danger with the greateft certainty, you muft keep iri 16 or 
 j y fathoms ; this will carry you far enough without it. 
 
 Ships not bound for the River Cambodia, but only to Tonquin or China, 
 are not obliged to make Pulo Uby, nor to approach the coaft about the mouths 
 of that river ; the foregoing inftrudVions concern thofe only who are bound 
 directly thither. It is fufficient for others to fee Pulo Condore ; and from 
 thence, whether pafling on the weft or eaft fide, ftand for Cape St. James, and 
 fail along the Coaft of Tiiompa, obferving the following directions to avoid the 
 rocks which lie off it. 
 
 From Pulo Condore, toward this coafl, you have foundings in 20, 25, 16 
 and 15 fathoms. 
 
 About 23 or 24 leagues NE. of Pulo Condore, and 12 leagues from Crab 
 Aland, you meet with a bank, of 13 fathoms water, difcovered by a Dutch 
 il6dp. 
 
 Seven leagues NEbE. of Matthew de Brito's reef, vou fee Tiger's Ifland, 
 .or, as- it is called by the Dutch, Steen-Clippen ; it is very near a great fandy 
 point en the Coaft of Tiiompa. Coming from the northward, this point .makes 
 likes an ifland, upon which are feveral white fpots ; but the ifland above-men- 
 tioned being barren and rockv, makes it eafily didinguifhed from any other point. 
 The channel between them is not navigable, on account of the fand, banks 
 and rocks with which it abounds. Thefe rocks yield a ftriking reprefentation of 
 a city in ruins, with a fquare fteeple in the middle of it. 
 
 ' Fff- The
 
 3/0 -A New Directory for the East-Indies-. 
 
 The coaft between Cow and Tiger Iflands forms a great bay, or bight, into 
 which feveral rivers empty themfelves. 
 
 Here it was that the Galathea frigate, belonging to the French company,, 
 landed in 1720. It was commanded by M. Le Gac, who was obliged to enter 
 this bay, in hopes of finding water and refrefhments. He fent his boat afhore, 
 with two officers, to aik permiffion of the inhabitants to get fome frefli water, 
 and cheapen provifions. On approaching the more, they were met by a great 
 number of people, offering to do them fervice ; and they fent a proe to conduct 
 them to the entrance of a fine frefh-water river, in which were many boats 
 and fmall galleys. This was the only part of the coaft where they could eafily 
 land. Another croud of inhabitants prefented themfelves here, who made a figa 
 for them to come on fbore ; the two officers accordingly landed, having firft 
 ordered the cock-fwain and crew to wait for orders, before they came farther 
 up the river. 
 
 The chief of the inhabitants conducted the officers to a village, upon the banks 
 of this river. About an hour after, a great number of the natives came, and 
 by figns demanded the boat's crew to deliver up their arms, which the cock- 
 fwain refufed ; and perceiving one of their principal men ffiew the people (with 
 acclamations of joy) the fwords of the two officers, which he had taken into his- 
 poffeffion, and fearing he mould be attacked unawares, he was about to return on. 
 board the fhip, to report what had happened; when immediately two large 
 boats, armed, went out of the river to intercept his paffage ; but he had the 
 good fortune to efcape them. 
 
 Upon this information, M. Le Gac refolved to man his boats, and oblige 
 thefe people to reftore his two officers. Juft as they began to put their defign 
 in execution, they faw two country boats, but they would not come within 
 guri-fhot : the two officers appearing, the boat was difpatched to fpeak with, 
 them ; but they were no fooner within hearing, than the officers calkd out to 
 forbid them to land, defiring them to conceal their arms ; becaufe upon the 
 leaf! fVir they mould make, thefe people threatened to flab them. In facl, 
 they were bound, and had each {landing by him, an Indian with a naked 
 creife (or poniard) in his hand. They faid, that as loon as they landed they 
 were plundered, and after a deal of ill ufage, they had made them pais the 
 ni'dtt in the fept, or pillory. After this relation, the country boats returned 
 to lhore. 
 
 The next day they appeared again, and faid, that the king of the country, 
 who had been acquainted with the arrival of the fhip, would fend a muiionary 
 
 to
 
 DiRECTioNsyorSAiLiNGjfo/tt Siam to the River of Cambooi a. 371 
 
 to get intelligence from whence it came. Two days after, the-Sieur Gouge, a 
 native of France, born in Picardy, and a miffionary, came from the king. He 
 came firfr. into this country in the fquadron of rvl. de Chaumont, in 1685. 
 and had lived there ever fince. This good ecclcfiafKc deferves a particular 
 commendation ; his ardent zeal to ferve the two prifoners, and the danger he 
 underwent in expoling himfelf thereby to the refentment of the natives of 
 this country, diffinguifh his character as a good man, and worthy of his 
 function. 
 
 The day following, the king's foil arrived at the village, who being informed 
 of the ill uiage fhewn to the two officers, came to know the truth thereof; he 
 accordingly heard their complaints, and promifed to do them juflice ; but 
 required that the captain of the fhip, or his fecond, fhould come afhore. 
 They thought it improper to refufe his requeft ; therefore M. Grave de le 
 Belliere, fecond captain, went to him. The prince received him honourably, 
 and told him that the king, his father, had fent him to inform himfelf of the 
 infults the ftrangers had received, and to make then? a fuitable reparation. He 
 afterward caufed them all to be conducted to the houfe of a mandarin, where a 
 dinner was prepared for them, which was followed by a comedy, in the country 
 tafte. 
 
 The play ended, the officers were condu&ed to the audience of the prince, 
 and to be pre fent at the punifhment of the criminals. They were led in 
 with the fept about their necks, and caufed to fit with their backs to him, 
 as unworthy to face him. After a molt fevere reprimand for their ill beha- 
 viour, he fentenced them to be fined 50,000 cafhes, or cafh amounting to 
 £. 5, 15/. flerling, and to receive each 50 ftripes with a bamboo on their 
 breech. 
 
 After this execution, M. Grave had leave to return, on condition, however, 
 of coming again the next day : when they promifed to reftore the two oflicers, 
 and to give them the refreshments they came to feek ; they alio permitted the 
 boat to take in fiefh water. 
 
 . M. Grave did not think it proper to refufe what was required of him, but 
 went on board, and returned the next day to the prince, who received him very 
 gracioully, and invited him and the two officers to dine with him : after the 
 repair, they had another corned}', which was interrupted by a madoye, or 
 courier, from the king, bringing a letter addreffed to the prince, exprefling, 
 that his Majefty's pleafure was, that the fhip fhould weigh 4-} from the road it 
 was then in, and go in a better port, in a great river, 8 or 9 leagues further ; 
 
 F f f 2 and
 
 W% A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 and that being defirous of feeing the officers, he required that they mould be 
 brought by land to Feneria, where he refided. 
 
 This letter ferved the prince for an excufe from keeping the promife he had 
 made them the day before. They could even fcarcely obtain his permiffion for 
 one of the officers to go on board of the fhip, to acquaint the captain with the 
 king's new orders : this, however, was granted, but on condition, that the 
 perfon who went mould return the fame day ; and that they might not fufpec~t 
 the fincerity of his profeffions, he fent two buffaloes, fome hogs, and other 
 refreshments. 
 
 It isveafy to perceive, by the firft requeft, that they had a mind to feize the 
 fhip, by wanting to have it in a place from whence it could not eafily get away ; 
 but M. Le Gac was too prudent to be caught in this fnare ; he excufed hirnfelf, 
 under pretence' of contrary winds, and other inconveniencies which he reprefented. 
 Without informing the (hip's company of this, he waited to fee what they 
 would be at ; but refolved not to for fake the two officers till the lafr. extremity, 
 who had facrificed their fafety to the common carafe. 
 
 Thefe, however, could not fo eaiily elude their journey to Feneria. They 
 were obliged to fet out, and underwent incredible fatigue ; but the want of food, 
 the exceffive bad roads ; and the inconveniencies of a fultry climate; were not 
 fo intolerable as the cruelty and infolence of their guides. Thefe wretches ufed 
 them fo barbaroufly, that they were frequently obliged to complain to the 
 prince, who went along with them. 
 
 After 9 days march, they at laft arrived at Feneria. They were longer 
 going than was neceflary, being delayed on divers pretences. They were fre- 
 quently conduced out of the right road, and then forced to return ; they led 
 them alio to the more, to communicate feveral orders, or give intelligence on 
 board of (hip. 
 
 On their arrival, they went to the houfe of the miffionary, who fpared no 
 pains to accommodate them, and procure them all the help that was in his 
 power, even depriving hirnfelf of his own fubfiftence. Several Chriftians in 
 that country came down to vifit them, and brought them provifions while 
 they continued there. 
 
 The next day the king fent an officer to tell them he defired to fee them j 
 they went accordingly, accompanied by the miffionary, and pafifed on horfeback 
 over a marrow river, but 10 feet deep. They found on the other fide a nun 
 rous throng, whom curioiity to fee them had brought thither. From thence 
 
 they
 
 Directions/^ Sailing from Siam to the River o/*Cameodia. 373 
 
 they were condu&ed to the audience chamber. This building had nothing 
 extraordinary pleating to the eye ; it had neither grandeur of architecture, nor 
 was it richly ornamented ; it was only an open hall, confining of two large 
 edifices, without partition, fupported by plain pillars of red wood. 
 
 The throne whereon the king was placed, had none of the fplcndor and 
 magnificence of the Eaitern Kings, of which many travellers have given fuch 
 pompous defcriptions. This was a plain foot-ftool, railed and covered with a 
 carpet ; behind it was a china varnifhed fcreen. The king's drefs confuted 
 in a gown of black damalk, laced with gold, intermixed with mother-of-pearl, 
 and clafped, and over it a fhawl of very fine callico, edged with a gold fringe, 
 upon a narrow gold triming. His crown was of fcarlet cloth, without 
 jewels, and only bordered with a narrow gold lace of Japan. He had alio 
 little bufkins on, which none in the kingdom, befides himfelf, were permitted 
 to wear. 
 
 His body-guard was compofed of 12 men, clothed in red filk, with a turban 
 of the fame colour, each of which held a fabre, whofe hilt was gilt with gold. 
 At his left hand were four mandarin loyes, drefTed like the king, except the 
 bufkins, who had alio guards. At his ri°ht hand flood a mandarin of Cochin- 
 china, with feveral other mandarins, and about 200 officers, all placed according 
 to their ffations. 
 
 They placed the ftrangers and the miiTionary at the entrance of the hall. 
 The kins, after viewing; them fome time, caufed betel (a leaf which is chewed 
 in the Indies, fomewhat like our tobacco) to be preiented to them, and ordered 
 thofe about him to fay he was overjoyed to fee the French, and glad of the oppor- 
 tunity to oblige the fubjects of a king, whofe grandeur, power, and renown, 
 extended to his dominions. Their anfwer, full of acknowledgements for his 
 goodnefs, was interpreted to the king ; he exprefled his fatisiaelion, by bowing 
 his head, and withdrew with his attendants. 
 
 Soon after, they were introduced to the dining-room, where the king ar.d 
 his court were already fet at table. The French had one prepared for them, 
 krved up with the four quarters of a hog, two boiled and two roafled, fome fow Is, 
 and other meats in the country manner. This firft fervice was fucceeded by 
 the White parts of fowls, minced with fome fweet-meats. The king ordered 
 them fome of his own drink, which they found good ; after which they were 
 prefented with a comedy. 
 
 At the end of the performance, one of the principal mandarins fent to M. 
 Grave to demand of him 30 necuncs, which make 420 Spanifh piaftres 
 
 (amoui 1
 
 374 d AVw Directory jor the East-Indies. 
 
 (amounting to £.94, 10/ - fterling) ; he alledged that this Turn was to fupply 
 the fhip with refrelhments, and that it was the cuftom of that place to pay- 
 beforehand. Upon a remonftrance that this fum was exorbitant, he reduced 
 it to 5 necunes, or 70 piaftres : but M. Grave faying he was not in a condition 
 to fatisfy him, they permitted him to fend an officer on board the {hip to fetch 
 the money. In the interim, the king ordered them to afk him if he had a 
 mind to fee his palace, which was but a quarter of a league off; he thanked him 
 for the honour of his offer, and withdrew with the reft. 
 
 During thefe feigned courtefies, the mandarins held a council, wherein it 
 
 was refolved to fend to Cambodia for a mandarin {killed in military affairs, to 
 
 whom mould be given the command of feveral galleys, which they defigned to 
 
 arm, to feize the fbip. For this purpofe they caufed feveral troops to marcb. 
 
 along the coaft, who mould be ready (at a proper place) to embark for this 
 
 expedition. Happily fome Chriftians made a diicovery of this plot to the mif- 
 
 lionary, who communicated it to M. Grave, and the captain of the fhip, on 
 
 board which the miffionary had orders to accompany the officer, who was gone 
 
 to fetch the 70 piaftres they had agreed for. M. le Gac, upon this advice, was 
 
 at a lofs what meafures to purfue ; he firft thought of weighing <+-}, but was 
 
 very loth to leave his officers behind ; befides, a fudden departure would be 
 
 of dangerous coniequence to the Sieur Gouge and the other officers. The 
 
 miffionary reprefented that they were liable to be ftriped of every thing ; that 
 
 even he himfelf would not be {pared, on fuppofition of his being accefiary to 
 
 to their efcape ; that then, forfaken and wandering about the country, they would 
 
 not only be oppreffed with mifery, but the malicious and unmerciful populace 
 
 would practife a thoufand barbarities upon them, as happened to the crew of a 
 
 Dutch fhip that was loft on the coaft ; nor would their misfortunes have the 
 
 leaft effect: upon this cruel people. 
 
 It may be eafily imagined what terror this difcourfe had on the people, who 
 were now under the fame apprehensions. Upon the return of the Sieur Gouge 
 and the officer, M. Grave and his companions made new efforts to regain their 
 liberty. They fought the prince, with a view oi ? making ftrong remonftrances 
 to him on the manner of their proceeding, with refpecl to themlelves, contrary 
 to honour and the law of nations. The miffionary did not accompany them 
 this time, judging it more prudent to wait 'till he was lent for ; it happened a? 
 he had wifhed. 
 
 The prince (who could not underftand what they faid to him) fent for the 
 Sieur Gouge, who made a pathetic [peech in fupport of their arguments ; he 
 
 anfwefed
 
 DiRECTio&yor Sailing from Siam to the River of Cambodia. 375 
 
 anfwered, that the manner in which he had acted with refpecT: to them, was 
 the refult of a confultation between the king,, the mandarins, and himfelf ; 
 that, notwith (landing their interefts were dear to him, he defired to be excufed 
 from feeing them again, becaufe he was unwilling to incur the difpleafure of the 
 mandarins of the council ; he received them with great freedom, caufed them to- 
 eat and drink with him, and was fo gallant as to offer them women ; but, 
 under the anxiety they laboured, the moit feducing charms could have no relifh, 
 nor excite in them an inclination to lewdnefs. 
 
 The fame day, toward evening, the miffionary received an order from the 
 chief mandarin, to go on board of the fhip, as from him, to require the 30 
 necunes, or 420 piaftres, according to their firit demand, and to command the 
 captain to fail with his crew a league above the mouth of Baria river. Thefe orders 
 were very refolutely given, therefore M. Grave and the two officers font a 
 letter by him for M. Le Gac, acquainting him therein, that, defpairing of ever 
 efcapingout of the hands of thefe barbarians, they defired he would fail as foon 
 as he pleafed, and that they were religned to furrer all the hardfhips of their 
 captivity. M. Le Gac (moved with extreme fbrrow) defired the Sieur Gouge 
 to propofe to the mandarins the ranfomof his officers for the fum they required; 
 that he would leave them four days to confider of it, but at the expiration of 
 that time he would fail'. 
 
 This propofal was accordingly made to the mandarin ; he came immediately 
 to the village, off which the (hip lay, to coflfult with the other mandarins ; 
 and at the fame time caufed the Sieur Gouge, M. Grave, and the two officers 
 to come thither alfo ; buoying up the three lalt with hopes of being fent from 
 thence on board of their own fhip : but the miffionary learned (by Chriftians 
 well informed), that the mandarin came to this village to give Orders to attack 
 the fhip (which he thought well laden with treafure) ; that his intention was 
 to put the prieff. and the three officers each in a feparate galley, that, if the 
 fhip fhould make the leaf! reliirance, or any of his people mould be killed, he 
 might have an opportunity of facriheing them to his revenge. Such was the 
 fitwation of thefe poor ollicers, who feemed to have no other vmble end to their 
 calamities but certain death. 
 
 They fet out accordingly, after recommending themfelves to God ; and lay 
 the fame day within a league of the village where this enterppife was hatching. 
 They found the prince there, whom they fainted, and whole protection they 
 implored ; he affined them he would affile at the council, and efpoufe their 
 cauic there, and endeavour to prevent thedeiigns of the mandarins. M. Grave 
 
 njode
 
 3"6 <A New Directory for /£<? East-Indies. 
 
 made him a prefent of his fword, imagining he had a mind to it ; the prince 
 accepted the gift, but defired him not to mention it to the mandarins, becaufe he 
 had meafures to take with them. 
 
 The next day in the morning, a report of one of the fhip's guns was heard ; 
 the council ordered M. Grave to be aiked the meaning of this ; he anfwered, 
 that it was a fignal for failing. Upon this the mandarins entered into a con- 
 ference with them, when (after many debates on both fides) they agreed to 
 what the zealous miffionary had propofed a little warmly, even at the hazard 
 of his own life ; that the 3 officers fhould embark in a boat with 8 rowers, 
 and that he himfelf fhould accompany them on board their fhip, to receive 
 the 420 piaftres, by way of ranlbm. They caufed alio another boat to go 
 with them under pretence of convoy, with 10 or 12 men, armed with fabres aud 
 fpears, which followed the firft. They arrived near the fhip at 7 o'clock in 
 the everting, when the fhip's boat put off to receive them. They returned 
 the prieft a thoufand thanks for the care he had employed in fuch a trouble- 
 fome affair, and for the happy fuccefs of his negociation ; accordingly counted 
 out to him the 420 piaftres, and he returned a-fhore. 
 
 The morning following, the Sieur Gouge came back to the fhip with a 
 meflre from the mandarins, to defire them to fend a boat to fetch fome buffa- 
 loes, hogs, fowls, and other refrefhments, which they offered them. M. Le 
 Gac anfwered, that he would receive them if they thought proper to fend 
 them in a boat of their own ; but for his part he was not in a humour to truft 
 again to their caprice, either his boat, or any of his men. The miffionary 
 commended his anfwer ; and having received repeated marks of his friendihip, 
 he took his leave. The (hip diredlly fet fail for Pulo Condore, where it was 
 ordered to touch before it went to China. The detainer of the officers had 
 prolonged them 30 days on the Coaft of Tiiompa. 
 
 (In the Arabian Gulf, the Severn, Captain Collier, 1745, met with much 
 the ; m tr 'meat, and at la ft was forced to pay upward of 500 dollars to the 
 or what he called, ^age duty, before he got rel ' ; befides his 
 d taming a cheft of treafure for efcorting 4 others through his dominions to 
 thofe of Mocha, in the Red Sea ; which, to give Jiim his due, was pretty 
 honed, confidering he had all 5 in his power; though, in fact, the 500 dollars 
 were paid for this verve ration). 
 
 This relation is inferted here, in order to give an idea of the character of 
 the inhabitants of this coaft. Thofe whp'have hitherto imagined they might 
 
 Blifh
 
 Directions for Sailikg from Siam to the River of Cambodia. 377 
 
 eftablifh advantageous fcttlemcnts here, have been unacquainted, or greatly 
 mifinformed of the temper of thefe people ; and the (hips that approach this 
 place may hence be advifed to take proper methods to avoid putting in here. 
 M. Grave, who fent the company this relation, whereof this is but an extract 
 hath defcribed therein the lives and manners of the natives, lb far as he had 
 time to inform himfelf thereof during his (lay there. Perhaps it may not be 
 difagreeable to recount what he fays of them. 
 
 The Cochinchinefe and Loyes are two diftin£l people. The former came 
 
 out of China at the time of its conqueft by the Tar'ers, and relemble the 
 
 Chinele in their features, their beards, and their drefs, excepting that they do 
 
 not cut off" their hair, which the modern Chinefe, living under the Tartar 
 
 government, are obliged to do ; and at Batavia they pay a tax of a dollar per 
 
 month for the indulgence. They wear in their ceremonies a long black gown, 
 
 like our lawyers. They value themfelves much above other nations, and 
 
 think themfelves more learned and ingenious, though they have a very mallow 
 
 capacity, fince they are abfolutely ignorant of trade, or even hufbandry, and 
 
 confequently very poor. Their ftrength only confifcs in fbme galleys, each 
 
 armed with only 40 or 45 men, two fmall cannon, with mulkets, pikes, fabres, 
 
 and fagayes, which they ule very Ikilfully. Their officers wear a robe of black 
 
 filk, open at the fides, with a horle-hair cap in the form of a lugar-loaf, and a. 
 
 tail behind. The foldiers have their fieeves fomething lefs ; and their cap is 
 
 of a buffalo's hide, like a helmet, which is laid to be labre-proof. 
 
 The Loyes are natives of the kingdom of Tfiompa, who maintained a Ionp 
 war againit the Cochinchinefe ; but are at length become tributary, by a treaty 
 of peace concluded between them, about the beginning of this century. The 
 conditions were, that the king of Tfiompa fhould pofiefs his dominions in 
 tranquility, but that he fhould pay homage to the king of Cochinchina ; a 
 mandarin of which kingdom was to hold the fecond place at the royal council 
 of Tfiompa, where nothing could be decided without his confent. 
 
 The Loyes are large, nervous, and better made than the Cochinchinefe. 
 They are of a reddifh complexion ; their nofe is flattifh ; they have long and 
 black hair, little whiikers, and a fmall beard upon their chin. Their drefs is 
 a long frock and a pair of callico drawers, over which they wear a white gar- 
 ment in form of a petticoat, with a gold and filk fringe, according to the 
 circumftances of the perfon. The king's guard and mandarins are clothed 
 differently from thofe of Cochinchinefe, inftead of the black robe, a white 
 cabaye, with a turban ; the officers wear them a little longer than the foldiers. 
 
 Ggg The
 
 378 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 The character of thefe people is very different from that of the others : thele 
 are more humane and more affable to {bangers, more laborious, and richer, 
 though not fo ftrong by land as the Cochinchinefe, whofe number is greater; 
 yet by fea the Loyes have the advantage, their galleys being better built. Their 
 beats are in form of tartanes, and ferve them for fiihing, whereof they catch 
 great quantities. 
 
 There are among them a caff, or feci:, called Moyes, which inhabit the moun- 
 tains, and are employed at hard labour, like flaves, and wear only a fmall piece 
 of linen to cover their nakednefs. 
 
 Both nations have nearly the fame laws. They obferve great decorum, from 
 the king's mandarins, and thofe in office, to the loweff. clafs of people ; but 
 though policy and law are cried up here, equity and right are excluded. They 
 are punifhed for the leaft offence. The common people cannot keep their money 
 to themfelves ; thofe on whom, any is found are condemned, by the mandarin 
 of the place, to be fined, or receive a fevere baftinado. Their money is copper, 
 of the bignefs of a French liard, and is called calh ; 100 of them go to an 
 amarade, which is valued at 30 French fols, or fyi. f fterling. The office of 
 mandarin is granted to him who prelents the greateft fum to the king, and the 
 larger the fum the greater the dignity he has bellowed upon him : but in this 
 they differ, that the Loye mandarins (where they are not rich enough to fatisfy 
 their exactions) have alone the privilege of borrowing money, on great intereft, 
 of the king's wives, who effeem this method of commerce, it being all their 
 revenue ; whence each of thefe chiefs gets the moil he can in his diftri£t, 
 and the fubjecls are never the better for it. 
 
 Religion is free in this country, as in China ; thofe that prevail mofl are 
 Mahometanifm, and the laws of Confucius. Idolatry is likewife prac~lifed here ; 
 iome wormipping animals, others the fun, the moon, and the flars, or the 
 firmament.' One thing extraordinary is, that the Mahometans eat pork, and 
 proliitute their wives* except their lawful or firfl wife, whom they cannot put 
 away without having detected her of adultery. The marriages are performed, 
 without ceremony, and with very little trouble ; the confent of the parties is 
 fufficient ; and after it is over, they chew betel together. In general they live 
 on nothing but rice and dried riffi, and even that half rotten ; but they drink 
 a great deal of parjar arrack, and are frequently drunk. 
 
 The foutherh parts of this country produce a little cotton, indigo, and bad 
 fill; ; f > that the inhabitants have no trade but among themfelves, of which 
 filling makes the moll coniiderable part. 
 
 On
 
 DiREcTioNs/Jr Sailing _//-<?/« Siam to the River of 'Cambodia. 379 
 
 On the north coaft, the Chinefe fend feveral fhips yearly, laden with tea, 
 the worft fort of filk, china-ware, and other commodities of the country ; they 
 take in exchange gold, which is of greater efteem than that of China; they 
 prize alfo a fweet-fecnted fort of wood, which grows upon this coaft, to burn 
 on the tombs of their relations, and to honour their poufas and images. This 
 commerce was interrupted about 25 years ago, by the ill behaviour of theib 
 people to the Chinefe, whofe fliips they plundered and burnt, and refufed to 
 make them reparation. From that time they have been cautious of trading 
 thither ; and the Loyes have impofed new laws of cf-^age, which muft be paid 
 before they can traffic ; likewife their mandarins, on pretence of meafurino- 
 the {hips, rummage the officers cabins, &c. and take away what they think 
 proper. Thefe impofitions are too flagrant to think of carrying on any trade 
 with them ; for if they ufe their neighbours in this manner, what are Europeans 
 to expecl: ? a people wholly unknown to them, and whom they never fee, except 
 by chance. 
 
 CCXCV. Directions concerning the Islands lying off the Coast o/~Tsiomp a. 
 
 Forty- feven miles SE. of Tiger Ifland, in latitude 10? 32'N. lies Pulo Cecil-, 
 furnamed de Mer, or of the fea, to diftinguifh it from the other Cecir near 
 fliore, and 8 leagues diftant from the faid Tiger Ifland. Cecir de Mer lies NE. 
 and SW. about 2 leagues in length ; the land is dry and barren, of a yellowifh 
 colour; the middle rifes in a mountain, and to the fouthward of it are feveral 
 hillocks. About three quarters of a league from the NW. point there is a lar^e 
 rock, and within gun-ihot of the NE. point a little ifland, whofe foil is reddim. 
 It is furrounded with rocks, both above and underwater; and a fand-bank 
 reaches from thefe rocks to the little ifland. The 17th of January, 1738, Mr. 
 Herbert, in the fliip Prince de Conti, after obferving in latitude 10? ^8'N. and 
 fleering a league and a half SW. law the Coaft of Tfiompa bearing NW. and 
 afterwards Pulo Cecir de Mer SSW. Having feen thefe lands, the night pre- 
 vented them from pafling the bank of the Court of Holland : they therefore 
 flood off and on with an eafy fail all night, waiting for day-light to pafs the 
 danger ; founded 38 fathoms, grey fand, and fteering about NW. at midnight, 
 founded 25 fathoms, rocky ground, and 4~}ed, fearing the currents micrht 
 drive them upon the fhoal. At day-break they were upon its north ed°-e, from 
 whence Pulo Cecir de Mer bore SE. 7 or 8 leagues diftance. Weighino- from 
 
 G g g 3 this
 
 380 A New Directory for the EAST-lNDiESr 
 
 this place, they neared the Continent, within 4 leagues, and afterward fleered 
 toward Pulo Condore. 
 
 Half way between Tiger Ifland and Pulo Cecir de Mer, lies the hank of the 
 Court of Holland, whole fhoalefl part, according to report, hath but 4 fathoms 
 water. The fhip Prince de Conti <f-^ed clofe to it in 25 fathoms, fmall ftones ; 
 from thence, having feen and flood toward Pulo Cecir de Mer, found that the 
 north part thereof bears NNW. off this ifland. Ships from the north watd or 
 fouthward may avoid this bank, by failing along Pulo Cecir de Mer, at 2. 
 leagues diftance, and in a fine channel, like that between this bank and the 
 Coaft of Tfiompa, where you have 23 or 24 fathoms, fand mixed with fmall 
 floues. This bank, it is judged, might be of ufe, if it was furveyed and 
 found free from dangers. 
 
 ENE. of Pulo Cecir de Mer, diftance 1 7 leagues, there is an ifland, with 
 two lefler ones, which fome navigators call the Three Brothers. It is of a 
 middling height, and from the fouth point thereof projects a reef. 
 
 (The fhip L'Argonaute, in 1730, returning from China, made the northern- 
 mofl ifland, bearing from NW. to WbN. diftance about 5 leagues. It appeared 
 (efpecially in the middle) of a height that might be feen 10 leagues at fea. He 
 obferved, at the fame time, in latitude 11? $'N. from which it may be con- 
 cluded, that this ifland lies in latitude 11? io'N. From hence he fleered firft 
 SW. then SWbS. and at. a quarter after 4 o'clock, faw the other ifland bearing 
 WSW. diftance 5 leagues ; and at three quarters after 5, it bore from W§S. to 
 WSWtW, 3 or 4 leagues. This laft appeared low, even, and had on its 
 north point two hills, which he took for iflands at a diftance. 
 
 By working the fbip's run, this ifland lies SW. of the former, diftance above 
 15 or 16 leagues ; this journal makes no mention of the foul ground between 
 thefe iflands. By their run from thefe toward Pulo Condore, it is evident that 
 thefe iflands are the fame, which are commonly called Rabo de Lacra. 
 
 NE. 1 5 leagues from this laft, in latitude 1 1? io'N. there is a fmall ifland, a 
 little higher. All the old charts draw from one to the other a dotted line, to 
 reprefent the ridge of a bank, which feems to indicate that the bottom between 
 thefe two iflands is dangerous. The Portuguefe call this bank and the iflands. 
 Rabo de Lacra, or the Scorpion's Tail. 
 
 Ten leagues fouth of the Three Brothers are two other little iflands, and a 
 great rock above water, which the Englifh call John Catwieks, and the Portu- 
 
 fe Pulo Sapata, from a refemblance the eaflernmoft ifland has thereto, at 
 certain bearings. The bearings and diflances of the Three Brothers with Pulo 
 
 6apata,
 
 Directions concerning //^Islands lying of the Co a s t of Ts i o m p a . 3 S 1 
 
 Sapata, were taken by the Sieur Bern, in a voyage to Manilla, 1724. He faw 
 Pulo Sapata, palled to the weflward of the little ifland, fituate WNW. of that 
 in the fhape of a (hoc, and when it bore fouth, about 2 leagues, he law the 
 Three Brothers bearing NNE. upon which he flood toward them. It lies in 
 latitude 9? s$'N. Almoft all the mips bound to China, the Phillippines, or Japan, 
 after Pulo Condore, endeavour to make Pulo Sapata, to fhape their courfe with 
 greater certainty ; and avoid the rock of Andrade, which mofi: navigators place 
 at the diftance of 1 8 leagues EbN. from Pulo Sapata. 
 
 SSE. of Pulo Sapata lies the bank of Mildeburg or Middlebourg ; it extends 
 only a quarter of a league in length, from E. to W. according to the journal of a 
 navigator who faw it returning from Manilla ; he faw the fea break there, and 
 found 7 fathoms water on its wefternmoft point. 
 
 The Paracels is a great rocky bank, extending from N. to S. off the Coaft of 
 Cochinchina, according to mofi charts, 92 leagues in length, from latitude 12? 
 ic/N. to latitude 16? 45'N. and 20 leagues in breadth. We have been informed, 
 within thefe few years, that this fpace is filled with feveral iflands of different 
 fizes, with fand banks and rocks in many parts of it. 
 
 CCXCVI. Directions concerning the Coasts of Tsiompa and Cochin- 
 china. 
 
 Eight leagues ENE. of Tiger Ifland lies Pulo Cecir de Terre, about 5 miles 
 off the high Cape Cecir : it is low barren land, and furrounded with rocks both 
 above and under water. 
 
 Between Tiger Ifland and Pulo Cecir de Terre there is a large bay, which 
 extends NNE. about \\ leagues, as far as Boden River. This would be a good 
 place for refreshments, if the people were of a more focial difpolition. At the 
 fouth- we ft point of this bay, and about 5 miles to the northward of Sandy Point, 
 there is frefh water. 
 
 When Cecir Bay bears WbNjN. 6 or 7 leagues, you may fee to the north- 
 ward, two or three little hills, like fugar loaves, and on the fouth fide a long- 
 ledge of fand, which reaches, as it were, along the coaft to the Sandy Point ; 
 thefe marks make this bay eafilv known from the others. 
 
 Near Cape Cecir there is a dangerous reef, called Breda's Shoal, projecting out 
 from Pulo Cecir de Terre. To avoid it, you muft pafs 3 leagues without this 
 ifland ; for nearer the water fhoals, and the bottom grows foul. 
 
 Between the bank of the Court of Holland and that of Matthew de Brito, 
 you have 20 and 22 fathoms, at \\ leagues off ihore. If thence you ftir 
 
 N'E.
 
 3S2 A New Directory^/ the East-Indies. 
 
 NE. and NEbN. you have but 15 and 12 fathoms, fand mixed with fmall 
 {tones ; then Tiger Ifland bears NW. If the courie be continued, the depth 
 increafes again to i3 fathoms oft Cecir Bay, and gradually to 24 about 
 3 leagues off Pulo Cecir dc Terre ; fometimes fand, and fometimes ftony 
 foundings. 
 
 If you fail i\ league off more, within the bank of Matthew de Brito,' you 
 have 9 and 10 fathoms, as far as Tiger Ifland ; and from thence to Pulo Cecir 
 its deepens pre fen tly from 10 to 14 and 15 fathoms ; then it fhoals again (if you 
 continue to fail along more) to 10, 9, and 8 fathoms ; and within Cecir Bay, 
 to 6 fathoms. 
 
 Padaran Bay lies in latitude n? 25'N. about 10 or 1 1 leagues to the north- 
 eafhvard of Pulo Cecir de Terre ; and further on, in latitude 11? 47IV. is the 
 Falfe Cape Varella, or Avarillo : it is high, with a rock at the top of it, like 
 a centry-box. The Portuguefe gave it this name, to diftinguifh it from another 
 to the northward, very much alike. Clofe by the high land there is a long 
 valley of fand. 
 
 Between Padaran Bay and the Falfe Varella, there is a bay extending NbW. 
 whole bottom is exceeding foul ; and at its mouth there is an ifland equally 
 encompafled with danger. 
 
 The entrance of Comorin Bay is to the northward of the Falfe Cape Varella, 
 and extends NWbW. Going in you find 40, 35, and 30 fathoms. TheNW. 
 fide is very rocky and full of fhoais ; and the adjacent lands appear double, 
 with many points and bays. 
 
 About 9 leagues from the Falfe Cape Varella lies the fouth point of 
 Weflen's Bay : it is known by whitifh fpots upon the land to the fouthward 
 thereof; alfo by feveral iflands near it, whereof Fifher's Ifle is the mofl remark- 
 able ; it lies very near the north point of the bay, and feems very barren. 
 Near this bay you perceive, to the weftward, a hill, which in clear weather 
 refembles Cape Varella ; but it lies more loutherly, and generally is obfeured 
 by the clouds. 
 
 Pagoda Bay lies a little to the northward of Fifher's Ifland, as do thofe of St. 
 Philip, or Sir John Phipps's Bay, and Scutins, or Schuyten Bay, which feem 
 barren. Hereahout the land is of a moderate height and flcep ; but up in the 
 country the land is higher. Between this bay and Cape Varella, you may fee, 
 on the land, feveral downs of w hite land. 
 
 The
 
 Directions concerning the Coast o/*Tsiompa. 383 
 
 The True Cape Varella (named thus by the Portuguefe) is fituate in. latitude 
 13? 7' or 8'N. and is known by a high hill, on the top whereof is a rock, 
 like a pyramid, or tower, which may be {een at a great diftance, either from 
 the northward or the fouthvvard ; beyond which the coaft. forms a bight, or 
 great bay, whofe whole extent is not vifible till you are paft the cape : it is 
 faid that its bottom is good and fife, in 1 5 fathoms, and that you may take in 
 frefh water there ; but you muft be greatly on your guard, on account of ths 
 inhabitants, who are all thieves, and treacherous. 
 
 Nine leagues to the northward of Cape Varella, you meet with Pulo 
 Cambir de Terre, which is a long and low ifland, about 1 \ league from the 
 main, and is known by the fpots of different colours of its foil. To the 
 fouthward thereof is a rock, on the top of which are four great ftones {landing 
 upright, which feem to have been placed with great order and exadlnefs. You, 
 may 4-} in 1 2. fathoms* fand, between the continent and the ifland, and take in 
 frefh water out of a great river, which empties itfelf near Pulo Cambir. The 
 coaft hereabout trenches a little more to the wefKvard. 
 
 Coming from the northward, as you near Pulo Cambir, you will fee a hill 
 like that on Cape Varella ; but that is further, and different in this, that 
 when it bears SWbW^W. you may fee another little hillock to the northward 
 thereof. 
 
 ENE. 15 leagues off Pulo Cambir de Terre, upon the edge of the Paracels, 
 lies a little ifland, called Pulo Cambir de Mer. 
 
 Chinchen Bay, whofe north point is fituate in latitude 13? 52^. is very 
 extenfive : it is known by a great rock, which rifes like a fteeple out of the 
 water, and by feveral hummocks a little to the northward, refembling iflands. 
 When you have the bay open, and it bears weft, about 3 leagues diftance, you 
 may fee there two rocks, the fbuthernmoil of which is divided into three, by 
 which it may be eafily known. 
 
 To the northward of Chinchen Bay, you find the entrance of a larger river, 
 beyond which the coaft extends NNW. and forms a bay full of iflands and rocks* 
 On the north fide are feveral downs of fand, which may be feen a great way 
 off at fea. 
 
 Pulo Canton, Cantoan, or Cantin, is in latitude 15? 4o / N. about 10 miles 
 from the Continent ; it is about 3 leagues long, being high at each end, and 
 low in the middle, which makes it miftaken, at a diftance, for two iflands. 
 From the fouth-eaft part there runs out a reef, the length of a long cannon-fhot, 
 
 on
 
 384 New Directory for thi East-Indies, 
 
 on which the fea breaks. Many dangers furround this illand ; the bottom is 
 foul, and therefore fhips fhould not approach it too near. 
 
 You may fail between the continent, or Cape Bethang and Pulo Canton, 
 in o-ood foundings of 30 or 40 fathoms. To the ibuthward of Cape Bethang, 
 there are feveral rocks both above and under water ; but keeping in the above 
 depth, you have nothing to fear. 
 
 On Pulo Canton there is frefli water, but the difficulty is to land there ; 
 whereas on the Continent, oppofite the ifland, there is a ipacious river, with 
 5 or 6 fathoms water. Salan-Buigh, a town lituate on its fouth point, may 
 be {een 12 or 13 leagues. This coaft and the parts adjacent, are very populous. 
 
 Two leagues NNW. of Pulo Canton, there is a fmall flat ifland, whofe 
 coaft is very foul ; but there is a good paffage between thefe iflands and the 
 main. 
 
 NWbN. about 16 leagues along fhore, lies Campella or Camponella Ifland, 
 in latitude 16? 25'N. It is pretty large and high, extending NNW. and SSE. 
 upon it are two high mountains (the fouthernmoft is the higheft) and in the 
 middle a valley full of trees. You may get frefh water on the weftern coaft, 
 next the continent (from which this ifland is about 2 leagues diftance) ; there 
 you may cf-^ hi fmall bays, very convenient for that purpofe. The fhore, on 
 the Continent, is low and fandy. At the N\V. point of the ifland are three 
 little iflands, one of which is very high, and at the SE. point is another lefs. 
 
 SE about 3 leagues, there is another middling ifland, called the Falfe Cam- 
 pella, from the SE. end whereof projects a reef. To the weft ward of Campella 
 Ifland, upon the Continent, you fee the entrance of Touran Bay : we have no 
 certain knowledge of this port, though it is the moft trading one on the Coaft 
 ofQuinam, becaufe the Chinefe, Tonquineie, and the neighbouring natives, 
 are the only people trading thither. 
 
 Farther within the Bay of Tonquin than the Campellas, on the Coafts ofQui- 
 nam and Tonquin, the places are but little frequented by Europeans. The 
 delcriptions ot thefe coaits are not particular enough to be of any ufe, except 
 the account of two rivers, which empty themfelves into this bay ; one lituate 
 in latitude 20? 6'N. which the Chinefe and Siamefe ulually frequent ; the 
 other, 20 leagues to the north-eaftward thereof, in latitude 20? 45'N. It was 
 in this laft, being the deepen 1 , that the Englifh, French, Dutch, and Portu- 
 guefe, formerly traded. 
 
 In the Bay of Tonquin you have regular foundings all over; in the middle 
 are 40 and 45 fathoms, black land and ouZe ; and on the weft fide, red land, 
 with iome ouze alfo ; the depth decreasing gradually toward the fhore. 
 
 The
 
 Directions concerning the Coast of Tsiompa. 
 
 The weft coaft of the Ifland Hai-Nan hounds the hay on the eaft fide. '■ 
 ifland is large, and the land very high ; it extends about 50 leagues from SW 
 NE. and is 30 leagues in breadth. On the S. and 9E. ftdes are fome ports, laid 
 to be very commodious ; but you mould not enter them without one of I 
 pilots of the place, who always offer their fervi'ce to thole mips which they i e 
 approach their coaft. 
 
 The weft coaft of. Hai-Nan Ifland, which faces the Bay of Tonquin, is 
 encompaffed with feveral banks; but you ma/ eafily difcover the approach 
 thereto, by a pretty regular decreafe of the depth. If you keep founding, and 
 do not come under 15 fathoms, you have nothing to fear. Upon this coaft 
 there is a high mountain, which may be feen 20 or 25 leagues at fea ; when 
 it bears eaft, it appears craggy, and forms feveral points of different fhape and 
 height. 
 
 When the fhips bound for Tonquin are to the northward of Campella 
 Ifland above-mentioned, they need not keep any further along the weft coaft 
 of Quiham ; but from thence fteer NW. having regard to the tides, left they 
 fet you to the fouthward of Hai-Nan Ifland, or on the banks off the weft coaft : 
 in the firft cafe, the fight of land, and in the fecond, the foundings, will enable 
 you to prevent thefe inconveniences, by fleering a different courfe from that juft 
 prefcribed. 
 
 As foon as you are in latitude iq?N. and in 28 or 30 fathoms, if you have 
 not feen Hai-Nan Ifland, fteer NbW. to make the NE. iflands, the fouthern- 
 moft of which lies in latitude 20? 35'N. 13 leagues ESE. of the principal river 
 of Tonquin ; they are of a middling height. In this courfe you mult alio 
 allow for the tides, which fometimes fet down the bay : if you are driven thither, 
 and obliged to beat up again, you muft not come nearer the bank, which lies 
 off the coaft, than 8 fathoms ; and you muft be careful of thislikewife, as you 
 come near the river. 
 
 Toward the northward there is a great mountain in a ftraight line, called 
 the Elephant ; it ferves for a leading mark to the 4->age : when it bears 
 NWbN. ftand to the weft ward, to get into 6 fathoms, which you will find 
 about a league without the bar ; and when the Little Ifland Perel bears NNE. 
 about a league, you may <+-}. 
 
 The rifhermen, inhabitants of the little village called Bafta (whofe fituation 
 is advantageous for the dilcovery of fhips) ferve as pilots to enter the river ; 
 they come on board upon the firft notice of firing a gun ; but if the fhip is 
 
 Hhh pretty
 
 386 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 pretty large, they will not venture to carry it up, except in the height of the 
 ipring tides. 
 
 The mouth of the river is about 2 miles wide, and the channel over the bar 
 half a mile. When the flood comes in, it caufes very dangerous eddies between 
 the banks. During the months of May, June, and July, the water rifes but 
 15 or 16 feet upon the bar, in the height of the fprings ; but in November, 
 December, and January, 26 or 27 feet. 
 
 The river is not fo wide within as at the entrance. It is about c or 6 leagues 
 up this river, to a village called Domea, where the Dutch lhips generally lie ; 
 but the trade is carried on higher up, about 100 miles from the river's mouth, 
 where it is difficult failing up in a large fhip. 
 
 About 8 or 10 leagues from Perel Ifland above-mentioned, begins a duffer of 
 iflands and banks : thefe extend all along the coaff, from latitude io? 20' to 
 latitude 21? 2o'N. 
 
 You muff fail fromTonquin River at the beginning, or at leaft by the middle 
 of November ; then the northerly wind blows freffi ; but at the end of this 
 month, as they come from the E. and ESE. they are agaiuft you, and you will 
 be obliged to ffay till the end of December, or beginning of January, before 
 vou can get out of the bay ; for then they blow from NNE. to E. (being a 
 continuation of the eaftern monfoon), and the currents run to the fouthward, 
 from 30 to 60 miles in the 24 hours, as was experienced by the True Briton 
 and Warwick, in December, 1 75 1. 
 
 Having got over the bar, you fteer acrofs the bay, and endeavour to get fight 
 of Pulo Campella ; thence continue your courfe along the coaff, from which 
 you muff keep at a good diflance, on account of its being a lee-fhore, which 
 may puzzle fhips to weather the eaffernmoft points and capes. 
 
 CCXCVII. Directions for the Passage to Caina, between the Island 
 
 Hai-Nan and the Par Ac els. 
 
 Inffead of Tonquin, if you are bound to China, you muff keep along the 
 Coait of Cochinchina, 'till you get light of the Iflands of Campella, before you 
 crofs over to Hai-Nan Ifland ; by this means you prevent the effects of the 
 currents, which, coming out of Tonquin Bay, let ilrong to the caff ward during 
 the weffern monfoon. From within light of fhefc iflands you ffcer NEbN. to 
 make the SE. part of Hai-Nan. You have foundings in 70 and 80 fathoms, 10 
 or 1 1 leagues off"; and at 6 or 7 leagues, 50 or 60 fathoms. 
 
 When
 
 Directions for the Passage to China. 387 
 
 When you make this ifland, coming from the fbuthward, you do not directly 
 fee any thing remarkable, except Tinhofa Ifland, which is the largeft, among 
 many others, upon the coaft : having on its welt part a fteep hill, which on 
 the eaft fide Hopes gradually to a point. They fay, that at the foot of the hill, 
 on the weft fide, is a little bay. The latitude of this ifland is 18? 45'N. When 
 Tinhofa bears NW;W. about 7 leagues, in 60 fathoms, you perceive, upon 
 the Ifland Hai-Nan, 3 very high mountains, the weucrimioft of which has on 
 the top of it 2 hummocks, and the eafternmoft 2 others. 
 
 Eight leagues NEbN. off Tinhofa, is an ifland of a mieldling fize, near the 
 Coaft of Hai-Nan, called Tinhofa Falfa, whole north point makes like a quoin. 
 The iflands between them are not fo large, nor fo high : the interior part of 
 Hai-Nan is all very high ; and when the eaft point of Hai-Nan bears NW. 7 
 or 8 leagues, it appears fteep, mountainous, and cragged : among the reft 
 there is a very high mountain, which terminates with a very remarkable round 
 bluff, or rather a gap on the top of it, which feems like an ifland. The north 
 part of this ifland is not fo high as the eaftern. 
 
 From Tinhofa Falfa to the eaft point of Hai-Nan there are feveral iflands along 
 the coaft ; alfo between this and the True Ifland Tinhofa. 
 
 The Iflands of Pulo Tayas are low and barren : there arc 9 or 10 of them, 
 befide feveral rocks ; the northernmoft is fituate in latitude 19? 42NL and r 1 
 leagues to the eaftward of the northernmoft part of Hai-Nan ; (on occafion) 
 you may pafs between them, but it will be fufficient to leave them 4 or 5 leagues 
 to the weftward. From hence to the Ifland Sanciam (or St. John's) the courfe 
 is NNEvE. about 45 leagues ; the latitude of the fouth point thereof has been 
 oblerved 21? 32'N. to the eaftward of which lies Pulo Outchou (or Macow), a 
 little ifland very high, which is feparated from it by a very fmall pafTage. You 
 may eafily know your approach to thefe iflands by the foundings, which ycu 
 find a good Way off. 
 
 If you fall to the weftward of , Sanciam Ifland, and the Falfe Sanciam, which 
 is next it on that fide, there is a Rock, which at firft fight you will be apt to take 
 for a fail ; but, at the diftance of 3 leagues, it has the appearance of a little 
 pyramid^ and is called the Mandarin's Cap. As loon as you get fight of it, 
 ftand to the eaftward, going to the fbuthward of the two Sanciams and Pulo 
 Outchou ; the extremities of the former lie about eaft and weft of each other, 
 and the latter NEbE. of the fouth point of the True Sanciam. 
 
 Having pafled Pulo Outchou, you may fee from the NW. to NE. feveral 
 Iflands exceeding high, double, triple, and diverfely fhaped, forming between 
 
 H h h 2 them
 
 388 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 2 
 
 them feveral pafiages, or channels ; the principal, and that which you fhould 
 prefer to fail to, Macoa (or Macow), lies NE. and NEbE. 
 
 The firfr. Ifiand which appears in this bearing of Pulo Outchou, is called Deer 
 Ifland, whofe SW. end is high and rugged, with fome remarkable white fpots 
 at the foot thereof. Between Sanciam and Deer Ifland is a great bay, and quite 
 clofe to the latter fome Rocks above water, which are encompafled by others 
 underneath. You muft not approach them, but continue your courfe to go 
 without this whole row of iflands. Next beyond Deer Ifland is that*of Mirou 
 (by fome called Kollong, or Coang. When it bears NW. you difcover at its 
 eaft point a white fpot, which has the fhape of a mizen, or (loop's fail, by which 
 it is known ; fome fey, when it bears W. and W^-N. and that it changes into 
 the fhape of a mizen at all other bearings it can be feen, which are but very 
 few, occalioned by the intervention of a fmall ifland that lies off it. 
 
 The foundings are moftly mud hereabout. From Pulo Outchou the depth is 
 from 24 to 17 fathoms ; and beyond Mirou Ifland, toward Macao, it is lefs. 
 
 In failing toward Mirou Ifland, you fee to the eaftward the Ladroons, or 
 Thieves Iflands, which, with thofe of Lema (orLeehmo), form an archipelago, 
 extending to the northward and the eaftward. The fouthernmoft ifland, near 
 the- Channel of Macao, is called the Great Ladroon, beqaufe it is larger than 
 the others. A high mountain, round at top, rifes in the middle of it, and 
 difcovers it afar off. Very near it is another ifland of a middling fize, being 
 • feparated only by a narrow channel, called the Little Ladroon. 
 
 Two leae Jes NW. of this ifland there lies a little one, called by fome Potri (or 
 Pottoe), and by ethers the Middle Ifland. This laft name was given it, becaufe 
 of all the Ladroon Iflands this is the outermoft in the channel ; it forms 2 little 
 hillocks, and is encompafled with rocks above and under water, projecting a 
 good way cut, which oblige fhips to keep off them ; fo that it is better to fail 
 along the larboard iflands than thofe on the flarboard ; coafting about \- of a 
 league from the Enciades, Cham-chau,. and Cao Iflands, as far as the Road of 
 Macao, where you mav r f-} in 5 or 6 fathoms, fand and mud, the tow r n bearing 
 NWbW. rf'league, and the fort on the hill NW i W. The fhips that flay 
 lure <?p further in ; but this road is iurhcient for thofe bound to Canton, who 
 ; v want to take in Chinefe pilots to go up the river. 
 
 CCXCVIII.
 
 ( 3*9 ) 
 
 CCXCVIII. Directions/?;/- Saimng from the Island Sanciam, or St. 
 John's, to Amoy ; •with the Defcription of the Coast (//"China, from one to 
 the other. 
 
 When you are in 30 fathoms to the fouth-eaftward, and within fight of 
 Sanciam Ifland, fleer ENE. to get to the fouthward of the Great Ladroon 
 Ifland, in which courfe you will pafs the Lema (or Lehmo) Iflands, which 
 are not fir to the eaftvvard ; and, having paffed them, continue the fame courfe, 
 to get fight of Pedro Blanco (or the White Rock), 1 2 or 13 leagues diftant 
 therefrom. 
 
 This is a little ifland, or great rock, high, fteep, and in latitude 22? 6'N. 
 It is eafily known by its whltenefs, and diftance off the coaft, and is fafe all 
 round ; fo that you may pafs it by day or night without danger, either within 
 or without, as vou like beft. The foundings to the fouthward are 2 c and 
 30 fathoms, and to the northward, in the middle of the channel, 20 and 15 
 fathoms. 
 
 About 4 leagues north of the White Rock lies a point, to the northward of 
 which is Harling's (or Harlem) Bay, where is good °f-^age. To enter it, you 
 muft go without the ifland near the Continent ; there are alfo two rocks at 
 going in, which you may pafs on either fide. The foundings are good all over 
 the bay ; you may 4-^ in 10, 8, or 6 fathoms. 
 
 Oppcfite the bay, or as foon as you have entered it, you may fee to the 
 weft -a little foutherly, z\ or 3 leagues diftance, feveral iflands near ihore, 
 which are not perfectly known ; alfo to the eaftward of the aforefaid point 
 there is a bay, or inlet, extending to the- northward, where fmall Chinefe junks 
 frequent. 
 
 The Bay of Bear, or of Beais (or Beias), lies NNVV. of the White Rock, 
 diftance 10 leagues. The Chinefe call Beias the Ti-ol-zo ; it is full of rocks 
 and little iflands. There is no <+->ag'e, unlefs it be under the weft point of the 
 ifland, which affords fhelter from the SW. winds. 
 
 ENE. of Beais Bay lies Brandon's Bay, in which you have good foundings 
 from 4 to 7 fathoms. In coming from the SSE. or E. if you would enter 
 this bay by the eaft point (where is frcih water), you muft tail clofe to it, 
 and" fleer north, in foundings from 10 to 6 fathoms, ibit mud; you have 4 
 fathoms paffing by two little iflands (bearing Wb3. of the laid point) and fome 
 other fmall iflands near ihore. You fhould not go between the two ifland?, 
 
 becaufe
 
 39° -A New Directory for the East-Indies 
 
 becaufe there is foul ground, but keep on the north fide of the bay ; there you 
 have fhelter from all winds. 
 
 Eaftward of the eaft point of Brandon's Bay is Cranmeis (or Cramer's) 
 Bay, where are good roads, in 8 or 10 fathoms, which fhelter from the 
 northerly winds. To the eaftward of this laft lies Piflbang or Sihare Bay, 
 ctherwile called the Great Bay ; its entrance is narrow, but very paflable ; 
 and within it affords fhelter from the foutherly winds, in 6 or 7 fathoms, good 
 ground. 
 
 From Cranmeis Bay to the Great Bay, you may fail between the iflands 
 which lie before the bay, that is to fay, by leaving two iflands to the ftarboard, 
 and another larger one on the larboard. You may alfo pafs fafely between the 
 two iflands and the point of Cranmeis Bay. Otherwife thus ; from Cranmeis 
 Bay to the Great Bay, you may fail between the three iflands which lie before 
 the Great Bay, by leaving two iflands to the flarboard, and another larger one 
 on the larboard. You may alfo pafs fafely between two other fmall iflands that 
 lie before Cranmeis Bay, and the eaflern point of the faid bay. 
 
 If you would go without the ifland in the channel, between this point and 
 Piflbang, you may fleer EbN. and eaft 4 miles, then north, till you are oppofite 
 Piflbang, which is 4 miles more ; but thole who pafs within the ifland muft, 
 take care of the rocks which border the coaft. 
 
 About 2 leagues from Piflbang or Great Bay, lies that of Groaning (or 
 Groenigen) in which is a good fhelter from the NE. monfoons, provided you 
 are within the ifland which lies in the ofEng, near the eaft point of the bay. 
 You muft not come too near the eaft point, by reafon of a reef projecting a 
 good way out. 
 
 ENE. about r 4 miles from Groaning Bay, lies that of Reyorfon (or 
 Reyenfcn) where you are flickered from the northerly winds, in 9, 8, 7, 6, and 
 5 -fathoms, good ground. Going in you pals dole to the ifland at the eaft point ; 
 minding your lead, on account of the foul ground which furrounds it. There 
 are feveral iflands between Groaning Bay and that of Reyorfon, between which 
 it is affirmed that the paflage is navigable in good foundings, from 10 to 4 
 fathoms. 
 
 It is reckoned about 12 leagues ENE. from Reyorfon Bay to a point of 
 land, with very remarkable downs of find ; the depth between them is from 
 8 to 12, 14, and 15 fathoms. To the fouth-weftward of this point is a rock 
 above water, and above a gun-fliot therefrom feveral others, which may be 
 Hen at half tide. 
 
 N a flow ire
 
 Directions jor Sailing from the Island Sanciam. 391 
 
 ' Naffowiie (or Naflbwen's) Bay is between that of Reyorfoa and the Downs 
 of Sand : as is a liitle hill called Black Mount. 
 
 It is nearly 5 leagues NE. from the Sand Hills to the SVV. point of Wiringer 
 (or Weringen's Biy. Thefe two points fhelter from the northerly winds, in 
 a fandy bay, where you may alio <\-$ in 10 or 12 fathoms ; you may alio 4-} 
 under fhelter from the SSW. winds behind an ifland ; but, as it is encompafled 
 with foul g.ound, you mud come no nearer than 9 fathoms. A little to the 
 northward of this is Teibe or the Dry Bay under the NE. point whereof you 
 have good <f-^age. 
 
 From Wiringer Bay to the Cape of Good Hope, (called alfo Phijo and 
 Pitto) the courfe is NE and NEbE. 6 \ or 7 leagues. This cape is very high, 
 and encompafled with low land. On the weft fide there is a great wide bay 
 (or b'ght) called Ornefis, (or Orenfis, alio Orange Bay) where you may <f} 
 under fhelter from the northerly winds, in 6 or 7 fathoms. Alio to the 
 northward of the Cape of Good Hope is another flicker from the foutherly 
 winds, affording a good road in 5 or 6 fathoms, between 2 iflands, about 2 
 miles alunder, furrounded with dangers. 
 
 As foon as you have the Cape of Good Hope bearing NW. 4 or 5 leagues, 
 the beft courfe for going to x^moy will be to fleer EfN. in order to pals 
 without a little clutter of iflands and Rocks, called the Lamoch Iflands (bearing 
 from the laid cape EbN. 13 leagues) fituate in latitude 23? 8'N. Thefe 
 iflands are very fmall and low, lying about 4 leagues SSE. from Lamond 
 I (land, near the continent. They lay that you may pafs between this laft 
 and the others ; but it leerns more prudent (when not obliged to do it) to 
 keep oft' them. It will be proper to be lure of being well to the caftward of 
 them, before you ftand to the northward, cfpecially in the night-time, for 
 fear of running on them in the dark.; and when you are without them, freer 
 NEbN, or a little more northerly, if you find that the current fets to the eaft- 
 ward ; this will bring you in fight of Chapel Ifland or the Hole in the Wall) 
 lying in latitude 24? iq'N. and SSW. from the mouth of Amoy harbour. 
 \ ou may ealily know it, and when it bears ENE. or WSW. you may fee " 
 through it ; for this reafon it is called Pierced Ifland or the Hole in the Wall : 
 when it bears NbW. 4 leagues, you may fee, on the Continent, a remaik* 
 able round hill, bearing NWbN. you are then in 26 fathoms water. 
 
 From thence you fail along Chapel Ifland, keeping about 2 miles offing ; 
 and whether you leave it on the ftai board or larboard, you have no iefs than 
 14 or 15 fathoms. From hence you fleer NNW. for the bay. When Chapel 
 
 Ifland
 
 39- -A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Ifland bears SEbS. the depth will decreafe to 14 or 15 fathom? ; but if more, 
 haul a little to the northward keeping in 11 or 12 fathoms, which is the beft 
 channel. 
 
 When vou are halfway from Chapel Ifland you may perceive a long ifland, 
 called the Great Goeve, at the entrance of the harbour, at each end of which 
 is a rocky mountain, and in the middle a iandy bay : to the NE. thereof is a 
 pretty high rock, called the Half-Tide Rock ; and, though you may pafs 
 between the Great Goeve and this rock, it is much fafer to leave both on the 
 larboard. You heve 1 6 fathoms a quarter of a league off it. From hence you 
 lee the channel open between the Little Goeve and 5 iflands which lie to the 
 eaftward, keeping mid-channel, in foundings from 14 to 15 fathoms. The 
 breadth between the Little Goeve and the NE. ifland, which forms the paflage, 
 is about half a league. 
 
 As foon as you are through this channel, fleer NWbN. for the SW. coaft of 
 
 Amoy Ifland, which you fail along, within half a mile, by your foundings ; 
 
 thefe are very regular. The harbour lies to the north-wefiward, and is ealily 
 
 found by the junks, or fmall Chinefe veflels, which lie there at <f-}. You 
 
 may <0 according to the fize of your fhip. The Chinefe pilots generally 
 
 come on board (without the bay) as foon as they perceive any fhips. You 
 
 rauft not enter the port before you have obtained permifiion of tiie mandarins, 
 
 efpecially the Hoppo, who comes to meafure the fhip, and fettle the cuftoms, 
 
 which muft be paid according to its dimenfions. The trade of Amoy is not 
 
 ealily carried on, by reafon of the difficulty they have to find fecurity for the 
 
 money which you muft advance to the merchants ; therefore it behoves ftran- 
 
 cners to take care of not being made their dupes, by confiding in them. 
 
 CCXCIX. Directions y&r Sailing//-^ Madras to Manilla, through 
 the Straits t/ Malacca, in the South-West Monsoon. By Mr. 
 Nichelson. 
 
 The ufual time for failing from the Coromandel Coaft for the China Sea i, 
 through the Straits of Malacca; is May, June, or July : the beginning of 
 Au«-uft is rather late, though fhips may then lave their paflage to China. 
 
 We failed from Madras July 30, 176?, for Manilla, and the next day had 
 frefh gales from WbS. to SWbS. with thick hazy weather, fome hard lqualls 
 and rain, and no current ; which is a proof that the nearer the land, the 
 
 flronger the current. 
 
 In
 
 Directions for Sailing from Madras to Manilla. 39.3 
 
 In eroding the Bay of Bengal, we had a fmall current fometimes to the 
 northward, and fometimes to the fouthward ; but rather more to the northward, 
 efpecially in drawing near the iflands. 
 
 Auguft 6, at 9 P. M. faw the land, which proved to be theNicobar Iflands ; 
 we went through the Sombrere Channel, in latitude 7? 36'N. and made longi- 
 tude 11? 4-i'E. from Madras to the noithcrnmolt of the Nicobar Iflands, the 
 variation 23'E. It being night when we made and pafled thefe iflands, I can 
 give no other defcription of them, than that they appeared by moon-light to be 
 pretty high land. 
 
 At midnight we took our departure from the NE. part of the northernmofl 
 of the Nicobar Iflands, in latitude 7? 25'N. and fleered for Pulo Bouton, 
 which we faw on the 8th at 6 A. M. In this run, variable winds with cloudy 
 weather and fmooth water ; and found no current, though we found flrong 
 riplings. 
 
 Wnen Pulo Bouton bore EbN' 2 N. difltant 6 or 7 leagues, founded; no 
 ground 1 50 fathoms ; and by feveral obfervations, found no variation. This 
 is a large high ifland, in latitude 6? 3o'N. bearing from the NE. part of the 
 northernmofl: of the Nicobar Iflands Ei3?S. 97 or 98 leagues, with feveral 
 fmall ones near it ; and may be feen 10 or 12 leagues in clear weather. Hereabout 
 you may fee the high land of Malaya, at a great diftance. 
 
 Having made Pulo Bouton, direct your courfe for Pulo Pera, fo as to go to 
 the eaftward thereof. Between thefe you may fee the Iflands of the Great and 
 Little Ladda, or Pepper Iflands, which are high iflands to the northward of Pulo 
 Piiang. Pulo Pera is a fmall rocky ifland, in latitude 5? 50 N. bearing about 
 SSW. 15 leagues from Pulo Bouton, and may be {een 8, 9, or 10 leagues in 
 clear weather. It is fleep on all fides. You have 45 fathoms water within 2 or 
 3 miles of it ; and 5 or 6 miles oft" you have no ground 50 fathoms ; but w hc;i 
 it bore NW. 5 or 6 leagues, had 45 fathoms, fandy ground. 
 
 From hence direct your courfe for Pulo Jarra, bearing SSE^E. 42 leagues ; 
 you have foundings between them from 35 to 25 fathoms, fometimes fand and 
 mud. It is belt palling to the eaftvvard of Pulo Jarra, for the conveniency of 
 the tides, and 4-^ing, if the winds fhould be contrary. 
 
 We w cut through the Sombrere Channel ; yet I would rather advife goino- to 
 the fouthward of the Nicobar Iflands as the fhorter cut, which (when attended 
 with no more difficulty or danger) muft certainly be the beit. The SW. part 
 of the Nicobar Iflands lies in latitude 6? 45'N. and longitude, by run from 
 Madras, 1 1? 4o'E. or 1 2?E. TheNicobar Iflands are pretty high, and may 
 
 I ii 'be
 
 394 ^ New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 feen 10 or 1 1 leagues in clear weather. Being off the SW. part of the Nicobars, 
 you may either make Pulo Rondo, or fhape a courfe directly for Pulo Pera, 
 bearing therefrom EbS. ioo leagues ; and if you make Pulo Rondo, Pulo Pera 
 bears from it E4?-\ 74 leagues. 
 
 Pulo Rondo is a fmall, but high, rocky round ifland, in latitude 6? 5'N". 
 bearing from Acheen Head NbW. 1 r or 12 leagues ; from the NE. part of the 
 Nicobars, SE. 4 S. 36 leagues; and from the SW. part, E30?S. 28 leagues. 
 Off the fouth and SW. fides of this ifland, there are many fmall rocks above 
 and under water ; but it is clear and bold on the north fide. The variation off 
 this ifland, in 1763 and 1764, was 14'W. This is much fuch another ifland 
 as Pulo Pera, being about the fame height, but exactly round. 
 
 From Pulo Rondo may be feen the high mountains of Sumatra, bearing 
 SSE^E. or SSEtE. Pulo Braffa fouth, 6 or 7 leagues, and Pulo Way SSE^E. 
 4 leagues. Pulo Way and Pulo BralTa are both high iflands ; but Pulo Way is 
 much the large ft and highefl: of the whole clufler. Being off Pulo Rondo, by 
 falling in 5 or 6 leagues to the fouthward of Pulo Pera, you will cut offfome 
 diftance ; and then direct your courfe for Pulo Jarra : you will have no foundings 
 in this track till you get to Pulo Pera. 
 
 I have known fhips, taking a different track from either of thofe above-men- 
 tioned, to have fucceeded very well, and made the run much fhorter tiian either 
 of them. They failed from Madras, and made Pulo Rondo, palling to the 
 northward thereof, and fleered directly for Pulo Jarra, lying from it ESE-iE. 
 1 04 leagues. We failed from Madras 2 days before thefe fhips, fleering, as 
 above related, through the Sombrere Channel, and thought we had a pretty 
 good paflage : yet they got to Malacca 2 days before us. So quick a paflage by 
 this track is uncertain, and therefore not always to be pracliled ; fince, it you 
 have calms, and currents are againft you, (as is generally the cafe in the SW. 
 monfoon, on the Sumatra lide) there is no °}-^ing. The fame may be faid of 
 the paflage from the Sombrere Channel to PuloBouton, or to Pulo Pera, which 
 is nearly the lame diftance as from Pulo Rondo to Pulo Jarra ; therefore the 
 latter paflage may be made as foon as either of the former, a confiderable part 
 of the diltance cut off; confequently, if the winds permit, this is the belt 
 and moft expeditious paflage. 
 
 But it has been found by experience, that pafiages have generally been more 
 expeditioufly made on the Malaye Coafl, which is lei's tubjfect to calms, and 
 where vou have little or no current ; but rather a tide, which is alternately in 
 your favour ; and where you may 4-} when the wind or tide is againft you, 
 
 and
 
 DiKUcriosfor Sailing from Madras to Manilla. 305 
 
 and keep what you have got : which are fufficlent reafons why fliips (hould 
 rather keep along the Malaye Coait, notwithstanding the fucceis of the Ihips 
 above-mentioned. 
 
 Pulo Jarra is a fmall, round, high ifland, in latitude 3? 57'N. and ha» 
 foundings from 30 to 35 fathoms, all round it, within 6 or y leagues. You 
 may pals on either iide this ifland (which is fteep to) having 30 and 35 fathoms 
 clofe to it. Hereabout you generally have the current letting to the NW. 
 at the rate of 20 miles in the 24 hours ; which current you moftly have all 
 along the Malaye more, in the NE. monibons ; but the reverie on the Sumatra 
 fhore, where you find a foutherly current. When Pulo Jarra bore NW. 
 4 leagues, had 34 fathoms ; and when it bore NYV^N. 8 or 9 leagues, had 32 
 fathoms. 
 
 Between Pulo Pera and Pulo Jarra,' but well in with the Malaye more, lies 
 Pulo Pinang, a large and high mountainous ifland, in latitude 5? 25 N. bearin°- 
 from Pulo Pera ESE;S. 24 leagues, and from Pulo Jarra NiW. 26 leagues. 
 The Sambelongs, (-which are a duller of fmall iflands) bear off Pulo Jarra from 
 E;-S. to EbN. diftance 8 or 9 leagues ; from Pulo Jarra, Pulo Ding-ding bears 
 ENE'N. 10 or 1 1 leagues. Pulo Varella is an high ifland, and bears from 
 Pulo Jarra WbS'S. 15 or 16 leagues ; and the Pulo Arroes (or Pulo Aru) lie 
 from Pulo Jarra SbEiE. 25 or 26 leagues. 
 
 Steer from Pulo Jarra for Pulo Aru, SSE. and you will have very regular 
 foundings, from 32 to $y fathoms, between them ; but when the Pulo Arroes 
 bear from SbWfW. to. SSWjAV. diftance from 3 to 5 leagues, you will deepen 
 your water to 40 and 44 fathoms ; when the eafternmofr. Arroe bears SWIW. 
 vou have 22 fathoms ; and when it bears SWbW. 2| leagues, and the Lon«- 
 Arroe W{S. you have n or 12 fathoms. 
 
 The Pulo Arroes are a number of great and fmall rocks, extending ESE. 
 and WNW. 3 or 4 leagues. One of them is a long, low ifland, with trees 
 upon it, in latitude 2? 50.N. and is called the Long Arroe. The eafternmoft is. 
 a pretty high, round rock, covered with trees, and is called the Round Arroe ; 
 its latitude is 2? 45'N. The Round Pulo Arroe is a leading mark thrpugh the 
 channel, between the N. and S. fand-heads, and may be feen from a large 
 1 hip's poop, in clear weather, 7 or 8 leagues ; but none of the other rocks 
 above 4, 5, or 6 leagues. 
 
 It flows at the Pulo Arroes on the full and chance, E. and W. or 6 hours ; 
 the flood SEbS. and the ebb NWbN. each way 6 hours, llrong tides, which 
 occalion great riplings, as if in Ihoal water, or danger, though there is none; 
 
 I i i 2 but,
 
 396 A Nexv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 but, as the tides have great dependence on the winds, there have been 
 inftances of their irregularity, the ebb running ftrong for 9 hours together in 
 the NE. monfoon, and the flood as long in the SW. monibon. Variation 
 36'W. 1763. 
 
 Between thefe rocks and the North Sand is the channel by which (hips 
 generally pafs through thefe ftraits. When the Pulo Arroes bears SW. diftancc 
 ab.mt 8 or 9 leagues, you are on the edge of the North Sand, and have, 
 foundings from 20 to 1 5 and 9 fathoms ; from whence, if the weather is clear, 
 you may juft fee Parcelar Hill, bearing about ESE. 13 or 14 leagues: but I 
 would not advife any fhip to keep fo near the North Sand, but rather within 
 3 or 4 leagues of the Pulo Arroes. 
 
 In fleering SW. toward the Pulo Arroes from the laft bearings, you will 
 deepen your water, as you crofs over, from 9 or 10 fathoms, on the edge of 
 the North Sand, to 15, 25, 40, 45 fathoms, about mid-channel ; from thence, 
 ftill ftanding to the fouthward toward them, the water fhoalens gradually 
 from 44 to 40, 30, 25, 20, 15, to 12 fathoms, ouzy ground, within 2 
 leagues of the Pulo Arroes, about mid-way, between the Long and Round Pulo 
 Arroe. 
 
 Before I proceed to give directions for eroding over from the Pulo Arroes to 
 the Malaye Shore, through the channel, between the North and South Sands, &c. 
 I fhafl give you as clear and diflinct an account as I can of the dangers that lie in 
 the way, with their bearings and diftances from the moft remarkable places ; 
 the marks to go clear of them, as alio the true foundings, &c. that, by giving 
 } r ou a clear and diftinct idea of the channel you are to go through, you may 
 know the better how to avoid the dangers. 
 
 Pulo Parcelar, commonly called Parcelar Hill, lies in latitude 2? 48'N. and 
 bears from the high, round, or eafternmoft Pulo Arroe, E3?N. 16 or 1 7 leagues. 
 This is a fingle remarkable high hill, near the fhore, on the Malaye Coafl ; the 
 reft of the iflands or land near it, being very low, cannot be i'een at any great 
 difhmce. This hill, therefore, being the only thing you can fee on the Malaye 
 Shore, is the leading mark through the channel, between the North and South 
 Sand-Heads. The variation i6'W. 1763. 
 
 The North Sand lies about NNW. and SSE. it is reckoned 9 or 10 leagues 
 
 in length, and is very dangerous ; the fotuh part thereof is commonly called 
 
 the Nor !-Head, an. the Pulo rroeS, EbN^N. diftance 8 
 
 arid frorii Parcela Hill, \ . 9 or 10 league^ In like manner, tht: 
 
 north part of the South Sand is commonly called the South, Sand-Head, and 
 
 bears,
 
 "DiKEcnotJS for Sailing from Madras to Manilla. 397 
 
 bears, from the Round Palo Arroe, EjS. about 7 leagues; and from Parcelar 
 Hill, WIS. 9 or 10 leagues. This fand lies SEbE. and NWbW. in length 
 about 12 leagues. The diftance between thefe Sand-Ilcads is reckoned about 
 3 i leagues, with very irregular foundings, from 25 to 8 fathoms, between 
 them. 
 
 It is faid there are feveral fhaals to the northward and eaftward of the North 
 Sand, out of the track of a fhip coming through this channel. There is an 
 hard ftiingly bank, with lbme land, lying in the fair-way, that has only 2| 
 and 3 fathoms on it ; Confeq.uently it is very dangerous ; from whence Parcelar 
 Hill bears E3?S. and the low land (or the trees on the low land) juft Cccn from 
 the poop, difhnce 6 or 7 leagues ; and the Round Pulp Arroe, {cen from the 
 main-top, bearing W9? 3C/N. 
 
 There are two banks in this channel, both of which you pafs over in 
 alrhofr. the fame depth of water, and very hard ground between them. You 
 have from 15 to i 8, 20, and 22 fathoms water. The weilernmoft is between 
 the North and South-Sand-Heads* By keeping Parcelar due E. 9 or 10 
 leagues, and the Round Pulo Arroe \V8?S. 7 or 8 leagues, you \\ ill have 
 no lefs than 10 or 11 fathoms on it ; but if you bring the Round Pulo Arroe 
 to bear WbSfS. you have only 8 or 9 fathoms, which is too far to the 
 northward. 
 
 In going from this bank to the weftward, you foon deepen your water to 
 19, 20, and 24 fathoms, and fhoalen it as fuddenly, going to the eaftward. 
 Be fure of your bearings, and there is no danger. The fhoalening on the 
 eafternmoft bank is 9 fathoms ; Parcelar Hill due E. 6 or 7 leagues, or the trees 
 on the low land about Parcelar jufr. in fight from the poop, and the Round Pulo 
 Arroe W6?S. You are then a-breafl the 2 t fathoms bank ; and it is not more 
 th m i i or 2 miles to the northward of you ; toward which it fhoalens gra- 
 dually to 5 and 4. fathoms. 
 
 Between the North and South Sand and Parcelar, the tiles run ftrong ; 
 the flood SEbE. and the ebb NWbW. It flows at full and change ESE. 
 and WNW. or 7 I hours; and it ebbs and flows perpendicularly 8 or 9 
 feet. 
 
 It a fhip, coming from the Pulo Arroes, and crofting over to Parcelar, has 
 a ;' . id, and is obliged to turn through the channel, it is allowed, by moft 
 navigators-, that ! he may bring Parcelar Hill to bear from E 3 h S to EiN. between 
 the North an i 3 mth Sand-Heads. But when a fhip has got fo far to the eaft- 
 ward as to Iofe light of the Round Pulo Arroe upon deck, and before fhe has 
 
 fight
 
 39§ A New Directory jor the East-Indies. 
 
 fio-ht of the low land about Parcelar, fhe muft not ftand to the northward further 
 than to bring Parcelar Hill due E. for E7S. will bring her on the 2| fathoms 
 bank, as before-mentioned ; but fhe may ftaud farther to the fouthward, and 
 brin°- Parcelar Hill to bear E',N. and when ihe gets fight of the low land of 
 Parcelar, may bring the Hill EbN. or more northerly, without any danger. 
 Not with flan ding, I would advife the keeping a boat a-head to found, as is 
 commonly done in this channel. 
 
 If at the Pulo Arroes you have a leading wind through the channel to Par- 
 celar, fhape your courfe, with refpecl to the tides and winds, fo as to keep the 
 Round Pulo Arroe from W4S. to W^S. but WIS. is the beff. bearing : freer 
 then till you get fight of Parcelar Hill ; then keep the hill due eaft, till you 
 get fight of the low land about Parcelar : you may bring the hill to bear 
 EbN. or more northerly, and run within 2 or 3 leagues of the low land about 
 Parcelar. 
 
 Having; oiven the bearings and marks for the fands and dangers that lie in 
 the way of crofting over from the Pulo Ar oes to Parcelar, and alio the marks 
 to avoid them, with the true foundings, &c. I fhall now give a lhort direction 
 for going through the channel, with the different depths of water you meet 
 with in crofting over. 
 
 Being off" the Pulo Arroes, within 3 leagues of them, in 12 or 14 fathoms 
 water, fhape your courfe, with refpecl to the tides and winds, fo as to keep 
 the Round Pulo Arroe from WiS. to W4S. till you get fight of Parcelar Hill 
 (as above directed), in which track you will have irregular foundings from 1 2 
 or 14 to 18, 20, and 25 fathoms; and when the Round Pulo Arroe bears 
 W8.S. 6 or 7 leagues, you will fbon fhoalen your water to 12, 10, and 9 
 fathoms, when you are on the wefternmoft bank, and between the North and 
 South Sand-Heads. 
 
 Parcelar bearing off you E. or E£S. pretty good bearings are hereabout. Keep 
 Parcelar Hill due raft, and you will have 9 and 10 fathoms on this wefternmoft 
 bank, and loon depen to 15, 18, 20, 22, 23 fathoms; then you are between 
 the wefternmoft: and eafternmoft banks ; and as loon as you begin to lofe fight 
 of the Round Pulo Arroe upon deck, you are coming upon the eafiernmofr. 
 bank, and will fhoalen your water to 15, 12, 10, 9 I fathoms ; and when you 
 can juft fee the trees on the low land about Parcelar, you are a-breafl of the 
 2 I fathoms bank. If Parcelar Hill bears due eaft, it is th.cn lior 2 mile's 
 to the northward of you ; you arc- then alfo clear of the South Sand, and may 
 fleer more foutherly, lo as to bring Parcelar Hill EbN. or even more nor- 
 therly,
 
 DiREcnoNsyor Sailing from Madras io Malacca. 309 
 
 therly. By continuing your courfe to the eafhvard, you will foon deepen your 
 water again to r4, 16, 18. 20, 22, and 24 fathoms, ouze; and from 24 
 fhoalen a ;ain to 17 or 18 fathoms, 5 or 6 miles off the low land of Parcel ar. 
 
 Between Parcelar and Cape Richado the coaft forms a deep bay. The 
 channel between the South Sand and the Malaye Coaft is about 4 leagues wide. 
 The foundings between Parcelar and Cape Richado are from 15, 20, 25, 30, 
 to 35, and in fome places 40 fathoms, ouzy ground ; but, in general, verv 
 irregular, deepening and fhoalening feveral fithoms at a caft ; Co that, in the 
 night-time, there is no judging by the foundings where you are. The ground 
 is all ouze, excepting about the middle of the channel. 
 
 Parcelar bearing NEbE. about 2 leagues offihore, there is a fmall bank of 
 13 fathoms, find, gravel, and fmall ftones. Alio within the bight, NW|N. 
 4 or 4! leagues from the cape, and SEbS. from Pa.icelar Hill, about 2 or -> 
 miles off more, there lies a bank of land, whereon fome mips have been loft * 
 by keeping the cape ESE 2 S. or ESE|S. and Parcelar Hill NNW. or 
 NNW;W. you may go 2 or 3 miles without it, in 16, 18, or 20 fathoms 
 water; and keeping in from 18 to 22 fathoms, between Parcelar and Cape 
 Richado, will lead you in a good channel, from 4 to 6 miles off fhore. 
 
 Cape Richado is a high bluff point of land, and fleep to (fomcthino- like 
 Mount Dilla on the Coaft of Malabar, only not to high), ftretqhing out to 
 feavvard in a narrow point of land, which forms a deep bay on each fide of ir 
 with a fmall rock, or ifland, near its extremity ; it lies in latitude 2? 28'N. 
 and bears from Parcelar Hill, SE. a little foutherly, about 13 leagues. About 
 a league without the cape you may fee the low land of Sumatra from the 
 deck, this being the narroweft part oC the ftraits to the northward of Malacca. 
 
 Here the tides run ftrong, flowing, on the full and change, N\V. and SE. 
 or 9 hours ; the flood to the (buthward; and the ebb to the northward. The 
 foundings are uneven and irregular, from 15 or 1 6 to 30 fathoms; within 2 
 or 3 miles of the cape, you will have 22, 23 or 25 fathoms, and only rr 
 16, and 18 fathoms at 2 or 2 [ leagues, the eppe bearing ENE. and then 3 or 
 2\ leagues to the weftward of the cape, you will have 30 and 35 fathoms - 
 and then from 35 fithoms it fhoalens luddenly to 10 fathoms hard °rc>und on 
 the fouth fand. 
 
 About 2 leagues EbS. from Cape Richado, is the mouth of the River 
 Lingin, a place that produces much tin. 
 
 From Cape Richado, Malacca Hills bear EbS^S. and the Great Yvater 
 Ifland SE 1 3. about 12 leagues; but the courfe to Malacca Road is SE: 
 
 ■ out
 
 4co Neiv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 about 10 leagues. You have foundings from 16 to 20, and 25 fathom 5 ;, from 
 3 to 6 miles off more, ouzy ground; only when Cape Kichado bears N\V. 3 
 or 4 leagues, and about 4 or 5 miles cff fhore, there is a bard bank of 13 
 fathoms ; but within, as well as without it, 20 and 24 fathoms. Al o, about 
 mid- way between Cape Richado and Malacca Road, lies' a rock above war r, 
 about a mile off fhore ; but that cannot be reckoned dangerous, as no mips 
 have occafion to come fo near the fhore. 
 
 There is no danger going;; into Malacca Road. If you are in the offing; in 
 20 or 23 fathoms, you fhoalen your water gradually to 7 fathoms, as you run 
 in for the road. I would not advife a great fhip to go into lefs than ji 
 fathoms ; for it fhoalens fuddenly from 7 to 5 and 4 fathoms. Ships fhould be 
 ftill more careful not to go too for to the fouthward or the SE. part of the 
 bay ; there the ground is foul and rocky, and fhoalens fuddenly from 8 to 3 
 fathoms. Off Woody or Fifher's I flan d there is no danger, as fome directions 
 mention : I have founded well about it, and found that a fhip, upon occafion, 
 micht °"b within half a mile of it, in 16 fathoms water; or have 10 fathoms 
 within a quarter of a mile of it, and 20 fathoms about a mile without it. You 
 may <j-^ in Malacca Road from 13 to y\ fathoms, ouzy ground. Malacca 
 Church on the NW part of Mount Moora E. 27? 30'N. the SVV part of 
 Woody or Fifher's Ifland W. 36? 1 5'N. and the outermoft of the Four Brothers, 
 or Water Iflands, E. 50? 2o'S. difhnce from Malacca 1 \ mile. 
 
 It flows in Malacca Road SSE. and NNW. or 10' hours ; the flood runs 
 ESE. and the ebb WNW. pretty ftrong tides. Half flood in the road is 
 hi?h water afhore ; at three quarters ebb, a fhip's boat cannot get into the 
 river. 
 
 lacca lies in latitude 2? 1 2 / N. and longitude 102? io'E. of London ; the 
 variation, by feveral observations, was 1° 24'W. 1763. 
 
 Here the Dutch have a fort, and a very conliderable fettlement, which affords 
 refrefhments of all kinds in great plenty : the church (rands upon a high hill 
 in the middle of the garrilon, and is always kept very white, which, together 
 with its fituation, makes it very confpicuous at a great diiiance ; by this, Malacca 
 may be eafily known. 
 
 From Malacca fail without, or to the weftward of all the Water Iflands, and 
 you w ill deepen your water gradually from 8 to 20 fathoms ; and from 3 to 6 
 mi'es without the Water Iflands, you will have from 20 to 25 fathoms. Here- 
 out the flood runs SEbS. and the ebb NWbN. at the rate of 1 • knot ; the 
 bottom ouzy, and good+^age. 
 
 Being
 
 Directions far Sailing from Madbas to Manilla. 401 
 
 Being without the Water I (lands, fleer SEbS or SE. for Mount Formofa, 
 'which is 11 or 12 leagues difrant, in foundings from 20 to 24 fathoms ; hut 
 if the winds are contrary, you may (land over from 15 fathoms on the Malaye 
 Shore to 15 fathoms on the Sumatra Shore, but no nearer. 
 
 From the outermoft of tbe Four Brothers, or Water Iflands, which lies in 
 latitude 2? 4'N. Mount Moora bears EbSjS. 7 or 8 leagues ; and Mount For- 
 mofa ESEfS. 11 or 1 2 leagues. The 2 mounts, or hills, lie from each other 
 SE. and NW. about 7 leagues, in latitude 2? and 1? 48'N. From the Water 
 Iflands to a-breaft Mount Moora, you have foundings from 20 to 26 fathoms, 
 ouzy ground, from 3 to 4 or 5 leagues oft" fliore. The tides here are very 
 uncertain, but fet longeft and ftrongefr. to the we-ftwafd. 
 
 From Mount Moora the courfe is SEbS. to Formofa Point and River's .Mouth 
 off which, about 2 leagues, lies a flioal ftretching along fhore : from the SE- 
 end thereof Mount Formofa bears NEbN. and Mount Moora NWbN. from the 
 NW. part of it Mount Formofa E^S. and Mount Moora N. and NbW. Juft 
 without this there is another bank, whereon there are but 5 fathoms, hard 
 
 ground. 
 
 From Formofa Point, to Pulo Pifang, the courfe is SEbS. 7I or 8 leagues; 
 and when Mount Formofa bears NE. between 3 and 4 leagues, you will fee 
 Pulo Pi fan g bearing SE^EorSEbE. diflance 7 or 8 leagues; and will then 
 have foundings from 20 to 22 or 23 fathoms, ouzy ground. The Araks here- 
 about are about 10 leagues broad. 
 
 Ships always keep on the Malaye fide(on which they may borrow into 1 1 
 or 12 fathoms with fafety, on occafion) becaufe off the oppoiite fhore are many 
 flioals, and foul -ground. In the middle there is a bank which ftretches ESE. 
 and WNW. 8 leagues in length ; from the wellernmoft part whereof Mount 
 Formofa bears NEbN. and Pulo Pifang EbS. about 8 leagues, or juft in fight ; 
 and from the eaft end of this bank, Pulo Pifang bears ENE'N. or NEbE. 2f 
 cr 3 leagues 
 
 Between this bank and Pulo Pifang is the common channel, the leading: 
 marks for which are, Formofa Hill NNWiW. and Carimons SSE;E. in 21 
 or 22 fathoms, mid-channel; or from 9 to 10 or 12 fathoms, 2 or 3 miles 
 from Pulo Pifang, to iS or 19 fathoms on the land fide; from which it 
 (hoalens fuddenly to 10, 9, 7, 5 fathoms. The channel is but narrow, 
 according to moft navigators opinion, it being (as they imagine) but 4 miles 
 from the fhoal, off the tfland, to the fand ; but, in my opinion, the channel 
 is, at leaf}, 2 leagues wide, and am well affured of it by my own experience ; 
 
 K k k for
 
 402 ji New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 for when Mount Formofa bore N|W. and Pulo Pifang EiS. 4 leagues, and 
 the Great Carimon Ifland SE. had from 21 to 22 fathoms water, we fleered 
 ESE2S. 6 miles, and had from 21 to 1 7 fathoms ; then Mount Formofa b 
 NbW|W. and Pulo Pifang E^N. 6 or 7 miles. We fteered the fame courfe 
 5 miles, and had from 17 to io§ fathoms; then Mount Formofa bore 
 NNWiW. (which is the leading mark through between the ifland and the 
 fand) and Pulo Pifang ENE. northerly, diilance 4 miles : we then fteered SE. 
 3 miles, and had from 20 to 21 fathoms; then Mount Formofa bore 
 NNWiW. Pulo Pifang NEzE. 5 miles, and the Great Carimon SEbS. then 
 we were clear of the land to the fouth-eafhvard of it. This proves the 
 channel is wider than moft navigators have fuppofed it. We were a fleet of 1 1 
 fail, and much fcattered ; feveral fhips, without and within us, 3 or 4 miles ; 
 and none of them had fhoalenings on this fand. 
 
 Pulo Pifang is a pretty large, high, woody ifland, in latitude 1? 23'N. 
 bearing from Point Formofa SEbS. 72 or 8 leagues : it lies 5 or 6 miles off 
 the Malaye Coaft, and has 3 fmall iflands by it. This ifland may be feen in 
 clear weather 9 or 10 leagues ; then it makes in a fmall hummock, like a boat 
 turned bottom upward. It flows here north and fouth ; the ebb runs longeft 
 to the NW. The variation, by feveral obfervations, 53W". 1763. 
 
 From Pulo Pifang, Pulo Cocob lies SEfE. 5 \ or 6 leagues, and the eaftern- 
 moft point of the Little Carimons SSEIE. 8 or 8 i leagues. Between Pulo 
 Pi fin:/ and Pulo Cocob you have foundings from 17 to 20 fathoms, ouzy 
 ground ; and between Pulo Cocob and the Carimons from 1 7 to 20, 2t, 017 
 fathoms toward the Carimons ; and you lhould ftand no nearer the Carimons 
 than that depth, ouzy ground from fide to iide. Pulo Cocob is a low fl.n ifland, 
 clofe in with the Malaye fhore, from whence the eaft point of the Little Carimon 
 bears SSW. about 4 leagues. Between thefe is the channel of about 3 leagues 
 in breadth. 
 
 The Carimons are 2 pretty large and high iflands, called the Little and the 
 Great Carimon ; they are both very high land ; but the Great Carimon is the 
 hi.zlielf , and has a very high remarkable peak on it. Observe, that between 
 Pulo Pifang and Pulo Cocob, the Malaye Coaft is flat and fhoal ; therefore 
 come no nearer it than 14 or 12 fathoms, and bring Pulo Pifang no further 
 to the weft ward than NW. or NWiN. nor ftand neaixr to the Sumatra fide 
 than 15 fathoms : under this depth is foul ground, and (hoal water; particularly 
 when the E. point of the Carimons bears SEiE. diftance 4 p»' 5 leagues ; and 
 
 the
 
 Direct i oNs^r Sailing from Madras to Manilla. 403 
 
 the outermoft of the Two Brothers (2 fmall rocks) right on with it, about 
 3 leagues diftance, and Pulo Pifang N|E. about 4 leagues ; it fhoals fuddenly 
 from 15 fathoms fo ft, to 9 fathoms hard ground. The Two Brothers bear 
 from Pulo Cocob SWbS. Between them are good foundings from 24 to 15 
 fathoms. 
 
 Tanjang-boulus is a point of low land on the Malaye more, bearing from the 
 eaft point of the Carimons NEbN. diftance about 4 leagues, and from Pulo 
 Cocob, SEbE. 3 or 4 miles. The channel lies between theie ; and you may 
 ftand to each iide in 16 fathoms, foft ground, and no danger. 
 
 The tides hereabout are very uncertain, depending much on the wind ; and 
 the tides from the Straits of Sincapour and Dryon meet here in fome meafure : 
 they let ftrongeft to the eaftward and the fouthward, but generally lon°-eft 
 to the NW. ibmetimes 1 8 hours one way, and 6 hours the other. When at 
 cf-^ in 22 fathoms, Tree Ifland bearing SEbE. 2 miles, found the tide fet 1 i 
 knot from NW. to N. for 1 2 hours. Sometimes it would flack, and then 
 run ftrong as before. It fometimes runs as long, or longer, to the SE. and much 
 frron°;er. 
 
 The fouth part of Barn Ifland bears from the north part of the Little Carimon 
 E^N. diftance 6 7 or 7 leagues. Barn Ifland is a pretty large and high woody 
 ifland ; on the weft fide whereof is a white mark, which at a diftance much 
 refembles a large barn, by which it may be eafily known. There is oood 
 o)-^age to the weft ward of Barn Ifland, from 9 to 14 fathoms, and from | to 
 1 i mile oft fhore, the ifland bearing from NE. to SE. you have a good birth 
 with the outermoft of the 2 iflands, Rabbit and Coney, bearing eaft, ibutherly ; 
 and the extremes of Barn Ifland from ENEIN. to NbE. about | of a mile off" 
 fhore. 
 
 Tree or Sandy Ifland is a narrow ifland, or fand, lying ESE. and WNW. 
 about 2 miles in length. 'At low water this ifland is dry; at hi<m water it 
 is almoft entirely covered, there being little elfe to be Ceen but a large remarkable 
 tree, which is ncareft the eaft part of it : there are 5 or 6 other fmall trees and 
 fhrubs, and a fmall rock ; which is all that is to be Uteii at high water. The 
 NW. fide of this ifland is broken ground, and from the weft end of it there 
 runs out a long ledge of rocks, part of wl.ich are dry at low water. Come 
 no nearer this part of it than 17 fathoms. The ebb tide fets over thefe rocks ; 
 the tree on this ifland bears from the north peak of Great Carimon E^N. and from 
 the fouth part of Barn I (land WbS. 
 
 K k k 2 To
 
 404 yJ New Directory for the East-Xndie3. 
 
 To the ESE. from Tree or Sandy Ifland, is a fmall ifland, called Red Ifland, 
 from the rednefs of the fand on its beach. This ifland is covered with pretty 
 high trees, and may be feen a pretty good diftance. To the eaftward and fouth- 
 ward of this are a great number of other iflands. It bears from the fouth part 
 of Barn Ifland SbW. about 4 miles. 
 
 The Rabbit and the Coney are 2 fmall rocks, or iflands, which are fteep 
 to, and lie SbW|\V. from the fouth part of Bam Ifland ; diftance about half a 
 mile : when they are in one, they bear NbE^E. and SbWlW. You have 22 
 or 20 fathoms within I of a mile of thefe rocks ; and 1, or 1 I mile to the 
 eaftward of them, you have irregular foundings, from 19 to 30 fathoms, rocky 
 ground : from thefe rocks to Barn Ifland, you have from 22 to 14 fathoms, 
 to the weftward of Barn Ifland ; there you may °f-} in clear ground from 
 9 1 to 12 or 14 fathoms, on a bank about 1 | or | of a mile off fhore ; 
 between which and Barn Ifland }ou have 18, 19, and 20 fathoms, gravelly 
 ground. 
 
 Being mid-channel, between Tanjan-boulus and the Little Carimon, in 
 foundings from 1 7 to 20 fathoms, ouzy ground, fleer to the fouth-eaflward, 
 till you bring the north point of the Little Carimon to bear V. 13. or WiS. then 
 fleer to the eaftward with thefe bearings, and you will have from 18 to 20. 
 fathoms ; and as you go to the eaftward, you will bring the north high peak 
 of Great Carimon on with the fouth point of the Little Carimon (wl ich 
 will then bear WbSjS.) and the north point of the Little Carimon will 
 bear WIS. 
 
 Thefe are good leading marks to go clear of Tree or Sandy Ifland, about 2 
 miles to the northward thereof. Endeavour to get fight of Tree Iiland as loon 
 as poflible, feeing it lies in the fair way, and is a good mark for the Straits of 
 SincaDOur : but you muft be careful of the fetting of the tide here tbout, it 
 being very uncertain ; and al o to avoid the northern fhore, left, being becalmed, 
 or having a foutherly wind, and being out of the true tide, you be fet in the 
 old channel, or ftraits, from whence : it would be difficult for a ihip to t 
 into the fair way again, on account of the conftant in-draught there is amongll 
 thefe iflands. 
 
 Still fleering to the eaftward, with either or both of the above leading marks 
 on, vou will foon lee Barn Ifhnd, with the whits mark on it, bearing E 
 you may fleer right for it with great fafety. The foundings, mid-channel^ 
 between Tree ifland and Dun Ifland, are from 24 to 30 and 33 fathoms, 
 which fhoalen, on Tree ifland iide, to 15 or 16 fathoms, (under which it is not 
 
 adviieajle
 
 Directions for Sailing from Madars to Manilla. 405 
 
 advifeable to go) and on Bun Ifland fide to 10 or 9 \ fathoms, about 5 of a mile 
 from the wefternmoft part thereof, where there is good °f-^age, as above- 
 mentioned. From that depth toward Earn Ifland, you deepen your water to 
 14, 1 3, 59, and 20 fathoms ; and toward the Rabbit and Coney, the foundings 
 are from 10 to 14, 16, 20, and 22 fathoms. You may pafs, if there be 
 occaiion, within \ of a mile of the Rabbit and Coney, in 20 and 22 fathoms, 
 red gravel. 
 
 Between the Rabbit and Coney and Redlfland, is the channel into the Straits 
 of Sincapour. You may keep mid-channel : but it is befl to keep neareft the 
 Rabbit and Coney, which are bold to; whereas the fouth fhore is foul and 
 dangerous, with feveral lunken rocks; fome of which are not feen but at low 
 water, viz. the wefternmoft rocks, which lie SEbS. 4 or 5 miles from Barn 
 Ifland : thefe are covered at high, but dry at low water. You have 30 fathoms, 
 about a mile to the northward of them ; and foundings have been had 20 fathoms 
 clofe to them. There is not more of them dry at low-water than the bignefs 
 of a flfp's long-boat. 
 
 The next is a Angle black rock, about the fize of a fhip's long-boat ; it is 
 always to be feen, lies about one half of the channel over from the iflands on 
 the fouth tide, and is fteep to, having 1 7 or 18 fathoms clofe to it, and 30 
 fathoms a little without it : this bears from the former danger about eaft, and 
 from Barn Ifland EbS. 6 or 7 miles, and from St. John's Ifland SWfS. 2 1 or 
 3 miles. 
 
 The third is a ledge of rocks always above water, and a fhoal without it, 
 which he EbN. 6 or 7 miles from the fecond rock, and SEzS. from St. John's 
 Ifland ; but the fhoal lies SEbS. from St. John's ; betw een which and the rocks, 
 you have from 15 to '8, 20, 30, 40, and 50 fathoms water; and then flioalen 
 again fuel \cn\y to iouenward. 
 
 St. John's a a pretty large and high ifland, covered with trees, and has 2 
 fmall iflands ro the wefhvard, pretty near it. This is the eafternmofr. ifland, 
 as Barn Ifland is the weftemmoft, on the north fide of this narrow paflage ; 
 and th ' ;othcr EbN". and WbS. about 4 leagues : in cale you 
 
 want wind or tide to pals through before night, there is good 4-}age under St. 
 John's Ifland, from 12 to. 14 fathoms, the ifland bearing from W3W. to S \VbW. 
 about 2 miles diitance ; there, and on mpft of the ifland, you have plenty of 
 water ; or you may <f^ to the weftward of Barn Ifland, as before-mtntioned. 
 You may likewife, upon occafion, <j-$ between St. John's and Barn Ifland, in 18 
 
 or
 
 4-o6 A New Directory for the East-Indie 
 
 or 19 fathoms ; though it is bed: not to °}-> here if it can be avoided; for the 
 bottom is rather foul, and the foundings irregular. 
 
 The tides run very ftrong between St. John's and Barn Ifland, and fet as the 
 iflands lie; the flood EbN. and the ebb WbS. The time of their flowing is 
 uncertain ; they run longeft to the eaftward in the SW. monioon, and longeft 
 to the wefhvard in the NE. monfoon. 
 
 Being a-breaft the Rabbit and Coney, your courfe to St. John's Ifland is EbN. 
 or ENE. according as you have the wind ; the diftance is about 4 leagues : 
 the foundings are very irregular, from 30, 25, 20, and 18 fathoms, hard 
 ground, fhoalening 5, 6, or 8, and fometimes 10 or 12 fathoms, at a caft. 
 In this track you fhould borrow on St. John's Ifland, in order to avoid the 
 dangers before-mentioned on the fouth ihore. You may go within a mile or 
 lefs of St. John's Ifland clear of all danger, it being bold to ; within \ of a 
 mile of it you have 20 and 24 fathoms. Off the ibuth part of St. John's 
 Ifland, it deepens toward the fouth fhore to 30, 40, and 50 fathoms, and then 
 fhoalens fuddenlv. 
 
 From St. John's Ifland Point Romania lies EbN^N. diftance ^leagues; 
 and Pedro Branco EbN. 15 or 16 leagues. Between thefe places is a wide 
 and clear channel, elpecially on the north fide, except a land which ftretches 
 out SE. from the eaft end of Sincapour Ifland, about 6 or 7 miles, and is fteep 
 to, having from 12 to 14 fathoms juit without it : its bearings are, St. John's 
 Ifland WSW. 6 leagues ; the eaft point of Sincapour NWbN. 2 1 leagues ; 
 Johore Hill NE. and the eafternmoft land to be feen off Point Romania E;N. 
 6 leagues. Come not under 1 8 or 20 fathoms water, nor nearer the north ihore 
 than 3 leagues, till you are part the faid bank ; taking care to keep St. John's 
 Ifland WbS. and Point Romania EbN. 
 
 When you are pa ft this dangerous fhoal, you may keep in with the north 
 fhore, the coaft being clear and fleep, in foundings of 15 or 16 fathoms, ouzy 
 ground ; or in the fair way, from 20 to 1$ or 30 fathoms, fteer directly for 
 Pedro Branco (a low white rock at the SE. entrance of the fl raits), to the north- 
 ward of which you muit pafs ; for to the fouthward thereof is a continued 
 ledge of rocks, above and under water, to the fouth fhore, or Ifland of Bintang. 
 Barbueet Hill, and the fouthernmoft, ifland off Point Romania, when in one, 
 bear VVNW. 
 
 Pedro Branco lies from the outermoft rock, or ifland, off Point Romania, 
 EbS^S. about 2 \ league-, which i., the breadth of the channel. Mid-channel 
 the foundings are 25 fathoms, neai tl e reef< :t~ Point Romania 18 or 20 fathoms, 
 
 and
 
 Directions^;;- Smliuc from Madras to Manilla. 407 
 
 and near Pedro Branco 30 fathoms; but to the eaftward of PedroBranco it fhoalens 
 again to 20, 15, and 12 fathoms. Pedro Branco bearing WbS. 3 leagues, you 
 have 12 \ fathoms, fandy ground ; but near the reef off Point Romania you 
 have hard ground and uneven foundings, from 17 to 12 fathoms. The latitude 
 of Point Romania is 1? 23'N. The longitude from London, 103? ic'E. The 
 variation by obfervations, 32'W. 1763. 
 
 The fhoal, or reef, that lies off Point Romania, is larger and more dange- 
 rous than is generally imagined. We went through thefe ftraits in the night, 
 by moon-fhine, with the wind at SE. and dragged along the fouth fide of the 
 reef in 20, i 9, 18, 22, 20, and next caft had ^fathoms. I could fee (by 
 altering the land) that a very ftrong tide fet us to the eaftvvard ; and, by 
 fhoalening the water, imagined we were coming near the SE. part of the reef; 
 whereupon, 4-}ed in 1 7 fathc ns, and lay till day-light : when the fhip was 
 brought up, tried the current, and found it fet NEbN. 4 knots ; and at day- 
 light had thefe bearings, the outermoft ifland off Point Romania WSW. 3 I 
 leagues, and Pedro Branco SSE. 
 
 His Majefiy's fhip Panther made the figftal of diftrefs, being amongft the 
 fhoals : fhe bore of us NNE. about a mile diftance. She was in 4 fathoms, 
 and had only 32 fathoms all round her, except the place (lie got out at, and 
 there but bare 4 fathoms. At 6 A. M. we weighed, being flack tide, or low 
 water, and fteered E1N. 3 miles, in 17, 16I, 17, and 18 fathoms; then 
 fleered NEbN. 2 miles, and had from 18 to 24 fathoms: then Bin tang Hill 
 bore SlE. Barbucet Hill WIN. Pedro Branco SbW. wefterly, and the outermoft 
 ifland off Point Romania WbS*S. about 4 leagues. 
 
 I would not advife a fhip, going through thefe ftraits to the eaftward, with 
 the wind S. or SE. to come nearer the fouth fide of this reef than 20 fathoms ; 
 for it fhoalens very fuddenly from 1 7 to 12, 8, 5, and 4 fathoms, with overfalls 
 of 4 or 5 fathoms at a call : and be careful to obferve the ebb-tide, which fets 
 right over the reef very ftrong ; for the tide would very foon have fet us near 
 to where the Panther was, had we not °}-}ed as we did. 
 
 Pedro Branco bearing SWbS. about 4 leagues, you are clear of the reef; and, 
 for a long and iafe leading mark, keep Bintang Hill SbWiW. which will lead 
 you clear of the reef, in no lefs than 1 5 or 1 6 fathoms. By fleering to the north- 
 eaftward, the water deepens fafr. to 20 and 25 fathoms. 
 
 Pedro Branco, by a good obfervation, lies in latitude 1? 2o'N. and bears from 
 Bintang Hill NbW. about 5 leagues. From Pedro Bianco to the outermoft 
 
 part
 
 4oS A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 part of the reef, the courfe is NEbN. 4 leagues ; and when Eintang Hill 
 bears SbWfW. 6 or 7 leagues, in 15 or 16 fathoms, ouzy ground, you are 
 without the point of the reef, and may then freer NNE. or NbE. for i'ulo 
 Auroe (or rather Auore, or Aor), the water deepening fail to 20, 24, and 
 25 fathoms. Eintang and Barbucet Hills bear from each other NWbN. and 
 SEbS. to or 12 leagues. 
 
 In the NE. monfoon the flood runs ftrong into the flraits, through the 
 narrow paflage between the Romania Rocks and PeJro Branco ^SW. v» ithout, 
 and WSW. in the narrow paflage), frequently for 12 hours together, and iome- 
 times longer, when it blows frem ; but in the SW, monfoon the ebb tide runs 
 longed to the ENE. and NE. over the reef, at the rate of 4 knots. The 
 time of high water, at full and change, is uncertain ; only in the SW. mon- 
 foon it flows neareff. north or fouth, or 12 hours ; but in the NE. monfoon 
 it has great dependence on the winds. 
 
 Pulo Aor lies from Pedro Branco NbE. 24 or 25 leagues, and from Bintang 
 Hill N|E. 30 leagues; and after you have palled the reef off Point Romania, 
 there is no danger, only a fun ken rock, that lies fouth from Pulo Aor 7 or 8 
 leagues, which you will take care to avoid. You have foundings between 
 the Point of the reef off Point Romania and Pulo Aor, from 16 or 18 to 25 
 or 30 fathoms : and when Pulo Aor bears from WIN. to WIS. 5 or 6 miles, 
 you will have 2>S fathoms. The current here, in the SW. monfoon, is found 
 conftantly to fet N. and NbE. 1 § knot. 
 
 Pulo Aor is high land, making in two hills like a fiddle ; the eafrernmofl 
 the higheft ; when they bear NW. they are fhut in one. The fouth part of 
 this ifland lies in latitude 2? 20/N. as obferved when lying at °h^ there. 
 
 Pulo Tingev, on which there is a very high peak (like a lugar loaf), lies 
 from Pulo Aor WbSiS. diilance 6 leagues ; as does Pulo Pifarig NWbN. 3 or 
 4 leagues. Pulo Aor bearing NW. 11 or 1 z leagues, you have 36 fathoms, 
 ouze ; NW»W. 4 leagues 34 fa horns ; ouze ; WNW. 2 leagues, 34 fathoms, 
 mud ; WNW1N. 5 miles, "34 fathoms WiN. 4 or 5 miles, 34 fathoms, 
 mud ; WSWiS. 4 leagues, 36 fathoms ; ouze ; WSW. 8 or 9 leagues. 38 
 fathoms, clay ; SWIS. 6 or 7 leagues, 38 fathoms, ouze ; WSW»S. 6 or 7 
 leagues, 37 fathoms, ouze ; SWiW. 8 leagues, 38 fathoms, mud ; and 
 SSW. 13 or 14 leagues, j8 fathoms, mud. Pulo Aor bearing from WSW. 
 to WNW. diftance from 4 to 6 or 7 miles, you have 34 fathoms, mud; the 
 fame bearings, about 4 le gues di fiance, you have 36 fathoms, ouze ; and at 
 6 or 7 leagues diilance, 37 fathoms, ouze, mixed with fand and broken (hells. 
 
 You
 
 Directions/*;* Sailing from Madras to Manilla. 400 
 
 You fail to the eaftward of thefe iflands in foundings from 3 o to 40 fathoms. 
 Pulo Timoan bearing WbNiN. 6 leagues, Pulo Pifang WSW. 3 or 4 leagues! 
 and Pulo Aor SIE. 4 leagues, you have 34 fathoms mud and clay. ' Pulo 
 Timoan bearing WNW|W. 8 or 9 leagues; Pulo Aor WbSiS. 6 or 7 
 leagues ; and Pulo Pifang WiN. you have 36 fathoms, green ouze, mixed 
 with coarfe fand and broken fhells. Pulo Timoan WbN. 12 or 13 league's ; 
 Pulo Aor SWbWiW. 9 or 10 leagues ; the Anambas Iflands from the mad- 
 head ESE. 13 or 14 leagues, 37 fathoms, ouze. Pulo Timoan W. 8 or 9 
 leagues, the Anambas feen at the mart-head from NE. to ENE. 36 fathoms 
 ouze, mixed with fand and broken fhells ; Pulo Timoan SWbW. 8 or 9 leagues • 
 Pulo Pifang SWbS. and Pulo Aor SSW. 13 or 14 leagues, 38 fathoms, Inudl 
 From Pulo Aor to Pulo Timoan, the courfe is NNWiW. diftance 9 le.i-mes. 
 The depth of water between them, from 36 to 30 fathoms. Pulo Timoan, 
 the northernmoft of thefe iflands is a large and high mountainous ifland, covered 
 with trees, and lies in latitude 2? 5o'N. and longitude 103? 43^. from London- 
 There was no variation at this ifland 1 763. 
 
 From Pulo Timoan to Pulo Condore, the courfe is Ni9?E. 122 leagues. 
 You have foundings all the way between thefe iflands ; particularly Pulo 
 Timoan WbS. 5 leagues, you have 35 ftithoms, and SbW^W. 15 or 16 
 leagues, 40 fathoms, ouzy ground ; in latitude 4? z'N. and meridian diftance 
 23'E. from Pulo Timoan, 42 fathoms, fand and ouze ; from thence to latitude 
 5? 24'N. meridian diftance 49 E. from 42 to 40 fathoms, fand, mud, 
 and ouze ; from thence to latitude 6? 49'N. and meridian diftance 1? iS'E. 
 from 40 to 38, 35, 30, and 27 fathoms, moflly fand, fometimes with ouze ; 
 from thence to latitude 7? 30'N. meridian diftance i?35'E. from 27 to :: and 
 22 fathoms fand; from thence to latitude 8? iS'N. meridian diftance 2? iS'E- 
 from 21 to 19 and 21 fathoms, coarfe brown land : when Pulo Condore Lore 
 from NbW to NbEiE. 8 or 9 leagues, had 19 fathoms ; and at noon, when 
 the body of it bore NVV5W. 7 or 8 leagues, had 21 fathoms. The variation 
 little or none, nor any current worth fpeaking of. 
 
 Pulo Domar lies due eaft from Pulo Pifang, in latitude 2? ^3'N. and is about 
 the height of a large fliip's main-top out of the water, and about 3 times as bio- 
 as a large fhip'b hull ; the fides of it appear to be fteep or rather perpendicular, 
 and look very white when the fun fhines upon it. This ifland lies in the fair 
 way between Pulo Pifang, or Pulo Aor, and the Anambas, but neareft the 
 latter; and, to all appearance, bold to, and no danger near it. 
 
 LI I p u '
 
 aio A New Directory for the East-Indies 
 
 Pulo Domar bearing NE. Pulo Pifang WtN. Pulo Timoan NW. and Pulo 
 Aor WbSjS. diftance about 10 leagues, you have 38 fathoms, ouze. 
 
 The Anambas are a clufter of fmall iflands, fome of which are pretty- 
 high, and may be feen 9, 10, or 1 1 leagues ; the body of them lie about due 
 eaft from Pulo Aor, diftance about 21 or 22 leagues. One of the Anambas 
 in fight, from the deck, bearing EbSIS. 10 or n leagues, you have 40 fathoms, 
 ouze, mixed with fand and broken fhells. 
 
 The foundings between the Anambas and Pulo Aor, are very regular; and 
 the fort of foundings fo much alike, that a man cannot eafily direct himfelf 
 by them, only in regard to the depth ; for the ground is generally ouzy, as 
 you may fee by the above particulars, off Pulo Aor. IMid-channel, between 
 Pulo Aor and the Anambas (i. e. about 10 or 11 leagues-) to the eaft ward of 
 Pulo Aor, you have 38 fathoms, ouze. If you are nearer the Anambas thaa 
 Pulo Aor, you will have 40 fathoms, ouze ; tben you may fee the Anambas 
 in clear weather. If you can keep in 35, 36, or 37 fathoms, you will be in the 
 fair way, and pafs 4, 5, or 6 leagues to the eaftward* of Pulo Aor. 
 
 The Natunas are a clufter of fmall iflands to the north-eaftward of the 
 Anambas, and not fir from them ; fome of them are pretty high, and may be 
 {een 9 or 10 leagues ; the northernmoft of them lies in about latitude 4?N. 
 
 In the months that the mon loons ihift in, the currents run very ftrong among 
 the Ifland3 Timoan, Pifang, Aor, and between them and the Anambas ; thev 
 are very changeable, letting, at the latter end of September, or beginning of 
 October, for feveral hours together, to the SSW. and SVVbS. i| or 2 knots 
 per hour; and, after ceafing for fome time, they will fet to the fouthward, at 
 the rate of 1 knot, and then SSE. SE. and ESE. and fometimes to the NE. 
 il knot, For feveral hours together; then they will ceafe again for fome time,. 
 and fet to the S. and SSW. as before. 
 
 In the month of April, when the mon loons fhift again, the current runsasfaft 
 to the northward, from NbW. to NNE. and NE. at the rate of 1 or if knot, 
 and fometimes 2 knots. Thofe who come this way in the forefaid months* 
 
 I a 111 \>.\,.y weather, or the night time, muft have great regard to the currents, 
 or ■ ivill'l n vived. 
 
 In ■ ;cr months, after the monfbon is fet in, the currents are pretty 
 
 regular ana cbnuaiit, in both monfoons. In the S\V. monfoon, the current, 
 From ! eJro Bianco to Pulo Aor, &c. lets NbE. or NNE. about 1 knot. At 
 Pulo Aor, and between it and the Anambas, the current lets N. and NbE.. 
 
 ii knot ;
 
 Directions for Sailing from Madras to Manilla. 41 1 
 
 11 knot ; and fo to the north part of Pulo Timoan. From Timoan, for 20 
 leagues to the northward of it, von will have a current letting N-bE. about r 
 knot ; then the current ceafes ; and you find little or no current afterward, as 
 you fail to Pulo Condore, Pulo Sapata, or all over the China Seas, in either 
 monfoon, except at the time of the fhifting. In the NE, menibon the currents 
 let juft the contrary way, at much the fame rate. 
 
 Being the length of I'ulo Aor, or Pulo Timoan, there is a n'ecefiity of making 
 Pulo Condore, for the greater certainty of making Pulo Sapata, and to avoid 
 the Middleburgh Shoal. 
 
 Pulo Condore is an high and mountainous ifland, or rather number of iflands, 
 of which Condore is the largeft and higheft, and the only one, it is iaid, that is 
 inhabited. Thefe iflands lie about eaft and weft, 1401- 1 5 miles in length, and 
 appear at a diftance in a number of hummocks ; but as you approach nearer, 
 thefe hummocks foon appear to be a number of very high hills or mounts. 
 This ifland may be feen in clear weather 16 or 17 leagues. It is icen bearing 
 NbEiE. 14 leagues, in 20 fathoms water. 
 
 Pulo Condore is a place where the generality of fhips take their departure from, 
 when bound into the Chinefe Seas, or coming out of them ; its latitude is 8? 
 4o'N. and longitude 106? 32'E. from London. The variation, by ftvenil obler- 
 vations oft" this ifland, in September 1762, was i6'W. 
 
 Pulo Condore bearing NbEiE. diftance 16 or 17 leagues, (at which bearings 
 and diftance it may be {ten in clear weather) you will have 20 fathoms, line 
 white land, with black fpecks ; NNE. 9 or 10 leagues, 20 fathoms, fine white 
 land; NbE. 4 or 5 leagues, 19 fathoms, ditto; N\V. 7 or 8 leagues, 21 
 fathoms, ditto ; W. 10 leagues, 22 fathoms, ditto; \V. 12 leagues, 24 fathoms 
 ditto ; WbSiS. 22 leagues, 28 to 30 fathoms, fine grey fand ; \\ bSiS. 25 
 or 26 leagues, 37 fathoms, fine dark-coloured fand; WbSiS. 30 or 31 
 leagues, 42 fathoms, ditto; and WbS or WbSiS. 40, 41, or 42 1. agues, 48 
 or 50 fathoms, fine grey land ; and you will have no foundings to the eaft ward 
 of this. 
 
 Being to the eaft ward of Pulo Condore, in latitude So? 4©'N, and in 20 
 fathoms water, you will be fure to fee it, bearing W. 6 or 7 leagues, unlefs 
 the weather is very hazy. You may depend upon feeing it, an clear weather, 
 from the following foundings ; in 22 fathoms you may i< e it bearing W. 10 
 leagues ; in 24 fathoms, W. 12 leagues. If you are fure of your latitude and 
 foundings, you may depend on the diftance above-mentioned, fhould the weather 
 prove fo hazy that you cannot fee it. 
 
 L 1 I 2 Beins;
 
 412 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Being 7 or 8 leagues off Pulo Condore, in 20 fathoms, or 9 or 10 leagues 
 from it, in 22 fathoms, and intending to fee Pulo Sapata, you muft fteer NEiE. 
 this will carry you far enough without it ; or NEbE. this will carry you but 
 juft in fight of it, in clear weather. You have foundings all the way between 
 them. Pulo Condore bearing NW. 7 or 8 leagues, we had 21 fathoms, fine 
 white fand, with fiome black fpecks ; then fleered NE+E. 84 miles, deepened 
 our water gradually from 21 to 28, 32, 36, and 42 fathoms, grey fand and 
 fhells ; thence fleered NE'E. 31 miles, deepened our water to 47 and 5$ 
 fathoms, coarfe grey fand, and to 72 fathoms, clay and fand ; continuing the 
 fame courfe, foon after had no ground, 90 fathoms : then hauled in to the north- 
 ward 10 miles, and had foundings 72 fathoms, coarfe grey fand ; fleered north 
 5 miles, and had 52 fathoms. 
 
 Pulo Sapata bearing NEiE. 8 or 9 leagues, had 42 fathoms, coarfe grey fand, 
 with fome fmall ftones and black fpecks, like pepper corns ; Pulo Sapata, NEbE. 
 10 leagues, and the wefternmoft Catwick, NNEfE. 7 or 8 leagues, had 
 <j2 fathoms, fine brown fand ; Pulo Sapata, ENE. 8 leagues ; and the weftern- 
 moft: Catwick, NE. 6 leagues, 46 fathoms, fine grey fand ; Pulo Sapata, NE. 
 9 leagues, 96 fathoms, mud and fand ; NNE. 8 or 9 leagues, 78 fathoms, 
 ouze : here the current fet SSW. 2 knots and 3 fathoms, the latter end of 
 September. 
 
 Pulo Sapata, NbEIE. 9 leagues, 72 fathoms, ouze ; NbEIE. 5 leagues, 70 
 fathoms, ouze and white fand; NbEIE. 7 miles, 75 fathoms, ouze; NbE. 
 4 leagues, 80 fathoms, ouze ; NbE. 7 or 8 leagues, 85 fathoms, mud and land ; 
 NjEfE. 7 leagues, and the w r efternmoft Catwick, NbE|E. 8 leagues, 62 
 fathoms, ouze and fand ; the wefternmoft: Catwick, NNE. 7 or 8 leagues, 71 
 fathoms, ouze and fand. 
 
 By this it appears, that there are regular foundings all the way between Pulo 
 Condore and Pulo Sapata ; that the water deepens faft as you come near Pulo 
 Sapata; and that the bank goes off fuddenly from 85 to 90 fathoms, and no 
 foundings. 
 
 When Pulo Sapata bears about NbE. you are then going off the bank ; at that 
 bearing 7 or 8 leagues, you have 85 fathoms ; this is the edge of the bank : 
 a very little to the eafhvard or fouthward thereof, you have no founding ; 
 which fhews that there are no foundings to the eafhvard of Pulo Sapata, and 
 that there is deep water very near it. 
 
 In or near the latitude of Pulo Sapata, if you have under 48 fathoms, you are 
 to the weft ward of it; if you have 52 fathoms in the ftream of Pulo Sapata, 
 
 in
 
 Directions^ Sailing from Madras to Manilla. 413 
 
 in the fair-way between it and Pulo Condore, it will bear from ENE. to 
 NEbE. 10 leagues ; if you have from 70 to 85 fathoms, you are to the 
 fouthward of Pulo Sapata, and near the edge of the bank; and Pulo Sapata 
 then bears from NbE. to NNE. from 4 to 8 leagues ; therefore, being in the 
 latitude of Pulo Sapata, and noibundings, you may be lure you are to theeaft- 
 ward of it. 
 
 Pulo Sapata lies in latitude 9? 54/N. and longitude 108? I5'E. from London, 
 bearing, from Pulo Condore ENE^N. diftance 48 leagues. This is a pretty high 
 and rocky ifland, which may be feen in tolerable clear weather 9 or 10 leagues. 
 Mod mips bound to China endeavour to make this ifland, and alfo in their return 
 from thence. To the north-weft ward of this ifland, and fome diftance from it, 
 lie two other iflands, called the Catwicks ; thefe alfo are pretty high, and may 
 be feen 7 or 8 leagues in clear weather. 
 
 CCC. Directions for Ships bound to Manilla, crofflng the China 
 
 Seas. 
 
 From Pulo Fapata, being bound to Manilla, lbape your courfe about NE. 
 or fo as to be fure to get into latitude of 12? ^ N. until you make 4 degrees 
 eafting ; for in latitude 11? 3o'N. and longitude 4?E. from Pulo Sapata, lie 2 
 dangerous fhoals ; thefe were feen on board his Majefty's fhip South-Sea Caftle, 
 on her palTage from Pulo Sapata to Manilla, 1762, according to the following 
 extract from the ftiip's log-book. 
 
 At day-light, in the morning, faw two low fandy iflands a-head, lying SW. 
 and NE. of each other: the diftance between them 2 or 3 leagues. The 
 northernmoft bore NNW. and had an high tree on it ; the fouthernmoft bore 
 NWbW. diftance 7 or 8 miles : latitude in, by account at that time, n?3o / N. 
 and longitude, made from Pulo Sapata, 4?E. Pulo Sapata, by eftimation, S68?W. 
 diftance 97 leagues ; founded, no ground. 
 
 Alfo the fame year a country fhip, named the Sabut Jung, from Bengal to 
 Manilla, remarks, that between Pulo Sapata and the Ifland Cabra, or Luban, 
 is a low ifland, almoft in the fair-way, which muft be avoided by failing to the 
 northward, thereof; few or none lay it down in its true latitude, which is 
 11? 28'N. and meridian diftance from Pulo Sapata, 5? ia'E. It is fo low, that 
 we did not fee it till within 3 miles of it, in clear weather. To the weftward 
 it appears clear, but to the eaftward is a low fandy bank ; and about 7 leagues 
 to the eaftward of the ifland is a fhoal, on which we had only 8 fathoms water. 
 
 Thefe
 
 414 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Thefe mi°ht be the fame, as their latitude is fo much alike ; though i? iz 
 difference in their fuppofed longitude. From latitude 1 2? 1 N. to 13? 5o'N. you 
 may fleer to the eaftward with great fafety, in order to make Cabra, or Goat 
 Ifland. 
 
 The Ifland Cabra, or Goat Ifland, is a low, flat, rocky ifland, feemingly 
 fteep to on all fides ; it is about 9 or 10 miles in length, and near as much in 
 breadth, being almoft round ; and may be feen from a (hip's deck 6 or 7 leagues. 
 The latitude of this ifland, by obfervation, is 13? 56'N. and longitude 119? 1 3'E. 
 from London, according to Mr. Nichelfon. No variation (by feveral obfer- 
 vations) off this ifland 1 762. When this ifland bears SEbE. it is then on 
 with the Ifland Luban, which, being very high and mountainous, may be {eei\ 
 17 or 18 leagues. Navigators commonly begin and end their reckoning at this 
 ifland. 
 
 As vou fail from Goat Ifland, toward the Ifland Mirabelle, or Corigedore, 
 you will fee the Ifland Fortune, which is a fmall, but higb, rocky ifland, 
 bearin° r from Corisredore SbWfW. <; or 6 leagues. You leave this ifland on the 
 ftarboard fide, and paflRn-g it about 3 leagues to the westward, will have no- 
 foundings, till you come within 2 or ih leagues of Corigedore ; thereabout you 
 have from 45 to 50 fathoms, fandy ground. Keeping on toward Corigedore, 
 you fhoalen your water gradually to 40, 35, 30 fathoms ; and about 2 miles to 
 the weft ward thereof, you have 26 or 27 fathoms* 
 
 As vou near Corigedore, you will fee a rock like a fail, which lies about half 
 way between it and the fouth fhore, bearing from Corigedore SEbS. about 2 
 miles ; ic is fteep to on all fides. You have 20 fathoms within a quarter of a 
 mile of this rock ; and from 20 to 24 fathoms between it and Corigedore ; and 
 between the rock and the fouth fhore, there are from 20 to 17 fathoms within 
 a quarter of a mile of the fhore, all clear, land)' ground, and no danger but 
 what you fee. 
 
 There is alfo another rock, called the Haycock Rock (from its great refemblance 
 thereunto) bearing from Corigedore WIS. about z\ miles; it is pretty hi 
 and fteep to on all fides, having 27 fathoms within a quarter of a mile all round 
 it. Between this and the north fhore, you have regular foundings, from 27 
 to 2S, and 20 fathoms, a quarter of a mile from the fhore, hue, clear, fandy 
 bottom: between it and Corigedore, from 27 to 22, to 29 and 30 fathoms ; 
 the nearer the N\V. part of Corigedore, the deeper the water. 
 
 There is a rock with an hole in it, which you may fee through ; it lies a very 
 fmall diftance off the NW.br W. part of Corigedore; within a cable's length 
 
 thereof,
 
 Directions for Ships bound to Manilla. 415 
 
 thereof, you have 30 fathoms. A-breaft of Corigedore, mid-channel between 
 it and the north fliore, you have 26 fathoms ; the nearer Corigedore, the deeper 
 the water ; deepening from 26 to 36, 48 and 52 fathoms, within a quarter 
 of a mile of the ifland. On the other hand, it fhoalens quickly from 26 fathoms, 
 mid-channel, to 16 or 15 fathoms, within a quarter of a mile of the north 
 more, hard ftony ground. 
 
 Being in 45 or 50 fathoms, 2 leagues, or thereabout, to the weftward of 
 Corigedore, fleer directly for that ifland ; and if you have a fair wind, the 
 common paflage is between the Haycock Rock and Corigedore, and fo between 
 it and the north fliore, keeping Corigedore on the ftarboard fide. 
 
 The Ifland Corigedore, or Mirabelle, is a pretty high and large ifland, near 
 the entrance of Manilla Bay, but rather neareft the north fhore, lying in latitude 
 14? 24 / N. and longitude 120? 25'E. from London, and bears frem Goat Ifland 
 NEiE. diftance 15 leagues. There is plenty of good frefli water near the 
 weft part of this ifland, under a very high, fteep cliff, about | of a mile from 
 the rock with an hole in it ; but it is bad landing on a ftony beach, though the 
 water is always fmooth. 
 
 From Corigedore the courfe to Manilla is ENEiN. diftance 1 1 leasrues : and 
 to Caveta EbNiN". 8 or 9 leagues. In this paflage you muft be very careful 
 of a dangeroues flioal that lies in the fair way, called St. Nicholas's Shoal, 
 which has but 11 feet on the flioaleft part of it, and is fteep to. On the 
 outer part of this fhoal, the N\V. part of Corigedore bears Wi3?S. Caveta 
 Church, Ei7?N. and the extremes of the land about Caveta, E^3?N. here 
 are but 1 1 feet water, and within a fhip's length to the north-weftward thereof, 
 you have 13 or 15 fathoms, being lb fteep to, that no one can tell svhen he 
 is near it by his foundings ; therefore have a ftricl regard to the leading 
 marks, viz. 
 
 As you fteer to the caft ward of Corigedore for Manilla, or Caveta, keep the 
 N. or NVV. part of Corigedore WSW. till you bring Caveta church fteeple to 
 bear E. and a remarkable hummock, clofe to the lea, on a point of land, on 
 the north fhore, WN WIN. you are then clear of St. Nicholas's Shoal, and may 
 fteer for Caveta, or Manilla, at your pleafure. You have foundings between 
 Corigedore and the north lhore, 26 fathoms ; between St. Nicholas's Shoal and 
 the north fliore, in the fair way, 17 and 18 fathoms ((hoaiening gradually 
 toward the north fliore, to 5 and 4 fathoms) ; and as you fteer to the 
 eaftward, you will flioalen your water gradually from 17 to 14, 12, 10, 8, 6, 
 and 5 fathoms, in which depth you may cf-} in fafety off Caveta, the flag-ftaff 
 
 SiW.
 
 416 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 SfW. a low point of land, called Shingley Point, and Corigedore, in one, 
 WiS. diftance from Caveta a large mile, the bottom muddy, and good holding 
 ground. 
 
 Being to the weft ward of the Ifland Corigedore, with the wind eafterly or 
 ENE. which is right out of Manilla Bay, it is belt to go through the fouth 
 channel, between Corigedore and the iouth more ; there being more room 
 for a fhip to turn to windward, and no danger but what may be feen ; the 
 fouth fhore being bold, and clear of all danger. The nearer to Corigedore, 
 the deeper the water on all fides : but you muft carefully oblerve the following 
 remarks. 
 
 i ft, When you are got a-breaft the eafternmoft high land, on the fouth 
 fhore, which bears from Corigedore SE;E. you muft be careful how you 
 ftand toward the fouth fhore ; for the tail of St. Nicholas's Shoal trenches 
 away gradually toward the above-mentioned high land ; and you will fome- 
 times fhoalen your water fuddenly from 12 to 6 01-7 fathoms, hard, rocky 
 ground ; therefore it is advifeable to ftand in to no lefs than 12 or 13 fathoms; 
 and as you get further to the eaftward, not to ftand in to lefs than 15 or 16 
 fathoms ; for you may have 15 fathoms at one caft, and 7 or 61- fathoms the 
 next caft, and then 4 fathoms, which is on the edge of St. Nisholas's 
 Shoal. 
 
 2d, To weather away the eaft part of Corigedore as foon as you can ; ycu 
 will have 22 or 23 fathoms within half a mile of it. When you can weather 
 it., ftand over for the north fhore, and keep working up along that fhore 
 (which is bold toj, having in mo ft places 15 or 16 fathoms a quarter of a 
 mile off fhore, and 10 or 12 fathoms at a cable's length off fhore, though it 
 fhoalem very fuddenly from 15 to 10, 7, and 5 fathoms in fome places ; nor 
 is there any danger but what may be (c<tn. 
 
 After you are pa It Corigedore, the north fhore has a clear, fandy bottom, 
 and °<x>d 4-^aee. As you go more to the eaftward and northward, you will 
 find the north fhore more flat, and the foundings more gradual, having 17 
 or 1 3 fathoms three quarters of a mile off fhore, and 12 fathoms half a mile 
 off fhore, fhoalening gradually from 1 2 to 10, 8, 6, 5, 4, and 3 fathoms, 
 clofe in fhore. As you ftand to the fouth ward, be careful to avoid the 
 St. Nicholas Shoal, according to the leading marks above given to carry you 
 clear of it. 
 
 In Manilla Bay there is a tide, which ebbs and flows about 3 feet perpen- 
 dicularly. It is not regular in the bay ; and about Corigedore it runs ftrong 
 
 to
 
 DiRECTiONsyor Ships bound lo Manilla. 417 
 
 to the we fl ward for 24 hours together, efpecially with the wind eaflerly ; then 
 it ceafeth for 4, 5, or 6 hours, and then runs ftrong to the wc ft ward again ; 
 between Corigedore and the north more, the tides run out fur 18 hour 9 
 together to the weftward, pretty ftrong, and then turns and runs as ftrong to 
 the eaftward for 6 hours, in which time the water has flowed to its full 
 height. The tide runs to the weftward 18 hours out of the 24 ; and fometimes 
 the flood, and one ebb ; and it flows as much in 6, as it ebbs in 18 hours ; but 
 the time of high water is not afcertained. 
 
 Caveta is properly the fea-port to Manilla, though it is a town and garrifon 
 itfelf. It is fituated on a low point of land, which forms a fafe and excellent 
 harbour, though rather too mallow, having no more than 18 or 19 fathoms 
 in the deepen 1 part of it, the bottom foft mud ; great fhips may lie in fafety iiv 
 Caveta Road, and be well fheltered from the SW. and W. winds. 
 
 Here the Spaniards have a very good marine yard, well ftored with all kinds 
 of naval ftores ; build their galleons or other mips, and have excellent conve- 
 niences for heaving fhips down, and repairing them, at which they are very 
 dextrous. It is fortified by fea and land; at the extreme point of it there is a 
 fquare battery, with 10 guns in the faces, to the N. and NE. in order to defend 
 the entrance of the harbour ; it has alfo a citadel with 4 baflions, &c. which 
 form nearly a fquare ; this is called Fort St. Philip. The marine yard extends 
 from the extreme point to this port, and the town from hence to the gates ; it 
 is defended toward the land by two round towers, with 10 pieces of cannon 
 each, and a wall with a parapet from one to the other ; in the middle whereof 
 is the land gate, before which is a wet ditch, formed by the fea, and a draw- 
 bridge acrofs it : without this gate there is a narrow neck of land, (the 
 narrowed: part of which is not more than 32 yards over), for about \ a mile, 
 which adds greatly to the ftrength of this place by land ; it has likewife two 
 other batteries to the leaward, one of 14 guns, and the other of 8 guns. 
 
 There is no good water in Caveta, though there are many wells with 
 plenty of water ; but it is all blackiih ; the Spaniards neither uiing it for 
 drinking, nor drefhng of victuals. They fend for their water up their river, 
 by Old Caveta, where they get very good water ; but that river is not navigable, 
 even for boats, only at high water ; and is commanded by the fortifications at 
 Caveta. 
 
 Manilla lies from Caveta NNE-E. about 3 leagues, and no danger between 
 them ; the foundings are regular, from 5 fathoms, at Caveta, to 6, 7, 8, and 
 q fathoms, half way to Manilla; and they flioalen gradually to 8, 7, 6, 5, 
 
 M m nv and
 
 418 A New Directory Jor the East-Indies. 
 
 and 4 f, or 4 fathoms off Manilla. If you have occafion to turn between 
 hem, you may ftand in fhore, any where between them, to 5 or 4 \ fathoms, 
 the Ihores being very flat ; they fhoalen very gradually every where ; all clear 
 ground, and muddy bottom. 
 
 You lie in a good birth in Manilla Road, with the following bearings, viz. 
 the fifhing flakes, at the river's mouth, Ni8?E. the north baflion, N37?|E. 
 the cupola, E37?N. the SW. baflion, E2o?N. in 5 fathoms water, 1 mile from 
 Manilla. The Spanifh (hips very feldom <\-$ off Manilla, but generally in 
 Caveta Road, or Harbour. 
 
 Manilla (the principal Spanifh fettlement, and feat of a fuperior governor- 
 general over all the Phillippine Hands) is a fpacious city, fituated on the 
 Ifland Luconia, in latitude 14? 36"N. and longitude, by aftronomical obferva- 
 tion made there by the Spaniards, J 20? 5o'E. from London ; the variation, 
 by feveral obfervations, was 36'W. 1 763. This city lies on the fouth fide of 
 the entrance of the Rio de Pafig, and is encompafled with a good wall, for- 
 tified with baflions, &c. but the works, though regular on the S. and E. 
 fides, are irregular on the N. and W. fides, as they follow the fhape of the river 
 and bay. 
 
 The fituation of Manilla, and the fafe port of Caveta, make it a convenient 
 place for trade ; but, notwithstanding thefe advantages, there is not much 
 trade carried on there, confidering the largenefs of the city, and number of its 
 inhabitants. Thev have 3 galleons, which pafs and repafs annually between 
 this place and Acapulco, bringing immenfe treafures from the latter; and 
 this is their chief dependence. Thefe fail from Acapulco in March or April, 
 and arrive at Manilla in about Augufr. or September. They have alfo about 
 5 or 6 fail of other veffels, that trade to China and Batavia ; and they have 
 4 fail of row-gallies, which are armed vefiels, to guard the coafl and iflands 
 adjacent. 
 
 The air at Manilla is very unwholefome, during the months of June, July, and 
 Augufl, being very clofe and humid, and fubjecl to great vapours and fogs, 
 occafioned by the vigorous vegetation from the low, level fwampy lands, near 
 to and around the city, for feveral miles ; wheieby fevers and fluxes are very 
 rife, and fome years carry off great numbers of the inhabitants. The mufkatoes 
 alio are very troublefome in thefe months. 
 
 Wood is a very fcarcc article, both here and at Caveta ; there being none 
 to be had but what is brought down the rivers from the inland parts in 
 
 country
 
 Directions^/- Sailing from Manilla, Z2c. 419 
 
 country boats. The river at Manilla is very good water ; you go up it to thi 
 bridge, and fill your calks in the boat. If your fhip is in Manilla Road, you 
 may water with great expedition ; but this river is entirely commanded by the 
 garrifon of Manilla. 
 
 CCCI. Directions^/- SAiLiNGy/wzz Manilla to the Straits ^Sincapour 
 and Malacca, hi the North-E^st Monsoon. 
 
 The method generally taken to make a paffage from Manilla to the Straits of 
 Malacca is, on leaving the Bay of Manilla, to fleer for the Ifland Cabra, or 
 Goat Ifland. The courfe is SW^W. diflance 15 leagues. You take your 
 departure from Goat Ifland, and fleer to the weflward, Co as to go to the northward 
 of the iflands, or fhoals, i'eea by the South-Sea Caftle and the Sabut June, as 
 before-mentioned ; and when you are to the weflward thereof, fleer for Pulo 
 Sapata, endeavouring to get fight of it. If Sapata is not feen, and you are certain 
 you are to the fouthward of it, haul in to the weflward, and endeavour to set 
 foundings, which you will, foon have at 40, 45, 48, or 50 fathoms, fine °rey 
 land, in latitude 9? io'N. 
 
 After linking foundings, you may fleer WbS. for Pulo Condore ; and in fo 
 doing, you will fhoalen your water, in the diftance of 1 7 or 18 leagues, from 
 50 to yi fathoms, fine grey fand, in latitude 8? 57'N. Continuing that courfe 
 13 leagues further, you will fhoalen your water to 24 fathoms, fine white 
 fand in latitude 8? 45'N. and if it is clear weather, you will fee Pulo Condore 
 very plain, bearing about WiS. 11 or 12 leagues. If the weather is hazy (as 
 it frequently is in the NE. monfoon), it matters not your going nearer Pulo 
 Condore ; you may depend on your bearings and diftances therefrom in that 
 latitude and depth of water, and may haul to the fouthward for Pulo Timoan, 
 or Pulo Aor, 
 
 You may fieer SSWtW, or SWbS. till you are in latitude 7? 2c/N. and 
 you will have foundings from 24 to 21 and 22 fathoms, fine white and °rey 
 land. From thence fleer SSW. or SSWtW. till you are in latitude 5? 44'N". 
 and you will have foundings from 22 to 26, 32, 34, 39, and 40 fathoms, 
 foft muddy ground. From thence you may fleer SSW. SSW^W. or SWbS, 
 till you are in latitude 5? o/N. and you will have foundings from 40 to 42 and 
 44 fathoms, blue clay and mud. From thence fleer SbWlW. till vou are 
 in latitude 3? 20 N. and jou will have foundings from 44 to 40, 2>$i an d 30 
 
 M m m 2 fathoms,
 
 420 New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 fathoms, coarfe gravel, fand, and fhells ; in this latitude and depth of 
 water you may fee Pulo Timoan bearing S. 7 or 8 leagues, and Pulo Pifang, 
 SbE^E. 
 
 At the latter end of September, or beginning of October, off Pulo Sapata, 
 the Catwicks, and thereabout, you will find very ftrong currents fetting 
 different ways, and running much flxonger at fome times than others. When 
 it runs ftrongefr. (which is about 2! knots), it generally lets to the fouthward, 
 from SbW. to SbE. for feveral hours together : then it will flacken, and 
 run to the SSW. at the rate of I f knot ; then run SW. at the rate of a knot, 
 for fome time ; and then run to the S. and SSE. at the rate of 2 and 2 i knots, 
 as before. 
 
 From Pulo Sapata to Pulo Condore, the current fets from S. to SW. and 
 WSW. at the rate of 1 7 or 2 knots ; and from Pulo Condore to Pulo Timoan, 
 from S. to SSW. about 1 | knot. 
 
 At the SW. point of Pulo Timoan there are three very remarkable high 
 peaks, two of which are called the Affes Ears, from the refemblance they 
 have to the ears of that animal ; which cannot efcape the notice of thofe 
 that make this ifland. Thofe who would 4-} here, coming from the north- 
 ward, muff go to the weflward of Pulo Timoan, between it and a fmall 
 ifland that lies to the weflward of the north end of Pulo Timoan. The 
 channel between them is about a league broad, and has 24 fathoms, mid- 
 channel. 
 
 You keep about 1 1 or 2 miles off the weft fhore of Pulo Timoan, in 
 foundings from 28 to 17, 18, 20, and 22 fathoms, fmall ftones, fand, and 
 ihells. The beft <f-^age is in a fandy bay at the SW. part of the ifland, where 
 it fhoalens gradually from 22 to 10 and 9 fathoms, fand and gravel, clear 
 of rocks and foul ground. You have a good birth in 15 or 16 fathoms, with 
 the SW. point of the ifland bearing about ESE. the bight, or middle of the 
 Tandy bay, NNE5E. and the north-wefternmoft part of the ifland in fight about 
 NNW. 
 
 There are no houfes hereabout, nor the leaft fign of inhabitants, though 
 there are great numbers on the ifland ; but no kind of refrelhments to be got 
 here. There are two very good watering-places in this bay ; the one, a river 
 on the eaft fide, where boats may fill their calks with great eafe ; but it has a 
 bar, which prevents their going in or out at low water : the other is at a large 
 confiant running ft ream on the weft fide of the bay, where you may fill at all 
 times : at either of them the water is very good. Here is alio plenty of fire- 
 wood
 
 Directions for Sailing from Manilla, &c. 421 
 
 Wood for cutting, near the fhore. The tides are regular here, flowing, on the 
 full and change, E. and W. or 6 hours : the flood fets to the NNW. and the 
 ebb SSE. at the rate of 1 1 knot ; and flows perpendicularly by the fhore 8 or 
 9 feet. 
 
 From the above ftation, by fleering SSE. for Pulo Aor, you will deepen 
 your water from 30 fathoms, courfe gravel, fand, and fhells, to 35 and 36 
 fathoms, coarfe fend, when Pulo Aor bears W. 5 or 6 miles : and, as it is 
 extremely dangerous to approach the mouth of the Straits of Sincapour, except 
 the weather be clear, therefore mips generally <f-} under Pulo Aor, in a fine 
 bay on the SW. fide, where they lie till the weather clears. 
 
 Pulo Aor is a fmall, but high and woody ifland. At the SW. part thereof 
 is a fmall, but deep round bay, which makes a moft excellent road, where 
 you lie fheltered from all winds, between NNE. and ESE. and as fmooth as 
 in a mill-pond, though there runs ever fo high a fea without : this is occa- 
 fioned chiefly by a fmall rocky ifland, which lies a fmall diftance to the weft- 
 ward of the north end of Pulo Aor, and breaks off the violence of the fwell 
 from the NE. You may run fo far into the above bay as to fhut in I, *, 
 or the whole, of the rocky ifland, with the NW. point of the bay, and <f-^ 
 in 20 to 15 fathoms, coarfe fand, and all clear ground. 
 
 All fhips coming from the northward, that intend to 4-^ in Pulo Aor bay, 
 fhould go to the weftward of the ifland, in order to fetch into the bay, which 
 they will not be able to do if they go to the eaftward. The watering-place, 
 which is a running ftream, is on the north fide of the bay, clofe to the fea : 
 and here is plenty of wood for cutting. There are a great number of houfes in 
 the bay, and many inhabitants, who are very fhy ; yet there are little or no 
 refrefhments to be got here, except cocoa-nuts and mangoes ; the latter the 
 vvorft fort of their kind. The tides here ebb and flow about 6 feet perpendi- 
 cularly. 
 
 When the weather appears clear and fettled, weigh about midnight, in order 
 to be near the flraits mouth in the morning, and make fure of getting into 
 the flraits before night or thick weather comes on, which would put you to 
 your fhifts, and expofe you to great danger. From Pulo Aor fleer SbE. or 
 SbEiE. in order to avoid the funken rock that lies fouth, 6 or 7 leagues there- 
 from ; then fleer S. SbW. or SSW. The coarfe from Pulo Aor to Pedro 
 Branco, in latitude 1? 20'N is SbW. 24 leagues. You will have foundings 
 between them, in the fair way near 1'ulo Aor, 30 fathoms, and as you run to 
 the fouth ward, 27, 24, 20 fathoms, fandy ground. Keep in 20 fathoms till 
 
 fhoalning
 
 422 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 fhoalening near the reef off Point Romania to 16, 15, or 14. fathoms. This 
 fhoal runs a great way out, and is dangerous to approach, on account of 
 the irregular founding's on it: therefore come no nearer it than ij or ic 
 fathoms. In that depth you will juft fee the low land of Point Romania 
 from the deck. For a leading mark to carry you clear of Point Romania 
 Shoal, keep Bintang Hill SbW^W. till you bring Barbucet Hill to bear 
 Wf S. or W. (and in hazy weather WIN.) and Point Romania WbS. 5 or 
 6 leagues ; then you will fee Pedro Branco bearing SW. SWbW. or WSW. 
 In clear weather you may fee it 4 leagues ; but if hazy, not more than 2 or 3 
 leagues. 
 
 Here the tides run very ftrong bom within and without the frraits mouth ; 
 but in particular off the fhoal of Point Romania, and about Pedro Branco, and 
 that way. It runs the ftrongeft in the NE. monfoon. It has been known to 
 run at the rate of 3 or 4 knots for 10 or 12 hours together. The time of 
 flowing is uncertain, and feldom anfwers calculation ; fo that it is not to be 
 depended on. 
 
 As there is fuch a ftrong foutherly current fromPulo Aor to the reef off Point 
 Romania, and when you come off that and Pedro Branco, there is fuch a 
 prodigious ftrong tide, for many hours together, as to be almoft a conftant 
 current, fetting moftly to the SSW. and SW. you fee how dangerous it is for 
 fhips to be benighted, or taken in thick weather, off the mouth of thefe 
 ftraits. Should this be your cafe, and you cannot fee the mouth of the {traits, 
 pulh for the Straits of Dry on, provided it be early inthefeafon, and enter the 
 Straits of Malacca by the Carimons , but if it mould be late in the feafon, then 
 go for the Straits of Banca and Sunda. 
 
 If the weather is clear, fleer for Pedro Branco ; and, when you come near 
 it, you will deepen your water from 14 or 15 to 20, 25, or 30 fathoms. 
 Pedro Branco bears from the outermoft rocks, or iflands, off Point Romania, 
 EbSiS. 2 'leagues. Between thefe is the channel, or entrance into the Strait s 
 of Sincapour : you have 20 fathoms near the reef, 25 fathoms mid-channel, 
 and 30 fathoms near Pedro Branco. 
 
 When you have thmt of Pedro Branco, bearing SW. or SWbW. fleer fo as 
 to go 2, 3, or 4 mileb to the northward of it ; and when you bring Barbucet 
 Hill en the outermoft ifland off Point Romania, they will bear WNW. and you 
 are clear of all the reef, and may keep mid-channel between Pedro Branco and 
 the fid ifland, and lo enter the Straits of Sincapour. 
 
 Southward
 
 Directions for Sailing from Manilla, CsV. 423 
 
 Southward of Pedro Branco lie many rocks both above and under water, and 
 all foul ground round about it, Take care not to go too near it ; for the tides 
 run very ftrong to the SSW. amongft the rocks and (heals about Pedro Branco ; 
 but pais it as above directed ; mould it be near night when a-breaft of Point 
 Romania, it is belt to haul under the point in 18 fathoms, and 4-} for the 
 night, taking day- light to go through the narrows. 
 
 Being pair. Pedro Branco, and a-breaft Point Romania, the ftraits are wide, 
 and no danger. From Point Romania St. John's I (land lies WbS]S. diftance 
 13 leagues ; you will have foundings in this channel from 18 fathoms, on 
 the north more, to 20 and 25 fathoms, mid-channel ; and 30 fathoms on the 
 fouth fide the channel : fteer WbS. for St. John's Ifland ; and when you fee 
 it, keep it bearing WbS. as a good leading mark to carry you clear of all 
 danger. 
 
 The fouth fide of the Straits of Sincapour is foul ground, and fhoal, abounding 
 with many rocks above and under water : it is heft therefore keeping on the 
 north fhore, in 18 or 20 fathoms, till you are up with, or a-breaft, Johore 
 or Joor River, off which lies a fand-bank ; the marks for which have been 
 already given. When you have pafl'ed this fand, the north fide is all clear; 
 but the fouth fide ftill continues foul. 
 
 Being a-breaft of St. John's Ifiand your courfe to Barn Ifland is WbS. 4 
 leagues : you have irregular foundings, from 30 to 25, 20, and 18 fathom?, 
 fhoalening 5, 6, or 8 fiithoms at a caft, and fometimes 10 or 12 fathoms; 
 toward the fouth fhorc it deepens to 40 and 50 fathoms, and then fhoalens 
 again fuddenly. St. John's Ifland is bold to, and you have good foimdinp-s 
 from 20 to 15 fathoms very near it. If day-light, or the wind, fail you, it is 
 bed: "h^irig under St. John's Ifland in 1 5 or 16 fathoms, lb ft ground 1 or 2 
 miles offfhore, the ifland bearing; from WSW. to SWbW. 
 
 From St. John's Ifland SEiS. lies a ridge of rocks plainly to be feen ; and 
 without them a fhoal WbS. 2 leagues further. From St. John's Ifland SW§S. 
 3 miles and from Barn Idand EbS. 22 leagues there lies a fingle black rock 
 above water, about the fize of a fhip's long-boat, and is 3- of the channel from 
 the fouth fide of the ftraits. From Earn Ifland SEbS. 4 or <; miles, there lies 
 a ledge of rocks. Between thefe rocks and the Iflands Rabbit and Coney is 
 the channel, in which you have irregular foundings, between 20 and 30 
 fathoms, rocky ground. 
 
 You may pafs the Rabbit and Coney, within 4 of a mile, in 20 or 22 fathoms. 
 Barn Ifland bears from St. John's Wq£. about 4 leagues. The tides here run 
 
 very
 
 4 2 4 A New Directory for /ta East-Indies. 
 
 very ftrong as the iflands lie; the flood EbN. and the ebb WbS. The time 
 of flowing is uncertain. They run longeft to the eafhvard in the SW. monlbon, 
 and longeft to the weft ward in the NE. monibon. 
 
 When a-breaft the Rabbit and Coney, you may fee the tree on Tree Ifland 
 bearing W-iS, and Red Ifland SWbW. From hence to the weft part of 
 Barn Ifland you have foundings from 22, 20, 16, 15, 14, 12, 10, to 95 fathoms, 
 on a gravelly bank, about | of a mile to the weftward of Barn Ifland, where it 
 is advifeable to <f-^, if night be coming on, and take day-light to pafs Sandy 
 Ifland, on account of the uncertainty of the let of the tides, and the irregularity 
 of the foundings. 
 
 From the fouth part of Barn Ifland, the north part of the Little Carimou 
 bears W|3. 61 or 7 leagues ; and the tree on Tree Ifland WbS. 5 or 6 miles ; 
 which tree alfo bears, from the north peak of the Great Carimon, E4N. 
 Between Barn Ifland and Tree Ifland is the channel out of the Straits of Sincapour. 
 You have foundings, mid-channel, between them, from 24. to 30 and 33 fathoms, 
 and may ftand toward Tree Ifland into 16 or 15 fathoms, but no nearer ; and 
 into 10 or 9 1 fathoms, toward Barn Ifland. You have foundings alfo off the 
 weft part of Tree Ifland, to the northward of it, i, ii, and 2 miles, from 20 
 to 23, 26, and 27 fathoms ; and as you go to the weftward, you fhoalen it 
 to 20, 18 and 17 fathoms. Being a-breaft Barn-Ifland, fteer WNW. or NW. 
 according as you have the winds and tide, obferving the direclions and leading- 
 marks for going clear of Tree Ifland. Another leading-mark is, to keep the 
 fouth part of Barn Ifland E*S. which will lead you clear of all danger from 
 Tree or Sandy Ifland. 
 
 You have foundings from Barn Ifland, with thefe beatings, from 10 or 12 
 fathoms; hear Barn Ifland, to 20, 25, or 30 fathoms, as far as the weft part 
 of Tree Ifland ; and to the weftward of that, in the fair way, from 24 to 20 
 and 17 fathoms, ouzy ground. Being paft Tree or Sandy Ifland, fteer for the 
 middle of the opening between the Little Carimon and Tanjan-boulus ; the 
 courfe is about VTbN~. 
 
 From Tanjan-boulus to Pulo Cocob is NWbW. 3 or 4 miles. Pulb Cocob 
 is hardly to be known for an ifland, till you are dole up with it. From Pulp 
 Cocob, Pulo Pifang lies NWIW. 5! or 6 leagues, and from the NE. point 
 of the Little Carimon NNW* V. S or 8i leagues. You have foundings from 
 Pulo Cocob to Pulo Pifang, in the fairway, from 17 to 18 and 20 fathoms ; 
 and as you come near Pulo Pifang, you will fhoalen your water to 16 fathom;.; 
 for there is a flat, which runs olF above a mile from this ifland. If the wind 
 
 is
 
 Directions^' Sailing from Manilla, tic. 425 
 
 is fcant, you may borrow upon Cocob to 1 7 or 18 fathoms, and upon Pifang 
 to 11 or 12 fathoms, about 2 or 2| miles; neither mould you keep a greater 
 diftance from it than 5 or 6 miles, on account of the bank on the oppofite fide 
 of the channel. Between thefe 2 iflands the Malay e coaft is all flat and fhoal 
 water : therefore come no nearer it than 12 or 14 fathoms ; nor bring Pifang 
 to bear further to the weftward than NWIN. nor ftand nearer than 15 fathoms 
 to the Sumatra fide : under this depth it is foul ground and fhoal water, 
 particularly when the eaft point of the Carimon bears SEiE. 4 or 5 leagues, 
 and the outermoft of the Two Brothers is right on with it, diftance about 
 3 leagues ; and Pulo Pifang is NfE. 4 leagues : it fhoalens fuddenly from 
 15 fathoms, foft ground, to 9 fuhon:s, hard. 
 
 There is a bank off Pulo Pifang, which lies WNW. and ESE. 7 or 8 leagues 
 in length ; from the eaft pait whereof Pulo Pifang bears ENFJE. or NE! E. 
 diftance about 3 leagues; and from the welt part thereof, Formofa Hill tears 
 NEbN. and Pulo Pifang EbS. 8 league?, orjuft in fight. 
 
 On this bank the America was forced to cf-^ in 5 fathoms ; fhe w^ fleering 
 NWbN. and they fhoaled the water as quick as they could heave ih-; lead one 
 cad: after another, from 14 to 10, 9, 7, and 5 fathoms, when they <H»2d, and 
 fent the boat to found f a mile round to the fouthward, and found no lefs than 
 5 fathoms hard ground ; the north fide of it deepened very quick to 19 fathoms. 
 'Pulo Pifang then bore E|N. 2 leagues; the NE. point of the Carimons, 
 SEiS. 9 or 10 leagues ; and Mount Formofa NNW|W. 8 or 9 leagues. 
 
 Between this bank and Pulo Pifang, the leading mark is to keep Formofa 
 Hill IMNWAV. and the Carimons, SSEfE. in between 22 and 24 fathoms, 
 mid-chandel. 
 
 Beine a-breaft Pulo PiCing;, in 1 1 or 12 flithoms, 2 or 2 miles diftance, a 
 NW. or NWiW. courfe will carry you clear of all danger, in foundings 
 from 22,20, 15, to 12 fathoms, ouzy ground. If you fhoalen your water 
 to 1 1 or 1 2 fathoms, keep more to the weftward ; if you deepen it to 20 fathom , 
 keep more to the northward. Mr. Nichelfon run through this channel in the 
 night, in the following manner, viz. At 8 EM. was a-breaft Pulo Pifang, 
 the fouth part thereof bearing ENEfN. 2 or 3 miles, in 17 fathoms; pafled 
 by the ifland in 11 h. and 12 fathoms; then fleered NW. and NWIW. 
 fhoalened the water to 13 or 12 fathoms ; kept NWfW. and having deepened 
 it to 1 4 f or 15 fathoms, then fleered NW. 
 
 From 8 P. M. to 2 A. M. made the courfe good NWJW. 7 leagues; had in 
 that run foundings, from 12 to 15 fathoms ; at 2 A. M. the wind icanted, by 
 
 Nnn coming
 
 426 A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 coming to the northward ; from 2 to 6 A. M. the courfe made good was 
 WNW1N. 4 leagues, in foundings from 17, 20, 24, and 25 to 28 fathoms ; 
 then Pulo Pifang bore EbS-lS. 9 or 10 leagues, and Mount Formola NNEzE. 
 5 or 6 leagues. By this you fee the above courfe may be depended ua tu carry 
 you clear of all danger. 
 
 After you have pafied Pulo Pifang, there is no danger on the north fide till 
 you come near Mount Formofa, off" which there lies a fhoal ftretchmg about 
 2 leagues along more ; from the SE. part whereof Mount Formofa fcx a s 
 NEbN. and Mount Moora NWbN. and from the NW. part they bear EfS. 
 and Nb\V. This fhoal lies pretty much out of a fhip's track, they having no 
 bulinels io near in fhore. The tides hereabout are very uncertain, but let 
 lon2"eft and ftron''eft to the wefhvard and north- weft ward. 
 
 O O 
 
 From Mount Formo'a the coaft runs NW. 4 i or 5 leagues to Mount 
 Moora, a iingle hill near the fea fhore", the land near it being low, though in 
 the country the land is very high and mountainous. Mount Moora bearing 
 NbW. 5 or 6 leagues, and Mount Formofa, NE'E. 3 or 4 leagues, in 23 or 
 24 fathoms, you may diicern Pulo Pifang from the deck, bearing about ESEIS. 
 9 or 10 leagues ; and the outermoft of the Water Iflinds, which are high, NW. 
 about 10 leagues. Steer for the Water Ifland, in foundings from 20, 22, 24, 
 25, to 26 fathoms. In the offing you will have 28 or 30 fathom-- ; but you 
 may pafs clofe by the Water Iflands, and have 24 fathoms within 2 or 3 miles 
 of them ; luff up clofe round theie iflands for Malacca Road, where in theNE. 
 monfoon the wind is generally northerly. 
 
 You may lie in Malacca Road in depth of water from 5 to 1 2 or 13 
 fathoms, the church and high land in one, or nearly fo, bearing ENE. or 
 NEbE. 
 
 From Malacca Road to Cape Richado, the courfe is NWbW. diftance 10 
 leagues: the depth of water between them 14, 16, 18, 20, 23, 25 fathoms. 
 When CapeRichado bears NE. if miles, you v. ill have 25 fathoms. 
 
 From the Water Iflands to Cape Richado, the courfe is NW;N. diftance io 
 leagues: the foun ihgs from 24 to 20, 16, 18, 25 fathoms* from 3 to 6 miles 
 (1 (hore ; Cape Richado bearing NW. diftance between 3 or 4 leagues. OrF 
 fhore 4 or 5 miles, lies a hard bank with 13 fathoms on it; but within and 
 without, from 20 to 24. fat! orris; On this bank had, when going on it, 20, 
 18, 17, 13 fathoms; 5 off it, 14, 17, 21 fathoms. With 13 and 14 
 
 fathoms had hard grounJ. Off" it the ground is ouzy. 
 
 Mid-way
 
 Direct ions Jof-Sailihg from Maxilla, &fc. 427 
 
 Mid-way between Malacca and Cape Richado lies a rock above water, about 
 a mile off fhore ; but fhips have no bufinefs fo near in fhore. The variation oft 
 Cape Richado, 1763, was 1? ac/W. 
 
 From Cape Richado to the land a-breaft Parcelar Hill, the courfb is about NW. 
 northerly, diftance 13 leagues; you have foundings between them from 16 to 
 20, 30, and ■$$ fathoms, but very irregular: keep in from 18 to 25 fathoms. 
 In clear weather, when a little to the wefhvard of Cape Richado, you will fee 
 Parcelar Hill bearing NWbN. or NNW3W. 13 or 14 leagues. 
 
 The channel between the coalt and fouth land is about 4 leagues wide ; the 
 foundings, from 16 to 20 fathoms, on the coaft ride ; 30 fathoms, mid-channel ; 
 35 fathoms, and in fome places 40 fathoms, toward the fouth land. All the 
 way from Cape Richado to Parcelar the coaft. is low and level. You have pretty 
 regular foundings about 4 or 5 miles off fliore, from 1 8 to 25 fathoms, which 
 is a good depth to keep in ; the ground ouzy and good °K>age. The variation off 
 Parcelar, 1762 and 1763, 16 W. 
 
 Being a-breafl: of Parcelar Hill, or it bearing E;N. or E|N. 3 or 4 miles oft 
 fhore, 17, 18, or 19 fathoms, fhape your courfe for the Pulo Arroes (otherwise 
 called Aru), with refpect to the winds and tides, taking care to keep Parcelar 
 Hiil E^N. or E. this will lead you through, between the north and fouth finds, 
 clearof all danger; but be fare you do not bring it to the fouthward of eaft, 
 for E-'S. will bring you on the z' z fathoms bank. 
 
 The tides here let very ftrong ; the flood SEbE. and the ebb NWbW. It 
 flows, full and change, ESE. and WNW. or 7 1 hours ; and perpendicularly 9 
 or 10 feet. You have loundings in the fair way, from 1 7 or 18 fathoms, 3 or 
 4 miles from the low land off* Parcelar, to 20, 22, 24, 21, 20, 17, 15, 12, 10, 
 and 9 I fathoms; Parcelar Hill then bearing due eaft, and the low land jult 
 in fight from the poop. You are now on the eafternmoft bank in the channel, 
 and a-breaft. of the 2 v" fathoms bank, which bears north of you about 2 
 miles ; from hence you may fee the Round Pulo Aru from the main-top, 
 bearing W^S. 
 
 The above bearings and depth of water, were taken on board the Eliza- 
 beth, when the Weymouth, in company, was in 6 fathoms water ; Parcelar 
 Hill bearing of her E2fiS. At the fame time fhe bore north of us 1 \ 
 or 2 miles ; and her boat, which was founding about | of a mile to the 
 northward of her, had 3 and 2 § fathoms, when Parcelar Hill bore of them 
 
 N " n 2 Steering
 
 428 A New Directory for the East -Indies. 
 
 Steering from thence tc the weftward, with Parcelar due eaft, you deepen 
 your water from 9 I or 10 fathoms to 14, 18, 20, and 22 fathoms, and then 
 fhoalen it from 22 to 20, 10, 16, 15, 12, 11 §, 10 \, and 10 fathoms, on the 
 wefternmoft bank, and between the north and fouth fand-heads ; Parcelar 
 Hill bearing eaft 8 or 9 leagues, and the Round Pulo Aru feen from the deck 
 W.8?S. 7 or 8 leagues. From thence, fleering as before, you have, for feveral 
 carts of the lead, io', 11, 12, 12I, ^fathoms; and will foon deepen your 
 water from 13 to 17, 19, and 24 - z , or 25 fathoms, clear ground, (and and 
 gravel : ftill continuing as before, you will have from 25, 24, 23, 22, 20, 
 to 19 fathoms, and then Parcelar Hill bearing eaft 10 or 11 leagues, and the 
 Round Pulo Aru W6?S. 5 or 6 leagues, you are clear of all the fands, and 
 may fleer WNW. or NWbW. fo as to pafs by the Pulo Arroes within 3 or 
 4 leagues of them. In this courfe, till you come within that diftance, you will 
 fhoalen your water from 19 to 16, 15, and 141 fathoms, then Parcelar will 
 bear E3?5. about 1 2 leagues ; and the Round Pulo Aru W 1 J°S. 4 or 5 
 leagues. 
 
 The water fhoalens gradually toward the Pulo Aru, from 1 5 to 14, 12, and 13 
 fathpms, 5 or 6 miles off the Pulo Arroes ; ouzy ground, and good 4-}age> if 
 benighted, or the wind and tide againft you. 
 
 The Round Pulo Aru is a leading mark through the channel, between the 
 north and fouth fand-heads, and may be feen from a large (hip's poop, in 
 clear weather, 7 or 8 leagues ; but none of the others above 4, 5, or 6 
 Jeagues. 
 
 It flows here, on the full and change, eaft and well, or 6 o'clock ; the fli 
 SEbS. and the ebb NWbN. 6 hours each way, in general ; but, as the tides 
 have great dependence on the winds, there have been inflances of their irregula- 
 rity, the ebb running iTrong for 9 hours together in the NE. monloon, and the 
 flood as long in the S\V. monloon. The tides running pretty ftrong here, 
 orcaiion a great ripling, as if on fome {hoal or danger ; but there is none. 
 After you have palled the Pulo Arroes to the northward, you Jofe the tides, or 
 they are no longer to be accounted for. 
 
 Being off Pulo Aru, the Round Pulo Arroe bearing SW. about 4 leagues 
 and the Long Pulo Arroe VViS. you have 19 fathoms water; but fleering 
 NNW. or. NWbN. you will foon deepen your water from 12 to 22 and 25 
 fathoms. When the Round Pulo Arroe bears SSW^W. 4 or 5 leagues, and 
 the long Round Pulo Arroe WSW 4 S. you will have 33 fathoms ; hereabout 
 
 you
 
 Indirections for Sailingji9-cw Manilla, &c. . 429 
 
 you meet with the ripling of the tides as above-mentioned. As you go to the 
 northward, you will foon deepen your water to 40, 42, and 44 fathoms; but 
 this will not continue long ; for in a fmall diflance you fhoalen your water 
 again to 34, 35, or 36 fathoms, which depths will continue all the way to 
 Pulo Jarra. 
 
 The courfe from the Pulo Arroes to Pulo Jarra is NNW. 25 or 26 leagues ; 
 in regular foundings from 32 to 37 fathoms, fand and ou?y bottom ; but in the 
 NE. monfoon, (hips generally fteer from the Pulo Arroes NW. or NW1N. in 
 order to go between Pulo Jarra and Pulo Varella. A NW. courfe will cany 
 you 6 or 7 leagues to the weftward of Pulo Jarra, in foundings from ^y to 32, 
 30, 32, 36, and 38 fathoms ; when Pulo Jarra bears NE^N. 6 or 7 leagues, 
 and Pulo Varella W. 
 
 You may pafs on either fide of Pulo Jarra (which is fteep to), having 30 
 and 35 fathoms clofe to it. Hereabout you generally have the current fetting 
 to the NW. at the rate of 20 miles in the 24 hours ; as it does all along the 
 Malaye fhore, in the NE. monfoon ; but the reverfe on the Sumatra iide ; 
 there you find a foutherly current. The variation off Pulo Jarra, in 1763, 
 was 38 W. 
 
 Pulo Varella is a fmall, round, but very high ifland, lying from Pulo Jarra 
 WbSlS. 15 or 16 leagues, with foundings between them from 38 to 40 and 45 
 fathoms. 
 
 The Elizabeth went between Polo Jarra and Pulo Varella, and was 6 days 
 getting to Pulo Rondo, by keeping to the weftward, along the Coaft of Sumatra, 
 where (lie met widi moftly northerly winds, and a foutherly current ; for which 
 reatoriit is not adviieable for ihips to go that way, but keep along the Malaye 
 CoaiT, to the rart%vard of Pr!o Jarra and Pulo Pera, where you may tf-} if the 
 wind or current mould happen to be againfr. you. 
 
 From Pulo Jarra to Pulo Pera, the courfe is NNWIW. diftance 42 leagues. 
 You have foundings between them from 25 to 35 and 40 fathoms, fine white 
 fand, fometirnes land and mud. Near Pulo Pera you deepen your water, viz. 
 when Ptdo L<a Dears NW. or NW1N. 6 or 7 leagues, you have from 48 to 
 50 and 52 faiums, ouzv ground ; and to the northward of Pulo Pera, you 
 have no foundings without 60 or 70 fathoms of line. The variation, by obfer- 
 Vatiohs, off Pulo Pera, was 7 W. and at other times, 6 E. in 1762; fo that 
 it may be laid there is no variation in thefe leas. Off Pulo Pera you meet 
 with the tiue NE. monfoon. 
 
 From
 
 4.?o A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 From Pulo Pera fleer for the Nicobar Iflands ; the courfe is WbN. difhnce 
 98 or 100 leagues. The SW. part of the Nicobars lies in latitude 6? 45'N. 
 and 4? 55'W. longitude from Pulo Pera. Or you may fhape your courfe for 
 Pulo Rondo, in latitude 6? s'N. and longitude 3? 43AV. from Pulo Pera, the 
 northernmoft of the iflands oft Acheen Head, from whence the Nicobars bear 
 W3o?N. 28 or 29 leagues. 
 
 CCCII. Directions for Sailing front China to India, or Europe, 
 
 through the Straits of Sumda. 
 
 The departure of fhips from the Coaft of China mould be between the 
 middle of November and the middle of February ; for, although your bufiriefs 
 •would permit you to fail at the beginning of the eaftem monfbon, the winds 
 are ftill fo changeable, that you had better wait till they are a little fettled. 
 
 From Macao you -fteer a courfe to go between the little ifland Potrie (or 
 
 i ■: lie Ifiand), and thofe on the weft fide; and obferye to keep rather nearer 
 the latter, on account of the dangers which furround the former : after having 
 paffed it,- you may fteer S^E. to get foundings on the Englifh Ban 1 :. 
 
 Navigators have taken great care to confirm their reckonings by this mean-, 
 going to China, and have negledled to do it coming back : if you confid'e'r the 
 frequence of it, you will find they are in the wrong; for, in the firft cafe, 
 an error can but (at moft) occaiion a fmall delay ; in the other, they may meet 
 with many dangers, where there is nothing to fhew the approaches, and where 
 a little error may caufe the lofs of a fhip. Thus you fee the former is the 
 leaf): material, and the precaution abfblutely necefiary. 
 
 Having; ftruck ground on the Enslifh Bank, fleer to the SWbS. till in the 
 parallel of latitude 12? 36'N. then SW. to make Pulo Sapata. In fleering fior 
 Pulo Sapata, be careful to give it a good birth, for fear of being fet within it 
 by the currents ; and, on the other hand, be cautious of keeping too far to 
 the eaftward, becaufe of the fhoal which lies about 40 leagues to the eaftward 
 of Pulo Sapata. 
 
 If in Pulo Sapata's latitude you fee it not, you muft make fare of Pulo Con- 
 dore, the better to fhape a courfe from thence to Pulo Timoan. You have 
 foundings all the way between thefe two iHands : therefore, when you are 
 paft the latitude of Pulo Sapata, found ; and if you have no ground with <jo 
 fathoms you may conclude you are to the eaftward ; fo that you muft haul to 
 the weftward, till you get foundings; then ilecr WSW. and WbS. for Pulo 
 
 Condore
 
 Directions for Sailing from China to India. 431 
 
 Condore raid you will diminifh your {buildings gradually, but in cafe of thick - 
 weather, &c. that you cannot lee the ifland, keep your "lead going every hal* 
 hour ; and if in the latitude thereof you have 20 fathoms, grey fai.d and fhclh 
 you are not above 5 or 6 leagues from the ifland ; but if you have from 25 
 to 30 fathoms you may be allured you are at Icafl ;o leagues to the eaftward- 
 
 The bearing of Pulo Condore from Pulo Timoan is N 2o'?E. diflance 122 
 leagues. It will not be difficult therefore to fhape a courfe from the former to 
 the latter, according to its bearing and diftance from you. As for the direction 
 and itrength of the currents in this feafon, the rules are not more certain 
 than during the weftern monfoon ; leveral {hips have been driven toward the 
 Anambas, others toward the Malaye Coaft the {igns of being near the latter, 
 or rather the former, are mud foundings, and a greater depth, than toward the 
 oppolite coaft. When you think yourfelf near the latitude of thefe iflands, 
 if you have 45 or no fathoms, bear to the weftward , in order to gain the 
 Coaft of Malaye ; the decreafe of whole depth is a furer lign of your approach 
 thereto, than the quality of the foundings. When you reckon yourfelf near 
 the ltiiuth of Pulo Timoan, keep your lead going ; and when you have 32 
 cr 33 fathoms, (oft clay, you may reckon yourfelf not far off the ifland : 
 but come not under 30 fathoms, left the currents fet you among them. 
 
 The height of Pulo Timoan makes it eafily feen at a great diftance, unlefs 
 
 obfeured by cloudy weather, as fometimes happens at this feafon. Plavig 
 
 made it, you fLape your courfe according to the diftance you are from it, to go 5 
 
 or 6 leagues to the eaftward of Pulo Aor, or nearer if you think proper, but be 
 
 on your guard, efpecially in the night, againft the tides fetting in between thefe 
 
 iflands. 
 
 Ships bound for the Indies muft take their courfe toward the Straits of 
 
 Malacca ; but thofe bound to Batavia, or directly to Europe, may observe 
 what follow?. 
 
 In failing from c or 6 leagues to the eaftward of Pulo Aor, fleer SSE. 
 20 leagues, then SbE. lb as to go clear of the banks laid to be in latitude 
 25' or 3o'N. NEbN. of-Pulo Lingen ; when they are pafled, you may fleer 
 SbW. as far as the Equinoctial Line, and continue tins courfe lb as to pa.fs, 
 according to cor tation, 1 2 or 13 leagues to the eaftward, of Pulo Ling-en. 
 You keep this track, not on account of the dangers which furround the eaft 
 prat of this ifland (there are none at a diftance from the ifland which render. 
 the acceTs dangerous) but to prevent the effect of a current, which at this 
 feafon fets to the fouth-weftward; but it fometimes lets ftrong to the 
 
 eaftwlird,
 
 432 A New DiREcToHY/;r the East-Indies. 
 
 eaftward, which you muft be very careful of here, and which you may 
 know by the depth o'f water, having, in the fair way from Pulo Lingen to 
 Pulo Taya, from 1 8 to 20 fathoms. 
 
 If you make a direcf. courfe from Pulo Apr, juft to go without Pulo 
 Lingen 3 or 4 leagues, you run a liique of falling, in the night or thick 
 weather, upon the Dominis, or the eaft point of Pulo Lingen. The greateft. 
 difference, to the weftward, may not exceed 8 or 9 leagues at fartheft ; fo 
 that you may always pafs 3 or 4 leagues wide of Pulo Lingen. 
 
 About 9 or 10 leagues off Pulo Lingen, you have about 24 or 26 fathoms ; 
 but fo foon as you are in latitude 20'N. or latitude 15'N. if the currents fet 
 to the eaftward, ftand in toward Pulo Lingen, till you flioal your water to 
 20 or 18 fathoms. 
 
 From this ifland fail toward Pulo Taya (according as you find the currents); 
 but if you mould happen to fall, {o far to the eaftward of Pulo Lingen, as 
 to prevent your feeing it, you muft then fteer SW. to get light of Pulo Taya, 
 and pafs between it and the Seven Illands, keeping them 3 or 4 leagues diftance. 
 From hence, SbW. will lead you to Batacarang Point, which bounds the 
 weft fide of the entrance of the Straits of Banca. 
 
 In cafe of the currents fetting to the eaftward, you may pafs within a 
 mile of Pulo Taya without danger. From hence, in the fair way to the 
 entrance of the ftraits, you have from 15 to 10 fathoms ; and when you 
 beo-in to look out for Monopin Hill, edge over toward the Sumatra more, to 
 7 or 8 fathoms; keep in that depth till you get fight of Monopin Hill. As 
 vou deepen your water, haul toward the Sumatra lhore ; and as you lefien 
 it, haul toward Banca, not going within 6 fathoms, nor without 8 fathoms, 
 till you bring Monopin Hill to bear eaft, and Batacarang well ; then you are 
 clear of the Frederick-Hendrick Rock. 
 
 The bearings of Monopin Hill (which maybe {cen a great way off in fine 
 weather) will better direffc you how to enter Banca Straits ; in particular, 
 you muft not approach the Ifland Banca, but keep along Batacarang Banks, 
 in 8 or 9 fathoms, till you have pafled the Rock Frederick Hendrick ; the 
 more the depth increafes the nearer yon are to it. 
 
 In railing from the Seven Iflands to Batacarang Point, when you are 4 or 
 e 1 -11c, from the entrance of trie ftraits : if the night or thick weather, 
 prevent your feeing Monopin Hill, it will be neceftary to +-}, and wait for 
 clear weather, or the return of day, to enter ; other wife you may fall foul 
 of Frederick-Endriek, or the Banks of Batacarang. As the north and eaft 
 
 parts
 
 Directions fir Sailing from China to India. 433 
 
 parts of Banca arc not well known, there are reckoned a greater number of 
 iflands than are laid down in the charts. Here follows a remark from the 
 Englifh Pilot. 
 
 Capt. John Harle, in the Macclesfield, coming late from China, the fun in 
 his zenith (it being then fomewhat difficult to take the latitude at lea), and 
 deceived by the SE. currents, took Pulo Toties for Pulo Tortpon, or Taya, 
 and fell in with the back fide of Banca. He found very good foundings in iS 
 or 20 fathoms, at a reafonable diftance off" fhore, with fome fmall iflands on 
 the coafl ; but {o near that none would covet to go between them. He went 
 between the iflands that lie off", and the S. (eaft) end of Banca, in mid-channel, 
 1 8 fathoms ; but he believes they might have gone much nearer the fhore, and 
 recommends it as an extraordinary paflage. 
 
 Although no accident happened to this fhip, the fame fuccefs is not 
 always to be expected ; it is advifeable to beware of falling into the like 
 inconveniency. 
 
 Frederick-Endrick being pafled, fhape your courfe to range along the bank^ 
 which projecl about 3 miles from the mouths of Palimbam River, rather than 
 the Coafl of Banca ; you muft alfo be mindful of the tides of thefe rivers, 
 in order to avoid being driven on the banks by the flood, or o:i the Coafl: of 
 Banca by the ebb. It is bell to keep mid-channel, till a-breaft the Fourth 
 Point. 
 
 When you are pafl the Fourth Point, keep along Sumatra as far as the 
 Third Point (here the currents run very flrong and uncertain, fometimes 18 
 or 24 hours one way ; therefore it is not advifeable to fail here in the night), 
 and go within 2 miles thereof, then toward the Nanka Iflands ; from thence 
 fhape your courfe toward the Second Point of the ftrait : by Co doing you efo • 
 the mud bank, which fills up the bay between thefe points. Take notice of the 
 tree, which, in lading from the northward, ealily diflinguifhes the Second 
 Point from every other place upon the coaft. 
 
 Beyond this, keep 2 miles oft" fhore, as far as the Firft Point; and when 
 pafl it, you (land to the fouthward, fo as to pafs 2 leagues to the weflvvardof 
 Lucepara : at this diftance you avoid the fhoals which flirround it. Between 
 the Firft and Second Points lies a fhoal off" the Banca fhore, almoft mid- 
 channel over ; fo that you muft take care you do not come half-channel over 
 toward Banca.) The principal reef, and that which mofl requires your 
 notice, is fituate between the Firft Point and this ifland ; fometimes the fea 
 
 O o o breaks-
 
 434- -A ^ew Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 breaks upon it. The beft method to guard againft it is, after palling the Firft 
 Point, not to fail above a league and an half from the Sumatra more, which 
 lies SbW. 
 
 When Lucepara bears eaft, at the diftance above-mentioned, fteer SE. to 
 pafs it, and get into deeper water. You are fometimes obliged to edge to the 
 eaftward, on account of the tides, which, in coming out of the Straits of Eanca, 
 take their courfe toward Great-Tree Ifland. Its being very fhoal along this 
 coaft, renders its accefs dangerous ; it will therefore be neceflary to keep the 
 lead going. 
 
 Or, when you approach the Firft Point of Sumatra, haul in toward it ; and 
 when a-breafl of it, about 3 miles off, you will iee the Ifland Lucepara SSEiE. 
 5 leagues; then fleer SfE. till it bears SEfE. keeping about 3 miles from the 
 Sumatra fliore ; then fleer S. till it comes out ESEIS. the Firfl Point NbWi-W.. 
 and the fouthernmoft part of Sumatra in fight SSVViW. then edge over to the 
 SSE. toward Lucepara, till it bears E^S. or E. then fleer SEbS. till it comes 
 out EbN. and ENE. then fleer SE. till you have brought it NE. 5 or 6 miles ; 
 then fleer SEbE. till it bears N. and NbVV. and then you are clear of the 
 banks. By well obferving thefe courfes and bearings, you will have no lefs 
 than 5 or 4 J fathoms. 
 
 From Lucepara fhape a courfe toward the Two Sifters (commonly called the 
 Two Brothers). Capt. Haggis makes them to bear neareft NbE. and SbW, 
 of each other, and jufl 2? difference of latitude between them. It is neceflary 
 here to have recourfe to founding ; and after lofing fight of Lucepara, to keep 
 as much as poffible in depth from 9 to 12 and 13 fathoms. If you find it 
 lei's than 9 fathoms, as may happen (efpecially about the bank err Great-Tree 
 Ifland), edge a little to the eaftward \ but if you meet with more than 12 or 
 13 fathoms near the Two Siflers, you muft haul in to the weflward ; by this 
 means, and often founding, you may always be fure of making the Two Siflers. 
 However,' you muft not expecl: between Lucepara and the Two Sifters to find 
 very regular foundings ; the inequalities are fometimes confiderable ; but you 
 cannot be deceived if you keep conftantly founding. 
 
 On approaching the Two Siflers, if you have not a perfect knowledge of 
 them before night, it will be better to<f->, or put about, than hazard the palling 
 them in the dark, and thereby rifque either the running on the Shabanders, or 
 the other bank, lying EbN. of thefe iflands ; there being no other way to avoid 
 thefe dangers, than bv keeping a proper diftance from the Two Siflers. This 
 danger had like to have happened to the Worcefler, Capt. Hall, in 1765, they 
 
 having
 
 Directions^/* Sailing from China to India. 435 
 
 having miftakenfomehigh land on Sumatra for the Two Sifters, which atfun- 
 fet bore SSW. but having a fquall in the night, they <fc$ed in 1 1 fathoms, and 
 at fun-rife favv Sumatra from SVVbS. to SiW. Had they not +-}cd, they would 
 have run into danger; therefore it is proper to have a perfect fight of them, 
 if you intend failing in the night. At firft fight, coming from the northward, 
 they appear in one, though two round iflands ; and may be fcen 6 or 7 leagues. 
 You may fail as near as you pleafe to the weft ward of them, having 10 or 11 
 fathoms within I of a mile of them. 
 
 To judge from what has happened to feveral fhips that have made this paflage, 
 it feems as if from Great Tree Ifland the currents, at this fcalon, fet frequently 
 to the fouth-eaftward ; fo that iome have found themfelves within fight of the 
 ifland Nordwak, or the North Watcher, inftead of the Two Sifters. The 
 depth will prevent your being miftaken, having 15 or 16 fathoms about the 
 former, and only 1 2 fathoms near the Two Sifters. 
 
 Therefore, after you have pafled the fhoal of Great-Tree Ifland, haul in a 
 little to the weftward ; and by keeping 9 i or 10 fathoms, you will be fure to 
 make the Two Brothers ; but if you exceed 1 1 fathoms, you will fcarcelv be 
 able to weather the Two Brothers, but fall in with the North Watcher. If in 
 the day-time, and clear weather, you may keep fight of Sumatra ihore ; but 
 come no nearer than 9 fathoms, becaufe there is a fhoal lying not far off it, 
 which is fteep to from 7 fathoms. On light of the Two Brothers, endeavour to 
 pafs them between 2 or 3 miles. 
 
 If, for want of obferving this, or by contrary winds, you are obliged to pafs 
 between Nordwak and the Two Sifters, you range the former at a league diftance, 
 inftead of keeping mid-channel ; by which means you avoid the bank above- 
 mentioned. 
 
 Having pafled Nordwak, if vou are bound through the Straits of Sunda, 
 you muft take care of~a rock under water, which the fhip Jafon ftruck on, in 
 1742, on her return from China. This rock lies 2 leagues WNW. of the 
 little ifland Deflan, or the Weftern Ifland, about 5 leagues SbW. from that of 
 Nordwak. 
 
 Ships from the Straits of Banca, bound to Batavia, generally make this ifland ; 
 from whence they fail along the Thoufand Iflands to the eaftward, as far as the 
 little ifland Sudwak, or the South Watcher, 9 leagues NNW. off the entrance 
 of Batavia Road. 
 
 SSE. about 2 leagues from the fouth end of the Two Brothers, lies a flioal even 
 m with the water's edge, on which the Dolphin was a-fhore. 
 
 O o o 2 Thojc
 
 43$ -A Nezv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Thofe who go through the Straits of Sunda, from the Two Sifters, fhape their 
 courfe io as to pafs a league to the eaftward of North Ifland, near the Coaft of 
 Sumatra, and 7 leagues NW. from Bantam Point. From the Two Sifters fteer 
 for North Ifland, between SWbS. and SW. North Ifland is pretty even land, 
 of an oval form, and appears at firft rather low, though it may be feen y 
 or 8 leagues. The Coaft of Sumatra, to the fouth-weftward of it, is fhoal, 
 having only 4 fathoms, mud, 2 miles offfhore ; but you may go quite clofe to 
 the ifland to the weftward of it, and have very deep water. If you intend watering 
 at North Ifland, cf> with the ifland NNE. the middle of the Three Sifters, 
 SWbS. z\ miles ; the Button, SSE-]E. The watering-place, which is a fandy 
 beach, will then bear about SSW. 
 
 The winds, at this feafbn, blowing from the weftward, and the currents 
 fometimes fetting out of the ftraits, it is neceflary hereabout to keep on the 
 Coaft of Sumatra, rather than that of Java, in order to enter the ftraits with 
 lefs difficulty. 
 
 You have 20 fathoms a league off North Ifland : fo that if it happens to be 
 calm, you may °|-} near it ; for it will not be prudent to lie driving about at the 
 ftrait's mouth. From North Ifland, or hereabout, you fleer to go to the eaftward 
 ot the Great Cap, or Button ; then between the little one and the fouth point 
 of Middle Ifland, or Thwart the Way. Take care to avoid Brower's Sand, by 
 hot bringing this Cap and Anger, or Anjeer Point, in one. There is alio a fmall 
 fhoal, with only 3 fathoms, when the Button bears NNW. the Cap, SW13. 2 
 leagues ; and Gertry's Ifland, NNE. Likewife, when the Button bears SEbS. 
 2 miles, there is a rock under water. 
 
 As foon as you have paffed the reef, which projects from the fouth point of 
 the latter, to go toward Prince's Ifland, keep to windward, without coming 
 near the Coaft of Java, whence it will be difficult to claw off" with the winds of 
 thismonfoon, which generally are from NW. This realbn fhould alio prevent 
 your going to of-} at Cantaye, or Mew Ifland. As the fliips which want water 
 may be fupplied at Prince's Ifland, the moft convenient place is at the foot of a 
 high mountain, on the S'E. fide of the ifland ; but the +-}age tnere is not good, 
 having no lefs than 30 fathoms very near the ftiorc. 
 
 Oil the SE. part of Prince's Ifland is an high peaked hill, the higheft land 
 fipoi'i the ifland. This hili Bearing from SW. to NNW. you have good °f-}ing 
 ground from 36 to 44 fathoms, about a mi}e olffhorc ; and this hill bearing 
 from N|W. to WbN. little more than a cable's length off lhore, from io to 
 
 30 fathoms,
 
 DiRECTioNsyor S\\L\KGfrom China to India. 437 
 
 30 fathoms, coarfe fand, with fhells and coral. Or bring the high hummock 
 SWbW. and the eafternmoft point NIE. and you may 4-} in 38 fathoms, 
 fine fandy ground, about three quarters of a mile off more. 
 
 The boats go for water about the fouthernmoft point in light, till they bring 
 the laid hummock NWbN. then they will open a fmall fandy bay, at the 
 eafternmoft part of which is a run of frefh water, and a path cut through the 
 wood to the place where you fill (about 100 yards up) very convenient for 
 rolling your calk; but if you fill below, depend upon it your water will be 
 brackifh, though you fill it at low water. But this place has been objected 
 
 ' againft, as the boats have to row round the point againft the current, fo that 
 they can make but* one trip a day ; therefore fhips, for the conveniency of 
 watering, may 4-^ right off the watering place, where you are as well defended 
 from the NW. winds as at the former ; and the S W. winds blow equally in 
 on both, unlefs you run in there under 35 fathoms ; and then you are in a 
 manner land-locked, which cannot be done off the watering-place. But the 
 conveniency is fo great, and the hazard fo little, that you may 4-} with the 
 high land bearing NWbN. in 35 fathoms, foft ground, half a mile off fhore. 
 
 Between Middle Ifland, and feveral others to the eaftward of Hog Point, is 
 a very fine channel to enter the Straits of Sunda, coming from the northward. 
 This channel feems advantageous, efpecially in this feafon ; becaufe it affords 
 much better fhelter from the winds than that between the Fourth Point and 
 Middle Ifland. Thofe who would pais through it, muft fteer from North 
 Ifland, fo as to range very near the iflands lying along the Coaft of Sumatra, that 
 they may 4-} there, in cafe of a calm ; and when they have pafled the 
 fouthernmoft of them, fteer fo as to pais on the fame fide of Cracata Ifland, 
 and then toward Prince's Ifland. Captain Hall palled clofe to all thefe iflands, 
 and found them fheep to. But obferve herein, when you have pafled Middle 
 Ifland, or Thwart'me Way, not to come too near Hog Point; becaufe off 
 
 . it there are feveral rocks under water. Captain Hall faw them break for at 
 lead 1 a mile. Alfo, at S3W. 2 leagues from Pulo Crccatao (or Cracata) 
 there is a dan.rerous rock under water. 
 
 To the uorth-cafhva d of Middle Ifland, there is a rock near the water's 
 edge, on which the fea breaks. It lies, according to a curious Dutch d; aught, 
 about 2 leagues from this ifland, and W'bNiN. one league from the. Button. 
 There is alio another at the NW. end, called the Strcom Rock, which looks 
 like a boat turned uafide down ; but at high water there is only a rippling to 
 be leen over it. Captain Hall fays that you may go very clofe to the weftward 
 
 of it.
 
 438 A Netv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 ©fit. This rock, and the want of <f-} in g- ground in mid-channel, renders it 
 difficult ; fo that, upon the appearance of an approaching calm, you mould 
 not attempt it ; but if it mould happen, that after having paffed Middle Ifland, 
 the current mould drive you back thither, you mud fefolve to 4-}, and wait 
 for a breeze. Though the charts mark no foundings to the weft ward of this 
 ifland, yet there are 45 fathoms 1 i league off. 
 
 Several navigators have thought to go out of the Straits of Sunda bv the 
 channel between Prince's Ifland and the Coaft of Sumatra ; it may fucceed 
 better than paffing to the northward of Middle Ifland ; but the winds from 
 N. to NE. which favour this pafFage are generally of fhort continuance ; 
 and the way being long, vou may be liable, during the fucceeding calm, to 
 be tolled from fide to fide by the currents, without being able to help yourfelf : 
 befidcs, in this part, efpecially to the northward of Prince's Ifland, there is no 
 depth for °f-}ing but very near (bore, and the monfoon wind blowing afterward, 
 you may be (after many difficulties) obliged to go through the channel between 
 this ifland and the Coaft of Java, by which ihips are accuftomed to go out, 
 on account of the winds and currents which facilitate this pailage. The 
 Dutch call this Behouden, or the Safe Paflage. 
 
 Nothwithftanding thefe advantages, whether you fail from the <f-}age at 
 Prince's Ifland, or come directly out of the ftraits, you muft keep as near 
 this ifland as poffible ; and avoid approaching that of Cantaye (or Mew Ifland), 
 from whence, at this feafon, it will be with great difficulty that you get off 
 again. In this manner having reached the weft, or rather the louth point, 
 you fail near the rocks called the Carpenters, which project out from its 
 extremity. I lere is no danger at the diftance of a ftone's caft. Here you often 
 meet with a violent opposition between wind and tide, when the fiea agitated, 
 ri'fes and breaks fuiioufly on the weft point of Java. ThWproves it necefiary 
 to keep on the oppofite fide, to prevent being expofed to evident danger. As 
 foon as you are out of the ftraits, haul your wind, Handing to the fouthward, 
 to get into the variable winds way, by favour of which you may reach the 
 Cape of Good Hope, or the Ifles of France and Bourbon. 
 
 CCCIII. DiRECTioNs/or Sailing from Bombay, or Surat, for China, 
 
 through the Straus ^/"Malacca. 
 
 The ufual time for fhips that arc bound to China, to fail from Bombay, or 
 Surat, is in April, or early in May. You may coaft it along the Malabar Coaft 
 
 at
 
 Directions for Sailing from Bombay for China. 439 
 
 at a reafonable diftance, in fight thereof, or in foundings. The beft way is to 
 keep a good ofiing in May, as the winds then hang pretty much to the weft- 
 ward, and are often to the fbuthward of the weft. You may take your 
 departure from Cape Cornorin from whence fliips make about 1 6?E. longitude 
 to Pulo Rondo, or 14?^ to the SW. part of the Nicobars : but you may fteer 
 from Cape Comoria for Point de Gall, and take your departure from thence 
 for Pulo Rondo, which beats due eaft from Point de Gall. Ships ufually 
 make about ijrfE. longitude between them. Ships that take their departure 
 from the Great Baflas, make about 10?;. to the SW. part of the Nicobars 
 or 1 1.* ro Pulo kondo. 
 
 In croffing the Bay of.Bengil, you are to obferve, that there is a conftant 
 nortberly current during the 3 VV. monfoon, and a foutherly or SW current 
 the NE. monfoon ; which you muft make allowance for in the courfe fteered. 
 Having made Pulo Rondo, proceed for failing through the Straits of Malacca 
 to Pulo Sapata, and from Pulo Sapata to Canton. 
 
 CCCIV. Remarks made in Sailing from Bombay to the C ape oj 'Good 
 Hope, through the Inner Passage; or between Madagascar and the 
 Coast of Africa. By Mr. Nichelfon. 
 
 We fet fail from Bombay, December 16, 1763, and fleered alono- the 
 Coaft of Malabar, in foundings from 10 to 40 fathoms ; having moderate land 
 and fea breezes, fair weather, and fmooth water. The winds hun°- much 
 more to the fouthward than I ever knew them, blowing moftly from ESE. to 
 S. SW. and WSW. (very uncommon winds on this coaft in December.) 
 
 On the 30th we joined Admiral Cornifh in his Majefty's fhip the Norfolk 
 in company with his Majefty's fhips America and Chatham, ofFCallicut, from 
 whence we took our depasture (allowing its latitude n? i2'N. and longitude 
 75? 30'E. from London), and failed through the Nine-decree Channel, with 
 moderate winds in the NE. quarter. The beft latitude to keep in, lteerin°- 
 through the Laccadive Iflands, is 9? 4o'N. 
 
 On the ift of January, 1764, at noon, being in latitude, by obfervation, 
 9? 49'N. and longitude, made from Callicut, f. 6'W, few the ifland Scuheli- 
 par' from the maft-head, bearing NbE. diftance 6 or 7 leagues : this is low 
 flat ifland. The variation was obferved, A. M. 1? 5W. from thence fteered 
 to make the land to the northward of Cape Baflas, and met with nothing very 
 remarkable, having fteady moderate gales in the NE. quarter, a fmooth fea, 
 
 and
 
 44° A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 and pleafant weather ; found little or no current, fometimes a few miles to the 
 northward, and at others as much to the fouthwaid, in the 24 hours, until 
 we made the land. 
 
 On the 15th, at ' pair 5 P. M. being then in latitude, by account, 6? 47'N. 
 and longitude, made from Callicut, 24? 2 / W. the variation 10? 29'W. faw 
 the land of Africa from NNW. to W;S. diftance 5 or 6 leagues : at the fame 
 time founded, and had 50 fathoms, fine white land. We fleered a SSW|W. 
 courfe all night, which carried us rather off the land : a SWbS. courfe by 
 compals, feems to be the along-fhore courfe. 
 
 The land hereabout is pretty high, with white cliffs, or fand hills, near the 
 fea, which may be feen in clear weather, 8 or 9 leagues, and Teems to be pretty 
 bold, and clear of danger. The variation, A. M. by feveral obfervations, was 
 10? 38 W. At noon the latitude, by obfervation, 4? 49'N. and longitude, 
 made from Callicut, 25? 2o'W. We this day found a current, which let the 
 fnip 19 miles to the fouthwerd of the reckoning. 
 
 The 1 6th, at 6 P. M. Cape B.iTas bore WbSIS. the northernmofl land in 
 fight, N. diftance, off fhore, about 7 leagues ; being then in latitude, by account, 
 4? 15N. and longitude, made from Callicut, 25? 35'W. or 49? S3^- fr° m 
 London : the variation 10? 43'W. The courfe and diftance from the land 
 we fuft made, in latitude 6? 47'N. to Cape Baflas is S. 2j'W. or SSW4W. 
 about 57 leagues. This day found the current had fet the fhip 27 miles aga'.n 
 to the fouthward of the reckoning. 
 
 Took my departure from Cape BafTas in latitude 4? io'N. and longitude, by 
 computation, 49? 5?'E. from London ; and found the current along this coaft 
 generally fetting to the fouthward, fometimes at the rate of 35 or 36 miles in 
 the 24 hours. On the J 8th, croffed the equinoctial, in longitude, made from 
 Cape B.ifl'as, 2? 4i'\V. the variation 13? 1 6'W. 
 
 On the 27'ih at noon, faw the Coaft of Mofambique very plain, from 
 NWbW. to W. I imagine it to be very high land, as we were at leaf. 14 or 
 15 leagues from it, and faw only the tops of the lull?, which appeared like 
 ifiands. The latitude in, by obfervation, 13? 42'S. and longitude, made from 
 Cape Baflas, 6? 50'W. Mofambique bearing, by eftimation, SffiW. diftance 
 34 leagues,' had moftly moderate gales from the NE. quarter, fometimes ESE. 
 and fometimes NNW. with fair weather, the current {letting moftly to the 
 fouthward. The variation increafed to t 7? 4'W. 
 
 finding our reckoning from Cape Baflas to Mof'imbipue pretty exact, took 
 a fjclh departure from Mofambique, fuppofing it to bear as by eftirnation at 
 
 noon
 
 Remarks made in Sailing from Bombay to the Cape of Goon Hope. 44.1 
 
 noon, allowing its latitude 15? 4/S. and longitude by computation, 41? $C 
 from London- The 28th, found the current had fet the (hip 40 mtl.es to the 
 fouthward of account in the hit 24 hours ; the winds from WbN. to NW. 
 and NNE. with fome fqualls, thunder, lightning, and rain. The 29th, fr 
 gales from N. and NNE. to ENE. hazy weather, with fome rain,, and a 
 larp-e fwell from the NNE. Found ourfelves 59 miles to the fouthward of the 
 reckoning (fuppofing this current fets SW). The fun near our zenith. The 
 30th, ltrong gales and fqualls from N. to NE'oN. with a large fea from the 
 NNE. thick hazy weather, and fome rain. This day found ourfelves 8 miles 
 to the northward of account : latitude, by observation 19? 55'S. longitude, 
 made from Mofambique, 4i'W. 
 
 The 31ft, toward evening, had a great fea from the SE. which thwarted that 
 from the NNE. and made a very high confuted fea. At mid-night came on a violent 
 hard gale of wind, with much rain. The wind from noon to midnight veered round 
 gradually from NbE. to NEbE. E. ESE. and SE. then the gale was at the 
 height : from midnight to noon the gale rather incrcafed, and the wind veered 
 from SE. to SSE. We were lying under a reefed and balanced mizen, and 
 mizen ftay-fall, much diftrefied on account of the ihip's being fo leaky, that 
 file gained upon all the pumps, and bailing at all the hatchways with 
 buckets, &c. At noon it blew very hard, with rain and a great lea from SE. 
 latitude in, by account, 20? 46'S. and longitude, made from Mofambique, 
 2? 1 i'W. We here loft th NE. trade. From this time to the 3d of 
 February, had ftrong gales from S. to SbE. SbW. SWbS. SW. and WSW. 
 with cloudy weather, frequently hard fqualls, with rain, and a very great fea 
 from the SE. 
 
 This day we loft our rudder, which, together, with the leaky condition of 
 our (hip, made us really in a diftrefied condition : latitude in, by oblcrvatioh, 
 19? 52'S. and longitude, made from- Mofambique, 1° 7 W. Found we were 
 let 60 miles to the fouthward of the reckoning, finse the Lift, obfervapiori, 
 From the 3d to the 8th, had the winde from WSW. WbS. SVYbWl to SbW. 
 SbE. and S. moftly frefh gales, cloudy weather, with frequent fqualls and 
 rain, and a large fwell from the fouthward. Found the current, for thele hit 
 5 days, had fet the fliip to the fouthward of the reckoning, at the rate of 
 31 miles a day. 
 
 This day got a machine over-board, and fteered the fhip with it, inftead of 
 a rudder: latitude in, by obfervation, 21? 45'S. and longitude made 3^'E. 
 from Mofambique : the variation 24? #2'W, The next day found the fhip 
 had been fet 46 miles to the fouthward of account, and 15 miles more on the 
 10th. 
 
 P p p On
 
 442 New Directory/c;/- the East-Indies. 
 
 On this day the America informed us, that they had feen Cape St. Sebaftian, 
 that at 8 A. M. it bore due weft, 21 leagues ; from which bearing I correfted 
 my reckoning, and took a freih departure, finding the fhip 4? 22'. to the 
 weftward of the reckoning ; from whence I judge the ftrong current, we have 
 found letting to the fouthward, muft have fet to the weftward alio : (o that 
 we were for feveral days within 20 and 25 leagues of the continent, .and confe- 
 quently pafied the Bafias de India a great way to the weftward of them : latitude 
 in, by obfervation, 22? §6'S. and longitude 1? 25'E. from Cape St. Sebaftian;. 
 the variation 25? 4/W. 
 
 From the 10th to the 28th, had a great variety of winds and weather, but 
 moftly from the eaftern board, moderate and fair. The current has fet chiefly 
 to the fouthward, of various degrees of ftrength, from 49 to 7 miles in the j.4. 
 hours : fometimes we have not been fenfible of any current for 2 or 3 days 
 together ; at others a fmall matter to the northward, and that but feldom. At 
 noon faw the land bearing NfW. at a great diftance : latitude in, by obfervation, 
 35? 2'S. and longitude made, 7? 57'W. from Cape St. Sebaftian : the variation, 
 2 2? 5 4 / W. 
 
 On the 29th, at 2 P. M. the extremes of the land bore from ENE. to N|W- 
 and a remarkable high peak NbEiE. diftance 14 or 15 leagues. This land in 
 general feems very high and mountainous, and fome part of it is exceeding 
 high : according to our latitude, it is not laid down in the charts fo far to the 
 fouthward, by a great deal, as it ought to be. At noon, were in latitude, by 
 obfervation, 35? y'S. and longitude made, 9? 26'W. from Cape St. Sebaftian : 
 the variation 21? 4o'W. had foundings 70 fathoms, fine black fand. We coafted 
 it in foundings from 68 to 50, 40, and 38 fathoms, diftance orFlhore from 15 
 or 16 to 7 or 8 leagues. There are many openings to the fea along this coaft, 
 which feem to foi m deep bays ; fome of them lo deep we could not fee the 
 land at the further end. 
 
 March 4th, made Cape Lagullas, which is a low point of land with a gradual, 
 fiope to the feaward, and forms itfelf in 2 points ; one running out to the 
 fouthward a long way into the fea (this is the proper Cape Lagullas) 1 the other 
 point is alio low, and lies fome diftance to the north-eaftward of the true cape : # 
 the land between them forming a round bay, feemingly about 3 leagues wide. 
 The coaft, from the inner point, turns in with a quick rounding to the north- 
 ward, and forms a very deep bay ; the land to the north-eaftward being ken 
 only at a great diftance. 
 
 When
 
 Remarks made in Sailing from Bombay to the Cape of Good Hope. 443 
 
 When Cape Lagullas and the point before mentioned are in one, bearing 
 NNE'N. and the pitch of the capeNbE. 4 or 5 leagues, you will then have 
 foundings in 50 fathoms, fine grey fand. Then you may fee a very high 
 bluff point of land clofe to the fea, bearing NW*N. 9 or 10 leagues ; the 
 wefternmoft land in fight, and appearing like a gunner's quoin : this lies from 
 Cape Lagullas NWbW. 8 or 9 leagues, and Cape Falfo WbN*N. diftance 24 
 leagues. 
 
 Although Cape Lagullas is a low point of land, at fome fmall diftance from 
 the fea, it is about the height of the North Foreland ; and the land riles gra- 
 dually to a confiderable height in-land. At fome diftance in land are feen 
 very high mountains ; but no land near the fea fo high as the Gunner's Qioin, 
 either to the eaftward or the weftward : therefore lhips, feeing the land about 
 this coaft at 10, 12, or 14 leagues diftance, muft of courfe let the Gunner's 
 Quoin land for Cape Lagullas, it being the only land near the fea that can be 
 feen at that diflance. When the Gunner's Quoin bears NbW. it does not 
 appear like a quoin, as it does when you are off Cape Lagullas, but in a very 
 different form. 
 
 When Cape Lagullas bears E§N. 7 or 8 leagues, and the land of the Gunner's 
 Quoin Mountain, NIE. 4 or 5 leagues, you will have 50 fathoms, fine fand. 
 When the Gunner's Quoin Mountain (which forms an high bluff point, when 
 you are either to the eaftward or weftward of it) bears EbN. and the extreme 
 of the land to the weftward (which then feems to be a pretty high fteep 
 point of land) bears NNW. diftance off fhore 4 leagues, you will have 50 
 fathoms, coarfe brown fand. The land then bearing NNW. trenches in 
 quickly to the northward, and forms a bay between it and the land of Cape 
 Falfo, fo very deep that you cannot fee the further part thereof from the 
 fhip's deck. 
 
 Standing to the weftward, in latitude 34? 4i'S. 8 or 9 leagues off more, 
 oppclite this bay, you deepen your water from 50 to 60, 70, and 80 fathoms, 
 f.uid and ouze ; when you are about 6 or 7 leagues to the eafb.vard of 
 Cape Falfo: the variation, 1764, 19? 39'W. To the weftward of this bay, 
 and 5 or 6 leagues to the eaftward of Cape Falfo, the land is very high and 
 mountainous near the fea, with feveral openings like the entrances of bays, or 
 harbours.- 
 
 On the 6th at noon, Hottentots Point bore NbWsW. diftance about <; 
 leagues ; at the fame time had foundings in 68 fathoms, muddy ground : latitude 
 in, by obfervation, 34? 41'S. and longitude made i3 ? 31 'W. from Cape St. 
 
 P P P 2 Sebaftian :
 
 444 -A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 Sebaftian : the variation 19? 39'W. By the reckoning this day, at noon, the 
 fhip was 4 leagues to the eaftward of Cape Falfo, or 10 leagues from the Cape 
 of Good Hope, which, according to feveral obfervations repeatedly made in 
 the years 1751, 175-, and 1753, is in longitude 18? 3o'E. from London; fo 
 that the true longitude of the fhip was 19? 7'E. from London! Allowing Cape 
 St. Sebaflian in longitude 36? 32'E. from London, and deducting 19? 7' there- 
 from, the longitude made from thence mould be 17? 25'W. whereas, by the 
 reckoning, it was only 13? 31'W. which fhews that the current had fet ffrong 
 to the westward all along this coaft, as it generally does. 
 
 Hottentots Point, or Cape Falfo, is the outermoft point on the eaft fide of 
 Fah'e Bay, and lies about 6 leagues due eaft from the Cape of Good Hope, and 
 may be teen 8 or 9 leagues ; between them is the entrance into Falfe Bay. At 
 the outer part of Falfe Cape there is an hill, which, when you are to the eafl- 
 ward of it, appears much like the Sugar-Loaf Hill in Table Bay; this hill is 
 ieparate from the other high land ; and at a fmall diftance within this hill there 
 is another of the fame form, but not fb high : the land near the fea, and about 
 thofe hills, being very low, makes them appear confpicuous when you are to 
 the eaftward of them ; hereby Cape Falfo may be known. 
 
 At a fmall diftance within the inner hill there are very high mountains, one 
 of which is level on the top ; at a diftance it has fome fmall refemblance of the 
 Table Land at Table Bay, which gives it the name of the Falfe Cap. This has 
 been miftaken for the Table Land ; and the other two hills, one for the Sugar 
 Loaf, and the other for the Lion's Rump : but there is one thing that may at 
 all times convince people of their miftake, the foundings. The outer hill at 
 Cape Falfo bearing NbW^W. about 5 leagues, latitude in 34? 40'S. had 
 foundings 68 fathoms, white muddy ground; at the fame time the extremes 
 of the land to the eaftward bore EbS!_S. whereas with the Sugar-Loaf Hill 
 in Table Bay bearing fo, and in that latitude and diftance from the land, you 
 have no foundings. 
 
 I worked the bearings and diftance from the land we firfl favv, on the 
 29th of February to Cape Falfo, W2?S. 100 leagues ; whereas the charts 
 make it WbS. and allowing for the fet of the current during the 7 days we 
 coafted it along fhore, 30 leagues more may be added, which will make the 
 diftance of the land we fell in with 130 leagues eaftward of Cape Falfo : allowing 
 21 leagues for the current (which is in the fame proportion J, it will make 91 
 
 lea?" 
 
 The
 
 Remarks made in Sailikg from Bombay to the Cate of Gooq Hope. 441; 
 
 The land is every where exceeding high and mountainous, both in land and 
 near the lea, and full of large and wide openings, as above-mentioned. The 
 foundings are very regular every where to the eaftward : where we fir ft made , 
 the land, you have 65 fathoms, at 14 or 15 leagues off fhore ; and 46 or 47 
 fathoms, 8 or 9 leagues off more ; about Cape Lagullas you have 57 or 58 
 fathoms, 7 or 8 leagues off more ; and about 5, 6, or 7 leagues to the eaftward 
 of Cape Falib, you have to and 64 fathoms, muddy ground, 5 or 6 leagues 
 off fh ore. 
 
 In the offing, Cape Lagullas bearing, by eftimation, from NEbN. to N. 
 about 18 or 20 leagues, in latitude 36? %'S. you have foundings on this bank 
 from j 5 to 80 fathoms, fine grey fand ; and 1 2 or 1 5 leagues to the eaftward of 
 that, the variation 20? 39/W. 1764. 90 fathoms, brown muddy fand. In this 
 latitude the ban! runs but little further to the eaftward ; for in 8 or 10 leagues 
 you have no foundings. 
 
 In the opening of Bay Falfo you have 54 and $6 fathoms, muddy ground ; 
 Hottentots Point, or Cape Falib, bearing NNE. and the eafternmoft part of 
 the Cape of Good Hope NWiW. 3 or 4 leagues; in latitude 34? 2 5'S. and 
 variation 19? 30/W. tor 1764. About 3 or 4 leagues further offihore, you have 
 64 and 70 fathoms. The bank does not run far off the fhore hereabout. The 
 variation is increaied near a degree at thole places to the prefent year 1 780. 
 
 As you run to the we 11 ward toward the Cape of Good tlope, you will 
 fhoalen your water from 68 to 60, 55, or 54 fathoms, muddy ground ; in which 
 latter depth Cape Falfo bears eaft, diftance about 3 ' leagues ; and the very 
 pitch of the Cape of Good Hope (which is the fouth-eafternmoft point of land 
 on the well: fide of Bay Falfo) NW. about 3 leagues. On the pitch of the cape, 
 or very near it, is a very high, ragged, rocky, peaked hill, fomething in lhape 
 like the Su^ar-Loaf Hill, but not fo high, with no other high land near it. 
 Within the entrance of Falfe Bay, you have foundings from 40 to \6 fathoms, 
 fandy ground, lometimes mud. The pitch of the Cape of Good Hope bears, 
 from the pitch of the Falfe Cape, by compafs, WbN^N. fo that, allowing the 
 variation, they bear due call and well of each other, in latitude 34? 25'S. and 
 diftunce 6 leagues. 
 
 The Rocks, and other dangers near the Cape of Good FIopc, have been already 
 mentioned in Section CCLIX. Page 274 ; which fee. 
 
 cccv.
 
 446 A New Directory jor the East-Indies. 
 
 CCCV. Directions^ Sailing /row //.?? Cape of 'Good Hope to /£<? Islands 
 St. Helena, Ascension, and from thence toward the British CflANNtL. 
 By the fame. 
 
 As foon as you are clear of the land near the Cape of Good Hope, fleer 
 N\V. this will foon bring you into the SE. trade-wind ; and, in the fair 
 weather feafon, you generally have frefh fleady gales from fouth-eafhvardly all 
 the way. 
 
 It has been too much the practice, in obferving the variation of the 
 compafs at fea, not to be fo exact as could be wifhed ; but obferving the 
 variation with exadhiefs is of much greater utility than correcting the courfe 
 by the common method of failing ; and, if nicely obferved, anfwers all the 
 ends of longitude in navigation, particularly where the increafe and decreafe is 
 
 quick. 
 
 It is my opinion, that, fooner or later, there will be fpme very important 
 difcoveries made by the variation of the compafs ; fo I hope there will be 
 more attention paid to the variation, for the time to come, than hitherto 
 has been. 
 
 In fleering to the north-weft)vard, you will rather decreafe the variation ; for, 
 in latitude 32? 4o'S. and longitude, made from the Table Land, 1° 24'W. we 
 had 19? 35'W. in latitude 3i?3o'S. and longitude made 3? ditto, had 19? 25 W. 
 in latitude 29? 50'S. and longitude, welling 5?, had ;8? 42'W. variation, which 
 decreafes gradually as you run toward St. Helena. 
 
 In the parallel of that ifland, and 3? io'eaftward thereof, we had 13? 42'W. 
 variation ; about 2? to the eaftward, had 13? or 12? 55'W. and 1? 20' to the 
 eaftward, had 11? 50'W. and in St. Helena Road had 11? 3S'W. 
 
 St. Helena is an high, lleep, rocky ifland, about 18 or 20 miles in circum- 
 ference, accefiible only at the landing place, on the NW. fide thereof, which 
 is well defended with batteries of guns. A Ihip bound to this ifland mult run 
 d >wn along the north fide of it, and within i a cable's length of Sugar-Loaf 
 Point, and afterward keep the fhore clofe a-board, within a cable's length : 
 there is no danger, the fhore being bold and lleep to. On the weft part of 
 Sugar-Loaf Point ftands a fmall fort ; a little to the fouthward thereof is 
 Rupert's Valley, where there is a good line of guns : the next point to the 
 fouthward of the valley is an high ileep point, called Munden's Point, on the 
 top of which th^re is a battery of guns ; this point muft be kept dole a-board : 
 
 the
 
 Directions for Sailing frovt Cape Good Hope toward England. 447 
 
 the next valley is called James's or Chapel Valley, off which is the placs 
 of cf-^iug. 
 
 You may o\-$ in from 3 to 15 fathoms. The flag-flaff at the fort 
 bearing from SSE. to SLbS. Sugar-Loaf Point, NEbE. and Horfe-Pafture- 
 Point, SWbWfVV. diftancc off (hore about ' a mile : with tbefe bearings 
 you have a good and convenient birth for watering. This bank runs out to 
 the weftward, from the fort, about 1 [- mile, and deepens gradually from 
 7 fathoms, near the fhore, to 30 or 35 fathoms, about 1 ^ mile off fhore; from 
 whence it deepens fiuldenly to 60 fathoms ; and then no foundings. The 
 bottom in the road is coarfe land and gravel. You have no foundings till 
 yon come a-brealT: Rupert's Valley, and then you have 1 8 or 20 fathoms. 
 
 Notwicnftanding the barren appearance of this ifland from the lea, there 
 are many fruitful valleys in the inland parts, which produce fruits and vege- 
 tables fuitable to the climate, and afford good pafture for a great number of 
 the finelr. cattle in the world, with which they abound. The beef and mutton 
 are excellent in their kind ; and they have abundance of poultry ; alio 
 plenty of good potatoes, yams, and other vegetables. The air is always cool 
 and pleafant, and the ifland healthy, though it lies in fo low a latitude, a frelh 
 SE. trade-wind blowing continually over it. 
 
 As fhips meet with good refrefhments here, their lick fpeedily recover from 
 the fcurvey. Here is plenty of good water ; but wood is rather a fcarce article. 
 One watering-place is juft without James's Fort, where there is a crane to 
 ftrike the calks into the boat ; the other is at Lemon Valley, where is the 
 beft water ; and you fill the calks in your boat with an hole, only it is a little 
 further to fetch it. 
 
 I obferved the latitude in the road, 15? 59/S. and made longitude, from 
 the Cape of Good Hope, 22? 42 / \V. which makes but 4? iz'W. from 
 London : whereas Mr. Malkelyne, by celefrial obfervation, makes it 5? 49V/. 
 from Greenwich, or 5? 44'VV. from London : therefore muft impute the 
 difference to our having partaken of part of the current, well known to let 
 to the wefhvard, round the Cape of Good Hope ; elpecially as few fhips are 
 known to make more longitude between thele two places. The variation, 
 by feveral obfervation s, whilft lying in the road, was 11? 38VV. The tides 
 here are little or none. 
 
 Between the Ifland St Helena and the Ifland Afcenfion the SE. trade-wind 
 blows, all the year long, fine, ftealy, pleafant gales, and moitly fair weather. 
 The variation decreales very gradually between them. In the latitude of 
 
 Afceniioii,
 
 44S A New DiREcToRYj^r the East-Indies. 
 
 Afcenfion, and i? f to tne eaftward thereof, we had 10? ~W. variation ; 
 and about i? to the eaftward of it, had 9? 52'YV. and at Afcenfion had 9? 48'W. 
 The Ifland of Afcenfion is an high, barren, rocky ifland, about 20 miles 
 in circumference, and may be feen 10 leagues in clear weather. It is fo entirely 
 barren, that there is not the leaft appearance of any kind of vegetation ; nor 
 is there any frefh water on it : thefe are fufficient reafons \for its being- 
 uninhabited. There are many goats on this ifland, of which our people fliot 
 feveral ; they were very meagre, as might rea.onably be expected ; and it 
 abounds in fea-turtle, the largeft and fineft perhaps in the world. 
 
 A fhip bound to this ifland mull: fail down along the north fide of it, and 
 may keep it clofe a-board, it being bold and deep to ; and when you come 
 to haul up for the road, you moil (till keep the fhore clofe a-board ; you 
 may fail within two cables length, or lefs, of it (there being no danger) till 
 you bring Crofs Hill on the middle of the Sandy Bay. 
 
 This bay is about a large quarter of a mile deep, and about 1 of a mile 
 wide. The wefternmoft point of this bay is dangerous, a reef of rocks 
 runnino- out from it about a mile from the fhore, on which, in bad weather, 
 the fea breaks ; therefore care mull: be taken not to go too near it. 
 
 The 4-^ing-place is on the NW. fide of the ifland, oft' the above-mentioned 
 fandy bay ; oppolite to which, in-land, there is a high hill by itfelf, with a 
 fla^-ftafF and crofs upon it, which gives it the name of Crofs Hill. A good 
 mark for <f-^ing is, to bring Crofs Hill on the middle of the Sandy Bay : 
 when it bears SSEtE. and the extremes of the ifland from NE'jE. to SWfS. 
 then you will be in 10 fathoms water, and about fa mile off fhore. The 
 bottom is land and gravel, clear ground. This is as good a birth as any in 
 the road. The latitude, obferved in Afcenfion Road, is ;? 57'S. and longitude, 
 made from St. Helena, 7? 41/W. 
 
 led uo~n Afcenfion, allowing it to lie in latitude 7? 57'S. and longitude 
 1 j? 54-W. from London ; we crofted the Line with 7? 56'W. variation, 
 and longitude made 6? 1 i'W. from Afcenfion ; and had the SE. Erade-wind, 
 frefh and fleady gales, to latitude 3?N. From latitude 3?N. to 5?N. had 
 moftly light winds and variable, from SE. to NE. with iorac i'cw calms, 
 hi latitude 5? 21'N. and longitude, made from Afcenfion, 9? io'W. variation 
 6? 5o'\V. we met with the NE. trade-wind, which continued frefli and 
 : 3 to latitude 28? IN. 
 twithftanding the few calms we met with, and the quick change of 
 the trade- winds from SE. to NE. all this may have been merely accidental. 
 
 Several
 
 Direct i o^s for Sailing from Cape Good Hope toward England. 4 
 
 49 
 
 Several fhips have crofTed the Line with nearly the fame variation that we did, 
 and confequently as far to the caftward, and about the fame time of the year, 
 and met with the fame kind of winds that we did ; yet this is not furficient 
 to prove it a general rule, to crofs the Line fo fir to the eaftward, especially 
 if the fun is on or near the Line ; becaufe from 5? of cither latitude, you arc 
 liable to meet with calms, more eaftvvard toward the Coaft. of Guinea. 
 Experience fufficiently proves, that the farther to the eastward on the Line, 
 and under 5? of either latitude, the more fubjecl: you are to calms ; therefore 
 the fame rule which holds good in croffmg the Line outward-bound to India r 
 will alfo hold good homeward-bound, which is to crofs it with about 7? 
 or 6? 30'W. variation, which is nearly about the meridian of St. Jago ; or 
 homeward-bound, not to crofs the Line with more than 8?W. variation, 
 where you will be the lefs fubjecl: to calms. The prefent variation at the 
 E-quinotfial is nearly half a degree more than either of the refpeclive numbers, 
 when this vovage was performed. 
 
 I have pafled to the weftward of the Cape de Verde Iflands, in latitude 
 16? 5'N. which is about the latitude of Bonavifta, with 4? 4'W. variation ; 
 longitude, made from Afcenfion, 19? 56W or about 12? to the weftward 
 of Bonavifta. I have alfo pafTed the latitude of St. Antonio, the northern- 
 mofr. and wefternmoft of the Cape de Verde Iflands, with 3? 37'W. 
 variation; longitude, made from Afcenfion, 20? 48VV. This was the lowed 
 variation I had in this paflage ; reckoning we were then about 10? to the 
 weftward of St. Antonio. From thence, as we ran to the northward, found 
 it increafe. 
 
 In latitude 28? §N. found the NE. trade-winds began to decreafe : thev fir ft 
 moderated, then turned to little winds and variable ; and in latitude 2o?X T . 
 to 3o:N. the v\ inds veered from the ENE. to SE. S. and S\Y. in v. hich 
 quarter trey mofl'ly continue,!. In latitude 2n':N. longitude, mad 
 
 ion, 33? 10'W. had 6? 30'W. variation. In latitude 38? 40'N. . hi h 
 is pretty hear the latitude of bayal, one of the wefrern iflands ; i ide 
 
 made from Afcenfion, -22? 8'W. had variation : :. 5 -i--;. '.-.'. ,_- we 
 
 re then about S? to the weftward of Fayal, and 5? ; to the weftward of 
 Carvo. 
 
 The variation was obferved, 1764, byhis Mijefty's fhips Weymouth and 
 Panther, amongft the weftern iflands, and in Fayal Road, 13? j-AV. fo that 
 a fliip, in the latitude vi Fayal, o'oierving the variation to be uiukr 13^ 30 W. 
 
 Q.q q ht
 
 45° A New Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 might have been fure fhe was to the weftward of the weftern iflands. About 
 3° to the weftward of Carvo (the northernmoft and wefternmoft of all the 
 weftern iflands, in latitude 40? N. longitude 3i?W. from London) the 
 variation was 13? fW. and in latitude 40? 50'N. longitude, made from 
 Afcenfion, 19? 44'W. and about 3? to the wefhvard of Carvo, there was 
 13? 37'W. variation. 
 
 Though the increafe of the variation near the weftern iflands was fo flow, 
 or gradual, that you would run 3? of longitude to the increafe of 55' or 1? 
 variation ; when you were to the northward of the weftern iflands, and 
 fleering to eaftward, you would increafe the variation very gradually : for 
 example, from the Lift mentioned variation, latitude and longitude, you would 
 run 1 8? or 1 9? to the eaftward, before you would increafe the variation to 
 1 3? :W. which you would have in latitude 49? io'N. to 49? 30'N. and 
 longitude in about 1 5?W. from London, or 8? \W. from Scilly ; which 
 mews that the variation increafed very gradually, or at the rate of 4? \ of 
 longitude to \° * of variation. 
 
 But it has a quicker increafe as you come nearer the Englifh Channel ; 
 for in latitude 49? 20'N. to latitude 49? 3o'N. (which is the proper parallel 
 to fleer to the eaftward in for the Englifh Channel), and longitude io?i.W. 
 from London, you will have variation 1 9? \ to 19? |W. and foundings 
 hereabout in 95 or iod fathoms, fine grey land ; 46 or 30 leagues to ihe 
 weftward of Scilly. In latitude 49? 25'N. and longitude 9? 38 W. from 
 London; variation 19? 5-i'W. and foundings 82 fathoms, gravel and pebble 
 ftones ; 38 or 40 leagues to the weftward of Scilly. In latitude 49? to 
 49? iN. and longitude 8? fW. from London ; variation 20? 7 \V. foundings 
 at 75 fathoms, coarfe white land, like oatmeal, with fome pieces of fhells ; 
 20 leagues to the weftward of Scilly. 
 
 In latitude 49? 10' to 49? 25'N. longitude in 7? 6'W. from London, Scilly 
 bearing NNE. diftance 12 or i^leagues, variation 20? 3o'W. and foundings 
 68 fathoms, fine white land, with fome fmall pieces of fhells. In latitude 
 4Q?£N. foundings at 65 fathoms, white land, with broken fhells, Scilly bearing 
 north of you, diftance about 9 leagues. In latitude 49? 23'N. variation 21 AY. 
 foundings 60 fathoms, coarfe brown land, were W8W4S. diftance 34 
 leagues from Start Point, the Lizard hearing N47?E. diftance 17 leagues, 
 
 I were 8 leagues to the eaftward of Scilly. In latitude 49? 37'Nf. variation, 
 21? 2'\V. foundings 52 fathoms, gravel ftones, and i'mall (hells ; the 
 
 J izard
 
 DiUEcTioNs^V Sailing from the Cape Good Hop;; toward England. 451 
 
 Lizard bearing NWbN. 8 or 9 leagues, and the Start E^6?N. diftance 17 
 IcTrues. In latitude 49? 53'N. variation 20. 6'W. foundings 45 fathoms, 
 broken (Lefts, with fome ftoncs ; the Start Point bearing ENEfN. irtbe 
 
 9 or 10 leagues ; the diftance icon from the deck. The Start Point ENE. 
 the entrance of Plymouth Sound NhE. the Eddyftone MAV'W. diftance 3 o* 
 4 leagues; diftance off more about 6 leagues ; loundings 44 fathoms, fine 
 white land ; the variation 20? 6'\V. The high land of St. Alban's NEiE; 
 diftance 7 or 8 leagues, in 34 fathoms, coarfe white land, with gravel {tones : 
 variation 1 9? 20 \V. 
 
 Thefe observations were made in July, 1764. 
 
 By the above obfervations of the variation, you fee the gradual increafe of 
 the variation, coming into the Englifh channel. You may alfo obferve, that 
 the higheft variation in the Englifh channel was oft the Lizard ; and that it 
 decreafes as you run farther up. In regard to the foundings, the variety is fo 
 great that little can be depended thereon ; for you feldom have two cafts of the 
 lead alike; the depth of water only, is to be depended on, with this general 
 rule ; that to the Southward of the parallel toward Ufhant, and on the Coaft: 
 of France, the water is deeper and the foundings coarfer, than on the Englifh 
 coaft, being moftly gravel, with pebble ftones ; ifanyfand, it will be vcrv 
 coarfe : whereas on the Englifh coaft, toward Scillv, 20 leagues to the weft- 
 ward of it, 9 or To leagues to the fouthward thereof, and 15 leagues to the 
 eaftward of it, the foundings are white, grey, or brown land, Ibmetimes 
 mixed with broken lhells and Hake's teeth. In the parallel of latitude, from 
 49? 20' to 49? 3o'N. your foundings will, in general, be fine white or grey 
 land, fometimes brown land. 
 
 CCCVI. Dierctions to be obferved, coming into the English Channel. 
 
 By the fame. 
 
 The proper parallel of latitude to keep in, to fteer to the eaftward, for the 
 entrance of the channel, is from 49? 20' to 49? 3o'N. and when you have 
 encreafed the variation in that parallel to 19? or i9?lW, you will have found- 
 ings at 95 or 100 fathoms water, 46 or 50 leagues to the weft ward of Scilly. 
 Steer to the eaftward in the aforefaid parallel of latitude, till you fhoalen the 
 water to 65 fathoms, when you may > be fure Scilly bears north of you, 
 diftance about 9 leagues. Still direct your courfe to the eaftward, fo as to 
 
 Q^cj q 2 kee^
 
 452 -A Nezv Directory for the East-Indies. 
 
 keep in the fame parallel latitude, or 49? 3o'N. till you fhoalcn the water to 
 $5 fathoms ; you may then with great (afety fleer in NEbE. in order to make 
 the Lizard, which you will get fight of, by fleering fo 3 or 4 leagues ; you 
 will then fee the Lizard bearing NNE. or thereabout of you, diflance 7 or 8 
 leagues. 
 
 I would recommend it as a general rule for all fhips coming into the 
 channel, to make the land about the Lizard, it being the propereil place for 
 a land-fall ; and then, if thick, hazy, or bad weather come on, you know 
 where you are, and what courfe to fleer. I have known fhips neglect 
 making the Lizard running up the channel a great way without feeing the 
 land; they have then met with hazy and bad weather, which has expofed 
 them to much danger : they then could not make the land, on account 
 of the thick, hazy, weather, and have been much puzzled to know how 
 far they had got up the channel ; nor have they been certain which 
 fide of the channel they were upon. In this flate of fear and confufion, 
 I have known a fhip fleer a courfe (to avoid the dangers on the Coafl of 
 England) which ran it afhore on the Coafl of France, where they were 
 loft; whereas, if they had made the Lizard, they would have had a fhoit 
 departure, and could have determined, w r ith great certainty, where they were 
 v\ hen fb taken in hazy or bad weather. 
 
 In all the praclice of navigation fhort departures are certainly the befF ; 
 but abfblutely neceflary in narrow feas like the Englifh Channel : and as 
 
 b.ts are placed on the Lizard, a fhip may with great fafety make it in the 
 night as Well as the day : the light {landing fo high, that it may be fecn at 
 a great diflance, the Lizard Point being a bold land, and fleep to. 
 
 The Lizard bearing from NbW. to NbE. diflance 3 leagues, you will 
 
 have .' 5 fathoms water, coarfe gravel, flones, and fhells, and pieces of 
 
 : the Lizard bearing north, diflance 2 leagues, you will have 45 fathoms, 
 
 pebble frones, and fcollop fhells ; which fhews there is no danger in 
 
 running for this land, night or day. 
 
 I would recommend it to all thofe who are defirous of being well 
 acquainted with the channel, to keep their lead conflantly going, when .the 
 wind and weather will permit them fo to do ; and frequently to fet the bear- 
 1 . js of the land, at leall every two hours : by this they I better acquainted 
 
 ,vith the foundings of all the head-lands, and off the coafl between them at 
 i.f. difrahces from the land. This will give them a more perfeft know- 
 ledge
 
 Directions to be cbferved, coming into the English Channel. 453 
 
 ledge of the channel : and they then will not be fo at a lofs to know where they 
 are in ha/y weather, or the night-time; tilting care to note them down in 
 their log-book. By this they will not only gain experience themfclvcs, but will 
 alio be inftructive to others. 
 
 I have been informed by perfons of ftndoubted veracity, that they have 
 known thofe (who having been entrufted with the command of mips of great 
 confequence) have fteercd the courfe up channel by the draught of the channel, 
 without allowing the variation ; and that they have infilled upon it, the variation 
 was allowed in the draught : by this they have run into great danger, and 
 narrowly elcaped being loft : 
 
 In re f peel to the allowances to be made for the variation, coming into the 
 channel, and in the channel, pleafe to obferve what follows. From 20 
 leagues to the wefhvard of Scilly, at Scilly, and as far to the ea ft ward of the 
 Lizard, you cannot allow lefs than 2 points, W. variation ; and from the 
 Lizard, all the way up channel, to the South Foreland, 1 1 of a point W. 
 variation. 
 
 From the Lizard di recTt your courfe up the channel, allowing the variation in 
 the courfe. Between the Lizard and the Start vou will have foundings, in the 
 fair way, from 45 to 42 fithoms ; keep without 40 fathoms, and you need fear 
 no danger from the Eddyftone. There are 39 fathoms water in pairing by the 
 Eddyftone, within 3 miles of it ; when it bears NbW. N. and NbE. the fame 
 diftance,_ and depth of water. From the Start to the Ifle of Wight, you will 
 have foundings, in the fair way, from 35 fithoms, a little to the eaftward of 
 the Start to 32 fathoms ; Portland bearing N. 4 leagues. From Portland to 
 Pcvcrel Point, and to the Needles, you will have from 28 to 30 fathoms in the 
 fair way, or 4 or 5 leagues off" fhore. Keep without 28 fathoms, and you need 
 not fear the in-draught of the channel of the Needles. 
 
 You may pafs by the Ifle of Wight in from 25 to 30 fathoms ; diftance off it 
 from 3 to 5 leagues. Between the Ifle of Wight and Beachy Head, you will 
 have foundings, in the fair way, from 30 to 22 fathoms. Keep without 20 
 fathoms, and you need fear no danger from the Overs ; but come no nearer 
 than 18 fathoms, night or day. Off" Beachy Head, and between that and 
 Fair Lee, you have 21 and 22 fathoms, between 3 or 4 leagues off" fhore ; and 
 from 50 to 3$ fathoms, 6 or 7 leagues off" fhore. 
 
 The channel is certainly a dangerous navigation in the winter-time : here you 
 have hard ftorms, fh >rt la ys, and very long dark nights ; the weather frequently 
 foggy, or very hazy, for, feveral days together, fo that you cannot fee the land. 
 
 It
 
 454 -A A 7 «w Directory for the East -Indies. 
 
 It is then the ingenious navigator's art, {kill, and experience, are put to the 
 trial; it is then he wants to know, by his foundings, whereabout he is; bow 
 far he has got up or down the channel ; which tide be is upon ; how far off the 
 more he' is by the foundings, how the tides fet, and the time of their flowing, 
 that he may take all advantages of them, by {banding on that tack whereby 
 lie can take the tide under the lee-bow, his only afllftance to help him off the 
 lee-fhore. And when the weather clears up, that he can fee the land, with 
 perhaps an harbour juft under his lee, and night coming on, it is then he {lands 
 in. need of a particular defcription. of that harbour, with proper directions for 
 failing into it. 
 
 APPENDIX
 
 ( 455 ) 
 
 E N D I X 
 
 A Short Account of a Passage from China, hate in the Seafon, Down the 
 China Seas, through the South f. rn Nat una Islands, along the Coajl of 
 Borneo, through the Straits o/Billitton or (Clements Straits) to the 
 Straits of Sunda. By Air. G. Robertson. 
 
 E I N G in the fleet compofed of the following fliips, the Glatton, Pigot, 
 Lord Holland, Earl of Mansfield and Vanfittart, under the command of Captain 
 John Clements, on the 25th of April 1781, left China, and took departure 
 from the Grand Ladrone, allowing its latitude 21? 57.N. On the third day's 
 run, at noon, ih latitude 15? 42', (truck foundings on the Macclesfield Bank 
 35 fathoms, having then made 1? 05' Eaflr longitude by account from the 
 Grand Ladrone, and by Captain Frafer's Time-keeper 1? 08 E. which muif. be 
 very near the truth in fo fliort a time. I have examined many journals, ' and 
 find them all much the fame ; the Princefs Royal at the end of the fecond day's 
 run (Captain Frafer's journal) makes exactly 1? 05 .E. to foundings in latitude 
 15? 56 N. The bearings from the Grand Ladrone are S. 10? E. 370 miles to 
 where we had ground. With a fteady pleafant breeze, moftly from the ENE. 
 to NE. fleered d- >wn from the Bank a S\V. by S. courie to the latitude of 1 2?N. 
 longitude 1? 46 W. of Ladrone, then kept down a S. by W. courfe until we got 
 foundings, 1 20 fathoms grey faud, our Ltitude then 6? 42'N. and longitude 
 3? 30'W. of Ladrone. In latitude 8? our men oon failed, had then light winds, 
 variable, and calms, which made it very tedious in getting to the f uthward ; 
 our foundings gradually decreafirig to- 58 fathoms, when we got fight of the 
 northernmoft" of the Grand Natuna Iflands, bearing from S. to SSW. about 10 
 leagues; our latitude then 4? 47'N. The Great Natuna is very high land, 
 rifing to the appearance of a circular mountain in the middle, and is the eaftern- 
 mofl. land ; I think it may be fieen n arlj 15 or 16 leagues : the other iflands 
 appeared rather long and flat. By manj :n of and S and » 
 
 ^nd ■>< , particularly by Captain Fraler in the Mansfield, find the longitude of the 
 
 caftan
 
 456 APPENDIX. 
 
 eaftern part of Grand Natuna Ifland to be 5? 36'W. of Grand Lad rone ; latitude 
 of the middle of it nearly 4? 6'N. From 27 miles Eaft of Grand Natuna fleered 
 South bv compais, and got fight of High IJImd, one of the Southern Natunas, 
 bearing SSW. 9 leagues, our latitude 2? 59 N. By Timekeeper made 78 miles 
 eafting from Grand Natuna when we law High Ifland, which is 51 miles more 
 eafterly than account gives in two days, and which places High Ifland on the 
 chart in its true pofition from the Grand Natuna, 71 miles eaft: of it, and the 
 northernmoft p nnt c f Piatt, which is the northernmoft of the Southern Natuna 
 Iflands in latitude 3? 2'N. and 56 miles Eaft of it, a difference of 44 miles of 
 calling from their lituation on Mr. Dalrymple's Chart ; confequently that error 
 throws the coaft of Borneo upon his Chart all that quantity too far weft ward, 
 and which the fleet proved was the cafe in their paflage along its coaft Found, 
 whenever we had occafion to 4-^, after leaving the Grand Natuna until we got 
 amongft the Southern Natuna Iflands, ftrong eafterly currents, a knot and 
 half per hour when ftrongeft, which accounts clearly for the error of the 
 reckoning in two days, and (hews the utility and accuracy of the Tvu '-keeper, 
 which, I muft oblerve, when going well, is of the greateft ule imaginable in 
 fuch cafes of fco.rt dijiances and Jlrong currents', on the 25th of May we got 
 up to the North point of Piatt, the northernmoft of the Southern Natuna Iflands, 
 and <f-}-d in 1 8 fathoms, fmall gravel and land, from which ftation I b. gun 
 the Chart of the Iflands along the Weft Coaft of Borneo, in doing which I v 
 greatly aflifted by the various cro Is bearings of the different (hips of the fleet. 
 Views of all the Iflands are engraved on the fame plate, which will be found of 
 
 great ule. 
 
 o 
 
 The paflage thron gh between the high and low group of Southern Natuna Iflands 
 xifiije, clear, and wide ; towards the northernmoft and Flat group, it : rid 
 
 rocky for three or four mile - fihore : the flioal the Pigot had near run upon 
 is dangerous, but it is -quite out of the way in going the dire ■ , 
 TJland', zndSrpaia, vvhich is the_/ . ?, and h; ,1 
 
 of that name in the China Seas, forms the South fide of the paflage, ti. 
 fteep to. The fleet's track down Jthe Coaft of Borneo, : r ig clear 
 
 tliefe iflinds, was very tedious, owing to th hi ; . which continually 
 
 fets to the NW. and the wind, which hung dead at t>E. caufed their 
 being the whole mouth of June in getting down to the Iflands of Carimat a a 
 SoOroutou, although the diftance is not quite tw good days 1 un I was induced 
 to make this Chart, fro .1 t! . very fine opportunity there was in felting 
 
 ifla -I
 
 A P P E N D I X. 457 
 
 ifland from in fight of the other all the way down the coaft, having a noon 
 latitude nearly a-breaft of each of the iflands, (o that all their fituations are 
 pietty exacl ; their names are inferted on the Chart. 
 
 The fleet's intended route, after getting to Carimatta, was to have gone the 
 pajfagc of that ?iame, and then through Bally Straits; but found, when we 
 got to thefe iflands, it was totally impoflible to get the leaft forward to the 
 South-eaftward. After laying a week at <f->, without any profpect of a change, 
 the commanders agreed to pufli for the Straits between Billitton and Banca, 
 which we gained on the 4th of July, and cj-^ed in 14 fathoms mud, off the 
 pitch of North Weft Ifland. In leaving the Iflands Carimatta and Souroutou 
 nine leagues to the eaftward, a SSW. courfe will bring in with North Weft. 
 Itland, which is the outermoft of a clufter* of iflands off the NW. point of 
 Billitton ; in clear weather, both lands may be feen from the maft-head at the 
 fame time, at lead there will be but few hours fail from fight of one to the 
 other ; the high land of Billitton is to be feen from deck eight or nine leagues, 
 and appears like two hummocks ; a firft fight view on the plate of views fhews 
 its appearance. The North coaft of Billitton is very rugged, with many fmail 
 rocks above and under water at a confiderable diftance from the fhore ; if I may 
 judge from the weftern fide, it is but a dangerous coaft to approach too near all 
 round. — From North Weft Ifland run in for Billitton, or Treacherous Bay, 
 where, from its fine appearance, judged the fleet would find refrefhments, and 
 water to fill up their ftock, and by that means be enabled to run throuah the 
 Straits of Sunda, without flopping ; but, unfortunately, in running in with a 
 fine breeze and remarkably fmooth water, the Earl of Mansfield ftruck, and 
 ftuck faft upon a fmall rock, with good foundings all round, fiuch as eight, 
 nine, and ten fathoms fand, clofe to it ; moft of the fleet being within her at 
 the time, immediately <f-}ed ; thefhip got off in about an hour, without dam; 1 - . 
 Next day lent a boat from each fihip to found the bay, afterwards to go on ihore 
 in queft of frefh water. Upon their return they reported tire lay all over foul 
 and full of rocks, and that they could find no water. Some of the boats went 
 a great way up Salt-water River, where they faw a i'ew wretched fifliermen 
 and three or four milerable huts. Finding nothing could be done here, at day- 
 light, 6th of July, the Commodore made the fignal for departure : the fhips all 
 fleered out of the bay much the fame way they came in ; however, the Pigot 
 happened to ftick faft upon another fmall rock, and with fome difficulty got 
 off, being ebb-tide when fhe got on ; . at the lame time law a reef to the north- 
 ward of her fhewing their heads above water, which we muft have palled vtry 
 
 R r r clofe
 
 453 APPENDIX. 
 
 clofe to in coming hi, without perceiving any mark of rippling, owing to the 
 very fmoothnefs of the water. The Vanfittart at <f-^ in the center of the reef 
 where the mips ftruck was in latitude 2? 4FS. hearings as follows : North 
 Weft Ifland N. 20? E. ; Billitton from N. 40? E. to S. 2?W. ; extremes of 
 Long Ifland, from S. ij?W. to S. 5o?W ; Galper Ifland N. 6;?W. ; diftance 
 from North Weft Ifland fix or feven miles, and about four or five miles off the 
 neareft Billitton fhore. After what has been laid I have little need to caution, 
 by no means to come far into Treacherous Bay. 
 
 If coming from the northward and eaftward, I mean from the Ifland Carimatta 
 or Coaft of Romeo, or going to the northward', by that route, of all the different 
 pafiages between Middle and Long Ifland, that the fleet came through is by 
 far the bed and wideft, and what I would advife fhips to take, in pieference to 
 any other, between Billitton and Banca ; the paflage is between North and 
 South Iflands on one hand, and Saddle Ifland, which forms an appearance of a 
 faddle both when to the northward and louthward of it, on the other. I have 
 given very particular Views upon a feparate fheet of the whole range of iflands 
 when to the northward and louthward of them, which will be found very uleiul. 
 The beft track to keep is mid-channel, or nearly fo, between the aforeiaid 
 iflands, in order to avoid a funken rock, which is about the fize of two long- 
 boats, on which there is only one half fathom, and no appearance of danger, 
 five fathom along-fide of it, and eight, nine, and ten fathoms land all round. 
 Saddle Ifland bears from it SbWlW. diftance three or four miles : North Ifland 
 EbN. three or four miles; Barn Ifland WbS. and the South point of Middle 
 Ifland WNW. It lies nearly North from the reef that extends a mile and half 
 to the Ei.ft of Saddle Ifland ; to the weft ward of that reef there feemed deep 
 v. ater between the ifland and it. Know of no other danger in this track from 
 Treacherous Bay, it having been well explored by the boats of the. fleet. From 
 Saddle ifland fleer down for the two fmall iflands called Breaker Iflands in the 
 the Chart (by fome called Shoal Water Ifland) keeping to the weft ward of 
 them ; they are diftant from Saddle Ifland about fix or feven leagues, and bear 
 neatly South from it. Met with nothing particular in our run to the 
 fouthward, except the two fhoals, which are to the louthward of Bieaker 
 Ifland, on the lbuthernmoft of which is a fmall lpot of dry white fand, 
 diftant nearly ten miles from the ifland ; make no doubt but thev are the fbuth- 
 einmoft flioals that lurrcund Billitton on that fide. Found all along good regular 
 foundings, eight fathom> was the leaft water when' to the SW. of the fouthern- 
 moft ihoai, which b..nk runs acrofs to th. N ,V. with eight and feven fathoms 
 
 upon
 
 APPENDIX. 4?9 
 
 upon it, find and ouze, until it joins Foul Point Bank, to the fouthward of 
 Banca ; which may be obferved upon the Chart by the foundings of the different 
 fhips tracks; it then gradually deepens to 13 fathoms, to within fight of the 
 North Watcher, whole latitude I make 5? 1 zY South, bearing from Breaker 
 IJland S. 24?W. 124 miles : found the current to fet to the NW. and S\V. four 
 fathoms per hour; but there L> no certainty, or rule to go by, as to its ftrength 
 or exadT: drift in thefe particular parts. The Clements Straits, Middle and 
 Gafper IJlands, and all to the eafhvard of them, are laid down principally from 
 my own obfervations on the fpot, except the fmall alteration of the pofition of 
 the fhoal between Middle Ifland and the Small Sandy Beach Ifland, which is 
 now placed in the Chart as it really lies, from the obfervations of Captains 
 Cooper, Eafterbrooke, and Huddart, who palled on different fides of it. Captain 
 Cooper, in going out, 1785, followed a Portuguefe to the Weil of it ; and 
 Captain Eafterbrooke, in coming home, came the fame way ; Captain Huddart, 
 homeward, 1785, palled to the Eafr. It is a very narrow paflage, and con- 
 fequently a more dangerous one, although good foundings and deep water, 
 owing to the laid fhoal, on which the lea does not at all times break, and 
 which was the cafe when thefe (hips palled it ; but it broke very high when 
 the fleet palled, and, from where 1 took the bearings, feemed to block up 
 the whole paflage. I think, although thefe fhips have gone that way, it is by 
 no means to be preferred. The two fmall fhoals to the NE. and SE. of 
 Middle Ifland were not {een to break, but they certainly encreafe the number of 
 dangers in that track. Captain Eafterbrooke obferves, the fouth eafternmoft or 
 fmall fhoal is in one with Gafper Ifland, bearing NiW ; and he advifes 
 keeping the large or middle fhoal o:i board, in preference of being too near 
 the fmall ones, which cannot at all times be lb well difcovered as the large 
 one, which when it don't break fhews a ftrong rippling and has but a few 
 feet water on it. " Captain Huddart obferves, in his remark of that pafljao , 
 " there are two dangerous (hoals to the eaftward of Middle Ifland, and fcarce 
 " two miles afunder, which renders it more difficult : I palled between them in 
 li 1 788, but to the eafhvard of both in 1 785, which paflage 1 fliould always prefer 
 " as the fafeft, on account of the ftrong currents that fet athwart to the fouth- 
 " eaftward during the NE. monfoon, fometimes above three knots per hour." 
 
 Having finished my remarks with refpecT: to Clement's Straits, will now 
 give a fhort account of the materials from which 1 was enabled to lay down 
 the Gafper Pajfage ; it is formed by the ifland of Banca to the Weft, and 
 Middle Ifland to the Eait. The Macclesfield, in the year 1702; Sulivan, 
 
 R r r 2 December
 
 4 6o APPENDIX. 
 
 December 1784; Ponfborneand Hawke, January, 1785 ; like wife the London, 
 in 1787; all pafied through them, and from their obfervations and journals I 
 made the draught. 'They feem by far the molt eligible for lliips coming from the 
 iilands of Pulo Auro, and to deferve the preference to that of Banca at any feqfon 
 of the year, as there is deep water, a clear paflage, and a fhorter diltance ; 
 whereas, in the Straits of Banca, although the dangers are pretty well deter- 
 mined, yet mips very often get a-ground in coming through, particularly in the 
 Lucepara part of the paflage ; which is both ihoal and narrow. Since my 
 publication of the Gafper Straits there has been a furvey taken of them and the 
 North Coaft of Banka, by Capt. Leftock Wilfon of the Vanfittart, who oblig- 
 ingly gave me a copy of his obfervations, from which I have corrected that part 
 of the Chart in the prefent edition, at the fame time have added from original 
 journals all the other dangers hitherto known. 
 
 RzMAR&sfor Gasper Passage. 
 
 If coming from the northward or Auro Iflands with an intent of paffing 
 through the Gafper Straits, get fight of Pulo Toty, whofe latitude is 58'S. pafs 
 it to the Eaft, and {leer down for Gafper Ifland, taking care not to come 
 nearer to the Banka more than 16 fathoms. Gafper bears from Pulo Toty SE. 
 diftance about 40 leagues, the fair way, foundings between them is 17 and iS 
 fathoms, which is a very good guide to go by at night or in thick hazy weather, 
 however I would advife by no means to come nearer Gafper in the dark than 7 
 leagues, which will keep you perfectly clear of the moals to the northward of 
 it, on which the Belvidere and Warren Haftings ftruck. 
 
 The Belvidere's fhoal was firft feen by the Sulivan, Hawke and Ponfborne, 
 1784, 1785, Gafper Ifland bears from it SSE. 4 or 5 leagues, and the NE. 
 point of Banka SbWIW. diftance about 7 leagues. 
 
 The Warren Haftings Shoal was firft feen by the Hawke, 1785, the bearings 
 of the land from where the Haftings ftruck, is, viz. The High Land on Banka 
 S?.^8'W- extiemes of ditto from S22?W. to S?62'W. the center of Gafper Ifland 
 S7o'E. Tree Ifland Si7?E. diftance from it about 8 or 9 mile. They found 
 it to extend North and South about 2 miles, and were on fhore about the middle 
 of it 
 
 The Belvidere's Shoal and this were both feen to Break, when the Hawke 
 and Poniborne pafled, but fuppofe they were not in that ftate when the above 
 (hips grounded ; thele moal.-> are in general cord rock and Jieep too. Having 
 
 got
 
 APPENDIX. 461 
 
 got fight of Gafper Ifland fleer down for it, keeping it to the eafhvard of SSE. 
 to avoid the Belvidere's fhoal, go between it and Tree Ifland, taking care to avoid 
 alfo the Warren Haftings Shoal, or pais Tree Ifland to the Weft, as occafion 
 offers, there is 20 fathoms to the Weft of ir, and I fliould think it is the beft 
 track, as both the Warren Haftings and Belvidere's Shoals are in that cafe left 
 on the Eaft, whereas in going between the Illands you have alio to go between 
 the Sands, which are now placed on the Chart in their true pofition, and will 
 fhew the courle that ought to be taken. 
 
 Tree Ifland has a remarkable tuft of trees on it, and appears at a diftance 
 like a fhip under fail. After paffing Gafper and Middle Ifland, it makes its 
 appearance, which fteer down for, keeping to the Weft of it ; it is fteep too, 
 with a fhoal rutting out a little from oil the N. and S. points : there is no 
 danger in this paflage, keeping any way within the tracks upon the Chart, or 
 not getting within the points of Banca to the weft ward, as it fhoalens very 
 faff, with great overfalls in going into the bay formed by Banca, according 
 to the Macclesfield's account, 1702, who lent her boats in to found, alio 
 by the fhip Carnatic's journal, 1787, which was the 'laft fhip that paffed 
 through when thele Charts were firfi publifhed with the following bearings: 
 that fhip had eight 'fathom? : the ME. point of Banka NNWAV. diftance 
 three or four miles; high land Weft; the SE. 'point, and which is the 
 eaiternmoft extremity of Banca, S §E. ; Middle Ifland from SE. to SSEfE. 
 four or five leagues ; and Ga par Ifland NE|N. — The depth through in 
 Mid-Channel is 17 and 18 fathoms, deepening to 24 fathoms, when the 
 S. point ot Middle Ifland bears ESE. and then gradually fhoalens again to 
 12, 11, and 10 fathoms when to the fouthward of the South Point of Banka. 
 It will be proper to obferve, in palling thefe ftraits, that Middle or Salt 
 Ifland ought to be kept neareft on board, efpecklly in the eafterly monfbon, 
 to avoid falling to the weftward, when to the fouthward of the SE. or what 
 is called by fome Rocky Point of Banka, as the bank which ftretches for 
 many leagues to the fouthward of it, is all over foul with dangerous and 
 fudden overfills ; I have inferted the London's track home from Capt. 
 Eafterbrook's journal and obiervations, in order to fhew the Eaftern edge of 
 the bank to the Southward of the SE point of Banka. That fhip lay a 
 night at <+-> upon the extream eaftern edge of it, in 7 fathoms hard ground, 
 although t! ey had fhoal water and fudden overfalls, could fee no broken water, 
 to the riorthweftward. 
 
 Remarks
 
 462 APPENDIX. 
 
 Remarks after Pajing the SE. Point of Bank a, Sailing to the 
 
 Southward. 
 
 Having got to the fouthward of Middle Ifland, pafs the SE. point of Banka 
 at a moderate diflance, and keep a foutherly courie, fo as not to get to the 
 weftward of the SE. point of Banka, until you loofe fight of the low land 
 of the Coaft which joins the hummocks, that is to fay, when the South 
 Coaft of Banka appears like feparate little iflands, you are then far enough to 
 the fouthward, and may haul as much wefterly as neceffary. In the next 
 place oreat care muft be taken to avoid the Vaniittart's fhoal, which 
 lies to the eaftward of this track and to the fouthward of Middle Ifland. 
 To keep clear of this fhoal, fteer a courfe fo as to keep Middle Ifland 
 always a little to the eaftward of north, which will carry you wide of it 
 to the weftward. In coming by the Clement's Straits from the pafiage 
 between Saddle and South Iflands, fleer down for Shoal Water Ifland, it is 
 then paffed to the eaft. The bearings of this dangerous fhoal is as follows: 
 The peak of Saddle Ifland in one with the center of the Shoal N28?E. 
 at fame time Shoal Water Ijland, S43°E. By another bearing, the iouthweff. 
 extream of it bears in one with the peak of Saddle Ifland N 33? 15'E. 
 Shoal Water Ifland S 45? 50'' E. By thefe crofs bearings it lies fouth a little 
 wefterly from Sandy Ifland, and in latitude, according to Capt. Cumming, 
 3? 12'S. Having pafled thefe dangers, a SSW. courie made good, will bring 
 vou up to the Brothers, the northernmoft of which lies in latitude <;? 09/S. 
 and bears from Middle Ifland S23?W. about 50 leagues. Know of no other 
 dangers in thefe tracks, i'o that the fame caution is neceffary to be obferved in 
 going to the northward as here defcribed in failing from the northward. 
 
 In the General Chart I have connected the whole of thefe iflands, ivith 
 the continuation of all the tracks to the North Watcher, carefully laying down 
 the foundings ; Pulo Docan is placed from Toty as it really bears ; Lingin, 
 Pulo Taya, and the Seven Iflands, are principally placed from M. DWpu.-, ; 
 the foundings are entirely from the journals and obfervations communicated 
 to me by the feveral commanders who have gone that way, and very different 
 from what are laid down in former Charts ; the outline of the Straits of Banca 
 is mofrly taken from the la ft edition of D'Apres ; the foundings are entirely 
 from journals of the Eaft India Captains, particularly from two of Capt in 
 Frafer's, in the Princefs Royal and Earl Mansfield; the North Watcher, 
 Weftern Ifland, and the wefternmofl of the Thoufaiidlflandf, are from my own, 
 
 corroborated
 
 APPENDIX. 463 
 
 eorroberatcd with Captain Frafer's obfervaUons ; the fhoals about thefe iflands 
 are exactly placed as they hear from the refpective iflands, from a printed 
 account which I received from Mr. Dairy mple ; their fituatinns I have made 
 a memorandum of upon the Chart, likewife a fhort remark for entering the 
 Straits of Banca from the northward, in cafe the directions for thefe ftraits 
 mould not be at hand. The India Directory, to my own knowledge, gives 
 the bed inftruclion pofiible for the Lucepara part of the paffage, fo that there 
 needs no repetition or alteration ; the bank to the northward of Lucepara is ■ 
 laid down with the Bridge-water's bearings, when aground, fuppofing 
 it to be the outer edge of the bank ; to the eaflward of Lucepara I have no 
 account, all the foundings from thence to North Ifland are entirely from the 
 bi.-fl obfervations and journals of fhips that came that way, whole names 
 may be referred to upon the Chart. The Shabander Bank is from D'Apres ; 
 I never could find any body who had been to the wefhvard of it, fo have 
 pricked a line from it to the Sumatra more. I have a manufcript Chart which 
 fhews good foundings to the wefhvard, but I do not know the authority. 
 'I "here is a reef runs out from North to South of the Brothers, about a quarter 
 of a mile each way ; between them (the Brothers) there is a paflage of nine 
 and 10 fathoms, from Captain Scott of the Neptune's authority, who had his 
 boat in founding; either fide of the Brothers may be pafled, but it Teems the 
 Weft fide is in general preferred, on account of the Dolphin Rock which lays 
 to the SSE. of it. North Ifland is placed in 5? 4i'S. its true latitude, very 
 different from the old Charts, which make it a great deal more to the northward; 
 St. Nicholas Point is placed accordingly from North Ifland. From St. Nicholas 
 Point to Batavia I have laid down the coaft from a very accurate Dutch 
 manufcript Chart upon a very large fcale, which I procured when at Batavia 
 in the Vanfittart. 1 have not fhewn all the different fhoals. particularly., but 
 have pricked from the outer eJgeof the one to the other, in the fame manner 
 as 1 have done the extent of the fhoals off the mouths of Paleimbang River 
 in the Straits of Banca. As that part of the Chart is but of little confequence, 
 otherwife than fhewing the relative fituation of the whole, I have not confuted 
 it with more foundings than jufr, the edge of the banks and the Vanfittart / s 
 track, but have been very •particular and exact, in all the iflands and beacons: 
 .the South Watcher is placed from that Chart. 
 
 The Five Fathom Bank between Lucepara and the Brothers, By Mr. 
 Dalrymple's account, lies SSE. 30 miles from Lucepara ; Captain Frafer in 
 
 going
 
 464 APPENDIX. 
 
 going out 1778 paffed the tail of it in feven fathoms fine fand, and had imme- 
 diately again deep water, 14 fathoms and mud. His run to making Lucepara 
 agrees exadlly with Mr. Dalrymple. 
 
 Courfe from Gafper Ifland to mid-channel of Pulo Auro is NbWjAV ; 
 regular foundings from 20 to 28 fathoms ; the longitude of Monopin Hill 
 from fatisfa&ory obfervations made by Capt. Frazer, when in the Princefs Royal 
 chief officer, is as follows 
 
 5 fights of Aldebaran, Weft of 5 "] makes it 105? 06' mean, Eaft of 
 
 5 ditto of Arietes, Weft of ^ I Greenwich, my adopted longitude. 
 
 5 ditto of Pollux, Eaft of j J 
 
 The meridian lines upon the Chart are drawn from the longitude of Bata- 
 via, allowing it 106? 5i'E. from Greenwich, I have only now to add, that 
 the general pofition of the whole upon the Chart, with refpecl: to the longi- 
 tude, is as near the truth as required. 
 
 As the General Chart includes Batavia, I think it juft neceffary to mention 
 a few remarks, which I made on my laft voyage in the Vanlittart to that place. 
 The courfe from off Bantam Point is nearly E;S. to the Great Cambuys Ifland, 
 which is immediately known by a pro ligious large tree above all the others, 
 nearly on the middle of the ifland. Between it and the Man-eaters Ifland, 
 is the pqjjage of 31 or 4 miles wide. From the beacon of the Cambuys reef 
 to the buoy of Man-eaters fhoal, which, according to the Dutch, is placed 
 in four fathoms on the outer edge of the bank, it is a very hard fand, and 
 dangerous to get aground upon. Keep if mile to the northward of Man-eaters 
 Ifland, and you are then in the fair way ; and when it bears WSW. are then 
 clear of all danger, and may haul up for the Little Cambuys Ifland, which 
 has Iikewife a fhoal to the WSW. of it with a beacon ; the ifland itfelf, and 
 the fhoal that runs from itto the eafhvard are both fteep to, having in the Vanfittart 
 paffed them at a quarter of a mile diftance with 10 and n fathoms water. 
 From this ifland the Great or Edam Paflage is generally prefered by unacquainted 
 people ; but the Dutch feem to like the narrow or inner paffage, formed by 
 Ontcng Java Point on one hand, and Middleburgh and Amfterdam Iflands on 
 the other ; the marks when I was there feemed well pointed out, having a 
 buoy or beacon upon every thing that could pollibly bring up a (hip, through- 
 out every track into the roads : the Dutch fay this narrow paffage is the beft 
 way ; but cannot fpeak from experience, having never gone it. From the 
 Little Cambuys keep to the eaft ward for the Ifland Edam ; when within a 
 mile of it, fleer down to the fouthward, the paffage being then open; leave 
 
 I lorn
 
 APPENDIX, 465 
 
 Horn Ifland to the {larboard hand, which will bring In to Batavia Road3 where 
 you may cf^ in what water you pleafe. I rauft obferve, no (hips moor, as 
 the °f-^ is immediately buried in the mud. 
 
 Strait of Allass; By Mr. Robertson in the Vansittart, 1780. 
 
 This Jlrait extends 16 leagues NNE. and SSW ; trip Ifland Sumbawa, on 
 the Eajl, is very high and rugged : the inland hills covered with wood. Its 
 SW. point which makes the South entrance of the f rait extends about 4 or 41 
 leagues farther to the South, than the SE. point of Lombock, which is mode- 
 rately high, with white cliffs- along its- South coajl for a great way to the weft- 
 ward ; the point itfelf very much refembling the South Foreland. 
 
 In corning into this Jlrait from the fouthward it is beft to keep neareft the 
 Lombock fore, where you will fooner get into foundings, and much better <-\^ 
 ground, than on the Sumbawa fore, which we found rock/, and fieep too, all 
 through the Jl 'rait. 
 
 When the SE. point of Lombock bears WN W. and the SW. point of Sum? 
 bawa SEbS. you will then have ground .between 64 and 70 fathoms, coarfe 
 find and coral, diftance off the Lombock fore z\ or 3 miles : where in cafe of 
 its falling calm, or the tide fetting againfr. you, you may come to, with a hedge 
 or light 4-}, very fine holding ground. There are foundings a little farther to 
 the fouthward, and more over on the Sumbawa fljorc, but very deep water, 
 80 and 90 fathoms rocky bottom 
 
 There lies off the pitch of the point of Lombock a fmall rock above water, not 
 unlike a high canoe without a fail, diftant from the main about half a mile. 
 When you come to round the point, you will then open a very fi>ie deep bav, 
 which fhall call Lombock Bay ; in it good <f} ground and well fheltered from 
 the foutherly winds, which we found to blow very ftrong through the day, 
 fetting in with it a very ftrong tide. The fundings are regular, from 55 
 gradually decreafing, as you approach the North part of the bay and the L 
 bock fore, to any depth of water you pleafe ; fine f iff fiandy bottom, having- five 
 fathoms two cables length from the rocks, which extend along more for feveral 
 miles to thenorthwdrdzndjbuthwara'of Bally Town ; they are moitly dry at tow water, 
 and diftant from the beach about two cables length : in fide of them is a fine 
 'fandy bottom, where the large Malay prows laj' to take in their cargoes, chiefly 
 rice and paddy for the adjacent iflands. Saw a great many of the nutmeg and 
 cloves for fale, but I believe not of their own production. 
 
 S f f We
 
 466 APPENDIX. 
 
 We found the inhabitants a very friendly and fair dealing people, as any 
 ever met with in eaftern countries, or, indeed any where elfe. 
 
 Bally Town is delightfully fituated on the fide of the fmall river ; where 
 we watered, it being exceedingly convenient for that purpofe, having only 
 about a ioo yards to roll your calks to where they are filled ; your boat may 
 lav clofe to the beach, if flood-tide, abreaft of where you roll your calk to. 
 You muff, take care and get -without the reef before low-water, otherwife 
 mufl remain till quarter flood again, 
 
 The ebbing and flowing of the tide in fljore is regular, rifing in fpring tides 
 12 or 13 feet; high -water full and change, at half paft nine o'clock. 
 
 At th\s place were plentifully fupplied with every refreshment that is neceffary 
 after a long voyage, fuch as bullocks, buffaloes, goats, fowls, ducks, remarkable 
 flne rice, /ago-flour, &c. &c. Fruit of all forts exceedingly realonable ; bujj aloes 
 were four and five dollars, and bullocks feven. They are fond of red cloth, 
 mujkets, knives, &c. but will not barter their cattle for them : however, cheap 
 large cutlery is the beft and readieft way to procure Jowls, fluit, or any thing 
 in the fmall way. 
 
 In the South entrance of the fir ait the current or tide is very irregular, 
 both in refpeel to its courfe and times of fl'i/tiug ; it is, however, pretty 
 ftrong whichever way it lets, 2, 3, and 3! knots per hour when ftrongeft. 
 When you are fairly entered into the flrait, you have then a regular current 
 fetting NNE. and SSW. all through the flrait, but by far the ftrongeft to 
 the northward, and generally a great deal longer, than that which lets to 
 the fouthward. 
 
 The Peak of Lombock is fituated on the NE. part of the iflland ; it is 
 a very remarkable high double-peaked mountain, which may be feen at fea 
 2.1. or 2? leagues: when off the mouth of the Strait of Lombock fix or 
 leven leagues, it is then very plain to be feen topping over the weflern 
 high land of the if!-<ud. 
 
 Half way through this Strait of Allafs lies a low i/Iand, on the Lombock 
 fJjore, off which runs out a reef 'to the South-eaftward, about 1^ mile from 
 it : the flrait is narrowefl at this place, formed by a chiflcr of iflahds on 
 the Sumbawa ■ floor e, which project a good way out; they are 'fteep too, 
 -. id / rally liigh. In palling Rocky t/kind, cliftant z\ miles, had 36, 36, 
 ?-% 40, and 50 1 . and when a little to the* northward of it ; in more 
 
 loundings all through, on either Ihore, with ico fathoms line. ' 
 
 Know of no danger in this flrait, but what is perceptible ; (o that it is, 
 without doubt, the clearefl, fafleft, and befl paffage . fall thejlratts to the eaflward. 
 
 I be
 
 APPENDIX. 467 
 
 to 
 
 The following Account of Bom bay Island and Harbour is Extra 
 
 from Mr. John M'Cj.uer's Survey of the Coast oflnmA, Survey I 
 b\ Order of and at the Ex pence of the East India Company, in 
 1787 and 17S8. 
 
 Bombay Flag-Staff, from my beft Obfervations, Ives in Lat. 18? <f6'.N? 
 the Longitude not exactly determined. The IjLvid, by the Fort, is 
 near a nautic mile in breadth, and 6i from North to South. The 
 harbour is vuv commodious and iafe, and the foundings are regular, 
 except where the few dangers are, namely, the Middle Ground, Sunken- 
 Rock, North end of full Shoal, and the SW. prong of the Reefs near 
 thefe, the foundings give little or no warning. 
 
 The Tides are irregular, in the/2?/, and time of high water, at different 
 places in the harbour ; within the middle-ground it is high water at u. h 
 15." and at Ma < agon, or the upper part of the harbour, 30™ fooner ; 
 at the reef 45™ later. Where the Ships lye within the middle -ground, 
 the Tide runs ; NbE. and SbW ; up the harbour it is affedted by the 
 draught of Tannah Channel', and down it by Penn river, and Caranjar 
 Channel ; here, and off Tull fhoal, the Tides run nearly Eaft and Weft, 
 which circumflance proves of great advantage to fhips working out in 
 the Monfoon. Over, on the reef, for the frit quarter, the Tide fets 
 SWbW, but when the rocks appear, it fets more Southerly, or alon"- 
 with the direction of the reef; and the Flood in the opposite direction. 
 
 When the fun is to the Southward, or in the Months of December 
 and January, there is a difference of near two feet between the Day 
 and Night-Tides on the Springs, the Night-Tides being the higheit ; 
 but in the Months of June and July, the contrary is the cafe, which 
 is_ convenient for the work at the docks, as it is carried on at day-lio-ht 
 during the Monfoon weather. On moderate fprings there is °-enerally a 
 rife of 1 6 or 17 feet at the dock gates . 
 
 The Lighthouf (lands near the South extremity of Old Woman' sMand, 
 now called Cqllaba. It is near three nautic miles from Bombay Flag- 
 Staf, bearing from it S. 35? 30W; and S. 21? E. from Malabar Point. 
 This building is of a circular form, and has within it a winding flair to 
 go up to the top, where the light is, which muff be upwards of 150 
 feet from the horizon at high water, and may be fcen in clear weather 
 
 S s s 2 at
 
 4 6S APPENDIX. 
 
 at 7 leagues diftance, or in 20 fathoms water. A regular watch, night 
 and day, is kept here ; and it is fupported by the veflels which fail to 
 this Port, paying one rupee for every 10 tons burthen. 
 
 Dangers off The Point of Collaba, on which the Lighthouje ftands, is guarded on 
 all fides by an extenfive reef of rocks divided into prongs : the frji 
 and mnjl dangerous of which is the SW. then the SE. the JJghthoufe 
 Spit, and Ekphauta Spit. I think it will be mod: eligible to treat of 
 them feparately. 
 
 SW Prong. The SW. Prong lyes from the Lighthonfe S. 40? W. near %\ nautic 
 
 miles diftant, and is dry at low water near 100 yards from the South 
 end. It decreafes gradually from the Ifland to the SW. end of it. 
 A veflel ought never to approach fo near this danger, as to have a 
 hard caff upon it, nor come under 7 fethoms, at low water ; for, 
 from 6 fathoms, the fhip may be afhore before the lead can be hove 
 again. In the day time Mr. Nichelfons mark is a very good one, 
 keeping the Funnel hill touching the A T ? brow of Great Caranjar, 
 or that part of the hill E. \ N : If the Funnel is not perceivable, 
 do not lhut in a white building to the Northward of Malabar Point, 
 till the nob, or Weftern hummock, on Tull Point, is on between two 
 paps on the high land of 'Tull, then haul in for the SE. prong, 
 Eait or EbN. according to the time of tide. 
 
 SE. Prong. This is called the SE. Prong, but it is more of a round bank than 
 a prong. Here is little or no danger, as a veflel may fteer continually 
 by the foundings. In the ni^ht, after rounding the SW. Prong, ftand 
 in Eait. or EbN. till the Lighthonfe bears North, then endeavour to get 
 a hard caft upon the SE. Prong, which will direct you for the fwiken-roch 
 With the Lighthouje N. \ W. or NbW. and a hard call 6 or 6; fathoms, 
 ftand NEbN. with a food, and NEbE. with an ebb tide, which will 
 fetch near the buoy, or to the Eaflward of xhefuuken-rock, that bearing 
 E. 1 5? S. from the Lighthonfe. 
 
 Lighthoafe Small Veflels that with to come within the funken-rock, will, 
 
 fpit * by keeping the Ifland clofe, have overfalls of 2 and 3 fathoms upon 
 
 the Ltghthoufc-Spit, which bears nearly ESE. from the Lighihoufe ; but 
 if Mazagon 'wife is not brought further in upon the tvwu than the 
 Admiral's hoif, the dan-er is avoided, and thofe bearings will lead, 
 clear of all, within the funken-rock, 3 fathom's at- low water, foft 
 
 ground. 
 
 When
 
 APPENDIX. 469 
 
 wta When the Lighthoufe and higheft part of the Elephanta Ifland are in 
 
 one, then off the Elepbtmta-Spit, which bears VVSW from the Lighthoufe. 
 It is not very dangerous, as the foundings upon it decrcafc gradually ; 
 but 6 fathoms is clofc enough. This Spit is an excellent mark or guide 
 for the Reef in the night, coming from the Northward. After pairing 
 Malabar Point in 7 or 7' fathoms low water, keep along South or SbE. 
 till the Lighthoufe bears ENE ; with thefe bearings, and a hard call 
 upon the Spit, 6 or 6^- fathoms, lleer out South or SbW. to go clear 
 of the SW Protig, which will be done when the Lighthoufe is NEbN, 
 then haul in as before directed, Eall or EbN, till the Lighthoufe is 
 NiW. or NbW, then Hand for the buoy of the Sunken-rock. 
 
 de to To have a hard call upon the SE Prong (or round') is of the utmofl 
 
 confequence in rounding the Reej "in the night, becaufe it is a guide for 
 the Sun [en-rock ; and people, by not keeping the Reef clofe, get 
 over on the foul ground of Lull: here, from mid-channel to either fide, 
 aciofs the harbour, there is not a fathom difference, therefore it will 
 be neceflary to found the ground clofe, efpecially with a Wefterly wind 
 and flood tie. 
 
 pound The foul-groand off Lull, I may reckon the moll dangerous Shoal in 
 the harbour ; particularly when the Nob, or Outer Point, bears SE. with 
 thefe bearings the Shoal is fleep too from 6'- to 4 fathoms in one call. 
 I have known a Ihip's rudder to be unlhipped in 6| fathoms ; you ought, 
 therefore, never to lland nearer it than 7 fathoms in the Monloon; or the 
 the Well end of Butcher's Ifland touching the low hill at Lrombay ; or 
 Kennery SbW. Thefe marks are very well in clear weather, but in the 
 Monloon, the foundings and your own judgment are the only guides : 
 this being the cafe, the leadfman ought to be very careful in feeling the 
 
 ingout ground, whether hard- or loft. Ships turning out in the Monloon fetch 
 near this point the firfl board, and are often obliged to tack before the 4-^ 
 can be flowed : the 2d board will fetch the Prongs ; the 3d will clear 
 the dangerous part of Lull, or bring the Nob Eall, or even EbS. and the 
 4th board will clear all tie danger of the Reef It is reckoned bell not 
 to ftand oi\ the lail mentioned tack further than to bring the Lighthoufe 
 NE or NEbE, but work at the entrance of the harbour during the Ebb. 
 The Pilot generally takes his leave with Kennery Ifland SSE. or SEbS, 
 
 Har- 
 
 which is clear of the harbour, and all its dangers. 
 
 After
 
 47^ 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 After having cleared the harbour, the grand object is to gain an ojjlng, 
 To work for and to avoid o}-^iiig. To accompiiih tone, attention muft be paid to 
 the eariv the winds, and time of the feaibn. In the early months, the fqualls hang t 
 months of to the Southward of Weft ; in this cafe, I would keep in with the land 
 
 the moruoon. " * 
 
 during the ebb, for its affiftance to get to the Southward ail I could. 
 By being well to the Southward of the harbour, the next flood is fcarcely 
 felt, and if the wind will admit of a NbW, courfe, -;ood, I would ftand 
 off for four hours ; then tack : In coming in with the land again the ebb 
 would be made, and probably would admit of ftanding on, which I fhould 
 do if I continued the fame depth of water, and the next flood would 
 gain a lufficient offing, 30 or 35 fathoms, and frill be to the Southward 
 of Bombay, hi the later months, I would a£t differently to what I have 
 laid above. 
 To work for The latter end of July, and the month of Auguft, the fqualls haul 
 an Offing in we ij to t j ie Northward of Weft ; I have known Snips at this time Hand 
 
 the latter * r 
 
 months of direct from the harbour with a fair wind. However, as this is not always 
 the cafe ; when clear of the entrance of the harbour, 1 would ftand to 
 the Weft ward with the ebb, and to the Southward with the flood tide ; 
 and, if I could lye any thing to the Weft ward of South, the flood will 
 have no bad effecT. The ftrong frefhes from the rivers, will be more 
 than equivalent to the fvvell and leeway : I have often been obliged to 
 ftand in SEbS. and 8E. to keep in the proper depth of water going dow n 
 the Coaft. 
 
 r. ktortc ^ t1ne Southward of Bombay is a Bank of foundings, which, tothofe 
 hward who arc not acquainted, is fomewhat alarming, especially in working 
 out for an offing. From 30 to leflen to 25 and 24 fathoms, caufes them 
 to imagine that they have loft ground, and are drifting in with the land 
 again ; when in reality they are going from the fhore. The foundings 
 will be fhewn in the Chart of the Survey, from one extreme to the other. 
 This Bank is an excellent guide for fhips coming to Bombay in the 
 S\V. Monfoon, therefore I will give a more minute defcription of its 
 utility. 
 
 Offaii- in The firft caution is, to make a proper allowance for the Currents, 
 
 v'uh the which, in the months of May, June, and part of July, fet Northward 
 
 Land in the . , . . . r ... ,.,'.•„ f , " 
 
 S V". .Von- within the extent of foundings on this Coaft, and are of great affiftance 
 
 foon. t o Veffels working up it before the SW. Monfoon commences. Half of 
 
 July, Auguft, and September, owing to the heavy rains which fall in thefe 
 
 months,
 
 APPENDIX. 471 
 
 months, and the great outfets from the Gulph of Cambay, and the rivers 
 to the Northward of Bombay, the Currents are changed Southward from 
 20 to 30 miles ffi day, which rate leldom fails ; an allowance accordingly 
 may be made. 7 he plan now ollowed, by moft people, is to keep off 
 the Coafr, til! near the Latitude of Bombay ; by which means they have 
 a better chance of obtaining their exact obfervations, as being in clear 
 weather, 'For the fqualls and heavy rains on this Coaft leldom exceed 
 th Ba*k oi Soundings, Of above two degrees from the land ; and the 
 weather, in a great meaiure, denotes your approach to the lhore.) After 
 being in the Latitude of the entrance of the harbour, they ftand in due 
 Eai ! , and having fuch a great diitance to run on that point, the Slap is 
 often ome miles to the Northward, or Southward, of the Port, owing 
 to bad fteerage a;id other incidents. If in the early months of the SVV. 
 Monibon you make to the Northward of the harbour, it is a dangerous 
 miftake, as the winds hang Southerly when in with the Coaft, and 
 the Teas run fo very high, that it would be a very difficult matter to work 
 to the Southward ; but in fuch a cafe, advantage muft be taken of the 
 tides, keeping in fhore with the ebb, and off with the flood tide : if mo- 
 derate, °f->. In the months of Auguft and September, it is not fo dange- 
 rous getting to the Northward of the Port, as the fqualls haul more 
 Northerly, and the Current lets ftrong to the SW. owing to the frelhes 
 from the rivers, and Gulph of Cambay. To prevent all accidents of this 
 kind, we h ave lately made a perfect: difcovery of the Bank of Soundings 
 to the Southward of Bombay, which will be feen in the Chart, and in my 
 opinion, the mod: eligible plan for falling in with the land about Bombay, 
 is this. 
 
 If you can by any means obtain the Latitude, either by Mer. Alt. of 
 the Sun, or double altitudes, fore or afternoon, or by the Stars, vvithir 
 5, or even 10 miles of the truth, it is of little confequence : Hand in fo ' 
 the land without fear, founding every four hours in the night, till you 
 get foundings : In the day, the Snakes will point out your depth of 
 water, the large ones being in above 45 fathoms and the fmall ones in, 
 and under that depth. Having obtained the Latitudes nearly, by any of 
 the above methods, ftand in for the land, between the Latitude 18? 15' 
 and 18? 30' North, till you ftrike foundings on this Bank to the South- 
 ward of Bombay, from 22 to 26 fathoms coarfc fand and fmall Jhelh of 
 
 various
 
 Bank. 
 
 ■472 APPENDIX. 
 
 various colours. With thefe foundings ftand along the Bank, under an 
 eafy fail, about North or NNE. noteing your foundings each hour, 'till 
 you get off the Bank, and deepen the water to 30 or 32 fathoms, then 
 you are certain of the fituation of the fhip, and may fhape a direct courfe 
 for the entrance of the harbour. 
 Depth on the It is to be obferved, that during the traverfes backwards and forwards 
 upon this bank, we never had lefs than 22 fathoms, as will appear by 
 our Logbook, therefore Mr. Nichelfon muff, have been mifmformed by 
 thofe who laid that there is 16 fathoms on it, for I will venture to fay 
 there is no fuch Soundings on this Bank, unlefs it is in a very fmall 
 fpot indeed ; nor have I heard any one affirm they got fuch foundings 
 on it. 
 
 DinECTioNsyor navigating the Gulf o/Cambay. By William 
 
 Augustus Skynner. 
 
 From Sural to the northward keep in 10 or 13 fathoms water, and 3 
 or 4 miles from more, which will carry you between the inner and 
 outer fands off Swallow ; the outer is 6 miles from the fhore, and the 
 inner ii mile, both which are dry at low water fpring tides. When 
 Cutcheree Tree bears EbN. (which is known by a large fmgle Brab 
 Tree upon a low point) keep out WbN. till you have the following 
 bearings on : Bogway Point NE|E. Donda EbNIN. Cutcheree Tree 
 EbSiS. (then clear of Goohvaller Sand to the wefhvard ; foundings from 
 10 to 14 fathoms) fleer NbW. which will carry you lafe into Baroche 
 Road from 14 to 8 fathoms, where you may fafely 4-^ with the following 
 bearing?, Baroche Point NbEjE. Cutchajal SE. Peram Ifland W'N. 
 Diftance from the point 4 or 5 miles, 6 fathoms at low water. The bai- 
 lies in the latitude 21? 33'N. High water on full and change 30 
 minuets pafr. four o'Clock, ebbs and flows 5 fathoms, and runs 6 miles 
 an hour. 
 
 To the fouthward of the bar is Baroche Sand, which lies N. and S. 
 It is 37 miles long, and ii broad, and within 30 yards of either fide from 
 2 to 3 fathoms deep; between it and the inner fand (which runs from 
 the fhore 5 miles here, and continues as far to the fouthward as Tana;; 
 
 the
 
 APPENDIX. 473 
 
 the breadth decreafing, and dry at low water fpring tides) is a good chan 
 the Bar from 7 to 3 fathoms water, and t\ 1 ■ ad: mark for it 1! ■ , 
 
 bring Pcram Ifland WNW4W. fleer in with it until Baroche Point is NbW \ 
 then haul up for it till you have Peram Ifland W4N. which willcarr 
 a-breaft of the Bar in 3 and 4 fathoms at half a mile diftance. 
 
 There are two Sands off Bogway, called Gootwaller and B n t \ v. hie'. 
 dry at low water fpring tides : the former lies N. and S. is 4L. miles lor. 
 half a mile broad ; lies off fhore from Donda 6^ miles : the latter lies NT 
 and SbE. is 5! miles long, 1 \ mile broad at the North end, and at the 
 end z\ miles ; the diftance from the more 3* miles, and within 20 and 30 
 yards of each Sands 3 and 4 fathoms water : between thefe Sands is a rrocd 
 channel to fail or work through in the day-time, but exceffively dangerous in 
 the night, for you cannot depend upon your foundings, therefore in the night 
 would adyife to go to the Weflward of Goolwaller : the channel between the 
 Sands is from 2 to i\ miles broad, and the foundings from 5 to 9 fathoms. 
 
 From Baroche to Jumbafeer keep within 3 miles of the more in 7 or 8 fathoms 
 low water ; and in working do not ftand at any time above 2 leagues off from 
 8 to 10 fathoms, becaufe the tide runs fo very rapid, that in cafe its falling 
 little wind, you would meet with great difficulty in getting in more again : 
 from the fhore a flat runs off i\ and 2 miles dry at low water fpring tides, and 
 continues from °jiimbajeer to Dngom. To the Northward of "Jumbafeer in fome 
 places it runs 4 or 5 miles from the fhore ; dole to it from 4 to 7 fathoms 
 war r. 
 
 nbafeer Road lies in the latitude 21? 49/North, known by a Pagoda ori 
 the North fide of the entrance of the river called Dicu : the mark forcing is 
 the aforefaid Pagoda NEbE.iE. Jumbafeer Point EbN. in 7 fathoms low water, 
 dry part of tl e Flat I'a mile diftance, and from the Pagoda 4 or 5 miles ; w ith 
 the aforefaid bearings oh you will have very little tide, and lye with great 
 fafety, the North part of the Flat breaking the flrength of tie tide. High 
 Water on full and change 48 minutes part four o'clock, ebbs and flows 6 
 fathoms. This is a great place of trade for cotton, grain, and oil. 
 
 The diftance from Jumbafeer to Gangway is 6 leagues, with a Channel i£ 
 mile broad, but very dangerous, the tide running with fuch amazing velocity ; 
 foundings from 7 to 2 fathoms firfh quarter flood : in going keep within a quarter 
 of a mile of the Flat in 2, 3, and 4 fathoms, until you have brought a fmall 
 Clufler of Trees Eaft, then haul in for the Shore, keeping within 200 yards 
 of it up to Gangway Road, and when a-breaft of the Town, may fafely <f-> 
 
 T t t - about
 
 4/4 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 about So yards from high water mark, where you will ground at firfr quarter 
 ebb; it is dry over the Bay from the latitude of 22? 3' North to Cambav at 
 low water fpring tides. No veffels attempt to go above Gongicay in a tide from 
 Jumbafeer, as it is attended with bad confequences ; for if they cannot get 
 into Cambav Creek, muft return to Gangway. High water at Gangway quarter 
 paft five o'clock on full and change. 
 
 It is 5 leagues from Gangway to Cambay, which lies in the latitude of 22? 24' 
 North. At firft quarter flood they always weigh and ftand over, keeping the 
 Pagoda (at Cambay) bearing NbEiE. and in working from NbW. to NEbN.- 
 the loundings are from 2 to 4 fathoms. You mud keep the more clofe 
 aboard, untill you are to the northward of Dagom, meeting with great 
 overfalls, and the tide running fo rapid, that if the veffel mould take the 
 ground (he mull overfet immediately, and in all probability every foul perim 
 on board, which often happens through the neglect and obftinacy of the 
 pilots. N. B. The tide fets NE. and SW. 
 
 From Surat to Gogo, keep as mentioned in the remarks from Surat to the 
 Northward, until you get clear of Gooiwaller Sand to the Wefiward, then fteer 
 over for the I (land of Pcram, keeping to the Eastward about i I mile in 14 and 
 15 fathoms to clear the Reefs that run off it, being very d.-ngerous, and 
 environed with Rocks and Shoals. When it bears SW. fteer NNW. (foundings 
 from 1 1 to 9 fathoms) until you get the following bearings on, the body of 
 Pcram SbE^E. Kourah Point SSW. Gogo ditto WNW. then haul up for 
 the body of Gogo Town, which will carry you clear of Gogo Sand; 
 foundings from 10 to 3 fathoms. When the following bearings are on, 
 you may +-} with great ■ fafety ; Gogo Point WbyS. Kourah ditto SbE'E. 
 Houfe on I'eram SSY^-L. diilance from fhore half a mile in 3 fathoms low 
 v.avr. The town lies in the latitude 21? 44N. is a fafe Roadftead in the SW. 
 Monfoon, where veficls may run to in cafe they happen to part from thcir 
 *f}s in Sural Road, it being an entire bed of mud for three quarters of a mile 
 from fhore, and always fmooth water. Ships may here get fupplied with f tores 
 and provif.ons, and repair an}- damages they may Have fuftairied ; rj , 
 
 who arc principally Moors, build fliips and veflels from 50 to 3. o tons burthen. 
 
 DiroiuuiiS for vefil-ls to make their.] to Bombay in the . uithi ; May 
 
 and 'June from .V -, or in cube tbej re di . .• from then- c|-}$, ,' ch 
 
 frequently happens in thole months through the violence (t the SW. 
 niw.iiouii, an : a b .;. fettin in upon tl >d. You (1 ai th r make 
 
 Fof Gogo as b fore^dij d, ad over fay the pore flrofe, n as 
 
 clear of the SW. part of (.' ... . . - I, which may be gained ^trom Swat 
 
 road)
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 475 
 
 road) by the la ft quarter flood (to run up) and half cob, and then work dpwn 
 along fhore to Dtiu Head by the affrftaiice of the tides: The more is 1 I 1 
 from Groapnaught Point, till within 5 miles of the eaft part of Dieu Ifland, 
 when an oiling of 401- 5 miles mull be given, there being a reef of rock. > 
 running to the SE. 2 miles. When the yeffel gets as low as Dieu Head, 
 fhe mull ftand off with an ebb tide, which will carry her clear of every thing, 
 and fetch Bombay without making the land before entered its latitude, which 
 fhould be attended to, for the tides upon the Neaps have not fufricient ftferigth 
 to contend with the great Weftern Swell that fets upon the fhore at the ajboye 
 feafon of the year between Btijfeen and Bombay, which renders it difficult fox 
 heavy mips to get an offing. 1 have known veflcls to have been feveral days 
 in getting one of 4 or 5 leagues ; and have been rayfelf, in going to Surat, not 
 got 4 leagues off, when a-breafl of St. "Johns, and with much trouble, not 
 without danger, cleared the Rocks which furround that Cape. 
 
 For Baroche Bar and River. Bring; Barochc Point NbE. Peram W. I N. 
 the entrance of the river ENE. freer for it. Baroche Point, when NbWAV. 
 haul up NEbE. foundings from 6 to 21 fathoms at three quarters flood fprino- 
 tides. When the aforefaid point is NW. wefterly, fteer NEbN. from 5 to 
 3 fathoms, until you have the North Shore aboard, and then keep along it at 
 zo yards diftance. [This is the place where the northern Galliots lie for 
 the merchant boats, and is juft within the bar.] When you have got Coleycat 
 north, fteer EbS. and when NW. fteer SE. fiom 3 to 8 fithoms. When 
 the two Brab Trees on the Baroche fhore bear NNE. haul up for them until 
 you are within 10 yards of the fhore from 5 to 9 fithoms, which you muffc 
 keep clofe aboard. When two Pagodas on the north more bears NbE. keep 
 out SbW. into Mid Channel, to avoid a fhoal that runs one-third over the 
 river from the Baroche fhore (upon it at high water 1 fathom) foundings 
 from 4 to 2 fathoms, Barbouch, when NEbE, fleer for it from 3 to 9 fathoms : 
 When a-breafl: of the town you will have 6 fathoms at low water, where a 
 veflel of any burthen may lie with fafety. From the aforefaid town to Baroche 
 the banks are from 1 2 to 20 feet high, which you mult keep clofe aboard, 
 there being little water upon the fouthern fhore ; but off Baroche a veflel may 
 4-^ within 30 yards off it, and will have 4 fathoms at low water. 
 N. B. The tide ebbs and flows at fpring tides upon the bar z\ and 3 fuhoms. 
 
 Mark for Swallow Sand. Swallow Point EbS !S. Fame's Tomb SEbE;E. 
 Thefe Bearings are upon it : Clear to the northward is Swallow Point ESE^S. 
 Vauxe's Tomb SE^E. Catcher ce Tree ENE. Donda NEbN. 9 fathoms; 
 
 T t t 2 anj
 
 476 APPENDIX. 
 
 and to the fouthward Swallow Point EiN. Donda NNE. Vauxe's Tomb 
 EbS. in 3 fathoms low water. 
 
 For Bog way Sand. Cutcheree Tree SEbE^E. Donda EME. Bog-way Point 
 NEbN. is upon it. Clear to the northward Donda ESE.- and Bog-way 
 Point NE'E, in 4 fathoms; and to the fouthward Donda NE,;E. Cutcheree 
 Tree E„^S. and Bogway Point NNE. in 7 fathoms low water. 
 
 For Goolwaller Sand. Bogway Point NE4E. Cutcheree Tree ESE. 
 Donda E^N. is on it. Clear to the northward Bogway Point EiN. Donda 
 ESE. the Tree SE. in 5 fathoms. To the fouthward, Donda Eb\ T -|N. 
 Bogway Point NE-J-N. and the Tree EbS^S. in 8 fathoms low water. 
 
 For Baroche Sand. Gutchajail SEbE. Pcram Ifland WbN. Baroche Point 
 N'E. Thefe bearings are upon the middle of it: Peram Ifland W_N» 
 Baroche Point NlE. is clear to the northward in 3 fathoms. Cutch.jall EbS^S. 
 Peram Ifland \VbN7N. and Baroche Point, as before-mentioned, is clear to. 
 the fouthward in 6 fathoms low water. 
 
 Capt. Taylor's Remarks, hi Ship Ceres. Friday, December 31, 1779.. 
 
 At 9 AM. — Saw the land appearing like' a fail, and bearing NEbN. 
 
 At 1 1 AM — The weather clearing up had very good obferyations of the. 
 fun and moon, by which I make Hog Ifland, in long. 96? io'E from Green- 
 wich and in latitude 2? 15N, The Variation the fame day 1? 2o'W. fleered 
 y NW. until 10 PM when fhe broke off to N. Rain and thick v\ eather. 
 
 At midnight — Saw the land appearing very low and at the difiance of ir or 
 2 miles no ground 90 faths. Tacked and kept her head off the land until day 
 lioht, when the fmall ifland which lies a little to the wefhvard of Hog Ijla-nd, 
 bore about EbN 6 or 7 miles and the Extreme of Hog Ifland from NNW to 
 E, off fhore ^ or 6 leagues : We were much furprifed at day-light feeing no 
 land refcmbling the] land which alarmed us at Midnight; h we\ r as I 
 obferved the Current felting flrongly to the NWeftward by our altering the 
 bearings of the land Co i\u\:, I am convinced we were near the fmall 
 
 Ifland which lies to 1 of Hog Ifland, and if there are any fuch- 
 
 Rx I find kid down in forhe- Charts furrouhding the NW. part of 
 
 it,
 
 APPENDIX. 477 
 
 it, I am clear we muft have been very near them at Midnight, although too 
 far off" to fee them at day light. 
 
 At Noon Saw the Cocos Iflands bearing NWbN. about 4 leagues. They are 
 two imnll Iflands covered with trees, lying rather to the Northward, and 
 about 18 or 20 miles to the Weftward of Hog IJland obferved Breakers off" the 
 Wtfternmofl: Point of them, but no dangers any where elfe, there appears a 
 good paflage between them ; the Wind coming too far northerly to permit us 
 weathering them, bore away, and went through between them and Hog IJland; 
 The paflage fcems to be very clear and good ; fleered N and NbW ; found- a 
 Current fetting NbE, about r mile ffl' hour. 
 
 Next day law the Coaft of Sumatra from NbE to NE. about 10 or Vz leagues 
 diftant ; Loaded it along for 4 days, from 10 to 12 leagues diftant from the 
 laud, with light winds chiefly from the NW, Rainy and unfettled weather, 
 found the Current letting to the NW. and SW. but were generally about 12' 
 to the Northward of account in the 24 hours. Ships that are defirous of making 
 this Coaft, fhould I think endeavour to avoid failing; in with it under a?N, 
 as the Coaft to the Northward of that feems quite clear and good foundings from 
 60 to 30 fathoms, fand, and even in the night Ships may have foundings 6 or 
 7 leagues from the land, befides that it is very tedious getting to the Northward 
 at this feafon, the winds being fo faint and moftly from the NW ; the Coaft to 
 Achecn head lying about NW and SE ; there feems to be no danger of looting 
 the Coaft after it has been feen, therefore I think it would be advifeable to 
 ftand off" the land, to have frefher winds, and make a good flretch to the Norlh- 
 \\ ard, or to Coaft it along in Soundings, and °f-} when the Tide makes to the 
 SW. 
 
 I made 38 miles W. from Hog IJland to Acheen Head, which by our laft 
 obfei various of the longitude, makes it in longitude 9 5?32 / E. from Greenwich 
 and in latitude 5? 22' N. 
 
 From feeing Acheen Head we were two days in getting to the northward 
 of P? Rondo, with light airs from W. and SW. fair and clear weather 1 
 Found a current of about 14 or 15 miles to the northward in the 24 hours; 
 When abreaft of the ifhnds, although quite calm, found the (hip driving fa ft 
 to the northward, and on upon the iflands to the eaftward ; upon trying 
 the current or tide frequently found theNE. tide 1 \ miles ■$" hour, and the SW. 
 not above ! r. The change of weather was very remarkable as 
 
 fbon as we opf iied Ac/. ■ Head, from having cloudy weather with almofr 
 confhnt fqualls and rain ever fince we made the coaft of Sumatra, and the 
 
 wind.
 
 47 8 APPENDIX. 
 
 winds exceedingly variable, immediately, when we got to the northward of 
 the Achcen IJlarah, had pleafant and fteady breezes from E. to ENE a clear 
 and moft lerene iky, the water exceedingly i'mo. th, and lcarcely a cloud to be 
 feen in the whole hemifphere. 
 
 January 9th. Took ray departure from P? Rondo allowing it to be nearly 
 upon a meridian with Achcen, and in latitude 6? 5' N. inftead of 5? 50' as 
 laid down in the Directory and place.! in the charts with the fame error. 
 
 N. B. This error of 15' in the latit. of/-? Rondo is very well worth attending 
 to, as it is but a fmall ifland and has a moft dangerous Pv.eef of Rocks which 
 reaches almoft half way between it and P? Way, with a conftant eaflerly 
 drain into the mouth of the Araks of Malacca, in the night time, or in 
 thick weather with light winds, a Ship may get fo near as not to be able to 
 go to the northward of it, and obliged to pafs through between it and P: I: \ v, 
 which is an exceeding dangerous pafiage, which no man ought to attempt if 
 he can any ways avoid it. There is a fiafe pailage clofe to P? Way ; in light 
 airs the flood which fets to the NE might force a ihip upon the reef, and the 
 common advantages of cf-?ing is hardly to be met with near any of thefe iilands 
 there being no foundings clofe to them. 
 
 From P? Rondo to i2?N. latitude had pleafant breezes from the eafhvard, 
 which enabled us to make our courie from NbE. to NbW. from 90 to 100 
 miles ffl day. January 12th. Per Medium of 13 good fights of the longitude 
 found ourfelves in 93^36' longitude from Greenwich, which is 1? 33'W. fince 
 lafc fights and by the charts is nearly the longitude of the ifland s, laid down in 
 1 2? and 1 1? 30' N. latitude, by the name of Barren Iflands. Kept a very good 
 look out in the night and ibunded as <f' log; next morning at day light law 
 a pretty larre ifland bearing NEIE, 10 leagues. The extreme of the Andamans 
 (luff. i;i light) from WNW. to SWbS. 9 or 10 leagues. Till noon, that 
 we had a good obi'ervation, could not determine whether the ifland in light, 
 was the northernmoft Barren Iflandot Naramckvn ; We cbierved in 11? 59'N, 
 the latitude of the northernmoft Barren Ifland as laid down in the charts; 
 The Ifland bearing NEbN between 8 or 9 leagues diflant which makes it come 
 lieareft the latitude of Barren Ifland — A day or two afterwards by a very good 
 Gbfervation within 2 or 3 miles ^from the N° end of it, find its latitude to be 
 12? 2o'N? (21 miles to the Northward of its fituation upon the Charts) and its 
 longitude, by feveral very good Obfervations of the o and 5>, to be 93? io'E. 
 from Greenwich. 
 
 Tic
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 477 
 
 The neareft of die Andaman I (lands we could fee bearing SWbW. from it 
 1 8 or 20 leagues — As for the Southernmoft I'arren Ijland we concluded that 
 it did not exift, or if it did that it muff, be very erroneoufly placed in the Charts 
 fur the day after we faw Barren Ijland we were let to the Southward in endea- 
 vouring to pafs to the Eaftward of it, and at Noon had the Ifland bearing from 
 NbW, to NNW. 1: leagues and obferved in n? 48'N. which is nearly the 
 fouthernmoft Barren Ijland (as laid down) notwithstanding which, faw no 
 fuch ifland although the weather was very clear ; Since which time I was 
 informed by the Captain of a Portuguefe Schooner that he had {ten both the 
 ifiands, the fouthernmoft being (ituated much farther to the weftward than 
 laid down. 
 
 I likewife have it from good authority, that Captain Charrington of the 
 Bahar country (hip (aw the rocks under his (hip's bottom and (bunded in 
 4 fathoms. Barren Ijland bearing NNW. 5 or 6 leagues. In the Charts there 
 are (cme dangers laid down to the (buthward of the fouthernmoft Barren Ijland, 
 I imagine it is meant to be placed to the fouthward of the northernmoft as I 
 think it feems doubtful whether there are but one or two ifiands. The ifland 
 of Narcondam bears NbE^E. 23 leagues diftant from Barren Ijland in latitude 
 13? 2 6'N. and longitude 93. 30. E. from Greenwich, both afcertained from 
 very good obiervations. The iflands Narcondam and Barren Ijland appear very 
 differently when (ecu at Come diftance; lb that, independant of their latitudes, 
 with a iimple (ketch of each ifland a man could be at no lofs readily to know 
 one ifland from the other. Narcondam makes like a fugar loaf, quite flat at the 
 top, and may be i'ecn at lead 1 8 leagues from the mall head, for we (aw it 1 3 
 or 14 leagues from the poop pretty high out o( water, the weather rather hazy; 
 this diftance may be depended upon as it is calculated from the bearings and 
 differences of Latitude. 
 
 Barren J 1 md appears much longer, hut not quite fo high ; the weflerrrioft 
 extreme is the highci!, and makes with a Peak, defending to a low point 
 to the eaftward, although when you come near it, it (eems of an equal height, 
 with a peak at c-ica end ; It may be (een at leaft 1 5 or 16 leagues, for it was 
 out of the water when we faw it bearing NbW 1 2 or 13 leagues diftant 
 ^ calculation. 
 
 wary 17th, S$aw the Co cos iflands ben ring NWbW. 9 or 10 leagues; 
 they bear NWbW-|W 26 leagues diftant from Nan , 1 e ','.. ithen rnoft 
 
 ifland is in latitude i4?o'N. and longitude 92° 10' E. from Greenwich by 
 good obiervations of the o and J>. 'I he latituds is calculated Irom its 
 
 bearing 
 
 o
 
 480 APPENDIX. 
 
 bearing E. of January r 7th, at 11. P.M. to the preceeding, and following 
 meridian obfervations. There is a very good paffage between the Cocos and 
 the N. end of the Andamans, with regular foundings from 20 to 40 fathoms 
 fine white fand with fmall fhells, although we had iome c'afts of rocky ground. 
 The Channel feems quite clear and good ; I imagine the diflance from the 
 Cocos to the north end of the Andamans to be at leaf! 15 or 16 leagues: 
 for in pafiing through outward bound law no land to the fouthward of us 
 from the maft head although the weather was very clear, but in pafiing through 
 homeward bound could juft fee the Andamans bearing SSW. diflant from the 
 Cccoj 5 or 6 miles, ground 34 fathoms. The Cocos iflands are very low land and 
 I think cannot be feen more than 8 or 9 leagues from the maft head, by our 
 difrance run from feeins; them firft we did not fee them fo far but I am 
 qf opinion we had a corifiderable wefterly current in our favour, and home- 
 ward bound in the month of April, the current fet ftro'rlgly to the eaftward 
 through the paflage, and carried us through without any wind ; in all 
 probability it was the tide which happened to favour us both times, for both 
 out and home we found a wefterly fet within the iflands. 
 
 ' uary iStb, Took my departure from the Cocos fleering clofe hauled to 
 the NW. with pleafant breezes from NE. to ENE. going at the rate of 4 or 
 5 miles <p hour with clear weather ; when we got between 18? and io?N. Lat. 
 had light winds, more Eafterly than before, which foon ended in almoft entire 
 Calms with a fettled haze in the Horizon, we feldom went more than 10 or 
 j 5 miles in the 24 hours, tried the Currents frequently and found they fet all 
 round the Compafs, but by our daily Obfervations of the Latitudes found a fet 
 of 8 or 10 miles to the N6rthward every day; and by an Obfervation of the 
 Lo le January 26th found we had been let a degree and a half to the Eaft- 
 
 v rd fmce we left the Cocos. — As far as 1 8? 30N. Lat. had pleafant frefh breezes 
 m NE. iince which have been 10 days in getting 2 or 3 degrees of Lat. and 
 little or nothing; to the Weft ward : had verv s;ood obfervations of the Longitude 
 5 or 6 following days, from 10 to 15 miles to the Eaftward or Weft ward every 
 dc.y, and never above 20 miles diftancc by our Log. 
 
 January 31. Had the good fortune to fall in with Mr. Gilbert, Pilot, he 
 told us we were then about io' or 15' to the Eaftward of the Eaftern fea Reef 
 which by Mr. Richie's Chart is in 88? 50'E. from Greenwich. He told us 
 we raisrht have been there a month longer unlefs we had s;ot into lefs water, 
 for we were out of the influence of the tides and that the general currents 
 i\uh:r fet to the i. 1 : he recommended in cafe of falling in to the Eaftward 
 
 (as
 
 APPENDIX. 481 
 
 (as was our cafe) to keep in 20. faths. at fpring tides, and in 17 faths. at neap 
 tides, in order to benefit by them, otherways a fhip might be fome month, in 
 getting to Balafore Roads, there being almoft conftant calms to the Eaftward 
 from 18? 19? 20? and as far as 21? io'N. Lat. at all feafons of the year, 1': would 
 be very imprudent for any Ship, unacquainted with the lands, to come under 
 17 faths. taking care to °f-^ as foon as the tides make againft you, any (hip 
 may fafcly keep in that depth at neap tides, the tides ftt all round the Com pais 
 in the 24 hours. — The firft of the Flood fets the Weftward, coming. round to 
 the Northward and ends letting NE ; the Ebb begins letting to the Eaftward. — 
 Arriving round to the SE, and ends fetting to the weftward. However 
 to the Eaftward the Tides are considerably influenced by the winds, 
 following their courfe, in 50 fathoms water and above, the Eafterly tides are 
 the ftrongeft. — In eroding the tails of the Reefs with a flood tide, Ships ought 
 to be very careful to avoid being carried to the Northward between the fands, 
 when thinking themfelves to the Southward, may unexpectedly ftrike upon 
 the Braces. In crofiing the tails of the Reefs we had very near keen carried 
 into the Kill inftead of Ball afore Roads — The Pilot thinking we fhoaled our 
 water too quick for Ballafore came to, as we afterwards found, to the South- 
 ward of the Weftern Brace ; in going into Ballafore Roads the water fhoals very 
 gradually. 
 
 Next morning came on board Mr. Car, Pilot and took charge of the Ship 
 (being his turn) Weighed and flood away to the NE into the Kill, and next 
 morning weighed with a light air from W and SW, and crofled the Eaftern 
 Brace, the leaft water, mark under water 4 fathoms. 
 
 In rounding Point Palmiras no Indiaman ought to come under 16 or 17 
 fathoms, nor lb near with an eafterly wind. 
 
 N. B. Our pafiage to Bengal was moft certainly prolonged 10 or 14 day? 
 (and might have been much longer had we not fortunately got a Pilot) by 
 not ftretching over for the Coaft of Coromandel between the latitudes of 18? 
 and i9?N. latitude or in fhort as foon as the NE Trade became faint, by 
 which means we fhould have avoided the Calms which always reign to the 
 Eaftward and to the Northward of thefe latitudes ^ the Ships which frequent 
 the Eaftern paflage, after the middle of December, always ftand over for the 
 Coaft of Coromandel before the NE Trade or Monfoon fails them, as the Cur- 
 rents, after the middle of December, fet to the N on that Coaft, with regular 
 land and lea breezes. 
 
 U u u Taken
 
 4$2 APPENDIX. 
 
 Taken from a Manufcript, which may be depended upon. 
 
 '• The N fide of Carn'cobar - - in Latitude 9? 13' N 
 
 " The Iiland of Narcondam ... . '3- -S 
 
 " The Northmoft pait of the great Andaman* 13. 13 
 
 " The Eaittrnmoft of the Cocos Iflands 14. 4 
 
 " The largeft of the Sayor lilands ... 8. 37 
 
 44 Monday Ifland - - ... 12. 17 
 
 Monday Ifland which is not laid down in any of our Charts is a very dangerous 
 rock in latitude 12? i7'N and bears Nj7?W diftance 96 leagues from thelargeft 
 of the Sayor Iflands, It appears like a Long- Boat turned bottom up with 9 or 10 
 fathoms a league and a half to the weftward of it, and 4 fathoms a mile diftance. 
 My authority is very good having received the account of it from Mr Monmortis, 
 Captain of a Pegu Veflel, who told me he lay at of-} feveral hours about a mile from 
 the Reck, and had the above foundings ; helikewife informed me of others, who had ; 
 feen M nd 7 Iiland but I have not the fmalleft reafon to doubthis veracity, as I favv it 
 pricked offin his Charts by hisown hand'. — 1 1 might prove very fatal to a Ship going 
 that paffage in the Night. 
 
 Two leagues to the NW of P? Way, that is between P? lJ r ay and P? R:nd? t 
 are very dangerous Rocks, extending above a mile from P? Rondo, pretty 
 h cut of the water : there is a fafe Paflage between them and P? Way,. 
 ping clofe to P? Way, I faw the Rocks myfelf as <ff Remarks. 
 
 Remarks on the Monfoons in the Bay of Bengali. 
 
 The NE. Monfoon begins on the Eaftern fliore about the middle of November 
 and continues until May, and frequently all the month of May ; It begins upon 
 the Coromandel Coaft 2 or 3 Months fooner than on the eaftern ftiore ; the SW. 
 Monfoon begins on the Eaftern ftiore the end of May or beginning of June,. 
 and continues till the end of O&ober or month of November. In November 
 there are frequent fqualls from the SE and SSE. which continue 2 or 3 days 
 foroetimes, which makes it convenient for ftiips bound up the Bay, at this 
 f 11 to ' ep the Eaftern ftiore on board : The SW Monfoon begins on the 
 I lei Coaft, in the month of February ; In coming down the Bay in 
 
 the nths of Mai h, April or May you ought to keep the Eaftern ftiore 
 < '. on I • rd where you will meet with land and lea breezes, whereas all 
 1 v r the i \ u find s froi SW and SSW but chieflv Calms 
 
 J J O ■ 
 
 and lerly Currents. — Out] ore you will fcarcely meet with 
 
 any
 
 APPENDIX. 483 
 
 any Current until you come within the draft of the Straits of Malacca wl 
 you find a ftrong Eaftcrly Current, but if you happen to be cai 
 Straits by it, ftand to the Southward and make the Coaft of Sumatra as fbon 
 as you can, when you will always find SE winds to bring you to Acheen. 
 
 From Diamond Point to Point Pedro there are foundings all the way at about 
 2 miles from the more — during the SW Monfoon the Currents within . 
 Iflands fet to the NE and the contrary on the Monfoon. 
 
 In the months November, December and beginning of January, Ships bound 
 up the Bay to Bengal mould come up within the Iflands and pafs throj 
 between the Preparis andfunken Reck, after which they may work up the 
 Aracan more juft in fight of the land, indeed it's immaterial if they now and 
 then lofe fight of it, they ought? not to come nearer than ro or 15 leagues, by 
 keeping that diftance you have no Currents and regular land and lea breezes , 
 the Sea Breeze comes in at about 3 o'clock in the afternoon and continues till 
 8 or 10 at Night, blowing from N to NNW and NW, when you mould 
 ftand in more ; it is fucceeded by the land breeze, which blows till 2 or 3 
 o'CIock next day from NE and ENE, when you mufr. ftretch off. 
 
 When you come as high as the Broken //lands you may ftand over for Balla- 
 fore roads, obferving what has been mentioned before concerning the Tides. 
 
 In going through the Straits of Malacca, always keep the Malay fhore on 
 board untill you get as far as Pooh Sambehn or the North end of the North 
 fluid 
 
 On the other more you have fqualls, Calms, and the Currents againft you. 
 
 In going through between the Arrces and Parcelar Hill, or the fand Heads 
 never bring the hill to the Southward of Eaft, nor to the Northward of EbN. 
 the beft track is E|N. and the Arroes WIS, never to the Northward of \V 
 untill you fee Parcelar Hill which then is your guide. 
 
 U u u 2 A New
 
 A NEW AND CORRECT 
 
 ALPHABETICAL TABLE, 
 
 O F 
 LATITUDES and LONGITUDES, 
 
 Chiefly in the Indian Navigavion. 
 
 N. B. The authorities marked T were taken from the laft 
 Tables, and thofe marked R from Mr. G. Robertfon's 
 China Sea, Sec. D Dalrymple, and H Capt. Huddart. 
 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 
 R 
 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 
 Ad' 
 
 corrected Edition of Requifite 
 Memoirs of a Chart oi the 
 
 Latitude. Longitude. 
 
 VENTURE Bay, Afia, New Holland 
 Ditto Ifle, Pacific Ocean 
 Agra, India .... 
 
 Aleppo, Turkey 
 Alexandres, Afia, Syria . 
 
 Alexandria, Egypt 
 
 Algeirs, Africa . . . 
 
 Ambrym lfle, Afia, Pacific Ocean 
 Amfterdam, Lurope, Holland . . 
 
 Amflerdam, Ifle, Afia, Pacific Ocean, . . 
 
 Ancona, Europe, Italy 
 
 Angra, Europe, Tercera . . . 
 
 Anamoca, Afia, Pacific Ocean 
 St. Anthony Cape, South America, Staten Land 
 Antigua, America, St. John's Carib 
 Antwerp, Europe, Flanders . * 
 
 Apoe Ifle, Pacific Ocean 
 Arica, America, Peru 
 Aurora Ifle, Afia, Pacific Ocean 
 Abroegoes Shoal, ditto 
 Arrow lilands, fouth part New Guinea 
 Auro Pulo near the China Sea . 
 
 Anamba Great, ditto . . 
 
 Ditto, the northweft ditto 
 Ditto, the northernmoft ditto 
 Andrade Rock, ditto 
 Arrayas liland, Borneo, fouth part 
 Anna Puli>, Pacific Ocean 
 
 Anthony, St. Cape de Verde Ifland, fouth point 
 Auguftine St. liland Madagafcafcar 
 Ateenfion Ifland, South Atlantic Ocean 
 Achin 1 own, Sumatra .... 
 St. Ao,nes Liuht, Stilly . 
 
 • B. 
 Banditti Ifland ne r Bally . . 
 
 P.outon {Hand, fouth-caft point Pitts Paflitge 
 Ditto, north end ditto 
 
 Bouro, north- well point . . . 
 
 Bunoa Ifland, ditto 
 Bal y Pulo, near Stiuits of Sunda 
 Beacliy HcadJ Britifl> Channel . . . 
 
 Boulogne, France . . • 
 
 Bieft, ditto . • • 
 
 S lilt, fouth point 
 
 43 23 S 
 
 •47 3° 
 
 oE 
 
 17 5 15 S 
 
 144 17 
 
 45^ 
 
 %b 43 N 
 
 76 44 
 
 E 
 
 35 45 2 3 N 
 
 37 2 ° 
 
 E 
 
 36 35 toN 
 
 36 20 
 
 E 
 
 31 11 20 N 
 
 30 16 
 
 3° E 
 
 36 49 30 N 
 
 2 12 
 
 45 E 
 
 16 9 30 S 
 
 if 8 12 
 
 30 E 
 
 52 22 45 N 
 
 4 45 
 
 30 E 
 
 21 9 S 
 
 174 46 
 
 W 
 
 43 37 54 N 
 
 J 3 3° 
 
 30 E 
 
 38 39 N 
 
 27 12 
 
 15W 
 
 20 1 & 30 N 
 
 x 74 30 
 
 30W 
 
 54 45 46 S 
 
 
 
 17 4 30 N 
 
 62 9 
 
 W 
 
 51 13 15 N 
 
 4 22 
 
 45 E- 
 
 16 46 15 S 
 
 168 27 30 
 
 18 26 23 s 
 
 71 11 
 
 W 
 
 15 8 S 
 
 168 17 
 
 E 
 
 20 59 N 
 
 136 38 
 
 E 
 
 7 6 • S 
 
 135 
 
 E 
 
 2 30 N 
 
 104. 38 
 
 E 
 
 3 2 N 
 
 105 50 
 
 E 
 
 3 15 N 
 
 106 3 
 
 E 
 
 3 55 N 
 
 106 3 
 
 E 
 
 9 5+ N 
 
 ioq 54 
 
 
 
 5 S 
 
 115 36 
 
 
 4 38 N 
 
 130 23 
 
 
 36 S i N 
 
 25 • 7 
 
 30W 
 
 23 36 29 S 
 
 43 58 
 
 E 
 
 7 56 15 s 
 
 14 3 2 
 
 W 
 
 5 20 N 
 
 95 34 
 
 E 
 
 49 56 N 
 
 6 46 
 
 W 
 
 8 46 S 
 
 *<5 3 1 
 
 E 
 
 5 48 S 
 
 •23 '3 
 
 E 
 
 4 25 5 
 
 123 29 
 
 E 
 
 36 S 
 
 120 21 
 
 E 
 
 2 53 s 
 
 
 
 5 4» S 
 
 
 E 
 
 50 45 N 
 
 19 40 
 
 E 
 
 ; 31 
 
 J 3* 
 
 1; 
 
 48 23 
 
 4 3° 
 
 w 
 
 47 '7 
 
 3 5 
 
 w 
 
 
 Boui 
 
 Jeaux
 
 ( 4S 5 ) 
 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 
 R 
 H 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 D 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 
 R 
 R 
 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 T 
 T 
 R 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 R 
 
 Bourdeaux, France I 
 
 B.-iyonne, ditto 
 
 Borobav Coaft, Malabar .... 
 
 Beiuoolen . . 
 
 Bcncoolen, Fort Malborough 
 
 Ballafore, Bengal . . , 
 
 Beuennos, Ay es, South America 
 
 Bafiis the Great, near Ifland Ceylon 
 
 Banguay Peake, ditto Illand . . 
 
 Blanco Pedro, Straits Mai: cca 
 
 Blanco Pedro, Coaft China 
 
 BolinaoCap' , Ifland Luc. nia 
 
 Balabac Peak, Illand of B.labac 
 
 Botel Tobago Xima, ncr Formofa 
 
 Banca, noith point Ifland Banca . , 
 
 Borneo, weftermoft part 
 
 Bat .via City, Illand Tava (Jupiter's Satilite) 
 
 Bocca Tigris, China River 
 
 Brother Ifland, nortUermoft near Straits of Sunda 
 
 Ditto, foutherrnoft . 
 
 Bantam point, Java 
 
 Bird or Blanc Illand, CarimaU PafTage 
 
 Bumkins Illand, Coaft Java . . 
 
 Two Brothers near Pulo Laut 
 
 Banda, the Great Illand, ditto Sea . 
 
 Bouton Illand, SE point Pitts PafTage 
 
 Babylon, Ana- nt Alia, Mefcp 
 
 Bagdad, dito, ditto 
 
 Balafore, Afin, India .... 
 
 Balibea Ifland, Alia, N. Caledonea 
 
 Bangucy Peak, Alia, Malacca 
 
 Barb; s Cape, Africa, Sanhi ga . . . 
 
 Babuda 111. md Amer, Atlantic Ocean . . 
 
 Barcelona, Europe, Spain 
 
 Barnv&lts, Illand Amer, Terra del Fuego . 
 
 Baffaterre, America, Guadaloupe . . 
 
 B lyonne, Europe, France 
 
 Bette, Bcncoolen, Afia, Sumatra 
 
 Be.lin, Europe, Germany 
 
 Bermudas Ifland, America, Atlantic Ocean 
 
 Blanco Cape of Negi oland 
 
 Blauco Cape, Americ; , Patagonia . 
 
 Bojador Cape, Africa, Negroland 
 
 Bolabola tile, Alia, P.icihc Ocean 
 
 Bo'ogna, Europe. Italy 
 
 Bartholeniew Illand. Afi', New Hebrides 
 
 Balil, Europe, Switzerland . . 
 
 Bear Illand, America, Hud Ton's B;iy 
 
 Bonavifta Ifle, Africi, At antic Ocean 
 
 on, America, New England 
 B tanj Ifland, Afia, New Caledonia 
 H irbon Ifland, Africa, Indian Ocean 
 Breft, Europe, France . . 
 
 Banditta Illand, nearly Bally r . 
 
 Lat 
 
 tude. 
 
 Longitude. 
 
 44 50 
 
 
 34 3 oW 
 
 43 2 9 27 
 
 29 w 
 
 18 57 
 
 
 72 40 E 
 
 3 49 
 
 S 
 
 102 E 
 
 3 45 
 
 S 
 
 103 1 E 
 
 21 20 
 
 N 
 
 E 
 
 34 35 
 
 S 
 
 58 31 W 
 
 6 10 
 
 Er 
 
 E 
 
 7 18 
 
 N 
 
 "7 J 7 3 oE 
 
 1 20 
 
 N 
 
 104 22 
 
 22 20 
 
 N 
 
 115 8 
 
 16 18 
 
 N 
 
 120 12 
 
 7 5 l 
 
 N 
 
 117 15 30- 
 
 22 6 
 
 N 
 
 121 42 E 
 
 1 28 
 
 S 
 
 105 48 E 
 
 1 23 
 
 N 
 
 iog 18 F. 
 
 6 9 
 
 S 
 
 106 51 15 E 
 
 22 48 
 
 3 N 
 
 
 5 9 
 5 " 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 106 4 E 
 
 5 54 
 
 s 
 
 105 58 E 
 
 3 40 
 
 S 
 
 
 5 52 
 
 S 
 
 
 4 2 4 
 
 s 
 
 
 4 30 
 
 s 
 
 130 38 E 
 
 5 4« 
 
 s 
 
 123 13 E 
 
 33 ° 
 
 N 
 
 42 46 3c E 
 
 33 20 
 
 N 
 
 43 46 3° E 
 
 21 2t 
 
 N 
 
 86 E 
 
 20 7 
 
 s 
 
 164 22 E 
 
 7 18 
 
 N 
 
 117 17 30E 
 
 2 2 35 
 
 30 N 
 
 16 40 \V 
 
 17 49 
 
 45 N 
 
 61 50 W 
 
 41 26 
 
 N 
 
 2 13 E. 
 
 55 49 
 
 S 
 
 66 58 W 
 
 15 59 
 
 30 N 
 
 61 59 15W* 
 
 43 2 9 
 
 21 N 
 
 1 30 6W 
 
 3 49 
 
 3 S 
 
 102 E 
 
 52 3 2 
 
 30 N 
 
 13 26 15 E 
 
 32 35 
 
 N 
 
 63 28 W 
 
 20 55 
 
 30 N 
 
 17 io W 
 
 47 20 
 
 S 
 
 64 42 W 
 
 26 12 
 
 30 N 
 
 14 27 W 
 
 16 32 
 
 30 N 
 
 151 52 w 
 
 44 29 
 
 36 N 
 
 11 2r 15 E 
 
 15 42 
 
 S 
 
 167 17 30 E 
 
 47 35 
 
 N 
 
 7 2 9 3° E 
 
 54 34 
 
 N 
 
 79 5 6 w 
 
 16 6 
 
 N 
 
 11 47 15W 
 
 42 25 
 
 N 
 
 70 37 i 5 W 
 
 22 26 
 
 4c S 
 
 167 16 45 E 
 
 20 51 
 
 43 ? 
 
 55 3° E 
 
 48 22 
 
 54 N 
 
 4 3° 5° Vv/ 
 
 » 46 
 
 S 
 
 "5 31 1 
 
 Cabeao
 
 ( 486 ) 
 
 T Cabello Port, America, Terra Firma 
 
 Cadiz, Europe, Spain 
 
 Caen, Europe, France . . . 
 
 T Cairo, Africa, Egypt 
 
 T Canary Ifland, NE. part Canaries 
 
 T Candia Ifle, Europe, Med. Sea 
 
 T Candlemas Ifles, America, Sandhead Land 
 
 T Canfo Port, Nova Scotia 
 
 R Canton City, China 
 
 R Condore Pulo, ditto 
 
 R Capone Point Ifland Luconia 
 
 D Cagyan Soloo Ifland Mindoro Sea 
 
 R Crockatoa Peak, Straits of Sunda 
 
 R Carimata Ifland, N. point Coaft of Borneo 
 
 Tl Carimon, Java Ifland, Borneo Sea 
 
 R Cloats Ifland by the Englifh, near New Holland 
 
 ^ Ditto, Danifh account 
 
 r Celebes NE point 
 
 r Cambuys Ifland near Batavia 
 
 r Chriftmas Ifland Indian Ocean 
 
 jl Cape Clear, Europe, Ireland 
 
 r Cork, Europe, Ireland 
 
 ]^ Calais, France 
 
 r_ Cherbourg, diito 
 
 r Calcutta, Fort William, Bengal 
 
 r Comoiin Cape, fouth point, Indian Peninfula 
 
 ]< Cochin, Malabar Coaft 
 
 R Calemar point, Coromandel Coaft 
 
 R Cocos, orKelling Iflands, northermoft Indian Sea 
 
 Ditto, fouthermoft, or duller from 
 
 T Carlefcroon, Europe, Sweden 
 
 T Cathargena, Europe, Spain . 
 
 T Carthigena, America, Terra Firma 
 
 T Cafan, Afia, Siberia 
 
 T Chandemagore, Afia, India 
 
 T CapeColinet, Aii ', North Caledonia 
 
 T Cape Comorin, Afia, India 
 
 T Corvo, Europe, Azoris 
 
 T Cumberland Ca'pe, Alii, New Hebrides • 
 
 T Conftantinoplc, Europe, Turkey . . 
 
 D. 
 
 R Defertas IflanJs, N<-rihpomt, Madura 
 
 R Dieupoint, India 
 
 R Divicotta Coaft, Coromandel 
 
 R Daffen Ifland, Africa 
 
 R Diego Garcia, or Baffos de Chagos Ifland 
 
 R Diegos Rais, Indian Ocean 
 
 R Docan Pulo near Banca 
 
 R Danes Ifland, landing place, China River 
 
 R Direction Ifland, Coaft of Borneo 
 
 R Donda Point, Celebes 
 
 R Dkvaaldar Ifland, South Coaft P.ornco 
 
 R Doogers Bank near PuloPanjang 
 
 R Dublin, Europe, Ireland 
 
 Lati 
 
 rude. 
 
 Longi 
 
 tude. 
 
 • JO 30 
 
 50 N 
 
 ~ 6 7 3 
 
 W 
 
 • 3 6 3' 
 
 7* 
 
 6 ,1 
 
 
 49 " 
 
 10N 
 
 2 j-, 
 
 
 30 2 
 
 a 4 N 
 
 3 1 27 
 
 i5 E 
 
 2d 13 
 
 N 
 
 J 5 3* 
 
 45 W 
 
 35 18 
 
 35 N 
 
 25 18 
 
 F. 
 
 • 57 Jo 
 
 S 
 
 27 13 
 
 W 
 
 45 20 
 
 7N 
 
 60 55, 
 
 w 
 
 23 6 
 
 55 N 
 
 "3 J?, 
 
 E 
 
 8 40 
 
 N 
 
 106 18 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 120 30 
 
 40 
 
 6 57 
 
 N 
 
 118 51 
 
 
 
 6 9 
 
 S 
 
 1C5 22 
 
 
 
 • * 33 
 
 S 
 
 108 50 
 
 
 
 5 50 
 
 s 
 
 110 32 
 
 
 
 22 y 
 
 S 
 
 no 
 
 
 
 . 22 
 
 s 
 
 no 26 
 
 
 
 J 50 
 
 N 
 
 125 22 
 
 
 
 5 49 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 • JO 34- 
 
 s 
 
 I0 5 33 
 
 
 
 51 18 
 
 N 
 
 11 J5 
 
 \v 
 
 • 5< 54 
 
 N 
 
 8 28 
 
 w 
 
 5° 57 
 
 30 N 
 
 1 5i 
 
 E 
 
 49 38 
 
 26N 
 
 1 37 
 
 W 
 
 22 33 
 
 
 88 28 
 
 E 
 
 7 57 
 
 
 77-47 
 
 E 
 
 9 58 
 
 N 
 
 76 22 
 
 
 10 20 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 11 50 
 
 S 
 
 97 8 
 
 E 
 
 112 4 
 1 12 23 
 
 N 
 
 97 8 
 
 
 
 N 
 
 97 x 9 
 
 
 
 56 20 
 
 N 
 
 15 2 
 
 J5E 
 
 37 37 
 
 N 
 
 1 8 
 
 30W 
 
 . 10 26 
 
 35 N 
 
 75 26 
 
 45W 
 
 55 43 
 
 58 N 
 
 49 8 
 
 15E 
 
 22 51 
 
 26 N 
 
 88 29 
 
 15 E 
 
 . 20 30 
 
 S 
 
 164 56 
 
 E 
 
 7 56 
 
 N 
 
 78 5 
 
 E 
 
 39 42 
 
 N 
 
 31 6 
 
 W 
 
 14 39 
 
 3° s 
 
 166 47 
 
 E 
 
 41 1 
 
 24 N 
 
 28 53 
 
 49 E 
 
 • 3 2 37 
 
 N 
 
 16 41 
 
 W 
 
 20 44 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 
 79 44 
 
 E 
 
 33 2 5 
 
 S 
 
 18 7 
 
 E 
 
 7 30 
 
 S 
 
 72 26 
 
 E 
 
 19 40 
 
 s 
 
 63 12 
 
 E 
 
 1 4 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 23 6 
 
 N 
 
 113 2Q 
 
 
 012 
 
 N 
 
 108 30 
 
 
 48 
 
 N 
 
 120 39 
 
 
 4 11 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 39 
 
 N 
 
 105 2S 
 
 
 53 21 
 
 N 
 
 6 6 
 
 30W 
 
 
 
 Dui.kcn.]ue,
 
 ( i8 7 ) 
 
 Latitude. Longitudcv 
 
 R 
 R 
 T 
 R 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 R 
 R 
 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 
 R 
 R 
 K 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 
 Durkerque, Europe, France 
 
 ! urope, Fnnce 
 
 l-hmz ck, Europe, Poland . . 
 
 Dafii nd, Africa, CifFres 
 
 Dennis St. Af ica, Aland Bourbonne 
 
 Diego Cnpe, mc-rica, Terra del Fuego 
 
 Dijon, Ei I ...nee 
 
 Difiapointment Cape, America, South Georgia 
 
 )> flia a Cape, America, Terradcl Fuc^o 
 
 D 1'iui 
 I 1 n 
 
 :que , fie, France, VV ndwaru Ales 
 i urope, Ei gland 
 
 R ' pe, Englifh Channel 
 
 T Dui » nefs, Europe, England 
 T Dufltj Bay, Afia, New Zealand 
 
 E. 
 EaoowJfle, Pacific Ocean • . 
 
 EaftetTfland Pacific Ocean 
 Edyfton-, Euroj \ E igli Channel 
 Enauun Ifle, Afia, PaAfic Ocean 
 Engliih Road, Afia-, Laoowe 
 Enananga iile, Afia^ Pacific Ocean 
 Erzepum, Afia, Arm.nia 
 Eufl chia ["own, Ameriea, Carib Sea 
 
 \ v) s lfl< ■■, I erra del Feu .o 
 Engai o Ifl in '. near Straits of Sunda 
 
 Illand, near Bat via . • 
 
 Li. e HaiOour, illand Myfoli 
 
 F. 
 Ferdinando Noronha, South Atlantic Ocean 
 1' iarfhood Ifland, Ceylon 
 Fort St. David, Coail Coromandel 
 I rr.ofa Illand, South Point, Coall China 
 Fieewill Iflands, Pacific Ocean 
 Fio es No. th i uint, Azores 
 Faval, ditto 
 
 Ferro hland, Can res, the town 
 Cape r ineftre, Europe, ■[) in 
 Falmouth, Europe, England 
 Fal e Cape, Africa, Catfies 
 Falfe Bay. Africa, Caff res 
 Farewell Ca e, Aih, N\.-w Zealand 
 Fortt\ itu ... w.i :) part ot ifrica, Canaries 
 Foul Point, Africa, Madagafcar 
 Old Cape Fiancois, America, Hifpaniola 
 Friefland's Peak, America, Sandwich Land 
 i Iile, Africa, Gape Verd 
 , Vfrtca, Madiera 
 Furneaux Illand, Afia, Pacific Ocean 
 G. 
 
 R GafpCr Ifland Peak, nearBanca 
 
 R Goo . 1 !• , v- ( '.' ,i. ica 
 
 R U.t o, :- ' w Guinea 
 
 R Go.. Coait .' falai ..r • 
 
 R Greelivvichj ditto, England 
 
 SI 2 
 
 49 55 <7 
 54 22 N 
 23 2 J S 
 
 20 5' 43 S 
 
 54 33 s 
 
 47 19 22 N 
 
 54 58 S 
 
 55 4isS 
 15 18 23N 
 
 5 1 7 47 -^ 
 
 50 33 3° N 
 50 52 20 N 
 
 45 47 27 N 
 
 21 2.1 S 
 
 27 6 30 S 
 50 8 oN 
 
 20 10 S 
 
 21 20 30 S 
 18 46 30 s 
 
 39 56 3S N 
 17 29 N 
 
 55 34 3° s 
 5 35 S 
 5 56 S 
 
 2. 12 S 
 
 S 
 
 N 
 N 
 N 
 N 
 N 
 N 
 
 3 55 
 
 7 16 
 
 11 48 
 
 22 6 
 
 o 56 
 
 39 34 
 38 32 
 
 24 27 23 
 
 42 51 50N 
 
 50 8 o N 
 
 3+ l6 
 34 10 
 
 40 37 
 28 4 
 
 17 40 14 S 
 
 19 40 3 oN 
 59 2 o S 
 *4 56 45 :vJ 
 
 32 37 401N 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 s 
 
 N 
 
 17 11 
 2 27 
 
 34 2d 
 C II 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 51 ad 40 N 
 
 2 
 
 23 
 
 3°^ 
 
 I 
 
 5 
 
 E 
 
 18 
 
 33 
 
 37 E 
 
 18 
 
 2 
 
 E 
 
 55 
 
 30 
 
 E 
 
 °5 
 
 14 
 
 W 
 
 5 
 
 2 
 
 23 E 
 
 36 
 
 '5 
 
 W 
 
 74 
 
 18 
 
 \V 
 
 01 
 
 27 
 
 55W 
 
 1 
 
 18 
 
 30E 
 
 1 
 
 16 
 
 20 W 
 
 
 59 
 
 6E 
 
 166 
 
 18 
 
 9E 
 
 174 
 
 3° 
 
 w 
 
 109 
 
 46 45 VV 
 
 4 
 
 24 
 
 W 
 
 176 
 
 4 
 
 E 
 
 '7 + 
 
 34 
 
 W 
 
 169 
 
 18 
 
 30 E. 
 
 48 
 
 35 
 
 45 E 
 
 63 
 
 10 
 
 oW 
 
 6b 
 
 <;q 
 
 W 
 
 32 
 
 w 
 
 1 2.1 IO 
 
 137 O 
 
 E 
 E 
 W 
 28 41 W 
 
 17 44 38W 
 9 17 15W 
 5 2 30 VV 
 
 18 44 E 
 
 > E 
 
 Z c E 
 
 30 \V 
 
 E 
 
 W 
 
 18 33 
 
 172 41 
 
 14 3 1 
 
 49 53 
 
 70 2 
 
 : 1 55 3 oV/ 
 28 vv 
 1 7 6 W 
 143 4 ■ 
 
 r-7 4 ; ' : 
 
 1 53 6 E 
 45 E 
 
 o 
 
 Gon '
 
 ( 48S ) 
 
 Latitude. Longitude. 
 
 R Gomono IiTand, Pitts Paftage 
 
 R Uland de Gronais, Port Lqais 
 
 T Goree Ifland, Africa, Atlantic Oceaa 
 
 T Gaby, Alia, New Guinea 
 
 T St. Georges Ifle, Europe, Azores 
 
 T St. George Town, America, Bermudas, 
 
 T St. Georges Cape, Alia, New Britain 
 
 T Gibralter, Europe, Spain 
 
 T Gomera Me, Africa Canaries 
 
 D Goat Ifland near Luconia. 
 
 R Gillolo, NorthPoint, Molluca Paffage 
 
 R Gunongapic Peak, Straits Sapy 
 
 H. 
 R Le Havre, Europe, France 
 R Cape le Hogue, Europe, France 
 
 St. Helena Island, South Atlantic Ocear 
 Hanglip Cape, Africa, Caffrcs 
 Herveys Me, Afia, Pacific Ocean 
 Hinchinbroke llland, Alia, ditto 
 Hoai-Nghan, Afia, China 
 Hoods I lie, Alia, Pacific Ocean 
 Horn, Cape, Terra del Fuego 
 Howes Ifle, Alia, Pacific Ocean 
 Huahine Ifland, Alia, ditto 
 Haycock Ifland, Coaft of Borneo 
 
 R 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 11 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 T 
 T 
 
 T 
 
 R 
 R 
 D 
 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 
 Holy Spirit?, eafternmoft ditto 
 Hos Iflands, Straits Sunda 
 Hairedis Ifland near Bouton 
 
 I. 
 Java Head, weft end 
 Java, SE. end 
 
 "iilamabad, Bengal ... • 
 
 Judda, Red Sea 
 Rio Janeiro, America, Brazil 
 Iranami Iile, Alia, Pacific Ocean 
 Ifle of Pines, Afia, Pacific Ocean 
 
 K. 
 Kidgeree, Alii, India 
 Kanary Ifland, Pitt's Paffage _ . 
 
 Eannccoongan Point, Maccafar Strait 
 Ktnney Battoo, Borneo. 
 
 L. 
 Laclroiie Grand, Coaft of China 
 Lcma Grand, ditto 
 
 Lincoln Shoal ditto 
 
 Shoals to the eaftvva d of ditto 
 
 Lingen Ifland, eaft point 
 
 Linting, China River 
 
 Lulxck, Borneo Sea 
 
 Lucepara Ifland, Straits of Banca 
 
 Lord North llland, Pacific Ocean 
 
 Lagu las or Angml'as Cape, Africa 
 
 Laut, great 1 u!o, fouth Point 
 
 1 55 
 
 S 
 
 128 
 
 2 
 
 E 
 
 47 3S 
 
 oN 
 
 3 
 
 26 
 
 W 
 
 14 40 
 
 10N 
 
 17 
 
 25 
 
 W 
 
 6 
 
 S 
 
 126 
 
 2 Z 45 
 
 38 39 
 
 N 
 
 28 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 32 45 
 
 N 
 
 63 
 
 35 
 
 w 
 
 4 53 
 
 30 s 
 
 *53 
 
 8 
 
 45 
 
 36 5 
 
 30 N 
 
 5 
 
 22 
 
 W 
 
 28 5 40N 
 
 '7 
 
 8 
 
 W 
 
 "3 55 
 
 N 
 
 120 
 
 2 
 
 E 
 
 2 20 
 
 N 
 
 128 
 
 10 
 
 E 
 
 8 5 
 
 S 
 
 119 
 
 26 
 
 E 
 
 49 29 
 
 9N 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 E 
 
 49 44 40 
 
 1 
 
 56 
 
 W 
 
 15 56 
 
 S 
 
 5 
 
 49 
 
 W 
 
 3+ l6 
 
 s 
 
 18 
 
 44 
 
 E 
 
 19 17 
 
 s 
 
 x 5 « 48 
 
 W 
 
 17 25 
 
 s 
 
 168 
 
 38 
 
 E 
 
 33 34 
 
 40N 
 
 118 
 
 49 
 
 30 E 
 
 9 26 
 
 s 
 
 138 
 
 52 
 
 W 
 
 55 58 
 
 3° s 
 
 67 
 
 26 
 
 w 
 
 16 46 
 
 30 s 
 
 '54 
 
 6 
 
 40W 
 
 16 44 
 
 S 
 
 151 
 
 6 
 
 w 
 
 2 14 
 
 N 
 
 io 9 
 
 '5 
 
 E 
 
 1 3 
 
 N 
 
 io 7 
 
 57 
 
 E 
 
 5 5 2 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 122 
 
 55 
 
 E 
 
 6 48 
 
 s 
 
 105 
 
 9 
 
 E 
 
 8 39 
 
 s 
 
 114 40 
 
 E 
 
 22 20 
 
 N 
 
 9 1 
 
 55 
 
 E 
 
 21 29 
 
 N 
 
 39 
 
 22 
 
 E 
 
 22 54 
 
 S 
 
 42 
 
 44 
 
 oW 
 
 J 9 3 1 
 
 S 
 
 170 
 
 21 
 
 E 
 
 aa 38 
 
 s 
 
 167 
 
 38 
 
 E 
 
 2t 48 
 
 N 
 
 88 
 
 50 
 
 15 E 
 
 I 44 
 
 S 
 
 i-9 
 
 54 
 
 E 
 
 I 14 
 
 N 
 
 119 
 
 50 
 
 E 
 
 20 6 
 
 2N 
 
 nb 
 
 42 
 
 30 E 
 
 21 57 
 
 N 
 
 113 
 
 4i 
 
 E 
 
 22 3 
 
 N 
 
 114 
 
 14 
 
 E 
 
 l6 29 
 
 N 
 
 "3 
 
 10 
 
 E 
 
 '7 7 
 16 48 
 
 N 
 N 
 
 112 
 
 47 
 
 E 
 
 21 
 
 S 
 
 104 
 
 48 
 
 E 
 
 22 24 
 
 30N 
 
 
 
 
 5 49 
 
 s 
 
 1 12 
 
 40 
 
 E 
 
 3 » 2 
 
 20 S 
 
 106 
 
 6 
 
 E 
 
 3 7 
 
 oN 
 
 
 
 
 53 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 4- 
 
 s 
 
 117 
 
 24 
 
 
 Ditto,
 
 ( 4*9 ) 
 
 Laut, great, Pulo, NE point 
 Little Laut Ifland, northernmoft near Borneo 
 Ditto ditto, fouthernmoft ditto 
 
 Laguna, Tcnerift" 
 Lifbon, Europe, Portugal . 
 
 M. 
 R Maccao Town, China 
 
 R Macclesfield Bank, caftern edge, China Sea 
 R Ditto extreme latitude from 
 
 to 
 R Middleburg Shoal, China Sea 
 R Manilla, Jup. Sat. Ifland Luconia 
 D Mongalloom, Coaft of Borneo 
 R Monopin Hill, Ifland Banca 
 R Moncap, Pulo, Coaft of Borneo 
 R Motir Ifland, Moluccas . • 
 
 R Maragolang Illands, Straits of Macallar 
 R Morefles, near the fouth point of Borneo 
 R Middle Ifland, Saylayer Straits 
 R Mabo Cape, Ifland Battanta . 
 
 R Macafiar, Ifland Celebes 
 R Myfole Ifland, Pitt's Paffage 
 R Marrier Ifland, Pacific Ocean 
 R Matelotas Iflands ditto 
 R Madeira, Funchall, Atlantic Ocean 
 R Madras, Fort St. George 
 R Cape Mons 
 
 R Mauritius, Port Lewis, Indian Ocean 
 R St. Mary, Scilly, Engliih Channel 
 R Mafulipatnam, India 
 
 R Madagafcar, fouth point, Cape St. Mary 
 T Middleburg Ifle, Afia, Pacific Ocean 
 T Montague Ifle, Afia, ditto 
 
 T Monument, the, Afia, ditto 
 
 T Morgui, Afia, Siam • • 
 
 R Mayo Ifland, fouth point, Cape de Verdes 
 
 N. 
 R Natunas, the northernmoft, China Sea 
 
 R Notuna, grand, . . ditto 
 
 R Natunas, fouthernmoft ditto 
 
 R Ditto, eaft Ifland, . ditto 
 
 R Ditto, weft Ifland, . ditto 
 
 R Ditto, fouthernmoft, called Sapata, ditto 
 
 R Nanka Iflands, Straits of Banca 
 
 R New Ifland, near Java 
 
 R North Cape, Ifland Moratay, Pacific Ocean 
 
 R New Holland, NW point, Indian Sea 
 
 R New Holland, in Latitude 
 
 R Negrais Cape 
 
 R Nicobar, Great Ifland, 
 
 R Norfolk Ifland, South Pacific Ocean 
 
 R Negapatnam, Coaft of Coromandel . • 
 
 T Ningpo, Afia, China • 
 
 A x x 
 
 I. tit 
 
 ide. 
 
 Lo 
 
 ■ <?itu< r. 
 
 
 
 3 20 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 4 37 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 4 54 
 28 28 57 N 
 
 16 : 
 
 [8 
 
 W 
 
 38 42 25 N 
 
 9 
 
 9 59 vv 
 
 22 12 
 
 N 
 
 "3 : 
 
 3° 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 114 . 
 
 5 l 
 
 E 
 
 15 17 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 16 10 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 9 3 
 
 N 
 
 108 
 
 57 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 »4 3 6 
 
 N 
 
 120 
 
 53 
 
 6 10 
 
 N 
 
 115 
 
 37 3°5r 
 
 2 2 
 
 S 
 
 105 
 
 6 
 
 £. 
 
 3 3 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 3 37 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 4 2 3 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 5 39 
 
 s 
 
 120 
 
 48 
 
 E 
 
 57 
 
 s 
 
 130 
 
 49 
 
 E 
 
 5 9 
 
 s 
 
 119 
 
 48 
 
 45 E 
 
 1 54 
 
 s 
 
 129 55 : 
 
 30 E 
 
 4 17 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 8 35 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 3 2 3 8 
 
 3° 
 
 17 
 
 6 
 
 W 
 
 l 3 4 
 
 45 N 
 
 80 
 
 2 3 
 
 E 
 
 2 5 7 
 
 30N 
 
 65 
 
 49 
 
 E 
 
 20 9 45 S 
 
 57 
 
 29 
 
 E 
 
 49 57 
 
 N 
 
 6 
 
 43 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 Sr 
 
 16 
 
 E 
 
 26 27 
 
 - S 
 
 45 
 
 41 
 
 E 
 
 21 20 
 
 30 S 
 
 174 
 
 34 
 
 W 
 
 17 26 
 
 s 
 
 1 63 
 
 3 1 
 
 3 oE 
 
 17 14 
 
 15 s 
 
 168 
 
 .38 
 
 , 5 E 
 
 J 2 12 
 
 N 
 
 98 
 
 8 
 
 45 E 
 
 i S 6 
 
 N 
 
 n 
 
 10 
 
 \V 
 
 4 51 
 
 S 
 
 107 
 
 52 
 
 E 
 
 J4 12 
 is 58 
 
 S 
 
 108 
 
 14 
 
 E 
 
 s 
 
 108 
 
 
 E 
 
 3 3 
 
 
 109 
 
 9 
 
 E 
 
 2 42 
 
 s 
 
 109 41 
 
 E 
 
 2 44 
 
 s 
 
 108 
 
 54 
 
 E 
 
 2 28 
 
 s 
 
 i°, 
 
 14 
 
 E 
 
 2 30 
 
 s 
 
 105 
 
 41 
 
 E 
 
 10 47 
 
 s 
 
 121 
 
 32 
 
 E 
 
 2 38 
 
 N 
 
 122 
 
 53 
 
 E 
 
 21 6 
 
 s 
 
 "3 
 
 10 
 
 E 
 
 22 40 
 
 s 
 
 112 
 
 26 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 94 
 
 27 
 
 E 
 
 
 
 94 
 
 2( 
 
 E 
 
 29 1 
 
 45 S 
 
 108 
 
 IO 
 
 E 
 
 10 50 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 a 9 57. 
 
 45 N 
 
 120 
 
 18 
 
 E 
 Cape
 
 ( 49° ) 
 
 R 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 T 
 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 11 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 T 
 T 
 
 R 
 R 
 R 
 
 R 
 
 O. 
 
 Cape Ortagal, Europe, Spain 
 
 Oaitipeha Bay, Afia, Otaheite . . 
 
 Ochoz, Alia, Tartary 
 
 Ohamanino Harbour, Alia, Uliateah 
 
 Orenburg, Afia, Tartary 
 
 Orfk, Alia, Tartary . . . 
 
 Opporto, Europe, Portugal . , . 
 
 P. 
 Prater's Shoal, NE point, China Sea 
 Ditto, NW point, ditto 
 
 Ditto, SE point, ditto • . 
 
 Ditto, SW point, ditto 
 
 Ditto, Ifland , . ditto 
 
 * Peaked Ifland, Coaft of Borneo 
 
 * Purling or St. Barbes lflands, ditto . 
 Pifung Pulo, Pitt's Paff ge . 
 Popa Pulo, fouth point, ditto 
 
 Pater Nofters, the northernmoft, Straits Macaffar 
 Ditto, fouthernmoft ditto 
 
 P-'flier, Borneo .... 
 
 1\ lew or Peeloo Ifland, northernmoft, Pacific Ocean 
 Pelew Ifland, fouth point, northernmoft 
 Peak of Teneriffe, Canary Ifland . 
 
 Laguna, ditto 
 
 Palma, north point, ditto 
 
 Ditto, weft point, 
 
 Ditto, fouth point . • 
 
 Port Praya, St. Jago, Cape de Verd 
 
 Peak Fogo, ditto . • . 
 
 Pico Azoris, Europe 
 
 Point Palmiras, India < # • 
 
 Point de Gaul, Ifland Ceylon 
 
 Pondieherry, Coaft Coremandel 
 
 Pulo Pera, Straits Malacca . . 
 
 Pulo Verura or Verella, ditto 
 
 PuloPinang, ditto 
 
 St, Piere, weft coaft Borneo 
 
 St. Paul's Ifland, Indian Ocean 
 
 Pekin, City, China 
 
 Pars, Oblcrvatory, France 
 
 Point Pi dro, Iflani Ceylon •• • • 
 
 Porta Nova, Coaft of Coromandel 
 
 Palo Rondo, Straits of Malacca 
 
 r ( , Alia, New Zealand 
 : rgill's Harbour, Alia, ditto 
 
 Quiros Cape, Afia, New Hebrides ' . 
 Quito, Aid. Peru 
 
 R. 
 Ragged Point, eaftC. of Borneo 
 River's Ca]ie, north Co ft Gel< 
 io i '.' no, Coail Brazil, A::: 
 • merit:?. 
 Rochet , Europe, France . . • 
 
 Latitude 
 
 Longitude. 
 
 37 N 
 
 43 4-6 
 
 17 45 *5 s 
 59 20 10N 
 
 16 45 30 S 
 Si 46 
 
 N 
 
 51 12 30 
 41 10 
 
 N 
 N 
 
 N 
 N 
 N 
 N 
 N 
 
 S 
 N 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 N 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 57 N 
 
 15 
 o 
 o 
 
 N 
 N 
 
 40 N 
 N 
 N 
 
 55 N 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 30 N 
 
 l 5 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 S 
 
 27 s 
 
 14 56 8 S 
 o 13 17 S 
 
 2S 52 
 
 20 52 
 
 20 38 
 
 20 39 
 
 20 47 
 
 1 4 
 
 4 
 
 1 28 
 
 1 12 
 
 2 o 
 2 50 
 
 1 50 
 8 13 
 6 55 
 
 28 16 
 28 28 
 28 51 
 28 46 
 28 32 
 14 53 
 14 57 
 38 20 
 
 20 44 
 6 6 
 
 11 
 
 4i 
 
 5 43 
 
 3 
 
 48 
 
 5 
 
 24 
 
 2 
 
 14 
 
 37 
 
 5i 
 
 39 
 
 54 
 
 4 8- 
 
 5° 
 
 9 
 
 50 
 
 1 1 
 
 32 
 
 5 
 
 .57 
 
 4i 
 
 3« 
 
 45 47 
 
 25 
 ] 5 
 
 2 
 
 1 
 
 22 5 + 
 8 10 
 
 > 3 
 
 S 
 N 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 2IN 
 
 7 38 
 
 W 
 
 149 14 
 
 20W 
 
 143 12 
 
 30 E 
 
 151 38 
 
 5 W 
 
 55 9 
 
 30 E 
 
 58 32 
 
 30 E 
 
 8 27 
 
 10W 
 
 116 47 
 
 E 
 
 116 34 
 
 E 
 
 116 46 
 
 E 
 
 116 35 
 
 E 
 
 116 37 
 
 E 
 
 109 Q 
 
 E. 
 
 107 36 
 
 E 
 
 129 14 
 
 E 
 
 130 n 
 
 E 
 
 "33 45 
 133 20 
 
 1(5 35 
 
 16 18 
 
 17 48 
 
 18 4 
 
 *7 54 
 
 2 3 33 
 
 24 25 
 
 28 26 
 87 21 
 80 30 
 79 50 
 99 3 
 99 4i 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 31 W 
 
 XV 
 
 45 
 33W 
 
 45W 
 
 W 
 
 w 
 w 
 
 E 
 E 
 E 
 E 
 E 
 
 109 15 E 
 
 7 7 42 B 
 
 116 24 E 
 
 221 1 5 W 
 
 9? i4 
 175 23 12 i, 
 
 166 18 9 E 
 
 167 20 
 77 55 
 
 E 
 W 
 
 117 41 40 E 
 
 121 23 
 
 42 44 \v 
 
 3-5 35 w 
 
 j 9 55W 
 
 litort
 
 ( 491 ) 
 
 ' iuC. Eon 
 
 Rocbfurr, Europe, France 
 
 Rock of Lifban, Europe, Portugal 
 
 Rotterdam Ifland, Alia, Batavia 
 
 S. 
 R Sapata Pulo, China Sea 
 
 R Scarborough Shoal, ditto 
 
 R Soolo Tcmontanges, Archipelago . 
 
 R Soolo, Tulyan 
 
 R Soloan Ifland, near Samar 
 
 R Seven Iflands, near Banka . . 
 
 R Sanga, Boola Bay, Ifland Banka 
 
 R Shoal Water Ifland, to fouthward ofBillitore 
 
 R Ditto, ditto .... 
 
 R St. Michael's Shoals and Iflands", Mendbro Sea 
 
 R Sumatra, fouth point, Straits Banka 
 
 R Souroutow, north part, Carimata PaiTage 
 
 R St. Clement's Bank ditto 
 
 R Solomba Great, Borneo Sea 
 
 R Solomba Little, ditto 
 
 R Sulatan Point, foutb Cape, Borneo 
 
 R Seven Iflands, Straits of Macaflar 
 
 R Sanguay or Sanger Iflands, north point, Sooloo Sea 
 
 R Semao Ifland, fouth point, near Timor 
 
 Pv Siao Ifland, fouth point, SoolooSea 
 
 R Sumb;.\va Iiland, fouthweft end, Indian Sea 
 
 R Ditto, fouth eaft end 
 
 R Salayer Island, north point, Straits of Salayer 
 
 R St. Johns Ifland, north end, near Magtndanao 
 
 R Savu Ifland, middle between Timor and Sandlevvoodlfl 
 
 R Savu New Ifland, to wefhvard of Savu 
 
 R South Ifland, Straits of Bouton. 
 
 R Salibo':o Iflands, SoolooSea . 
 
 R St. David's Iflands, Pacific Ocean 
 
 R St. Joannes Iflands, ditto 
 
 R Sandlewood Ifland, fouth part, near Straits of S 
 
 R Dit o, the weftermoft or bluff point of ditto 
 
 R Salvages Iflands, Canary Iiland 
 
 R Cape Spartel, Coaft Africa 
 
 R Speaker Bank,- Indian Ocean . < 
 
 R Suiat, India 
 
 R Start Foint, Europe, England 
 
 Sandwich Ifland, Alia, Pacific Ocean 
 Cape St. Sebaftian, Africa, Madagafcar 
 
 T Shepherd's Iflcs, Alia, Pacific. Ocean 
 
 T Siam, .Alia, India . • 
 
 T Srngham-fu, Aba, China . . 
 
 T. 
 
 R Timoan Ifland, north point, China Sea 
 
 R Tinho/.a Iiland, C. of Haynan 
 
 * Taya Ifland, near Banka . 
 
 * Toty Pulo, ditto 
 
 * Table Iiland, weft Coaft of Borneo 
 
 X X X 2 
 
 46 2 
 
 
 
 
 5 3 24W 
 
 • 38 45 
 
 30 N 
 
 9 35 
 
 
 20 ic> 
 
 3° s 
 
 17+ 
 
 3^ 
 
 
 10 r 
 
 30 N 
 
 10S 
 
 55 
 
 H 
 
 H 58 
 and 15 30 
 
 N 
 
 N 
 
 116 
 
 45 
 
 E 
 
 5 57 
 
 N 
 
 17.0 
 
 53 
 
 
 5 57 
 
 N 
 
 121 
 
 14 
 
 
 . 10 49 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 1 10 
 and 1 26 
 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 *°s 
 
 8 
 
 E 
 
 1 43 4 
 
 105 
 
 21 
 
 E 
 
 3 22 
 
 3° *> 
 
 107 
 
 12 
 
 E 
 
 3 20 
 
 3° 
 
 107 
 
 *3 
 
 '5'.- 
 
 • 7 37 
 
 S 
 
 n3 
 
 3 1 
 
 E 
 
 2 59 40 S 
 
 105 
 
 56 
 
 E 
 
 1 38 
 
 s 
 
 108 
 
 43 
 
 E 
 
 3 ° 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 5 28 
 
 S 
 
 114 
 
 29 
 
 E 
 
 5 I2 
 
 s 
 
 114 24 
 
 !. 
 
 4 9 
 
 s 
 
 "5 42 
 
 E 
 
 3° 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 Sea 3 43 
 
 N 
 
 I2J 
 
 V 
 
 E 
 
 10 15 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 2 35 
 
 N 
 
 I2 5 
 
 3 1 
 
 E 
 
 8 49 
 
 S 
 
 116 
 
 18 
 
 E 
 
 8 33 
 
 s 
 
 119 
 
 3° 
 
 E 
 
 5 49 
 
 s 
 
 120 
 
 46 
 
 
 8 21 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 odlfl.io 35 
 
 s 
 
 122 
 
 30 
 
 E 
 
 10 47 
 
 S 
 
 121 
 
 S 2 
 
 E 
 
 . 5 46 
 
 s 
 
 122 
 
 55 
 
 E 
 
 3 48 
 
 N 
 
 126 
 
 1 
 
 E 
 
 1 10 
 
 N 
 
 r 34 3 
 
 E 
 
 6 48 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 npy 10 22 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 9 42 
 
 s 
 
 119 
 
 IS 
 
 E 
 
 • 30 8 
 
 N 
 
 16 
 
 9 
 
 W 
 
 • 35 42 
 
 roN 
 
 5 54 
 
 W 
 
 4 45 
 
 s 
 
 72 
 
 57 
 
 E 
 
 21 10 
 
 N 
 
 72 
 
 22 
 
 L 
 
 50 9 
 
 N 
 
 
 
 
 
 5i 
 
 15 W 
 
 • 17 41 
 
 S 
 
 168 
 
 33 
 
 E. 
 
 12 30 
 
 S 
 
 46 
 
 25 
 
 E 
 
 16 58 
 
 s 
 
 1 63 
 
 42 
 
 E 
 
 14 18 
 
 N 
 
 100 
 
 5° 
 
 E 
 
 34 16 
 
 30 N 
 
 108. 
 
 43 45 E 
 
 3 
 
 N 
 
 104 
 
 16 
 
 E 
 
 18 43 
 
 N 
 
 no 
 
 36 
 
 E 
 
 ° 45 
 
 S 
 
 
 
 
 58 
 
 S 
 
 105 
 
 34 
 
 E 
 
 52 
 
 N 
 
 109 
 
 2 
 
 E 
 
 Table
 
 ( 49 2 ) 
 
 * Table Ifland, the fouthermoft Ifland, near it 
 R Ternate, Principal Molucca 
 R Tidore, ditto . . , 
 
 R Tryal Rocks, Dan. account, India Sea 
 
 R Dutch account, ditto 
 
 R Tonyn's Iflands, fouthermoft, near Salayer 
 
 R Timor Laut, fouth point, Banda Sea . . 
 
 R Timor Ifland, fouth point, eaft part of Indian Sea 
 
 T Table Ifland', Afia, New Hebrides 
 
 T T.anna, Afia, Pacific Ocean 
 
 T Taoukaa lfle, Afia, Pacific Ocean 
 
 T Temontcngis, Alia, Sooloo . . 
 
 T Tonga Tabu Ifland, Alia, Pacific Ocean 
 
 T- Turtle Ifland, Pacific Ocean 
 
 U. 
 T Uliateah, Afia, Pacific Ocean . . 
 
 T Ufliant, Europe, France 
 
 V. 
 R Vele Rete Rock, near Formofa 
 R Vanfittart's Rock, near Banka 
 R Vanfittart's Wreck, Ifland, near Banca 
 
 W. 
 T Whitfuntide lfle, Pacific Ocean 
 R Wampea Town, China . . 
 
 R Fort William, Afia, Bengal 
 R South Watcher, near Batavia 
 R Weywongey, Body of Pitt's Paffage 
 R Winecooper's Point, Ifland Java 
 R North Watcher, near Straits Sunda . 
 
 X. 
 R XullaBeffy, Fouth Point, Pitt's Paffage 
 
 Y. 
 
 R Yowl Ifland, near Weyoogee . '*■ 
 
 Latitude. 
 
 Longitude. 
 
 44 N 
 
 108 54 E 
 
 54 N 
 
 127 31 E 
 
 43 N 
 
 127 37 E 
 
 20 40 S 
 
 19 30 s 
 
 120 50 E 
 
 6 47 S 
 
 120 50 E 
 
 8 15 S 
 
 13 1 5° E 
 
 10 23 S 
 
 124 55 E 
 
 15 38 s 
 
 167 7 E 
 
 19 32 25 s 
 
 169 41 E 
 
 14 30 30 s 
 
 145 9 30 W 
 
 5 57 N 
 
 120 53 30E 
 
 2.1 9 S 
 
 174 46 W 
 
 19 48 45 s 
 
 177 57 W 
 
 16 41; s 
 
 151 31 W 
 
 48 28 30 N 
 
 5 4 33 w 
 
 21 45 N 
 
 121 8 E 
 
 2 11 24 s 
 
 106 44 E 
 
 2. 9 6 S 
 
 106 19 E 
 
 15 44 20 S 
 
 168 20 15 E 
 
 23 5 45 N 
 
 
 22 34 45 N 
 
 88 29 30 E 
 
 5 4i 45 s 
 
 106 42 43 E 
 
 4 3 s 
 
 
 7 28 S 
 
 106 32 E 
 
 5 12 30 S 
 
 106 27 E 
 
 2 28 s 
 
 126 25 30 E 
 
 50 N 
 
 
 22 N 
 
 
 LATITUDES
 
 ( 493 ) 
 
 Latitudes and Lon- 
 gitudes with the Va- 
 riations of the Compafs 
 obferved en a Pajfage 
 from Bombay to Eng- 
 land in the Spring of 
 1784, through the Mo- 
 sambique Channel, 
 along the SE. Co a ft of 
 Africa, to the Cape of 
 Good Hope and home 
 to the Channel. 
 
 Variation 
 
 i? 3 6'W 
 3 lr 
 
 5 43 
 
 6 30 
 
 % 30 
 9 4i 
 
 36 
 ?6 
 
 11 
 
 *3 
 '4 
 
 17 18 
 19 24 
 
 19 58 
 21 52 
 
 25 14 
 
 26 17 
 2 5 55 
 
 2 5 34 
 
 26 30. 
 24 40 
 24 24 
 24 22 
 
 20 44 
 20 36 
 17 c 7 
 16 40 
 J 3 45 
 '3 2 7 
 12 13 
 1 1 
 
 9 
 
 1 1 00 
 9 02 
 7 00 
 
 7 3& 
 
 8 24 
 
 2 3 
 
 58 
 
 18 
 
 1 
 
 18 2-, 
 
 ■ 
 
 24 4i 
 
 »4 3° 
 
 T nt. 
 
 >3 
 8 
 6 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 5 i'N 
 
 39 
 3° 
 
 5° 
 45 
 44 
 on line 
 
 3 -°' S 
 
 ;i 
 12 
 
 40 
 
 30 
 29 
 
 '5 
 
 '5 
 
 Long. 
 
 67?Or)E 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 10 
 
 12 
 
 14 
 2 1 
 22 
 
 »3 
 
 26 
 
 3° 
 
 5° 
 '3 
 
 65 
 *53 
 
 57 
 54 
 52 
 5« 
 47 
 45 
 45 
 4 1 
 
 4_I 
 
 T 
 
 4 1 
 37 
 3 b 
 35 
 32 
 
 2 9 
 
 5o 
 
 12 
 
 15 
 ■5 
 2 7 
 00 
 
 5 1 
 43 
 30 
 22 
 16 
 :o 
 40 
 
 50 
 6 
 
 34 57 
 34 19 
 
 34 
 
 2 
 
 '3 
 
 12 
 
 47 
 39 
 20 
 
 45 
 54 
 45 
 '5 
 20 
 
 58 
 26 
 
 9 
 
 7 
 
 5 
 
 1 
 
 6 
 12 
 22 
 24 
 36 
 
 40 
 50 14 
 50 00 
 49 00 
 
 20'N 
 
 00 
 
 34 
 00 
 20 
 
 5° 
 
 J 4 
 
 '5 
 iS 
 
 22, 
 
 2 7 
 33 
 34 
 
 13 
 55 
 
 3° 
 
 8 
 
 i 
 
 55 
 30 
 
 38 c° 
 
 37 3 6 
 
 38 00 
 1 t 30 
 
 9 3° 
 5 '5 
 
 3 1 
 
 3' 
 
 22 
 
 33 
 
 23 
 
 30 
 
 22 
 
 33 
 
 IC 
 
 40 
 
 8 
 
 12 
 
 6 
 
 30 • 
 
 4 4 
 
 8 
 
 04'W 
 
 10 
 
 00 
 
 ] 2 
 
 15 
 
 Latitudes and Longitudes with the Variations of 
 the Compafs, obfervedin the Spring of the Tear 1788, 
 in a Voyage to the Coaft of Gvim a, in His Majeftfs 
 Ship Adventure. 
 
 Variation Lat. 
 
 24-5' 
 20 47 
 
 19 21 
 
 17 17 
 
 17 17 
 
 19 32 
 
 ,8 23 
 
 17 12 
 
 '5 43 
 15 09 
 
 '3 35 
 14 42 
 
 w 
 
 12 
 1 - 
 12 
 
 1 1 
 r 5 
 
 14 
 
 16 
 16 
 
 3 5 
 J 7 
 '7 
 16 2S 
 
 '7 
 °3 
 
 2 ■» 
 
 38 
 12 
 
 16 31 
 
 l6 2j 
 
 15 '7 
 
 15 32 
 14 26 
 14 29 
 1232 
 12 1 2 
 
 4= : 
 35 
 33 
 3 2 
 3 1 
 3 1 
 3° 
 
 '4HMN 
 52 
 3 2 
 3° 
 38 
 00 
 00 
 
 Long. 
 
 12^40'VV 
 
 x 5 33 
 16 20 
 16 30 
 
 l6 2£ 
 l6 13 
 l6 12 
 
 at anchor in St. Cruz 
 RoadfniflandTheneriff 
 
 2 4 ?S3'N i6?i 7 'W 
 
 58 
 15 
 
 49 
 
 2 2 
 
 14 
 2 7 
 
 3° 
 
 24 06 
 20 07 
 16 30 
 14 50 
 
 1 1 
 9 
 9 
 7 
 
 5 
 
 5" 
 
 38 
 
 00 
 
 57 
 46 
 
 06 
 
 38 
 46 
 
 °3 
 
 4 
 4 
 5 
 
 5 °7 
 5 00 
 
 4 S7 
 
 16 32 
 
 1 7 35 
 '7 35 
 17 58 
 r8 a 5 
 
 r 7 53 
 
 r 7 3i 
 16 25 
 10 37 
 
 8 24 
 5° 
 
 57 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 5 i5 
 4 3 6 
 3 24 
 
 2 48 
 
 {? 
 
 ffCape 
 
 almas. 
 
 
 f in Comind Foi t in 
 [ Cape Coaft Calile 
 
 3 02'N 2?qo'W 
 
 40 10 00 
 
 1 32 13 00 
 1 40 14 03 
 3 CI '5 '7 
 3 13 «S 17 
 
 ppolc.iia 
 Read. 
 
 Var 
 
 lation 
 
 Lat. 
 
 i 3 ?3o'W 
 
 '3 
 
 5 f > 
 
 14 
 
 19 
 
 '3 
 
 13 
 
 35 
 28 
 
 '3 
 12 
 
 02 
 28 
 
 12 
 
 1 1 
 
 j 1 
 
 CO 
 
 12 
 
 28 
 
 12 
 
 1 1 
 10 
 
 '3 
 
 36 
 
 58 
 
 9 
 Q 
 S 
 
 33 
 1 3 
 
 32 
 
 7 
 
 43 
 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 33 
 
 08 
 
 H 
 
 20 
 
 II 
 
 12 
 
 12 
 12 
 
 1 I 
 
 2 3 
 
 35 
 
 24 
 
 17 
 
 18'N 
 34 
 4 £ 
 14 
 
 5 35 
 
 45 
 54 
 18 
 
 '5 
 06 
 
 24 
 46 
 
 8 33 
 
 9 °4 
 
 9 53 
 
 11 ii 
 
 12 44 
 
 15 49 
 
 20 08 
 
 23 30 
 
 24 06 
 
 25 11 
 
 2 5 47 
 
 26 22 
 
 27 iS 
 
 Long. 
 
 15 2 + 
 
 >5 3 2 
 
 16 06 
 
 iG 48 
 
 >7 
 
 17 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 19 05 
 
 20 ij 
 2 5 
 
 22 
 
 5 ^ 
 
 °3 
 
 23 
 
 30 
 
 2 : 
 2 4 
 
 27 15. 
 23 10 
 29 08 
 3' «3 
 
 1 3 
 
 49 
 
 ; ; 
 
 36 
 
 12 
 
 42 
 
 28 
 
 22 
 
 13 
 
 21 
 
 2) 
 
 i) 
 
 14 
 
 37 
 
 31 
 
 1 2 
 
 i; 
 
 5« 
 
 S 2 
 
 23 
 
 lb 
 
 09 
 
 31 
 
 20 
 
 19 
 
 00 
 
 3 5 
 
 30 
 
 18 
 
 1 1 
 
 36 
 
 14 
 
 >7 
 
 c > 
 
 
 *< 
 
 3' 
 .3i 
 
 3i 
 
 3 1 
 
 3- 
 
 3 2 
 
 3° 55 
 
 - ; 
 
 -"; ' ; 
 
 3° 
 
 CO 
 
 17 
 
 37 
 44 
 -4 
 
 • r 
 
 = 4 
 
 23 
 23 
 23 
 
 2 3 
 13 
 34 
 
 ■ 
 20 
 20 
 
 3 1 36 30 2j 16 
 
 Latitotie*
 
 ( 49+ ) 
 
 Latitudes and Longitudes with the Variations 
 of the Compafs, obferved on board His Majejiys 
 Ship Marlborough, from November 1790 to 
 February 1791, iti a Voyage to Barbadoes. 
 
 Variation 
 
 Lat. 
 
 Long. 
 
 Variation 
 
 Lat. 
 
 Long. 
 
 22? 3 /\V 
 
 40S 
 
 46'N 
 
 u?c,8'W 
 
 1? 19'E 
 
 i3?i3'N 
 
 SS ?22'W 
 
 22 02 
 
 39 
 
 08 
 
 13 10 
 
 2 03 
 
 13 .12 
 
 c6 14 
 
 2i 53 
 
 36 38 
 
 14 10 
 
 211 
 
 13 04 
 
 57,5° 
 
 i y \j z 
 
 3 1 
 
 'S 
 
 
 . * r\ 
 
 
 
 1,7 23 
 
 28 
 
 57 
 
 20 43 
 
 O 58 
 
 iS 44 
 
 59 c 4 
 
 17 52 
 
 28 
 
 03 
 
 21 IO 
 
 4 3| • 
 
 17 21 
 
 59 " 
 
 17 28 
 
 27 
 
 53 
 
 21 23 
 
 i8§W 
 
 21 50 
 
 60 22 
 
 16 49 
 
 *S 
 
 34 
 
 21 20 
 
 1 00 , 
 
 24 14 
 
 61 30 
 
 17 l6 § 
 
 2 3 
 
 09 
 
 23 2 7 
 
 21 
 
 25 20 
 
 61 57 
 
 17 41 
 
 »3 
 
 C2 
 
 2 3 37 
 
 31 
 
 26 08 
 
 6; 25 
 
 14 46 
 
 22 
 
 2 2 
 
 25 01 
 
 1 28 
 
 20 28 
 
 61 23 
 
 14 44 
 
 21 
 
 26 
 
 26 00 
 
 3 3° 
 
 2S 44 
 
 6j 00 
 
 11 16 
 
 18 
 
 2 7 
 
 29 22 
 
 6 oS 
 
 32 28 
 
 55 ' 6 
 
 9 49 
 
 17 
 
 = 4 
 
 3 1 3- 
 
 8 14 
 
 33 h 
 
 5 1 57 
 
 9 23 
 
 16 
 
 43 
 
 34 09 
 
 10 55 
 
 34 °4 
 
 47 20 
 
 6 3 3 
 
 16 
 
 18 
 
 37 2? 
 
 14 20 
 
 34 S& 
 
 39 2(5 
 
 4 47 
 
 J 5 
 
 56 
 
 40 20 
 
 14 56 
 
 35 58 
 
 38 06 
 
 3 *7 
 
 '5 
 
 34- 
 
 43 oS 
 
 16 44 
 
 37 J 9 
 
 3 6 5 8 
 
 2 10 
 
 15 
 
 18 
 
 45 °° 
 
 18 14 
 
 34 58 
 
 3 2 44 
 
 1 48 
 
 >S 
 
 00 
 
 47 43 
 
 22 39 
 
 42 41 
 
 28 18 
 
 4+ 
 
 s 4 
 
 42 . 
 
 50 30 
 
 22 17 
 
 43 45 
 
 26 40 
 
 C5'£ 
 
 14 
 
 06 
 
 5- 4» 
 
 24 19 
 
 4& J 3 
 
 19 07 
 
 V 
 
 Variations obferved in different 
 Parts in the English and 
 Irish Channels, in the 
 Tears 1790 and 1 791. 
 
 C CluikPoint 
 25? r6' S ''\V 5 2?S'3o"n] nearWa- 
 
 f Cove of 
 51 50 32 i Cork near 
 
 I the Fort. 
 
 [ Tar Point 
 50 23 00 J near Ply. 
 
 [ mouth. 
 ci 16 Downs. 
 
 f Gilk ; ckcr 
 
 J Point iic.'.f 
 
 I Goiport. 
 
 26 43 15 
 
 24 56 02 
 
 22 48 3 6 
 
 23 55 45 
 
 5° 47 
 
 The above Variations were obferved by myfelf in the different Voyages 
 fpecified, preceding the Obfervations, the Longitudes were carefully afcertained 
 by Lunar Obfervations, and intermediately by Time pieces, and wherever the 
 Longitudes are omitted, the Variations were obferved on more, except in Santa 
 Cruz Road, in the Ifland of Teneriffe, where both Latitude and Longitude has 
 been well afcertained, thecf->ing place in the Ifland of Afceniion lies in Latitude 
 7? 5 8'S. Longitude r 4? 1 3W. by Lunar Obfervation, the Variation in 1784, 
 en with great care was 1 1° 35'W. 
 
 CHARLES ROBERTS, Royal Navy. 
 
 OtSKR VAl 10NI
 
 ( 495 ) 
 
 OsseR-v ations of the Variation »/ ;fe Compass near Land; communicated to the Editor 
 by feveral Commanders and Officers in the Service of the Honourable United 
 East-India Company. 
 
 1776. \t Afcenfion Ifle, in the Southern 
 Ethiopic Ocean. Variation 10? 45' W. 
 
 1776. At St. Auguftin's Bay, in Madagafcar 
 Lie. Variation 23? 30' \V. 
 
 1774. At Chriitova Ifle, between Madagafcar 
 
 and the Fait Co.ift o> Africa. Variation 21? to'W. 
 
 1773. At Porto Sanc"to Ifle, in the At'.. . 
 Ocean. Variation 17? 1 5' \V. 
 
 1773. At Kelay Ifle, in the Indian Ocean, 
 off the Malar Coaft. Variation :? 14' W. 
 
 Af 
 
 1776. At Mofambiqne, on the Eaft Coaft of 
 iica. Variation 22? o ... 
 
 3774. At Chriftmas Ifle, in the Indian Ocean. 
 Variation 2? 5a' \V. 
 
 177ft At Cape Gool Hope, the South Point 
 of Africa." Variation 21? o'. 
 
 1776. At Goa, on the Malabar Coaft, in the 
 Eaft-Indies. Variation o? o.' 
 
 177;. At Bourbon Ifle, in the Indian Ocean, 
 Variation 1 3? 22 \\ . 
 
 1767. At Bonavifta Ifle, one of the Cape de 
 Verde Iflands. Variation 10? so' W. 
 
 177J. At the Gre.it B.iffis, off the Ifland 
 Ceylon. Variation 1? 28' E 
 
 1769. Off Cape Frio, near the Ccaft t>f 
 South America. Variation 8? 40' W. 
 
 1760. At Flores, the weftemmoft of the 
 Azor Iflands. Variation 12? 53'W. 
 
 1776. At St. Helena, in the Southern Ethiopic 
 Ocean. Variation 13? 15' U r . 
 
 1769. At St. Jago, one of the Cape de Verde 
 Iflands. Variation 11? 10' W. 
 
 1773. At Cape Infant, on the South Coaft 
 of Afric 1. Variation 24? 50' W. 
 
 1774. At Joanna, one of the Comero Iflands. 
 Variation 19? 22' \V. 
 
 17-6. At Cape Lagullas, the Southernmoft 
 Cape of Africa. Variation 21? 40' W. 
 
 1-76. Off Cape Natal, on the South Coaft of 
 Africa. Variation 2^ 3 -''■>. 
 
 1774. At the Iflands St. Paul and Amfterdam, 
 hern Part of the Indian 0:e.;n. 
 tion 20? c 
 
 1768. At Mauritius Ifle, in the Indian Ocean. 
 Variation 13? ;i'W. 
 
 '//*• At fi. Matthew's tfte, near the 
 
 Equinoctial, in the Ethiopic Ocean. Variation 
 
 7? 24' W. 
 
 1 773. At Mayotta, one of the Comero Iflands. 
 Variation iS? 34' \V. 
 
 1,772. At the Ifland Rodrigucs, in the Indian 
 Ocean. Variation ic? 37' \V. 
 
 1776. At Cape Talhado, near Blaife B.y, 
 on the South Coaft of Africa. Vari 
 22? 3o'W. 
 
 1776. At Triftan de Acunha Ifles, in the 
 Southern Ocean. Variation 5? o'W. 
 
 1772. At Table Bay at Cape Good Hope. 
 Variation 20? 40'W. 
 
 1773. At Teneriffe, one of the Canary Iflands. 
 
 Variation lb? 2 o'W. 
 
 7763. At Trinidada Ifle, off the Coaft of 
 Brazil, in South America. Variation o? 37' E. 
 
 1776. At Saldanha Bay, near Cape Good 
 i _>n 21? o W. 
 
 1776, At the Ifland of S..!, one of the Cape 
 de Verde Iflands. Variation 1 1? 23"-. . . 
 
 :5 'V, 
 
 At the Straits of Sunda. Variation 
 
 1773. At Sandy Ifland, off St. ' tine's 
 Bay, ' n 24? i 
 
 1776. e de V 
 
 13? 50 W. 
 
 Varia 
 
 I N
 
 M
 
 University of California 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 
 
 305 De Neve Drive - Parking Lot 17 • Box 951388 
 
 LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA 90095-1388 
 
 Return this material to the library from which it was borrowed. 
 
 Form 

 
 \zs\ 6 vr/\ 
 
 *p° 
 
 Vt~ ) 
 
 UC SOUTHERN REGIONAL UBBAfiy 
 
 D 000 326 557 6 
 
 
 
 ?A* 
 
 ^5V
 
 
 
 Univer 
 Sou 
 U